You are on page 1of 716

TOTALPAGES:716

(includingcover)

ProyekPembangunanSPAMIPAWaribang

DenpasarBali
PROJECTNO.:41116T011


InstrumentInstallationProcedures

YINDOC.NO.:WRBPP003
CUSTOMERDOC.NO.:



PT.ADHIKARYA CIPTAKARYA,PUPROVINSIBALI

PT.YOKOGAWAINDONESIA

PO/CONTRACTNO.:

REV.NO.
A APPROVED



B APPROVEDWITHCOMMENT

C NOTAPPROVED


PLEASERETURNONECOPYWITHYOURSIGNAGAINSTTHESTATUSOFTHEAPPROVALDOCUMENT

ThisdocumentisthepropertyofCOMPANY.Itmustnotbestored,reproducedordisclosedto
otherscompletelyorinparts,withoutwrittenauthorizationfromtheCOMPANY.


Rev. Date Description Preparedby Checkedby Approvedby
00 01Sept2016 ForApproval HaryadiW RickiS






ProyekPembangunanSPAMIPAWaribang
DenpasarBali

Doc.Title:InstrumentInstallationProcedures Rev:0

Doc.No:WRBPP003 Page:2of716

TABULATIONOFREVISEDPAGES
REVISION REVISION
SHEET SHEET
A B C 1 2 3 10 A B C 1 2 3 10
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

xxx




















ATTACHMENT/APPENDIX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

ThisdocumentisthepropertyofCOMPANY.Itmustnotbestored,reproducedordisclosedtoothers
completelyorinparts,withoutwrittenauthorizationfromtheCOMPANY.

ProyekPembangunanSPAMIPAWaribang
DenpasarBali

Doc.Title:InstrumentInstallationProcedures Rev:0

Doc.No:WRBPP003 Page:3of716

DESCRIPTIONOFCHANGE

Rev. Date Description












ThisdocumentisthepropertyofCOMPANY.Itmustnotbestored,reproducedordisclosedtoothers
completelyorinparts,withoutwrittenauthorizationfromtheCOMPANY.

ProyekPembangunanSPAMIPAWaribang
DenpasarBali

Doc.Title:InstrumentInstallationProcedures Rev:0

Doc.No:WRBPP003 Page:4of716

TABLEOFCONTENTS
TABULATIONOFREVISEDPAGES.......................................................................................................2
DESCRIPTIONOFCHANGES................................................................................................................3
TABLEOFCONTENT...........................................................................................................................4
1. InstrumentInstallationProcedures
1.1 InstructionManualforPressureTransmitter.....................................................................5
1.2 InstructionManualforMagneticFlowmeter.....................................................................68
1.3 InstructionManualforpHAnalyzer....................................................................................159
1.4 InstructionManualforTurbidity.........................................................................................435
1.5 InstructionManualforChlorineAnalyzerandResidualChlorineAnalyzer........................516
1.6 InstructionManualforWaterLevelSensor........................................................................623
1.7 InstructionManualforStreamCurrentMonitor................................................................686

ThisdocumentisthepropertyofCOMPANY.Itmustnotbestored,reproducedordisclosedtoothers
completelyorinparts,withoutwrittenauthorizationfromtheCOMPANY.

1.1InstructionManualforPressureTransmitter
ApplicableModel Area
EJA530EJBS7N019DN/A/D3/HE INTAKE
EJA530EJBS7N019DN/A/D3/HE PRASEDIMENTASI
EJA530EJBS7N019DN/A/D3/HE RESERVOIRIPA
Users
Manual
Absolute Pressure and
Gauge Pressure Transmitters
EJ510, EJ530,
EJX610A and EJX630A
IM 01C25F01-01E

IM 01C25F01-01E
13th Edition
i

Absolute Pressure and Gauge Pressure Transmitters


EJ510, EJ530, EJX610A and EJX630A

IM 01C25F01-01E 13th Edition

Contents
1. Introduction................................................................................................ 1-1
Regarding This Manual................................................................................................. 1-1
Trademarks ................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1 Safe Use of This Product ................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Warranty.............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3 ATEX Documentation........................................................................................ 1-4
2. Handling Cautions..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Model and Specifications Check...................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Unpacking........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Storage................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.4 Selecting the Installation Location ................................................................. 2-1
2.5 Pressure Connection......................................................................................... 2-2
2.6 Waterproofing of Cable Conduit Connections............................................... 2-2
2.7 Restrictions on Use of Radio Transceivers.................................................... 2-2
2.8 Insulation Resistance and Dielectric Strength Test....................................... 2-2
2.9 Installation of an Explosion-Protected Instrument........................................ 2-3
2.9.1 FM Approval........................................................................................ 2-4
2.9.2 CSA Certification................................................................................. 2-6
2.9.3 ATEX Certification............................................................................... 2-8
2.9.4 IECEx Certification............................................................................ 2-12
2.10 EMC Conformity Standards............................................................................ 2-15
2.11 Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)............................................................ 2-16
2.12 Safety Requirement Standards...................................................................... 2-16
3. Component Names................................................................................... 3-1
4. Installation.................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Precautions ....................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Mounting ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.3 Rotating Transmitter Section............................................................................ 4-2
4.4 Changing the Direction of Integral Indicator ................................................. 4-2

13th Edition: July 2015 (YK) IM 01C25F01-01E


All Rights Reserved, Copyright 2004, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ii
5. Installing Impulse Piping.......................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Impulse Piping Installation Precautions......................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Connecting Impulse Piping to a Transmitter....................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Routing the Impulse Piping................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Impulse Piping Connection Examples............................................................ 5-2
6. Wiring.......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Wiring Precautions............................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Selecting the Wiring Materials.......................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Connections of External Wiring to Terminal Box........................................... 6-1
6.3.1 Power Supply Wiring Connection....................................................... 6-2
6.3.2 External Indicator Connection............................................................ 6-2
6.3.3 Communicator Connection................................................................. 6-2
6.3.4 Check Meter Connection.................................................................... 6-2
6.3.5 Status Output Connection................................................................... 6-3
6.4 Wiring.................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.4.1 Loop Configuration............................................................................. 6-3
6.4.2 Wiring Installation................................................................................ 6-4
6.5 Grounding........................................................................................................... 6-5
6.6 Power Supply Voltage and Load Resistance.................................................. 6-5
7. Operation.................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Preparation for Starting Operation.................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Zero Point Adjustment...................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 Starting Operation............................................................................................. 7-3
7.4 Shutting Down the Transmitter........................................................................ 7-3
7.5 Local Parameter Setting.................................................................................... 7-3
7.5.1 Local Parameter Setting (LPS) Overview........................................... 7-4
7.5.2 Activating Local Parameter Setting.................................................... 7-5
7.5.3 Parameter Setting Review.................................................................. 7-5
7.5.4 Tag Number Configuration.................................................................. 7-6
7.5.5 Pressure Unit Configuration............................................................... 7-6
7.5.6 Pressure LRV/URV Configuration...................................................... 7-6
7.5.7 Damping Time Constant Configuration.............................................. 7-7
7.5.8 Output Mode Configuration................................................................ 7-7
7.5.9 Display Out 1 Configuration................................................................ 7-7
7.5.10 Re-range by applying actual pressure (LRV/URV)............................. 7-7
7.5.11 Save or Cancel................................................................................... 7-8
7.5.12 Abort Configuration............................................................................. 7-8
7.5.12.1 Abort Configuration (Menu)............................................... 7-8
7.5.12.2 Abort Configuration (Parameter)....................................... 7-8
7.5.13 Local Parameter Setting Lock............................................................. 7-8
7.5.14 Others................................................................................................. 7-8

IM 01C25F01-01E
iii
8. Maintenance............................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Calibration Instruments Selection................................................................... 8-1
8.3 Calibration.......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.4 Disassembly and Reassembly......................................................................... 8-3
8.4.1 Replacing the Integral Indicator.......................................................... 8-3
8.4.2 Replacing the CPU Board Assembly.................................................. 8-4
8.4.3 Cleaning and Replacing the Capsule Assembly...........................8-4
8.5 Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 8-5
8.5.1 Basic Troubleshooting........................................................................ 8-6
8.5.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts................................................................ 8-6
8.5.3 Alarms and Countermeasures............................................................ 8-8
9. General Specifications............................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Standard Specifications.................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Model and Suffix Codes.................................................................................... 9-5
9.3 Optional Specifications .............................................................................. 9-8
9.4 Dimensions....................................................................................................... 9-10
Revision Information

When using the Transmitters in a Safety Instrumented Systems(SIS)


application, refer to Appendix A in either IM 01C25T01-06EN for the
HART protocol or IM 01C25T03-01E for the BRAIN protocol.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<1. Introduction> 1-1

1. Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the DPharp EJX and EJA
Differential Pressure and pressure transmitter. NOTE
Your transmitter was precisely calibrated at the Unless otherwise stated, the illustrations in this
factory before shipment. To ensure both safety and manual are of the EJ530 gauge pressure
efficiency, please read this manual carefully before transmitter.
you operate the instrument. Users of the EJ510, EJX610A and EJX630A
should bear in mind that certain features of their
NOTE instrument will differ from those shown in the
illustrations of the EJ530.
This manual describes the hardware
configurations of the transmitters listed in below.
For information on the software configuration
and operation, please refer to either
Regarding This Manual
IM 01C25T03-01E for the BRAIN communication This manual should be provided to the end
type, or IM 01C25T01-06EN for the HART user.
communication type. The contents of this manual are subject to
For FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol type, please change without prior notice.
refer to IM 01C25T02-01E. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may
For PROFIBUS PA protocol type, please refer to be reproduced in any form without Yokogawas
IM 01C25T04-01EN. written permission.
Model Style code Yokogawa makes no warranty of any kind with
EJX510A S2 regard to this manual, including, but not limited
EJX530A S2 to, implied warranty of merchantability and
EJX610A S1 fitness for a particular purpose.
EJX630A S1
EJA510E S1 If any question arises or errors are found, or if
EJA530E S1 any information is missing from this manual,
please inform the nearest Yokogawa sales
To ensure correct use of this instrument, read office.
both the hardware and software manuals
The specifications covered by this manual are
thoroughly before use.
limited to those for the standard type under the
specified model number break-down and do not
cover custom-made instruments.
WARNING
Please note that changes in the specifications,
When using the transmitters in a Safety construction, or component parts of the
Instrumented Systems (SIS) application, refer instrument may not immediately be reflected
to Appendix 1 in either IM 01C25T01-06EN for in this manual at the time of change, provided
the HART protocol or IM 01C25T03-01E for the that postponement of revisions will not cause
BRAIN protocol. The instructions and procedures difficulty to the user from a functional or
in this section must be strictly followed in order to performance standpoint.
maintain the transmitter for this safety level. Yokogawa assumes no responsibility for this
product except as stated in the warranty.
If the customer or any third party is harmed by
NOTE the use of this product, Yokogawa assumes
no responsibility for any such harm owing to
When describing the model name like EJ510
any defects in the product which were not
or EJ530, it shows the applicability for
predictable, or for any indirect damages.
both EJX510A and EJA510E or EJX530A and
EJA530E.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<1. Introduction> 1-2
The following safety symbols are used in this 1.1 Safe Use of This Product
manual:
For the safety of the operator and to protect the
instrument and the system, please be sure to follow
this manuals safety instructions when handling this
WARNING instrument. If these instructions are not heeded,
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, the protection provided by this instrument may be
if not avoided, could result in death or serious impaired. In this case, Yokogawa cannot guarantee
injury. that the instrument can be safely operated. Please
pay special attention to the following points:

(a) Installation
CAUTION This instrument may only be installed by an
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, engineer or technician who has an expert
if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate knowledge of this device. Operators are not
injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe allowed to carry out installation unless they
practices. meet this condition.
With high process temperatures, care must
be taken not to burn yourself by touching the
IMPORTANT instrument or its casing.
Indicates that operating the hardware or software Never loosen the process connector nuts when
in this manner may damage it or lead to system the instrument is installed in a process. This can
failure. lead to a sudden, explosive release of process
fluids.
When draining condensate from the pressure
NOTE detector section, take appropriate precautions
to prevent the inhalation of harmful vapors and
Draws attention to information essential for
the contact of toxic process fluids with the skin
understanding the operation and features.
or eyes.
When removing the instrument from a
Direct current hazardous process, avoid contact with the fluid
and the interior of the meter.
Functional grounding terminal
All installation shall comply with local installation
Caution requirements and the local electrical code.
This symbol indicates that the operator must
(b) Wiring
refer to an explanation in the users manual
in order to avoid the risk of injury or death of The instrument must be installed by an
personnel or damage to the instrument. engineer or technician who has an expert
knowledge of this instrument. Operators are not
permitted to carry out wiring unless they meet
Trademarks
this condition.
DPharp, EJX, EJA, FieldMate and BRAIN
Before connecting the power cables, please
TERMINAL are registered trademarks of
confirm that there is no current flowing through
Yokogawa Electric Corporation. Company
the cables and that the power supply to the
names and product names used in this material
instrument is switched off.
are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective owners.
In this manual, trademarks or registered
trademarks are not marked with or .

IM 01C25F01-01E
<1. Introduction> 1-3
(c) Operation 1.2 Warranty
Wait 5 min. after the power is turned off, before The warranty shall cover the period noted on
opening the covers. the quotation presented to the purchaser at the
time of purchase. Problems occurring during
(d) Maintenance
the warranty period shall basically be repaired
Please carry out only the maintenance free of charge.
procedures described in this manual. If you If any problems are experienced with this
require further assistance, please contact the instrument, the customer should contact the
nearest Yokogawa office. Yokogawa representative from which this
Care should be taken to prevent the build up of instrument was purchased or the nearest
dust or other materials on the display glass and Yokogawa office.
the name plate. To clean these surfaces, use a If a problem arises with this instrument,
soft, dry cloth. please inform us of the nature of the problem
and the circumstances under which it
(e) Explosion Protected Type Instrument
developed, including the model specification
Users of explosion proof instruments should and serial number. Any diagrams, data and
refer first to section 2.9 (Installation of an other information you can include in your
Explosion Protected Instrument) of this manual. communication will also be helpful.
The use of this instrument is restricted to those The party responsible for the cost of fixing the
who have received appropriate training in the problem shall be determined by Yokogawa
device. following an investigation conducted by
Take care not to create sparks when accessing Yokogawa.
the instrument or peripheral devices in a The purchaser shall bear the responsibility for
hazardous location. repair costs, even during the warranty period, if
the malfunction is due to:
(f) Modification
Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or - Improper and/or inadequate maintenance by
damage resulting from any modification made the purchaser.
to this instrument by the customer. - Malfunction or damage due to a failure
(g) Product Disposal to handle, use, or store the instrument in
accordance with the design specifications.
The instrument should be disposed of in
- Use of the product in question in a location
accordance with local and national legislation/
not conforming to the standards specified by
regulations.
Yokogawa, or due to improper maintenance
(h) Authorized Representative in EEA of the installation location.
- Failure or damage due to modification or
In relation to the CE Marking, The
repair by any party except Yokogawa or an
authorised representative for this product
approved representative of Yokogawa.
in the EEA (European Economic Area) is:
- Malfunction or damage from improper
Yokogawa Europe B.V. Euroweg 2, 3825 HD
relocation of the product in question after
Amersfoort,The Netherlands
delivery.
- Reason of force majeure such as fires,
earthquakes, storms/floods, thunder/
lightening, or other natural disasters, or
disturbances, riots, warfare, or radioactive
contamination.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<1. Introduction> 1-4
1.3 ATEX Documentation
This is only applicable to the countries in European Union.

GB SK

CZ
DK

I LT

E LV

EST
NL

PL

SF

SLO
P

BG

RO

S
M

GR

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-1

2. Handling Cautions
This chapter provides important information on how 2.2 Unpacking
to handle the transmitter. Read this carefully before
using the transmitter. Keep the transmitter in its original packaging to
prevent it from being damaged during shipment.
The transmitters are thoroughly tested at the Do not unpack the transmitter until it reaches the
factory before shipment. When taking delivery of an installation site.
instrument, visually check them to make sure that
no damage occurred during shipment.
Also check that all transmitter mounting hardware
2.3 Storage
shown in figure 2.1 is included. If the transmitter The following precautions must be observed when
is ordered without the mounting bracket and the storing the instrument, especially for a long period.
process connector, the transmitter mounting (a) Select a storage area which meets the following
hardware will not be included. After checking the conditions:
transmitter, carefully repack it in its box and keep it It is not exposed to rain or subject to water
there until you are ready to install it. seepage/leaks.
U-bolt nut (L) Vibration and shock are kept to a minimum.
It has an ambient temperature and relative
humidity within the following ranges.
Ambient temperature:
40* to 85C without integral indicator
30* to 80C with integral indicator
* 15C when /HE is specified.
Mounting bracket
Relative humidity:
0% to 100% R.H.
Preferred temperature and humidity:
U-bolt nut (S)
approx. 25C and 65% R.H.
(b) When storing the transmitter, repack it carefully
U-bolt (S)
in the packaging that it was originally shipped
with.
U-bolt (L)
(c) If the transmitter has been used, thoroughly
F0201.ai
clean the chambers inside the cover flanges, so
Figure 2.1 Transmitter Mounting Hardware
that there is no process fluid remaining inside.
Before placing it in storage, also make sure that
the pressure-detector is securely connected to
2.1 Model and Specifications the transmitter section.
Check
The model name and specifications are written on 2.4 Selecting the Installation
the name plate attached to the case. Location
The transmitter is designed to withstand severe
environmental conditions. However, to ensure
that it will provide years of stable and accurate
performance, take the following precautions when
selecting the installation location.

F0202.ai

Figure 2.2 Name Plate

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-2
(a) Ambient Temperature 2.6 Waterproofing of Cable
Avoid locations subject to wide temperature
variations or a significant temperature gradient.
Conduit Connections
If the location is exposed to radiant heat from Apply a non-hardening sealant to the threads
plant equipment, provide adequate thermal to waterproof the transmitter cable conduit
insulation and/or ventilation. connections. (See figure 6.8, 6.9 and 6.10.)
(b) Ambient Atmosphere
Do not install the transmitter in a corrosive 2.7 Restrictions on Use of Radio
atmosphere. If this cannot be avoided, there
must be adequate ventilation as well as Transceivers
measures to prevent the leaking of rain water
and the presence of standing water in the IMPORTANT
conduits. Although the transmitter has been designed to
(c) Shock and Vibration resist high frequency electrical noise, if a radio
Although the transmitter is designed to be transceiver is used near the transmitter or its
relatively resistant to shock and vibration, an external wiring, the transmitter may be affected
installation site should be selected where this is by high frequency noise pickup. To test this, start
kept to a minimum. out from a distance of several meters and slowly
approach the transmitter with the transceiver
(d) Installation of Explosion-protected Transmitters
while observing the measurement loop for noise
An explosion-protected transmitters is
effects. Thereafter use the transceiver outside
certified for installation in a hazardous area
the range where the noise effects were first
containing specific gas types. See subsection
observed.
2.9 Installation of an Explosion-Protected
Transmitters.

2.8 Insulation Resistance and


2.5 Pressure Connection
Dielectric Strength Test
WARNING Since the transmitter has undergone insulation
resistance and dielectric strength tests at the factory
Never loosen the process connector bolts before shipment, normally these tests are not
when an instrument is installed in a process. required. If the need arises to conduct these tests,
The device is under pressure, and a loss of heed the following:
seal can result in a sudden and uncontrolled
(a) Do not perform such tests more frequently than
release of process fluid.
is absolutely necessary. Even test voltages that
When draining toxic process fluids that have
do not cause visible damage to the insulation
condensed inside the pressure detector,
may degrade the insulation and reduce safety
take appropriate steps to prevent the contact
margins.
of such fluids with the skin or eyes and the
(b) Never apply a voltage exceeding 500 V DC
inhalation of vapors from these fluids.
(100 V DC with an internal lightning protector)
for the insulation resistance test, nor a voltage
The following precautions must be observed exceeding 500 V AC (100 V AC with an internal
in order to safely operate the transmitter under lightning protector) for the dielectric strength
pressure. test.
(a) Make sure that all the process connector bolts (c) Before conducting these tests, disconnect
are tightened firmly. all signal lines from the transmitter terminals.
(b) Make sure that there are no leaks in the impulse The procedure for conducting these tests is as
piping. follows:
(c) Never apply a pressure higher than the
specified maximum working pressure.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-3
Insulation Resistance Test 2.9 Installation of an Explosion-
1) Short-circuit the + and SUPPLY terminals Protected Instrument
in the terminal box. In case of 1 to 5 V output,
short-circuit the SUPPLY+, SUPPLY and A NOTE
(VOUT +) terminals.
2) Turn OFF the insulation tester. Then connect For FOUNDATION Fieldbus explosion protected
the insulation tester plus (+) lead wire to the type, please refer to IM 01C22T02-01E.
shorted SUPPLY terminals and the minus () For PROFIBUS PA explosion protected type,
leadwire to the grounding terminal. please refer to IM 01C25T04-01EN.
3) Turn ON the insulation tester power and
measure the insulation resistance. The voltage If a customer makes a repair or modification to
should be applied as briefly as possible to verify an intrinsically safe or explosionproof instrument
that the insulation resistance is at least 20 M. and the instrument is not restored to its original
4) After completing the test and being very careful condition, its intrinsically safe or explosionproof
not to touch exposed conductors disconnect the construction may be compromised and the
insulation tester and connect a 100 k resistor instrument may be hazardous to operate. Please
between the grounding terminal and the short- contact Yokogawa before making any repair or
circuiting SUPPLY terminals. Leave this resistor modification to an instrument.
connected at least one second to discharge any
static potential. Do not touch the terminals while CAUTION
it is discharging.
This instrument has been tested and certified
Dielectric Strength Test
as being intrinsically safe or explosionproof.
1) Short-circuit the + and SUPPLY terminals Please note that severe restrictions apply to this
in the terminal box. In case of 1 to 5 V output, instruments construction, installation, external
short-circuit the SUPPLY+, SUPPLY and A wiring, maintenance and repair. A failure to abide
(VOUT +) terminals. by these restrictions could make the instrument a
2) Turn OFF the dielectric strength tester. Then hazard to operate.
connect the tester between the shorted
SUPPLY terminals and the grounding terminal.
Be sure to connect the grounding lead of the
WARNING
dielectric strength tester to the ground terminal.
3) Set the current limit on the dielectric strength Maintaining the safety of explosionproof
tester to 10 mA, then turn ON the power and equipment requires great care during mounting,
gradually increase the test voltage from 0 to wiring, and piping. Safety requirements also
the specified voltage. place restrictions on maintenance and repair.
4) When the specified voltage is reached, hold it Please read the following sections very carefully.
for one minute.
5) After completing this test, slowly decrease the
voltage to avoid any voltage surges.
WARNING
The range setting switch must not be used in a
hazardous area.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-4
Note 2. Entity Parameters
IMPORTANT Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters
For combined approval types [Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G]
Once a device of multiple approval type is Vmax = 30 V Ci = 6 nF
installed, it should not be re-installed using any Imax = 200 mA Li = 0 H
other approval types. Apply a permanent mark Pmax = 1 W
in the check box of the selected approval type * Associated Apparatus Parameters
on the certification label on the transmitter to (FM approved barriers)
distinguish it from unused approval types. Voc 30 V Ca > 6 nF
Isc 200 mA La > 0 H
Pmax 1W
IMPORTANT
Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters
All the blind plugs which accompany the EJX/ [Groups C, D, E, F and G]
EJA-E transmitters upon shipment from the Vmax = 30 V Ci = 6 nF
factory are certified by the applicable agency Imax = 225 mA Li = 0 H
in combination with the transmitters. The plugs Pmax = 1 W
which are marked with the symbols Ex on
their surfaces are certified only in combination * Associated Apparatus Parameters
with the EJX/EJA-E series transmitters. (FM approved barriers)
Voc 30 V Ca > 6 nF
Isc 225 mA La > 0 H
2.9.1 FM Approval Pmax 1 W

a. FM Intrinsically Safe Type Entity Installation Requirements


Vmax Voc or Uo or Vt, Imax Isc or Io or It,
Caution for FM intrinsically safe type. (Following Pmax (or Po) Pi, Ca or Co Ci + Ccable,
contents refer DOC. No. IFM022-A12) La or Lo Li + Lcable
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series Differential, gauge Note 3. Installation
and absolute pressure transmitters with Barrier must be installed in an enclosure that
optional code /FS1 are applicable for use meets the requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01.
in hazardous locations. Control equipment connected to barrier must
Applicable Standard: FM3600, FM3610, not use or generate more than 250 V rms or
FM3611, FM3810 V dc.
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Installation should be in accordance with
Groups A, B, C & D. Class II, Division 1, ANSI/ISA RP12.6 Installation of Intrinsically
Groups E, F & G and Class III, Division 1, Safe Systems for Hazardous (Classified)
Class I, Zone 0 in Hazardous Locations, AEx Locations and the National Electric Code
ia IIC (ANSI/NFPA 70).
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups The configuration of associated apparatus
A, B, C & D. Class II, Division 2, Groups F & must be FMRC Approved.
G, Class I, Zone 2, Groups IIC, in Hazardous Dust-tight conduit seal must be used when
Locations. installed in a Class II, III, Group E, F and G
Enclosure: Type 4X environments.
Temperature Class: T4 Associated apparatus manufacturers
Ambient temperature: 60 to 60C installation drawing must be followed when
installing this apparatus.
The maximum power delivered from the
barrier must not exceed 1 W.
Note a warning label worded
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
IMPAIR INTRINSIC SAFETY, and INSTALL
IN ACCORDANCE WITH DOC. No. IFM022-
A12

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-5
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair Output signal: 4 to 20 mA
The instrument modification or parts 15 mA (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
replacement by other than authorized PROFIBUS PA type)
representative of Yokogawa Electric 1 to 5 V (Low Power type)
Corporation is prohibited and will void
Note 2. Wiring
Factory Mutual Intrinsically safe and
All wiring shall comply with National Electrical
Nonincendive Approval.
Code ANSI/NFPA70 and Local Electrical
[Intrinsically Safe] Codes.
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location When installed in Division 1, FACTORY
Class I, II, III, Division 1, SEALED, CONDUIT SEAL NOT
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G REQUIRED.
Class 1, Zone 0 in Wiring connection for output signal code Q
Hazardous (Classified) General
Locations AEx ia IIC (Low Power type) shall follow the diagram
Purpose
Pressure Transmitters Safety Barrier Equipment below.
+ + + + Pressure Transmitters
Supply SUPPLY +
Voltmeter
A Power Supply
F0203-1.ai
+ +

[Nonincendive]
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location SUPPLY
Class I, II, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, D, F, G Three-Wire Connection
Class 1, Zone 2, Group IIC, Pressure Transmitters
in Hazardous (Classified)
General SUPPLY +
Locations
Purpose Voltmeter
Pressure Transmitters Equipment A Power Supply
+ + + +
Supply

Not Use
Safety Barrier SUPPLY
F0203-2.ai
Four-Wire Connection
F0211.ai

b. FM Explosionproof Type
Caution for FM explosionproof type. Note 3. Operation
Keep the WARNING nameplate attached to
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters the transmitter.
with optional code /FF1 are applicable for WARNING: OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE
use in hazardous locations. REMOVING COVER. FACTORY SEALED,
Applicable Standard: FM3600, FM3615, CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED.
FM3810, ANSI/NEMA 250 INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, USERS MANUAL IM 01C25.
Groups B, C and D. Take care not to generate mechanical
Dust-ignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, sparking when accessing to the instrument
Groups E, F and G. and peripheral devices in a hazardous
Enclosure: Type 4X location.
Temperature Class: T6
Ambient Temperature: 40 to 60C
Supply Voltage: 42 V dc max.
32 V dc max. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
PROFIBUS PA type)
9 to 28 V dc, 27 mW (Low Power type)

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-6
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair [For CSA E60079]
The instrument modification or parts Applicable Standard: CAN/CSA E60079-11,
replacement by other than authorized CAN/CSA E60079-15, IEC 60529:2001
representative of Yokogawa Electric Ex ia IIC T4, Ex nL IIC T4
Corporation is prohibited and will void Ambient Temperature: 50* to 60C
* 15C when /HE is specified.
Factory Mutual Explosionproof Approval.
Max. Process Temp.: 120C
c. FM Intrinsically Safe Type/FM Enclosure: IP66/IP67
Explosionproof Type
Note 2. Entity Parameters
EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters with Intrinsically safe ratings are as follows:
optional code /FU1 or /V1U1 can be selected Maximum Input Voltage (Vmax/Ui) = 30 V
the type of protection (FM Intrinsically Safe Maximum Input Current (Imax/Ii) = 200 mA
or FM Explosionproof) for use in hazardous Maximum Input Power (Pmax/Pi) = 0.9 W
locations. Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 10 nF
Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter, Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H
once a particular type of protection is Type "n" or Nonincendive ratings are as
selected, any other type of protection follows:
cannot be used. The installation must be in Maximum Input Voltage (Vmax/Ui) = 30 V
accordance with the description about the Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 10 nF
type of protection in this instruction manual. Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H
Installation Requirements
Note 2. In order to avoid confusion, unnecessary Uo Ui, Io Ii, Po Pi,
marking is crossed out on the label other Co Ci + Ccable, Lo Li + Lcable
than the selected type of protection when Voc Vmax, Isc Imax,
the transmitter is installed. Ca Ci + Ccable, La Li + Lcable
2.9.2 CSA Certification Uo, Io, Po, Co, Lo, Voc, Isc, Ca and La are
parameters of barrier.
a. CSA Intrinsically Safe Type
Note 3. Installation
Caution for CSA Intrinsically safe and In any safety barreir used output current
nonincendive type. (Following contents refer to must be limited by a resistor 'R' such that
DOC No. ICS013-A13) Io=Uo/R or Isc=Voc/R.
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series differential, gauge, The safety barrier must be CSA certified.
and absolute pressure transmitters with Input voltage of the safety barrier must be
optional code /CS1 are applicable for use less than 250 Vrms/Vdc.
in hazardous locations Installation should be in accordance with
Certificate: 1606623 Canadian Electrical Code Part I and Local
[For CSA C22.2] Electrical Code.
Applicable Standard: C22.2 No.0, C22.2 Dust-tight conduit seal must be used when
No.0.4, C22.2 No.25, C22.2 No.94, C22.2 installed in Class II and III environments.
No.157, C22.2 No.213, C22.2 No.61010-1, The instrument modification or parts
C22.2 No.61010-2-030, C22.2 No.60079-0 replacement by other than authorized
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, representative of Yokogawa Electric
Groups A, B, C & D, Class II, Division 1, Corporation and Yokogawa Corporation
Groups E, F & G, Class III, Division 1 of America is prohibited and will void
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups Canadian Standards Intrinsically safe and
A, B, C & D, Class II, Division 2, Groups F & nonincendive Certification.
G, Class III, Division 1
Enclosure: Type 4X
Temp. Code: T4
Amb. Temp.: 50* to 60C
* 15C when /HE is specified.
Process Temperature: 120C max.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-7
[Intrinsically Safe] Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA dc
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location 15 mA (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
Group IIC, Zone 0 PROFIBUS PA type)
Class I, II, III, Division 1, 1 to 5 V (Low Power type)
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G General
Purpose
Safety Barrier
Note 2. Wiring
Pressure Transmitters Equipment
+ + + + All wiring shall comply with Canadian

Electrical Code Part I and Local Electrical
Supply
Codes.
In hazardous location, wiring shall be in
F0204-1.ai
conduit as shown in the figure.
[Nonincendive] WARNING:
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location A SEAL SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN
Group IIC, Zone 2 50cm OF THE ENCLOSURE.
Class I, II, Division 2,
CSA Certified
UN SCELLEMENT DOIT TRE INSTALL
Groups A, B, C, D, F, G
Equipment MOINS DE 50cm DU BOTIER.
Class III, Division 1.
([nL] or WARNING:
Pressure Transmitters nonincendive)
WHEN INSTALLED IN CL.I, DIV 2, SEAL
+ +
NOT REQUIRED.
Supply UNE FOIS INSTALL DANS CL I, DIV 2,
Not Use
Safety Barrier AUCUN JOINT N'EST REQUIS.
F0204-2.ai Non-Hazardous Hazardous Locations Division 1
Locations
b. CSA Explosionproof Type Non-hazardous
Location
Equipment 50 cm Max.
Caution for CSA explosionproof type.
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters
with optional code /CF1 are applicable for 42 V DC Max. Conduit
use in hazardous locations: 4 to 20 mA DC Sealing Fitting
Signal
Certificate: 2014354 Transmitter
F0205-1.ai
Applicable Standard: C22.2 No.0,
C22.2 No.0.4, C22.2 No.0.5, C22.2 No.25, Non-Hazardous Hazardous Locations Division 2
C22.2 No.30, C22.2 No.94, Locations

C22.2 No.61010-1, C22.2 No.60079-0, Non-hazardous


Location
C22.2 No.61010-2-030, C22.2 No.60079-1 Equipment
Explosion-proof for Class I, Groups B, C and
D.
42 V DC Max.
Dustignition-proof for Class II/III, Groups E, F 4 to 20 mA DC Sealing Fitting
and G. Signal
Transmitter
Enclosure: Type 4X F0205-2.ai

Temperature Code: T6...T4


Ex d IIC T6...T4 All wiring shall comply with local installation
Enclosure: IP66/IP67 requirements and local electrical code.
Maximum Process Temperature: 120C (T4), In hazardous locations, the cable entry
100C (T5), 85C (T6) devices shall be of a certified flameproof
Ambient Temperature: 50* to 75C (T4), type, suitable for the conditions of use and
50* to 80C (T5), 50* to 75C (T6) correctly installed.
* 15C when /HE is specified. Unused apertures shall be closed with
Supply Voltage: 42 V dc max. suitable flameproof certified blanking
32 V dc max. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and elements. (The plug attached is flameproof
PROFIBUS PA type) certified.)
9 to 28 V dc, 27 mW (Low Power type) Wiring connection for output signal code Q
(Low Power type) shall follow the diagram
below.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-8
Pressure Transmitters Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter,
SUPPLY +
once a particular type of protection is
Voltmeter selected, any other type of protection
A Power Supply cannot be used. The installation must be in
+ +
accordance with the description about the
type of protection in this instruction manual.
SUPPLY Note 2. In order to avoid confusion, unnecessary
Three-Wire Connection marking is crossed out on the label other
than the selected type of protection when
Pressure Transmitters
the transmitter is installed.
SUPPLY +
A
Voltmeter 2.9.3 ATEX Certification
Power Supply
+ +
(1) Technical Data

a. ATEX Intrinsically Safe Ex ia
SUPPLY

Four-Wire Connection
Caution for ATEX Intrinsically safe type.
F0212.ai
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters
Note 3. Operation with optional code /KS21 for potentially
WARNING: explosive atmospheres:
AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 5 No. DEKRA 11ATEX0228 X
MINUTES BEFORE OPENING. Applicable Standard:
APRS POWER-OFF, ATTENDRE 5 EN 60079-0:2009, EN 60079-11:2007,
MINUTES AVANT D'OUVRIR. EN 60079-26:2007, EN 61241-11:2006
WARNING: Type of Protection and Marking code:
WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 65C, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
USE THE HEAT-RESISTING CABLES Ex ia IIIC T85 C T100 C T120 C Db
90C. Group: II
QUAND LA TEMPRATURE AMBIANTE Category: 1G, 2D
65C, UTILISEZ DES CBLES Ambient Temperature for EPL Ga:
RSISTANTES LA CHALEUR 90C. 50 to 60C
Ambient Temperature for EPL Db:
Take care not to generate mechanical
30* to 60C
sparking when accessing to the instrument
* 15C when /HE is specified.
and peripheral devices in a hazardous
Process Temperature (Tp.): 120C max.
location.
Maximum Surface Temperature for EPL Db:
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair T85C (Tp.: 80C)
The instrument modification or parts T100C (Tp.: 100C)
replacement by other than authorized T120C (Tp.: 120C)
representative of Yokogawa Electric Enclosure: IP66 / IP67
Corporation and Yokogawa Corporation of
Note 2 Electrical Data
America is prohibited and will void Canadian
In type of explosion protection intrinsic safety
Standards Explosionproof Certification.
Ex ia IIC or Ex ia IIIC, only for connection to a
c CSA Intrinsically Safe Type/CSA certified intrinsically safe circuit with following
Explosionproof Type maximum values:
EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters with Ui = 30 V
optional code /CU1 or /V1U1 can be selected Ii = 200 mA
the type of protection (CSA Intrinsically Safe Pi = 0.9 W
or CSA Explosionproof) for use in hazardous (Linear Source)
locations. Maximum internal capacitance; Ci = 27.6 nF
Maximum internal inductance; Li = 0 H

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-9
Note 3. Installation b. ATEX Flameproof Type
Refer to the control drawing. All wiring shall
Caution for ATEX flameproof type.
comply with local installation requirements.
[Control Drawing] Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters
with optional code /KF22 for potentially
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
explosive atmospheres:
Pressure Transmitters No. KEMA 07ATEX0109 X
+ + Applicable Standard: EN 60079-0:2009,
Supply Safety Barrier *1
EN 60079-1:2007, EN 60079-31:2009
Type of Protection and Marking Code:
Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb, Ex tb IIIC T85C Db
Group: II
F0206.ai Category: 2G, 2D
*1: In any safety barriers used the output current must be Enclosure: IP66/IP67
limited by a resistor R such that Io=Uz/R.
Temperature Class for gas-poof:
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair T6, T5, and T4
The instrument modification or parts Ambient Temperature for gas-proof:
replacement by other than authorized 50 to 75C (T6), 50 to 80C (T5), and
representative of Yokogawa Electric 50 to 75C (T4)
Corporation is prohibited and will void Maximum Process Temperature (Tp.) for
DEKRA Intrinsically safe Certification. gas-proof:
85C (T6), 100C (T5), and 120C (T4)
Note 5. Special Conditions for Safe Use
Maximum Surface Temperature for dust-
proof:
WARNING
T85C (Tamb.: 30* to 75C, Tp.: 85C)
* 15C when /HE is specified.
In the case where the enclosure of the
Pressure Transmitter is made of aluminium, Note 2. Electrical Data
if it is mounted in an area where the use of Supply voltage: 42 V dc max.
category 1 G apparatus is required, it must 32 V dc max. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
be installed such, that, even in the event of PROFIBUS PA type)
rare incidents, ignition sources due to impact 9 to 28 V dc, 27 mW (Low Power type)
and friction sparks are excluded. Output signal: 4 to 20 mA
Electrostatic charge may cause an exlosion 15 mA (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the PROFIBUS PA type)
generation of electrostatic charge, such as 1 to 5 V (Low Power type)
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of Note 3. Installation
the product. All wiring shall comply with local installation
In case of the enclosure of the Pressure requirement.
Transmitter with paint layers, if it is mounted Cable glands, adapters and/or blanking
in an area where the use of category 2D elements with a suitable IP rating shall
apparatus is required, it shall be installed in be of Ex d IIC/Ex tb IIIC certified by ATEX
such a way that the risk from electrostatic and shall be installed so as to maintain the
discharges and propagating brush specific degree of protection (IP Code) of the
discharges caused by rapid flow of dust is equipment.
avoided. Wiring connection for output signal code Q
To satisfy IP66 or IP67, apply waterproof (Low Power type) shall follow the diagram
glands to the electrical connection port. below.
When the lightning protector option is
specified, the apparatus is not capable
of withstanding the 500V insulation test
required by EN60079-11. This must be taken
into account when installing the apparatus.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-10
Pressure Transmitters c. ATEX Intrinsically Safe Type/ATEX
SUPPLY +
Flameproof Type
Voltmeter
A Power Supply
EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters with
+ + optional code /KU22 or /V1U1 can be selected
the type of protection ATEX Flameproof,

Intrinsically Safe. Ex ia, or Ex ic for use in
SUPPLY hazardous area.
Three-Wire Connection Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter,
Pressure Transmitters once a particular type of protection is
SUPPLY + selected, any other type of protection
A
Voltmeter cannot be used. The installation must be in
Power Supply
accordance with the description about the
+ +
type of protection in this users manual.

Note 2. For combined approval types Once a
SUPPLY device of multiple approval type is installed,
Four-Wire Connection it should not be re-installed using any
other approval types. Apply a permanent
F0213.ai

Note 4. Operation mark in the check box of the selected


WARNING: AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, approval type on the certification label on
DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING. the transmitter to distinguish it from unused
WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP.65C, USE approval types.
HEAT-RESISTING CABLE AND CABLE ATEX Intrinsically Safe Ex ic
GLAND 90C.
Caution for ATEX intrinsically safe Ex ic
Take care not to generate mechanical
Applicable Standard:
sparking when accessing to the instrument
EN 60079-0:2009/EN 60079-0:2012,
and peripheral devices in a hazardous
EN 60079-11:2012
location.
Type of Protection and Marking Code:
Note 5. Special Conditions for Safe Use
II 3G Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
Ambient Temperature: 30* to +60C
WARNING * 15C when /HE is specified.
Ambient Humidity:
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion 0 to 100% (No condensation)
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the Maximum Process Temperature: 120C
generation of electrostatic charge, such as IP Code: IP66
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of Ambient pollution degree: 2
the product. Overvoltage category: I
In the case where the enclosure of the
Note 1. Electrical Data
Pressure Transmitter is made of aluminium,
Ui = 30 V
if it is mounted in an area where the use of
Ci = 27.6 nF
category 2D apparatus is required, it shall
Li = 0 H
be installed in such a way that the risk from
electrostatic discharges and propagating Note 2. Installation
brush discharges caused by rapid flow of All wiring shall comply with local installation
dust is avoided. requirements. (refer to the control drawing)
The instrument modification or parts Cable glands, adapters and/or blanking
replacement by other than an authorized elements shall be of Ex n, Ex e or Ex d
Representative of Yokogawa Electric and shall be installed so as to maintain the
Corporation is prohibited and will void the specified degree of protection (IP Code) of
certification. the transmitters.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-11
Note 3. Maintenance and Repair (3) Installation
The instrument modification or parts
replacement by other than authorized
WARNING
representative of Yokogawa Electric
Corporation is prohibited and will void ATEX All wiring shall comply with local installation
intrinsically safe. requirements and the local electrical code.
[Control drawing] There is no need for conduit seal in Division
Hazardous Area Nonhazardous Area 1 and Division 2 hazardous locations
because this product is sealed at the factory.
+
Pressure Associated
Transmitters Apparatus
(4) Operation

F0207.ai WARNING
Note 4. Specific Conditions of Use OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING
COVER. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH
WARNING THIS USERS MANUAL
Take care not to generate mechanical
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion sparking when access to the instrument and
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the peripheral devices in a hazardous location.
generation of electrostatic charge, such as
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of
the product. (5) Maintenance and Repair
When the lightning protector option is
specified, the apparatus is not capable WARNING
of withstanding the 500V insulation test
required by EN60079-11. This must be taken The instrument modification or parts replacement
into account when installing the apparatus. by other than an authorized Representative of
Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and
will void the certification.
(2) Electrical Connection
A mark indicating the electrical connection type
is stamped near the electrical connection port.
These marks are as followed.
Screw Size Marking
ISO M20 1.5 female M
ANSI 1/2 NPT female N or W

Location of the mark

F0208.ai

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-12
(6) Name Plate 2.9.4 IECEx Certification
Name plate EJX Series pressure transmitters with optional
code /SU21 can be selected the type of
protection (IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ia, Ex ic
or flameproof) for use in hazardous locations.
EJX Series pressure transmitters with optional
code /SS26 can be selected the type of
Tag plate for flameproof type
protection (IECEx intrinsically safe Ex ia or Ex
ic) for use in hazardous locations.
No. KEMA 07ATEX0109 X
Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb, Ex tb IIIC T85C Db
Enlcosure : IP66/IP67
TEMP. CLASS T6 T5 T4

EJX Series pressure transmitters with


MAX PROCESS TEMP.(Tp.) 85 100 120 C
Tamb. -50 to 75 80 75 C
T85C(Tamb.:-30(-15) to 75C, Tp.:85C)(for Dust)

optional code /SU2 can be selected the type of


*3 D protection (IECEx Intrinsically Safe/type n or
WARNING
flameproof) for use in hazardous locations.

AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE


Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter,
OPENING.
WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP. 65C, USE THE
HEAT-RESISTING CABLE & CABLE GLAND 90C
POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD
once a particular type of protection is
selected, any other type of protection
Tag plate for intrinsically safe type
No. DEKRA 11ATEX 0228 X
cannot be used. The installation must be in
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga Ta: -50 TO 60C
Ex ia IIIC T85C T100C T120C Db Ta:-30(-15) TO 60C
IP66/IP67
accordance with the description about the
MAX. PROCESS TEMP.(Tp.) 120C
T85C(Tp.:80C), T100C(Tp.:100C), T120C(Tp.:120C)
Ui=30V, Ii=200mA , Pi=0.9W, Ci=27.6nF, Li=0H type of protection in this instruction manual.

*3 D Note 2. For combined approval types, once a


WARNING device of multiple approval type is installed,
it should not be re-installed using any
POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC
CHARGING HAZARD
other approval types. Apply a permanent
- SEE USERS MANUAL

mark in the check box of the selected


Tag plate for intrinsically safe Ex ic
Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
approval type on the certification label on
IP66
Tamb -30(-15) TO 60C
MAX. PROCESS TEMP. 120C
Ui=30V, Ci=27.6nF, Li=0H
the transmitter to distinguish it from unused
approval types.

WARNING
a. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ia
Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe Ex ia.
POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC

Note 1. EJX/EJA-E series pressure transmitters


CHARGING HAZARD
- SEE USERS MANUAL

F0209.ai
with optional code /SU21 are applicable for
MODEL: Specified model code. use in hazardous locations
STYLE: Style code. No. IECEx DEK 11.0081X
SUFFIX: Specified suffix code. Applicable Standard: IEC 60079-0:2011,
SUPPLY: Supply voltage. IEC 60079-11:2011, IEC 60079-26:2006
OUTPUT: Output signal. Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
MWP: Maximum working pressure. Ambient Temperature: 50 to 60C
CAL RNG: Specified calibration range. Max. Process Temp.: 120C
NO.: Serial number and year of production*1.
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN: Note 2. Electrical Data
The manufacturer name and the address*2. Maximum Input Voltage (Ui) = 30 V
Maximum Input Current (Ii) = 200 mA
*1: The first digit in the three numbers next to the nine
letters of the serial number appearing after NO. Maximum Input Power (Pi) = 0.9 W
on the nameplate indicates the year of production. (linear source)
The following is an example of a serial number for a
product that was produced in 2010: Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 27.6 nF
91K819857 032 Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H
Note 3. Installation
The year 2010 In any safety barrier used output current
*2: 180-8750 is a zip code which represents the must be limited by a resistor R such that
following address.
Io=Uz/R.
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo Japan
The safety barrier must be IECEx certified.
*3: The identification number of Notified Body.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-13
Input voltage of the safety barrier must be Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
less than 250 Vrms/Vdc. Ambient Temperature: 30* to 60C
* -15 C when /HE is specified.
The instrument modification or parts
replacement by other than authorized Max. Process Temp.: 120C
representative of Yokogawa Electric IP Code: IP66
Corporation is prohibited and will void IECEx Overvoltage Category: I
certification. Note 2. Electrical Data
[Ex ia] Maximum Input Voltage (Ui) = 30 V
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 27.6 nF
Group IIC, Zone 0 Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H
EJX/EJA-E Series IECEx certified Note 3. Installation
Pressure Transmitters Safety Barrier
The pressure transmitter is allowed to
+ +
be installed in nL systems, on condition
Supply
that the output parameters of nL source
(associated energy-limited apparatus)
(*1) are suitable to the above mentioned input
*1: When using non isolation barrier, parameters of the pressure transmitter and
connect (*1) to IS barrier system. F0215.ai
the cable parameters.
Note 4. Specific Condition of Use Cable glands, adapters and/or blanking
elements shall be of Ex n, Ex e or Ex
WARNING d and shall be installed so as to maintain
the specified degree of protection of the
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion equipment.
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the The instrument modification or parts
generation of electrostatic charge, such as replacement by other than authorized
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of representative of Yokogawa Electric
the product. Corporation is prohibited and will void IECEx
In the case where the enclosure of the certification.
pressure transmitter is made of aluminum, [Ex ic]
if it is mounted in an area where the use of Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
EPL Ga equipment is required, it shall be
EJX/EJA-E Series Associated apparatus
installed in such a way that , even in the Pressure Transmitters
event of rare incidents, ignition sources due
+ +
to impact and friction sparks are excluded. Supply

When the lightning protector option is
specified, the apparatus is not capable
F0216.ai
of withstanding the 500 V insulation test
required by IEC 60079-11. This must be Note 4. Specific Condition of Use
taken into account when installing the
apparatus. WARNING
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion
b. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ic hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the
Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe Ex ic. generation of electrostatic charge, such as
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E series pressure transmitters
the product.
with optional code /SU21 are applicable for
The apparatus is not capable of dielectric
use in hazardous locations
strength tests required by IEC 60079-11.
No. IECEx DEK 13.0061X
This must be taken into account when
Applicable Standard: IEC 60079-0:2011,
installing the apparatus.
IEC 60079-11:2011

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-14
c. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Type / type n [Intrinsically Safe]

Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe and type n. Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
Group IIC, Zone 0
Note 1. EJX Series differential, gauge, and General
IECEx certified Purpose
absolute pressure transmitters with Pressure Transmitters Safety Barrier Equipment
optional code /SU2 are applicable for use + + + +
in hazardous locations
Supply
No. IECEx CSA 05.0005
Applicable Standard: IEC 60079-0:2000,
IEC 60079-11:1999, IEC 60079-15:2001 F0210-1.ai

Ex ia IIC T4, Ex nL IIC T4 [type n]


Ambient Temperature: 50 to 60C Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
Max. Process Temp.: 120C Group IIC, Zone 2
Enclosure: IP66/IP67 IECEx Certified
Pressure Transmitters Equipment [nL]
Note 2. Electrical Data + +
Intrinsically safe ratings are as follows: Supply
Maximum Input Voltage (Vmax/Ui) = 30 V Not Use
Safety Barrier
Maximum Input Current (Imax/Ii) = 200 mA
F0210-2.ai
Maximum Input Power (Pmax/Pi) = 0.9 W
Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 10 nF d. IECEx Flameproof Type
Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H
Caution for IECEx flameproof type.
Type "n" ratings are as follows:
Maximum Input Voltage (Vmax/Ui) = 30 V Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters
Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 10 nF with optional code /SF2, /SU2 or /SU21 are
Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H applicable for use in hazardous locations:
Installation Requirements No. IECEx CSA 07.0008
Uo Ui, Io Ii, Po Pi, Applicable Standard: IEC60079-0:2011,
Co Ci + Ccable, Lo Li + Lcable IEC60079-1:2007-4
Voc Vmax, Isc Imax, Flameproof for Zone 1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 G6
Ca Ci + Ccable, La Li + Lcable Enclosure: IP66/IP67
Uo, Io, Po, Co, Lo, Voc, Isc, Ca and La are Maximum Process Temperature: 120C (T4),
parameters of barrier. 100C (T5), 85C (T6)
Ambient Temperature: 50 to 75C (T4),
Note 3. Installation
50 to 80C (T5), 50 to 75C (T6)
In any safety barrier used output current
Supply Voltage: 42 V dc max.
must be limited by a resistor 'R' such that
32 V dc max. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
Io=Uo/R.
PROFIBUS PA type)
The safety barrier must be IECEx certified.
9 to 28 V dc, 27 mW (Low Power type)
Input voltage of the safety barrier must be
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA dc
less than 250 Vrms/Vdc.
15 mA (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
The instrument modification or parts
PROFIBUS PA type)
replacement by other than authorized
1 to 5 V (Low Power type)
representative of Yokogawa Electric
Corporation and will void IECEx Intrinsically
safe and type n certification.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-15
Note 2. Wiring Note 4. Maintenance and Repair
In hazardous locations, the cable entry The instrument modification or parts
devices shall be of a certified flameproof replacement by other than authorized
type, suitable for the conditions of use and representative of Yokogawa Electric
correctly installed. Corporation is prohibited and will void IECEx
Unused apertures shall be closed with Certification.
suitable flameproof certified blanking Electrical Connection
elements. A mark indicating the electrical connection
Wiring connection for output signal code Q type is stamped near the electrical
(Low Power type) shall follow the diagram connection port. These marks are as
below. followed.
Pressure Transmitters
Screw Size Marking
SUPPLY +
Voltmeter ISO M20 1.5 female M
A Power Supply
ANSI 1/2 NPT female N or W
+ +

SUPPLY

Three-Wire Connection
Location of the mark
Pressure Transmitters
SUPPLY + F0208.ai
Voltmeter
A Power Supply
+ +
2.10 EMC Conformity Standards

EN 61326-1 Class A, Table2 (For use in
SUPPLY industrial locations)
Four-Wire Connection EN 61326-2-3
F0214.ai
EN 61326-2-5 (for Fieldbus)
Note 3. Operation
WARNING: CAUTION
AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 5
MINUTES BEFORE OPENING. To meet EMC regulations, Yokogawa
WARNING: recommends that customers run signal wiring
WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP.65C, USE through metal conduits or use shielded twisted-
HEAT-RESISTING CABLE AND CABLE pair cabling when installing EJX/EJA-E series
GLAND 90C. transmitters in a plant.
Take care not to generate mechanical
sparking when accessing to the instrument
and peripheral devices in a hazardous
location.
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the
generation of electrostatic charge, such as
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of the
product.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-16
2.11 Pressure Equipment (3) Operation

Directive (PED)
CAUTION
(1) General
The temperature and pressure of fluid should
EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters are be maintained at levels that are consistent
categorized as piping under the pressure with normal operating conditions.
accessories section of directive 97/23/EC, The ambient temperature should be
which corresponds to Article 3, Paragraph 3 of maintained at a level that is consistent with
PED, denoted as Sound Engineering Practice normal operating conditions.
(SEP). Please take care to prevent water hammer
EJ510-D, EJ530-D, EJX610A-D, and the like from inducing excessive
and EJX630A-D can be used above 200 pressures in pipes and valves. If phenomena
bar and therefore considered as a part of a are likely, install a safety valve or take
pressure retaining vessel where category III, some other appropriate measure to prevent
Module H applies. These models with option pressure from exceeding PS.
code /PE3 conform to that category. Take appropriate measures at the device or
(2) Technical Data system level to protect transmitters if they
are to be operated near an external heat
Models without /PE3 source.
Article 3, Paragraph 3 of PED, denoted as
Sound Engineering Practice (SEP).
Models with /PE3
Module: H
2.12 Safety Requirement
Type of Equipment: Pressure Accessory-Vessel Standards
Type of fluid: Liquid and Gas
Applicable standard: EN 61010-1,
Group of fluid: 1 and 2
EN 61010-2-30, C22.2 No.61010-1,
Capsule PS*1 PS.V C22.2 No.61010-2-030
Model V(L) Category*2
code (bar) (bar.L)
Article 3, (1) Pollution Degree 2
EJ510 A, B, C 100 0.1 10
Paragraph 3
EJX610A D 700 0.1 70 "Pollution degree" describes the degree to
(SEP)
EJ510,
which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates
EJX610A dielectric strength or surface resistivity is
D 700 0.1 70 III
with code / adhering. " 2 " applies to normal indoor
PE3
atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive
A, B, C 100 0.1 10 Article 3,
EJ530,
Paragraph 3 pollution occurs. Occasionally, however,
EJX630A D 700 0.1 70 (SEP) temporary conductivity caused by condensation
EJ530, must be expected.
EJX630A
D 700 0.1 70 III
with code / (2) Installation Category I
PE3
"Overvoltage category (Installation category)"
*1: PS is maximum pressure for vessel itself based on
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. Refer to describes a number which defines a transient
General Specification for maximum working pressure of a overvoltage condition. It implies the regulattion
transmitter.
*2: Referred to Table 1 covered by ANNEX II of EC Directive
for impulse withstand voltage. " I " applies to
on Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC electrical equipment which is supplied from the
circuit when appropriate transient overvoltage
control means (interfaces) are provided.
(3) Altitude of installation site:
Max. 2,000 m above sea level
(4) Indoor/Outdoor use

IM 01C25F01-01E
<3. Component Names> 3-1

3. Component Names

External indicator
conduit connection (Note 1)

Conduit
connection

(Note 2) Zero-
Slide switch adjustment
screw
Integral
indicator (Note 1)
Mounting screw

CPU assembly

Range-setting
switch (Note 1) Burnout direction switch
(See section 7.5)
BO H L
Transmitter section
WR E D
Amplifier Cover
Write protection switch

Burnout direction switch (BO) Hardware write protection switch (WR)

Burnout Direction H L H L Write Protection H L H L


Switch Position Switch Position E D E D

NO YES
Burnout Direction HIGH LOW Write Protection
(Write enabled) (Write disabled)
F0301.ai

Note 1: See subsection 9.2, Model and Suffix Codes, for details.
Note 2: Applicable for BRAIN/HART communication type. Set the switches as shown in the figure above to set the burn-out direction
and write protection. The Burnout switch is set to the H side for delivery (unless option code /C1 or /C2 is specified in the order),
and the hardware write protection switch is set to E side.The setting of the switches can be confirmed via communication. An
external zero adjustment screw can only be disabled by communication. To disable the screw, set a parameter before activating
the hardware write protect function. See each communication manual.

Figure 3.1 Component Names

Table 3.1 Display Symbol

Display Symbol Meaning of Display Symbol


The output signal being zero-adjusted is increasing.
Besides, this symbol lights when local parameter setting is in progress.
The output signal being zero-adjusted is decreasing.
Besides, this symbol lights when local parameter setting is in progress.
Write protect function is enabled.
F0302.ai

IM 01C25F01-01E
<4. Installation> 4-1

4. Installation
4.1 Precautions Vertical pipe mounting

Before installing the transmitter, read the cautionary 50 mm (2-inch) pipe


notes in section 2.4, Selecting the Installation U-bolt nut (L)

Location. For additional information on the ambient


conditions allowed at the installation location, refer
U-bolt nut (S)
to section 9.1 Standard Specifications.

IMPORTANT
When welding piping during construction,
take care not to allow welding currents to
flow through the transmitter.
Mounting bracket
Do not step on this instrument after U-bolt (L)
installation. U-bolt (S)
For the EJ530 and EJX630A whose
capsule code is A, B or C, the pipe of the
U-bolt nut (L)
atmospheric opening is located on the Horizontal pipe mounting
pressure detecting section. The opening
must not face upward. See subsection 5.1.1. Mounting bracket
D capsule of EJ530 and EJX630A is
of sealed gauge reference and the change
in atomospheric pressure may affect the 50 mm (2-inch) pipe
measurement.

4.2 Mounting U-bolt nut (S)

The impulse piping connection port of the


transmitter is covered with a plastic cap to U-bolt (S)
protect against dust. This cap must be removed
before connecting the piping. (Be careful not U-bolt (L) F0401.ai
to damage the threads when removing these
Figure 4.1 Transmitter Mounting
caps. Do not insert a screw driver or other
tool between the cap and the port threads to
remove the cap.)
The transmitter can be mounted on a nominal
50 mm (2-inch) pipe using the mounting bracket
supplied, as shown in Figure 4.1.
The user should prepare the mating gasket for
the transmitters with Process connection code
8 and 9. See Figure 4.2.

Gasket
F0402.ai

Figure 4.2 Gasketing

IM 01C25F01-01E
<4. Installation> 4-2
Transmitter section
IMPORTANT
Tighten the hexagonal nut part of the capsule
assembly. See Figure 4.3.

Setscrew
Capsule assembly

Pressure-detector section

Stopper
F0404.ai

Figure 4.4 Rotating Transmitter Section


F0403.ai

Figure 4.3 Tightening Transmitter


4.4 Changing the Direction of
Integral Indicator
4.3 Rotating Transmitter Section
The transmitter section can be rotated IMPORTANT
approximately 360 (180 to either direction or
Always turn OFF power, release pressure and
between -90 and +270 from the original position
remove a transmitter to non-hazardous area
at shipment, depending on the configuration of
before disassembling and reassmbling an
the instrument.) It can be fixed at any angle within
indicator.
above range.
1) Remove the two setscrews that fasten the An integral indicator can be installed in the
transmitter section and capsule assembly, following three directions. Follow the instructions in
using the Allen wrench. section 8.4 for removing and attaching the integral
2) Rotate the transmitter section slowly and stop it indicator.
at designated position. For the EJ530 and
EJX630A whose capsule code is A, B or C, the
pipe of the atmospheric opening may interfere
with the stopper and disturb further rotation.
In that case, screw off the pipe first, rotate the
housing, and then screw in the pipe by hand F0405.ai

again. Figure 4.5 Integral Indicator Direction


3) Tighten the two setscrews to a torque of
1.5 Nm.

IMPORTANT
Do not rotate the transmitter section more than
the above limit.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<5. Installing Impulse Piping> 5-1

5. Installing Impulse Piping


5.1 Impulse Piping Installation 5.1.2 Routing the Impulse Piping
Precautions (1) Process Pressure Tap Angles
The impulse piping that connects the process If condensate, gas, sediment or other extraneous
outputs to the transmitter must convey the process material in the process piping gets into the impulse
pressure accurately. If, for example, gas collects in piping, pressure measurement errors may result. To
a liquidfilled impulse line, or the drain for a gas-filled prevent such problems, the process pressure taps
impulse line becomes plugged, it will not convey the must be angled as shown in figure 5.2 according to
pressure accurately. Since this will cause errors in the kind of fluid being measured.
the measurement output, select the proper piping
method for the process fluid (gas, liquid, or steam).
NOTE
Pay careful attention to the following points when
routing the impulse piping and connecting the If the process fluid is a gas, the taps must be
impulse piping to a transmitter. vertical or within 45 either side of vertical.
If the process fluid is a liquid, the taps must
5.1.1 Connecting Impulse Piping to a be horizontal or below horizontal, but not
Transmitter more than 45 below horizontal.
If the process fluid is steam or other
IMPORTANT condensing vapor, the taps must be
horizontal or above horizontal, but not more
The transmitter can be installed in horizontal
than 45 above horizontal.
impulse piping configuration, tilting the
transmitter's position up to 90. When tilting, [Gas] [Liquid] [Steam]
observe that the pipe (for Model EJ530 and 45 45
Pressure
EJX630A with measurement span code A, B, taps 45 45
and C) is positioned horizontal downwards, or
Process 45 45
any place between them, as shown in Figure 5.1 piping
The zero-adjustment screw must be positioned F0502.ai

downwards for all the models. Figure 5.2 Process Pressure Tap Angle
(For Horizontal Piping)
The pipe (open to atmosphere) is positioned horizontal.

(2) Position of Process Pressure Taps and


Transmitter
If condensate (or gas) accumulates in the impulse
piping, it should be removed periodically by
opening the drain (or vent) plugs. However, this will
Pipe generate a transient disturbance in the pressure
(backside of the instrument) measurement, and therefore it is necessary to
Zero-adjustment screw
position the taps and route the impulse piping so
If the zero-adjustment screw is positioned other than that any extraneous liquid or gas generated in the
donwards after installation, rotate the housing unitl it is leadlines returns naturally to the process piping.
positioned downwards.
F0501.ai If the process fluid is a gas, then as a rule the
Figure 5.1 Horizontal Impulse Piping Connection transmitter must be located higher than the
process pressure taps.
If the process fluid is a liquid or steam, then as a
rule the transmitter must be located lower than
the process pressure taps.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<5. Installing Impulse Piping> 5-2
(3) Impulse Piping Slope Tap valve
The impulse piping must be routed with only an
upward or downward slope. Even for horizontal Union or flange
routing, the impulse piping should have a slope of
at least 1/10 to prevent condensate (or gases) from
accumulating in the pipes. Stop valve

(4) Preventing Freezing


Tee
If there is any risk that the process fluid in the Stop valve
impulse piping or transmitter could freeze, use a Union or flange
steam jacket or heater to maintain the temperature Drain valve
of the fluid.
Drain plug
F0503.ai

NOTE Figure 5.3 Impulse Piping Connection Examples

After completing the connections, close the


valves on the process pressure taps (main
valves), the valves at the transmitter (stop
valves), and the impulse piping drain valves,
so that condensate, sediment, dust and other
extraneous material cannot enter the impulse
piping.

5.2 Impulse Piping Connection


Examples
Figure 5.3 shows examples of typical impulse
piping connections. Before connecting the
transmitter to the process, study the transmitter
installation location, the process piping layout,
and the characteristics of the process fluid
(corrosiveness, toxicity, flammability, etc.), in order
to make appropriate changes and additions to the
connection configurations.
Note the following points when referring to these
piping examples.
If the impulse line is long, bracing or supports
should be provided to prevent vibration.
The impulse piping material used must
be compatible with the process pressure,
temperature, and other conditions.
A variety of process pressure tap valves (main
valves) are available according to the type
of connection (flanged, screwed, welded),
construction (globe, gate, or ball valve),
temperature and pressure. Select the type of
valve most appropriate for the application.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-1

6. Wiring
6.1 Wiring Precautions 6.3 Connections of External
IMPORTANT Wiring to Terminal Box
Lay wiring as far as possible from electrical Terminal Configuration
noise sources such as large capacity
transformers, motors, and power supplies.
Remove the electrical connection dust cap
before wiring.
All threaded parts must be treated with
waterproofing sealant. (A non-hardening
silicone group sealant is recommended.)
To prevent noise pickup, do not pass signal
and power cables through the same ducts. Terminal 1 Terminal 3

Explosion-protected instruments must Terminal 2

be wired in accordance with specific F0613.ai

requirements (and, in certain countries,


legal regulations) in order to preserve the Terminal Wiring for 4 to 20 mA output,
FOUNDATION Fieldbus type, and
effectiveness of their explosion-protected PROFIBUS PA type.
features. SUPPLY +
1
Power supply and output terminals
2
The terminal box cover is locked by an + 3
CHECK External indicator (ammeter) terminals*1*2
Allen head bolt (a shrouding bolt) on ATEX or
2
or
ALARM + Status contact output terminals*2
3
flameproof type transmitters. When the 2 (when /AL is specified)
shrouding bolt is driven clockwise using
Ground terminal
an Allen wrench, it goes in. The cover lock
*1: When using an external indicator or check meter, the
can then be released and the cover can internal resistance must be 10 or less. A check meter
be opened by hand. See subsection 8.4 or indicator cannot be connected when /AL option is
Disassembly and Reassembly for details. specified.
*2: Not available for FOUNDATION Fieldbus and PROFIBUS
Plug and seal an unused conduit connection. PA communication types.

Terminal Wiring for 1 to 5 V output


6.2 Selecting the Wiring SUPPLY +

1
2
Power supply terminals

Materials VOUT +

3
2
1 to 5 V DC with HART communication
terminals

(a) Use stranded leadwires or cables which are Ground terminal


F0614.ai
the same as or better than 600 V grade PVC
Figure 6.1 Terminal
insulated wire (JIS C3307) or its equivalent.
(b) Use shielded wires in areas that are susceptible
to electrical noise.
(c) In areas with higher or lower ambient
temperatures, use appropriate wires or cables.
(d) In environment where oils, solvents, corrosive
gases or liquids may be present, use wires or
cables that are resistant to such substances.
(e) It is recommended that crimp-on solderless
terminal lugs (for 4 mm screws) with insulating
sleeves be used for leadwire ends.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-2
6.3.1 Power Supply Wiring Connection Connect the BT200 or HART Communicator to the
SUPPLY + and terminals. (Use hooks.)
IMPORTANT Transmitter terminal box Power supply
Connecting with the commercial AC power +
supply will damage the device. Be sure to use
the DC power supply in the predetermined Ignore the polarity since the
range. BT200 is AC-coupled to the
terminal box.
BT200 F0603.ai
Connect the power supply wiring to the SUPPLY +
Figure 6.4 BT200 Connection
and terminals. When /AL is specified, also refer to
subsection 6.3.5.
1 to 5 V output, HART
Transmitter terminal box Connect the HART communicator or configuration
+ tool to the SUPPLY - and VOUT (+) terminals. (Use
Power supply
hooks.)

Load resistance is not necessary
Power supply Transmitter terminal box Voltmeter
for 1 to 5 V output.
F0601.ai + +
Figure 6.2 Power Supply Wiring Connection USB
FieldMate Modem

6.3.2 External Indicator Connection


PC/FieldMate
Available only for 4 to 20mA output type and when F0615.ai

/AL is not specified. Figure 6.5 Four wire connection

Connect wiring for external indicators to the CHECK


Transmitter terminal box Power supply
(+) and SUPPLY terminals. +
(Note) Use a external indicator whose internal resistance is 10
USB
or less.
FieldMate Modem Voltmeter
+
External indicator
Power supply
+
PC/FieldMate F0616.ai

Figure 6.6 Three wire connection

6.3.4 Check Meter Connection


Transmitter terminal box
F0602.ai
Available only for 4 to 20mA output type and when
Figure 6.3 External Indicator Connection
/AL is not specified.
Connect the check meter to the CHECK (+) and
6.3.3 Communicator Connection
SUPPLY terminals. (Use hooks.)
4 to 20 mA output, BRAIN / HART
A 4 to 20 mA DC output signal from the CHECK
IMPORTANT (+) and SUPPLY terminals.
(Note) Use a check meter whose internal resistance is 10 or
Analog output may change temporally in less.
connecting with BRAIN terminal due to an initial
current flowed to it. To prevent communication Check meter Transmitter terminal box Power supply
+
signal affecting the upper system, it is
recommended to install a low-pass filter
(approximately 0.1s)

F0604.ai

Figure 6.7 Check Meter Connection

IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-3
6.3.5 Status Output Connection (2) 4 to 20 mA output, Intrinsically Safe Type
When option code /AL is specified, connect the With the intrinsically safe type, a safety barrier must
external wiring as shown in Figure 6.5. be included in the loop.
To configure and activate the process alarm Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
function and status output, it is necessary to set
Transmitter terminal box
some parameters. Refer to each communication Distributor
manual for procedures. (Power supply unit)

Transmitter
24V DC
terminal box Shielded cable Receiver
+ instrument
Distributor
250

Safety barrier F0607.ai


Magnetic
valve Figure 6.10 Connection between Transmitter and
External power
supply 30V DC, Distributor
120mA max
Use two-wire separately shielded cables. AC power supply
F0605.ai
(3) 1 to 5 V output
Figure 6.8 Status Output Connection Either three or four wire system is used.
Power supply line and 1 to 5 V signal line commonly
use the SUPPLY - terminal.
6.4 Wiring
6.4.1 Loop Configuration
NOTE
Since the DPharp uses a two-wire transmission With three wire connection, the cable length may
system for 4 to 20 mA output, signal wiring is also affect the measurement accuracy of the output
used as power wiring. signal.
In either three-wire or four-wire connection,
DC power is required for the transmitter loop. The recommended wiring distance is 200 m or less,
transmitter and distributor are connected as shown and the use of shielded cable is recommended.
below.
For details of the power supply voltage and load Three wire connection
resistance, see section 6.6; for communications line For three wire system, a negative wiring shall be
requirements, see section 9.1. commonly used for power supply and signal line.
For 1 to 5 V output, three or four wire system is
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
used. See (3).
Transmitter terminal box
Distributor
(1) 4 to 20 mA output, General-use Type and (Power supply unit)
Flameproof Type
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location

Transmitter terminal box


Distributor
(Power supply unit)

Receiver Receiver
instrument instrument

F0606.ai F0617.ai

Figure 6.9 Connection between Transmitter and Figure 6.11 Connection between Transmitter,
Distributor Distributer and Receiver

IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-4
Four wire connection (2) Flameproof Type
Fasten the negative side wiring of both power
Wire cables through a flameproof packing adapter,
supply and signal line to the SUPPLY - terminal.
or use a flameproof metal conduit.
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
Wiring cable through flameproof packing
Transmitter terminal box adapter.
Distributor
(Power supply unit) Apply a non-hardening sealant to the terminal
box connection port and to the threads on the
flameproof packing adapter for waterproofing.

Flameproof packing
adapter

Flexible metal conduit


Receiver
instrument Wiring metal
Apply a non-hardening
conduit
sealant to the threads for
F0618.ai
waterproofing.
Tee
Figure 6.12 Connection between Transmitter,
Distributer and Receiver Drain plug
F0609.ai

Figure 6.14 Typical Cable Wiring Using Flameproof


6.4.2 Wiring Installation Packing Adapter

(1) General-use Type and Intrinsically Safe Flameproof metal conduit wiring
Type A seal fitting must be installed near the terminal
box connection port for a sealed construction.
With the cable wiring, use a metallic conduit or
Apply a non-hardening sealant to the threads of
waterproof glands.
the terminal box connection port, flexible metal
Apply a non-hardening sealant to the terminal conduit and seal fitting for waterproofing.
box connection port and to the threads on the
Gas sealing device
flexible metal conduit for waterproofing. Non-hazardous area

Flameproof flexible
metal conduit
Hazardous area
Flexible metal conduit Apply a non-hardening
Flameproof
Apply a non-hardening heavy-gauge sealant to the threads of
Wiring metal steel conduit these fittings for
conduit sealant to the threads for
waterproofing. waterproofing

Tee Tee Seal fitting


Drain plug After wiring, impregnate the fitting
Drain plug F0608.ai with a compound to seal tubing.
F0610.ai
Figure 6.13 Typical Wiring Using Flexible Metal
Conduit Figure 6.15 Typical Wiring Using Flameproof Metal
Conduit

IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-5
6.5 Grounding
Grounding is always required for the proper
operation of transmitters. Follow the domestic
electrical requirements as regulated in each
country. For a transmitter with a built-in lightning
protector, grounding should satisfy ground
resistance of 10 or less.
Ground terminals are located on the inside and
outside of the terminal box. Either of these terminals
may be used.

Ground terminal
(inside)

Ground terminal
(outside)

F0611.ai

Figure 6.16 Ground Terminals

6.6 Power Supply Voltage and


Load Resistance
For 4 to 20 mA output only.
When configuring the loop, make sure that the
external load resistance is within the range in the
figure below.
(Note) In case of an intrinsically safe transmitter, external load
resistance includes safety barrier resistance.

600

External E10.5
R= Communication
load 0.0244
applicable range
resistance BRAIN and HART
R ()

250

0 10.5 16.6 25.2 42


Power supply voltage E (V DC)
F0612.ai

Figure 6.17 Relationship between Power Supply


Voltage and External Load Resistance

IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-1

7. Operation Tap valve

Vent plug (Fill plug)


Union or flange
7.1 Preparation for Starting
Operation
This section describes the operation procedure for
the EJ530 as shown in figure 7.1. Stop valve

NOTE
Tee
Check that the process pressure tap valves,
Union or flange
drain valves, and stop valves are closed.
Drain valve
(a) Follow the procedures below to introduce
Drain plug
process pressure into the impulse piping and
F0701.ai
transmitter.
Figure 7.1 Liquid Flow Measurement
1) Open the tap valve (main valve) to fill the (Gauge Pressure Transmitters)
impulse piping with process fluid.
2) Gradually open the stop valve to introduce
process fluid into the transmitter pressure- Confirming that Transmitter is Operating
detector section. Properly
3) Confirm that there is no pressure leak in
Using the BT200
the impulse piping, transmitter, or other
components. IMPORTANT
(b) Turn ON power and connect the communicator.
Analog output may change temporally in
Open the terminal box cover, and connect
connecting with BRAIN terminal due to
the communicator to the SUPPLY + and
an initial current flowed to it. To prevent
terminals.
communication signal affecting the upper
(c) Using the communicator, confirm that the system, it is recommended to install a low-
transmitter is operating properly. Check pass filter (approximately 0.1s).
parameter values or change the setpoints as Communication signal is superimposed on
necessary. analog output signal. It is recommended
See IM 01C25T03-01E (BRAIN to set a low-pass filter (approximately
communication) or IM 01C25T01-06EN (HART 0.1s) to the receiver in order to reduce the
communication) for communicator operation. output effect from communication signal.
If the transmitter is equipped with an integral Before online-communication, confirm that
indicator, its indication can be used to confirm communication signal does not give effect on
that the transmitter is operating properly. the upper system.

If the wiring system is faulty, communication


error appears on the display.
If the transmitter is faulty, SELF CHECK
ERROR appears on the display.

PARAM
C60:SELF CHECK
ERROR
communication error

DATA DIAG PRNT ESC

Communication error Self-diagnostic error


(Faulty wiring) (Faulty transmitter)
F0702.ai

Figure 7.2 BT200 Display

IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-2
Using the integral indicator
If the wiring system is faulty, the display stays
IMPORTANT
blank. Do not turn off the power to the transmitter
If the transmitter is faulty, an error code is immediately after performing a zero point
displayed. adjustment. Powering off within 30 seconds of
performing this procedure will return the zero
point to its previous setting.

NOTE
Before performing this adjustment, make sure
Self-diagnostic error on the integral indicator
(Faulty transmitter) that the external zero adjustment function has
F0703.ai
NOT been disabled by a parameter setting.
Figure 7.3 Integral Indicator with Error Code

To check the output signal, use a digital multimeter,


NOTE calibrator, or communicator.

If any of the above errors are indicated on


the display of the integral indicator or the
communicator, refer to subsection 8.5.3 for the
corrective action.

Verify and Change Transmitter Parameter Zero-adjustment


screw cover
Setting and Values F0704.ai

The parameters related to the following items are Figure 7.4 External Zero-adjustment Screw
set at factory as specified in order.
Calibration range The zero-adjustment screw is located inside the
Integral indicator display cover.
Software damping (optional)
Other parameters like following are shipped with the (1) When you can obtain the Low Range Value
default setting. from the actual measured value of 0% (0
Low-cut kPa, atmospheric pressure);
Process alarm setting
For pressure measurement using gauge pressure
Signal characterizer
transmitters, follow the steps below before
Write protection
performing zero point adjustment.
To confirm or change the values, see IM 01C25T01-
06EN or 01C25T03-01E. 1) Close the tap valve (main valve).
2) Loosen the fill plug so that the pressure applied
7.2 Zero Point Adjustment to the transmitter is only the head of the seal
liquid.
After completing preparations for operating the 3) Adjust the zero point at this status.
transmitter, adjust the zero point. 4) After the adjustment, close the fill plug and then
Zero point adjustment can be done by turning the gradually open the tap valve.
transmitters zero-adjustment screw or by using Use a slotted screwdriver to turn the zero-
the communicator. This section describes the adjustment screw. Turn the screw clockwise
procedure for the zero-adjustment screw. For the to increase the output or counterclockwise to
communicator procedure, see the communication decrease the output. The zero point adjustment can
manual. be made with a resolution of 0.01% of the setting
range. Since the degree of the zero adjustment
varies with the screw turning speed, turn the screw
slowly to make a fine adjustment and quickly to
make a rough adjustment.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-3
(2) When you cannot obtain the Low Range 7.4 Shutting Down the
Value from the actual measured value of 0%;
Transmitter
Adjust the transmitter output to the actual measured
Shut down the transmitter as follows.
value obtained by a digital manometer or a glass
Steps 2) and 3) are specific to the differential
gauge.
pressure transmitters.
[Example]
1) Turn off the power.
The measuring range of 50 to 250 kPa; the actual 2) Close the stop valve.
measured value of 130 kPa. 3) Open the equalizing valve.
4) Close the high pressure stop valve.
13050
Actual measured value= x100=40.0% 5) Close the tap valves.
25050
(=10.4mA)
NOTE
Turn the screw to match the output signal to the
actual measured value. Whenever shutting down the transmitter for a
long period, remove any process fluid that is
in the transmitter pressure-detector section.
7.3 Starting Operation
The equalizing valve must be left OPEN.
After completing the zero point adjustment, follow
the procedures below to start operation. Steps
1) and 2) are specific to the differential pressure
7.5 Local Parameter Setting
transmitters.
1) Confirm the operating status. If the output
WARNING
signal exhibits wide fluctuations (hunting) due to
periodic variation in the process pressure, use The local push button on the integral indicator
the communicator to dampen the transmitter must not be used in a hazardous area. When it is
output signal. Confirm the hunting using a necessary to use the push button, operate it in a
receiving instrument or the integral indicator, non- hazardous location.
and set the optimum damping time constant.
2) After confirming the operating status, perform
the following. IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power to the transmitter
immediately after performing parameter
Remove the communicator from the terminal
setting. Powering off within 30 seconds of
box, and confirm that none of the terminal
performing this procedure will return the
screws are loose.
parameter to its previous setting.
Close the terminal box cover and the
The parameter of Ext SW must beEnabled
amplifier cover. Screw each cover in tightly
to perform this configuration. See the users
until it will not turn further.
manual IM 01C25T (HART/BRAIN) for the
There are two covers that must be locked
setting procedure.
on the ATEX Flameproof type transmitters.
The Local Parameter Setting function
An Allen head bolt (shrouding bolt) under
is available with HART or BRAIN
the edge of each cover is used to lock the
communication type.
cover. When the shrouding bolt is driven
LCD update will be slower at low ambient
counterclockwise with an Allen wrench, the
temperature, and it is recommended to use
bolt rotates upward and locks the cover. (See
LPS function at temperatures above -10
section 8.4.) After locking the covers, confirm
degrees C.
that they are secure and cannot be opened
by hand.
Tighten the zero-adjustment cover mounting
screw to secure the cover.
Tighten the zero-adjustment cover mounting
screw to secure the cover.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-4
7.5.1 Local Parameter Setting (LPS) Overview
Parameter configuration by the external adjustment screw and push button (integral indicator code E) offers
easy and quick setup for parameters of Tag number, Unit, LRV, URV, Damping,Output mode (linear/square
root), Display out 1, and Re-range by applying actual pressure (LRV/URV). There is no effect on measurement
signal (analog output or communication signal) when Local Parameter Setting is carried out.

Integral indicator

External adjustment
screw cover
Push-button
F0705.ai F0706.ai

Figure 7.5 External Adjustment Screw Figure 7.6 Range Setting Switch (push button)

screw

Process
Measurement Zero adjustment
Display push
Activate LPS mode
push
*
1. Tag Number Edit Tag number Save/Cancel the value

*
2. Press Unit Select Press unit Save/Cancel the value

push *
3. Press LRV Edit Press LRV Save/Cancel the value

*
4. Press URV Edit Press URV Save/Cancel the value

push *
5. Damping Time Edit Damping time Save/Cancel the value

*
6. Output Mode Select Output mode Save/Cancel the value

push *
7. Display Out1 Edit Display Out1 Save/Cancel the value

8. LRV-Apply Press Set LRV Save/Cancel the value

push
9. URV-Apply Press Set URV Save/Cancel the value

8, 9 : Re-range by applying actual pressure


10. Device Information

Process
Measurement
Display
F0707.ai

*: Note that the above 1 to 7 parameter configurations are available with the software revision (SOFT REV)2.03 or later.
Software revision can be checked via a field communicator (HART/BRAIN) or DTM. Please refer to IM 01C25T01 for HART
parameter Software rev and IM 01C25T03 for BRAIN SOFT REV.
Figure 7.7

IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-5
7.5.2 Activating Local Parameter Setting
Press the push button on the integral indicator to activate the Local Parameter Setting mode. The transmitter
will exit automatically from the Local Parameter Setting mode if no operation is carried out for 10 minutes.

7.5.3 Parameter Setting Review


Current setting value for the below parameters are shown sequentially by each press of the push button.
Tag number, Unit, LRV, URV, Damping,Output mode (linear/square root), Display out 1.
Process
Measurement
Display

push

push

push
push

push
push

push
push

push Process
Measurement
Display
F0708.ai

*: [Software revision: 2.03] Up to 6 characters are shown in the bottom line. To review after the 7th character, turn the external
adjustment screw and press the push button six times or more.
[Software revision: 3.01 or later] The display automatically scrolls to show all the characters.

To configure each parameter value, turn the external adjustment screw on each parameter screen after
activating the Local Parameter Setting mode.
To cancel the Local Parameter Setting configuration, please refer to 7.5.11 Save or Cancel and 7.5.12 Abort
Configuration.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-6
7.5.4 Tag Number Configuration
Tag Number is edited by turning the external adjustment screw. Up to 8 alphanumeric characters for HART or
16 alphanumeric characters for BRAIN can be set.

Save ?/
Cancel ?

Blinking Blinking
Set all other
characters in the
Go to the next Character same way
Change the first Character

screw

push
F0709.ai

7.5.5 Pressure Unit Configuration


Pressure unit for the below table can be changed as below. By turning the external adjustment screw, user can
scroll between the various available pressure units.

Save ?/
Cancel ?

Blinking Blinking
[Available pressure units]
Select by the push button
kPa bar inH2O@4degC(39.2degF)
Torr mbar inH2O@20degC(68degF)
atm g/cm2 inHg
MPa kg/cm2 ftH2O@4degC(39.2degF)
screw hPa Pa ftH2O@20degC(68degF)
push mmHg mmH2O@4degC(39.2degF)
psi mmH2O@20degC(68degF)
In addition to the above units, mmAq@4degC,
mmAq@20degC, mmWG@4degC and mmWG@20degC
are available for BRAIN communication type.
F0710.ai

7.5.6 Pressure LRV/URV Configuration


Pressure LRV and URV can be set. The number for each digit is changed by turning the external adjustment
screw and set by pressing the push button. Please refer to 7.5.7 Damping Time Constant Configuration for
how to change the numerical value.
When the setting is out of the limit, an alarm will be generated.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-7
7.5.7 Damping Time Constant Configuration
The damping time constant for the amplifier assembly can be set. Quick Response Parameter is automatically
set to ON when the damping time constant is set to less than 0.5 seconds. Damping time constant is rounded off
to two decimal places.

Save ?/
Cancel ?

Blinking Blinking Blinking


Set all other
characters in the
same way
Change the first digit Go to the next
Character
screw Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00 (seconds)

push
F0711.ai

7.5.8 Output Mode Configuration 3) Apply a pressure of 0 kPa (atmospheric


pressure) to the transmitter. (Note 1)
Pressure Output Mode (Linear or Sq root) can be
4) Turn the external adjustment screw in the
selected by turning the external adjustment screw.
desired direction. The integral indicator displays
Please refer to 7.5.5 Pressure Unit Configuration for
the output signal in %. (Note 2)
how to select and set the enumerated value.
5) Adjust the output signal to 0% (1 V DC) by
7.5.9 Display Out 1 Configuration rotating the external adjustment screw. Press
the push button to save the value. Doing so
Display Out1 can be selected by turning the completes the LRV setting. (Note 3)
external adjustment screw. Please refer to 7.5.5 6) Press the push-button. The integral indicator
Pressure Unit Configuration for how to select and then displays URV.SET.
set the enumerated value. 7) Apply a pressure of 3 MPa to the transmitter.
(Note 1)
7.5.10 Re-range by applying actual 8) Turn the external adjustment screw in the
pressure (LRV/URV). desired direction. The integral indicator displays
This feature allows the lower and upper range the output signal in %. (Note 2)
values to be setup with the actual input applied. 9) Adjust the output signal to 100% (5 V DC)
by rotating the external adjustment screw.
Press the button to save the value.Doing so
completes the URV setting.
10) Press the push-button. The transmitter then
switches back to the normal operation mode
F0712.ai with the measurement range of 0 to 3 MPa.
Follow the procedure below to change the LRV and Note 1: Wait until the pressure inside the pressure-detector
section has stabilized before proceeding to the next
URV settings. step.
Note 2: If the pressure applied to the transmitter exceeds the
[Example] previous LRV (or URV), the integral indicator may
display error number AL.30 (In this case, the output
Rerange LRV to 0 and URV to 3 MPa. signal percent and AL.30 are displayed alternately
every two seconds). Although AL.30 is displayed,
1) Connect the transmitter and apparatus as you may proceed to the next step. However, should
shown in Figure 8.1 and warm it up for at least any other error number be displayed, take the
appropriate measure in reference to , Errors and
five minutes. Countermeasures in each communication manual.
2) Press the push-button. The integral indicator Note 3 : Changing the lower range value (LRV) also
automatically changes the upper range value (URV),
then displays LRV.SET. keeping the span constant. New URV=previous
URV+(new LRVprevious LRV)

IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-8
7.5.11 Save or Cancel 7.5.12.2 Abort Configuration (Parameter)
At the end of each parameter setting, select Save To exit the configuration while editing the value,
or Cancel by the external adjustment screw hold down the button for over 2 seconds and select
and press the push button to save or cancel the Save or Cancel.
configuration.

Save or Cancel

Tag editing Return to


(3rd Character) parameter review window
Save? Saved
Push for Save or Cancel?
After push Over 2 seconds
F0715.ai
parameter screw
setting
7.5.13 Local Parameter Setting Lock
To disable parameter changes by the Local
Parameter Setting there are three different ways.
Locked features
Cancel? Canceled Communication Parameter External Zero
push Ext SW =disable Adjustment
(EXT ZERO ADJ = disable) Local Parameter Setting
F0713.ai Communication Parameter Local Parameter Setting
Write Protect = On All Communication
7.5.12 Abort Configuration (WRT PROTECT = Yes) Parameters *
Hardware write protection Local Parameter Setting
7.5.12.1 Abort Configuration (Menu) switch on CPU assembly = All Communication
D (Disable) Parameters *
Hold down the push button for over 2 seconds to *External Zero Adjustment is unlocked.
exit the Local Parameter Setting mode.
The above parameter setting is carried out by
Process Measurement Display using field communicator or DTM. See the users
manual IM 01C25T (HART/BRAIN) for the setting
1. Tag Number
procedure.
Reviewing local parameter setting by push button
2. Press Unit
on the integral indicator is available at any time
3. Press LRV
even when the Local Parameter Setting is locked.
7.5.14 Others
4. Press URV
Hold down the button Difference between BRAIN and HART
for over 2 seconds
Jump to the normal mode

5. Damping Time HART BRAIN


Up to 8 Up to 16
6. Output Mode Tag Number characters can characters can
be set be set
TRNS.FC OUT.MOD
7. Display Out1 Output Mode
shown on the shown on the
(Linear/Sq root)
integral indicator integral indicator
8. LRV-Apply Press
The degree of adjustment depends on the
9. URV-Apply Press speed of turning the adjustment screw. Turn the
screw slowly for fine tuning and turn the screw
Process Measurement Display fast for quick tuning.

Proccess Value

F0714.ai

IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-1

8. Maintenance
8.1 Overview 8.3 Calibration
Use the procedure below to check instrument
WARNING operation and accuracy during periodic
maintenance or troubleshooting.
Since the accumulated process fluid may be
toxic or otherwise harmful, take appropriate care 1) Connect the instruments as shown in figure 8.1
to avoid contact with the body or inhalation of and warm up the instruments for at least ten
vapors when draining condensate or venting gas minutes.
from the transmitter pressure-detector section
and even after dismounting the instrument from IMPORTANT
the process line for maintenance.
To adjust the transmitter for highest
accuracy, make adjustments with the
Maintenance of the transmitter is easy due to its power supply voltage and load resistance
modular construction. This chapter describes the including leadwire resistances set close to
procedures for calibration, adjustment, and the the conditions under which the transmitter is
disassembly and reassembly procedures required installed.
for component replacement. If the measurement range 0% point is
Transmitters are precision instruments. Please 0 kPa or shifted in the positive direction
carefully and thoroughly read the following sections (suppressed zero), the reference pressure
for information on how to properly handle them should be applied as shown in the figure.
while performing maintenance. If the measurement range 0% point is shifted
in the negative direction (elevated zero), the
IMPORTANT reference pressure should be applied using
a vacuum pump.
As a rule, maintenance of this transmitter
should be done in a shop that has all the 2) Apply reference pressures of 0%, 50%,
necessary tools. and 100% of the measurement range to the
The CPU assembly contains sensitive parts transmitter. Calculate the errors (differences
that can be damaged by static electricity. between digital voltmeter readings and
Take precautions such as using a grounded reference pressures) as the pressure is
wrist strap when handling electronic parts or increased from 0% to 100% and is decreased
touching the board circuit patterns. Also be from 100% to 0%, and confirm that the errors
sure to place the removed CPU assembly are within the required accuracy.
into a bag with an antistatic coating.

8.2 Calibration Instruments


Selection
Table 8.1 lists the instruments that can be used
to calibrate a transmitter. When selecting an
instrument, consider the required accuracy level.
Exercise care when handling these instruments to
ensure they maintain the specified accuracy.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-2
Table 8.1 Instruments Required for Calibration
Name Yokogawa-recommended Instrument Remarks
Power supply Model SDBT or SDBS distributor 4 to 20 mA DC signal
Load resistor Model 2792 standard resistor [250 0.005%, 3 W]
Load adjustment resistor [100 1%, 1 W]
Voltmeter Model 2501 A digital multimeter
Accuracy (10V DC range): (0.002% of rdg + 1 dgt)
Digital Model MT220 precision digital manometer Select a manometer having
manometer 1) For 10 kPa class a pressure range close to
Accuracy: (0.015% of rdg + 0.015% of F.S.) . . . . for 0 to 10 kPa that of the transmitter.
(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . for -10 to 0 kPa
2) For 130 kPa class
Accuracy: 0.02% of rdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for 25 to 130 kPa
5digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 25 kPa
(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . for -80 to 0 kPa
3) For 700 kPa class
Accuracy: (0.02% of rdg + 3digits) . . . . . . . . . . . . for 100 to 700 kPa
5 digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 100 kPa
(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . for -80 to 0 kPa
4) For 3000 kPa class
Accuracy: (0.02% of rdg + 10 digits) . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 3000 kPa
(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . for -80 to 0 kPa
5) For 130 kPa abs class
Accuracy: (0.03% of rdg + 6 digits) . . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 130 kPa abs
Pressure Model 7674 pneumatic pressure standard for 200 kPa {2 kgf/cm2}, 25 kPa Requires air pressure
generator {2500 mmH2O} supply.
Accuracy: 0.05% of F.S.
Dead weight gauge tester 25 kPa {2500 mmH2O} Select the one having a
Accuracy: 0.03% of setting pressure range close to that
of the transmitter.
Pressure Model 6919 pressure regulator (pressure pump) Prepare the vacuum pump
source Pressure range: 0 to 133 kPa {1000 mmHg} for negative pressure
ranges.
Note: The above table contains the instruments capable of performing calibration to the 0.2% level. Since special maintenance and
management procedures involving traceability of each instrument to higher-level standards are required for calibration to the 0.1%
or higher level, there may be difficulties in calibration to this level in the field. For calibration to the 0.1% or higher level, use proper
instruments for required level or contact Yokogawa representatives from which the instrument was purchased or the nearest
Yokogawa office.

If a pressure generator If a pressure source and


is used: a manometer are combined:

Load resistance, Power Load resistance, Power


250 supply 250 supply
E E
Load Rc R Load Rc R
adjustment adjustment
resistance, V resistance, V
100 Digital voltmeter 100 Digital voltmeter
Reference pressure Reference pressure
P Model 7674 pneumatic P
pressure standards Model MT220
precision digital manometer

Supply pressure Pressure source


F0801.ai

Figure 8.1 Instrument Connections (4 to 20 mA output)

IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-3
8.4 Disassembly and 8.4.1 Replacing the Integral Indicator
Reassembly
CAUTION
This section describes procedures for disassembly
and reassembly for maintenance and component Cautions for Flameproof Type Transmitters
replacement. Users are prohibited by law from modifying the
Always turn OFF power and shut off and release construction of a flameproof type transmitter.
pressures before disassembly. Use proper tools for This would invalidate the agency approval for the
all operations. Table 8.2 shows the tools required. use of the transmitter in a rated area.
It follows that the user is prohibited from using
Table 8.2 Tools for Disassembly and Reassembly a flameproof type transmitter with its integral
Tool Quantity Remarks indicator removed, or from adding an integral
Phillips 1 JIS B4633, No. 2 indicator to a transmitter. If such modification is
screwdriver absolutely required, contact Yokogawa.
Slotted 1
screwdriver
This subsection describes the procedure for
Allen wrenches 3 JIS B4648
One each, nominal 3, 4 and replacing an integral indicator. (See figure 8.3)
2.5 mm Allen wrenches
Wrench 1 Width across flats, 17 mm Removing the Integral Indicator
Torque wrench 1
1) Remove the cover.
Adjustable 1
wrench 2) While supporting the integral indicator with one
Socket wrench 1 Width across flats, 16 mm hand, loosen its two mounting screws.
Socket driver 1 Width across flats, 5.5 mm 3) Dismount the LCD board assembly from the
Tweezers 1 CPU assembly.
When doing this, carefully pull the LCD board
assembly straight forward so as not to damage
CAUTION the connector pins between it and the CPU
assembly.
Precautions for ATEX Flameproof Type
Attaching the Integral Indicator
Transmitters
Flameproof type transmitters must be, as 1) Align both the LCD board assembly and CPU
a rule, removed to a non-hazardous area assembly connectors and engage them.
for maintenance and be disassembled and 2) Insert and tighten the two mounting screws.
reassembled to the original state. 3) Replace the cover.
On the flameproof type transmitters the two Output terminal cable
covers are locked, each by an Allen head bolt
(shrouding bolt). When a shrouding bolt is
driven clockwise by an Allen wrench, it is going
in and cover lock is released, and then the Press
cover can be opened. forward

When a cover is closed it should be locked Slide


by a shrouding bolt without fail. Tighten the switch

shrouding bolt to a torque of 0.7 Nm. Integral


Boss
indicator Zero-
adjustment
CPU assembly screw
Bracket
(for zero-adjustment
screw pin)
Zero-adjustment
LCD board assembly screw pin
Mounting screw
Amplifier Cover

Shrouding Bolt
F0803.ai

Shrouding Bolt F0802.ai Figure 8.3 Removing and Attaching LCD Board
Figure 8.2 Shrouding Bolts Assembly and CPU Assembly

IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-4
8.4.2 Replacing the CPU Board Assembly
NOTE
This subsection describes the procedure for
replacing the CPU assembly. (See figure 8.3) Confirm that the zero-adjustment screw pin is
placed properly in the groove on the bracket prior
Removing the CPU Assembly to tightening the two bosses. If it is not, the zero-
1) Remove the cover. If an integral indicator is adjustment mechanism will be damaged.
mounted, refer to subsection 8.4.1 and remove
the indicator. 5) Replace the cover.
2) Turn the zero-adjustment screw to the position
8.4.3 Cleaning and Replacing the Capsule
(where the screw head slot is horizontal) as
Assembly
shown in figure 8.3.
3) Disconnect the output terminal cable (cable This subsection describes the procedures for
with brown connector at the end). When doing cleaning and replacing the capsule assembly. (See
this, lightly press the side of the CPU assembly figure 8.4.)
connector and pull the cable connector to
disengage.
4) Use a socket driver (width across flats, 5.5mm) CAUTION
to loosen the two bosses.
Cautions for Flameproof Type Transmitters
5) Carefully pull the CPU assembly straight
Users are prohibited by law from modifying the
forward to remove it.
construction of a flameproof type transmitter. If
6) Disconnect the flat cable (cable with white
you wish to replace the capsule assembly with
connector at the end) that connects the CPU
one of a different measurement range, contact
assembly and the capsule.
Yokogawa.
The user is permitted, however, to replace a
NOTE capsule assembly with another of the same
Be careful not to apply excessive force to the measurement range. When doing so, be sure to
CPU assembly when removing it. observe the following.
The replacement capsule assembly must
have the same part number as the one being
Mounting the CPU Assembly replaced.
1) Connect the flat cable (with white connector) The section connecting the transmitter and
between the CPU assembly and the capsule. capsule assembly is a critical element in
2) Connect the output terminal cable (with brown preservation of flameproof performance, and
connector). must be checked to verify that it is free of
dents, scratches, and other defects.
NOTE After completing maintenance, be sure to
securely tighten the setscrews that fasten the
Make certain that the cables do not get pinched transmitter section and pressure-detector
between the case and the edge of the CPU section together.
assembly.

3) Align and engage the zero-adjustment screw


pin with the groove on the bracket on the CPU
assembly. Then insert the CPU board assembly
straight onto the post in the amplifier case.
4) Tighten the two bosses. If the transmitter is
equipped with an integral indicator, refer to
subsection 8.4.1 to mount the indicator.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-5
Removing the Capsule Assembly Transmitter section

IMPORTANT
Hexagon
Exercise care as follows when cleaning the head screw

capsule assembly. Stopper


Handle the capsule assembly with care, and
be especially careful not to damage or distort
Setscrew
the diaphragms that contact the process
fluid.
Do not use a chlorinated or acidic solution for
cleaning.
Rinse thoroughly with clean water after
cleaning.

1) Remove the CPU assembly as shown in


subsection 8.4.2.
2) Remove the two setscrews that connect the
transmitter section and pressure-detector Capsule assembly
section. F0804.ai

3) Remove the hexagon-head screw and the Figure 8.4 Removing and Mounting the Pressure-
stopper. detector Section
4) Separate the transmitter section and capsule
assembly.
5) Clean the capsule assembly or replace with a 8.5 Troubleshooting
new one.
If any abnormality appears in the measured values,
Reassembling the Capsule Assembly use the troubleshooting flow chart below to isolate
and remedy the problem. Since some problems
1) Insert the capsule assembly to the transmitter
have complex causes, these flow charts may
section. Reattach the sopper with the hexagon-
not identify all. If you have difficulty isolating or
head screw.
correcting a problem, contact Yokogawa service
2) Tighten the two setscrews. (Tighten the screws
personnel.
to a torque of 1.5 Nm)
3) Install the CPU assembly according to
subsection 8.4.2.
4) After completing reassembly, adjust the zero
point and recheck the parameters.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-6
8.5.1 Basic Troubleshooting 8.5.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts
First determine whether the process variable
The following sorts of symptoms indicate that transmitter
is actually abnormal or a problem exists in the may not be operating properly.
Example : There is no output signal.
measurement system. Output signal does not change even though
process variable is known to be varying.
If the problem is in the measurement system, Output value is inconsistent with value
isolate the problem and decide what corrective inferred for process variable.

action to take.
This transmitter is equipped with a self-diagnostic Connect communicator and check self-diagnostics.
function which will be useful in troubleshooting,
and the transmitter equipped with an integral
indicator will show an alarm code as a result of self- Does the self-diagnostic YES
diagnosis. indicate problem location?

See subsection 8.5.3 for the list of alarms.


See also each communication manual. NO Refer to error message summary in
Subsection 8.5.3 or in each
: Areas where self-diagnostic offers support communication manual to take actions.

Abnormalities appear in measurement.


Is power supply NO
polarity correct?

YES Is process variable YES Refer to Section 6.3 to check/correct


itself abnormal? polarity at each terminal from power
supply to the terminal box.

Inspect the NO
Measurement system problem Are power
process system. NO
supply voltage and load
resistance correct?

Isolate problem in
measurement system. YES Refer to Section 6.6 for rated voltage
and load resistance.

Are valves opened or NO


YES Does problem exist in closed correctly?
receiving instrument?

YES Fully close equalizing valve, and fully


NO open high pressure and low pressure
Inspect receiver. valves.

YES
Environmental conditions Transmitter itself Is there any pressure leak?

Check/correct NO Fix pressure leaks, paying particular


Check transmitter.
environmental conditions. attention to connections for impulse
Operating conditions piping,pressure-detector section, etc.

Is there
Check/correct operating continuity through the NO
conditions. transmitter loop wiring?
F0805.ai Do the loop numbers
match?
Figure 8.5 Basic Flow and Self-Diagnostics
Find/correct broken conductor or
YES
wiring error.

Contact Yokogawa service personnel.


F0806.ai

IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-7

Output travels beyond 0% or 100%. Large output error.

Connect a communicator and check self-diagnostics. Connect a communicator and check self-diagnostics.

Does the self- YES Does the self- YES


diagnostic indicate problem diagnostic indicate problem
location? location?

NO Refer to error message summary in NO Refer to error message summary in


each communication manual to take each communication manual to take
actions. actions.

Are valves opened or NO


Is power supply NO
closed correctly?
polarity correct?

YES Fully close equalizing valve, and fully


YES Refer to Section 6.3 to check/correct open high pressure and low pressure
polarity at each terminal from power valves.
supply to the terminal box.

Is impulse piping NO
Are valves opened or NO
connected correctly?
closed correctly?

YES Refer to individual model user manuals


YES Fully close equalizing valve, and fully and connect piping as appropriate for
open high pressure and low pressure the measurement purpose.
valves.

Are power supply NO


YES voltage and load resistance
Is there any pressure leak?
correct?

NO YES Refer to Section 6.6 for rated voltage


Fix pressure leaks, paying particular and load resistance.
attention to connections for impulse
piping, pressure-detector section, etc.

Is transmitter
installed where there is YES
Is impulse piping NO
to high pressure and low marked variation in
pressure side correct? temperature?

Provide lagging and/or cooling, or allow


YES Refer to individual model user manuals NO adequate ventilation.
and connect piping as appropriate for
the measurement purpose.

Were appropriate NO
Is zero point NO instruments used for
adjusted correctly? calibration?

YES Refer to Section 8.2 when selecting


YES Adjust the zero point. instruments for calibration.

NO
Contact Yokogawa service personnel. Is output adjusted correctly?
F0807.ai

YES Adjust the output.

Contact Yokogawa service personnel.


F0808.ai

IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-8
8.5.3 Alarms and Countermeasures
Table 8.3 Alarm Message Summary
Output Operation
Indicator Cause Countermeasure
during Error
None
AL. 01 Sensor problem. Outputs the signal (Hold, High, or Replace capsule when error
CAP. ERR Capsule temperature sensor Low) set with parameter. keeps appearing even after
problem. restart.
Capsule EEPROM problem.
AL. 02 Amplifier temperature sensor Outputs the signal (Hold, High, or Replace amplifier.
AMP. ERR problem. Low) set with parameter.
Amplifier EEPROM problem.
Amplifier problem.
AL. 10 Input is outside measurement Outputs high range limit value or Check input or replace capsule
PRESS range limit of capsule. low range limit value. when necessary.
AL. 11 Static pressure exceeds limit. Continues to operate and output.
ST. PRSS
AL. 12 Capsule temperature is outside Use heat insulation or make
CAP. TMP range (50 to 130C). lagging to keep temperature
AL. 13 Amplifier temperature is outside within range.
AMP. TMP range (50 to 95C)
AL. 30 Output is outside upper or lower Outputs high range limit value or Check input and range setting,
RANGE range limit value. low range limit value. and change them as needed.
AL. 31 Static pressure exceeds specified Continues to operate and
SP. RNG range. output.
AL. 35 *1 Input pressure exceeds specified Check input.
P. HI threshold.
AL. 36 *1
P. LO
AL. 39 *1 Detected temperature exceeds
TMP. HI specified threshold.
AL. 40 *1
TMP. LO
AL. 50 Specified value is outside of setting Holds output immediately before Check setting and change them
P. LRV range. error occurred. as needed.
AL. 51
P. URV
AL. 52
P. SPN
AL. 53 Continues to operate and output. Check input.
P. ADJ
AL. 60 Specified values or settings to Continues to operate and output. Check setting and change
SC. CFG define signal characterizer function them as needed.
do not satisfy the condition.
AL. 79 Displayed value exceeds limit.
OV. DISP

*1: These alarms may appear only when process alarm function is activated.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-1

9. General Specifications
9.1 Standard Specifications EJX610A (Values are absolute pressure)
Measurement
MPa psi (/D1) bar (/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4)
Refer to IM 01C25T02-01E for FOUNDATION Span/Range
Fieldbus communication type and IM 01C25T04- A
Span 2 to 200 kPa 0.3 to 29 0.02 to 2 0.02 to 2
01EN for PROFIBUS PA communication type for Range 0 to 200 kPa 0 to 29 0 to 2 0 to 2
the items marked with . Span 0.01 to 2 1.5 to 290 0.1 to 20 0.1 to 20
B
Range 0 to 2 0 to 290 0 to 20 0 to 20
Span 0.05 to 10 7.3 to 1450 0.5 to 100 0.5 to 100
Performance Specifications C
Range 0 to 10 0 to 1450 0 to 100 0 to 100
50.8 to
See General Specifications sheet for each model. D
Span 0.35 to 70
10150
3.5 to 700 3.5 to 700
Range 0 to 70 0 to 10150 0 to 700 0 to 700
Functional Specifications
EJA530E
Measurement
Span & Range Limits MPa psi(/D1) bar(/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4)
Span/Range
EJX530A Span
10 to 200
1.45 to 29 0.1 to 2 0.1 to 2
Measurement kPa
MPa psi(/D1) bar(/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4) A
Span/Range -100 to
Range -14.5 to 29 -1 to 2 -1 to 2
Span 8 to 200kPa 1.16 to 29 0.08 to 2 0.08 to 2 200 kPa
A -100 to Span 0.1 to 2 14.5 to 290 1 to 20 1 to 20
Range -14.5 to 29 -1 to 2 -1 to 2 B
200 kPa Range -0.1 to 2 -14.5 to 290 -1 to 20 -1 to 20
Span 0.04 to 2 5.8 to 290 0.4 to 20 0.4 to 20 Span 0.5 to 10 72.5 to 1450 5 to 100 5 to 100
B C
Range -0.1 to 2 -14.5 to 290 -1 to 20 -1 to 20 Range -0.1 to 10 -14.5 to 1450 -1 to 100 -1 to 100
Span 0.2 to 10 29 to 1450 2 to 100 2 to 100 Span 5 to 50* 720 to 7200* 50 to 500* 50 to 500*
C D
Range -0.1 to 10 -14.5 to 1450 -1 to 100 -1 to 100 Range -0.1 to 50* -14.5 to 7200* -1 to 500* -1 to 500*
Span 1 to 50 145 to 7200 10 to 500 10 to 500 *: 70 MPa, 10150 psi, 700 bar or 700 kgf/cm2 when /HG is
D
Range -0.1 to 50 -14.5 to 7200 -1 to 500 -1 to 500 specified.

EJA510E (Values are absolute pressure)


EJX510A (Values are absolute pressure)
Measurement
Measurement MPa psi(/D1) bar(/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4)
MPa psi(/D1) bar(/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4) Span/Range
Span/Range
10 to 200
Span 8 to 200 kPa 1.16 to 29 0.08 to 2 0.08 to 2 Span 1.45 to 29 0.1 to 2 0.1 to 2
A A kPa
Range 0 to 200 kPa 0 to 29 0 to 2 0 to 2 Range 0 to 200 kPa 0 to 29 0 to 2 0 to 2
Span 0.04 to 2 5.8 to 290 0.4 to 20 0.4 to 20 Span 0.1 to 2 14.5 to 290 1 to 20 1 to 20
B B
Range 0 to 2 0 to 290 0 to 20 0 to 20 Range 0 to 2 0 to 290 0 to 20 0 to 20
Span 0.2 to 10 29 to 1450 2 to 100 2 to 100 Span 0.5 to 10 72.5 to 1450 5 to 100 5 to 100
C C
Range 0 to 10 0 to 1450 0 to 100 0 to 100 Range 0 to 10 0 to 1450 0 to 100 0 to 100
Span 1 to 50 145 to 7200 10 to 500 10 to 500 Span 5 to 50* 720 to 7200* 50 to 500* 50 to 500*
D D
Range 0 to 50 0 to 7200 0 to 500 0 to 500 Range 0 to 50* 0 to 7200* 0 to 500* 0 to 500*

*: 70 MPa, 10150 psi, 700 bar or 700 kgf/cm2 when /HG is
EJX630A specified.
Measurement
MPa psi (/D1) bar (/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4)
Span/Range
Span 2 to 200 kPa 0.3 to 29 0.02 to 2 0.02 to 2
A -100 to 200
Range -14.5 to 29 -1 to 2 -1 to 2
kPa
Span 0.01 to 2 1.5 to 290 0.1 to 20 0.1 to 20
B
Range -0.1 to 2 -14.5 to 290 -1 to 20 -1 to 20
Span 0.05 to 10 7.3 to 1450 0.5 to 100 0.5 to 100
C
Range -0.1 to 10 -14.5 to 1450 -1 to 100 -1 to 100
50.8 to
Span 0.35 to 70 3.5 to 700 3.5 to 700
10150
D
-14.5 to
Range -0.1 to 70 -1 to 700 -1 to 700
10150

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-2
Output Integral Indicator (LCD display)
5-digit Numerical Display, 6-digit Unit Display
For 4 to 20 mA output
and Bar graph.
(Output signal code D, E and J)
The indicator is configurable to display one or
Two wire 4 to 20 mA DC output with digital
up to four of the following variables periodically.;
communications, linear or square root
Pressure in %, Scaled pressure, pressure in
programmable. BRAIN or HART FSK protocol
Engineering unit.
are superimposed on the 4 to 20 mA signal.
See Setting When Shipped for factory setting.
Output range: 3.6 mA to 21.6 mA
Output limits conform to NAMUR NE43 can be Burst Pressure Limits
pre-set by option C2 or C3. EJ510 and EJ530
Capsule Pressure
For 1 to 5 V output
(Output signal code Q) A, B, C 30 MPa (4350 psi)
Three or four wire low power 1 to 5 V DC output D* 132 MPa (19100 psi)
with HART, linear or square root programmable. *: 182 MPa (26300 psi) for EJA510E and EJA530E when
/HG is specified.
HART protocol is superimposed on the 1 to 5 V
DC signal. EJX610A and EJX630A
Output range: 0.9 V to 5.4 V DC Capsule Pressure
A, B, C 50 MPa (7200 psi)
Failure Alarm
D 182 MPa (26300 psi)
For 4 to 20 mA output
(Output signal code D, E and J)
Analog output status at CPU failure and Normal Operating Condition
hardware error; (Selected features may affect limits.)
Up-scale: 110%, 21.6 mA DC or more
Ambient Temperature Limits
(standard)
40 to 85C (40 to 185F)
Down-scale: 5%, 3.2 mA DC or less
30 to 80C (22 to 176F) with LCD display
For 1 to 5 V output
Process Temperature Limits
(Output signal code Q)
40 to 120C (40 to 248F)
Analog output status at CPU failure and
hardware error; Ambient Humidity Limits
Up-scale: 110%, 5.4 V DC or more 0 to 100% RH
(standard) Working Pressure Limits (Silicone oil)
Down-scale: 5%, 0.8 V DC or less
Maximum Pressure Limits
Damping Time Constant (1st order)
Amplifier damping time constant is adjustable Pressure
Capsule EJ510 EJ530
from 0 to 100.00 seconds and added to
A 200 kPa abs (29 psia) 200 kPa (29 psig)
response time.
Note: For BRAIN protocol type, when amplifier damping B 2 MPa abs (290 psia) 2 MPa (290 psig)
is set to less than 0.5 seconds, communication C 10 MPa abs (1450 psia) 10 MPa (1450 psig)
may occasionally be unavailable during the D* 50 MPa abs (7200 psia) 50 MPa (7200 psig)
operation, especially while output changes
dynamically. The default setting of damping *: 70 MPa(10150 psi) for EJA510E and EJA530E when
ensures stable communication. /HG is specified.
Pressure
Update Period Capsule EJX610A EJX630A
45 ms A 200 kPa abs (29 psia) 200 kPa (29 psi)
Zero Adjustment Limits B 2 MPa abs (290 psia) 2 MPa (290 psi)
Zero can be fully elevated or suppressed, within C 10 MPa abs (1450 psia) 10 MPa (1450 psi)
D 70 MPa abs (10150 psia) 70 MPa (10150 psi)
the lower and upper range limits of the capsule.
Minimum Pressure Limit
External Zero Adjustment
External Zero is continuously adjustable with See graph below
0.01% incremental resolution of span. Re-range
can be done locally using the digital indicator
with range-setting switch.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-3
100(750) Pressure
Capsule EJX610A EJX630A
A 4 MPa abs (580 psia) 4 MPa (580 psi)
B 16 MPa abs (2300 psia) 16 MPa (2300 psi)
10(75)
C 25 MPa abs (3600 psia) 25 MPa (3600 psi)
D 105 MPa abs (15200 psia) 105 MPa (15200 psi)
Working 2.7(20)
pressure Applicable range
1(7.5) Supply & Load Requirements
kPa abs
(mmHg abs)
For output signal code D, E, and J.
0.13(1) (Optional features or approval codes may
0.1(0.75) affect electrical requirements.)
With 24 V DC supply, up to a 550 load can be
used. See graph below.
0.013(0.1)
0.01(0.075)
-40 0 40 80 120
(-40) (32) (104) (176) (248)
600
85 (185) E-10.5
Process temperature C(F) R=
F0901.ai
External 0.0244 Digital
load Communication
Figure 9.1 Working Pressure and Process range
resistance
Temperature [For EJ510 and BRAIN and HART
EJX610A]
250

R ()
Atmospheric
100(14.5)
pressure
Working
pressure 10.5 16.6 25.2 42
kPa abs Power supply voltage E (V DC)
(psia) F0903.ai
Applicable range
10(1.4) Figure 9.3 Relationship Between Power Supply
Voltage and External Load Resistance

2.7(0.38)
Supply Voltage

1(0.14) For 4 to 20 mA output


-40 0 40 80 120 (Output signal code D, E and J)
(-40) (32) (104) (176) (248)
10.5 to 42 V DC for general use and flameproof
Process temperature C (F)
F0902.ai type.
Figure 9.2 Working Pressure and Process 10.5 to 32 V DC for lightning protector (Option
Temperature [For EJ530 and code /A).
EJX630A]
10.5 to 30 V DC for intrinsically safe, type n or
non-incendive type.
Maximum Over Pressure Minimum voltage limited at 16.6 V DC for digital
Pressure communications, BRAIN and HART
Capsule EJ510 EJ530 For 1 to 5 V output
A and B 4 MPa abs (580 psia) 4 MPa (580 psig) (Output signal code Q)
C 20 MPa abs (2900 psia) 20 MPa (2900 psig) Power supply :
D* 75 MPa abs (10800 psia) 75 MPa (10800 psig) 9 to 28 V DC for general use and flame proof
*: 60 MPa (8700 psi) for EJA510E and EJA530E. 105 type.
MPa for EJA510E and EJA530E when /HG is specified. Power Consumption :
0.96 mA to 3 mA, 27 mW

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-4
Load for 4 to 20 mA output EMC Conformity Standards
(Output signal code D, E and J) EN 61326-1 Class A, Table2 (For use in
0 to 1290 for operation industrial locations)
250 to 600 for digital communication EN 61326-2-3
EN 61326-2-5 (for Fieldbus)
Output Load for 1 to 5 V output
(Output signal code Q) Immunity influence during the test
1 M or greater (meter input impedance) Pressure: Output shift is specified within 1% of
1/20 Max span.
Communication Requirements
Static pressure: Output shift is specified within
(Safety approvals may affect electrical
2% of 1MPa span.
requirements.)
Status Output Line*: Continues to operate
BRAIN without reversal.
*: Only for /AL option.
Communication Distance
Up to 2 km (1.25 miles) when using CEV Condition for EMC test for FOUNDATION fieldbus
polyethylene-insulated PVC-sheathed cables. type: The shield of the cable and the case
Communication distance varies depending on are connected with a capacitor of 10nF.
type of cable used.
Physical Specifications
Load Capacitance
0.22 F or less Wetted Parts Materials

Load Inductance Diaphragm, Process Connector


3.3 mH or less Refer to Model and Suffix Code.

Input Impedance of communicating device Non-wetted Parts Materials


10 k or more at 2.4 kHz.
Housing
HART Low copper cast aluminum alloy with
Communication Distance polyurethane paint or ASTM CF-8M stainless
Up to 1.5 km (1 mile) when using multiple steel
twisted pair cables. Communication distance Degrees of Protection
varies depending on type of cable used. IP66/IP67, NEMA TYPE 4X
Use the following formula to determine cable Pipe
length for specific applications: Polypropylene
65 106 (Cf + 10,000)
L= Cover O-rings
(R C) C
Buna-N, fluoro-rubber (option)
Where:
L = length in meters or feet Nameplate and tag
R = resistance in (including barrier 316SST (including /N4 wired tag)
resistance) Fill Fluid
C = cable capacitance in pF/m or pF/ft Silicone, Fluorinated oil (option)
Cf = maximum shunt capacitance of receiving
Weight
devices in pF/m or pF/ft
Capsule A, B and C: 1. 2kg (2.6 lb)*
Capsule D: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb)*
*: Without integral indicator and mounting bracket.
Add 1.5 kg (3.3lb) for Amplifier housing code 2.
Connections
Refer to Model and Suffix Code.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-5
9.2 Model and Suffix Codes
Model Suffix Codes Description
EJX510A ...................... Absolute pressure transmitter
EJX530A ...................... Gauge pressure transmitter
Output -D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC Output with digital communication (BRAIN protocol)
signal -E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC Output with digital communication (HART protocol)
-J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC with digital communication (HART 5/HART 7 protocol)
-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol,
refer to IM 01C25T02-01E)
-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (PROFIBUS PA protocol,
refer to IM 01C25T04-01EN)
Measurement A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 to 200 kPa (1.16 to 29 psi)
span (capsule) B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.04 to 2 MPa (5.8 to 290 psi)
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 to 10 MPa (29 to 1450 psi)
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 50 MPa (145 to 7200 psi)
Wetted parts Process connector Diaphragm Others
material S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316L SST Hastelloy C-276 *1 316L SST
H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hastelloy C-276 *1 Hastelloy C-276 *1 Hastelloy C-276 *1
Process 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female
connections 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT male
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1/2 DIN 16 288 male *2
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M201.5 DIN 16 288 male *2
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . Always N
-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . Always 0
Amplifier housing 1 . . . . . . . . . . Cast aluminum alloy
2 . . . . . . . . . . ASTM CF-8M Stainless steel*4
3 . . . . . . . . . . Cast aluminum alloy with corrosion resistance properties
Electrical connection 0 . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, one electrical connection without blind plugs
2 . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections without blind plugs
4 . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections without blind plugs
5 . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections with a blind plug
7 . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections with a blind plug
9 . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections with a blind plug
A . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections with a 316SST blind plug
C . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections with a 316SST blind plug
D . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections with a 316SST blind plug
Integral indicator D . . . . . . Digital indicator*5
E . . . . . . Digital indicator with the range setting switch (push button)*3
N . . . . . . None
Mounting bracket F . . . . . 304 SST 2-inch pipe mounting
L . . . . . 316 SST 2-inch pipe mounting
N . . . . . None
Optional codes / Optional specification
The marks indicate the most typical selection for each specification. Example: EJX530A-DAS4N-012NN/.
*1: Hastelloy C-276 or ASTM N10276.
*2: Not applicable for combination of capsule code D and wetted parts material code H.
*3: Not applicable for output signal code F.
*4: Not applicable for electrical connection code 0, 5, 7 and 9.
*5: Not applicable for output signal code G.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-6

Model Suffix Codes Description


EJX610A ...................... Absolute pressure transmitter
EJX630A ...................... Gauge pressure transmitter
Output -D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC Output with digital communication (BRAIN protocol)
signal -E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC Output with digital communication (HART protocol)
-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol,
refer to IM 01C25T02-01E)
-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (PROFIBUS PA protocol,
refer to IM 01C25T04-01EN)
Measurement A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 to 200 kPa (0.3 to 29 psi)
span (capsule) B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.01 to 2 MPa (1.5 to 290 psi)
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 to 10 MPa (7.3 to 1450 psi)
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.35 to 70 MPa (50.8 to 10150 psi)
Wetted parts Process connector Diaphragm Others
material *4 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316L SST Hastelloy C-276 *1 316L SST
H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hastelloy C-276 *1 Hastelloy C-276 *1 Hastelloy C-276 *1
Process 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female
connections 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT male
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1/2 DIN 16 288 male *2
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M201.5 DIN 16 288 male *2
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . Always N
-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . Always 0
Amplifier housing 1 . . . . . . . . . . Cast aluminum alloy
2 . . . . . . . . . . ASTM CF-8M Stainless Steel *5
3 . . . . . . . . . . Cast aluminum alloy with corrosion resistance properties
Electrical connection 0 . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, one electrical connection without blind plugs
2 . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections without blind plugs
4 . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections without blind plugs
5 . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections with a blind plug *6
7 . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections with a blind plug *6
9 . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections with a blind plug *6
A . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections and a 316 SST blind plug
C . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections and a 316 SST blind plug
D . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections and a 316 SST blind plug
Integral indicator D . . . . . . Digital indicator *7
E . . . . . . Digital indicator with the range setting switch (push button)*3
N . . . . . . None
Mounting bracket F . . . . . 304 SST 2-inch pipe mounting
L . . . . . 316 SST 2-inch pipe mounting
N . . . . . None
Optional codes / Optional specification

The marks indicates the most typical selection for each specification. Example: EJX630A-DAS4N-012NN/.
*1: Hastelloy C-276 or ASTM N10276.
*2: Not applicable for combination of capsule code D and wetted parts material code H.
*3: Not applicable for output signal code F.
*4: Users must consider the characteristics of selected wetted parts material and the influence of process fluids. The use of
inappropriate materials can result in the leakage of corrosive process fluids and cause injury to personnel and/or damage to plant
facilities. It is also possible that the diaphragm itself can be damaged and that material from the broken diaphragm and the fill fluid
can contaminate the userfs process fluids.
Be very careful with highly corrosive process fluids such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrogen sulfide, sodium hypochlorite,
and high-temperature steam (150C [302F] or above). Contact Yokogawa for detailed information of the wetted parts material.
*5: Not applicable for electrical connection code 0, 5, 7 or 9.
*6: Material of a blind plug is aluminum alloy or 304 SST.
*7: Not applicable for output signal code G.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-7

Model Suffix Codes Description


EJA510E ...................... Absolute pressure transmitter
EJA530E ...................... Gauge pressure transmitter
Output -D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC Output with digital communication (BRAIN protocol)
signal -J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC Output with digital communication
(HART 5/HART 7 protocol)*1
-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol,
refer to IM 01C25T02-01EN)
-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (PROFIBUS PA protocol,
refer to IM 01C25T04-01EN)
-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Power, 1 to 5 V DC with digital communication (HART 7 protocol)
Measurement A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 200 kPa (1.45 to 29 psi)
span (capsule) B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 to 2 MPa (14.5 to 290 psi)
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 to 10 MPa (72.5 to 1450 psi)
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 to 50 MPa (720 to 7200 psi) *10
Wetted parts Process connector Diaphragm Others
material *2 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316L SST Hastelloy C-276 *3 316L SST
H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hastelloy C-276 *3 Hastelloy C-276 *3 Hastelloy C-276 *3
Process 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female
connections 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT male
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1/2 DIN 16 288 male *4
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M201.5 DIN 16 288 male *4
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . Always N
-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . Always 0
Amplifier housing 1 . . . . . . . . . . Cast aluminum alloy
2 . . . . . . . . . . Cast aluminum alloy with corrosion resistance properties *5
3 . . . . . . . . . . ASTM CF-8M stainless steel *6
Electrical connection 0 . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, one electrical connection without blind plugs
2 . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections without blind plugs
4 . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections without blind plugs
5 . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections with a blind plug *7
7 . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections with a blind plug *7
9 . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections with a blind plug *7
A . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections and a 316 SST blind plug
C . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections and a 316 SST blind plug
D . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections and a 316 SST blind plug
Integral indicator D . . . . . . Digital indicator *9
E . . . . . . Digital indicator with the range setting switch (push button)*8
N . . . . . . None
Mounting bracket L . . . . . 316 SST 2-inch pipe mounting
N . . . . . None
Optional codes / Optional specification
The marks indicates the most typical selection for each specification. Example: EJA530E-DAS4N-012NN/.
*1: HART 5 or HART 7 is selectable. Specify upon ordering.
*2: Users must consider the characteristics of selected wetted parts material and the influence of process fluids. The use of
inappropriate materials can result in the leakage of corrosive process fluids and cause injury to personnel and/or damage to plant
facilities. It is also possible that the diaphragm itself can be damaged and that material from the broken diaphragm and the fill fluid
can contaminate the userfs process fluids.
Be very careful with highly corrosive process fluids such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrogen sulfide, sodium hypochlorite,
and high-temperature steam (150C [302F] or above). Contact Yokogawa for detailed information of the wetted parts material.
*3: Hastelloy C-276 or ASTM N10276.
*4: Not applicable for combination of capsule code D and wetted parts material code H.
*5: Not applicable for electrical connection code 0, 5, 7, 9 and A. Content rate of copper in the material is 0.03% or less and content rate
of iron is 0.15% or less.
*6: Not applicable for electrical connection code 0, 5, 7 or 9.
*7: Material of a blind plug is aluminum alloy or 304 SST.
*8: Not applicable for output signal code F.
*9: Not applicable for output signal code G.
*10: 5 to 70 MPa (720 to 10150 psi) when /HG is specified.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-8
9.3 Optional Specifications
Item Description Code
Factory Mutual (FM) FM Explosionproof *1
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
FF1
Dust-ignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G
Hazardous (classified) locations, indoors and outdoors (NEMA 4X)
FM Intrinsically safe *1*3
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D, Class II,
Division 1,Groups E, F and G and Class III, Division 1 Hazardous Locations. FS1
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D, Class II,
Division 2, Groups F and G, Hazardous Locations.
Combined FF1 and FS1 *1*2 FU1
ATEX ATEX Flameproof *1
II 2G, 2D Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb, Ex tb IIIC T85C Db KF22
Special fastener: ClassA2-50(A4-50) or more
ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ia *1*2
KS21
II 1G, 2D Ex ia IIC T4 Ga, Ex ia IIIC T85C T100C T120C Db
Combined KF22, KS21 and ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ic *1*3
KU22
Ex ic: II 3G Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
Canadian Standards CSA Explosionproof *1
Association (CSA) [For CSA C22.2]
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
Dustignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G
[For CSA E60079]
CF1
Flameproof for Zone1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 Enclosure IP66/IP67
Process Sealing Certification
Dual Seal Certified by CSA to the requirement of ANSI/ISA 12.27.01
No additional sealing required
Primary seal failure annunciation: at the zero adjustment screw
CSA Intrinsically safe *1 *2
[For CSA C22.2]
Intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D, Class II,
Division 1, Groups E,F and G, Class III, Division 1
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D, Class II,
Division 2, Groups F and G, Class III, Division 1
CS1
[For CSA E60079]
Ex ia IIC T4, Ex nL IIC T4
Process Sealing Certification
Dual Seal Certified by CSA to the requirement of ANSI/ISA 12.27.01
No additional sealing required
Primary seal failure annunciation: at the zero adjustment screw
Combined CF1 and CS1 *1*2 CU1
IECEx IECEx flameproof *1
Flameproof for Zone1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb SF2
Special fastener: ClassA2-50(A4-50) or more
IECEx Intrinsically safe, type n and flameproof *1*2
Intrinsically safe and type n
Ex ia IIC T4, Ex nL IIC T4
SU2
Flameproof
Flameproof for Zone1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb
Special fastener: ClassA2-50(A4-50) or more
IECEx Intrinsically safe and flameproof *1*2
Intrinsically safe
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga, Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
SU21
Flameproof
Flameproof for Zone1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb
Special fastener: ClassA2-50(A4-50) or more
Combination of Approval Combination of KU22, FU1 and CU1 V1U1

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-9
Item Description Code
High Accuracy type *19 High accuracy HAC
Painting Color change Amplifier cover only P
Amplifier cover and terminal cover, Munsell 7.5 R4/14 PR
Coating change Anti-corrosion coating*3 X2
316 SST exterior parts *4 316 SST name plate, tag plate and zero adjustment screw HC
Fluoro-rubber O-ring All O-rings of amplifier housing. Lower limit of ambient temperature: 15C (5F) HE
Lightning protector Transmitter power supply voltage:
10.5 to 32 V DC (10.5 to 30 V DC for intrinsically safe type, 9 to 32 V DC for
Fieldbus communication type.) A
Allowable current: Max. 6000 A (140 s), Repeating 1000 A (140 s) 100 times
Applicable Standards: IEC 61000-4-4, IEC 61000-4-5
Status output *5 Transistor output (sink type)
AL
Contact rating: 10.5 to 30 VDC, 120 mA DC(max) Low level: 0 to 2 VDC
Oil-prohibited use Degrease cleansing treatment. K1
Degrease cleansing treatment with fluorinated oilfilled capsule.
K2
Operating temperature 20 to 80C( 4 to 176F)
Capsule fill fluid Fluorinated oil filled in capsule
K3
Operating temperature 20 to 80C( 4 to 176F)
Calibration units *6 P calibration (psi unit) D1
(See Table for Span and
bar calibration (bar unit) D3
Range Limits.)
M calibration (kgf/cm2 unit) D4
Output limits and failure Failure alarm down-scale: Output status at CPU failure and hardware error is
C1
operation *7 5%, 3.2 mA DC or less. *21
NAMUR NE43 Compliant Failure alarm down-scale: Output status at CPU
C2
Output signal limits: failure and hardware error is 5%, 3.2 mA DC or less.
3.8 mA to 20.5 mA *22 Failure alarm up-scale: Output status at CPU
C3
failure and hardware error is 110%, 21.6 mA or more.
Gold-plated diaphragm *15 Surface of isolating diaphragm is gold plated, effective for hydrogen permeation. A1
Wired tag plate 304 SST tag plate wired onto transmitter N4
Data configuration at Data configuration for HART Software damping, Descriptor, Message
CA
factory *8 communication type
Data configuration for BRAIN Software damping
CB
communication type
Advanced diagnostics *16 Multi-sensing process monitoring
Impulse line blockage detection *17 DG6
Heat trace monitoring
European Pressure PED 97/23/EC
Equipment Directive *18 Category: III, Module: H, Type of Equipment; Pressure Accessory-Vessel, PE3
Type of Fluid; Liquid and gas, Group of Fluid: 1 and 2
Material Certificate *9 Process connector M15
Pressure test/ Test Pressure: 200 kPa (2 kgf/cm2) *10 T05
Leak test certificate Test Pressure: 2 MPa (20 kgf/cm2) *11 T06
Test Pressure: 10 MPa (100 kgf/cm2) *12 Nitrogen(N2) Gas or Water *14 T07
Retention time: one minute
Test Pressure: 50 MPa (500 kgf/cm2) *13 T08
Test Pressure: 70 MPa (10150 psi) *20 T15
High pressure-proof Maximum working pressure: 70MPa.
HG
structure*
Contact Yokogawa representative for the codes indicated as -.
*1: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2, 4, 7, and 9.
*2: Not applicable for option code /AL.
*3: Not applicable with color change option.
*4: This specification is included when amplifier case code 2 is specified.
*5: Check/External indicator terminals cannot be used when this option code is specified. Not applicable for output signal code F.
*6: The unit of MWP (Max. working pressure) on the name plate of a housing is the same unit as specified by option codes D1, D3, and D4.
*7: Applicable for output signal codes D, E and J. The hardware error indicates faulty amplifier or capsule.
*8: Also see Ordering Information.

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-10
*9: Material traceability certification, per EN 10204 3.1B.
*10: Applicable for capsule code A.
*11: Applicable for capsule code B.
*12: Applicable for capsule code C.
*13: Applicable for capsule code D of EJ510 and EJ530.
*14: Pure nitrogen gas or pure water is used for oil-prohibited use (option codes K1 and K2).
*15: Applicable for wetted parts material code S.
*16: Applicable only for output signal code -E and -J.
*17: The change of pressure fluctuation is monitored and then detects the impulse line blockage. See TI 01C25A31-01E for detailed
technical information required for using this function.
*18: Applicable for measurement span code D. If compliance with category III is needed, specify this option code.
*19: Applicable for EJX630A, EJA510E and EJA530E.
Not applicable for the combination of measurement span code A and wetted parts material code H.
Not applicable for option code K2, K3 or A1.
When specified range value includes minus value for A capsule, the accuracy shall be the standard accuracy even if high accuracy
option (/HAC) is specified.
*20: Applicable for capsule code D of EJX610A and EJX630A. Applicable also for EJA510E and EJA530E with /HG.
*21: Output status at CPU failure and hardware error is 5%, 0.8V DC or less for output signal code Q.
*22: The 1 to 5 V voltage output corresponding to 4 to 20 mA current output is applied to output signal code Q which is non-compliant to
NAMUR NE43.
*23: Applicable for capsule code D of EJA510E and EJA530E.

9.4 Dimensions

Model EJ510, EJ530, EJX610A and EJX630A


Unit: mm (approx. inch)
With Process connections code 7
95(3.74) 188(7.40)
60(2.36)*2 Integral indicator
Zero 110(4.33)
(optional)
Extenal indicator adjustment 39
12
Conduit connection Conduit connection
(0.47) (1.54)
(optional)
78(3.07)

(2.76)
70
126(4.96)

110(4.33)
54
159(6.26)

(2.13)
(6.50)
165

6
(0.24)
Ground terminal

Open to
Electrical connection atmosphere*1
for code 5, 9, A, and D.

Mounting bracket 2-inch pipe


12*3 (O.D. 60.5 mm) 129(5.08)
(optional)
(0.47)
*1: Only for EJ530 and EJX630A whose measurement span code is A, B, or C.
*2: 58 mm(2.28 inch) for measurement span code D.
*3: 11 mm(0.43 inch) for measurement span code D.

With Process connections code 4


(6.14)
156

With Process connections code 8 and 9


24(0.94)

(6.77)
172

6
5(0.20)

(0.24)
F0904.ai

IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-11

Terminal Configuration Terminal Wiring for 4 to 20 mA output,


FOUNDATION Fieldbus type, and PROFIBUS PA type.
+ 1
Power supply and output terminals
SUPPLY 2

CHECK + 3 External indicator (ammeter) terminals*1*2


2
or or
+ 3 Status contact output terminals*2
ALARM 2 (when /AL is specified)
Ground terminal
*1: When using an external indicator or check meter, the internal
resistance must be 10 or less. A check meter or indicator
Terminal 1 Terminal 3 cannot be connected when /AL option is specified.
Terminal 2 *2: Not available for FOUNDATION Fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA
communication types.

Terminal Wiring for 1 to 5 V output


+ 1
Power supply terminals
SUPPLY 2

VOUT + 3 1 to 5 V DC with HART communication


2 terminals
Ground terminal
F0905.ai

IM 01C25F01-01E
i

Revision Information
Title : Absolute Pressure and Gauge Pressure Transmitters
EJ510, EJ530, EJX610A and EJX630A
Manual No. : IM 01C25F01-01E

Edition Date Page Revised Item


1st Aug. 2004 New publication.
11th June 2014 1-2 1. Add note for symbols.
2-6 2.9.2 Revise category for CSA Nonincendive.
2-13 2.12 Update safety requirement standard.
6-1 to 6-4 6. Revise drawings and symbols for terminal.
6-1 6.3.1 Add note for power supply.
6-2, 7-1 Add note for BRAIN communication.
7-3 to 7-8 7.5 Add local parameter setting function.
9-10 9.4 Change terminal drawing.
12th Oct. 2014 2-3 2.8 Add information for 1 to 5 V output.
2-5 2.9.1 Add information for 1 to 5 V output.
2-7, 2-8 2.9.2 Add information for 1 to 5 V output.
2-9 to 2-11 2.9.3 Add information for 1 to 5 V output.
2-13 2.9.4 Add EPL code. Revise applicable standard. Add information for
1 to 5 V output. Add note for electro static charge. Add electrical
connection.
2-14 2.10 Add standard for PROFIBUS.
6-1 6.3 Add Figure 6.1 Terminal.
6-2 6.3.3 Add information for 1 to 5 V output.
6-3 to 6-4 6.4 Add information for 1 to 5 V output.
6-5 6.6 Add applicability.
7-4 7.5.1 Add 10.Device information in Figure 7.7.
7-5 7.5.3 Add note in the figure.
7-6 7.5 Add 7.5.6 Pressure LRV/URV Configuration.
7-7 7.5 Add 7.5.8 Output Mode Configuration and 7.5.9 Display Out 1
Configuration.
8-8 8.5.3 Correct AL31 output operation.
9-2 to 9-4 9.1 Add information for 1 to 5 V output.
Add information for /HG.
9-4 Add EMC standard for PROFIBUS and EMI specification.
9-7 9.2 Add output signal code Q
9-8 9-3 Revise the description for SU2 and SF2.
9-9 Add /HG
9-11 9.4 Add information for 1 to 5 V output.
13th July 2015 1-2 Add trademark statement.
1-3 1.1 Add (g) and (h).
2-1 2.1 Replace Figure 2.2.
2-5, 2-7, 2-9, 2-15 Delete /V1F.
2-6, 2-7 2.9.2 Add No.61010-2-030.
2-12 2.9.3 (6) Replace nameplate.
2-12 to 2-13 2.9.4 Add SU21. Add a and b.
2-15 2.10 Change the note for EN 61326-2-5.
2-16 2.12 Add C22.2 standards.
7-4 7.5.1 Delete note for -Q in Figure 7.7.
7-5 7.5.3 Change note in the figure.
9-4 9.1 Revise descriptions for EMC conformity standards.
9-5 to 9-7 9.2 Delete #.
9-8 9.3 Add SU21.

IM 01C25F01-01E
1.2InstructionManualforMagneticFlowmeter
ApplicableModel Area
AXF300GE1UL1LBA1141B PRASEDIMENTASI
AXF300GE1UL1LBA1141B RESERVOIRIPA
Users
Manual AXF Series
Magnetic Flowmeter
Installation Manual

IM 01E20A01-01EN

Contents

1. Introduction
1.1 Using the Magnetic Flowmeter Safely.........................2 1
1.2 Warranty.......................................................................4
1.3 Combination for Flowtube and Remote Converter......4
2. Handling Precautions 2
2.1 Checking Model and Specifications.............................5
2.2 Storage Precautions....................................................5
3. Installation 3
Integral Flowmeter Remote Flowtube
3.1 Piping Design Precautions...........................................6
(AXFG, (AXFG, 3.2 Handling Precautions...................................................8
AXFC, AXFC, 3.3 Installation of Integral Flowmeter and Remote 4
AXFH) AXFH, Flowtube.......................................................................9
AXFW) 3.4 Installation of Remote Converter.............................. 27
4. Wiring 5
4.1 Wiring the Integral Flowmeter................................... 29
4.2 Wiring the Remote Flowtube..................................... 35
4.3
4.4
Wiring the AXFA14 Remote Converter..................... 40
Wiring the AXFA11 Remote Converter..................... 46
6
5. Basic Operating Procedures
5.1
5.2
Operating Procedures Using the Display Unit.......... 52
Operating Panel Configuration and Functions......... 52
7
5.3 Display Unit Setting Methods.................................... 53
5.4 Parameter Setting Procedure................................... 55
Remote Converter Remote Converter
5.5 BRAIN / HART Connection....................................... 57 8
(AXFA11G) (AXFA14G, AXFA14C)
6. Operation
6.1 Pre-operation Zero Adjustment................................. 59
This manual outlines the basic guidelines for installation and wiring 6.2 Zero Adjustment Using Display Unit Switches.......... 59 9
procedures of the ADMAG AXF Series. For the items which are not 6.3 Write Protect Switch.................................................. 60
covered in this manual, see the users manuals in the following table.
7. Errors and Countermeasures for Display unit
Note: For FOUNDATION fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA type, refer to
IM 01E20A01-02EN in addition to this manual. and BRAIN protocol
10
For ATEX or IECEx explosion proof type, refer to 8. Parameter Summary
IM 01E20A01-11EN in addition to this manual.
8.1 Menu tree for DD (HART 5)....................................... 64
Document No. Document Title 8.2 Parameter List (BRAIN)............................................ 67

IM 01E20D01-01E
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter/ 9. Approvals
Remote Flowtube [Hardware Edition]
10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument
AXFA11G Magnetic Flowmeter Remote Converter
IM 01E20C01-01E 10.1 ATEX......................................................................... 77
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition]
10.2 FM............................................................................. 77
AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote Converter 10.3 CSA........................................................................... 80
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition] 10.4 IECEx........................................................................ 81
IM 01E20C02-01E
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter
10.5 TIIS............................................................................ 82
[Software Edition]
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT (EX-B03E)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
3rd Edition
<1. Introduction> 1

1. Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the ADMAG AXF Magnetic
flowmeter. NOTE
This manual provides the basic guidelines for installation
and wiring procedures of integral flowmeter, remote When describing the model name like AXFC in
flowtube, and remote converter of the AXF magnetic this manual, means any of the following.
flowmeters through front panel, BRAIN protocol, and 002, 005, 010, 015, 025, 032, 040, 050, 065, 080, 100,
HART protocol. 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
It does not provide the product specific functional
specifications and explanations, maintenance,
troubleshooting, FOUNDATION fieldbus and PROFIBUS
Safety and Modification Precautions
PA communication operating procedures. For the items The following general safety precautions must be
which are not covered in this manual, see the applicable observed during all phases of operation, service,
users manuals as listed in Table 1.1. These manuals and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with
can be downloaded from the website of Yokogawa. To these precautions or with specific WARNINGS given 1
ensure correct use of the instrument, read these manuals elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards
of design, manufacture, and intended use of the

Introduction
thoroughly and fully understand how to operate the
instrument before operating it. For method of checking instrument. Yokogawa assumes no liability for the
the model and suffix code, refer to Section 2.1. customers failure to comply with these requirements.
If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in
Website address: http://www.yokogawa.com/fld/doc/ this manual, the protection provided by this instrument
may be impaired.
Table 1.1 Manual List Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or
Model Document Title Document No. damage resulting from any modification made to this
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter/ instrument by the customer.
IM 01E20D01-01E
AXFG
Remote Flowtube [Hardware Edition] The following safety symbol marks are used in this
AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote
AXFC Converter users manual and instrument.
AXFH
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition] IM 01E20C02-01E
AXFW
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter
[Software Edition]
AXFA11G Magnetic Flowmeter Remote
WARNING
AXFA11G Converter IM 01E20C01-01E
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition] A WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention
AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote
to procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if
Converter
AXFA14G
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition] IM 01E20C02-01E not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
AXFA14C
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter injury or death of personnel.
[Software Edition]

In case of selecting the communication code (The first


two characters of suffix code) -F, further refer to the
following manual. CAUTION
Communication
Model Document Title Document No.
Code A CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention
AXFG
AXFC ADMAG AXF Series to procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if
AXFH
-F
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
IM 01E20F02-01E not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
AXFW Communication Type
AXFA14G Magnetic Flowmeter damage to or destruction of part or all of the product.
AXFA14C

In case of selecting the communication code (The first


two characters of suffix code) -G, further refer to the
following manual.
Communication
Model Document Title Document No.
Code
AXFG
AXFC
AXF PROFIBUS PA
AXFH
-G Communication Type IM 01E20F12-01E
AXFW
Magnetic Flowmeter
AXFA14G
AXFA14C
Note:  means any of the following.
002, 005, 010, 015, 025, 032, 040, 050, 065, 080, 100,
125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400

3rd Edition: May 2016 (KP) IM 01E20A01-01EN


All Rights Reserved, Copyright 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
<1. Introduction> 2
Trademarks:
IMPORTANT
All the brands or names of Yokogawa Electrics
An IMPORTANT sign denotes that attention is products used in this manual are either trademarks
required to avoid damage to the instrument or system or registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric
failure. Corporation.
All other company and product names mentioned
in this manual are trade names, trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
NOTE In this manual, trademarks or registered trademarks
are not marked with or .
A NOTE sign denotes information necessary for
essential understanding of operation and features.
1.1 Using the Magnetic
Protective grounding terminal
Flowmeter Safely
Functional grounding terminal
(1) Installation
(This terminal should not be used as a
protective grounding terminal.)
Alternating current WARNING
Direct current
Installation of the magnetic flowmeter must be
Caution performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel.
This symbol indicates that the operator must No operator shall be permitted to perform
refer to an explanation in the users manual procedures relating to installation.
in order to avoid the risk of injury or death of The magnetic flowmeter must be installed within
personnel or damage to the instrument. the specification conditions.
The magnetic flowmeter is a heavy instrument.
Be careful that no damage is caused to personnel
Regarding This Users Manual
through accidentally dropping it, or by exerting
This manual should be provided to the end user. excessive force on the magnetic flowmeter. When
Before use, read this manual thoroughly to moving the magnetic flowmeter, always use a
comprehend its contents. trolley and have at least two people carry it.
The contents of this manual may be changed without When the magnetic flowmeter is processing hot
prior notice. fluids, the instrument itself may become extremely
All rights are reserved. No part of this manual may be hot. Take sufficient care not to get burnt.
reproduced in any form without Yokogawas written Where the fluid being processed is a toxic
permission. substance, avoid contact with the fluid and
Yokogawa makes no warranty of any kind with regard avoid inhaling any residual gas, even after the
to this material, including, but not limited to, implied instrument has been taken off the piping line for
warranties of merchantability and suitability for a maintenance and so forth.
particular purpose. Do not apply excessive weight, for example, a
All reasonable effort has been made to ensure the person stepping on the magnetic flowmeter.
accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, if All procedures relating to installation must comply
any errors or omissions are found, inform Yokogawa. with the electrical code of the country where it is
Yokogawa assumes no responsibilities for this used.
product except as stated in the warranty.
Note that this users manual may not be revised for
any specification changes, construction changes or
operating part changes that are not considered to
affect function or performance.
If the customer or any third party is harmed by the use
of this product, Yokogawa assumes no responsibility
for any such harm owing to any defects in the product
which were not predictable, or for any indirect
damages.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<1. Introduction> 3
(2) Wiring (4) Maintenance

WARNING WARNING
The wiring of the magnetic flowmeter must be Maintenance of the magnetic flowmeter should
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. be performed by the trained personnel having
No operator shall be permitted to perform knowledge of safety standard. No operator shall
procedures relating to wiring. be permitted to perform any operations relating to
When connecting the wiring, check that the supply maintenance.
voltage is within the range of the voltage specified When opening the cover, wait for more than 10
for this instrument before connecting the power minutes after turning off the power.
cable. In addition, check that no voltage is applied Do not open the cover in wet weather or humid
to the power cable before connecting the wiring. environment. When the cover is open, stated
The protective grounding must be connected enclosure protection is not applicable.
securely at the terminal with the mark to avoid When maintaining the instrument, refer to user's
danger to personnel. manual as listed in Table 1.1. Do not perform the
maintenance that is not described in the manual. If 1
necessary, contact Yokogawa.
(3) Operation

Introduction
Care should be taken to prevent the build up of
dirt, dust or other substances on the display panel
glass or name plate. If these surfaces do get dirty,
WARNING wipe them clean with a soft dry cloth.
When opening the cover, wait for more than 10
minutes after turning off the power. Only expert
(5) Explosion Protected Type Instrument
engineer or skilled personnel are permitted to
open the cover.
Do not open the cover in wet weather or humid WARNING
environment. When the cover is open, stated
enclosure protection is not applicable. Magnetic flowmeters with the model name
Be sure to set parameters as Protect on the write AXFC and AXFA14C are products which
protect function after finish of parameter setting have been certified as explosion proof type
work. instruments. Strict limitations are applied to the
Under extremely rare case, the infra-red switches structures, installation locations, external wiring
may respond unexpectedly in such conditions as work, maintenance and repairs, etc. of these
sticking ball of water or extraneous substances on instruments. Sufficient care must be taken, as any
the surface of display panel glass according to the violation of the limitations may cause dangerous
principle of infra-red switch operation. situations.
Its probability rises in such cases as sticking Be sure to read Chapter 10 before handling the
rain water by storm or other similar situation and instruments. The description in Chapter 10 is prior
washing up work near flowmeter installation place. to the other description in this users manual.
Either to illuminate or stop illuminating the infrared For ATEX or IECEx explosion proof type, be sure
switches by the flashlight may cause the mis- to read IM 01E20A01-11EN.
reaction. For TIIS explosion proof type, be sure to
Refer to Section 6.3 how to use the write protect read INSTALLATION AND OPERATING
function in detail. PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF
EQUIPMENT at the end of this manual.
Only trained persons use this instrument in the
industrial location.
The protective grounding must be connected to
a suitable IS grounding system.
Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
hazardous locations.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<1. Introduction> 4
(6) European Pressure Equipment Directive The guarantee will not apply in the
(PED) following cases:
Damage due to negligence or insufficient
WARNING maintenance on the part of the customer.
Problems or damage resulting from handling,
When using the instrument in compliance with operation or storage that violates the intended use
PED, be sure to read Chapter 9 before use. and specifications.
Problems that result from using or performing
maintenance on the instrument in a location that does
(7) Modification not comply with the installation location specified by
Yokogawa.
Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or damage
Problems or damage resulting from repairs or
resulting from any modification made to this instrument by
modifications not performed by Yokogawa or
the customer.
someone authorized by Yokogawa.
(8) Product Disposal Problems or damage resulting from inappropriate
reinstallation after delivery.
The instrument should be disposed of in accordance with
Problems or damage resulting from disasters such as
local and national legislation/regulations.
fires, earthquakes, storms, floods, or lightning strikes
(9) Authorized Representative in EEA and external causes.

In relation to the CE Marking, The authorized


representative for this product in the EEA (European 1.3 Combination for Flowtube
Economic Area) is: and Remote Converter
Yokogawa Europe B.V.
Euroweg 2, 3825 HD Amersfoort,The Netherlands

IMPORTANT
1.2 Warranty
The AXF remote flowtube (sizes 2.5 to 400 mm
The terms of this instrument that are guaranteed are
(0.1 to 16 in.)) should be combined with one of the
described in the quotation. We will make any repairs
following converters:
that may become necessary during the guaranteed
term free of charge. Table 1.2 Combination for flowtube and
remote converter
Contact our sales office if this instrument requires
Combined with the
repair. Remote Flowtube
Remote Converter
If the instrument is faulty, contact us with concrete Model
Communication
Model
Code
details about the problem and the length of time it has AXFG
been faulty, and state the model and serial number. AXFC
-N AXFA11G
AXFH
We would appreciate the inclusion of drawings or AXFW
additional information. AXFG
AXFC AXFA14G
The results of our examination will determine whether AXFH
-P
AXFA14C
the meter will be repaired free of charge or on an at- AXFW
cost basis. Note:  means any of the following.
002, 005, 010, 015, 025, 032, 040, 050, 065, 080,
100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
Contact Yokogawa before using it in combination
with converters other than those listed above.
For ATEX, IECEx or TIIS certified AXF remote
flowtube, it is only approved to be combined with
AXFA14 converter.
The AXW remote flowtube (sizes 500 to 1800
mm (20 to 72 in.)) should be combined with the
AXFA11 remote converter.
If the converter combined with the AXF magnetic
flowmeters remote flowtube is changed from
the AXFA11 to AXFA14 or vice versa, the meter
factor of the remote flowtube must be readjusted
according to its flow calibration.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<2. Handling Precautions> 5

2. Handling Precautions
This instrument has been inspected carefully at the factory
before shipment. When the instrument is delivered, visually
check that no damage has occurred during transportation.
Also check that all flowmeters mounting hardware shown
below is included.
Integral Flowmeter and Remote Flowtube
Applicable model Part name Qty
AXFG
2 pieces
AXFC
Hexagonal wrench (one each of 1.5 mm and
AXFH
3 mm nominal sizes)
AXFW
Note: In case of selecting the process connection code -AA1, F0203.ai
-AA2, -AD1, -AD2, -AD4, -AJ1, -AJ2, -AG1 or
-AP1, a set of centering devices is also attached. Figure 2.1.3 Name Plate (AXFA14 Remote Converter)

Remote Converter
Applicable model Part name Qty
AXFA11G Mounting hardware 1 set
AXFA14G
Mounting hardware 1 set
1 piece
2
AXFA14C Hexagonal wrench
(nominal size 3mm)

Handling Precautions
2.1 Checking Model and
Specifications
The model code and specifications are found on the name
plate located on the outside of the case. When checking the F0204.ai

model code and specifications match what you have ordered, Figure 2.1.4 Name Plate (AXFA11 Remote Converter)
refer to users manual as listed in Table 1.1.
Be sure you have your model number and serial number
available when contacting Yokogawa.
2.2 Storage Precautions
If the instrument is to be stored for a long period of time
after delivery, observe the following points.
The instrument should be stored in its original packing
condition in the storage location.
Select a storage location that fulfils the following
conditions:
A place where it will not be exposed to rain or water
A place subject to minimal vibrations or shocks
Temperature and humidity levels should be as
follows:
Temperature: -30 to 70C
Humidity: 5 to 80% RH (no condensation)
The preferred ambient temperature and humidity
levels are 25C and approximately 65% RH.
F0201.ai If the instrument is transferred to the installation site
Figure 2.1.1 Name Plate (AXF Integral Flowmeter) and stored without being installed, its performance
may be impaired due to the infiltration of rainwater
and so forth. Be sure to install and wire the instrument
as soon as possible after transferring it to the
installation location.

F0202.ai

Figure 2.1.2 Name Plate (AXF Remote Flowtube)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 6

3. Installation
(1) Location
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Installation of the magnetic flowmeter must be
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. Install the flowmeter in a location where it is not
No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures exposed to direct sunlight. The minimum ambient
relating to installation. temperature is limited by the minimum fluid
temperature of the flowtube (the lining). For more
Installation Location Precautions information, refer to OUTLINE of the appropriate
manual which can be downloaded from our website.
Select the installation location with consideration to the
The flowmeter may be used in an ambient humidity
following items to ensure long-term stable operation of
where the relative humidity ranges from 0 to 100%.
the instrument.
However, avoid long-term continuous operation at
Ambient Temperature: relative humidity above 95%.
Avoid installing the instrument in locations with constantly
fluctuating temperatures. If the location is subject to
(2) Noise Avoidance
radiant heat from the plant, provide heat insulation or
improve ventilation.
IMPORTANT
Atmospheric Condition:
Avoid installing the instrument in a corrosive atmosphere. The flowmeter should be installed away from
In situations where this is unavoidable, consider ways to electrical motors, transformers, and other power
improve ventilation and to prevent rainwater from entering sources in order to avoid interference with
and being retained in the conduit pipes. measurement.

Vibrations or Shocks:
Avoid installing the instrument in a place subject to (3) Required Lengths of Straight Runs
shocks or vibrations. To maintain accurate measurement, see JIS B7554 which
Explosion protected type: explains the requirements for upstream piping conditions
of magnetic flowmeters.
Explosion protect types can be installed in hazardous
Based on JIS B7554 and our piping condition test data,
areas according to the types of gases for which they
we recommend the piping conditions as shown in the
are certified. See the description in Chapter 10 and
following figures.
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
When installing two or more magnetic flowmeters on a
FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT in this users
single pipe, provide a run of at least 10D between them.
manual. D: Flowtube Size
Gate valve Reducer Expander
fully open pipe pipe

3.1 Piping Design Precautions


2D 2D
5D or more or more 0 is allowable. 0 is allowable. 10D or more or more
Tee 90-degree bent
Various valves

IMPORTANT
2D
5D or more 0 is allowable. 5D or more 0 is allowable. 10D or more or more
Design piping correctly, referring to the following to F0301.ai

prevent damage to flowtubes and to assure accurate Figure 3.1.1 Required Lengths of Straight Runs
measuring.
*1: Do not install anything in the vicinity that may interfere
with the magnetic field, induced signal voltages, or flow
velocity distributions of the flowmeter.
NOTE *2: A straight run may not be required on the downstream
side of the flowmeter. However, if a downstream valve
or other fitting causes irregularity or deviation in flows,
This chapter describes the remote flowtube as an provide a straight run of 2D to 3D on the downstream side.
example. The same attention must be paid to the *3: The valves shall be mounted on the downstream side so
that deviated flows do not occur in the flowtube and to
integral flowmeter. avoid startup from an empty condition.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 7
(4) Maintaining Stable Fluid Conductivity (8) Supporting the Flowmeter

IMPORTANT CAUTION
Do not install the flowmeter where fluid conductivity
Do not secure the flowmeter separately to prevent the
tends to become uneven. If chemicals are fed near
vibrations, shocks, and expansion and contraction forces
the upstream side of a magnetic flowmeter, they may
of the piping from affecting it. Fix the pipes first, then
affect the flow rates indications. To avoid this situation,
support the flowmeter with the pipes. With extra small-
it is recommended that the chemical feed ports be
sized flowmeters (sizes 2.5 to 10 mm (0.1 to 0.4 in.)), in
located on the downstream side of the flowmeter. If
particular, fix the flowmeter in parallel with the piping on a
it is unavoidable that chemicals must be fed on the
mounting base.
upstream side, provide a sufficient length of straight
run (approximately 50D or more) to ensure the proper
mixture of fluids.
(9) Mounting Positions

(Incorrect) (Correct)
Pipes must be fully filled with liquids.
Upstream side Downstream side

IMPORTANT
It is essential that pipes remain fully filled at all times,
F0302.ai
otherwise flow rate indications may be affected and
Figure 3.1.2 Chemical Injection measurement errors may be caused.
Piping shall be designed so as to maintain the interior 3
of the flowtube filled with fluids.
(5) Precautions for Use of Liquid Sealing Vertical mounting is effective in such cases as

Installation
Compounds when fluids tend to separate or solid matter may be
precipitated. When employing vertical mounting, direct
IMPORTANT the fluids from the bottom to the top to ensure that the
pipes remain fully filled.
Care must be taken in using liquid sealing compounds
on the piping, as it may have a negative influence
(Correct) (Incorrect)
on the flow indications by flowing out and covering h
(Correct) (Incorrect) h>0
the surfaces of an electrode or grounding ring. In
h
particular, care must be taken if a liquid sealing
h>0
compound is used in the case of vertical piping. F0304.ai

Figure 3.1.4 Mounting Positions

(6) Service Area


Avoid air bubbles.
Select locations where there is adequate space to service
installing, wiring, overhauling, etc. IMPORTANT
(7) Bypass Line
If air bubbles enter a measurement pipe, flow rate
It is recommended to install a bypass line to facilitate indications may be affected and measurement errors
maintenance and zero adjustment. may be caused.

Bypass valve
In cases where fluids contain air bubbles, piping must
be designed to prevent them from accumulating in the
measurement pipe of a flowtube.
Block valve If a valve exists near the flowmeter, try to mount the
flowmeter on the valves upstream side in order to
prevent a possible reduction of pressure inside the pipe,
Block valve F0303.ai thereby avoiding the possibility of air bubbles.
Figure 3.1.3 Bypass Line
(Correct) (Incorrect)
(Correct)

(Incorrect)
Valve
F0305.ai

Figure 3.1.5 Avoiding Air Bubbles

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 8
Mounting orientation
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
In order to lift a magnetic flowmeter that is fitted with
If electrodes are perpendicular to the ground, air eyebolts, proceed as in Figure 3.2.1. Never lift it using
bubbles near the top or precipitates at the bottom may a bar passed through the flowtube as this damages
cause measurement errors. Ensure that the terminal the liner severely.
box of a remote flowtube and converter of an integral When lifting the magnetic flowmeter in vertical
flowmeter are mounted above the piping to prevent position, eyebolts (or eyenuts and bolts) are
water from entering them. necessary. Attach them to the flange bolt holes, and
then lift the magnetic flowmeter.
(Correct)
(Incorrect)
(Incorrect)
Air bubble

Electrode Electrode Precipitate Water can


seep into
the terminal
box.
F0306.ai

Figure 3.1.6 Mounting Orientation


Horizontal position Vertical position

F0307.ai
3.2 Handling Precautions Figure 3.2.1 Lifting Flowmeter

WARNING (2) Avoid Shocks from Impact

The magnetic flowmeter is a heavy instrument.


Be careful that no damage is caused to personnel CAUTION
through accidentally dropping it, or by exerting
excessive force on the magnetic flowmeter. When Care should be taken not to drop the flowmeter or
moving the magnetic flowmeter, always use a trolley expose it to excessive shock. In particular, be careful
and have at least two people carry it. not to subject the flange surface to shock. This may
lead to liner damage which will result in inaccurate
readings.

NOTE
(3) Flange Protection Covers
This chapter describes the remote flowtube as an
example. The same attention must be paid to the IMPORTANT
integral flowmeter.
Keep the protective covering (i.e. the corrugated
cardboard or other cushioning material) in place over
3.2.1 General Precautions the flange except when mounting the flowmeter to the
pipe.
(1) Precaution during Transportation
The magnetic flowmeter is packed tightly. When
it is unpacked, pay attention to prevent damaging (4) Terminal Box Cover
the flowmeter. To prevent accidents while it is being
transported to the installing location, transport it to the site IMPORTANT
in its original packing.
As it is possible that the insulation will deteriorate, do
not open the terminal box cover until it is time to wire it.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 9
(5) Long-term Non-use 3.3 Installation of Integral
IMPORTANT Flowmeter and Remote
Flowtube
It is not desirable to leave the flowmeter unused
for a long term after installation. If this situation is IMPORTANT
unavoidable, take care of the flowmeter by observing
the following. Do not forget to insert gaskets from Yokogawa between
pipes and flowmeter, which shall be supplied when the
flowmeter has ceramics lining with no grounding rings.
Confirmation of sealing conditions for In case of grounding rings to be supplied and attached
the flowmeter later, these gaskets shall be inserted between
Confirm that the terminal box screw and wiring ports are grounding rings and flowmeter.
well sealed. Equip the conduit piping with drain plugs
or waterproof glands to prevent moisture or water from
penetrating into the flowmeter through the conduit.
NOTE
Regular inspections
The tightening torque value to which gaskets must
Inspect the sealing conditions as mentioned above, and
be tightened varies depending on the type and
the inside of the terminal box at least once a year.
external dimensions of the lining and the gasket. In
Also, due to rain, etc. when it is suspected that water
this section, the tables indicating tightening torque
may have penetrated into the inside flowmeter perform
values include the corresponding gasket types.
supplementary inspections.
The internal diameters of the gaskets are close to
3
those of the grounding rings (refer to Table 3.3.16).

Installation
3.2.2 Flowmeter Piping For fluids capable of potentially permeating PFA
linings (such as nitric acid, hydrofluoric acid, or
sodium hydrate at high temperatures), different
CAUTION tightening torque values must be applied. The
tables of these torque values is indicated in this
Misaligned or slanted piping can lead to leakage and
section.
damage to the flanges.
For replacement models for the earlier ADMAG
or ADMAG AE, the tightening torque values in the
(1) Correct any misaligned or slanted piping, and any tables can be applied if their process connections,
gaps that may exist between mounting flanges before the lining types, and the nominal sizes are the same.
installing the flowmeter (refer to Figure 3.2.2).

3.3.1 Nominal Diameter 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) to


10 mm (0.4 in.), Union Joint Type
Ceramics linings with diameters of 2.5 mm (0.1 in.), 5 mm
(0.2 in.), or 10 mm (0.4 in.) are connected using union
joints. Weld or screw the connecting fittings in Table 3.3.1
Slanted Misaligned onto the piping. The external dimensions of the fittings
F0308.ai are shown in the table.
Figure 3.2.2 Slanted and Misaligned Flowmeter Piping

(2) Inside a newly installed pipeline, there may be some


foreign substances such as residue from welding
or wood chips. Remove them by flushing the piping
before mounting the flowmeter. This prevents the
lining from being damaged, as well as the occurrence
of erroneous measured signals resulting from foreign
substances passing through the flowtube during
measurement.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 10
Table 3.3.1 Fitting Dimensions (2) Connecting Process Piping
Screw joint (process connection codes: GUR and GUN)
Weld or screw the connection fittings to the process piping.
Unit : mm (approx. inch)
D
IMPORTANT
0
Be sure to pass the connection fittings through the
A B C -0.1
union joint nuts in advance.
When welding the fittings, pay attention to the
11.5(0.45)
edge preparation, level differences between the
4
(0.16) 30(1.18) fittings and the piping, and the welding current to
avoid deforming the piping or causing stagnation
F0309.ai
portion of the fluid.
Size Code A B C D
GUR 22 (0.87) 8 (0.31) 18.5 (0.73) R1/4
2.5 (0.1)
GUN 22 (0.87) 8 (0.31) 18.5 (0.73) NPT1/4
(3) Positioning the Flowmeter
GUR 22 (0.87) 8 (0.31) 18.5 (0.73) R1/4
5 (0.2)
GUN 22 (0.87) 8 (0.31) 18.5 (0.73) NPT1/4 Install the flowmeter on a mounting base and position it
GUR 25 (0.98) 10 (0.39) 22.5 (0.89) R3/8
10 (0.4) so that the center axis of the flowtube is aligned with that
GUN 25 (0.98) 10 (0.39) 22.5 (0.89) NPT3/8
of the process piping. Then screw the union joint nuts to
Weld joint (process connection code: GUW)
the connecting ports of the flowmeter.
Unit : mm (approx. inch)

CAUTION
+0.3 0
0 -0.1
A B C D Ceramics pipes may be damaged if the nuts are
tightened when the center axes are not properly aligned.

4 10(0.39)
(0.16) 35(1.38)
(4) Tightening Nuts
F0310.ai
Use a torque wrench to tighten the union joint nuts.
Size Code A B C D
2.5 (0.1) GUW 22(0.87) 8(0.31) 14.3(0.56) 18.5(0.73)
5 (0.2) GUW 22(0.87) 8(0.31) 14.3(0.56) 18.5(0.73)
10 (0.4) GUW 25(0.98) 10(0.39) 17.8(0.70) 22.5(0.89) CAUTION
Tighten the union joint nuts according to the tightening
(1) Mounting Direction torque values in Table 3.3.2. For permeable fluid (such
Mount the flowmeter so that the flow direction of the fluid as nitric acid, hydrofluoric acid or sodium hydrate at
to be measured is in line with the direction of the arrow high temperature), tighten the nuts according to the
mark on the flowmeter. torque values in Table 3.3.3.
As the gasket material is fluorocarbon PTFE, it is
possible that the nuts may loosen as time passes.
IMPORTANT Retighten the nuts if this is the case. Be sure to use
the gasket (thickness is 1.5 mm) which comes with the
If it is impossible to match the direction of the arrow flowmeter.
mark, the direction of the electrical connection can
be changed. Refer to the applicable users manuals
Table 3.3.2Tightening torque values for Union Joint Type
which can be downloaded from our website.
Size mm (inch) Torque (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
In case the fluid being measured flows against the
2.5 (0.1) 9 to 12 / {91.77 to 122.4} / [79.66 to 106.2]
arrow direction, change the value from Forward to 5 (0.2) 9 to 12 / {91.77 to 122.4} / [79.66 to 106.2]
Reverse at the parameter [ J20: Flow Direction ] 10 (0.4) 14 to 18 / {142.8 to 183.5} / [123.9 to 159.3]
(refer to Chapter 8).
Table 3.3.3Tightening torque values for Union Joint Type
and Permeable Fluids
Size mm (inch) Torque (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
2.5 (0.1) 11 to 15 / {112.2 to 153} / [97.36 to 132.8]
5 (0.2) 11 to 15 / {112.2 to 153} / [97.36 to 132.8]
10 (0.4) 17 to 23 / {173.4 to 234.5} / [150.5 to 203.6]

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 11
(1) Mounting Direction
Mount the flowmeter so that the flow direction of the fluid
to be measured is in line with the direction of the arrow
mark on the flowmeter.

Gasket
Connecting fitting
IMPORTANT
Union joint nut
If it is impossible to match the direction of the arrow
*Piping
mark, the direction of the electrical connection can
be changed. Refer to the applicable users manuals
which can be downloaded from our website.
In case the fluid being measured flows against the
*Mounting base *: To be provided by user arrow direction, change the value from Forward to
F0311.ai
Reverse at the parameter [ J20: Flow Direction ]
(refer to Chapter 8).

(2) Mounting Centering Devices


To maintain concentricity of the flowmeter with the
pipes, install centering devices on the Mini-flanges of
the flowmeter. Use the appropriate centering devices
according to the nominal diameter and the flange ratings. 3
(3) Positioning the Flowmeter

Installation
Pass two through-bolts through the adjacent holes of
both flanges and position the flowmeter so that the Mini-
Horizontal mounting
F0312.ai flanges and the centering devices come in close contact
with each other. Pass the other through-bolts through
the other holes (refer to Figure 3.3.2 and Figure 3.3.3).
In case stud-type through-bolts are used, position them
in such a way that the centering devices come in contact
with the bolt threads.

(4) Tightening Nuts


Tighten the nuts according to the torque values for metal
piping in Table 3.3.4. For PVC piping, select an optional
code of GA, GC, or GD, use rubber gaskets and tighten
the nuts to the torque values for PVC piping in Table
3.3.5.
Vertical mounting For permeable fluids (such as nitric acid, hydrofluoric
F0313.ai
acid, or sodium hydrate at high temperatures), tighten the
Figure 3.3.1Mounting Procedure for Union Joint Type
nuts according to the torque values in Table 3.3.6.
(sizes: 2.5 to 10 mm (0.1 to 0.4 in.))

3.3.2 Nominal Diameter 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) to CAUTION


40 mm (1.5 in.), Wafer Type
For a flowmeter with fluorocarbon PFA lining, it is
possible that the nuts may loosen as time passes,
IMPORTANT so tighten them regularly. Be sure to tighten the nuts
according to the prescribed torque values. Tighten
Use bolts and nuts in compliance with the flange
them diagonally with the same torque values, step by
ratings. When stud-type through-bolts are used, be
step up to the prescribed torque value.
sure the outside diameter of the shank is smaller than
that of the thread ridge. Be sure to choose a gasket
with inner and outer diameters that does not protrude
inside the piping (refer to Table 3.3.16). If the inner
diameter of the gasket is too large, or outer diameter
of the gasket is too small, fluid leakage may result.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 12
*Through-bolt (four units) *: These items can be ordered optionally.
If they are provided by the user, choose nuts and
bolts in compliance with the flange ratings.

Centering device (two units)

*Nut (eight units)

*Gasket (two units)


Horizontal mounting Mini-flange

Piping-side flange

Vertical mounting
F0314.ai

Figure 3.3.2 Mounting Procedure for Wafer Type (sizes: 2.5 to 15 mm (0.1 to 0.5 in.))

*Nut (eight units)

*Through-bolt (four units) *: These items can be ordered optionally.


If they are provided by the user, choose nuts and
Piping-side flange bolts in compliance with the flange ratings.

Centering device (two units)

Horizontal mounting

Mini-flange

*Gasket (two units)

Vertical mounting
F0315.ai

Figure 3.3.3 Mounting Procedure for Wafer Type (sizes: 25, 32 and 40 mm (1.0, 1.25 and 1.5 in.))

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 13
Table 3.3.4 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping
Tightening torque values for PFA/Polyurethane Rubber lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
No gasket (standard)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
Non-asbestos fiber gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40 JPI Class 150
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
7.2 to 8.4 7.3 to 8.4 7.6 to 8.4 7.9 to 12.7
2.5 (0.1) {73.42 to 85.66} {74.44 to 85.66} {77.5 to 85.66} {80.8 to 129.9}
[63.72 to 74.35] [64.61 to 74.35] [67.26 to 74.35] [70.1 to 112.7]
7.2 to 8.4 7.3 to 8.4 7.6 to 8.4 7.9 to 12.7
5 (0.2) {73.42 to 85.66} {74.44 to 85.66} {77.5 to 85.66} {80.8 to 129.9}
[63.72 to 74.35] [64.61 to 74.35] [67.26 to 74.35] [70.1 to 112.7]
7.2 to 8.4 7.3 to 8.4 7.6 to 8.4 7.9 to 12.7
10 (0.4) {73.42 to 85.66} {74.44 to 85.66} {77.5 to 85.66} {80.8 to 129.9}
[63.72 to 74.35] [64.61 to 74.35] [67.26 to 74.35] [70.1 to 112.7]
7.2 to 8.4 7.3 to 8.4 7.6 to 8.4 7.9 to 12.7
15 (0.5) {73.42 to 85.66} {74.44 to 85.66} {77.5 to 85.66} {80.8 to 129.9}
[63.72 to 74.35] [64.61 to 74.35] [67.26 to 74.35] [70.1 to 112.7]
23.5 to 27.3 23.7 to 27.3 22.3 to 27.3 19.6 to 21.8
25 (1.0) {239.6 to 278.4} {241.7 to 278.4} {227.4 to 278.4} {200.0 to 222.1}
[208 to 241.6] [209.8 to 241.6] [197.4 to 241.6] [173.5 to 192.6]
26.2 to 30.5 26.6 to 30.5 28.0 to 30.5
32 (1.25) {267.2 to 311} {271.2 to 311} {285.5 to 311}
[231.9 to 269.9] [235.4 to 269.9] [247.8 to 269.9]
36.2 to 42.4 36.9 to 42.4 39.1 to 42.4 30.1 to 33.4
40 (1.5) {369.1 to 432.4} {376.3 to 432.4} {398.7 to 432.4} {307.2 to 341.3}
[320.4 to 375.3] [326.6 to 375.3] [346.1 to 375.3] [266.5 to 296.0]

Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
Fluororesin with ceramic fillers (Valqua #7020) (standard) gasket, or fluororesin with carbon gasket (optional code GF)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
Non-asbestos gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
ratings
JIS 10K
ANSI Class 150
JIS 20K
ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40
3
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)

Installation
6.8 to 11.0 6.8 to 11.0 6.6 to 11.0
15 (0.5) {69.3 to 112.2} {69.3 to 112.2} {67.3 to 112.2}
[60.2 to 97.4] [60.2 to 97.4] [58.4 to 97.4]
18.9 to 24.5 19.1 to 24.5 14.7 to 24.5
25 (1.0) {192.7 to 249.8} {194.8 to 249.8} {149.9 to 249.8}
[167.3 to 216.8] [169.0 to 216.8] [130.1 to 216.8]
34.5 to 45.7 41.7 to 57.4 34.5 to 57.4
40 (1.5) {351.8 to 466.0} {425.2 to 585.3} {351.8 to 585.3}
[305.4 to 404.5] [369.1 to 508.0] [305.4 to 508.0]

Table 3.3.5 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for PVC Piping
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket (optional codes BSC and BCC), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40 JPI Class 150
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.4 1.6 to 2.6
2.5 (0.1) {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 24.47} {16.4 to 26.5}
[13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 21.24] [14.2 to 23.0]
1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.4 1.6 to 2.6
5 (0.2) {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 24.47} {16.4 to 26.5}
[13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 21.24] [14.2 to 23.0]
1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.4 1.6 to 2.6
10 (0.4) {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 24.47} {16.4 to 26.5}
[13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 21.24] [14.2 to 23.0]
1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.4 1.6 to 2.6
15 (0.5) {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 24.47} {16.4 to 26.5}
[13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 21.24] [14.2 to 23.0]
4.9 to 8.1 5.0 to 8.3 4.3 to 7.2 4.0 to 6.6
25 (1.0) {49.97 to 82.6} {50.99 to84.64 } {43.85 to 73.42} {41.3 to 67.0}
[43.37 to 71.69] [44.25 to 73.46] [38.06 to 63.72] [35.8 to 58.1]
5.5 to 9.2 5.7 to 9.5 5.4 to 8.9
32 (1.25) {56.08 to 93.81} {58.12 to 96.87} {55.06 to 90.75}
[48.68 to 81.43] [50.45 to 84.08] [47.79 to 78.77]
7.7 to 12.9 8.1 to 13.4 7.5 to 12.5 6.4 to 10.4
40 (1.5) {78.52 to 131.5} {82.6 to 136.6} {76.48 to 127.5} {65.4 to 106.6}
[68.15 to 114.2] [71.69 to 118.6] [66.38 to 110.6] [56.7 to 92.4]

Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket (optional codes BSC and BCC), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
0.8 to 1.4 0.8 to 1.4 0.8 to 1.4
15 (0.5) {8.2 to 14.3} {8.2 to 14.3} {8.2 to 14.3}
[7.1 to 12.4] [7.1 to 12.4] [7.1 to 12.4]
2.3 to 3.1 2.4 to 3.1 1.9 to 3.1
25 (1.0) {23.5 to 31.6} {24.5 to 31.6} {19.4to 31.6}
[20.4 to 27.4] [21.2 to 27.4] [16.8 to 27.4]
4.4 to 6.0 5.2 to 7.3 4.4 to 7.3
40 (1.5) {44.9 to 61.2} {53.0 to 74.4} {44.9 to 74.4}
[38.9 to 53.1] [46.0 to 64.6] [38.9 to 64.6]

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 14
Table 3.3.6 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping and Permeable Fluids
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
No gasket (standard)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40 JPI Class 150
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
10.8 to 12.4 10.8 to 12.4 11.1 to 12.4 11.8 to 12.1
2.5 (0.1) {110.1 to 126.4} {110.1 to 126.4} {113.2 to 126.4} {120.6 to 123.7}
[95.59 to 109.7] [95.59 to 109.7] [98.24 to 109.7] [104.6 to 107.3]
10.8 to 12.4 10.8 to 12.4 11.1 to 12.4 11.8 to 12.1
5 (0.2) {110.1 to 126.4} {110.1 to 126.4} {113.2 to 126.4} {120.6 to 123.7}
[95.59 to 109.7] [95.59 to 109.7] [98.24 to 109.7] [104.6 to 107.3]
10.8 to 12.4 10.8 to 12.4 11.1 to 12.4 11.8 to 12.1
10 (0.4) {110.1 to 126.4} {110.1 to 126.4} {113.2 to 126.4} {120.6 to 123.7}
[95.59 to 109.7] [95.59 to 109.7] [98.24 to 109.7] [104.6 to 107.3]
10.8 to 12.4 10.8 to 12.4 11.1 to 12.4 11.8 to 12.1
15 (0.5) {110.1 to 126.4} {110.1 to 126.4} {113.2 to 126.4} {120.6 to 123.7}
[95.59 to 109.7] [95.59 to 109.7] [98.24 to 109.7] [104.6 to 107.3]
34.9 to 40.1 35.2 to 40.1 32.3 to 37.1 29.2 to 29.9
25 (1.0) {355.9 to 408.9} {358.9 to 408.9} {329.4 to 378.3} {297.6 to 305.5}
[308.9 to 354.9] [311.5 to 354.9] [285.9 to 328.4] [258.1 to 265.0]
38.8 to 44.6 39.2 to 44.6 40.6 to 46.7
32 (1.25) {395.6 to 454.8} {399.7 to 454.8} {414.0 to 476.2}
[343.4 to 394.7] [346.9 to 394.7] [359.3 to 413.3]
53.5 to 61.5 54.2 to 61.5 56.4 to 61.5 44.6 to 45.8
40 (1.5) {545.5 to 627.1} {552.7 to 627.1} {575.1 to 627.1} {455.0 to 467.3}
[473.5 to 544.3] [479.7 to 544.3] [499.2 to 544.3] [394.7 to 405.3]

Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
Fluororesin with ceramic fillers (Valqua #7020) gasket (standard), or fluororesin with carbon gasket (optional code GF)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
8.1 to 13.1 8.1 to 13.1 7.9 to 13.1
15 (0.5) {82.6 to 133.6} {82.6 to 133.6} {80.6 to 133.6}
[71.7 to 115.9] [71.7 to 115.9] [69.9 to 115.9]
22.5 to 29.0 22.7 to 29.0 17.4 to 29.0
25 (1.0) {229.4 to 295.7} {231.5 to 295.7} {177.4 to 295.7}
[199.1 to 256.7] [200.9 to 256.7] [154.0 to 256.7]
40.6 to 53.8 49.3 to 67.7 40.6 to 67.7
40 (1.5) {414.0 to 548.6} {502.7 to 690.3} {414.0 to 690.3}
[359.3 to 476.2] [436.3 to 599.2] [359.3 to 599.2]

3.3.3 Nominal Diameter 50 mm (2.0 in.) to (1) Mounting Direction


300 mm (12.0 in.), Wafer Type Mount the flowmeter so that the flow direction of the fluid
to be measured is in line with the direction of the arrow
mark on the flowmeter.
IMPORTANT
Use bolts and nuts in compliance with the flange IMPORTANT
ratings. When stud-type through-bolts are used, be
sure the outside diameter of the shank is smaller than If it is impossible to match the direction of the arrow
that of the thread ridge. Be sure to choose a gasket mark, the direction of the electrical connection can
with inner and outer diameters that does not protrude be changed. Refer to the applicable users manuals
inside the piping (refer to Table 3.3.16). If the inner which can be downloaded from our website.
diameter of the gasket is too large, or outer diameter In case the fluid being measured flows against the
of the gasket is too small, fluid leakage may result. arrow direction, change the value from Forward to
Reverse at the parameter [ J20: Flow Direction ]
(refer to Chapter 8).

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 15
(2) Mounting Centering Devices
NOTE
To maintain concentricity of the flowmeter with the pipes,
install centering devices. From the process piping side, Precautions for size 125 mm (5 in.), 150 mm (6 in.),
pass two through-bolts through the four centering devices replaceable electrode type
(two for each bolt) and the adjacent two holes (the lower When installing this type of flowmeter with JIS F12
two holes for horizontal mounting) of both of the flanges (JIS 75M) flanges, turn the flowmeter slightly because
(refer to Figure 3.3.4). Use the appropriate centering the cover of the electrode chambers will interfere with
devices according to the nominal diameter and the flange the bolts.
ratings. The centering devices are engraved with an
identifying character. Use the appropriate ones which
meet the required specifications by referring to Table (4) Tightening Nuts
3.3.10 and Table 3.3.11 (AXF standard models) and Table
Tighten the nuts according to the torque values for metal
3.3.12 (replacement models for the earlier ADMAG or
piping in Table 3.3.7. For PVC piping, select an optional
ADMAG AE).
code of GA, GC, or GD, use rubber gaskets and tighten
(3) Positioning the Flowmeter the nuts to the torque values for PVC piping in Table
3.3.8.
Position the flowmeter so that the Mini-flanges and the
For permeable fluids (such as nitric acid, hydrofluoric
centering devices come in close contact with each other.
acid, or sodium hydrate at high temperatures), tighten the
Be careful to prevent the four centering devices from
nuts according to the torque values in Table 3.3.9.
coming into contact with the housing. If stud-type through-
bolts are used, position them in such a way that the four
centering devices come in contact with the bolt threads
(refer to Figure 3.3.4). Pass the other through-bolts CAUTION 3
through from the process piping side.
For a flowmeter with fluorocarbon PFA lining, it is

Installation
possible that the nuts may loosen as time passes,
so tighten them regularly. Be sure to tighten the nuts
according to the prescribed torque values. Tighten
them diagonally with the same torque values, step by
step up to the prescribed torque value.

*Nut (eight units)

*Through-bolt
Piping-side flange *: These items can be ordered optionally.
*Gasket (two units) If they are provided by the user, choose nuts and
bolts in compliance with the flange ratings.

Housing

Horizontal mounting Mini


flange

Centering device
(four units)

Vertical mounting F0316.ai

Figure 3.3.4 Mounting Procedure for Wafer Type (sizes: 50 to 300 mm (2.0 to 12 in.))

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 16
Table 3.3.7 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA/Polyurethane Rubber/Natural Soft Rubber/EPDM Rubber lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]

Gasket types
No gasket (standard)
within flowtube
Gasket types for Non-asbestos fiber gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket
users flange (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150
mm (inch)
45.0 to 56.8 45.0 to 56.8 22.5 to 25.9 22.5 to 25.9 50.0 to 57.5 44.5 to 50.9
50 (2.0) {458.9 to 579.2} {458.9 to 579.2} {229.4 to 264.1} {229.4 to 264.1} {509.9 to 586.3} {454.1 to 519.8}
[398.3 to 502.7] [398.3 to 502.7] [199.1 to 229.2] [199.1 to 229.2] [442.5 to 508.9} [393.9 to 450.9]
61.3 to 70.5 61.3 to 70.5 30.8 to 35.4 30.8 to 35.4 56.1 to 70.8
65 (2.5) {625.1 to 718.9} {625.1 to 718.9} {314.1 to 361.0} {314.1 to 361.0} {572.1 to 722.0}
[542.5 to 624.0] [542.5 to 624.0] [272.6 to 313.3] [272.6 to 313.3] [496.5 to 626.6]
35.0 to 40.3 76.0 to 80.9 39.9 to 45.9 39.9 to 45.9 39.9 to 45.9 68.4 to 78.7 70.0 to 80.1
80 (3.0) {356.9 to 410.9} {775.0 to 825.0} {406.9 to 468.1} {406.9 to 468.1} {406.9 to 468.1} {697.5 to 802.5} {714.4 to 817.8}
[309.8 to 356.7] [672.6 to 716.0] [353.1 to 406.2] [353.1 to 406.2] [353.1 to 406.2] [605.4 to 696.5] [619.6 to 709.3]
46.1 to 53 46.1 to 53 52.9 to 60.8 52.9 to 60.8 52.9 to 60.8 88.6 to 101.9 45.0 to 51.5
100 (4.0) {470.1 to 540.5} {470.1 to 540.5} {539.4 to 620.0} {539.4 to 620.0} {539.4 to 620.0} {903.5 to 1039} {459.0 to 525.2}
[408.0 to 469.1] [408.0 to 469.1] [468.2 to 538.1] [468.2 to 538.1] [468.2 to 538.1] [784.1 to 901.9] [398.1 to 455.6]
73.7 to 84.8 73.7 to 84.8 80.5 to 92.6 80.5 to 92.6 80.5 to 92.6 75.1 to 86.4
125 (5.0) {751.5 to 864.7} {751.5 to 864.7} {820.9 to 944.3} {820.9 to 944.3} {820.9 to 944.3} {765.8 to 881.0}
[652.3 to 750.5] [652.3 to 750.5] [712.5 to 819.5] [712.5 to 819.5] [712.5 to 819.5] [664.7 to 764.7]
85.4 to 98.2 85.4 to 98.2 61.0 to 70.2 61.0 to 70.2 91.2 to 96.3 86.3 to 99.2 78.9 to 86.2
150 (6.0) {870.8 to 1001} {870.8 to 1001} {622.0 to 715.8} {622.0 to 715.8} {930.0 to 982.0} {880.0 to 1012} {805.2 to 879.9}
[755.8 to 869.1] [755.8 to 869.1] [539.9 to 621.3] [539.9 to 621.3] [807.2 to 852.3] [763.8 to 878.0] [698.4 to 763.2]
78.8 to 90.6 113.6 to 135.8 113.6 to 135.8 87.5 to 100.6 87.5 to 100.6 87.5 to 100.6 88.6 to 101.9 109.6 to 119.7
200 (8.0) {803.5 to 923.9} {1158 to 1385} {1158 to 1385} {892.3 to 1026} {892.3 to 1026} {892.3 to 1026} {903.5 to 1039} {1118 to 1221}
[697.4 to 801.8] [1005 to 1202] {1005 to 1202] [774.4 to 890.3] [774.4 to 890.3] [774.4 to 890.3] [784.1 to 901.9] [970 to 1060]
119.4 to 137.3 119.4 to 137.3 119.4 to 137.3 158.1 to 181.8 120.8 to 136.4
250 (10) {1218 to 1400} {1218 to 1400} {1218 to 1400} {1612 to 1854} {1232 to 1392}
[1057 to 1215] [1057 to 1215] {1057 to 1215] [1399 to 1609] [1069 to 1207]
83.0 to 99.2 105.2 to 121.0 105.2 to 121.0 146.6 to 168.6 141.8 to 160.1
300 (12) {846.4 to 1012} {1073 to 1234} {1073 to 1234} {1495 to 1719} {1447 to 1634}
[734.6 to 878] [931.1 to 1071] {931.1 to 1071] [1297 to 1492] [1255 to 1417]

N-m
Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]

Gasket types
Fluororesin with ceramic fillers (Valqua #7020) gasket (standard), or fluororesin with carbon gasket (optional code GF)
within flowtube
Gasket types for
Non-asbestos gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M)
mm (inch)
48.2 to 80.3 48.6 to 81.0 23.5 to 39.1 23.7 to 39.5 48.2 to 80.3
50 (2.0) {491.5 to 818.8} {495.6 to 826.0} {239.6 to 398.7} {241.7 to 402.8} {491.5 to 818.8}
[426.6 to 710.7] [430.1 to 716.9] [208.0 to 346.1] [209.8 to 349.6] [426.6 to 710.7]
31.5 to 52.4 64.2 to 107.0 38.8 to 64.7 38.2 to 63.7 31.5 to 52.4 63.7 to 106.2
80 (3.0) {321.2 to 534.3} {654.7 to 1091.1} {395.6 to 659.8} {389.5 to 649.6} {321.2 to 534.3} {649.6 to 1082.9}
[278.8 to 463.8] [568.2 to 947.0] [343.4 to 572.6] [338.1 to 563.8] [278.8 to 463.8] [563.8 to 939.9]
36.0 to 59.9 36.3 to 60.4 44.3 to 73.8 43.6 to 72.7 36.0 to 59.9 73.0 to 121.6
100 (4.0) {367.1 to 610.8} {370.2 to 615.9} {451.7 to 752.6} {444.6 to 741.3} {367.1 to 610.8} {744.4 to 1240.0}
[318.6 to 530.2] [321.3 to 534.6] [392.1 to 653.2] [385.9 to 643.4] [318.6 to 530.2] [646.1 to 1076.3]
75.5 to 125.9 74.4 to 123.9 53.4 to 89.1 48.8 to 81.3 75.5 to 125.9 82.3 to 137.1
150 (6.0) {769.9 to 1283.8} {758.7 to 1263.4} {544.5 to 908.6} {497.6 to 829.0} {769.9 to 1283.8} {839.2 to 1398.0}
[668.2 to 1114.3] [658.5 to 1096.6] [472.6 to 788.6] [431.9 to 719.6] [668.2 to 1114.3] [728.4 to 1213.4]
72.9 to 121.6 109.1 to 181.8 110.9 to 184.9 79.0 to 131.6 80.0 to 133.3 72.9 to 121.6 89.7 to 149.5
200 (8.0) {743.4 to 1240.0} {1112.5 to 1853.8} {1130.9 to 1885.5} {805.6 to 1341.9} {815.8 to 1359.3} {743.4 to 1240.0} {914.7 to 1524.5}
[645.2 to 1076.3] [965.6 to 1609.1] [981.5 to 1636.5] [699.2 to 1164.8] [708.1 to 1179.8] [645.2 to 1076.3] [793.9 to 1323.2]

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 17
Table 3.3.8 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for PVC Piping
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]

Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket (optional codes BSC and BCC), or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150
mm (inch)
9.9 to 16.5 9.9 to 16.5 10.6 to 17.6 10.6 to 17.6 9.5 to 15.9 9.6 to 15.9
50 (2.0) {101.0 to 168.3} {101.0 to 168.3} {108.1 to 179.5} {108.1 to 179.5} {96.9 to 162.1} {98.1 to 162.2}
[87.6 to 146.0] [87.6 to 146.0] [93.8 to 155.8] [93.8 to 155.8] [84.1 to 140.7] [85.1 to 140.7]
14.2 to 23.7 14.2 to 23.7 15.5 to 25.9 15.5 to 25.9 28.2 to 51.8
65 (2.5) {144.8 to 241.7} {144.8 to 241.7} {158.1 to 264.1} {158.1 to 264.1} {287.6 to 528.2}
[125.7 to 209.8] [125.7 to 209.8] [137.2 to 229.2] [137.2 to 229.2] [249.6 to 458.4]
8.0 to 13.3 17.4 to 26.7 9.7 to 16.1 9.7 to 16.1 9.7 to 16.1 15.4 to 25.6 16.4 to 27.0
80 (3.0) {81.6 to 135.6} {177.4 to 272.3} {98.9 to 164.2} {98.9 to 164.2} {98.9 to 164.2} {157.0 to 261.0} {167.1 to 275.9}
[70.8 to 117.7] [154.0 to 236.3] [85.8 to 142.5] [85.8 to 142.5] [85.8 to 142.5] [136.3 to 226.6] [145.0 to 239.3]
11.3 to 18.8 11.3 to 18.8 14.2 to 23.6 14.2 to 23.6 14.2 to 23.6 21.1 to 35.1 10.6 to 17.5
100 (4.0) {115.2 to 191.7} {115.2 to 191.7} {144.8 to 240.7} {144.8 to 240.7} {144.8 to 240.7} {215.2 to 357.9} {108.2 to 178.3}
[100.0 to 166.4] [100.0 to 166.4] [125.7 to 208.9] [125.7 to 208.9] [125.7 to 208.9] [186.7 to 310.6] [93.8 to 154.7]
18.8 to 31.3 18.8 to 31.3 22.3 to 37.2 22.3 to 37.2 22.3 to 37.2 18.5 to 30.8
125 (5.0) {191.7 to 319.2} {191.7 to 319.2} {227.4 to 379.3} {227.4 to 379.3} {227.4 to 379.3} {188.6 to 314.1}
[166.4 to 277.0] [166.4 to 277.0] [197.4 to 329.2] [197.4 to 329.2] [197.4 to 329.2] [163.7 to 272.6]
22.5 to 37.6 22.5 to 37.6 27.2 to 45.3 27.2 to 45.3 40.7 to 62.1 21.8 to 36.3 19.9 to 32.0
150 (6.0) {229.4 to 383.4} {229.4 to 383.4} {277.4 to 461.9} {277.4 to 461.9} {415.0 to 633.2} {222.3 to 370.2} {202.8 to 326.0}
[199.1 to 332.8] [199.1 to 332.8] [240.7 to 400.9] [240.7 to 400.9] [360.2 to 549.6] [192.9 to 321.3] [175.9 to 282.8]

200 (8.0)
22.1 to 36.9
{225.4 to 376.3}
31.9 to 55.3 31.9 to 55.3
{325.3 to 563.9} {325.3 to 563.9}
27.3 to 45.3
{278.4 to 461.9}
27.3 to 45.3
{278.4 to 461.9}
27.3 to 45.3
{278.4 to 461.9}
23.8 to 39.6
{242.7 to 403.8}
30.6 to 49.2
{312.3 to 501.7} 3
[195.6 to 326.6] [282.3 to 489.4] [282.3 to 489.4] [241.6 to 400.9] [241.6 to 400.9] [241.6 to 400.9] [210.6 to 350.5] [270.9 to 435.2]

Installation
N-m
Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]

Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket (optional codes BSC and BCC), or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M)
mm (inch)
6.2 to 10.4 6.3 to 10.5 2.9 to 4.9 2.9 to 4.9 6.2 to 10.4
50 (2.0) {63.2 to 106.1} {64.2 to 107.1} {29.6 to 50.0} {29.6 to 50.0} {63.2 to 106.1}
[54.9 to 92.0] [55.8 to 92.9] [25.7 to 43.4] [25.7 to 43.4] [54.9 to 92.0]
4.4 to 7.3 10.6 to 17.7 5.3 to 8.8 5.2 to 8.7 4.4 to 7.3 9.6 to 16.0
80 (3.0) {44.9 to 74.4} {108.1 to 180.5} {54.0 to 89.7} {53.0 to 88.7} {44.9 to 74.4} {97.9 to 163.2}
[38.9 to 64.6] [93.8 to 156.7] [46.9 to 77.9] [46.0 to 77.0] [38.9 to 64.6] [85.0 to 141.6]
5.2 to 8.6 5.7 to 9.5 6.0 to 10.0 6.0 to 10.0 5.2 to 8.6 11.7 to 19.5
100 (4.0) {53.0 to 87.7} {58.1 to 96.9} {61.2 to 102.0} {61.2 to 102.0} {53.0 to 87.7} {119.3 to 198.8}
[46.0 to 76.1] [50.4 to 84.1] [53.1 to 88.5] [53.1 to 88.5] [46.0 to 76.1] [103.6 to 172.6]
10.7 to 17.8 11.6 to 19.3 7.0 to 11.6 6.6 to 11.0 10.7 to 17.8 13.3 to 22.2
150 (6.0) {109.1 to 181.5} {118.3 to 196.8} {71.4 to 118.3} {67.3 to 112.2} {109.1 to 181.5} {135.6 to 226.4}
[94.7 to 157.5] [102.7 to 170.8] [62.0 to 102.7] [58.4 to 97.4] [94.7 to 157.5] [117.7 to 196.5]
10.2 to 17.1 18.9 to 31.5 18.7 to 31.2 10.6 to 17.7 10.8 to 18.0 10.2 to 17.1 15.3 to 25.5
200 (8.0) {104.0 to 174.4} {192.7 to 321.2} {190.7 to 318.2} {108.1 to 180.5} {110.1 to 183.5} {104.0 to 174.4} {156.0 to 260.0}
[90.3 to 151.3] [167.3 to 278.8] [165.5 to 276.1] [93.8 to 156.7] [95.6 to 159.3] [90.3 to 151.3] [135.4 to 225.7]

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 18
Table 3.3.9 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping and Permeable Fluids
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]

Gasket types
No gasket (standard)
within flowtube
Gasket types
PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150
mm (inch)
66.2 to 76.1 66.2 to 76.1 33.1 to 38.0 33.1 to 38.0 71.2 to 118.6 65.7 to 69.7
50 (2.0) {675.1 to 776.0} {675.1 to 776.0} {337.5 to 387.5} {337.5 to 387.5} {726.0 to 1209} {670.9 to 711.0}
[585.9 to 673.5] [585.9 to 673.5] [292.9 to 336.3] [292.9 to 336.3] [630.1 to 1050] [581.9 to 616.7]
89.5 to 102.9 89.5 to 102.9 44.9 to 51.6 44.9 to 51.6 81.8 to 103.2
65 (2.5) {912.6 to 1049} {912.6 to 1049} {457.9 to 526.2} {457.9 to 526.2} {834.1 to 1052}
[792.1 to 910.7] [792.1 to 910.7] [397.4 to 456.7] [397.4 to 456.7] {724.0 to 913.4]
51.3 to 59.0 111.3 to 118.4 58.1 to 66.8 58.1 to 66.8 58.1 to 66.8 100.8 to 115.9 102.5 to 108.7
80 (3.0) {523.1 to 601.6} {1135 to 1207} {592.5 to 681.2} {592.5 to 681.2} {592.5 to 681.2} {1028 to 1182} {1046 to 1109}
[454.0 to 522.2] [985.0 to 1048] [514.2 to 591.2] [514.2 to 591.2] [514.2 to 591.2] [892.1 to 1026] [907.7 to 962.0]
66.7 to 76.7 66.7 to 76.7 76.1 to 87.5 76.1 to 87.5 76.1 to 87.5 129.8 to 149.3 65.7 to 69.6
100 (4.0) {680.2 to 782.1} {680.2 to 782.1} {776.0 to 892.3} {776.0 to 892.3} {776.0 to 892.3} {1324 to 1522} {670.1 to 710.0}
[590.3 to 678.8] [590.3 to 678.8] [673.5 to 774.4] [673.5 to 774.4] [673.5 to 774.4] [1149 to 1321] [581.2 to 615.9]
106.1 to 122.0 106.1 to 122.0 114.5 to 131.7 114.5 to 131.7 114.5 to 131.7 109.6 to 126.0
125 (5.0) {1082 to 1244} {1082 to 1244} {1168 to 1343} {1168 to 1343} {1168 to 1343} {1118 to 1285}
[939.0 to 1080] [939.0 to 1080] [1013 to 1166] [1013 to 1166] {1013 to 1166] [970.0 to 1115]
122.2 to 140.5 122.2 to 140.5 86.8 to 99.8 86.8 to 99.8 129.8 to 136.9 125.6 to 144.4 114.2 to 115.3
150 (6.0) {1246 to 1433} {1246 to 1433} {885.1 to 1018} {885.1 to 1018} {1324 to 1396} {1281 to 1472} {1165 to 1177}
[1082 to 1243] [1082 to 1243] [768.2 to 883.3] [768.2 to 883.3] {1149 to 1212] [1112 to 1278] [1010 to 1021]
111.6 to 128.3 161.0 to 192.3 161.0 to 192.3 122.0 to 140.3 122.0 to 140.3 122.0 to 140.3 128.0 to 147.2 156.7 to 158.3
200 (8.0) {1138 to 1308} {1642 to 1961} {1642 to 1961} {1244 to 1431} {1244 to 1431} {1244 to 1431} {1305 to 1501} {1599 to 1615}
[987.7 to 1136] [1425 to 1702] [1425 to 1702] [1080 to 1242] [1080 to 1242] [1080 to 1242] [1133 to 1303] [1387 to 1401]
167.7 to 192.9 167.7 to 192.9 167.7 to 192.9 227.6 to 261.7 172.3 to 175.8
250 (10) {1710 to 1967} {1710 to 1967} {1710 to 1967} {2321 to 2669} {1758 to 1794}
[1484 to 1707] [1484 to 1707] [1484 to 1707] [2014 to 2316] [1525 to 1556]
115.2 to 137.6 146.0 to 167.9 146.0 to 167.9 209.1 to 240.5 199.8 to 203.9
300 (12) {1175 to 1403} {1489 to 1712} {1489 to 1712} {2132 to 2452} {2039 to 2080}
[1020 to 1218] [1292 to 1486] [1292 to 1486] [1851 to 2129] [1768 to 1805]

N-m
Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]

Gasket types
Fluororesin with ceramic fillers (Valqua #7020) gasket (standard), or fluororesin with carbon gasket (optional code GF)
within flowtube
Gasket types
PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M)
mm (inch)
56.5 to 94.2 57.0 to 95.0 27.7 to 46.1 27.9 to 46.5 56.5 to 94.2
50 (2.0) {576.1 to 960.6} {581.2 to 968.7} {282.5 to 470.1} {284.5 to 474.2} {576.1 to 960.6}
[500.1 to 833.7] [504.5 to 840.8] [245.2 to 408.0] [246.9 to 411.6] [500.1 to 833.7]
37.3 to 62.2 76.0 to 126.7 46.2 to 77.0 45.4 to 75.7 37.3 to 62.2 75.5 to 125.8
80 (3.0) {380.4 to 634.3} {775.0 to 1292.0} {471.1 to 788.2} {463.0 to 771.9} {380.4 to 634.3} {769.9 to 1282.8}
[330.1 to 550.5] [672.7 to 1121.4] [408.9 to 681.5] [401.8 to 670.0] [330.1 to 550.5] [668.2 to 1113.4]
42.2 to 70.3 42.5 to 70.8 52.0 to 86.7 51.2 to 85.3 42.2 to 70.3 85.4 to 142.3
100 (4.0) {430.3 to 716.9} {433.4 to 722.0} {530.3 to 884.1} {522.1 to 869.8} {430.3 to 716.9} {870.8 to 1451.1}
[373.5 to 622.2] [376.2 to 626.6] [460.2 to 767.4] [453.2 to 755.0] [373.5 to 622.2] [755.9 to 1259.5]
87.8 to 146.4 86.4 to 144.0 62.4 to 104.0 56.8 to 94.7 87.8 to 146.4 95.4 to 159.0
150 (6.0) {895.3 to 1492.9} {881.0 to 1468.4} {636.3 to 1060.5} {579.2 to 965.7} {895.3 to 1492.9} {972.8 to 1621.3}
[777.1 to 1295.7] [764.7 to 1274.5] [552.3 to 920.5] [502.7 to 838.2] [777.1 to 1295.7] [844.4 to 1407.3]
84.0 to 140.1 125.4 to 209.1 127.6 to 212.7 91.1 to 151.9 92.3 to 153.8 84.0 to 140.1 103.0 to 171.7
200 (8.0) {856.6 to 1428.6} {1278.7 to 2132.2} {1301.2 to 2168.9} {929.0 to 1548.9} {941.3 to 1568.3} {856.6 to 1428.6} {1050.3 to 1750.9}
[743.5 to 1240.0] [1109.9 to 1850.7] [1129.4 to 1882.6] [806.3 to 1344.4] [816.9 to 1361.2] [743.5 to 1240.0] [911.6 to 1519.7]

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 19
Table 3.3.10Centering Device Identification (AXF Standard Models, PFA/Polyurethane Rubber/Natural Soft Rubber/EPDM
Rubber lining)

Flange ratings JIS ANSI DIN JPI


Size
mm (inch) 10K 20K F12 (75M) Class 150 Class 300 PN10 PN16 PN40 Class 150
50 (2.0) B B B F F B
65 (2.5) B B B G F
80 (3.0) B F H F C G F
100 (4.0) B F H C H F C
125 (5.0) B C C G D F
150 (6.0) C D D C E C C
200 (8.0) C D D D E C C D
250 (10) C D N C C N
300 (12) C D P C C P
*: Each centering device is engraved with a character as identification.
Table 3.3.11 Centering Device Identification (AXF Standard Models, Ceramics lining)

Flange ratings JIS ANSI DIN


Size
mm (inch) 10K 20K F12 (75M) Class 150 Class 300 PN10 PN16 PN40
50 (2.0) B B B F F
80 (3.0) B F H F C G
100 (4.0) B F H C H F
150 (6.0) B C G B D B
200 (8.0) B C C G J B B
*: Each centering device is engraved with a character as identification.
Table 3.3.12 Centering Device Identification (Replacement Models, PFA/Polyurethane Rubber lining)
3
Flange ratings JIS ANSI DIN
Size

Installation
mm (inch) 10K 20K F12(75M) Class 150 Class 300 PN10 PN16 PN40

50 (2.0) B B B F F
80 (3.0) B F H F C G
100 (4.0) B F H C H F
150 (6.0) C D D C E C
200 (8.0) C D D D E C C
*: Each centering device is engraved with a character as identification.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 20
3.3.4 Nominal Diameter 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) to (2) Tightening Nuts
400 mm (16 in.), Flange Type Tighten the bolts according to the torque values for the
metal piping in Table 3.3.13. For PVC piping, select an
optional code of GA, GC, or GD, use rubber gaskets and
IMPORTANT tighten the nuts to the torque values for the PVC piping in
Table 3.3.14.
Use bolts and nuts in compliance with the flange For permeable fluids (such as nitric acid, hydrofluoric
ratings. Be sure to choose a gasket with inner and acid, or sodium hydrate at high temperatures), tighten the
outer diameters that does not protrude inside the nuts according to the torque values in Table 3.3.15.
piping (refer to Table 3.3.16). If the inner diameter of
the gasket is too large, or outer diameter of the gasket
is too small, fluid leakage may result.
CAUTION
For a flowmeter with fluorocarbon PFA lining, it is
(1) Mounting Direction
possible that the nuts may loosen as time passes,
Mount the flowmeter so that the flow direction of the fluid so tighten them regularly. Be sure to tighten the nuts
to be measured is in line with the direction of the arrow according to the prescribed torque values. Tighten
mark on the flowmeter. them diagonally with the same torque values, step by
step up to the prescribed torque value.

IMPORTANT
If it is impossible to match the direction of the arrow
mark, the direction of the electrical connection can
be changed. Refer to the applicable users manuals
which can be downloaded from our website.
In case the fluid being measured flows against the
arrow direction, change the value from Forward to
Reverse at the parameter [ J20: Flow Direction ]
(refer to Chapter 8).

*Piping-side flange
*Gasket (two units)
*: These items must be provided by the user.
Choose nuts and bolts in compliance with
the flange ratings.

Flowmeter-side flange

*Bolt
(eight units)

*Nut
(eight units)

F0317.ai

Figure 3.3.5 Mounting Procedure for Flange Type (sizes: 2.5 to 400 mm (0.1 to 16 in.))

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 21
Table 3.3.13 Flange Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA/Polyurethane Rubber/Natural Soft Rubber/EPDM Rubber lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]

Gasket types
No gasket (standard)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Non-asbestos gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket, or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI AS AS
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150 Table D Table E
mm (inch)
3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.4
2.5 (0.1)
{38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 65.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 56.64]
4.6 to 7.7 4.6 to 7.7 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.9 5.1 to 8.5
2.5 (0.1)
{46.91 to 78.52} {46.91 to 78.52} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 80.56} {52.1 to 86.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[40.71 to 68.15] [40.71 to 68.15] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.92] [45.2 to 75.3]
3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.4
5 (0.2)
{38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 65.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 56.64]
4.6 to 7.7 4.6 to 7.7 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.9 5.1 to 8.5
5 (0.2)
{46.91 to 78.52} {46.91 to 78.52} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 80.56} {52.1 to 86.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[40.71 to 68.15] [40.71 to 68.15] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.92] [45.2 to 75.3]
3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.4
10 (0.4)
{38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 65.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 56.64]
4.6 to 7.7 4.6 to 7.7 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.9 5.1 to 8.5
10 (0.4)
{46.91 to 78.52} {46.91 to 78.52} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 80.56} {52.1 to 86.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[40.71 to 68.15] [40.71 to 68.15] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.92] [45.2 to 75.3]
4.6 to 7.7 4.6 to 7.7 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.9 5.1 to 8.5
15 (0.5) {46.91 to 78.52} {46.91 to 78.52} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 80.56} {52.1 to 86.8}
[40.71 to 68.15] [40.71 to 68.15] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.92] [45.2 to 75.3]
13.1 to 15.1 13.1 to 15.1 13.2 to 15.2 13.2 to 15.2 11.9 to 13.7 11.0 to 12.6
25 (1.0) {133.6 to 154.0} {133.6 to 154.0} {134.6 to 155.0} {134.6 to 155.0} {121.3 to 139.7} {112.1 to 128.9}
[115.9 to 133.6] [115.9 to 133.6] [116.8 to 134.5] [116.8 to 134.5] [105.3 to 121.3] [97.3 to 111.8]
14.4 to 15.6 14.4 to 15.6 14.6 to 16.8 14.6 to 16.8 15.0 to 17.3
32 (1.25) {146.8 to 159.1} {146.8 to 159.1} {148.9 to 171.3} {148.9 to 171.3} {153.0 to 176.4}
[127.4 to138.1] [127.4 to138.1]
21.9 to 25.2 21.9 to 25.2
[129.2 to 148.7] [129.2 to 148.7]
22.2 to 25.5 22.2 to 25.5
[132.8 to 153.1]
23.2 to 26.7 18.3 to 20.3
3
40 (1.5) {223.3 to 257.0} {223.3 to 257.0} {226.4 to 260.0} {226.4 to 260.0} {236.6 to 272.3} {186.6 to 207.4}
[193.8 to 223.0] [193.8 to 223.0] [196.5 to 225.7] [196.5 to 225.7] [205.3 to 236.3] [161.8 to 179.9]

Installation
28.0 to 32.2 28.0 to 32.2 27.8 to 32.0 27.8 to 32.0 28.8 to 33.1 27.8 to 31.8 26.2 to 30.0 26.6 to 30.5
50 (2.0) {285.5 to 328.3} {285.5 to 328.3} {283.5 to 326.3} {283.5 to 326.3} {293.7 to 337.5} {283.3 to 324.2} {267.0 to 305.8} {271.8 to 311.0}
[247.8 to 285.0] [247.8 to 285.0] [246.0 to 283.2] [246.0 to 283.2] [254.9 to 293.0] [245.7 to 281.2] [231.6 to 265.2] [235.7 to 269.8]
41.6 to 47.8 41.6 to 47.8 19.5 to 28.5 19.5 to 28.5 41.4 to 47.6
65 (2.5) {424.2 to 487.4} {424.2 to 487.4} {198.8 to 290.6} {198.8 to 290.6} {422.2 to 485.4}
[368.2 to 423.0] [368.2 to 423.0] [172.6 to 252.2] [172.6 to 252.2] [366.4 to 421.3]
23.2 to 26.7 52.7 to 53.6 26.1 to 30.0 26.1 to 30.0 26.1 to 30.0 46.0 to 52.9 46.9 to 53.7 44.1 to 50.5 45.4 to 51.9
80 (3.0) {236.6 to 272.3} {536.9 to 546.2} {266.1 to 305.9} {266.1 to 305.9} {266.1 to 305.9} {469.1 to 539.4} {478.8 to 547.6} {450.2 to 515.4} {463.6 to 530.0}
[205.3 to 236.3] [466.0 to 474.1] [231.0 to 265.5] [231.0 to 265.5] [231.0 to 265.5] [407.1 to 468.2] [415.3 to 475.0] [390.5 to 447.0] [402.1 to 459.7]
30.9 to 35.5 30.9 to 35.5 34.8 to 40.0 34.8 to 40.0 34.8 to 40.0 60.9 to 70.0 30.5 to 34.8 58.1 to 66.5 29.6 to 33.8
100 (4.0) {315.1 to 362.0} {315.1 to 362.0} {354.9 to 407.9} {354.9 to 407.9} {354.9 to 407.9} {621.0 to 713.8} {311.0 to 355.6} {593.3 to 678.9} {301.6 to 344.7}
[273.5 to 314.2] [273.5 to 314.2] [308.0 to 354.0] [308.0 to 354.0] [308.0 to 354.0] [539.0 to 619.5] [269.7 to 308.4] [514.6 to 588.8] [261.6 to 299.0]
45.6 to 52.4 45.6 to 52.4 48.6 to 55.9 48.6 to 55.9 48.6 to 55.9 48.1 to 55.3
125 (5.0) {465.0 to 534.3} {465.0 to 534.3} {495.6 to 570.0} {495.6 to 570.0} {495.6 to 570.0} {490.5 to 563.9}
[403.6 to 463.8] [403.6 to 463.8] [430.1 to 494.7] [430.1 to 494.7] [430.1 to 494.7] [425.7 to 489.4]
64.5 to 74.2 64.5 to 74.2 44.8 to 51.5 44.8 to 51.5 66.7 to 80.8 67.5 to 77.6 60.5 to 66.3 47.0 to 53.8 60.3 to 66.7
150 (6.0) {657.7 to 756.6} {657.7 to 756.6} {456.8 to 525.2} {456.8 to 525.2} {680.2 to 823.9} {688.3 to 791.3} {617.7 to 676.5} {479.5 to 548.5} {615.5 to 681.0}
[570.8 to 656.7] [570.8 to 656.7] [396.5 to 455.8] [396.5 to 455.8] [590.3 to 715.1] [597.4 to 686.8] [535.8 to 586.8] [415.9 to 475.8] [533.8 to 590.7]
59.2 to 68.1 100.3 to 102.1 100.3 to 102.1 63.6 to 73.1 63.6 to 73.1 63.6 to 73.1 69.9 to 80.4 84.9 to 93.0 65.5 to 74.9 85.9 to 95.2
200 (8.0) {603.7 to 694.4} {1023 to 1041} {1023 to 1041} {648.5 to 745.4} {648.5 to 745.4} {648.5 to 745.4} {712.8 to 819.9} {866.0 to 949.5} {668.2 to 763.9} {876.2 to 972.0}
[523.9 to 602.7] [887.8 to 903.3] [887.8 to 903.3] [562.9 to 647.0] [562.9 to 647.0] [562.9 to 647.0] [618.6 to 711.6] [751.2 to 823.6] [579.6 to 662.6] [760.0 to 842.7]
144.0 to 165.6 144.0 to 165.6 144.0 to 165.6 156.3 to 179.7 127.2 to 148.8 156.3 to 179.7 190.5 to 219.1 142.1 to 160.5 161.7 to 178.4 114.1 to 126.3
250 (10) {1468 to 1689} {1468 to 1689} {1468 to 1689} {1594 to 1832} {1297 to 1517} {1594 to 1832} {1943 to 2234} {1450 to 1638} {1650 to 1821} {1164 to 1289}
[1274 to 1466] [1274 to 1466] [1274 to 1466] [1383 to 1590] [1126 to 1317] [1383 to 1590] [1686 to 1939] [1258 to 1421] [1431 to 1579] [1010 to 1118]
119.3 to 137.2 163.1 to 197.4 163.1 to 197.4 123.1 to 136.3 152.3 to 169.4 173.3 to 199.3 168.0 to 193.2 158.5 to 178.9 116.9 to 129.2 149.7 to 163.1
300 (12) {1217 to 1399} {1663 to 2013} {1663 to 2013} {1255 to 1390} {1553 to 1727} {1767 to 2032} {1713 to 1970} {1617 to 1826} {1193 to 1318} {1527 to 1664}
[1056 to 1214] [1443 to 1747] [1443 to 1747] [1089 to 1206] [1348 to 1499] [1534 to 1764] [1487 to 1710] [1402 to 1584] [1035 to 1143] [1325 to 1444]
164.7 to 189.4 256.4 to 293.3 164.7 to 189.4 238.6 to 274.4 243.0 to 265.2 204.5 to 223.1
350 (14) {1679 to 1931} {2615 to 2991} {1679 to 1931} {2433 to 2798} {2480 to 2706} {2087 to 2276}
[1458 to 1676] [2269 to 2596] [1458 to 1676] [2112 to 2429] [2151 to 2347] [1810 to 1974]
225.2 to 258.9 225.2 to 258.9 225.2 to 258.9 305.8 to 351.7 233.1 to 254.4 267.1 to 291.3
400 (16) {2296 to 2640} {2296 to 2640} {2296 to 2640} {3118 to 3586} {2378 to 2596} {2725 to 2972}
[1993 to 2291] [1993 to 2291] [1993 to 2291] [2706 to 3113] [2063 to 2252] [2364 to 2578]

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 22
Table 3.3.14 Flange Type Tightening Torque Values for PVC Piping
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]

Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket, or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI AS AS
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150 Table D Table E
mm (inch)
0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3
2.5 (0.1)
{8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51]
0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.7
2.5 (0.1)
{9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {10.5 to 16.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [9.1 to 14.6]
0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3
5 (0.2)
{8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51]
0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.7
5 (0.2)
{9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {10.5 to 16.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [9.1 to 14.6]
0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3
10 (0.4)
{8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51]
0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.7
10 (0.4)
{9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {10.5 to 16.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [9.1 to 14.6]
0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.7
15 (0.5) {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {10.5 to 16.8}
[7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [9.1 to 14.6]
2.7 to 4.5 2.7 to 4.5 2.7 to 4.5 2.7 to 4.5 2.3 to 3.9 2.2 to 3.6
25 (1.0) {27.53 to 45.89} {27.53 to 45.89} {27.53 to 45.89} {27.53 to 45.89} {23.45 to 39.77} {22.8 to 36.9}
[23.9 to 39.83] [23.9 to 39.83] [23.9 to 39.83] [23.9 to 39.83] [20.36 to 34.52] [19.8 to 32.0]
3.0 to 4.9 3.0 to 4.9 3.0 to 5.0 3.0 to 5.0 2.9 to 4.9
32 (1.25) {30.59 to 49.97} {30.59 to 49.97} {30.59 to 50.99} {30.59 to 50.99} {29.57 to 49.97}
[26.55 to 43.37] [26.55 to 43.37] [26.55 to 44.25] [26.55 to 44.25] [25.67 to 43.37]
4.5 to 7.6 4.5 to 7.6 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.4 to 7.4 3.8 to 6.2
40 (1.5) {45.89 to 77.5} {45.89 to 77.5} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {44.87 to 75.46} {38.6 to 62.8}
[39.83 to 67.26] [39.83 to 67.26] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [38.94 to 65.49] [33.5 to 54.4]
5.9 to 9.8 5.9 to 9.8 2.9 to 4.8 2.9 to 4.8 5.5 to 9.2 5.8 to 9.6 5.3 to 8.8 5.5 to 9.1
50 (2.0) {60.16 to 99.93} {60.16 to 99.93} {29.57 to 48.95} {29.57 to 48.95} {56.08 to 93.81} {58.9 to 97.6} {54.1 to 89.8} {56.1 to 92.9}
[52.22 to 86.74] [52.22 to 86.74] [25.67 to 42.48] [25.67 to 42.48] [48.68 to 81.43] [51.1 to 84.6] [47.0 to 77.9] [48.7 to 80.6]
9.0 to 15.0 9.0 to 15.0 2.1 to 4.4 2.1 to 4.4 4.4 to 7.3
65 (2.5) {91.8 to 153.0} {91.8 to 153.0} {21.4 to 44.9} {21.4 to 44.9} {44.9 to 74.4}
[79.7 to 132.8] [79.7 to 132.8] [18.6 to 38.9] [18.6 to 38.9] [38.9 to 64.6]
4.9 to 8.1 11.1 to 16.3 5.5 to 9.1 5.5 to 9.1 5.5 to 9.1 9.7 to 12.2 10.2 to 16.8 9.1 to 15.1 9.7 to 16.0
80 (3.0) {50.0 to 82.6} {113.2 to 166.2} {56.1 to 92.8} {56.1 to 92.8} {56.1 to 92.8} {98.9 to 124.4} {103.6 to 171.1} {92.9 to 153.9} {98.8 to 163.2}
[43.4 to 71.7] [98.2 to 144.3] [48.7 to 80.5] [48.7 to 80.5] [48.7 to 80.5] [85.8 to 108.0] [89.9 to 148.4] [80.6 to 133.5] [85.7 to 141.6]
6.7 to 11.2 6.7 to 11.2 7.5 to 12.6 7.5 to 12.6 7.5 to 12.6 13.3 to 22.2 6.5 to 10.8 12.2 to 20.2 6.3 to 10.3
100 (4.0) {68.3 to 114.2} {68.3 to 114.2} {76.5 to 128.5} {76.5 to 128.5} {76.5 to 128.5} {135.6 to 226.4} {66.7 to 110.1} {124.6 to 206.1} {63.9 to 105.6}
[59.3 to 99.1] [59.3 to 99.1] [66.4 to 111.5] [66.4 to 111.5] [66.4 to 111.5] [117.7 to 196.5] [57.8 to 95.5] [108.1 to 178.8] [55.5 to 91.6]
9.9 to 16.5 9.9 to 16.5 10.7 to 17.8 10.7 to 17.8 10.7 to 17.8 10.5 to 17.6
125 (5.0) {101.0 to 168.3} {101.0 to 168.3} {109.1 to 181.5} {109.1 to 181.5} {109.1 to 181.5} {107.1 to 179.5}
[87.6 to 146.0] [87.6 to 146.0] [94.7 to 157.5] [94.7 to 157.5] [94.7 to 157.5] [92.9 to 155.8]
14.4 to 24.0 14.4 to 24.0 9.8 to 16.3 9.8 to 16.3 14.6 to 25.6 15.2 to 25.3 13.3 to 21.4 10.0 to 16.4 13.1 to 21.2
150 (6.0) {146.8 to 244.7} {146.8 to 244.7} {99.9 to 166.2} {99.9 to 166.2} {148.9 to 261.0} {155.0 to 258.0} {135.8 to 218.0} {101.6 to 167.9} {133.6 to 216.4}
[127.4 to 212.4] [127.4 to 212.4] [86.7 to 144.3] [86.7 to 144.3] [129.2 to 226.6] [134.5 to 223.9] [117.8 to 189.1] [88.1 to 145.6] [115.9 to 187.7]
13.4 to 22.3 22.7 to 33.4 22.7 to 33.4 14.6 to 24.3 14.6 to 24.3 14.6 to 24.3 16.1 to 26.9 19.6 to 31.7 14.3 to 23.7 19.7 to 32.2
200 (8.0) {136.6 to 227.4} {231.5 to 340.6} {231.5 to 340.6} {148.9 to 247.8} {148.9 to 247.8} {148.9 to 247.8} {164.2 to 274.3} {200.2 to 323.1} {146.3 to 241.3} {201.5 to 328.7}
[118.6 to 197.4] [200.9 to 295.6] [200.9 to 295.6] [129.2 to 215.1] [129.2 to 215.1] [129.2 to 215.1] [142.5 to 238.1] [173.7 to 280.3] [126.9 to 209.3] [174.8 to 285.1]

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 23
Table 3.3.15 Flange Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping and Permeable Fluids
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]

Gasket types
No gasket (standard)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Non-asbestos gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket, or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI AS AS
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150 Table D Table E
mm (inch)
5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6
2.5 (0.1)
{58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41]
6.9 to 7.9 6.9 to 7.9 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.6 to 7.8
2.5 (0.1)
{70.36 to 80.56} {70.36 to 80.56} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {77.9 to 79.9}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[61.07 to 69.92] [61.07 to 69.92] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [67.6 to 69.3]
5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6
5 (0.2)
{58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41]
6.9 to 7.9 6.9 to 7.9 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.6 to 7.8
5 (0.2)
{70.36 to 80.56} {70.36 to 80.56} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {77.9 to 79.9}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[61.07 to 69.92] [61.07 to 69.92] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [67.6 to 69.3]
5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6
10 (0.4)
{58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41]
6.9 to 7.9 6.9 to 7.9 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.6 to 7.8
10 (0.4)
{70.36 to 80.56} {70.36 to 80.56} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {77.9 to 79.9}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[61.07 to 69.92] [61.07 to 69.92] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [67.6 to 69.3]
6.9 to 7.9 6.9 to 7.9 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.6 to 7.8
15 (0.5) {70.36 to 80.56} {70.36 to 80.56} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {77.9 to 79.9}
[61.07 to 69.92] [61.07 to 69.92] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [67.6 to 69.3]
19.6 to 22.5 19.6 to 22.5 19.7 to 22.7 19.7 to 22.7 17.5 to 20.1 16.4 to 16.8
25 (1.0) {199.9 to 229.4} {199.9 to 229.4} {200.9 to 231.5} {200.9 to 231.5} {178.5 to 205.0} {167.3 to 171.7}
[173.5 to 199.1] [173.5 to 199.1] [174.4 to 200.9] [174.4 to 200.9] [154.9 to 177.9] [145.1 to 148.9]
21.5 to 24.7 21.5 to 24.7 21.6 to 24.8 21.6 to 24.8 22.1 to 25.4
32 (1.25) {219.2 to 251.9} {219.2 to 251.9} {220.3 to 252.9} {220.3 to 252.9} {225.4 to 259.0}
[190.3 to 218.6] [190.3 to 218.6]
32.5 to 37.4 32.5 to 37.4
[191.2 to 219.5] [191.2 to 219.5]
32.8 to 37.7 32.8 to 37.7
[195.6 to 224.8]
33.8 to 38.9 27.2 to 27.9
3
40 (1.5) {331.4 to 381.4} {331.4 to 381.4} {334.5 to 384.4} {334.5 to 384.4} {344.7 to 396.7} {277.2 to 284.8}
[287.6 to 331.0] [287.6 to 331.0] [290.3 to 333.7] [290.3 to 333.7] [229.2 to 344.3] [240.4 to 247.0]

Installation
41.3 to 47.5 41.3 to 47.5 20.6 to 23.7 20.6 to 23.7 42.2 to 48.5 41.2 to 43.6 39.1 to 41.4 39.5 to 41.9
50 (2.0) {421.1 to 484.4} {421.1 to 484.4} {210.1 to 241.7} {210.1 to 241.7} {430.3 to 494.6} {420.2 to 445.3} {398.7 to 422.7} {403.4 to 427.5}
[365.5 to 420.4] [365.5 to 420.4] [182.3 to 209.8] [182.3 to 209.8] [373.5 to 429.3] [364.5 to 386.2] [345.8 to 366.6] [349.9 to 370.8]
61.2 to 70.4 61.2 to 70.4 14.3 to 21.0 14.3 to 21.0 30.5 to 35.1
65 (2.5) {624.1 to 717.9} {624.1 to 717.9} {145.8 to 214.1} {145.8 to 214.1} {311.0 to 357.9}
[541.6 to 623.1] [541.6 to 623.1] [126.6 to 185.9] [126.6 to 185.9] [269.9 to 310.6]
34.2 to 39.3 77.6 to 78.8 38.5 to 44.3 38.5 to 44.3 38.5 to 44.3 68.1 to 78.3 69.1 to 73.2 65.6 to 69.5 66.9 to 70.8
80 (3.0) {348.7 to 400.7} {791.3 to 803.5} {392.6 to 451.7} {392.6 to 451.7} {392.6 to 451.7} {694.4 to 798.4} {704.9 to 746.8} {669.3 to 709.4} {682.6 to 722.9}
[302.7 to 347.8] [686.8 to 697.4] [340.7 to 392.1] [340.7 to 392.1] [340.7 to 392.1] [602.7 to 693.0] [611.5 to 647.8] [580.5 to 615.3] [592.1 to 627.1]
45.2 to 52.0 45.2 to 52.0 51.0 to 58.7 51.0 to 58.7 51.0 to 58.7 89.6 to 103.0 44.9 to 47.5 86.1 to 91.2 43.5 to 46.1
100 (4.0) {460.9 to 530.3} {460.9 to 530.3} {520.1 to 598.6} {520.1 to 598.6} {520.1 to 598.6} {913.7 to 1050} {457.9 to 484.9} {878.3 to 930.7} {444.1 to 470.3}
[400.0 to 460.2] [400.0 to 460.2] [451.4 to 519.5] [451.4 to 519.5] [451.4 to 519.5] [793.0 to 911.6] [397.2 to 420.6] [761.9 to 807.3] [385.2 to 407.9]
66.8 to 76.8 66.8 to 76.8 70.8 to 81.4 70.8 to 81.4 70.8 to 81.4 70.7 to 81.3
125 (5.0) {681.2 to 783.1} {681.2 to 783.1} {722.0 to 830.1} {722.0 to 830.1} {722.0 to 830.1} {720.9 to 829.0}
[591.2 to 679.7] [591.2 to 679.7] [626.6 to 720.4] [626.6 to 720.4] [626.6 to 720.4] [625.7 to 719.5]
93.9 to 108.8 93.9 to 108.8 65.4 to 75.2 65.4 to 75.2 97.3 to 118.0 98.8 to 113.6 88.6 to 89.7 69.4 to 73.5 88.2 to 90.2
150 (6.0) {957.5 to 1109} {957.5 to 1109} {666.9 to 766.8} {666.9 to 766.8} {992.2 to 1203} {1007 to 1158} {904.5 to 915.2} {708.2 to 750.3} {900.5 to 920.0}
[831.1 to 962.9] [831.1 to 962.9] [578.8 to 665.5] [578.8 to 665.5] [861.1 to 1044] [874.4 to 1005] [784.6 to 793.9] [614.3 to 650.8] [781.1 to 798.4]
85.8 to 98.7 145.4 to 147.9 145.4 to 147.9 91.5 to 105.2 91.5 to 105.2 91.5 to 105.2 101.8 to 117.1 123.1 to 124.6 96.0 to 101.7 124.0 to 126.5
200 (8.0) {874.9 to 1006} {1483 to 1508} {1483 to 1508} {933.0 to 1073} {933.0 to 1073} {933.0 to 1073} {1038 to 1194} {1256 to 1272} {980.0 to 1038} {1265 to 1291}
[759.4 to 873.5] [1287 to 1309] [1287 to 1309] [809.8 to 931.1] [809.8 to 931.1] [809.8 to 931.1] [901.0 to 1036] [1089 to 1103] [850.0 to 900.0] [1097 to 1120]
207.8 to 239.0 207.8 to 239.0 207.8 to 239.0 222.9 to 256.3 181.4 to 212.2 222.9 to 256.3 277.9 to 319.6 207.1 to 211.3 237.1 to 241.9 164.3 to 167.7
250 (10) {2119 to 2437} {2119 to 2437} {2119 to 2437} {2273 to 2614} {1850 to 2164} {2273 to 2614} {2834 to 3259} {2113 to 2156} {2419 to 2468} {1677 to 1711}
[1839 to 2115] [1839 to 2115] [1839 to 2115] [1973 to 2268] [1605 to 1878] [1973 to 2268] [2460 to 2829] [1833 to 1870] [2098 to 2141] [1455 to 1484]
171.0 to 196.7 233.7 to 283.0 233.7 to 283.0 130.7 to 144.8 161.8 to 180.0 184.1 to 211.7 243.8 to 280.4 228.7 to 233.4 170.9 to 174.5 214.4 to 215.3
300 (12) {1744 to 2006} {2383 to 2886} {2383 to 2886} {1333 to 1477} {1650 to 1835} {1877 to 2159} {2486 to 2859} {2334 to 2382} {1744 to 1780} {2188 to 2197}
[1513 to 1741] [2068 to 2505] [2068 to 2505] [1157 to 1282] [1432 to 1593] [1629 to 1874] [2158 to 2482] [2024 to 2066] [1512 to 1544] [1898 to 1906]
234.7 to 269.9 365.4 to 418.0 234.7 to 269.9 350.6 to 403.2 351.4 to 354.4 299.8 to 302.2
350 (14) {2393 to 2752} {3726 to 4262} {2393 to 2752} {3575 to 4112} {3586 to 3617} {3059 to 3084}
[2077 to 2389] [3234 to 3699] [2077 to 2389] [3103 to 3568] [3110 to 3137] [2654 to 2675]
320.0 to 368.0 320.0 to 368.0 320.0 to 368.0 448.3 to 515.5 336.6 to 339.5 390.0 to 393.2
400 (16) {3263 to 3753} {3263 to 3753} {3263 to 3753} {4571 to 5257} {3435 to 3465} {3980 to 4012}
[2832 to 3257] [2832 to 3257] [2832 to 3257] [3968 to 4562] [2979 to 3005] [3452 to 3480]

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 24
3.3.5 Gaskets size
Be sure to choose a gasket with an inner and outer diameter that does not protrude inside the piping.
If the inner diameter of the gasket is too large, or outer diameter of the gasket is too small, fluid leakage may result.

Table 3.3.16Inner Diameter of Grounding Ring, Outer Diameter for Effective Sealing and Recommended Inner Diameter of
Gasket
AXF Standard: Unit : mm (approx. inch)
PFA/ Polyurethane Rubber/ Natural Soft Rubber/ EPDM Rubber Ceramics

Wafer Flange
Outer Recommended Inner
Outer Recommended Inner Outer Recommended Inner Inner Diameter of Gasket
Inner Inner Diameter
Size Diameter Diameter of Gasket Diameter Diameter of Gasket Diameter of
Diameter of Diameter of for
for for Grounding
Grounding PTFE-sheathed Grounding PTFE-sheathed Effective PTFE-sheathed
Effective Flat Effective Flat Ring Flat
Ring Non-asbestos Ring Non-asbestos Sealing Non-asbestos
Sealing Gasket Sealing Gasket [A] Gasket
[A] Gasket [A] Gasket [B] Gasket
[B] [C] [B] [C] [C]
[D] [D] [D]

15 (0.59) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87)


2.5 (0.1) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87) 30 (1.18)
[12 (0.47)] *1 [15 (0.59)]*1 [19 (0.75)]*1

15 (0.59) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87)


5 (0.2) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87) 30 (1.18)
[12 (0.47)] *1 [15 (0.59)]*1 [19 (0.75)]*1

15 (0.59) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87)


10 (0.4) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87) 30 (1.18)
[12 (0.47)] *1 [15 (0.59)]*1 [19 (0.75)]*1

15 (0.5) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 22 (0.87) 15 (0.59) 34 (1.34) 22 (0.87) 15 (0.59) 33 (1.30) 22 (0.87)

25 (1.0) 28 (1.10) 53 (2.09) 35 (1.38) 28 (1.10) 53 (2.09) 35 (1.38) 27 (1.06) 50 (1.97) 35 (1.38)

32 (1.25) 34 (1.34) 58 (2.28) 43 (1.69) 34 (1.34) 58 (2.28) 43 (1.69)

40 (1.5) 41 (1.61) 71 (2.80) 49 (1.93) 41 (1.61) 71 (2.80) 49 (1.93) 40 (1.57) 68 (2.68) 49 (1.93)

50 (2.0) 53 (2.09) 84 (3.31) 61 (2.40) 53 (2.09) 84 (3.31) 61 (2.40) 52 (2.05) 82 (3.23) 61 (2.40)

65 (2.5) 66 (2.60) 103 (4.06) 84 (3.31) 66 (2.60) 103 (4.06) 84 (3.31)

80 (3.0) 77 (3.03) 114 (4.49) 90 (3.54) 77 (3.03) 114 (4.49) 90 (3.54) 81 (3.19) 112 (4.41) 90 (3.54)

100 (4.0) 102 (4.02) 140 (5.51) 115 (4.53) 102 (4.02) 140 (5.51) 115 (4.53) 98 (3.86) 134 (5.28) 115 (4.53)

125 (5.0) 128 (5.04) 165 (6.50) 141 (5.55) 128 (5.04) 165 (6.50) 141 (5.55)

150 (6.0) 146.1 (5.75) 190 (7.48) 167 (6.57) 146.1 (5.75) 190 (7.48) 167 (6.57) 144 (5.67) 188 (7.40) 167 (6.57)

200 (8.0) 193.6 (7.62) 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58) 193.6 (7.62) 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58) 192 (7.56) 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58)

250 (10) 243.7 (9.59) 300 (11.81) 270 (10.63) 243 (9.57) 315 (12.40) 270 (10.63)

300 (12) 294.7 (11.60) 348 (13.70) 321 (12.64) 291.3 (11.47) 360 (14.17) 321 (12.64)

350 (14) 323.4 (12.73) 405 (15.94) 359 (14.13)

400 (16) 373.5 (14.70) 465 (18.31) 410 (16.14)

*1: The inner diameter of the process connection code: DD4, DJ1, DJ2 is values in brackets [ ].
Replacement Model for earlier ADMAG or ADMAG AE: Unit : mm (approx. inch) Size of Inner Diameter of Grounding
Ring, Outer Diameter for Effective
PFA/ Polyurethane Rubber
Sealing and Recommended Inner
Wafer Flange Diameter of Gasket:
Outer Recommended Inner Recommended Inner
Inner Outer
Size Diameter Diameter of Gasket Inner Diameter Diameter of Gasket
Diameter of Diameter
for PTFE-sheathed of Grounding PTFE-sheathed
Grounding Flat for Effective Flat
Effective Non-asbestos Ring Non-asbestos
Ring Gasket Sealing Gasket
Sealing Gasket [A] Gasket AXF
[A] [C] [B] [C] B Flowtube
[B] [D] [D] D *2 C A
Lining
2.5 (0.1) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87)

5 (0.2) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87)

10 (0.4) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87)

15 (0.5) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 22 (0.87) Grounding Ring


25 (1.0) 27 (1.06) 56 (2.20) 35 (1.38) Flat Gasket

40 (1.5) 40 (1.57) 71 (2.80) 49 (1.93) PTFE-sheathed Non-asbestos Gasket


F0318.ai
50 (2.0) 52 (2.05) 85 (3.35) 61 (2.40)
*2: Be careful not to be small compared to
80 (3.0) 81 (3.19) 115 (4.53) 90 (3.54) inner diameter of grounding ring (A).
100 (4.0) 98 (3.86) 144 (5.67) 115 (4.53)

150 (6.0) 140.7(5.54) 190 (7.48) 167 (6.57) 140.7 (5.54) 205 (8.07) 167 (6.57)

200 (8.0) 188.9(7.44) 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58) 188.9 (7.44) 255 (10.04) 218 (8.58)

250 (10) 243 (9.57) 315 (12.40) 270 (10.63)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 25
3.3.6 Nomial Diameter 15 mm (0.5 in.) to 4) Tightening clamp
125 mm (5.0 in.), Sanitary Type Install a clamp to cover the tapered parts of the
flowmeter-side adapter and the ferrule, and
The sanitary type can be mounted to the piping using a tighten the clamp screw.
clamp, a union, or a welded joint. 5) Confirmation of adapter mounting screw
After installation of the magnetic flowmeter, be
NOTE sure to retighten the adapter mounting screw
according to Table 3.3.18 or Table 3.3.19.
This section describes the remote flowtube as an Be sure to confirm that leakage from adapter
example. The same procedure also applies to the connection point does not occur by filling the pipe
integral flowmeter. of the flowtube with fluid.

Sanitary adapters are engraved with character as NOTE


identification.
Table 3.3.17 Sanitary Adapter Identification The ferrule, clamp, and gasket are not provided with
Identification Character Material for Adapter the flowmeter, and must be provided by the user.
No mark SUS304
F SUSF304
L SUS316L
FL SUSF316L

Adapter for clamp connection


(1) Mounting Direction
Clamp
3
Mount the flowmeter so that the flow direction of the fluid
to be measured is in line with the direction of the arrow

Installation
Gasket
mark on the flowmeter. Ferrule

Adapter mounting screw


IMPORTANT
F0319.ai
If it is impossible to match the direction of the arrow Figure 3.3.6Mounting Procedure for Clamp Connection
mark, the direction of the electrical connection can Type
be changed. Refer to the applicable users manuals (b) Union type
which can be downloaded from our website. (process connection codes: JDB, JKB, and JSB)
In case the fluid being measured flows against the 1) Welding sleeve
arrow direction, change the value from Forward to Pass the piping through a nut and then weld a
Reverse at the parameter [ J20: Flow Direction ] sleeve to the piping.
(refer to Chapter 8).

IMPORTANT
(2) Mounting Procedure
Be sure to weld the sleeve after passing the piping
(a) Clamp type
through the nut.
(process connection codes: HAB, HDB, and HKB)
When welding the sleeve, pay attention to the
1) Welding ferrule
edge preparation, level differences between the
Weld a ferrule to the piping.
sleeve and the piping, and the welding current to
avoid deforming the piping or causing stagnation
IMPORTANT of some of the fluid.

When welding the ferrule, pay attention to the edge 2) Installing gasket
preparation, level differences between the ferrule and Install a gasket for union to fit in the groove on the
the piping, and the welding current to avoid deforming sleeve.
the piping or causing stagnation portion of the fluid. 3) Positioning flowmeter
Move the nut closer to the piping temporarily and
2) Installing gasket position the flowmeter between the two sleeves.
Install a gasket for clamp to fit in the groove on the 4) Tightening nut
ferrule. Install the nut to cover the tapered parts of the
3) Positioning flowmeter flowmeter-side adapter and the sleeve, and
Position the flowmeter between the two ferrules. tighten it using a wrench.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 26
5) Confirmation of adapter mounting screw
After installation of the magnetic flowmeter, be CAUTION
sure to retighten the adapter mounting screw
according to Table 3.3.18 or Table 3.3.19. In case of standard gasket (EPDM rubber), tighten
Be sure to confirm that leakage from adapter the adapter mounting screw according to the
connection point does not occur by filling the pipe torque values in Table 3.3.18.
of the flowtube with fluid. In case that optional code GH (Silicon rubber)
is selected, tighten the adapter mounting screw
according to the torque values in Table 3.3.19.
NOTE Tighten the adapter mounting screw in diagonal
order step by step.
The sleeve, nut, and gasket are not provided with the After tightening of screw, confirm that gaskets
flowmeter, and must be provided by the user. protrude inside adapter. Protruding of gasket is
necessary to keep the sanitary requirements.

Table 3.3.18Tightening Torque Values of adapter for EPDM


rubber gasket
Tightening torque values (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Adapter for union connection
Gasket
Size type EPDM rubber (standard)
Gasket mm (inch)
15 (0.5), 25 (1.0),
3.0 to 3.5 / {30.59 to 35.69} / [26.55 to 30.98]
Sleeve 32 (1.25), 40 (1.5)
Nut 50 (2.0), 65 (2.5) 4.5 to 5.0 / {45.89 to 50.99} / [39.83 to 44.25]
80 (3.0) 8.0 to 9.0 / {81.58 to 91.78} / [70.81 to 79.65]
100 (4.0), 125 (5.0) 10 to 11 / {102.0 to 112.2} / [88.50 to 97.35]
Adapter mounting screw
Table 3.3.19Tightening Torque Values of adapter for
F0320.ai
silicon rubber gasket
Figure 3.3.7Mounting Procedure for Union Connection
Tightening torque values (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Type
Gasket
(c) Butt weld adapter type Size type Silicon rubber (optional code GH)
mm (inch)
(process connection codes: KDB and KKB) 15 (0.5), 25 (1.0),
2.0 to 2.5 / {20.39 to 25.49} / [17.70 to 22.13]
1) Removing adapter 32 (1.25), 40 (1.5)
Remove the butt weld adapter by loosening the 50 (2.0), 65 (2.5), 80 (3.0) 4.0 to 4.5 / {40.79 to 45.89} / [35.40 to 39.83]
100 (4.0), 125 (5.0) 6.0 to 6.5 / {61.18 to 66.28} / [53.10 to 57.53]
mounting screws.
2) Welding ferrule or sleeve
4) Mounting flowmeter to piping
Weld a ferrule, a sleeve, or an alternative
Connect the flowmeter to the piping in a manner
(provided by the user) to the butt weld adapter.
appropriate to the ferrule, the sleeve, or the
alternative that has been welded to the adapter.
IMPORTANT 5) Confirmation of adapter mounting screw
After installation of the magnetic flowmeter, be
sure to retighten the adapter mounting screw
Be sure to weld the ferrule, the sleeve, or the
according to Table 3.3.18 or Table 3.3.19.
alternative after removing the butt weld adapter
Be sure to confirm that leakage from adapter
from the flowmeter itself.
connection point does not occur by filling the pipe
When welding the ferrule, the sleeve, or the
of the flowtube with fluid
alternative, pay attention to the edge preparation,
level differences between them and the piping, and
the welding current to avoid deforming the piping
or causing stagnation portion of the fluid. Mini-flange
Gasket
3) Installing butt weld adapter Butt weld adapter
Install a gasket to fit in the groove of the butt weld Adapter
adapter, and tighten the mounting screws. mounting screw

F0321.ai

Figure 3.3.8Mounting Procedure for Weld Joint Adapter


Type

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 27
3.4 Installation of Remote
Converter

WARNING
Installation of the magnetic flowmeter must be 2-inch pipe

performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. Nut


No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures
relating to installation.
Mounting fixture
Washer
Screw
3.4.1 Installation Location
U-bolt F0323.ai

Figure 3.4.2 2-inch Pipe Horizontal Mounting

IMPORTANT
3.4.3 Mounting of AXFA11
Install the instrument in a location where it is not
AXFA11 Remote Converter can be mounted using surface
exposed to direct sunlight. For ambient temperature,
mounting, 2-inch pipe mounting, or panel mounting.
refer to OUTLINE of the appropriate manual which
can be downloaded from our website.
Surface Mounting (Wall Mounting) 3
The instrument may be used in an ambient humidity
where the RH ranges from 0 to 100%. However, avoid Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

Installation
long-term continuous operation at relative humidity
For surface mounting, use the mounting
above 95%. fixture provided, using M6 screws.
These M6 screws must be provided by the user.
4-6 Hole or
3.4.2 Mounting of AXFA14 M6 Screw

AXFA14 Remote Converter can be mounted on a 2-inch


pipe in a vertical or horizontal position depending on the

(2.56)
installation site.

65
1. Fix the instrument on the mounting fixture using four
screws.
2. Fix the mounting fixture with the instrument installed 194 (7.64)
on a 2-inch pipe using a U-bolt. F0324.ai

Figure 3.4.3 Surface Mounting


2-inch pipe
U-bolt
IMPORTANT
Mounting fixture on equipment intended to be mounted
on a wall or ceiling shall withstand a force of four times
the weight of the equipment (AXFA11: 3.3kg (7.3 lb)).
Nut

Washer
Mounting fixture
Screw F0322.ai

Figure 3.4.1 2-inch Pipe Vertical Mounting

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 28
2-inch Pipe Mounting

2-inch pipe

Mounting fixture

Washer

Clamp screw

Pass the four clamp screws through the mounting fixture,


position it on the 2-inch pipe, and then fasten the AXFA11 in place.
F0325.ai

Figure 3.4.4 2-inch Pipe Mounting

Panel Mounting
Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

Panel cutout
203 (8.0)

Mounting fixture
172 (6.8)
R3MAX
Washer
Screw

Clamp screw

Fit the AXFA11 into the panel. Then attach the mounting fixture
to the AXFA11 using the screw and the washer, and secure the
instrument with the two clamp screws.
F0326.ai

Figure 3.4.5 Panel Mounting

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 29

4. Wiring
4.1 Wiring the Integral 4.1.1 Wiring Precautions
Flowmeter Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring:

This section describes the wiring of the integral flowmeter.


CAUTION
WARNING In cases where the ambient temperature exceeds
50C (122F), use external heatresistant wiring
The wiring of the magnetic flowmeter must be with a maximum allowable temperature of 70C
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. (158F) or above.
No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures Do not connect cables outdoors in wet weather in
relating to wiring. order to prevent damage from condensation and to
protect the insulation, e.g. inside the terminal box
of the flowmeter.
All the cable ends must be provided with round
CAUTION crimp-on terminals and be securely wired.
The signal cables must be routed in separate steel
Once all wiring is complete, check the connections conduit tubes 16 (JIS C 8305) or flexible conduit
before applying power to the instrument. Improper tubes 15 (JIS C 8309).
arrangements or wiring may cause a unit malfunction Always route the power and output signal cables
or damage. in separate steel conduit tubes, except when the
power supply voltage is 24 V and four-core cables 4
are used for wiring. Keep conduits or flexible tubes

Wiring
watertight using sealing tape.
When waterproof glands or union equipped
waterproof glands are used, avoid tightening the
glands with an excessive torque.
When the power supply voltage is 24V, it comes
with a blanking plug. Use this plug to cover the
unused wiring port when wiring the instrument with
only one, four-core cable.
Be sure to turn the power off before opening the
terminal box cover.
Before turning the power on, tighten the terminal
box cover securely.
The terminal box cover is locked by the special
screw. In case of opening the terminal box cover,
use the hexagonal wrench attached. For handling
the locking screw, refer to Figure 4.1.5.
Be sure to lock the cover by the special screw
using the hexagonal wrench attached after
installing the cover. For handling the locking screw,
refer to Figure 4.1.16.
Explosion protected types must be wired in
accordance with specific requirement (and, in
certain countries, legal regulations) in order to
preserve the effectiveness of their explosion
protected features.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 30
4.1.2 Power Cable/Output Cable (2) When waterproof property is necessary
(Wiring using waterproof glands)
JIS C 3401 control cable equivalent
JIS C 3312 power cable equivalent
14 AWG Belden 8720 equivalent IMPORTANT
Outer Diameter:
With no gland option: To prevent water or condensation from entering the
6.5 to 12 mm (0.26 to 0.47 in.) converter housing, waterproof glands are recommended.
With gland options EG, EU: Do not over-tighten the glands or damage to the cables
10.5 or 11.5 mm (0.41 to 0.45 in.) may result. Tightness of the gland can be checked by
With gland options EP: confirming that the cable is held firmly in place.
6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in.)
Nominal Cross Section: For working on the electric wire tubes or the flexible tubes
Single wire; 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (G1/2), remove the waterproof gland and attach them
Stranded wire; 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 directly to the wiring port.

In case of power cable, Green/Yellow covered conductor


shall be used only for connection to PROTECTIVE
CONDUCTOR TERMINALS. Conform to IEC227,
IEC245 or equivalent national authorization. Washer

NOTE
Gasket
For power cables, always use a crimp terminal Waterproof gland
with an insulation cover. Cable F0401.ai
Use crimp tools from the manufacturer of the crimp Figure 4.1.1 Waterproof Gland (Optional code EG)
terminal you want to use to connect the crimp
terminal and cable.
Use crimp tools that are appropriate for the
diameter of the cable to be connected.

Gasket
4.1.3 Wiring Ports for Integral Flowmeter
This instrument is of watertight construction as stipulated
G1/2
in JIS C 0920. It is shipped with a wiring bracket
(waterproof gland or waterproof gland with union) or a Washer
plastic gland attached, only in cases where an optional Tightening gland
specification is selected for the wiring port.
Cable
In case of the explosion proof type, refer to Chapter 10.
When working on conduit pipes or flexible pipes (G1/2 only)

IMPORTANT Figure 4.1.2Waterproof Gland with Union Joint


F0402.ai

(Optional code EU)


The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not waterproof).
Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port.
If waterproof property is necessary, apply a blanking
plug to the unused wiring port.
The blanking plug may not be attached depending on
Gasket
the specification.
If it is necessary, contact YOKOGAWA.

(1) When waterproof property is unnecessary


(When there are no particular optional Plastic gland
specifications) F0403.ai

The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not water-proof) that Figure 4.1.3 Plastic Gland (Optional code EP)
must be removed before wiring. At this time, handle the
wiring port in accordance with the JIS C 0920 mentioned
above. Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 31
(3) Conduit Wiring (2) Terminal Configuration
When wiring the conduits, pass the conduit through the When the cover is removed, the connection terminals will
wiring connection port, and utilize the waterproof gland to be visible.
prevent water from flowing in. Place the conduit pipe on
an angle as shown in Figure 4.1.4.

+ L/ + N / -
SUPPLY
POWER
Install a drain valve at the low end of the vertical pipe, and
open the valve regularly.

+-
DO

+-
DIO

-
Drain valve Terminal Label
F0406.ai
(Back side)
F0404.ai

Figure 4.1.4 Conduit Wiring Figure 4.1.6 Terminal Configuration for Integral Flowmeter

The description of the terminal symbols is shown in Table


4.1.4 Wiring Connections for Integral 4.1.1.
Flowmeter For FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, refer to IM 01E20F02-
01E.
(1) Removing Cover For PROFIBUS PA protocol, refer to IM 01E20F12-01E.
Loosen cover locking screw 2 clockwise using a
Table 4.1.1 Terminal Symbols for Integral Flowmeter
hexagonal wrench (nominal size 3) to unlock the cover.
Terminal Symbols Description
4
(Upon shipment from the manufacturing plant, the cover
is unlocked.) Hold the flowmeter with your hand and Functional grounding

Wiring
remove the cover by turning it in the direction of the arrow N/
Power supply
as shown below. L/+
I+
Current output 4 to 20mA DC
I
DO+
Pulse output/Alarm output/ Status output
DO
DIO+
Alarm output/Status output Status input
DIO
1 2
Protective grounding (Outside of the terminal)

(3) Precautions for Wiring of Power Supply


Cover locking screws
Cables
When connecting to the power supply, observe the points
below. Failure to comply with these warnings may result
F0405.ai
in an electric shock or damage to the instrument.
Figure 4.1.5Removing the Terminal Box Cover for Integral
Flowmeter
WARNING
Ensure that the power supply is OFF in order to
prevent electric shocks.
Ensure the protective grounding terminal is
grounded before turning the power on.
Use insulating sleeve crimp terminals (for 4-mm
screws) for the power supply wiring and protective
grounding wiring.
Install an external switch or circuit breaker as a
means to turn the power off (capacitance; 15A,
conforming to IEC60947-1 and IEC60947-3).
Locate this switch either near the instrument or
in other places facilitating easy operation. Affix a
Power Off Equipment label to this external switch
or circuit breaker.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 32
Wiring Procedure for Integral Flowmeter 3) Setting Power Supply Frequency
1. Turn the instruments power off.
2. Wire the power supply cable and the functional IMPORTANT
grounding cable to the power supply terminals.
Functional grounding cable
Set the local commercial power frequency in order to
eliminate the effect of induction noise from the power
+ L/+ N/ -

supply.
SUPPLY
POWER

Refer to Parameter Description in the users manual


of the AXF Integral Flowmeter [Software Edition] (IM
I

01E20C02-01E).
+

Power supply
DO

cable Parameter No.: J30 and J31


+-
DIO

F0407.ai
(5) Grounding
Figure 4.1.7 Electric Cable Wiring for Integral Flowmeter

(4) DC Power Connection CAUTION


When using DC power as the power supply for the Be sure to connect the protective grounding of the
converter, give attention to the following points. AXF integral flowmeter with a cable of 2mm2 or larger
cross section in order to avoid electrical shock to the
1) Connecting Power Supply operators and maintenance engineers and to prevent
the influence of external noise.
IMPORTANT Connect the grounding wire to the mark.
The grounding should satisfy Class D requirements
Do not connect power supply with reversed polarities. (grounding resistance, 100 or less).
L/+ terminal: connect + In case of TIIS Flameproof type, the grounding should
N/ terminal: connect satisfy Class C requirements (grounding resistance,
10 or less) or class A requirements (grounding
resistance, 10 or less).
For explosion proof type except TIIS, follow the domestic
IMPORTANT electrical requirements as regulated in each country.

Do not connect power supply with 100 to 240 V


AC or 100 to 120 V DC in the case of a 24 V
power supply version (power supply code 2). IMPORTANT
It will give a damage to the converter.
When optional code A (lightning protector) is selected,
the ground should satisfy Class C requirements
2) Required Power Supply Voltages
(grounding resistance, 10 or less).

IMPORTANT The protective grounding terminals are located on


the inside and outside of the terminal area.
When using a 24 V power supply, the specification for
Either terminal may be used.
the supply voltage is 24 V (15% to +20%), but the input
Use 600 V vinyl insulation wires as the grounding wires.
voltage of the converter drops due to cable resistance
therefore it must be used within the following ranges.

796 (2610)
Allowable cable
length m(ft)

796 (2610)
796 (2610)

Protective grounding
200 ( 660)
terminals
0
20.4 22 24 26 28.8
Usable range E (V)
Cable cross section area: 1.25 mm2
Cable cross section area: 2 mm2 F0409.ai
F0408.ai
Figure 4.1.9Protective Grounding Terminal Location for
Figure 4.1.8Supply Voltage and Cable Length for Integral Integral Flowmeter
Flowmeter

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 33
(6) Connecting to External Instruments
IMPORTANT
Improper grounding can have an adverse effect on WARNING
the flow measurement. Ensure that the instrument is
properly grounded. Before wiring with external instruments, be sure to turn
off the magnetic flowmeter and any external instruments.
The electromotive force of the magnetic flowmeter
is minute and it is easily affected by noise, and the Connect the AXF integral flowmeter terminal to external
reference electric potential is the same as that of the instruments, giving attention to the following points.
measuring fluid. Therefore, the reference electric For FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, refer to IM 01E20F02-
potential (terminal potential) of the flowtube and converter 01E.
also need to be the same as that of the measuring fluid. For PROFIBUS PA protocol, refer to IM 01E20F12-01E.
Moreover, the potential must be the same as the ground.
The magnetic flowmeter is equipped with an grounding 4 to 20 mA DC Current Output
ring that makes a connection with the charge of the
AXF integral flowmeter
measured fluid for grounding and protects the lining. Be l+
sure to ground the flowmeter according to Figure 4.1.10. Receiver
l- Instrument
600 V vinyl-insulated cable
(2 mm2 or larger) Resistive load max. 750
Communication Resistive load
BRAIN 250 to 450
HART 250 to 600 F0411.ai

Figure 4.1.11 4 to 20 mA DC Output Connection

Pulse Output
grounding ring 4
IMPORTANT

Wiring
Class D requirements (grounding resistance, 100 or less).
Optional code A (lightning protector): Class C requirements As this is a transistor contact (insulated type), give
(grounding resistance, 10 or less).
TIIS Flameproof type: Class C requirements (grounding resistance, 10 attention to proper voltage and polarity when wiring.
or less) or class A requirements (grounding resistance, 10 or less). Do not apply a voltage larger than 30V DC or
Explosion proof type except TIIS: Domestic electrical requirements as
regulated in each country.
a current larger than 0.2A in order to prevent
damage to the instrument.
When input filter constant of the electronic counter
is large in relation to the pulse width, the signal will
decrease and the count will not be accurate.
If the input impedance of the electronic counter is
large, an induction noise from the power supply
may result in inaccurate counts. Use a shield cable
or sufficiently reduce the input impedance of the
In case grounding rings In case grounding rings are not used. electronic counter within the magnetic flowmeter
are used. (Available only for metal piping)
F0410.ai
pulse output specification range.
Figure 4.1.10 Grounding for Integral Flowmeter The active pulse output (Optional code EM) cannot
be used in conjunction with the standard pulse
output.
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM) is
selected, do not be short-circuit between the DO+
and DO terminals to avoid damaging the instrument.
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM)
is selected, the range of pulse rate must be set to 2
pps maximum.
To avoid communication (BRAIN/ HART) failure, it
is recommended to use the shield cable.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 34
Status Output / Alarm Output
NOTE
For pulse output from the DO terminals, parameters
IMPORTANT
must be set. Refer to Parameter Description in
Since this is an isolated transistor output, be careful
the users manual of the AXF Integral Flowmeter
of voltage and polarity when wiring. Do not apply a
[Software Edition] (IM 01E20C02- 01E).
voltage larger than 30V DC or a current larger than
0.2A in order to prevent damage to the instrument.
AXF integral flowmeter DO+ Protective diode
This output cannot switch an AC load. To switch an AC
PULSE OUT Mechanical Counter load, an intermediate relay must be inserted as shown
DO- in Figure 4.1.15.

AXF integral flowmeter DO+


* The alarm output operates from open (normal) to closed
PULSE OUT Load Electronic Counter (alarm occurrence) by factory default setting. Changes
DO- can be made via the parameter settings.
30V DC, 0.2A. max F0412.ai
AXF integral flowmeter DO+ (or DIO+) Protective diode
Figure 4.1.12 Pulse Output Connection
Load
AXF integral flowmeter DO- (or DIO-)
DO+ Protective diode

This connection is not possible.


Mechanical Counter
PULSE OUT DO- AXF integral flowmeter DO+ (or DIO+)
Relay
Electromagnetic
AXF integral flowmeter valve
DO+ DO- (or DIO-)

Load Electronic Counter External power supply AC power supply


PULSE OUT DO- 30V DC, 0.2A. max
F0415.ai

Figure 4.1.15 Status Output / Alarm Output Connection


Output voltage: 24 V DC 20%
Current: 150 mA or less
Pulse rate: 0.0001 to 2 pps
Pulse width: 20, 33, 50, 100 ms F0413.ai
NOTE
Figure 4.1.13Active Pulse Output Connection For status and alarm outputs from the DO or DIO
(Optional code EM)
terminals, parameters must be set. Refer to
Parameter Description in the users manual of the
Status Input
AXF Integral Flowmeter
[Software Edition] (IM 01E20C02-01E).
IMPORTANT
Status inputs are designed for use with no-voltage
(7) Installing the Cover
(dry) contacts. Be careful not to connect the status to Install the cover to the flowmeter by turning it in the
any signal source carrying voltage. direction of the arrow as shown below. Tighten cover
Applying voltage may damage the input circuit. locking screw 2 counterclockwise using a hexagonal
wrench (nominal size 3) to lock the cover.
Closed: Less than 200
Open: More than 100 k
AXF integral flowmeter
DIO+

1 2
DIO-

No-voltage status input F0414.ai

Figure 4.1.14 Status Input Connection Cover locking screws

NOTE
F0416.ai

For status input to the DIO terminals, parameters must Figure 4.1.16Installing the Terminal Box Cover for Integral
be set. Refer to Parameter Description in the users Flowmeter
manual of the AXF Integral Flowmeter
[Software Edition] (IM 01E20C02-01E).

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 35
4.2 Wiring the Remote Flowtube 4.2.1 Wiring Precautions
This section describes the wiring of the remote flowtube Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring:
only. For information relating to the wiring of the converter,
refer to Section 4.3 or Section 4.4 of this manual. CAUTION
In cases where the ambient temperature exceeds
WARNING 50C (122F), use external heat-resistant wiring
with a maximum allowable temperature of 70C
The wiring of the magnetic flowmeter must be (158F) or above.
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. Do not connect cables outdoors in wet weather in
No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures order to prevent damage from condensation and to
relating to wiring. protect the insulation, e.g. inside the terminal box
of the flowtube.
Do not splice the cable between the flowtube terminal
CAUTION and the converter if it is too short. Replace the short
cable with a cable that is the appropriate length.
Once all wiring is complete, check the connections All the cable ends must be provided with round
before applying power to the instrument. Improper crimp-on terminals and be securely wired.
arrangements or wiring may cause a unit malfunction The signal cables must be routed in separate steel
or damage. conduit tubes 16 (JIS C 8305) or flexible conduit
tubes 15 (JIS C 8309).
Keep conduits or flexible tubes watertight using
sealing tape.
Ground the remote flowtube and the converter
separately. 4
Cover each shield of the signal cable with vinyl
tube or vinyl tape to avoid contact between two

Wiring
shields or between a shield and a case.
When waterproof glands or union equipped
waterproof glands are used, avoid tightening the
glands with an excessive torque.
Be sure to turn the power off before opening the
terminal box cover.
Before turning the power on, tighten the terminal
box cover securely.
The terminal box cover is locked by the special
screw. In case of opening the terminal box cover,
use the hexagonal wrench attached. For handling
the locking screw, refer to Figure 4.2.8.
Be sure to lock the cover by the special screw
using the hexagonal wrench attached after
installing the cover. For handling the locking screw,
refer to Figure 4.2.16.
Explosion protected types must be wired in
accordance with specific requirement (and, in
certain countries, legal regulations) in order to
preserve the effectiveness of their explosion
protected features.
When submersible type or optional code DHC is
selected, waterproof glands, signal and excitation
cables are attached. In order to preserve the
effectiveness of waterproof features, the terminal
box cover and waterproof glands must not be
detached from flowmeter.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 36

IMPORTANT CAUTION
Prepare the signal cable and the excitation cable
As crimp terminals A, B, SA, SB and C have their
almost the same length. It is recommended to lay
own electrical potentials, securely insulate them so
them together closely.
as not to come in contact with one another.
To prevent a shield from coming in contact with
another shield or the case, cover each shield with
4.2.2 Cables
a vinyl tube or wrap it in vinyl tape.
(1) Dedicated Signal Cable (AXFC)
Conductors (A and B)
Shields (SA and SB)
NOTE
Tape
Conductors A and B carry the signal from the
Outer jacket 10.5 (0.413 in.) electrodes, and C is at the potential of the liquid (signal
common). Shields SA and SB are kept at the same
potentials as the individual electrodes (these are
Shield (C)
Insulation actively driven shields). This is done to reduce the
Insulation F0417.ai effect of the distributed capacitance of the cable at
Figure 4.2.1 Dedicated Signal Cable AXFC long cable length.
Note that, since the signals from the individual
The flow signal is transmitted via this dedicated cable. electrodes are impedance converted inside the
The cable is constructed with double shielding over the converter, errors will result if they come in contact with
two conductors, and heat-resistant vinyl is used for the any other component. Great care must be taken in the
outer jacket material. cable end treatment.
Finished diameter: 10.5 mm (0.413 in.)
Maximum length: (2) Excitation Cable
Combination with the AXFA11 converter: 200 m (660 ft)
Combination with the AXFA14 converter: 100 m (330 ft) JIS C 3401 control cable equivalent
Maximum temperature: 80C (176F) JIS C 3312 power cable equivalent
14 AWG Belder 8720 equivalent
Outer Diameter:
IMPORTANT With no gland option:
If the cable is longer than required, cut off any extra 6.5 to 12 mm (0.26 to 0.47 in.)
length rather than coiling it up, and terminate the With gland options EG, EU and EW:
conductors as shown in Figure 4.2.2. 10.5 or 11.5 mm (0.41 to 0.45 in.)
Avoid using junction terminal boards to extend the With gland options EP:
cable length, as this will interrupt the shielding. 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in.)
Nominal Cross Section:
Unit : mm (approx. inch) Single wire; 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
Stranded wire; 0.5 to 1.5 mm2
55 (2.17)
25 (0.98)

Unit : mm
A

(approx. inch)
A

50 (1.97)
SA

SB

Crimp terminal
60 (2.36)

90 (3.54)

90 (3.54)
C

70 (2.76)

EX1
EX2

EX2
EX1

White Black Red


White Black Red

85 (3.35) 85 (3.35)
8 (0.3) max.
8(0.3) max.
1505

1505
(5.9)
(5.9)

On the On the
converter flowtube
side side
On the converter side On the flowtube side
10.5 (0.4)

L (Specified Dimensions)

20 (0.8)

AXFC
F0418.ai

Figure 4.2.2 Treatment of Dedicated Signal Cables

F0419.ai

Figure 4.2.3 End Treatment of Excitation Cable

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 37

NOTE
For excitation cables, always use a crimp terminal Washer
with an insulation cover.
Use crimp tools from the manufacturer of the crimp
terminal you want to use to connect the crimp
terminal and cable. Gasket
Use crimp tools that are appropriate for the Waterproof gland
diameter of the cable to be connected. Cable F0420.ai

Figure 4.2.4 Waterproof Gland (Optional code EG)

4.2.3 Wiring Ports for Remote Flowmeter


This instrument is of watertight construction as stipulated
in JIS C 0920. It is shipped with a wiring bracket
(waterproof gland or waterproof gland with union) or a
plastic gland attached, only in cases where an optional Gasket
specification is selected for the wiring port. In case of the
explosion proof type, refer to chapter 10.
G1/2

IMPORTANT
Washer

The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not waterproof). Tightening gland
Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port.
Cable
If waterproof property is necessary, apply a blanking
plug to the unused wiring port. When working on conduit pipes or flexible pipes (G1/2 only)
4
The blanking plug may not be attached depending on F0421.ai

Wiring
the specification. Figure 4.2.5Waterproof Gland with Union Joint
If it is necessary, contact YOKOGAWA. (Optional code EU)

(1) When waterproof property is unnecessary


(When there are no particular optional
specifications) Gasket
Plastic gland
The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not water-proof) that
must be removed before wiring. At this time, handle the
wiring port in accordance with the JIS C 0920 mentioned
above. Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring F0422.ai
port.
Figure 4.2.6 Plastic Gland (Optional code EP)
(2) When waterproof property is necessary
(Wiring using waterproof glands) (3) Conduit Wiring
When wiring the conduits, pass the conduit through the
IMPORTANT wiring connection port, and utilize the waterproof gland to
prevent water from flowing in. Place the conduit pipe on
To prevent water or condensation from entering the an angle as shown in Figure 4.2.7
converter housing, waterproof glands are recommended. Install a drain valve at the low end of the vertical pipe, and
Do not over-tighten the glands or damage to the cables open the valve regularly.
may result. Tightness of the gland can be checked by
confirming that the cable is held firmly in place.

For working on the electric wire tubes or the flexible tubes


(G1/2), remove the waterproof gland and attach them
directly to the wiring port.

Drain valve

F0423.ai

Figure 4.2.7 Conduit Wiring

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 38
4.2.4 Wiring Connections for Remote (3) Wiring the Remote Flowtube (General-
Flowtube Purpose Use, Submersible Type, Sanitary
Type) with Converters
WARNING 1) Connection with the AXFA11 converter
Connect wiring as shown in the figure below.
Before wiring, be sure that the power supply for
AXFA11 or AXFA14 converter has been turned off to I+ I
CURRENT OUT
SO1+ SO2+ COM
STATUS OUT
AL+ AL
ALARM OUT
C SA A
SIGNAL
B SB

prevent an electrical shock. FUSE


AXFA11 converter
2.5A 250V
N/ L/+ EX1 EX2 P+ P SI1+ SI2+ COM
POWER SUPPLY EXCIT ATION PULSE OUT STATUS IN

(1) Removing Cover AXFC dedicated


signal cable
Loosen the cover locking screw clockwise using a Excitation cable
hexagonal wrench (nominal size 3) to unlock the cover. Converter
Remote
flowtube
(Upon shipment from the manufacturing plant, the cover SA Taping*

is unlocked.) Hold the flowtube with your hand and A


B
A
B
remove the cover by turning it in the direction of the arrow SB Taping*
C C
as shown below. A EX2 EX1 EX1
EX2 EX2
B
* Individually tape and insulate
the shields corresponding to
SA and SB on the remote
EX1 flowtube side.
C
Remote flowtube F0427.ai

Figure 4.2.11 Wiring Diagram

2) Connection with the AXFA14 converter


Connect wiring as shown in the figure below.
AXFA14 converter EX1

EX2
Excitation cable
C
AXFC dedicated
F0424.ai signal cable SA
Figure 4.2.8Removing the Terminal Box Cover for Remote A
Flowtube
B
(2) Terminal Configuration SB
When the cover is removed, the connection terminals Converter
Remote
flowtube
Terminal SA Taping*
Symbols Description
A A
A A EX2 B B
B Flow signal output B
SB Taping*
C C
C
EX1 EX1
EX1
Excitation current input EX1 EX2 EX2
EX2 C * Individually tape and insulate
Protective grounding Remote flowtube the shields corresponding to
(Outside of the terminal) SA and SB on the remote
flowtube side. F0428.ai
F0425.ai
Figure 4.2.12 Wiring Diagram
Figure 4.2.9Terminal Configuration for Remote Flowtube
(General-Purpose Use, Submersible Type,
Sanitary Type) (4) Wiring the Remote Flowtube (Explosion
Proof Type) with Converters
Terminal
Symbols Description
A
B Flow signal output
IMPORTANT
C
EX1 In case of ATEX, IECEx or TIIS certified AXF remote
Excitation current input
EX2 flowtube , it is only approved to be combined with
Functional grounding
(Only for explosion proof type)
AXFA14 converter.
Protective grounding
(Oitside of the terminal)
F0426.ai

Figure 4.2.10Terminal Configuration for Remote Flowtube


(Explosion proof Type)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 39
1) Connection with the AXFA11 converter (5) Grounding
In case of FM or CSA certified AXF remote flowtube,
connect wiring as shown in the figure below.
CAUTION
In case of the explosion proof type, the protective
grounding of remote flowtube must be connected Be sure to connect the protective grounding of the
to a suitable IS grounding system. In that case, AXF remote flowtube with a cable of 2mm2 or larger
(functional grounding terminal) need not be cross section in order to avoid electrical shock to the
connected. operators and maintenance engineers and to prevent
the influence of external noise.
I+ I
CURRENT OUT
SO1+ SO2+ COM
STATUS OUT
AL+ AL
ALARM OUT
C SA A
SIGNAL
B SB Connect the grounding wire to the mark. The
FUSE
AXFA11 converter grounding should satisfy Class D requirements
(grounding resistance, 100 or less). In case of TIIS
2.5A 250V
N/ L/+ EX1 EX2 P+ P SI1+ SI2+ COM
POWER SUPPLY EXCIT ATION PULSE OUT STATUS IN

Flameproof type, the grounding should satisfy Class


AXFC dedicated C requirements (grounding resistance, 10 or less)
signal cable or class A requirements (grounding resistance, 10
Excitation cable
Converter
Remote or less).
flowtube
SA Taping* For explosion proof type except TIIS, follow the domestic
A A electrical requirements as regulated in each country.
B B
SB Taping*
C C
A
B EX2
EX1
EX2
EX1
EX2 IMPORTANT
* Individually tape and insulate
the shields corresponding to
SA and SB on the remote
Improper grounding can have an adverse effect on
EX1 flowtube side. the flow measurement. Ensure that the instrument is
C
Remote flowtube properly grounded.
Figure 4.2.13 Wiring Diagram
F0429.ai
4
The electromotive force of the magnetic flowmeter is

Wiring
2) Connection with the AXFA14 converter minute and it is easy to be affected by noise. And also that
In case of ATEX, FM, CSA, IECEx or TIIS certified reference electric potential is the same as the measuring
fluid potential. Therefore, the reference electric potential
AXF remote flowtube, connect wiring as shown in the
(terminal potential) of the flowtube and the converter also
figure below.
need to be the same as the measuring fluid. Moreover,
In case of the explosion proof type, the protective that the potential must be the same with ground. The
grounding of remote flowtube must be connected magnetic flowmeter is equipped with a grounding ring that
to a suitable IS grounding system. In that case, makes a connection with the charge of the measured fluid
(functional grounding terminal) need not be for grounding and protects the lining.
connected. Be sure to ground according to Figure 4.2.15.
AXFA14 converter EX1 600 V vinyl insulated
electric cable
EX2 (2 mm2 or larger)
Excitation cable
C
AXFC dedicated
signal cable SA

A
Grounding ring
B
Class D requirements (grounding resistance. 100 or less).
SB
TIIS Flameproof type: Class C requirements (grounding resistance, 10
Converter
Remote or less) or Class A requirements (grounding resistance, 10 or less)
flowtube Explosion proof type except TIIS: Domestic electrical requirements as
SA Taping*
regulated in each country.
A A
A B B

B EX2 SB Taping*
C C
EX1 EX1
EX2 EX2
C EX1
* Individually tape and insulate
Remote flowtube the shields corresponding to
SA and SB on the remote
flowtube side. F0430.ai

Figure 4.2.14 Wiring Diagram


In case grounding rings In case grounding rings are not used.
are used. (Available only for metal piping) F0431.ai

Figure 4.2.15 Protective Grounding Terminal Location

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 40
(6) Installing the Cover 4.3.1 Wiring Precaution for AXFA14
Install the cover to the flowtube by turning it in the Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring:
direction of the arrow as shown below. Tighten the
cover locking screw counterclockwise using a hexagonal
wrench (nominal size 3) to lock the cover. CAUTION
In cases where the ambient temperature exceeds
50C (122F), use external heat-resistant wiring
with a maximum allowable temperature of 70C
(158F) or above.
Do not connect cables outdoors in wet weather in
order to prevent damage from condensation and
to protect the insulation.
Do not splice the cable between the flowtube
terminal and the converter if it is too short.
Replace the short cable with a cable that is the
appropriate length.
All the cable ends must be provided with round
F0432.ai crimp-on terminals and be securely wired.
Figure 4.2.16Installing the Terminal Box Cover for Remote The signal cables must be routed in separate steel
Flowtube conduit tubes 16 (JIS C 8305) or flexible conduit
tubes 15 (JIS C 8309).
Always route the power and output signal cables
4.3 Wiring the AXFA14 Remote in separate steel conduit tubes, except when the
power supply voltage is 24 V and four-core cables
Converter are used for wiring. Keep conduits or flexible tubes
This section describes the wiring on the AXFA14 remote watertight using sealing tape.
converter side only. For information relating to wiring on Ground the remote flowtube and the converter
the flowtube side, refer to Section 4.2 of this manual. separately.
Cover each shield of the signal cable with vinyl
tube or vinyl tape to avoid contact between two
WARNING shields or between a shield and a case.
When waterproof glands or union equipped
The wiring of the magnetic flowmeter must be waterproof glands are used, avoid tightening the
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. glands with an excessive torque.
No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures When the power supply voltage is 24V, it comes
relating to wiring. with a blanking plug. Use this plug to cover the
unused wiring port when wiring the instrument with
only one, four-core cable.
Be sure to turn power off before opening the cover.
CAUTION Before turning the power on, tighten the cover
securely.
Once all wiring is complete, check the connections The terminal box cover is locked by the special
before applying power to the instrument. screw. In case of opening the terminal box cover,
Improper arrangements or wiring may cause a unit use the hexagonal wrench attached. For handling
malfunction or damage. the locking screw, refer to Figure 4.3.5.
Be sure to lock the cover by the special screw
using the hexagonal wrench attached after
installing the cover. For handling the locking screw,
refer to Figure 4.3.15.
Explosion protected types must be wired in
accordance with specific requirement (and, in
certain countries, legal regulations) in order to
preserve the effectiveness of their explosion
protected features.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 41
(1) When waterproof property is unnecessary
IMPORTANT (When there are no particular optional
specifications)
Prepare the signal cable and the excitation cable
almost the same length. It is recommended to lay The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not water-proof) that
them together closely. must be removed before wiring. At this time, handle the
wiring port in accordance with the JIS C 0920 mentioned
above. Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port.
4.3.2 Power Cable/Output Cable
(2) When waterproof property is necessary
JIS C 3401 control cable equivalent (Wiring using waterproof glands)
JIS C 3312 power cable equivalent
14 AWG Belden 8720 equivalent IMPORTANT
Outer Diameter:
With no gland option: To prevent water or condensation from entering the
6.5 to 12 mm (0.26 to 0.47 in.) converter housing, waterproof glands are recommended.
With gland options EG, EU: Do not over-tighten the glands or damage to the cables
10.5 or 11.5 mm (0.41 to 0.45 in.) may result. Tightness of the gland can be checked by
With gland options EP: confirming that the cable is held firmly in place.
6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in.)
Nominal Cross Section: For working on the electric wire tubes or the flexible tubes
Single wire; 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (G1/2), remove the waterproof gland and attach them
Stranded wire; 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 directly to the wiring port.
In case of power cable, Green/Yellow covered conductor
shall be used only for connection to PROTECTIVE
CONDUCTOR TERMINALS. Conform to IEC227,
IEC245 or equivalent national authorization. 4
Washer

Wiring
NOTE
For power cables, always use a crimp terminal Gasket
with an insulation cover. Waterproof gland
Use crimp tools from the manufacturer of the crimp Cable F0433.ai

terminal you want to use to connect the crimp Figure 4.3.1 Waterproof Gland (Optional code EG)
terminal and cable.
Use crimp tools that are appropriate for the
diameter of the cable to be connected.

Gasket
4.3.3 Wiring Ports for AXFA14
This instrument is of watertight construction as stipulated
G1/2
in JIS C 0920. It is shipped with a wiring bracket
Washer
(waterproof gland or waterproof gland with union) or a
Tightening gland
plastic gland attached, only in cases where an optional
specification is selected for the wiring port. Cable
In case of the explosion proof type, refer to Chapter 10. When working on conduit pipes or
flexible pipes (G1/2 only) F0434.ai

Figure 4.3.2Waterproof Gland with Union Joint


IMPORTANT (Optional code EU)

The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not waterproof).


Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port.
If waterproof property is necessary, apply a blanking
plug to the unused wiring port. Gasket
The blanking plug may not be attached depending
on the specification. If it is necessary, contact
YOKOGAWA.
Plastic gland F0435.ai

Figure 4.3.3 Plastic Gland (Optional code EP)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 42
(3) Conduit Wiring (2) Terminal Configuration
When wiring the conduits, pass the conduit through the When the cover is removed, the connection terminals will
wiring connection port, and utilize the waterproof gland to be visible. The terminal configuration labels are attached
prevent water from flowing in. Place the conduit pipe on in the locations shown in Figure 4.3.6.
an angle as shown in Figure 4.3.4.
Install a drain valve at the low end of the vertical pipe, and
open the valve regularly.

Drain valve
F0436.ai

Figure 4.3.4 Conduit Wiring

4.3.4 Wiring Connections for AXFA14 F0438.ai

Figure 4.3.6Terminal Configuration for AXFA14 Remote


(1) Removing Cover Converter

Loosen cover locking screw 2 clockwise using a


The description of the terminal symbols is shown in Table
hexagonal wrench (nominal size 3) to unlock the cover.
4.3.1.
(Upon shipment from the manufacturing plant, the cover
For FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, refer to IM 01E20F02-
is unlocked.) Hold the flowmeter with your hand and
01E.
remove the cover by turning it in the direction of the arrow
For PROFIBUS PA protocol, refer to IM 01E20F12-01E.
as shown below.
Table 4.3.1Terminal Symbols for AXFA14 Remote
Converter
Terminal Terminal
Description Description
Symbols Symbols
EX1 Excitation Functional grounding
EX2 current output N/
Power supply
1 2 L/+
C
I+ Current output 4 to 20mA
SA
Flow singal I DC
A
input Pulse output/
Cover locking screws B DO+
SB Alarm output/
DO
Status output
Alarm output/
DIO+
Status output/
DIO
F0437.ai Status input
Protective grounding
Figure 4.3.5Removing the Terminal Box Cover for AXFA14
(Outside of the terminal)
Remote Converter

(3) Precautions for Wiring of Power Supply


Cables
When connecting to the power supply, observe the points
below. Failure to comply with these warnings may result
in an electric shock or damage to the instrument.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 43
2) Required Power Supply Voltages
WARNING
Ensure that the power supply is OFF in order to
IMPORTANT
prevent electric shocks.
When using a 24 V power supply, the specification
Ensure the protective grounding terminal is
for the supply voltage is 24 V (15% to +20%),
grounded before turning the power on.
but the input voltage of the converter drops due to
Use insulating sleeve crimp terminals (for 4-mm
cable resistance therefore it must be used within the
screws) for the power supply wiring and protective
following ranges.
grounding wiring.
Install an external switch or circuit breaker as a

Allowable cable length m(ft)


means to turn the power off (capacitance; 15A,
conforming to IEC60947-1 and IEC60947-3). 796 (2610)
Locate this switch either near the instrument or 600 (1970)
in other places facilitating easy operation. Affix a
446 (1460)
Power Off Equipment label to this external switch
or circuit breaker. 200 ( 660)

0
20.4 22 24 26 28.8
Wiring Procedure for AXFA14 Usable range E (V)
Cable cross section area: 1.25 mm2
1. Turn the instruments power off.
Cable cross section area: 2 mm2 F0440.ai
2. Wire the power supply cable and the functional
Figure 4.3.8Supply Voltage and Cable Length for AXFA14
grounding cable to the power supply terminals. Remote Converter
Functional grounding cable

3) Setting Power Supply Frequency


4
IMPORTANT

Wiring
Power supply
cable
Set the local commercial power frequency in order to
F0439.ai eliminate the effect of induction noise from the power
Figure 4.3.7Electric Cable Wiring for AXFA14 Remote supply.
Converter
Refer to Parameter Description in the users manual
of the AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote
(4) DC Power Connection Converter [Hardware Edition/ Software Edition] (IM
01E20C02-01E).
When using DC power as the power supply for the Parameter No.: J30 and J31
converter, give attention to the following points.

1) Connecting Power Supply (5) Grounding

IMPORTANT CAUTION
Do not connect power supply with reversed polarities. Be sure to connect the protective grounding of the
L/+ terminal: connect + AXFA14 Remote Converter with a cable of 2mm2 or
N/ terminal: connect larger cross section in order to avoid electrical shock
to the operators and maintenance engineers and to
prevent the influence of external noise.
IMPORTANT Connect the grounding wire to the mark.
The grounding should satisfy Class D requirements
Do not connect power supply with 100 to 240 V (grounding resistance, 100 or less).
AC or 100 to 120 V DC in the case of a 24 V power In case of TIIS Flameproof type, the grounding should
supply version (power supply code 2). satisfy Class C requirements (grounding resistance,
It will give a damage to the converter. 10 or less) or class A requirements (grounding
resistance, 10 or less).
For explosion proof type except TIIS, follow the
domestic electrical requirements as regulated in each
country.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 44
Pulse Output
IMPORTANT
When optional code A (lightning protector) is selected, IMPORTANT
the ground should satisfy Class C requirements
As this is a transistor contact (insulated type),
(grounding resistance, 10 or less).
give attention to proper voltage and polarity when
wiring.
The protective grounding terminals are located on Do not apply a voltage larger than 30V DC or
the inside and outside of the terminal area. a current larger than 0.2A in order to prevent
Either terminal may be used. damage to the instrument.
Use 600 V vinyl insulation wires as the grounding When input filter constant of the electronic counter
wires. is large in relation to the pulse width, the signal will
decrease and the count will not be accurate.
If the input impedance of the electronic counter is
large, an induction noise from the power supply
may result in inaccurate counts. Use a shield cable
or sufficiently reduce the input impedance of the
electronic counter within the magnetic flowmeter
pulse output specification range.
The active pulse output (Optional code EM) cannot
be used in conjunction with the standard pulse
output.
Protective grounding terminals
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM)
F0441.ai
is selected, do not be short-circuit between the
Figure 4.3.9Protective Grounding Terminal Location for
AXFA14 Remote Converter DO+ and DO terminals to avoid damaging the
instrument.
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM)
(6) Connecting to External Instruments is selected, the range of pulse rate must be set to 2
pps maximum.
WARNING To avoid communication (BRAIN/ HART) failure, it
is recommended to use the shield cable.
Before wiring with external instruments, be sure to turn
off the power supply for AXFA14 Remote Converter
and any external instruments. NOTE
For pulse output from the DO terminals, parameters
Connect the AXFA14 Remote Converter terminal to must be set. Refer to Parameter Description in the
external instruments, giving attention to the following users manual of the AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter
points. Remote Converter [Hardware Edition/ Software
For FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, refer to IM 01E20F02- Edition] (IM 01E20C02-01E).
01E.
For PROFIBUS PA protocol, refer to IM 01E20F12-01E.
Protective diode
4 to 20 mA DC Current Output AXFA14 DO+

PULSE OUT Mechanical Counter


DO-
AXFA14
l+
Receiver
l- Instrument AXFA14 DO+
Resistive load max. 750 PULSE OUT Load Electronic Counter
Communication Resistive load DO-
BRAIN 250 to 450
30V DC, 0.2A. max
HART 250 to 600 F0442.ai
F0443.ai
Figure 4.3.10 4 to 20 mA DC Output Connection
Figure 4.3.11 Pulse Output Connection

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 45
*The alarm output operates from open (normal) to closed
AXFA14 Protective diode
DO+ (alarm occurrence) by factory default setting. Changes
Mechanical Counter can be made via the parameter settings.
PULSE OUT DO-

AXFA14 Protective diode


DO+ (or DIO+)
AXFA14
DO+
Load
Load Electronic Counter DO- (or DIO-)
PULSE OUT DO-
This connection is not possible.

Output voltage: 24 V DC 20% AXFA14 DO+ (or DIO+)


Current: 150 mA or less Relay
Pulse rate: 0.0001 to 2 pps Electromagnetic
valve
Pulse width: 20, 33, 50, 100 ms DO- (or DIO-)
F0444.ai
External power supply AC power supply
Figure 4.3.12Active Pulse Output Connection 30V DC, 0.2A. max
(Optional code EM)
F0446.ai

Figure 4.3.14 Status Output Connection


Status Input

IMPORTANT NOTE
For status and alarm outputs from the DO or
Status inputs are designed for use with no-voltage
DIO terminals, parameters must be set. Refer to
(dry) contacts. Be careful not to connect the status to
Parameter Description in the users manual of the
any signal source carrying voltage.
AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote Converter
Applying voltage may damage the input circuit.
[Hardware Edition/ Software Edition] (IM 01E20C02-
01E). 4
Closed: Less than 200
Open: More than 100 k

Wiring
AXFA14
DIO+ (7) Installing the Cover
Install the cover to the AXFA14 Remote Converter by
turning it in the direction of the arrow as shown below.
DIO-
Tighten cover locking screw 2 counterclockwise using a
hexagonal wrench (nominal size 3) to lock the cover.
No-voltage status input
F0445.ai

Figure 4.3.13 Status Input Connection

NOTE 1 2

For status input to the DIO terminals, parameters


must be set. Refer to Parameter Description in the
Cover locking
users manual of the AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter screws
Remote Converter [Hardware Edition/ Software
Edition] (IM 01E20C02-01E).

F0447.ai

Figure 4.3.15Installing the Terminal Box Cover for AXFA14


Status Output / Alarm Output Remote Converter

IMPORTANT
Since this is an isolated transistor output, be careful of
voltage and polarity when wiring.
Do not apply a voltage larger than 30V DC or a current
larger than 0.2A in order to prevent damage to the
instrument.
This output cannot switch an AC load. To switch an AC
load, an intermediate relay must be inserted as shown
in Figure 4.3.14.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 46
4.4 Wiring the AXFA11 Remote
Converter CAUTION
This section describes the wiring of the AXFA11 Remote In cases where the ambient temperature exceeds
Converter side only. For information relating to wiring on 50C (122F), use external heat-resistant wiring
the flowtube side, refer to Section 4.2 of this manual. with a maximum allowable temperature of 70C
(158F) or above.
Do not connect cables outdoors in wet weather in
WARNING order to prevent damage from condensation and
to protect the insulation.
The wiring of the magnetic flowmeter must be Do not splice the cable between the flowtube
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. terminal and the converter if it is too short.
No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures Replace the short cable with a cable that is the
relating to wiring. appropriate length.
All the cable ends must be provided with round
crimp-on terminals and be securely wired.
The signal cables must be routed in separate steel
CAUTION conduit tubes 16 (JIS C 8305) or flexible conduit
tubes 15 (JIS C 8309).
Once all wiring is complete, check the connections Always route the power and output signal cables
before applying power to the instrument. in separate steel conduit tubes, except when the
Improper arrangements or wiring may cause a unit power supply voltage is 24 V and four-core cables
malfunction or damage. are used for wiring. Keep conduits or flexible tubes
watertight using sealing tape.
Ground the remote flowtube and the converter
4.4.1 Wiring Precaution for AXFA11 separately.
Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring: Cover each shield of the signal cable with vinyl
tube or vinyl tape to avoid contact between two
shields or between a shield and a case.
When waterproof glands or union equipped
waterproof glands are used, avoid tightening the
glands with an excessive torque.
Be sure to turn power off before opening the cover.
Before turning the power on, tighten the cover
securely.

IMPORTANT
Prepare the signal cable and the excitation cable
almost the same length. It is recommended to lay
them together closely.

4.4.2 Power Cable/Output Cable


JIS C 3401 control cable equivalent
JIS C 3312 power cable equivalent
14 AWG Belden 8720 equivalent
Outer Diameter:
With no gland option:
6.5 to 12 mm (0.26 to 0.47 in.)
With gland options EG, EU and EW:
10.5 or 11.5 mm (0.41 to 0.45 in.)
With gland options EP:
6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in.)
Nominal Cross Section:
Single wire; 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
Stranded wire; 0.5 to 1.5 mm2

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 47
In case of power cable, Green/Yellow covered conductor For working on the electric wire tubes or the flexible tubes
shall be used only for connection to PROTECTIVE (G1/2), remove the waterproof gland and attach them
CONDUCTOR TERMINALS. Conform to IEC227, directly to the wiring port.
IEC245 or equivalent national authorization.

NOTE
Washer
For power cables, always use a crimp terminal
with an insulation cover.
Use crimp tools from the manufacturer of the crimp
terminal you want to use to connect the crimp
terminal and cable. Gasket
Waterproof gland
Use crimp tools that are appropriate for the
Cable F0448.ai
diameter of the cable to be connected.
Figure 4.4.1 Waterproof Gland (Optional code EG)

4.4.3 Wiring Ports for AXFA11


This instrument is of watertight construction as stipulated
in JIS C 0920. It is shipped with a wiring bracket
(waterproof gland or waterproof gland with union) or a Washer
plastic gland attached, only in cases where an optional
specification is selected for the wiring port. G1/2

IMPORTANT Gasket 4
Tightening gland
The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not waterproof).

Wiring
Cable
Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port. When working on conduit pipes or flexible pipes (G1/2 only)
If waterproof property is necessary, apply a blanking F0449.ai

plug to the unused wiring port. Figure 4.4.2Waterproof Gland with Union Joint
(Optional code EU)
The blanking plug may not be attached depending
on the specification. If it is necessary, contact
YOKOGAWA.

(1) When waterproof property is unnecessary


(When there are no particular optional
specifications)
The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not water-proof) that
must be removed before wiring. At this time, handle the
Plastic gland F0450.ai
wiring port in accordance with the JIS C 0920 mentioned
above. Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring Figure 4.4.3 Plastic Gland (Optional code EP)
port.

(2) When waterproof property is necessary


(Wiring using waterproof glands)
G1/2
IMPORTANT G3/4

To prevent water or condensation from entering the


converter housing, waterproof glands are recommended.
Do not over-tighten the glands or damage to the cables Gasket
may result. Tightness of the gland can be checked by Washer
confirming that the cable is held firmly in place. Extension plug (x2)
Conversion plug (x5)*
Cable
When working on electric wire tube or flexible tube (G3/4)
* When connecting G1/2, remove the conversion plug and
connect directly to wiring port. F0451.ai

Figure 4.4.4 G3/4 Waterproof Gland (Optional code EW)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 48
(3) Conduit Wiring
When wiring the conduits, pass the conduit through the
wiring connection port, and utilize the waterproof gland to
prevent water from flowing in. Place the conduit pipe on
an angle as shown in Figure 4.4.5.
Install a drain valve at the low end of the vertical pipe, and
open the valve regularly.

I+ I SO1+ SO2+ COM AL+ AL C SA A B SB


CURRENT OUT STATUS OUT ALARM OUT SIGNAL

Drain valve
N/ L/+ EX1 EX2 P+ P SI1+ SI2+ COM
F0452.ai POWER SUPPLY EXCITATION PULSE OUT STATUS IN

Figure 4.4.5 Conduit Wiring


F0455.ai

Figure 4.4.8Terminal Configuration Labels position for


4.4.4 Wiring Connections AXFA11 Remote Converter

(1) Removing Cover Table 4.4.1Terminal Symbols for AXFA11 Remote


Converter
While supporting the front of the cover with your hand, flip
the connecting screw protective cover over, and remove Terminal Symbols Description

the four connecting screws. C


SA
SIGNAL A Flow signal input
B
SB

AL+
ALARM OUT Alarm output
AL-

SO1+
STATUS OUT SO2+ Status output (Two output)
COM

F0453.ai I+
CURRENT OUT Current output 4 to 20mA DC
I-
Figure 4.4.6Removing the Front Cover for AXFA11
Remote Converter Sl1+
STATUS IN Sl2+ Status input (Two input)
COM
(2) Terminal Configuration P+
PULSE OUT Pulse output
P-
When the cover is removed, the connection terminals
will be visible as shown in Figure 4.4.7. The terminal EX1
EXCITATION Excitation current output
EX2
configuration labels are attached in the position shown in
L /+
Figure 4.4.8. The description of the terminal symbols is POWER SUPPLY Power supply
N/-
shown in Table 4.4.1.
Functional grounding

Protective grounding (Outside


of the terminal)

IMPORTANT
Do not wire the terminal without terminal symbols in
I+ I SO1+ SO2+ COM AL+ AL C SA A B SB
terminal layout labels.
N/ L/+ EX1 EX2 P+ P SI1+ SI2+ COM

F0454.ai

Figure 4.4.7Terminal Configuration for AXFA11 Remote


Converter

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 49
(3) Precautions for Wiring of Power Supply (4) DC Power Connection
Cables When using DC power as the power supply for the
When connecting to the power supply, observe the points converter, give attention to the following points.
below. Failure to comply with these warnings may result
in an electric shock or damage to the instrument. 1) Connecting Power Supply

WARNING IMPORTANT
Ensure that the power supply is OFF in order to Do not connect power supply with reversed polarities.
prevent electric shocks. L/+ terminal: connect +
Ensure the protective grounding terminal is N/ terminal: connect
grounded before turning the power on.
Use insulating sleeve crimp terminals (for 4-mm
screws) for the power supply wiring and protective IMPORTANT
grounding wiring.
To prevent electric shocks, ensure the electrical Do not connect power supply with 100 to 240 V
wiring cover (transparent) is attached. AC or 100 to 120 V DC in the case of a 24 V power
Install an external switch or circuit breaker as a supply version (power supply code 2).
means to turn the power off (capacitance; 15A, It will give a damage to the converter.
conforming to IEC60947-1 and IEC60947-3).
Locate this switch either near the instrument or
in other places facilitating easy operation. Affix a 2) Required Power Supply Voltages
Power Off Equipment label to this external switch
or circuit breaker. IMPORTANT
When using a 24 V power supply, the specification 4
for the supply voltage is 24 V (15% to +20%),
Wiring Procedure for AXFA11
but the input voltage of the converter drops due to

Wiring
1. Turn the instruments power off, and remove the cable resistance therefore it must be used within the
wiring cover (transparent). following ranges.
2. Wire the power supply cable and the functional
grounding cable to the power supply terminals.
Allowable cable length m(ft)

796 (2610)

600 (1970)
I+ I SO1+ SO2+ COM AL+ AL C SA A B SB
CUR OUT STATUS OUT ALARM OUT SIGNAL

446 (1460)
N/ L/+ EX1 EX2 P+ P SI1+ SI2+ COM
POWER SUPPLY EXCITATION PULSE OUT STATUS IN
200 ( 660)
Functional Power supply cable
0
grounding cable 20.4 22 24 26 28.8
Usable range E (V)
Cable cross section area: 1.25 mm2
Cable cross section area: 2 mm2 F0457.ai
F0456.ai
Figure 4.4.10Supply Voltage and Cable Length for AXFA11
Figure 4.4.9Electric Cable Wiring for AXFA11 Remote
Remote Converter
Converter

3) Setting Power Supply Frequency


3. Reattach the electrical wiring cover (transparent).
IMPORTANT
Set the local commercial power frequency in order
to eliminate the effect of induction noise from the
commercial power supply.
Refer to Parameter Description in the users manual
of the AXFA11G Magnetic Flowmeter Remote
Converter [Hardware Edition/ Software Edition] (IM
01E20C01-01E).
Parameter No.: J30 and J31

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 50
(5) Grounding (6) Connecting to External Instruments

CAUTION WARNING
Be sure to connect the protective grounding of the Before wiring with external instrument, be sure to turn
AXFA11 with a cable of 2mm2 or larger cross section off the power supply for AXFA11 converter and any
in order to avoid electrical shock to the operators and external instruments.
maintenance engineers and to prevent the influence
of external noise. Connect the grounding wire to the Connect the AXFA11 terminal to external instruments,
mark (100 or less). giving attention to the following points.

IMPORTANT 4 to 20 mA DC Current Output

When optional code A (lightning protector) is selected,


AXFA11
the ground should satisfy Class C requirements l+
(grounding resistance, 10 or less). Receiver
l- Instrument
Resistive load max. 1 k
The protective grounding terminals are located on Communication Resistive load
the inside and outside of the terminal area. BRAIN 250 to 450
HART 250 to 600
Either terminal may be used.
F0459.ai
Use 600 V vinyl insulation wires as the grounding
Figure 4.4.12 4 to 20 mA DC Output Connection
wires.

Pulse Output

IMPORTANT
As this is a transistor contact (insulated type),
give attention to proper voltage and polarity when
wiring.
Do not apply a voltage larger than 30V DC or
a current larger than 0.2A in order to prevent
damage to the instrument.
When input filter constant of the electronic counter
is large in relation to the pulse width, the signal will
decrease and the count will not be accurate.
If the input impedance of the electronic counter is
large, an induction noise from the power supply
may result in inaccurate counts. Use a shield
Protective grounding terminals F0458.ai cable or sufficiently reduce the input impedance of
Figure 4.4.11Protective Grounding Terminal Location for the electronic counter within the electromagnetic
AXFA11 Remote Converter flowmeter pulse output specification range.
The active pulse output (Optional code EM) cannot
be used in conjunction with the standard pulse
output.
When the active pulse output (Optional code
EM) is selected, do not be short-circuit between
the P+ and P terminals to avoid damaging the
instrument.
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM)
is selected, the range of pulse rate must be set to 2
pps maximum.
To avoid communication (BRAIN/ HART) failure, it
is recommended to use the shield cable.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 51
Status Output / Alarm Output
Protective diode
AXFA11 P+

PULSE OUT Mechanical Counter IMPORTANT


P-
Since this is an isolated transistor output, be careful of
AXFA11 P+
voltage and polarity when wiring.
Do not apply a voltage larger than 30V DC or a current
PULSE OUT Load Electronic Counter
P- larger than 0.2A in order to prevent damage to the
30V DC, 0.2A. max instrument.
F0460.ai
This output cannot switch an AC load. To switch an AC
Figure 4.4.13 Pulse Output Connection load, an intermediate relay must be inserted as shown
in Figure 4.4.16 or Figure 4.4.17.
AXFA11 Protective diode
P+
*The alarm output operates from closed (normal) to open
Mechanical Counter
PULSE OUT P- (alarm occurrence) by factory default setting. Changes
can be made via the parameter settings.
AXFA11
P+
AXFA11 Protective diode
SO1+
Load Electronic Counter
PULSE OUT P-
Load

Output voltage: 24 V DC 20%


This connection is not possible.
Current: 150 mA or less
Pulse rate: 0.0001 to 2 pps SO2+
Pulse width: 20, 33, 50, 100 ms F0461.ai
Load
Figure 4.4.14Active Pulse Output Connection
(Optional code EM)
COM
External power supply
4
30V DC, 0.2A. max

Wiring
AXFA11
SO1+ Relay
Status Input Protective
Electromagnetic
diode valve

IMPORTANT This connection is not possible.


SO2+
Status inputs are designed for use with no-voltage
Electromagnetic
(dry) contacts. Be careful not to connect the status to valve
COM
any signal source carrying voltage.
External power supply AC power supply
Applying voltage may damage the input circuit. 30V DC, 0.2A. max
F0463.ai

Figure 4.4.16 Status Output Connection


Closed: Less than 200
Open: More than 100 k
AXFA11
SI1+ AXFA11 Protective diode
AL+

Load
AL-

This connection is not possible.


SI2+
AXFA11 AL+
Relay
Electromagnetic
COM valve
AL-
External power supply AC power supply
No-voltage status input F0462.ai 30V DC, 0.2A. max
F0464.ai
Figure 4.4.15 Status Input Connection
Figure 4.4.17 Alarm Output Connection

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 52

5. Basic Operating Procedures


5.1 Operating Procedures Using 5.2 Operating Panel
the Display Unit Configuration and Functions
The modification of data settings from the display unit can (4) Reversed character display
(1) Data display area
be carried out using the three setting switches (infra-
red switches) - namely, the and
switches. The infra-red switches enable the user to set
parameters without opening the cover.
This chapter will provide a description of basic data
configuration and the methods to be used with the three
(3) Display 100.000
: : :
FR
m3/h
items 0 100
setting switches. This instrument can also be operated 3274m3 FTL

using a handheld BRAIN Terminal (BT200) or a HART


Configuration tool. (Refer to Section 5.5 for operation via
BRAIN Terminal or HART Configration tool.)

WARNING (2) Setting switches


(Infra-red switches)
F0501.ai

Be sure to set parameters as Protect on the write


(1) Data display area
protect function after finish of parameter setting work.
Under extremely rare case, the infra-red switches may 1st line (Display Select1), 2nd line (Display Select2),
respond unexpectedly in such conditions as sticking and 3rd line (Display Select3) can be displayed using
ball of water or extraneous substances on the surface parameter settings. The content corresponding to
of display panel glass according to the principle of selected item is shown with the reversed-character on the
infra-red switch operation. Its probability rises in right of the line.
such cases as sticking rain water by storm or other
(2) Setting switch operations
similar situation and washing up work near flowmeter
installation place. : Move the layer down, select, and confirm
Either to illuminate or stop illuminating the infra-red + : Move the layer up (Press the switch
switches by the flashlight may cause the mis-reaction.
while holding down the switch)
Refer to Section 6.3 how to use the write protect
function in detail. : Move the cursor down (for selection-type
parameters) or increase values (for numeric-type
parameters)

IMPORTANT : Move the cursor to the right (for numeric-type


parameters)
Operate the display unit under the condition where + :Move the cursor up (for selection-type
direct sunlight, etc... do not shine to the setting parameters)
switches directly when the parameter setting operation
is carried out.

NOTE
Always use the setting switches with the cover
closed.
Use these switches with them covered by the
glass window.
If dirt, dust or other substances surfaces on the
display panel glass, wipe them clean with a soft
dry cloth.
The operation with dirty gloves may cause a switch
response error.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 53
(3) Display items
: Display, : Not display
Displayed items and reversed-character Disp Select2
Content Disp Select1
indication Disp Select3

Instantaneous flow rate: % FR Displays the instantaneous flow rate for the span as a percentage.

Actual instantaneous flow rate FR Displays the actual reading for instantaneous flow rate.

Instantaneous flow rate: mA FR Displays the instantaneous flow rate for the span as a current output value.
Displays the instantaneous flow rate for the span as a percentage using bar
Bar graph indicating instantaneous flow rate None
graph.
Totalized forward-direction flow rate FTL Displays the totalized value for flow rate in the forward direction.

Totalized reverse-direction flow rate RTL Displays the totalized value for flow rate in the reverse direction.
Displays the differential totalized value for flow rate between forward
Totalized differential flow rate DTL
totalization and reverse totalization.
Tag number TAG Display the tag number (using up to 16 characters).
Displays the adhesion condition in the form of a bar graph. (See the
Diagnosis of electrode adhesion ADH description for parameters K10 through K15 from Chapter 8: Parameter
Description for more details.)
Communication type COM Displays the communication type.

(4) Reversed character display

5.3 Display Unit Setting Methods


NOTE
This manual shows the confirmation of the set value. 5
In the case of changing setting, refer to Parameter
Description of users manual as listed in Table 1.1.

Basic Operating Procedures


Parameter Search Mode
Select Yes
(2 seconds or more)
Major Item Parameter Sub-item Parameter Parameter
Display Mode Entry Mode
Search Mode Search Mode Replacement Mode

+ +
Select No
Setting modes

* The term "mode" is used to refer to a situation


where display and setting are possible.
+
Press the SET switch while holding down the SHIFT switch. F0502.ai

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 54
5.3.1 Display Mode Setting Mode
NOTE
Display Mode will be adopted when the power is turned
on, and the Setting Mode can be activated using the
When the operations except and switches
following procedure.
are carried out, the system will automatically return to
1st line: Actual instantaneous
the Display Mode.
flow rate [FR]
When no operations in this display are carried out for
2nd line: Bar graph indicating
20 seconds, the system will automatically return to the
100.000 instantaneous flow rate
Display Mode.
0
3rd line: Totalized forward flow
rate [FTL]
Hold the switch for 2 In order to request confirmation,

seconds. Then, this display is the entire display flashes on

F0503.ai changed to Entry Mode. and off.


Setting Mode
According to the screen, touch
Yes Touch the switch once

again at this time to fix your
and switches
selection.
simultaneously.

F0507.ai

F0504.ai
NOTE
When no operations in the flashed display are carried
NOTE out for 20 seconds, the system will automatically
return to the Display Mode.
When other operations are carried out, the system
When the operations except switch are carried
will automatically return to the Display Mode.
out, the system will automatically return to the Display
When no operations in this display are carried
Mode.
out for 20 seconds, the system will automatically
return to the Display Mode.
The Major Item Parameter which is set just before The system enters Setting Mode.

will be shown when entering the Setting Mode Parameters to be set can be
again within 1 minute after returning from Setting selected.
Mode to Display Mode.

A screen is displayed to confirm



whether or not the system is to
enter Setting Mode.
Setting Mode F0508.ai
The reversed-character (i.e. the
No
Yes cursor position) indicates the This completes the procedure for changing from
item that is currently selected. theDisplay Mode to the Parameter Search Mode.
Press the switch and
5.3.2 Setting Mode
select [Yes].

F0505.ai
When the Setting Mode has been activated using the
procedure from Section 5.3.1, parameters can be
When [Yes] has been selected,
selected for setting.
touch the switch.

Setting Mode
NOTE
No
Yes If no operations are carried out for a period of 10
minutes in Setting Mode, the system will automatically
return to the Display Mode.

F0506.ai

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 55
Format for Parameter Data Major item Sub-item Parameter
B:Easy Setup
Depending on the type of parameter, data is formatted in 50:Auto Zero Exe Search Mode has been
Sub-item
one of the following three ways. 10:Language
parameter accessed
20:Flow Damping
in this screen.
Format Typical display Content 2 Touch the switch
F0513.ai
to move the cursor to
The desired data item is B21: Base Flow Unit.
(i) Selection-
selected from a predefined
type
list. Major item B:Easy Setup The cursor has been
F0509.ai
20:Flow Damping moved to B21: Base
Sub-item
21:Base Flow Unit
Data is set using the values selection (A)
22:Base Time Unit Flow
(ii) Numeric-
in each digit and using the Unit in this screen. (Sub-
type
decimal point.
item selection screen (A))
F0510.ai
F0514.ai
Data is composed using
C10:Tag No alphanumeric characters
Sub-item B21:Base Flow Unit In this screen, Parameter
FI-1101 (in the case of tag numbers, m3
(iii) Alphanumeric- Current unit setting Replacement Mode has
FI-1201 special units, and the like). m3
type Available selections kl(Kiloliter)
With this format, setting can been called up using the
F0511.ai be carried out using up to
switch.
16 characters shown below. F0515.ai

Regarding the alphanumeric-type format (iii), the


Sub-item
following alphanumerics are displayed in the following Current unit setting
B21:Base Flow Unit
m3 Touch the switch
sequence: Available selections l(Liter) to move the cursor to the
cm3
#%&*+-./ 0123456789:<> ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST unit item for selection. In
UVWXYZ abcdefghij klmnopqrstuvwxyz[space] 2
this example, the
switch is touched twice to
F0516.ai select l (Liter)

5.4 Parameter Setting Procedure When l (Liter) has been


selected, touch the
Usually the parameters necessary for basic operation is
switch.
5
set according to the specified values when ordering.
However, if parameters relating to flow span have not In order to request

Basic Operating Procedures


been set, see the following procedure. B21:Base Flow Unit
confirmation, the entire
When changing other parameter values, refer to l(Liter) display flashes on and
Parameter Description of relevant users manual from off. Touch the
Table 1.1. switch once again at this
For overviewing the parameters, refer to Chapter 8. time to fix your selection.
F0517.ai
5.4.1 Setting Example for Selection-Type
Data: Flow rate units
NOTE
This example describes the setting of the flow rate units
for the selection-type parameter B21: Base Flow Unit When no operations are carried out for 20 seconds in
from m3 to l (Liter). the flashing state, the system will automatically return
Now, the system is in the Setting Mode. Parameters to be to the Sub-item Parameter Search Mode.
set can be selected. When the operations except switch are carried
Setting Mode Setting Mode Major Item Parameter out, the parameter cannot be set.
P:Protect Search Mode has been
Major item
B:Easy Setup
parameter accessed in this screen.
C:Basic Setup
Major item B:Easy Setup The system automatically
Touch the switch
20:Flow Damping returns to sub-item
to access B: Easy Sub-item
F0512.ai 21:Base Flow Unit
selection (A) selection screen (A).
Setup. 22:Base Time Unit

F0518.ai

NOTE
The and symbols to the left of the parameters
indicate that additional setting items to those being
currently displayed may also be selected. Use the
switch to cycle through these items.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 56
5.4.2 Setting Example for Numeric-Type Modify the value to 120 l/
Data: Flow rate span min as follows:

This example describes the setting of the flow rate span Touch the switch
for the numeric-type parameter B23: Flow Span from to move the cursor to
100 l/min to 120 l/min. the position for multiples
Now, the system is in the Setting Mode. Parameters to be of 10. Then, touch the
set can be selected. switch to change
Setting mode Setting Mode Touch the switch the value at this position
P:Protect
Major item
B:Easy Setup to access B: Easy F0524.ai from 0 to 2.
parameter
C:Basic Setup Setup. When the value of 120
F0519.ai
has been setup, touch

NOTE the switch.

When the switch


The and symbols to the left of the parameters
B23:Flow Span is touched, the entire
indicate that additional setting items to those being 120 l/min display flashes on and
currently displayed may also be selected. Use the
off. Confirm that the
switch to cycle through these items.
setting has been correctly
changed to 120, and
F0525.ai
Sub-Item Parameter then fix this value by
Major item B:Easy Setup
50:Auto Zero Exe Search Mode has been touching the
Sub-item
10:Language
parameter accessed in this screen. switch once again.
20:Flow Damping
Touch the switch
4
F0520.ai
to move the cursor to NOTE
B23: Flow Span.
When no operations are carried out for 20 seconds in
B:Easy Setup The cursor has been
Major item the flashing state, the system will automatically return
22:Base Time Unit moved to B23: Flow
Sub-item
23:Flow Span to the Sub-item Parameter Search Mode.
selection (B)
24:Flow Decimal Pnt Span in
When the operations switch except are carried
Selection of the appropriate parameter this screen. (Sub-item
out, the parameter cannot be set.
selection screen (B))
Touch the switch
F0521.ai
to access Parameter Major item B:Easy Setup The system automatically
Replacement Mode. 22:Base Time Unit returns to sub-item
Sub-item
23:Flow Span selection screen (B).
selection (B)
24:Flow Decimal Pnt
Once Parameter
F0526.ai
Replacement Mode has
been selected, the digit
F0522.ai that can be replaced will NOTE
be flashed on and off.
When in this condition,
B23:Flow Span
confirm the relevant 100 l/min
setting range as displayed Incorrect setting: 0001.0. l/min
at the bottom of Rng:0.00001 32000

the screen and then Invalid value.


set the parameter as Touch any key.
required.
F0527.ai

NOTE If the input value is outside the valid selection range,


the message Out of range. Touch any key. will be
displayed. In such a case, touch any switch to return to
Parameter Replacement Mode and redo the setting.
F0523.ai

When setting a new value, use the switch to move


from digit to digit, and use the switch to cycle
through values for each individual digit. In addition to
digit, it is also possible to select a decimal point, and this
allows the position of the decimal point to be changed.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 57

NOTE IMPORTANT
Communication signal is superimposed on analog
B23:Flow Span
100 l/min output signal. It is recommended to set a low-pass
Incorrect setting: 1200000 l/min filter (approximately 0.1s) to the receiver in order
Rng:0.00001 32000
to reduce the output effect from communication
Out of range. signal. Before online-communication, confirm that
Touch any key.
communication signal does not give effect on the
upper system.
F0528.ai

If more than one decimal point has been input, the


message Invalid value. Touch any key. will be
displayed. In such a case, touch any switch to return to
IMPORTANT
Parameter Replacement Mode and redo the setting. Restrictions exist with regard to the distance over
which communication is possible.
Refer to OUTLINE of the appropriate manual which
can be downloaded from our website.
5.5 BRAIN / HART Connection
5.5.1 Connecting the BT200
IMPORTANT
The connection for a BRAIN Terminal (BT200) is shown
as below. If the power of flowmeter is turned off within 30
Refer to its manual (IM 01C00A11-01E) for the operation seconds after parameters have been set, these
of the BT200. settings will be canceled. Accordingly, keep the power
on for at least 30 seconds after setting parameters.
The communication signal of the AXF is superimposed
onto the 4 to 20mA DC analog signals to be transmitted.
5
The communication can be done through the BT200 set IMPORTANT
at any point between the 4 to 20 mA DC signal terminals

Basic Operating Procedures


of magnetic flowmeter and the input terminals of receiving After approximately 5 minutes of inactivity, the Auto
instruments. Power-Off function will operate to turn your BT200 off.
Working as a master, the BT200 Permits:
1. Setting and changing parameters for the magnetic
flowmeter
2. Monitoring PV and MV values and self-check
NOTE
information on the magnetic flowmeter, and
In case of BT200, the parameters are displayed in
3. Directing the magnetic flowmeter to enter the
English only.
constant current output mode.
4 to 20mA DC
Even if the language with the exception of English is
Control room
shignal
Terminal Receiving selected at B10/H30: Language, the parameters are
Relaying terminals transmission line instrument
board displayed in English upon BT200.

Magnetic flowmeter
terminal box Receiving
resistance
250 to 450

BT200 BT200 BT200 BT200


F0529.ai

Figure 5.5.1 Connecting the BT200

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 58
5.5.2 Connecting the HART Configuration
Tool NOTE
The HART Configuration Tool can interface with the Before updating any setting, remember to always
magnetic flowmeter from the control room, the magnetic check the data content you want to change as
flowmeter site, or any other wiring termination point in the described in Chapter 8.
loop, provided there is a minimum load resistance of 250 For details, refer to Parameter Description of the
between the connection and the receiving instrument. appropriate manual which can be downloaded from
To communicate, it must be connected in parallel with the our website.
magnetic flowmeter, and the connections must be non-
polarized. Figure 5.5.2 illustrates the wiring connections
for a direct interface at the magnetic flowmeter site. The
HART Configuration Tool can be used for remote access
NOTE
from any terminal strip as well. In case of HART Configuration, the parameters are
4 to 20mA DC Control room
shignal displayed in English only.
transmission line Terminal Receiving
instrument
Relaying terminals board Even if the language with the exception of English is
selected at Language setting display, the parameters
Magnetic flowmeter USB are displayed in English upon HART Configuration
terminal box FieldMate Receiving Tool.
modem resistance
250 to 450
USB

PC/FieldMate
F0530.ai

Figure 5.5.2 Connecting the HART Configuration Tool

WARNING
Be sure to set parameters as "Protect" on the write
protect function after finish of parameter setting work.
Under extremely rare case, the infra-red switches may
respond unexpectedly in such conditions as sticking
ball of water or extraneous substances on the surface
of display panel glass according to the principle of
infra-red switch operation.
Its probability rises in such cases as sticking rain water
by storm or other similar situation and washing up
work near flowmeter installation place.
Either to illuminate or stop illuminating the infra-red
switches by the flashlight may cause the mis-reaction.
For details, refer to Parameter Description of the
appropriate manual which can be downloaded from
our website.

IMPORTANT
Restrictions exist with regard to the distance over
which communication is possible.
Refer to OUTLINE of the appropriate manual
which can be downloaded from our website.
If the power of magnetic flowmeter is turned off
within 30 seconds after parameters have been set,
these settings will be canceled. Accordingly, keep
the power on for at least 30 seconds after setting
parameters.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<6. Operation> 59

6. Operation Major item

Sub-item
M:Adjustment

10:Auto Zero Exe


Upon selection of M:
Adjustment, the cursor
selection (D) 11:Magflow Zero will be positioned at M10:
Auto Zero Exe. (Sub-item
After you have installed the flowtube into the process
selection (D))
piping, wired the input/output terminals, set up the F0602.ai
required parameters, and performed a pre-operation zero Touch the switch

adjustment, the magnetic flowmeter should output an to access Parameter

accurate flow signal from its terminals as soon as flow of Replacement Mode.

the fluid to be measured begins. This section describes


Touch the switch
zero adjustment and the corresponding procedures.
to move the cursor to
Execution.
6.1 Pre-operation Zero
Adjustment F0603.ai

Zero adjustment is carried out to ensure that the output Touch the switch
for zero flow is 0% (i.e., 4 mA). Although adjustment to to select the Execution.
zero is performed at the manufacturing plant prior to
shipment, this procedure must be carried out once again
following the installation of piping in order to match the F0604.ai
magnetic flowmeter to its operating conditions.
In order to request
This section describes the zero adjustment procedure
confirmation, the entire
using display unit switches from the converter. Also, it
display flashes on and
can be operated using the BT200 Handheld Terminal.
Accordingly, one of these methods should be selected off. Touch the

and implemented. switch once again at


this time to fix selection
F0605.ai of the automatic zero
IMPORTANT adjustment function.

Zero adjustment should be carried out before NOTE


actual operation. Note that setting and update 6
functions cannot be carried out during this When no operations are carried out for 20 seconds in
procedure (i.e., for approximately 30 seconds).

Operation
the flashing state, the system will automatically return
Zero adjustment should only be carried out when to the Sub-item Parameter Search Mode.
the flowtube has been filled with measurement
When the operations except switch are carried
fluid and the fluid velocity is completely zero by
out, the parameter cannot be set.
closing the valve.
Each time that the fluid being measured is
Auto zero adjustment
changed, it will be necessary for zero adjustment
Now Auto Zero function is being
to be carried out for the new fluid. Executing...
executed
F0606.ai (about 30 seconds).

Major item M:Adjustment When zero adjustment


6.2 Zero Adjustment Using Sub-item
function has been
10:Auto Zero Exe
Display Unit Switches selection (D) 11:Magflow Zero completed, the system
F0607.ai automatically returns to
The parameters for zero adjustment are B50/M10: Auto the sub-item selection
Zero Exe (and either of these can be used to carry out screen (D).
this procedure). The parameter M10: Auto Zero Exe will
be used in the following description. NOTE
Setting mode Once in Setting Mode,

Major item use the switch to The results of M10: Auto Zero Exe can be displayed
parameter
move the cursor to M: using M11: Magflow Zero. Alternatively, if the
Adjustment. results of the automatic zero adjustment exceed the
rated value, the warning 82: Auto Zero Wng will be
Touch the switch
F0601.ai displayed.
to access Sub-item
Parameter Search Mode.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<6. Operation> 60
6.3 Write Protect Switch (3) Set the switches. There are two switches (See Figure
6.3.2). One is for burnout setting and the other for
By setting the write protect function to Protect it is write protect setting, located adjacent to each other.
possible to prevent the overwriting of parameters. (4) Taking care not to entangle the cables, install the
Write protection can be carried out using either the cover to the flowmeter by turning it in the backward
hardware switch on the CPU board (i.e., Switch 2) (See direction of the arrow as shown Figure 6.3.1.
Figure 6.3.2) or software parameter settings. If either (5) Tighten cover locking screw 1 counterclockwise
of these items is set to Protect, the overwriting of using a hexagonal wrench (nominal size 3) to lock the
parameters will be prohibited. cover.
Low High
NOTE
Switch 1 2 Burnout setting switch
If the hardware switch is set to Protect, it will not Switch 2 1 Write protect setting switch
be possible to overwrite parameters; furthermore, Enable Protect
this condition will be maintained until the switch is
set to Enable.
In the case of fieldbus communication type, setting
of the hardware switch (Enable or Protect) is
ineffective and write protection can be carried out
only by software parameter settings.

For more details regarding usage of the write protect


F0609.ai
function and the softwares parameter switches, refer to
Figure 6.3.2Switch Configuration for Integral Flowmeter
Parameter Description of the appropriate manual which and AXFA14 Remote Converter
can be downloaded from our website.

NOTE
6.3.1 Setting Hardware Switch of Integral
Magnetic Flowmeter or AXFA14 Re- On the amplifiers CPU board, the burnout setting
mote Converter switch (i.e., Switch 1) and the write protect switch
(i.e., Switch 2) are located adjacent to each other.
IMPORTANT Accordingly, special care should be taken when
making switch settings.
To preserve the safety, do not touch the electrical
circuit and the cables except the setting switches.
6.3.2 Setting Hardware Switch of AXFA11
(1) Turn off the power. Remote Converter
(2) Loosen cover locking screw 1 clockwise using a
hexagonal wrench (nominal size 3) to unlock the IMPORTANT
cover. (Upon shipment from the manufacturing
plant, the cover is locked.) Hold the flowmeter with To preserve the safety, do not touch the electrical
your hand and remove the cover by turning it in the circuit and the cables except the setting switches.
direction of the arrow as shown below.
(1) Turn off the power.
(2) While supporting the front of the cover with your hand,
flip the connecting screw protective cover over, and
remove the four connecting screws.
(3) Loosen the amplifier assemblys two screws while
1 2
supporting it with your hand (See Figure 6.3.3).

Cover locking
screws

F0608.ai

Figure 6.3.1Removing the Display Cover for Integral


Flowmeter and AXFA14 Remote Converter

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<6. Operation> 61
Display unit mounting
screws (x2)

F0610.ai

Figure 6.3.3Removing the Front Cover and Mounting


Screws of Display Unit for AXFA11 Remote
Converter

(4) Lift the display unit (See Figure 6.3.4).


At this time, do not remove the connector.

Low High

Switch 1 2 Burnout setting switch


Switch 2 1 Write protect setting switch 6
Enable Protect F0611.ai

Figure 6.3.4Switch Configuration for AXFA11 Remote

Operation
Converter

(5) Set the switches. There are two switches (See Figure
6.3.4). One is for burnout setting and the other for
write protect setting, located adjacent to each other.
(6) Taking care not to entangle the cables, install the
display unit with two mounting screws.
(7) Install the cover.

NOTE
On the amplifiers CPU board, the burnout setting
switch (i.e., Switch 1) and the write protect switch
(i.e., Switch 2) are located adjacent to each other.
Accordingly, special care should be taken when
making switch settings.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<7. Errors and Countermeasures for Display unit and BRAIN protocol> 62

7. Errors and Countermeasures for


Display unit and BRAIN protocol
NOTE
For FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, refer to IM
01E20F02-01E. For PROFIBUS PA protocol, refer to
IM 01E20F12-01E. For HART protocol, refer to the
applicable users manuals which can be downloaded
from our website.

The table below shows a summary of error messages for Display unit and BRAIN protocols. Note: :Alphabet
System Alarms (Device breakdown or inability to obtain correct measurements.)
Alarm countermeasure message
Display unit/BRAIN (60) content Alarm description Countermeasure
on display unit
10:uP Fault Contact nearest office or service Microprocessor (CPU) failure Contact your nearest Yokogawa office
center or service center.
11:EEPROM Fault Contact nearest office or service EEPROM failure
center
12:A/D(H) Fault Contact nearest office or service A/D converter failure
center
13:A/D(L) Fault Contact nearest office or service
center
14:A/D(Z) Fault Contact nearest office or service
center
15:Coil Open Cut the power and check coil & EX Flowtube coil is open-circuit Turn off the AXFA11 or the AXFA14
cable power supply and examine the
excitation cable for breakage. If there
is no breakage, contact your nearest
Yokogawa office or service center.
16:EEPROM Dflt Contact nearest office or service EEPROM default values Contact your nearest Yokogawa office
center or service center.

Process Alarms (Device is normal but process-related errors make correct measurement impossible.)
Alarm countermeasure message
Display unit/BRAIN (60) content Alarm description Countermeasure
on display unit
30:Sig Overflow Check signal cable and grounding Input signal error Carry out an investigation as follows:
C h e c k t h e s i g n a l c a b l e f o r
breakage.
Check for contact between signal
cable, power cable, and excitation
cable.
Check for stray currents in the
fluid.
Check the grounding.
31:Empty Pipe Fill flow tube with fluid Flowtube is not filled with fluid Fill the flowtube with fluid.
32:HH/LL Alm Check flow rate and setting value Flow rate alarm for greater than High- Check the flow rate and setting value
High limit value or less than Low-Low of High High limit and Low Low limit.
limit value.
33:Adhesion Alm Clean electrodes Electrode adhesion alarm Clean the electrodes.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<7. Errors and Countermeasures for Display unit and BRAIN protocol> 63
Setting Alarms (Device is normal but errors have been made in the setting of parameters.)
Alarm countermeasure message
Display unit/BRAIN (60) content Alarm description Countermeasure
on display unit
50:Span > 10m/s Check parameter C40, C41, and C42 Span flow velocity setting is 11 m/s or Check whether parameters C40, C41,
more and C42 are correct. In case that
multiple range or forward and reverse
51:Span < 0.1m/s Check parameter C40, C41, and C42 Span flow velocity setting is 0.05 m/s flow measurement functions is used,
or less check whether parameters F30
through F34 {F36} are correct.
52:TTL>10000p/s Check parameter D10 and D11 Totalization rate is 11000 pps or more Check whether parameters D10 and
53:TTL<0.0001p/s Check parameter D10 and D11 Totalization rate is 0.00005 pps or less D11 are correct.
54:4-20 Lmt Err Check parameter J11and J12 The condition [4-20 low limit (J11) < Check whether parameters J11 and
4-20 high limit (J12)] is not satisfied. J12 are correct.
55:Multi Rng Err Check parameter F30 to F34 {F36} The condition [No. 1 range < No. 2 Check whether parameters F30
range < No. 3 range < No. 4 range] is through F34 {F36} are correct.
not satisfied for multiple ranges.
56:H/L HH/LL Set Check parameter G10 to G14 The condition [High Alarm (G11) Low Check whether parameters G10
Alarm (G10) > H/L Alarm Hys (G14)] through G14 are correct.
or the condition [High High Alarm
(G13) Low Low Alarm (G12)
> H/L Alarm Hys (G14)] is not satisfied.
57:Dens Set Err Check parameter C40, C45, and C46 Mass units have been selected for Check whether parameters C40, C45,
Base Flow Unit (C40) but density is and C46 are correct.
set to 0.
60:PLS > 10000p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 11000 pps or more with Check whether parameters E10, E11,
50% duty selection. and E12 are correct.
Pulse rate is 10000 pps or more with
0.05 ms selection.
61:PLS > 5000p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 5000 pps or more with 0.1
ms selection.
62:PLS > 1000p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 1000 pps or more with 0.5
ms selection.
63:PLS > 500p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 500 pps or more with 1
ms selection.
64:PLS > 25p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 25 pps or more with 20
ms selection.
65:PLS > 15p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 15 pps or more with 33
ms selection.
66:PLS > 10p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 10 pps or more with 50
ms selection.
67:PLS > 5p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 5 pps or more with 100
ms selection.
70:PLS<0.0001p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 0.00005 pps or less. 7
71:Meas Mod Set Check parameter C20 Measure Mode (C20) is set to Check whether parameter C20 is
Enhanced DF without selecting an correct.

Errors and Countermeasures for Display unit and BRAIN protocol


optional code HF1 or HF2.
72: Size Set Err Check parameter C32 A value of 3000.1 mm or more is set Check whether parameter C32 is
for Nominal Size (C32). correct.
73: Adh Set Err Check parameter K11 to K14 The condition in Adhesion detection Check whether parameters K11, K12,
level, Level:1<Level:2<Level:3<Level:4 K13 and K14 are correct.
is not satisfied.
80:Adhesion Wng Slight adhesion to electrodes. Clean and check the electrodes. Refer

to parameter K13.
82:Auto Zero Wng Results of automatic zero adjustment Carry out adjustment as follows:
are higher than the rated values. Check if the flowtube is filled with
fluid.

C h e c k i f t h e f l o w v e l o c i t y i s
completely zero.
Check the condition of grounding.
83:Fix Cur Wng The current value is fixed. Confirm whether the flow rate is in
excess of the upper limit (108%) or

below the lower limit (-8%), or whether
upon entry to the Test Mode or not.
84:Disp Over Wng Overflow in the display digits during Check whether parameter C43 is

instantaneous flow rate display. correct.
90:Disp SW Wng (only for display unit) D i s p l a y u n i t s w i t c h e s a r e n o t Investigate whether the display unit
operating. cover is fitted or whether the covers
glass surface is dirty.

Note: In case of the AXFA11 Remote Converter, parameter number is values in brackets { }.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 64

8. Parameter Summary
NOTE IMPORTANT
For FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, refer to IM Make sure to keep the instruments power on at least
01E20F02-01E. For PROFIBUS PA protocol, refer to for 30 seconds after you set the parameters.
IM 01E20F12-01E. For HART protocol, refer to the If you turn the power off immediately after the
applicable users manuals which can be downloaded parameters are set, the settings will be canceled.
from our website.

8.1 Menu tree for DD (HART 5)


Offline menu
New Configuration
Saved Configuration
Parameter No.
R/W (*3)
Online menu (BRAIN protocol) Data (*4)
Device setup Process Variables PV % rnge R A10 P
PV PV R A20 P
PV AO PV AO R A21 P
PV Span Totl R A30 P
Reverse Totl R A31 P
Dif Totl R A32 P
Diag/Service Test/Status Status Status group 1(System alarms) R -
Status group 3(Process alarms) R -
Status group 5(Setting alarms) R -
See Chapter 7
Status group 6(Setting alarms) R -
Status group 7(Setting alarms) R -
Status group 8(Warnings) R -
Self test W - -
Adjustment Auto Zero Exe W M10/B50 -
Magflow Zero R/W M11 -
D/A trim W - -
Scaled D/A trim W - -
Output Test Loop test 4mA W - -
20mA W - -
Other W - -
End W - -
Test Mode W N10 -
Test SO1 (*1) W N20 -
Test SO2 (*1) W N21 -
Test Alarm Out (*1) W N22 -
Test SI1 (*1) R N23 P
Test SI2 (*1) R N24 P
Test DO (*2) W N30 -
Test DIO (O) (*2) W N31 -
Test DIO (I) (*2) R N32 P
Diagnosis Adhesion Check W K10 -
Adhesion Level1 W K11 -
Adhesion Level2 W K12 -
Adhesion Level3 W K13 -
Adhesion Level4 W K14 -
Adh Measure Value R K15 -
Easy Setup Language W B10/H30 u/d
PV Damping W B20/C11 u/d
Base Flow Unit W B21/C40 u/d
Base Time Unit W B22/C41 u/d
PV Span W B23/C42 u/d
Flow Decimal Pnt W B24/C43 u/d
Total Unit W B30/D10 u/d
Total Scale W B31/D11 u/d
Pulse Unit W B32/E10 u/d
Pulse Scale W B33/E11 u/d
Display Select1 W B40/H10 u/d
Display Select2 W B41/H11 u/d
Display Select3 W B42/H12 u/d
Auto Zero Exe W B50/M10 -
Detailed Setup Basic Setup Tag W C10 u/d
PV Damping W C11/B20 u/d
MF Set Standard DF W C20 -
Low MF W C21 -
High MF W C22 -
Enhanced DF W C20 -
Low MF (EDF) W C23 -
High MF (EDF) W C24 -
Select Flow Tube (*1) W C30 -
Nominal Size unit W C31 u/d
Nominal Size W C32 u/d
Base Flow Unit W C40/B21 u/d
Base Time Unit W C41/B22 u/d
PV Span W C42/B23 u/d
Flow Decimal Pnt W C43/B24 u/d
Velocity Check R C44 P
Density Unit W C45 u/d
Mass Flow Density W C46 u/d
User Span Select W C47 u/d
Flow User Unit W C48 u/d
Flow User Span W C49 u/d
Total Total Unit W D10/B30 u/d
Total Scale W D11/B31 u/d
Total Decimal Pnt W D12 u/d
Total Low Cut W D13 u/d
Total Execution W D20 u/d
Ttl Set Val Lower W D21 u/d
Ttl Set Val Upper W D22 u/d
Ttl Switch Lower W D23 u/d
*1 : Applicable for AXFA11 Remote Converter. Ttl Switch Upper W D24 u/d
*2 : Applicable for AXF Integral Flowmeter and Ttl User Select W D30 u/d
AXFA14 Remote Converter. Ttl User Unit W D31 u/d
*3 : R/W : R = Read only, W = Read and Write
*4 : Data Renewing Pulse Pulse Unit W E10/B32 u/d
P : Periodic Data Renewing Pulse Scale W E11/B33 u/d
u/d : Discretionary Renewing Pulse Width W E12 u/d
: Others (Method etc...) Pulse Low Cut W E13 u/d
Pulse Active Mode (*1) W E20 u/d
(continued on next page)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 65
Parameter No.
R/W (*3) Data (*4)
(BRAIN protocol)
Device setup Detailed Setup Function Set Status Function SO1 Function (*1) W F10 u/d
PV SO2 Function (*1) W F11 u/d
PV AO SI1 Function (*1) W F12 u/d
PV Span SI2 Function (*1) W F13 u/d
SO1/2 Active Mode (*1) W F14 u/d
SI1/2 Active Mode (*1) W F15 u/d
DO Function (*2) W F20 u/d
DIO Function (*2) W F21 u/d
DO Active Mode (*2) W F22 u/d
DIO Active Mode (*2) W F23 u/d
Forward Span2 W F30 u/d
Forward Span3 W F31 u/d
Forward Span4 W F32 u/d
Reverse Span1 W F33 u/d
Reverse Span2 W F34 u/d
Reverse Span3 (*1) W F35 u/d
Reverse Span4 (*1) W F36 u/d
Auto Range Hys W F40 u/d
Bi Direction Hys W F41 u/d
Alarm Low Alarm W G10 u/d
High Alarm W G11 u/d
Low Low Alarm W G12 u/d
High High Alarm W G13 u/d
H/L Alarm Hys W G14 u/d
Alm Out Act Mode (*1) W G20 u/d
4-20 Alarm Out W G21 u/d
4-20 Burn Out R G22 -
Alm-Setting W G30 u/d
Alm-Sig Over W G31 u/d
Alm-Emp Pipe W G32 u/d
Alm-HH/LL W G33 u/d
Alm-Adhesion W G34 u/d
Alm Record Operation Time R G40 P
Alm Record1 R G41 P
Alm Record Time1 R G42 P
Alm Record2 R G43 P
Alm Record Time2 R G44 P
Alm Record3 R G45 P
Alm Record Time3 R G46 P
Alm Record4 R G47 P
Alm Record Time4 R G48 P
Display Set Display Select1 W H10/B40 u/d
Display Select2 W H11/B41 u/d
Display Select3 W H12/B42 u/d
Display Cycle W H20 u/d
Language W H30/B10 u/d
Aux 4-20mA Low Cut W J10 u/d
4-20mA Low Lmt W J11 u/d
4-20mA High Lmt W J12 u/d
Flow Direction W J20 u/d
Rate Limit W J21 -
Dead Time W J22 -
Pulsing Flow W J23 -
T/P Damp Select W J24 -
Power Synch W J30 -
Power Frequency R/W J31 P
Memo 1 W J40 -
Memo 2 W J41 -
Memo 3 W J42 -
Software Rev No R J50 -
HART output Poll addr W - -
Num req preams R - -
Burst mode
Burst option PV
W
W
-
-
-
- 8
% range/current W - -
Process vars/crnt W - -

Parameter Summary
Device info Field device info Manufacturer R - -
Tag W - u/d
Descriptor W - u/d
Message W - u/d
Date W - u/d
Dev id R - -
Write protect R - P
Revision #s Universal rev R - -
Fld dev rev R - -
Software rev R - -
Model specific Use W - -
Lining W - -
Electrode Material W - -
Electrode Struct W - -
Grounding Ring W - -
Process Connect W - -
Lay Length W - -
Electrical Conn W - -
Sensor Serial No W - -
Review Review1 R - -
Review2 R - -
Review3 R - -
Review4 R - -
Hot key PV Span W B23/C42 u/d
Wrt Protect Menu Write protect R P20 P
Enable Wrt 10min W P21 -
New Password W P22 -
Software Seal R P23 -

*1 : Applicable for AXFA11 Remote Converter.


*2 : Applicable for AXF Integral Flowmeter and AXFA14 Remote Converter.
*3 : R/W : R = Read only, W = Read and Write
*4 : Data Renewing
P : Periodic Data Renewing
u/d : Discretionary Renewing
: Others (Method etc...)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 66
Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Review 4

Tag SO1 Function (*1) Display Select1 Poll addr


PV Damping SO2 Function (*1) Display Select2 Num req preams
Measure Mode SI1 Function (*1) Display Select3 Burst mode
Low MF SI2 Function (*1) Display Cycle Burst option
High MF SO1/2 Active Mode (*1) Language
Low MF(EDF) SI1/2 Active Mode (*1) Manufacturer
High MF(EDF) DO Function (*2) 4-20mA Low Cut Tag
Select Flow Tube (*1) DIO Function (*2) 4-20mA Low Lmt Descriptor
Nominal Size unit DO Active Mode (*2) 4-20mA High Lmt Message
Nominal Size DIO Active Mode (*2) Flow Direction Date
Base Flow Unit Forward Span2 Rate Limit Dev id
Base Time Unit Forward Span3 Dead Time Write protect
PV Span Forward Span4 Pulsing Flow
Flow Decimal Pnt Reverse Span1 T/P Damp Select Universal rev
Velocity Check Reverse Span2 Power Synch Fld dev rev
Density Unit Reverse Span3 (*1) Power Frequency Software rev
Mass Flow Density Reverse Span4 (*1) Memo1
User Span Select Auto Range Hys Memo2
Flow User Unit Bi Direction Hys Memo3
Flow User Span Software Rev No
Low Alarm
Total Unit High Alarm Use
Total Scale Low Low Alarm Lining
Total Decimal Pnt High High Alarm Electrode Material
Total Low Cut H/L Alarm Hys Electrode Struct
Total Execution Alm Out Active Mode (*1) Grounding Ring
Ttl Set Val Lower 4-20 Alarm Out Process Connect
Ttl Set Val Upper 4-20 Burn Out Lay Length
Ttl Switch Lower Alm-Setting Electrical Conn
Ttl Switch Upper Alm-Sig Over Sensor Serial No
Ttl User Select Alm-Emp Pipe
Ttl User Unit Alm-HH/LL Adhesion Check
Alm-Adhesion Adhesion Level1
Pulse Unit Operation Time Adhesion Level2
Pulse Scale Alm Record1 Adhesion Level3
Pulse Width Alm Record Time1 Adhesion Level4
Pulse Low Cut Alm Record2 Adh Measure Value
Pulse Active Mode (*1) Alm Record Time2
Alm Record3
Alm Record Time3
Alm Record4
Alm Record Time4

Status 1 Status 3 Status 5

uP Fault Sig Overflow Span > 10m/s


EEPROM Fault Empty Pipe Span < 0.1m/s
A/D(H) Fault HH/LL Alm TTL>10000p/s
A/D(L) Fault Adhesion Alm TTL<0.0001p/s
A/D(Z) Fault 4-20 Lmt Err
Coil Open Multi Rng Err
EEPROM Dflt H/L HH/LL Set
Dens Set Err

Status 6 Status 7 Status 8

PLS>10000p/s PLS<0.0001p/s Adhesion Wng


PLS > 5000p/s Meas Mod Set Auto Zero Wng
PLS > 1000p/s Size Set Err Fix Cur Wng
PLS > 500p/s Adh Set Err
PLS > 25p/s
PLS > 15p/s
PLS > 10p/s
PLS > 5p/s

*1 : Applicable for AXFA11 Remote Converter.


*2 : Applicable for AXF Integral Flowmeter and AXFA14 Remote Converter.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 67
8.2 Parameter List (BRAIN)
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
A00 Display
(DISPLAY)
A10 FR R -110.0 to 110.0 % 1 For Display Mode only
(FLOW RATE (%))
A20 FR R -999999 to 999999 B21/B22 0 to 3 For Display Mode only
(FLOW RATE) (C40/C41)
A21 FR R 2.400 to 21.600 mA 3 For Display Mode only
(FLW RATE (mA))
A30 FTL R 0 to 99999999 B30 0 to 7 For Display Mode only
(TOTAL) (D10)
A31 RTL R 0 to 99999999 B30 0 to 7 For Display Mode only
(REV TOTAL) (D10)
A32 DTL R -99999999 B30 0 to 7 For Display Mode only
(DIF TOTAL) to 99999999 (D10)
A60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
B00 Easy Setup
(EASY SETUP)
B10 Language W English English Selects the language used for the
(LANGUAGE) Japanese display unit. Linked with H30.
French
German
Italian
Spanish
B20 Flow Damping W 0.1 to 200.0 s 1 3.0 s Sets damping time. Linked with C11.
(FLOW DAMPING)
B21 Base Flow Unit W Ml(Megaliter) m (*) Selects flow units for the flow rate span.
(FLOW UNIT) m3 Linked with C40.
kl (Kiloliter)
l (Liter)
cm3
m
t
kg
g
kcf
cf
mcf
Mgal (US)
kgal (US)
gal (US)
mgal (US)
kbbl (US Oil)
bbl (US Oil)
mbbl (US Oil)
ubbl (US Oil)
8
kbbl (US Beer)
bbl (US Beer)

Parameter Summary
mbbl (US Beer)
ubbl (US Beer)
ft
klb (US)
lb (US)
B22 Base Time Unit W /d /s (*) Selects time units for the flow rate span.
(TIME UNIT) /h Linked with C41.
/min
/s
B23 Flow Span W 0.0001 to 32000 B21/B22 0 to 4 1 m/s (*) Sets flow rate span (with units from B21
(FLOW SPAN) (C40/C41) and B22). Linked with C42.
B24 Flow Decimal Pnt W Auto Auto (*) Selects decimal point position for the
(FLOW DECIMAL) 0 display unit's instantaneous flow rate.
1 Linked with C43.
2
3
B30 Total Unit W n Unit/P Pulse/s (*) Selects the flow rate unit per one pulse
(TOTAL UNIT) u Unit/P as used for totalization display. Linked
m Unit/P with D10.
Unit/P
k Unit/P
M Unit/P
Pulse/s
B31 Total Scale W 0 to 32000 B30 0 to 4 0 (*) Sets the flow rate per one pulse for the
(TOTAL SCALE) (D10) totalization display.Linked with D11.

*3: R/W: R = Read only, W = Read and Write

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 68
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
B32 Pulse Unit W n Unit/P Pulse/s (*) Selects the flow rate unit per one pulse
(PULSE UNIT) u Unit/P as used for pulse output. Linked with
m Unit/P E10.
Unit/P
k Unit/P
M Unit/P
Pulse/s
B33 Pulse Scale W 0 to 32000 B32 0 to 4 0 (*) Sets the flow rate per one pulse as used
(PULSE SCALE) (E10) for pulse output. Linked with E11.
B40 Display Select1 W Flow Rate(%) Flow Rate Selects content of the first line for
(DISP SELECT1) Flow Rate Display Mode. Linked with H10.
Flow Rate(mA)
Forward Total
Reverse Total
Dif Total
B41 Display Select2 W Off Off Selects content of the second line for
(DISP SELECT2) Flow Rate(%) Display Mode. Linked with H11.
Flow Rate
Flow Rate(mA)
Flow Rate(Bar)
Forward Total
Reverse Total
Dif Total
Tag No
Adhesion Check
Communication
B42 Display Select3 W Same as B41 Off Selects content of the third line for
(DISP SELECT3) (Display Select2) Display Mode. Linked with H12.
B50 Auto Zero Exe W No Execution No Execution Selects whether or not automatic zero
(AUTOZERO EXE) Execution adjustment is carried out. Linked with
M10.
B60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
C00 Basic Setup
(BASIC SETUP)
C10 Tag No W ASCII 16 characters Sets Tag number up to 16 characters.
(TAG NO)
C11 Flow Damping W 0.1 to 200.0 s 1 3.0 s Sets damping time. Linked with B20.
(FLOW DAMPING)
C20 Measure Mode W Standard DF Standard DF Selects measurement mode for dual
(MEASURE MODE) Enhanced DF frequency excitation
C21 Low MF W 0.0100 to 3.0000 4 1.0000 (*) Sets low-frequency meter factor for
(LOW MF) standard dual frequency excitation
C22 High MF W 0.0100 to 3.0000 4 1.0000 (*) Sets high-frequency meter factor for
(HIGH MF) standard dual frequency excitation
C23 Low MF(EDF) W 0.0000 to 3.0000 4 1.0000 (*) Sets low-frequency meter factor for
(LOW MF(EDF)) enhanced dual frequency excitation
C24 High MF(EDF) W 0.0000 to 3.0000 4 1.0000 (*) Sets high-frequency meter factor for
(HIGH MF(EDF)) enhanced dual frequency excitation
C30 Select Flow Tube W ADMAG AXF ADMAG AXF Selects the flowtube's model name.
(*1) (FLOW TUBE) ADMAG Note: Select ADMAG AXF for ADMAG
ADMAG AE AXW flowtube.
ADMAG SE
YEWMAG
Calibrator
Other
C31 Nominal Size Unit W mm mm Selects the nominal size units for the
(SIZE UNIT) inch inch flowtube.
C32 Nominal Size W 0.99 to 3000.1 mm 0 to 2 100 (*) Sets flowtube nominal size in selected
(NOMINAL SIZE) 0.01 to 120.1 inch unit at C31.

*1: Applicable for AXFA11 Remote Converter.


*3: R/W: R = Read only, W = Read and Write

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 69
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
C40 Base Flow Unit W Ml(Megaliter) m (*) Selects flow units for the flow rate span.
(FLOW UNIT) m3 Linked with B21.
kl(Kiloliter)
l(Liter)
cm3
m
t
kg
g
kcf
cf
mcf
Mgal (US)
kgal (US)
gal (US)
mgal (US)
kbbl (US Oil)
bbl (US Oil)
mbbl (US Oil)
ubbl (US Oil)
kbbl (US Beer)
bbl (US Beer)
mbbl (US Beer)
ubbl (US Beer)
ft
klb (US)
lb (US)
C41 Base Time Unit W /d /s (*) Selects time units for the flow rate span.
(TIME UNIT) /h Linked with B22.
/min
/s
C42 Flow Span W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 m/s (*) Sets flow rate span (with units from C40
(FLOW SPAN) (B21/B22) and C41). Linked with B23.
C43 Flow Decimal Pnt W Auto Auto (*) Selects decimal point position for the
(FLOW DECIMAL) 0 display unit's instantaneous flow rate.
1 Linked with B24.
2
3
C44 Velocity Check R 0.000 to 99.999 m/s 3 Display of the span setting using flow
(VELOCITY CHK) velocity (m/s).
3 3
C45 Density Unit W kg/m kg/m Sets units for density when mass flow
(DENSITY UNIT) lb/gal rate is selected.
lb/cf
C46 Mass Flow Density W 0 to 32000 C45 0 to 4 0 Sets density when mass flow rate is
(MASS DENSITY) selected (with units from C45).
C47 User Span Select W No No Selects whether or not special units are
(USER SPN SEL) Yes used for flow rate units.
C48 Flow User Unit
(FL USER UNIT)
W 8 alphanumeric
characters
ALL SPACE Sets the special flow rate units. 8
C49 Flow User Span W 0.0001 to 32000 C48 0 to 4 100 Sets span when using special flow rate

Parameter Summary
(FL USER SPAN) units.
C60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
D00 Total Set
(TOTAL SET)
D10 Total Unit W n Unit/P Pulse/s (*) Selects the flow rate unit per one pulse
(TOTAL UNIT) u Unit/P as used for totalization display. Linked
m Unit/P with B30.
Unit/P
k Unit/P
M Unit/P
Pulse/s
D11 Total Scale W 0 to 32000 D10 0 to 4 0 (*) Sets the flow rate per one pulse for the
(TOTAL SCALE) (B30) totalization display.Linked with B31.
D12 Total Decimal Pnt W 0 0 Selects position of decimal point for
(TL DECIMAL) 1 totalization display
2
3
4
5
6
7
D13 Total Low Cut W 0 to 100 % 0 3% Sets the range in vicinity of 0% within
(TOTAL LOWCUT) which the totalization display will be
halted.

*3: R/W: R = Read only, W = Read and Write

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 70
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
D20 Total Execution W Start Start E xe cu te s Sta rt o r Sto p o f th e
(TOTAL EXEC) Stop totalization function, or executes Preset
Preset Total Total or Preset Rev Total.
Preset Rev Total
D21 Ttl Set Val Lower W 0 to 999999 0 0 Sets the totalization preset value in the
(TL SET VAL L) lower 6 digits of the 8-digit totalized
value.
D22 Ttl Set Val Upper W 0 to 99 0 0 Sets the totalization preset value in the
(TL SET VAL U) upper 2 digits of the 8-digit totalized
value.
D23 Ttl Switch Lower W 0 to 999999 0 0 Sets the totalization switch value in the
(TL SWITCH LO) lower 6 digits of the 8-digit totalized
value.
D24 Ttl Switch Upper W 0 to 99 0 0 Sets the totalization switch value in the
(TL SWITCH UP) upper 2 digits of the 8- digits totalized
value.
D30 Ttl User Select W No No Selects whether or not special units are
(TL USER SEL) Yes used as totalized units.
D31 Ttl User Unit W 8 alphanumeric ALL SPACE Sets the special totalized units.
(TL USER UNIT) characters
D60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
E00 Pulse Set
(PULSE SET)
E10 Pulse Unit W n Unit/P Pulse/s (*) Selects the flow rate unit per one pulse
(PULSE UNIT) u Unit/P as used for pulse output. Linked with
m Unit/P B32.
Unit/P
k Unit/P
M Unit/P
Pulse/s
E11 Pulse Scale W 0 to 32000 E10 0 to 4 0 (*) Sets the flow rate per one pulse as used
(PULSE SCALE) (B32) for pulse output. Linked with B33.
E12 Pulse Width W 50% Duty 50% Duty Selects the pulse width for pulse output.
(PULSE WIDTH) 0.05 ms
0.1 ms
0.5 ms
1 ms
20 ms
33 ms
50 ms
100 ms
E13 Pulse Low Cut W 0 to 100 % 0 3% Sets the range in vicinity of 0% within
(PULSE LOWCUT) which pulse output will be halted.
E20 Pulse Active Mode W Closed(On) Act Closed(On) Act Selects whether pulse output will be set
(*1) (PLS ACT MODE) Open(Off) Act to On Active or Off Active.
E60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
F00 Status Function
(STATUS FUNC)
F10 SO1 Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the SO1 terminal
(*1) (SO1 FUNCTION) Warning Output
Total Switch
H/L Alarm
HH/LL Alarm
Fwd/Rev Ranges
Auto 2 Ranges
Auto 3 Ranges
Auto 4 Ranges
Ext 2 Answer
Ext 3 Answer
Ext 4 Answer
F11 SO2 Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the SO2 terminal
(*1) (SO2 FUNCTION) Warning Output
Total Switch
H/L Alarm
HH/LL Alarm
Fwd/Rev Ranges
Auto 2 Ranges
Auto 3 Ranges
Auto 4 Ranges
Ext 2 Answer
Ext 3 Answer
Ext 4 Answer

*1: Applicable for AXFA11 Remote Converter.


*3: R/W: R = Read only, W = Read and Write

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 71
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
F12 SI1 Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the SI1 terminal
(*1) (SI1 FUNCTION) 0% Singal Lock
Ext Auto Zero
Ext Ttl Preset
Ext Rev Ttl Set
Ext 2 Ranges
Ext 3 Ranges
Ext 4 Ranges
F13 SI2 Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the SI2 terminal
(*1) (SI2 FUNCTION) 0% Singal Lock
Ext Auto Zero
Ext Ttl Preset
Ext Rev Ttl Set
Ext 2 Ranges
Ext 3 Ranges
Ext 4 Ranges
F14 SO1/2 Active Mode W Closed(On) Act Closed(On) Act Selects whether SO1/SO2 output will be
(*1) (SO ACT MODE) Open(Off) Act set to On Active or Off Active.
F15 SI1/2 Active Mode W Short Active Short Active Selects whether SI1/SI2 input will be set
(*1) (SI ACT MODE) Open Active to Short Active or Open Active.
F20 DO Function W No Function Pulse Output Selects function for the DO terminal
(*2) (DO FUNCTION) Pulse Output
Alarm Output
Warning Output
Total Switch (O)
H/L Alarm (O)
HH/LL Alarm (O)
Fwd/Rev Rngs (O)
Auto 2 Rngs (O)
Auto 3 Rngs (O)
Auto 4 Rngs (O)
Ext 2 Answer (O)
F21 DIO Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the DIO terminal
(*2) (DIO FUNCTION) Alarm Output
Warning Output
Total Switch (O)
H/L Alarm (O)
HH/LL Alarm (O)
Fwd/Rev Rngs (O)
Auto 2 Rngs (O)
Auto 3 Rngs (O)
Auto 4 Rngs (O)
Ext 2 Answer (O)
0% Singal Lock (I)
Ext Auto Zero (I)
Ext Ttl Set (I)
Ext R Ttl Set (I)
Ext 2 Ttl Set (I)
F22 DO Active Mode W Closed(On) Act Closed(On) Act Selects whether DO terminal will be set 8
(*2) (DO ACT MODE) Open(Off) Act to On Active or Off Active.
F23 DIO Active Mode W Closed/Short Act Closed/Short Act Selects whether DIO terminal will be set

Parameter Summary
(*2) (DIO ACT MODE) Open/Open Act to Closed/Short Active orOpen/Open
Active.
F30 Forward Span2 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for forward No. 2
(FWD SPAN2) range
F31 Forward Span3 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for forward No. 3
(FWD SPAN3) range
F32 Forward Span4 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for forward No. 4
(FWD SPAN4) range
F33 Reverse Span1 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for reverse No. 1
(REV SPAN1) range
F34 Reverse Span2 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for reverse No. 2
(REV SPAN2) range
F35 Reverse Span3 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for reverse No. 3
(*1) (REV SPAN3) range
F36 Reverse Span4 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for reverse No. 4
(*1) (REV SPAN4) range
F40 Auto Range Hys W 0 to 15 % 0 10 % Sets hysteresis width for automatic
(AUTO RNG HYS) range switching
F41 Bi Direction Hys W 0 to 8 % 0 2% Sets hysteresis width for forward/
(BI DIREC HYS) reverse switching
F60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error

*1: Applicable for AXFA11 Remote Converter.


*2: Applicable for AXF Integral Flowmeter and AXFA14 Remote Converter.
*3: R/W: R = Read only, W = Read and Write

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 72
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
G00 Alarm
(ALARM)
G10 Low Alarm W -110 to 110 % 0 -110 % Sets level setting value for low flow rate
(LOW ALARM) limit (L)
G11 High Alarm W -110 to 110 % 0 110 % Sets level setting value for high flow rate
(HIGH ALARM) limit (H)
G12 Low Low Alarm W -110 to 110 % 0 -110 % Sets level setting value for low- low flow
(LO LO ALARM) rate limit (LL)
G13 High High Alarm W -110 to 110 % 0 110 % Sets level setting value for high- high
(HI HI ALARM) flow rate limit (HH)
G14 H/L Alarm Hys W 0 to 10 % 0 5% Sets hysteresis width for high-low flow
(H/L ALM HYS) rate limit alarm
G20 Alm Out Act Mode W Closed(On) Act Open(Off) Selects whether alarm output will be set
(*1) (ALM OUT ACT) Open(Off) Act Act to On Active or Off Active.
G21 4-20mA Alarm Out W 2.4mA or Less 21.6mA or More Selects the current output during alarm
(4-20 ALM OUT) 4.0mA occurrence.
Hold
21.6mA or More
G22 4-20mA Burn Out R High Low Displays the current output during a
(4-20 BURNOUT) CPU failure.
G30 Alm-Setting W No Yes Selects whether a setting alarm is to be
(ALM-SETTING) Yes specified as an alarm.
G31 Alm-Sig Over W No Yes Selects whether a signal overflow alarm
(ALM-SIG OVER) Yes is to be specified as an alarm.
G32 Alm-Emp Pipe W No Yes Selects whether an empty pipe alarm is
(ALM-EMP PIPE) Yes to be specified as an alarm.
G33 Alm-HH/LL W No No Selects whether a flow rate high-high or
(ALM-HH/LL) Yes low-low alarm is to be specified as an
alarm.
G34 Alm-Adhesion W No No Selects whether an electrode adhesion
(ALM-ADHESION) Yes alarm is to be specified as an alarm.
G40 Operation Time R 0D 00:00 to Operation time
(OPERATE TIME) 99999D 23:59
G41 Alm Record1 R 10:uP Fault Displays the content of the most recent
(ALM RECORD1) 11:EEPROM Fault alarm.
12:A/D(H) Fault
13:A/D(L) Fault
14:A/D(Z) Fault
15:Coil Open
16:EEPROM Dflt
18:Power Off
19:Inst Pwr Fail
28:WDT
30:Sig Overflow
31:Empty Pipe
33:Adhesion Alm
G42 Alm Record Time1 R 0D 00:00 to Displays the operation time at the
(ALM TIME 1) 99999D 23:59 occurrence of the most recent alarm.
G43 Alm Record2 R Same as G41 Displays the content of the second most
(ALM RECORD2) (Alm Record 1) recent alarm.
G44 Alm Record Time2 R 0D 00:00 to Displays the operation time at
(ALM TIME 2) 99999D 23:59 occurrence of the second most recent
alarm.
G45 Alm Record3 R Same as G41 Displays the content of the third most
(ALM RECORD3) (Alm Record 1) recent alarm.
G46 Alm Record Time3 R 0D 00:00 to Displays the operation time at the
(ALM TIME 3) 99999D 23:59 occurrence of the third most recent
alarm.
G47 Alm Record4 R Same as G41 Displays the content of the fourth most
(ALM RECORD4) (Alm Record 1) recent alarm.
G48 Alm Record Time4 R 0D 00:00 to Displays the operation time at the
(ALM TIME 4) 99999D 23:59 occurrence of the fourth most recent
alarm.
G60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
H00 Display Set
(DISP SET)
H10 Display Select1 W Flow Rate(%) Flow Rate Selects content of the first line for
(DISP SELECT1) Flow Rate Display Mode. Linked with B40.
Flow Rate(mA)
Forward Total
Reverse Total
Dif Total

*1: Applicable for AXFA11 Remote Converter.


*3: R/W: R = Read only, W = Read and Write

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 73
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
H11 Display Select2 W Off Off Selects content of the second line for
(DISP SELECT2) Flow Rate(%) Display Mode. Linked with B41.
Flow Rate
Flow Rate(mA)
Flow Rate(Bar)
Forward Total
Reverse Total
Dif Total
Tag No
Adhesion Check
Communication
H12 Display Select3 W Same as H11 Off Selects content of the third line for
(DISP SELECT3) (Display Select2) Display Mode. Linked with B42.
H20 Display Cycle W 200ms 400ms Selects the display cycle.
(DISP CYCLE) 400ms
1s
2s
4s
8s
H30 Language W English English Selects the language used by the
(LANGUAGE) Japanese display unit. Linked with B10.
French
German
Italian
Spanish
H60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
J00 Aux
(AUX)
J10 4-20mA Low Cut W 0 to 10 % 0 0% Sets the range in vicinity of 0% within
(4-20 LOW CUT) which the current output will be 4 mA
J11 4-20mA Low Lmt W -20.0 to 100.0 % 1 -20.0 % Sets the low limit for current output
(4-20 LOW LMT)
J12 4-20mA High Lmt W 0.0 to 120.0 % 1 120.0 % Sets the high limit for current output
(4-20 HI LMT)
J20 Flow Direction W Forward Forward Selects the flow direction.
(FLOW DIRECT) Reverse
J21 Rate Limit W 0 to 10 % 0 5% Sets the level to reduce output
(RATE LIMIT) fluctuation.
J22 Dead Time W 0 to 15 s 0 0s Sets the dead time to reduce output
(DEAD TIME) fluctuation. When 0 is set, rate limit
function is not available.
J23 Pulsing Flow W No No Selects whether pulsing flow is to be
(PULSING FLOW) Yes supported.
J24 T/P Damp Select W Damping Damping Selects whether the flow rate value
(T/P DAMP SEL) No Damping obtained through damping calculation
for total/pulse or the instantaneous flow
rate value (no damping) for total/pulse is
8
to be used.

Parameter Summary
J30 Power Synch W No Yes Selects whether or not the internal
(POWER SYNCH) Yes frequency is to be synchronized with the
power supply frequency.
J31 Power Frequency R/W 47.00 to 63.00 Hz 2 50.00 Displays the power-supply frequency
(POWER FREQ) (for Power Synch = Yes), or sets the
power-supply frequency (for Power
Synch=No).
J40 Memo 1 W ASCII 16 characters ALL SPACE Memo field
(MEMO 1)
J41 Memo 2 W ASCII 16 characters ALL SPACE Memo field
(MEMO 2)
J42 Memo 3 W ASCII 16 characters ALL SPACE Memo field
(MEMO 3)
J50 Software Rev No R Software revision number
(SOFTWARE REV)
J60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
K00 Diagnosis
(DIAGNOSIS)
K10 Adhesion Check W No No Selects whether or not to perform
(ADHESION CHK) Yes diagnosis of adhesion to the electrode.
K11 Adhesion Level1 W 0.00 to 100.00 M 2 0.10 Sets the resistance value for adhesion
(ADH LEVEL1) Level 1 to the electorode.

*3: R/W: R = Read only, W = Read and Write

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 74
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
K12 Adhesion Level2 W 0.00 to 100.00 M 2 0.50 Sets the resistance value for adhesion
(ADH LEVEL2) Level 2 to the electorode.
K13 Adhesion Level3 W 0.00 to 100.00 M 2 1.00 Sets the resistance value for adhesion
(ADH LEVEL3) Level 3 to the electorode.
K14 Adhesion Level4 W 0.00 to 100.00 M 2 3.00 Sets the resistance value for adhesion
(ADH LEVEL4) Level 4 to the electorode.
K15 Adh Measure Value R M 2 Displays the resistance value for
(ADH MEAS VAL) adhesion to the electrode.
K60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
M00 Adjustment
(ADJUSTMENT)
M10 Auto Zero Exe W No Execution No Execution Selects whether or not automatic zero
(AUTOZERO EXE) Execution adjustment is carried out. Linked with
B50.
M11 Magflow Zero R/W -99.999 to 99.999 3 0.000 Displays the result of the automatic zero
(MAGFLOW ZERO) adjustment, or sets the zero point.
M60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
N00 Test
(TEST)
N10 Test Mode W Normal Normal Selects whether mode will be set to
(TEST MODE) Test Normal or Test.
N11 Test Output Value W -10 to 110 % 0 0% Sets the test output value.
(TEST OUT VAL)
N20 Test SO1 W Open(Off) Open(Off) Selects the test condition for SO1
(*1) (TEST SO1) Closed(On) terminal.
N21 Test SO2 W Open(Off) Open(Off) Selects the test condition for SO2
(*1) (TEST SO2) Closed(On) terminal.
N22 Test Alarm Out W Open(Off) Closed(On) Selects the test condition for alarm
(*1) (TEST ALM OUT) Closed(On) output terminal.
N23 Test SI1 R Open Displays the test condition for SI1
(*1) (TEST SI1) Short terminal.
N24 Test SI2 R Open Displays the test condition for SI2
(*1) (TEST SI2) Short terminal.
N30 Test DO W Open(Off) Open(Off) Selects the test condition for DO
(*2) (TEST DO) Closed(On) terminal.
Pulse
N31 Test DIO (O) W Input Mode Input Mode Selects the test condition for DIO
(*2) (TEST DIO (O)) Open(Off) terminal used for output.
Closed(On)
N32 Test DIO (I) R Open Displays the test condition for DIO
(*2) (TEST DIO (I)) Short terminal used for input.
N60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
P00 Protect
(PROTECT)
P10 Key Code W 0 to 9999 0 Parameter of the display restriction
(KEY CODE)
P20 Write Protect R No No Displays whether or not overwriting of
(W PROTECT) Yes parameter data is prohibited.
P21 Enable Wrt Passwd W ASCII 8 characters Sets the correct password so that write
(ENABLE WRITE) protection function will be released.
P22 New Password W ASCII 8 characters Sets the password for write protection
(NEW PASSWORD) funcion
P23 Software Seal R Break Keep Displays whether or not a Joker
(SOFT SEAL) Keep password was used (Break).
P60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error

*1: Applicable for AXFA11 Remote Converter.


*2: Applicable for AXF Integral Flowmeter and AXFA14 Remote Converter.
*3: R/W: R = Read only, W = Read and Write

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<9. Approvals> 75

9. Approvals
This chapter describes further requirements and notices Sanitary Type
concerning the approval. The description in this chapter is DN PS PS DN CATEGORY
MODEL
prior to other description in this Users Manual. (mm) (*1) (MPa) (*1) (MPa mm) (*2) (*4)
Sound Engineering
AXF015H 15 1 15
Practice (SEP) (*3)
(1) PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) Sound Engineering
AXF025H 25 1 25
(AXF Integral Flowmeter), Practice (SEP) (*3)
AXF032H 32 1 32 I
(AXF Remote Flowtube) AXF040H 40 1 40 I
AXF050H 50 1 50 I
AXF065H 65 1 65 I
Technical Data AXF080H 80 1 80 I
AXF100H 100 1 100 I
Module: H AXF125H 125 1 125 II
Type of Equipment: Piping *1: PS: Maximum allowable pressure for Flowtube
Type of Fluid: Liquids and gas DN: Nominal size
Group of Fluid: 1 and 2 (*4) *2: For details, refer to the following.
Table 6 covered by ANNEX II of Directive 97/23/EC
General-purpose Use / Submersible Type / Explosion Proof (until July 18th, 2016)
Type Table 6 covered by ANNEX II of Directive 2014/68/EU
DN PS PS DN CATEGORY (from July 19th, 2016)
MODEL *3: Article 3, paragraph 3 of Directive 97/23/EC
(mm) (*1) (MPa) (*1) (MPa mm) (*2) (*4)
AXF002G Sound Engineering (until July 18th, 2016)
2.5 4 10
AXF002C Practice (SEP) (*3) Article 4, paragraph 3 of Directive 2014/68/EU
AXF005G
5 4 20
Sound Engineering (from July 19th, 2016)
AXF005C Practice (SEP) (*3) *4: Models classified in categories I or II shall not be used for
AXF010G Sound Engineering unstable gases of Group 1.
10 4 40
AXF010C Practice (SEP) (*3)
AXF015G Sound Engineering Installation
AXF015C 15 4 60
AXF015W Practice (SEP) (*3)
AXF025G Sound Engineering
AXF025C
AXF025W
25 4 100
Practice (SEP) (*3) WARNING
AXF032G
AXF032C 32 4 128 II Tighten the bolts of the piping joints according to
AXF032W
AXF040G the prescribed torque values.
AXF040C 40 4 160 II Take measures to protect the flowmeters from
AXF040W
AXF050G
forces caused by vibration channeled through the
AXF050C 50 4 200 II piping.
AXF050W
AXF065G
AXF065C 65 2 130 II Operation
AXF065W
AXF080G
AXF080C
AXF080W
80 2 160 II
WARNING
AXF100G
AXF100C
AXF100W
100 2 200 II
The instrument should be operated with the 9
AXF125G temperature and pressure of the fluid under
Approvals
AXF125C 125 2 250 II normal operating conditions.
AXF125W
AXF150G The ambient temperature should be that of normal
AXF150C 150 2 300 II operating conditions.
AXF150W
AXF200G Take measures to prevent excessive pressure
AXF200C 200 2 400 III such as water hammer, etc. To avoid water
AXF200W
AXF250G hammer prevent the pressure from exceeding the
AXF250C 250 2 500 III PS (maximum allowable pressure) by setting the
AXF250W
AXF300G systems safety valves, etc. appropriately.
AXF300C 300 2 600 III Should external fire occur, take safety measures at
AXF300W
AXF350G
the device itself or system-wide prevent it having
AXF350C 350 1 350 II an effect on the flowmeters.
AXF350W Avoid using fluids exceeding the corrosion proof
AXF400G
AXF400C 400 1 400 III limitations of the lining and electrodes.
AXF400W Take measures not to abrade the metal pipe, and
avoid abrading the lining by using fluids such as
slurry and sand are contained.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<9. Approvals> 76
(2) Safety Requirement Standards
EN61010-1
EN61010-2-030
Altitude at installation site: Max. 2000 m above sea level
Installation category (Overvoltage category): II
Pollution degree: 2
Indoor/Outdoor use

(3) EMC Conformity Standards


EN61326-1 Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial
locations)
EN61326-2-3
EN61326-2-5 (for FOUNDATION fieldbus/PROFIBUS
only)
EN61000-3-2 ClassA
EN61000-3-3
Performance Specification during immunity test
Flowrate output: Output fluctuation within 5% of
default (1m/s) span

CAUTION
This instrument is a class A product, and it is designed
for use in the industrial environment.
Please use this instrument in the industrial
environment only.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 77

10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument


In this chapter, further requirements and differences for 10.1 ATEX
explosion proof type instrument are described.

NOTE
NOTE
For ATEX explosion proof type specification, refer to
When describing the model name like AXFC in IM 01E20A01-11EN.
this manual, means any of the following.
002, 005, 010, 015, 025, 032, 040, 050, 065, 080, 100,
125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
10.2 FM
(1) Technical Data
WARNING
(AXF Integral Flowmeter), (AXF Remote Flowtube)
Magnetic flowmeters with the model name Applicable Standard:
AXFC magnetic flowmeter and AXFA14C FM3600, FM3610, FM3615,
remote converter are products which have been FM3810, ANSI/NEMA 250
certified as explosion proof type instruments. Strict (AXF Integral Flowmeter)
limitations are applied to the structures, installation Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
locations, external wiring work, maintenance and D.
repairs, etc. of these instruments. Sufficient care must Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division1, Groups E, F
be taken, as any violation of the limitations may cause & G.
dangerous situations. Intrinsically safe (electrodes) for Class I, Division 1,
Be sure to read this chapter before handling the Groups A, B, C & D.
instruments. SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES
For explosion proof type instrument, the description in WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
this chapter is prior to other description in this users Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
manual. Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc
For ATEX or IECEx explosion proof type, be sure to Excitation Circuit: 140V max
read IM 01E20A01-11EN. Enclosure: NEMA 4X
For TIIS explosion proof type, be sure to read Temperature Code: T6
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS Note: Temperature Code T5 to T3 included in the scope of
FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT at the end of application and its approval
this manual. Refer to following table;
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process
Code Temperature Temperature
T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
WARNING T4
T3
+120C (+248F)
+130C (+266F)
40C (40F)
40C (40F)

The terminal box cover and display cover is locked by


Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F) 10
special screw. In case of opening the cover, use the
Explosion Protected Type Instrument

hexagonal wrench attached.


The covers of explosion proof type products are
locked. Use the attached hexagonal wrench to open
and close the cover. Before opening the cover, be sure
to check that the power of flowmeter has been turned
off. Once the cover is closed, be sure to re-lock the
product.
Be sure to lock the cover with the special screw using
the hexagonal wrench attached after tightening the
cover.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 78
(AXF Remote Flowtube) (2) Electrical Connection
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
The type of electrical connection is stamped near the
D.
electrical connection port according to the following
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division1, Groups E, F
codes.
& G.
(AXF Integral Flowmeter)
Intrinsically safe (electrodes) for Class I, Division 1,
Screw Size Marking
Groups A, B, C & D. ISO M20x1.5 female M
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES ANSI 1/2NPT female N
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
Excitation Circuit: 170V max
Enclosure: NEMA 4X
Temperature Code: T6
Note: Temperature Code T5 to T3 included in the scope of
application and its approval (AXF Remote Flowtube)
Refer to following table; Screw Size Marking
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process ISO M20x1.5 female M
Code Temperature Temperature ANSI 1/2NPT female N
T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F)
T3 +150C (+302F) 40C (40F)
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
(AXFA14 Remote Converter)
F1009.ai
Applicable Standard:
FM3600, FM3615, FM3810, ANSI/NEMA 250 (AXFA14 Remote Converter)
Screw Size Marking
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
ISO M20x1.5 female M
D. ANSI 1/2NPT female N
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F
& G.
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc
Excitation Circuit: 140V max
F1010.ai
Enclosure: NEMA 4X
Temperature Code: T6
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 79
(3) Installation (5) Maintenance and Repair

WARNING WARNING
All wiring shall comply with National Electrical The instrument modification or parts replacement
Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and Local Electrical Code. by other than authorized representative of
In hazardous locations, wiring to be in conduit as Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and
shown in Figure 10.2 will void the approval of Factory Mutual Research
When installed in Division 2, SEALS NOT Corporation.
REQUIRED In case the electrodes and/or grounding rings are
In case the electrodes and/or grounding rings are made of titanium, the flowtube should be kept
made of titanium, the flowtube should be kept away from impacts and frictions in hazardous
away from impacts and frictions in hazardous locations.
locations.

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Conduit Sealing Fitting
Magnetic Flowmeter

18" (457 mm) Max.


F1011.ai

Figure 10.2 Conduit Wiring

(4) Operation

WARNING
OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING
COVERS.
SEALS ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES in
hazardous locations.
When installed in Division 2, SEALS NOT
REQUIRED
Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
hazardous locations.
In case the electrodes and/or grounding rings are
made of titanium, the flowtube should be kept 10
away from impacts and frictions in hazardous
Explosion Protected Type Instrument

locations.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 80
10.3 CSA Temperature Code:
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process
Code Temperature Temperature
(1) Technical Data T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F)
(AXF Integral Flowmeter), (AXF Remote Flowtube) T3 +130C (+266F) 40C (40F)
Applicable Standard: Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
For CSA C22.2 Series;
(AXF Remote Flowtube)
C22.2 No 0, C22.2 No 0.4, C22.2 No 0.5,
For CSA C22.2 Series
C22.2 No 25, C22.2 No 30, C22.2 No 94,
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
C22.2 No 157, C22.2 No.61010-1-12,
D.
C22.2 No.61010-2-030-12
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F
For CSA E79 Series;
& G.
CAN/CSA-E79-0, CAN/CSA-E79-1,
Intrinsically safe (electrodes) for Class I, Division 1,
CAN/CSA-E79-7, CAN/CSA-E79-11,
Groups A, B, C & D.
CAN/CSA-E79-18
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 50 cm OF THE
Certificate: 1481213
ENCLOSURE
Process Sealing Certification:
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
Dual Seal certified by CSA to the requirements of
Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
ANSI/ISA 12.27.01.
Excitation Circuit: 170V max
No additional sealing required.
Enclosure: Type 4X
Primary seal failure annunciation;
Temperature Code:
Deterioration of the flowrate output at nonzero
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process
flow point. Code Temperature Temperature
Unstable flowrate output at zero flow point. T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F)
(AXF Integral Flowmeter) T3 +150C (+302F) 40C (40F)
For CSA C22. 2 Series
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
D. For CSA E79 Series
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F Flameproof for Zone 1, Ex dme [ia] IIC T6...T3
& G. Intrinsically safe (electrodes), Ex ia IIC T6...T3
Intrinsically safe (electrodes) for Class I, Division 1, Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
Groups A, B, C & D. Excitation Circuit: 170V max
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 50 cm OF THE Enclosure: IP66, IP67
ENCLOSURE Temperature Code:
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process
Code Temperature Temperature
Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F)
Excitation Circuit: 140V max T3 +150C (+302F) 40C (40F)
Enclosure: Type 4X Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
Temperature Code:
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process (AXFA14 Remote Converter)
Code Temperature Temperature Applicable Standard:
T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
For CSA C22.2 Series;
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F) C22.2 No 0, C22.2 No 0.4, C22.2 No 0.5,
T3 +130C (+266F) 40C (40F)
C22.2 No 25, C22.2 No 30, C22.2 No 94,
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F) C22.2 No 61010-1-12, C22.2 No 61010-2-030-12
For CSA E79 Series For CSA E79 Series;
Flameproof for Zone 1, Ex dme [ia] IIC T6...T3 CAN/CSA-E79-0, CAN/CSA-E79-1
Intrinsically safe (electrodes), Ex ia IIC T6...T3 Certificate: 1481213
Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc
Excitation Circuit: 140V max
Enclosure: IP66, IP67

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 81
For CSA C22.2 Series (3) Operation
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D.
For CSA C22.2 Series
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F
& G.
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 50 cm OF THE WARNING
ENCLOSURE
WARNING : OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
COVER.
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc
OUVRIR LE CIRCUIT AVANT
Excitation Circuit: 140V max
DENLEVER LE COUVERCLE.
Enclosure: Type 4X
Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
Temperature Code: T6
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
hazardous locations.
For CSA E79 Series
Flameproof for Zone 1, Ex d IIC T6 For CSA E79 Series
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc (AXF Integral Flowmeter),
Excitation Circuit: 140V max (AXFA14 Remote Converter)
Enclosure: IP66, IP67
Temperature Code: T6
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
WARNING
(2) Installation WARNING : AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 20
MINUTES BEFORE OPENING.
For CSA C22.2 Series APRS POWER-OFF, ATTENDRE 20
MINUTES AVANT DOUVRIR.
WARNING Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical hazardous locations.
Code Part I and Local Electrical Codes.
In hazardous location, wiring shall be in conduit as
(AXF Remote Flowtube)
shown in Figure 10.3
WARNING : SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 50cm
OF THE ENCLOSURE. WARNING
UN SCELLEMENT DOIT TRE
WARNING : DE-ENERGIZE BEFORE OPENING.
INSTALL MOINS DE 50cm DU
OUVRIR LE CIRCUIT AVANT
BOTIER.
DENLEVER LE COUVERCLE.
When installed in Division 2, SEALS NOT
Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
REQUIRED
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
hazardous locations.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Magnetic Flowmeter Conduit Sealing Fitting

(4) Maintenance and Repair

WARNING 10
50 cm Max.
F1012.ai
Explosion Protected Type Instrument

The instrument modification or parts replacement by


Figure 10.3 Conduit Wiring
other than authorized representative of YOKOGAWA
Electric Corporation or YOKOGAWA Corporation
For CSA E79 Series
of AMERICA is prohibited and will void Canadian
Standards Explosionproof Certification.
WARNING
All wiring shall comply with local installation
requirements and local electrical code. 10.4 IECEx
In hazardous locations, the cable entry devices
shall be of a certified flameproof type, suitable for
the conditions of use and correctly installed.
NOTE
Unused apertures shall be closed with suitable
For IECEx explosion proof type specification, refer to
flameproof certified blanking elements. (The plug
IM 01E20A01-11EN.
attached is flameproof certified.)

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 82
10.5 TIIS Flange Type (PFA lining only);
Lining / Process Integral Flowmeter Remote Flowtube
Connection PFA PFA
CAUTION code Lining Lining

-B**, -D** -B**, -D**


The model AXFC magnetic flowmeter and Size: mm (inch)
AXFA14C remote converter with optional code 2.5 (0.1) TC18966 TC18982
5 (0.2) TC18966 TC18982
JF3, which have obtained certification according to
10 (0.4) TC18966 TC18982
technical criteria for explosion-protected construction 15 (0.5) TC18966 TC18982
of electric machinery and equipment (Standards 25 (1.0) TC16631 TC16655
Notification No. 556 from the Japanese Ministry of 32 (1.25) TC16632 TC16656
40 (1.5) TC16633 TC16657
Labor) conforming to IEC standards, are designed for
50 (2.0) TC16634 TC16658
hazardous areas where inflammable gases or vapors 65 (2.5) TC16635 TC16659
may be present. (This allows installation in Division 1 80 (3.0) TC16636 TC16660
and 2 areas) 100 (4.0) TC16637 TC16661
To preserve the safety of flameproof equipment 125 (5.0) TC16638 TC16662
150 (6.0) TC18969 TC18985
requires great care during mounting, wiring, and
200 (8.0) TC18971 TC18987
piping. Safety requirements also place restrictions on 250 (10) TC18973 TC18989
maintenance and repair activities. Users absolutely 300 (12) TC18975 TC18991
must read INSTALLATION AND OPERATING 350 (14) TC18976 TC18992
400 (16) TC18977 TC18993
PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF
EQUIPMENT at the end of this manual.
(AXF Integral Flowmeter)
Construction: Ex de[ia] IIC T4
(1) Technical Data : Converter; Explosion proof
Flowtube; Increased Safety and
(AXF Integral Flowmeter), (AXF Remote Flowtube) Intrinsically Safety(ia)
Certificate: Electrode; Intrinsically Safety(ia)
Wafer Type; Um=250VAC 50/60Hz, 250VDC,
Lining / Process Integral Flowmeter Remote Flowtube
Uo=250V*, Io=3.37mA*, Po=0.211W
Connection PFA Ceramics PFA Ceramics
code Lining Lining Lining Lining *Uo and Io are rms value.
Gas Group and Temperature Class: IIC T4
-A** -A** -A** -A** Ambient Temperature: 20 to 60C (power supply
Size: mm (inch)
2.5 (0.1) TC18966 TC16645 TC18982 TC16669 code 1)
5 (0.2) TC18966 TC16645 TC18982 TC16669 : 20 to 50C (power supply
10 (0.4) TC18966 TC16645 TC18982 TC16669 code 2)
15 (0.5) TC18966 TC16646 TC18982 TC16670
Fluid Temperature: 120C max
25 (1.0)
(Lay length code 1)
TC16631 TC16647 TC16655 TC16671 Electrode Circuit: 250 V AC/DC
25 (1.0) Maximum power supply voltage: 250V AC/130V DC
TC18967 TC18983
(Lay length code 2) Grounding: JIS Class C (grounding resistance 10 or
32 (1.25) TC16632 TC16656
less) or JIS Class A (grounding resistance
40 (1.5) TC16633 TC16648 TC16657 TC16672
50 (2.0) TC16634 TC16649 TC16658 TC16673 10 or less)
65 (2.5) TC16635 TC16659
80 (3.0) TC16636 TC18978 TC16660 TC18994 WARNING
100 (4.0) TC16637 TC18979 TC16661 TC18995
125 (5.0) TC16638 TC16662
In case that ambient temperature exceeds 50C,
150 (6.0) TC18968 TC18980 TC18984 TC18996
200 (8.0) TC18970 TC18981 TC18986 TC18997 use heat-resistant cables with maximum allowable
250 (10) TC18972 TC18988 temperature of 70C or above.
300 (12) TC18974 TC18990
350 (14)
400 (16) (AXF Remote Flowtube)
Construction: Ex de[ia] IIC T4
: Terminal box; Explosion proof
Flowtube; Increased Safety and
Intrinsically Safety(ia)
Electrode; Intrinsically Safety(ia)
Um=250VAC 50/60Hz, 250VDC,
Uo=250V*, Io=3.37mA*, Po=0.211W
*Uo and Io are rms value.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 83
Gas Group and Temperature Class: IIC T4 (2-1)Wiring Cable through Flameproof
Ambient Temperature: 20 to 60C Packing Adapter
Fluid Temperature: 120C max
Electrode Circuit: 250 V AC/DC
Grounding: JIS Class C (grounding resistance 10 or WARNING
less) or JIS Class A (grounding resistance
For the TIIS flameproof type with wiring using a
10 or less)
flameproof packing adapter, wire cables through the
(AXFA14 Remote Converter) packing adapters approved by Yokogawa (optional
Certificate: TC16678 code G12, G11, G14 or G13).
Construction: Ex d IIC T6 In case that optional code G11 or G13 is selected, it
: Explosion proof comes with a blanking plug.
Gas Group and Temperature Class: IIC T6 Then always apply it to the unused wiring port.
Ambient Temperature: 20 to 60C (power supply
code 1) Unit : mm
: 20 to 50C (power supply T1 (Approx. inch)
Adapter body(M. Screw)
code 2) O-Ring
Maximum power supply voltage: 250V AC/130V DC 16.5(0.65)
Packing case
Hexagon socket set screw
Grounding: JIS Class C(grouding resistance 10V or 18(0.71)
Packing *
Hexagon socket set screw
less) or JIS Class A(grounding resistance F L
O-Ring
O-Ring
10V or less) G Washer C
Union nut
Packing gland
*Packing Clamp ring
(Choose from the table below Clamp nut D
WARNING depend on cable outside diameter) T2 O-Ring
B.coupling
Cable(user's scope)

In case that ambient temperature exceeds 50C, Nominal diameter Dimension Packing diameter Weight
Identification Parts
use heat-resistant cables with maximum allowable T1 T2 C D L
Cable outer diameter
F G mark
kg
(lb)
No.

temperature of 70C or above. G 1/2 G 1/2 35 39 94.5 8.0 to 10.0 (0.31 to 0.39) 10.0(0.39) 20.0 16 8-10 0.26
(1.38) (1.54) (3.72) 10.0 to 12.0 (0.39 to 0.47) 12.0(0.47) (0.79) 16 10-12 (0.57) G9601AM

F1021.ai

Figure 10.5.1 Flameproof Packing Adapter

WARNING Apply a non-hardening sealant to the terminal box


connection port and to the threads on the flameproof
In case of TIIS Flameproof type, a remote flowtube is
packing adapter for waterproofing.
available for combined use with the AXFA14 converter
Either a flameproof packing adapter or a blanking
only.
plug must be applied to every wiring port.
In case that optional code G11 or G13 is selected, it
(2) Wiring Installation comes with a blanking plug.
Then always apply it to the unused wiring port.
For the external wiring of flameproof types, use a If the blanking plug is necessary, always purchase it
flameproof packing adapter approved by Yokogawa (refer (parts number: G9330DP) from Yokogawa.
to Figure 10.5.2) or cable wiring using a flameproof metal Apply a non-hardening
conduit (refer to Figure 10.5.4 and INSTALLATION AND sealant to the threads of these
fittings for waterproofing.
10
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF
EQUIPMENT at the end of this manual).
Explosion Protected Type Instrument

NOTE Wiring metal Apply a blanking


conduit plug to the unused
wiring port
This section describes the Integral flowmeter as an
example. The same attention must be paid to the Flameproof
remote flowtube and remote converter. Tee packing adapter

Flexible metal conduit

Drain plug
F1022.ai

Figure 10.5.2Typical Wiring Using Flexible Metal Conduit

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 84
Follow the procedure below when a flameproof packing (2-2)Cable Wiring Using Flameproof Metal
adapter (optional code G12, G11, G14 or G13) is applied. Conduit
Refer to Figure 10.5.3.
A seal fitting must be installed near the terminal box
If a blanking plug is applied, follow the same procedure
connection port for a sealed construction.
when the flameproof packing adapter is applied.
Apply a non-hardening sealant to the threads of the
terminal box connection port, flexible metal conduit
CAUTION and seal fitting for waterproofing.
Before tighting, confirm cable length from terminal to Every wiring port must apply the same wiring as
flameproof packing adapter when setting. Once it is Figure 10.5.4.
tightened, loosening and re-tightening may damage its Apply a blanking plug to the unused wiring port of a
sealing performance. 24V power supply version when a four-wire cable is
used for both power input and signal output.
If the blanking plug is necessary, always purchase it
(a) Loosen the locking screw and remove the terminal (parts number: G9330DP) from Yokogawa.
box cover.
Apply a non-hardening
(b) Measure the cable outer diameter in two directions to sealant to the threads
within 0.1 mm. Non-hazardous of these fittings for
area waterproofing
(c) Calculate the average of the two diameters, and use
packing with an internal diameter nearest to this value
(see the table of Figure 10.5.1). Hazardous
area Apply a blanking
(d) Screw the flameproof packing adapter into the plug to the unused
terminal box until the O-ring touches the wiring port Gas sealing wiring port
device
(at least 6 full turns), and firmly tighten the lock nut.
Flameproof Flameproof flexible
(e) Insert the cable through the union cover, the union metal conduit
heavy-gauge
coupling, the clamp nut, the clamp ring, the gland, the steel conduit
washer, the rubber packing, and the packing box, in Seal fitting
Tee
that order. After wiring, impregnate the
Drain plug fitting with a compound to seal tubing.
(f) Insert the end of the cable into the terminal box. F1024.ai

(g) Tighten the union cover to grip the cable. When Figure 10.5.4Typical Wiring Using Flameproof Metal
tightening the union cover, tighten approximately Conduit
one turn past the point where the cable will no longer
move up and down.
Proper tightening is important. If it is too tight, a circuit
break in the cable may occur; if not tight enough, the
flameproof effectiveness will be compromised.
(h) Fasten the cable by tightening the clamp nut.
(i) Tighten the lock nut on the union cover.
(j) Connect the cable wires to each terminal.
Wrench Union coupling
Lock nut Clamp nut
Clamp ring
Gland
Washer
Cable Rubber packing

Wrench
Union cover
Lock nut

Packing box

Adapter body O-ring


Apply a
non-hardening
sealant to the threads
for waterproofing.

F1023.ai

Figure 10.5.3 Installing Flameproof Packing Adapter

IM 01E20A01-01EN
<INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT> 85

INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS


FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT
Apparatus Certified Under Technical Criteria
(IEC-compatible Standards)

1. General and its enclosure shall endure explosive pressures in


cases where explosive gases or vapours entering the
The following describes precautions on electrical enclosure cause explosion. In addition, the enclosure
apparatus of flameproof construction (hereinafter referred construction shall be such that flame caused by explosion
to as flameproof apparatus) in explosion-protected does not ignite gases or vapours outside the enclosure.
apparatus. In this manual, the word "flameproof" is applied to
Following the Labour Safety and Health Laws of Japan, the flameproof equipment combined with the types of
flameproof apparatus is subjected to type tests to meet protection "e", "o", "i", and "d" as well as flameproof
either the technical criteria for explosionproof electrical equipment.
machinery and equipment (standards notification no.
556 from the Japanese Ministry of Labour) (hereinafter
referred to as technical criteria), in conformity with the IEC
3. Terminology
Standards, or the Recommended Practice for Explosion-
Protected Electrical Installations in General Industries, (1) Enclosure
published in 1979. These certified apparatus can be used An outer shell of an electrical apparatus, which encloses
in hazardous locations where explosive or inflammable live parts and thus is needed to configure explosion-
gases or vapours may be present. protected construction.
Certified apparatus includes a certification label and an
equipment nameplate with the specifications necessary (2) Shroud
for explosion requirements as well as precautions on A component part which is so designed that the fastening
explosion protection. Please confirm these precautionary of joint surfaces cannot be loosened unless a special tool
items and use them to meet specification requirements. is used.
For electrical wiring and maintenance servicing, please
refer to Internal Wiring Rules in the Electrical Installation (3) Enclosure internal volume
Technical Standards as well as USERS GUIDELINES This is indicated by: the total internal volume of the
for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres flameproof enclosure minus the volume of the internal
in General Industry, published in 1994. components essential to equipment functions.
To meet flameproof requirements, equipment that can be
termed flameproof must: (4) Path length of joint surface
(1) Be certified by a Japanese public authority in On a joint surface, the length of the shortest path through
accordance with the Labour Safety and Health which flame flows from the inside to outside of the
Laws of Japan and have a certification label in an flameproof enclosure. This definition cannot be applied to
appropriate location on its case, and threaded joints.
(2) Be used in compliance with the specifications marked
on its certification label, equipment nameplate and (5) Gaps between joint surfaces
precautionary information furnished. The physical distance between two mating surfaces,
or differences in diameters if the mating surfaces are
2. Electrical Apparatus of cylindrical.

Flameproof Type of Explosion- Note: The permissible sizes of gaps between joint surfaces,
the path length of a joint surface and the number of joint
Protected Construction threads are determined by such factors as the enclosures
internal volume, joint and mating surface construction,
Electrical apparatus which is of flameproof construction and the explosion classification of the specified gases and
vapours.
is subjected to a type test and certified by the Japanese
Ministry of Labour aiming at preventing explosion caused
by electrical apparatus in a factory or any location where
inflammable gases or vapours may be present. The
flameproof construction is of completely enclosed type

EX-B03E
<INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT> 86
4. Installation of Flameproof Specific cables shall be used as recommended by
the USERS GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations
Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry,
published in 1994.
(1) Installation Area In necessary, appropriate protective pipes (conduit
Flameproof apparatus may be installed, in accordance or flexible pipes), ducts or trays shall be used for
with applicable gases, in a hazardous area in Zone 1 or 2, preventing the cable run (outside the cable glands)
where the specified gases are present. Those apparatus from damage.
shall not be installed in a hazardous area in Zone 0. To prevent explosive atmosphere from being
propagated form Zone 1 or 2 hazardous location
Note: Hazardous areas are classified in zones based upon to any different location or non-hazardous location
the frequency of the appearance and the duration of an
explosive gas atmosphere as follows: through the protective pipe or duct, apply sealing
Zone 0: An area in which an explosive gas atmosphere of the protective pipes in the vicinity of individual
is present continuously or is present for long boundaries, or fill the ducts with sand appropriately.
periods.
Zone 1: An area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is When branch connections of cables, or cable
likely to occur in normal operation. connections with insulated cables inside the conduit
Zone 2: An area in which an explosive gas atmosphere pipes are made, a flameproof or increased-safety
is not likely to occur in normal operation and if it
does occur it will exist for a short period only. connection box shall be used. In this case, flameproof
or increased-safety cable glands meeting the type of
(2) Environmental Conditions connection box must be used for cable connections to
The standard environmental condition for the installation the box.
of flameproof apparatus is limited to an ambient (2) Flameproof Metal Conduit Wiring
temperature range from 20C to +40C (for products
certified under Technical Criteria). However, some field- For the flameproof metal conduit wiring or insulated
mounted instruments may be certified at an ambient wires shall be used as recommended by the USERS
temperature up to +60C as indicated on the instrument GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive
nameplates. If the flameproof apparatus are exposed Gas Atmospheres in General Industry, published in
to direct sunshine or radiant heat from plant facilities, 1994.
appropriate thermal protection measures shall be taken. For conduit pipes, heavy-gauge steel conduits
conforming to JIS C 8305 Standard shall be used.
Flameproof sealing fittings shall be used in the vicinity
5. External Wiring for Flameproof of the wiring connections, and those fittings shall be
Apparatus filled with sealing compounds to complete sealing
of the apparatus. In addition, to prevent explosive
Flameproof apparatus require cable wiring or flameproof gases, moisture, or flame caused by explosion form
metal conduits for their electrical connections. For being propagated through the conduit, always provide
cable wiring, cable glands (cable entry devices for sealing fittings to complete sealing of the conduit in
flameproof type) to wiring connections shall be attached. the following locations:
For metal conduits, attach sealing fittings as close to (a) In the boundaries between the hazardous and
wiring connections as possible and completely seal the non-hazardous locations.
apparatus. All non-live metal parts such as the enclosure (b) In the boundaries where there is a different
shall be securely grounded. For details, see the USERS classification of hazardous location.
GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas For the connections of the apparatus with a conduit
Atmospheres in General Industry, published in 1994. pipe or its associated accessories, G-type parallel
(1) Cable Wiring pipe threads (JIS B 0202) shall be used to provide
a minimum of five-thread engagement to complete
For cable wiring, cable glands (cable entry devices tightness. In addition, since these parallel threads
for flameproof type) specified or supplied with the do not have sealing property, nonhardening sealant
apparatus shall be directly attached to the wiring such as liquid gaskets shall thus be applied to those
connections to complete sealing of the apparatus. threads for ensuring waterproofness.
Screws that connect cable glands to the apparatus If metal conduits need flexibility, use flameproof
are those for G-type parallel pipe threads (JIS B 0202) flexible fittings.
with no sealing property. To protect the apparatus
from corrosive gases or moisture, apply nonhardening
sealant such as liquid gaskets to those threads for
waterproofing.

EX-B03E
<INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT> 87
6. Maintenance of Flameproof (c) Unless otherwise specified, the electrical circuitry and
internal mechanisms may be repaired by component
Apparatus replacement, as this will not directly affect the
To maintain the flameproof apparatus, do the following. requirements for flameproof apparatus (however,
(For details, see Chapter 10 MAINTENANCE bear in mind that the apparatus must always be
OF EXPLOSION-PROTECTED ELECTRICAL restored to its original condition). If you attempt to
INSTALLATION in the USERS GUIDELINES for repair the flameproof apparatus, company-specified
Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in components shall be used.
General Industry.) (d) Before starting to service the apparatus, be sure
to check all parts necessary for retaining the
(1) Maintenance servicing with the power on. requirements for flameproof apparatus. For this,
Flameproof apparatus shall not be maintenance-serviced check that all screws, bolts, nuts, and threaded
with its power turned on. However, in cases where connections have properly been tightened.
maintenance servicing is to be conducted with the power (3) Prohibition of specification changes and
turned on, with the equipment cover removed, always modifications
use a gas detector to check that there is no explosive
gas in that location. If it cannot be checked whether an Do not attempt to change specifications or make
explosive gas is present or not, maintenance servicing modifications involving addition of or changes in
shall be limited to the following two items: external wiring connections.
(a) Visual inspection
Visually inspect the flameproof apparatus, metal 7. Selection of Cable Entry
conduits, and cables for damage or corrosion, and
other mechanical and structural defects. Devices for Flameproof Type
(b) Zero and span adjustments
These adjustments should be made only to the extent
that they can be conducted from the outside without CAUTION
opening the equipment cover. In doing this, great care
must be taken not to cause mechanical sparks with The cable glands (cable entry devices for flameproof
tools. type) conforming to IEC Standards are certified
(2) Repair in combination with the flameproof apparatus.
So, Yokogawa-specified cable entry devices for
If the flameproof apparatus requires repair, turn off flameproof type shall be used to meet this demand.
the power and transport it to a safety (non-hazardous)
location. Observe the following points before attempting
to repair the apparatus. References:
(a) Make only such electrical and mechanical repairs
(1) Type Certificate Guide for Explosion-Protected
as will restore the apparatus to its original condition.
Construction Electrical Machinery and Equipment
For the flameproof apparatus, the gaps and path
(relating to Technical Standards Conforming to
lengths of joints and mating surfaces, and mechanical
International Standards), issued by the Technical
strength of enclosures are critical factors in explosion
Institution of Industrial Safety, Japan
protection. Exercise great care not to damage the
(2) USERS GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations
joints or shock the enclosure.
for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry
(b) If any damage occurs in threads, joints or mating
(1994), issued by the Japanese Ministry of Labour,
surfaces, inspection windows, connections between
the Research Institute of Industrial Safet
the transmitter and terminal box, shrouds or clamps,
or external wiring connections which are essential
in flameproofness, contact Yokogawa Electric
Corporation.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to re-process threaded connections or
refinish joints or mating surfaces.

EX-B03E
88

Revision Information
Title : AXF Series Magnetic Flowmeter Installation Manual
Manual No. : IM 01E20A01-01EN

Edition Date Page Revised Item


1st Dec. 2014 New publication
2nd Aug. 2015 Cover Cover Changed the Contents.
Added the model.
Changed the sentences for this manual.
1 1. Changed the sentences for this manual.
Changed the website address.
Changed the table in Table 1.1
Added the NOTE for this manual.
3 1.1 (4) Added the NOTE for maintenance.
4 1.1 (7) to (9) Added the WARNING and sentences.
1.3 Changed the IMPORTANT for combination remote converters.
6 2. Changed the sentences for the attached parts.
2.1 Changed the sentences for checking model and specifications.
Changed the name plate and deleted the note in Figure 2.1.1 to
Figure 2.1.4.
39 4.2.4 (4) Changed the IMPORTANT for combination remote converters.
76 9. (1) Changed the table and note for PED.
77 9. (3) Added applied EN standard and the performance specification
in EMC Conformity Standards.
78 10. Added the NOTE for this manual.
78 to 82 10.1 Added and changed the sentences, notes and figure for ATEX
certification.
87 to 90 10.4 Added and changed the sentences, notes and figure for IECEx
certification.
3rd May 2016 Cover Cover Added the sentences for this manual.
1 1. Corrected the sentences for this manual.
3 1.1 (5) Corrected the WARNING for explosion proof type.
5 2. Aded the process connection code -AP1.
13 to 14 3.3.2 (4) Added the JPI flange rating in Table 3.3.4 to Table 3.3.6.
16 to 18 3.3.3 (4) Added the JPI flange rating in Table 3.3.7 to Table 3.3.10.
21 to 23 3.3.4 (2) Added the JPI and AS flange ratings in Table 3.3.13 to Table
3.3.15.
29 4.1.1 Corrected the CAUTION for a blanking plug.
40 4.3.1 Corrected the CAUTION for a blanking plug.
75 9. Corrected the table and notes for PED.
77 10. Corrected the WARNING for explosion proof type.
10.1 Deleted the sentences for ATEX explosion proof type.
Added the NOTE for ATEX explosion proof type.
82 10.4 Deleted the sentences for IECEx explosion proof type.
Added the NOTE for IECEx explosion proof type.

IM 01E20A01-01EN
YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Headquarters
2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 JAPAN
Phone : 81-422-52-5555
Branch Sales Offices
Osaka, Nagoya, Hiroshima, Kurashiki, Fukuoka, Kitakyusyu

YOKOGAWA CORPORATION OF AMERICA


Head Office
12530 West Airport Blvd, Sugar Land, Texas 77478, USA
Phone : 1-281-340-3800 Fax : 1-281-340-3838
Georgia Office
2 Dart Road, Newnan, Georgia 30265, USA
Phone : 1-800-888-6400/ 1-770-253-7000 Fax : 1-770-254-0928

YOKOGAWA AMERICA DO SUL LTDA.


Praca Acapulco, 31 - Santo Amaro, So Paulo/SP, BRAZIL, CEP-04675-190
Phone : 55-11-5681-2400 Fax : 55-11-5681-4434

YOKOGAWA EUROPE B. V.
Euroweg 2, 3825 HD Amersfoort, THE NETHERLANDS
Phone : 31-88-4641000 Fax : 31-88-4641111

YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CIS LTD.


Grokholskiy per 13 Building 2, 4th Floor 129090, Moscow, RUSSIA
Phone : 7-495-737-7868 Fax : 7-495-737-7869

YOKOGAWA CHINA CO., LTD.


3F Tower D Cartelo Crocodile Building, No.568 West Tianshan Road,
Shanghai 200335, CHINA
Phone : 86-21-62396262 Fax : 86-21-62387866

YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CO., LTD.


(Yokogawa B/D, Yangpyeong-dong 4-Ga), 21, Seonyu-ro 45-gil, Yeongdeungpo-gu,
Seoul, 150-866, KOREA
Phone : 82-2-2628-6000 Fax : 82-2-2628-6400

YOKOGAWA ENGINEERING ASIA PTE. LTD.


5 Bedok South Road, Singapore 469270, SINGAPORE
Phone : 65-6241-9933 Fax : 65-6241-2606

YOKOGAWA INDIA LTD.


Plot No.96, Electronic City Complex, Hosur Road, Bangalore - 560 100, INDIA
Phone : 91-80-4158-6000 Fax : 91-80-2852-1442

YOKOGAWA AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.


Tower A, 112-118 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113, AUSTRALIA
Phone : 61-2-8870-1100 Fax : 61-2-8870-1111

YOKOGAWA MIDDLE EAST & AFRICA B.S.C.(C)


P.O. Box 10070, Manama, Building 577, Road 2516, Busaiteen 225, Muharraq,
Kingdom of BAHRAIN
Phone : 973-17358100 Fax : 973-17336100
Apr. '15

Printed in Japan
1.3InstructionManualforpHAnalyzer
ApplicableModel Area
FLXA21DPDABS1NNANLANNN/UM
FU20FNPT/NSS PRASEDIMENTASI
WU11M905WPV
FLXA21DPDABS1NNANLANNN/UM
FU20FNPT/NSS RESERVOIRIPA
WU11M905WPV
Users
Manual Model FLXA202 / FLXA21
2-Wire Analyzer

IM 12A01A02-01E

IM 12A01A02-01E
8th Edition
i

u Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the FLXA202/FLXA21 2-Wire Analyzer.
Please read the following respective documents before installing and using the FLXA202/
FLXA21.
When the FLXA21 with the output of FOUNDATION Fieldbus or PROFIBUS PA Communication
is used, please refer to the Users Manual, IM 12A01A02-71E or IM 12A01A02-72E, too.

The related documents are as follows.


General Specifications
Contents Document number Note
FLXA202 2-wire Analyzer GS 12A01A03-01EN
These are included In attached CD-ROM
FLXA21 2-wire Analyzer GS 12A01A02-01E
* the E or EN in the document number is the language code.

Users Manual
Contents Document number Note
FLXA202/FLXA21
IM 12A01A02-12E
Start-up Manual
Attached to the product
FLXA202/FLXA21
IM 12A01A02-20E
Safety Precautions
FLXA202/FLXA21 This manual
IM 12A01A02-01E
Users Manual This is included In attached CD-ROM
FLXA21
IM 12A01A02-71E
FOUNCATION Fieldbus Communication
These are included In attached CD-ROM
FLXA21
IM 12A01A02-72E
PROFIBUS PA Communication
* the E in the document number is the language code.

Please read the General Specifications for Checking the model and suffix code. The General
Specifications includes it.

n Notes on Handling Users Manuals


Please hand over the users manuals to your end users so that they can keep the users
manuals on hand for convenient reference.
Please read the information thoroughly before using the product.
The purpose of these users manuals is not to warrant that the product is well suited to any
particular purpose but rather to describe the functional details of the product.
No part of the users manuals may be transferred or reproduced without prior written
consent from YOKOGAWA.
YOKOGAWA reserves the right to make improvements in the users manuals and product at
any time, without notice or obligation.
If you have any questions, or you find mistakes or omissions in the users manuals, please
contact our sales representative or your local distributor.

n Drawing Conventions
Some drawings may be partially emphasized, simplified, or omitted, for the convenience of
description.
Some screen images depicted in the users manual may have different display positions or
character types (e.g., the upper / lower case). Also note that some of the images contained in this
users manual are display examples.

Media No. IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 2015 (YK) IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00
All Rights Reserved Copyright 2010, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ii

n Composition of this Users Manual


The model FLXA202/FLXA21 2-Wire Analyzer offers 4 kinds of measurements pH/ORP
(oxidation-reduction potential), contacting conductivity (SC), inductive conductivity (ISC) or
dissolved oxygen (DO) with a respective sensor module.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 delivered has one specific kind of measurement depending on your order.

Contacting Inductive Dissolved SENCOM


Contents pH/ORP
conductivity (SC) conductivity (ISC) oxygen (DO) pH/ORP
Introduction and
Section 1
general description
Wiring and installation Section 2
Operation Section 3 Section 6 Section 9 Section 12 Section 15
Commissioning Section 4 Section 7 Section 10 Section 13 Section 16
Calibration Section 5 Section 8 Section 11 Section 14 Section 17
Maintenance Section 18
Troubleshooting Section 19

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


iii

u Safety Precautions
n Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
In order to protect the system controlled by the product and the product itself and ensure
safe operation, observe the safety precautions described in this users manual. We assume
no liability for safety if users fail to observe these instructions when operating the product.
If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this users manual, the protection
provided by this instrument may be impaired.
If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the product or for
the product itself, prepare it separately.
Be sure to use the spare parts approved by Yokogawa Electric Corporation (hereafter
simply referred to as YOKOGAWA) when replacing parts or consumables.
Modification of the product is strictly prohibited.
The following safety symbols are used on the product as well as in this manual.

WARNING
This symbol indicates that an operator must follow the instructions laid out in this manual in order
to avoid the risks, for the human body, of injury, electric shock, or fatalities. The manual describes
what special care the operator must take to avoid such risks.

CAUTION
This symbol indicates that the operator must refer to the instructions in this manual in order to
prevent the instrument (hardware) or software from being damaged, or a system failure from
occurring.

CAUTION
This symbol gives information essential for understanding the operations and functions.

NOTE
This symbol indicates information that complements the present topic.

This symbol indicates Protective Ground Terminal.

This symbol indicates Function Ground Terminal. Do not use this terminal as the protective
ground terminal.

n Warning and Disclaimer


The product is provided on an as is basis. YOKOGAWA shall have neither liability nor
responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any direct or indirect loss or damage arising
from using the product or any defect of the product that YOKOGAWA can not predict in advance.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


iv

n Mark position of intrinsic safety


The mark position of intrinsic safety is shown as follows

FLXA202-D-*-

*1

*2

Type:-CB
*1: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of IECEx.
*2: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of ATEX.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


v
FLXA21-D-*-
-P (Plastic) -S (Stainless steel)

*1
*2 *1
*3 *6 *2
*4 *3 *6
*7 *4
*5 *7
*5

-U (Stainless steel + urethane coating)


-E (Stainless steel + epoxy coating)

*6
*1 *7
*2
*3
*4
*5

*1: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of IECEx.


*2: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of ATEX.
*3: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of NEPSI.
*4: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of FM.
*5: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of CSA.
*6: This marking conforms to nonincendive of FM.
*7: This marking conforms to nonincendive of CSA.

Top Side Bottom Side

*4
*1
*6
*2
*3 *5 *7

*1: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of IECEx.


*2: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of ATEX.
*3: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of NEPSI.
*4: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of FM.
*5: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of CSA.
*6: This marking conforms to nonincendive of FM.
*7: This marking conforms to nonincendive of CSA.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


vi

n FLXA202/FLXA21
The FLXA202/FLXA21 should only be used with equipment that meets the relevant IEC,
American, Canadian, and Japanese standards. Yokogawa accepts no responsibility for the
misuse of this unit.
Dont install general purpose type instruments in the hazardous area.
The Instrument is packed carefully with shock absorbing materials, nevertheless, the
instrument may be damaged or broken if subjected to strong shock, such as if the
instrument is dropped. Handle with care.

CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge
The FLXA202/FLXA21 contains devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
When servicing this equipment, please observe proper procedures to prevent such damage.
Replacement components should be shipped in conductive packaging. Repair work should
be done at grounded workstations using grounded soldering irons and wrist straps to avoid
electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION
Do not use an abrasive or organic solvent in cleaning the instrument.
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Division 2.
Do not remove or replace while circuit is live unless area is known to be non hazardous.
Explosion Hazard Do not disconnect equipment unless area is known to be non
hazardous.
Do not reset circuit breaker unless power has been removed from the equipment or the area
is known to be non hazardous.

CAUTION
This instrument is a EN61326-1 Class A product, and it is designed for use in the industrial
environment. Please use this instrument in the industrial environment only.
The HART communication may be influenced by strong electromagnetic field.
In this case another trial of the HART communication and/or operation with FLXA202/
FLXA21 touch screen can be carried out.

CAUTION
When you open the front panel, make sure the screws are completely out of the screw holes, and
then open the front panel slowly in order not to damage the threaded parts on the housing. If the
threaded parts are damaged and the screws cannot be tightened, the waterproof performance
will deteriorate.

CAUTION
Be careful to touch the concentrated sulfuric acid.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


vii
l How to dispose the batteries:
This is an explanation about the new EU Battery Directive(DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC).This
directive is only valid in the EU.
Batteries are included in this product.Batteries incorporated into this product cannot be removed
by yourself.Dispose them together with this product.
When you dispose this product in the EU,contact your local Yokogawa Europe B.V.office.Do not
dispose them as domestic household waste.
Battery type: Manganese dioxide lithium battery

Notice: The symbol means they shall be sorted out and collected as ordained in
ANNEX II in DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC.

l Product Disposal:
The instrument should be disposed of in accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.

l For Intrinsic safety type

WARNING
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the generation
of electrostatic charge, e.g., rubbing with a dry cloth. Because the enclosure of the FLXA21
2-Wire Analyzer, if it is mounted in an area where the use of category 1 G Zone 0 apparatus is
required, it must be installed such, that, even in the event of rare incidents, ignition sources due
to friction sparks are excluded.

Figure 1 Warning label

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


viii

n Warranty and service


Yokogawa products and parts are guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material
under normal use and service for a period of (typically) 12 months from the date of shipment from
the manufacturer.
Individual sales organisations can deviate from the typical warranty period, and the conditions of
sale relating to the original purchase order should be consulted. Damage caused by wear and
tear, inadequate maintenance, corrosion, or by the effects of chemical processes are excluded
from this warranty coverage.
In the event of warranty claim, the defective goods should be sent (freight paid) to the service
department of the relevant sales organisation for repair or replacement (at Yokogawa discretion).
The following information must be included in the letter accompanying the returned goods:
Part number, model code and serial number
Original purchase order and date
Length of time in service and a description of the process
Description of the fault, and the circumstances of failure
Process/environmental conditions that may be related to the failure of the device.
A statement whether warranty or nonwarranty service is requested
Complete shipping and billing instructions for return of material, plus the name and phone
number of a contact person who can be reached for further information.
Returned goods that have been in contact with process fluids must be decontaminated/
disinfected before shipment. Goods should carry a certificate to this effect, for the health and
safety of our employees.
Material safety data sheets should also be included for all components of the processes to which
the equipment has been exposed.

n Authorised Representative in EEA


The Authorised Representative for this product in EEA is Yokogawa Europe B.V. (Euroweg 2,
3825 HD Amersfoort, The Netherlands).

n Copyright and Trademark Notices


The copyrights of online manual contained in the CD-ROM are reserved.
The online manual is protected by the PDF security from modification, however, it can be output
via a printer. Printing out the online manual is only allowed for the purpose of using the product.
When using the printed information of the online manual, check if the version is the most recent
one by referring to the CD-ROMs version.
No part of the online manual may be transferred, sold, distributed (including delivery via a
commercial PC network or the like), or registered or recorded on video tapes.

FLEXA, FLXA and SENCOM are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
Adobe, Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other company and product names mentioned in this users manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
We do not use TM or mark to indicate those trademarks or registered trademarks in this users
manual.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


ix
l FLXA202/FLXA21s fonts
(c) Copyright 2000-2001 /efont/ The Electronic Font Open Laboratory. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the team nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this font without specific prior written permission.

THIS FONT IS PROVIDED BY THE TEAM AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY


EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE TEAM OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS FONT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


Toc-1

Model FLXA202 / FLXA21


2-Wire Analyzer

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition

CONTENTS
u Introduction.....................................................................................................i
u Safety Precautions.......................................................................................iii
1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION................................... 1-1
1.1 Instrument check............................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Screen operation................................................................................................ 1-5
1.3 Passwords........................................................................................................ 1-10
1.4 Regulatory Compliance................................................................................... 1-10
2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Installation site................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2 Removing the wiring cover............................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Installing the cable glands................................................................................ 2-5
2.4 Wiring the power supply................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.1 Grounding........................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2 Connection of the power supply......................................................... 2-9
2.4.3 Wiring cover...................................................................................... 2-10
2.5 Sensor wiring................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.1 Wiring the pH/ORP sensor............................................................... 2-15
2.5.2 Wiring the conductivity (SC) sensor.................................................. 2-18
2.5.3 Wiring the inductive conductivity (ISC) sensor................................. 2-18
2.5.4 Wiring the dissolved oxygen (DO) sensor........................................ 2-19
2.5.5 Wiring the SENCOM pH/ORP sensor.............................................. 2-19
2.6 Mounting methods........................................................................................... 2-20
2.7 Operation.......................................................................................................... 2-21
3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP.......................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Change language............................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Quick setup......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Home display, Main display and Monitor display........................................... 3-4
3.4 Zooming in on details........................................................................................ 3-5
3.5 Trend graphics................................................................................................. 3-10
3.6 Instrument status screen................................................................................ 3-11
3.7 Calibration and Commissioning.................................................................... 3-12
4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Sensor setup...................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Measurement setup........................................................................................... 4-3

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


Toc-2
4.2.1 Measurement...................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Temperature settings.......................................................................... 4-4
4.2.3 Temperature compensation................................................................ 4-4
4.2.4 Calibration settings............................................................................. 4-5
4.2.5 Impedance settings............................................................................. 4-8
4.2.6 Concentration...................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.7 Sensor diagnostic settings.................................................................. 4-9
4.3 Output setup....................................................................................................... 4-9
4.4 Error configuration.......................................................................................... 4-11
4.5 Logbook configuration.................................................................................... 4-13
4.6 Advanced setup............................................................................................... 4-13
4.6.1 Settings............................................................................................. 4-13
4.6.2 Tag.................................................................................................... 4-14
4.6.3 Passwords........................................................................................ 4-14
4.6.4 Date/Time.......................................................................................... 4-14
4.6.5 Communication................................................................................. 4-14
4.6.6 Factory setup.................................................................................... 4-17
4.7 Display setup.................................................................................................... 4-17
4.7.1 Main display (Dual display, Individual display)................................. 4-18
4.7.2 Trend................................................................................................. 4-19
4.7.3 Auto Return....................................................................................... 4-19
4.7.4 Adjust contrast.................................................................................. 4-19
4.7.5 MONITOR display............................................................................. 4-19
4.8 Calculated data setup...................................................................................... 4-20
5. CALIBRATION OF pH/ORP....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 pH calibration..................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Manual calibration............................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Automatic calibration.......................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Sample calibration.............................................................................. 5-5
5.2 Temperature calibration.................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 ORP calibration (rH calibration)....................................................................... 5-5
5.4 HOLD................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 Temporary output.............................................................................................. 5-6
6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity).......................................................... 6-1
6.1 Change language............................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Quick setup......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Home display, Main display and Monitor display........................................... 6-4
6.4 Zooming in on details........................................................................................ 6-6
6.5 Trend graphics................................................................................................. 6-10
6.6 Instrument status screen................................................................................ 6-11
6.7 Calibration and Commissioning.................................................................... 6-12
7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)................................................ 7-1

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


Toc-3
7.1 Measurement setup........................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.1 Measurement...................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Configure sensor................................................................................ 7-3
7.1.3 Temperature settings.......................................................................... 7-3
7.1.4 Temperature compensation................................................................ 7-4
7.1.5 Calibration settings............................................................................. 7-5
7.1.6 Concentration...................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.7 Sensor diagnostic settings.................................................................. 7-6
7.2 Output setup....................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3 Error configuration............................................................................................ 7-9
7.4 Logbook configuration.................................................................................... 7-10
7.5 Advanced setup............................................................................................... 7-11
7.5.1 Settings............................................................................................. 7-11
7.5.2 Tag.................................................................................................... 7-11
7.5.3 Passwords........................................................................................ 7-12
7.5.4 Date/Time.......................................................................................... 7-12
7.5.5 Communication................................................................................. 7-12
7.5.6 Factory setup.................................................................................... 7-13
7.6 Display setup.................................................................................................... 7-13
7.6.1 Main display (Dual display, Individual display)................................. 7-13
7.6.2 Trend................................................................................................. 7-14
7.6.3 Auto Return....................................................................................... 7-15
7.6.4 Adjust contrast.................................................................................. 7-15
7.6.5 MONITOR display............................................................................. 7-15
7.7 Calculated data setup...................................................................................... 7-15
8. CALIBRATION OF SC (Conductivity)...................................................... 8-1
8.1 Cell constant (manual)...................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Cell constant (automatic).................................................................................. 8-2
8.3 Air calibration..................................................................................................... 8-2
8.4 Sample................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.5 Temperature coefficient.................................................................................... 8-3
8.6 Temperature calibration.................................................................................... 8-3
8.7 HOLD................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.8 Temporary output.............................................................................................. 8-4
9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)....................................... 9-1
9.1 Change language............................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Quick setup......................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3 Main display and Monitor display.................................................................... 9-4
9.4 Zooming in on details........................................................................................ 9-5
9.5 Trend graphics................................................................................................... 9-9
9.6 Instrument status screen................................................................................ 9-11
9.7 Calibration and Commissioning.................................................................... 9-11

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


Toc-4
10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)............................ 10-1
10.1 Measurement setup......................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.1 Measurement.................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.2 Configure sensor.............................................................................. 10-3
10.1.3 Temperature settings........................................................................ 10-3
10.1.4 Temperature compensation.............................................................. 10-3
10.1.5 Calibration settings........................................................................... 10-4
10.1.6 Concentration.................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.7 Sensor diagnostic settings................................................................ 10-6
10.2 Output setup..................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3 Error configuration.......................................................................................... 10-7
10.4 Logbook configuration.................................................................................... 10-8
10.5 Advanced setup............................................................................................... 10-9
10.5.1 Settings............................................................................................. 10-9
10.5.2 Tag.................................................................................................... 10-9
10.5.3 Passwords......................................................................................10-10
10.5.4 Date/Time........................................................................................10-10
10.5.5 Communication...............................................................................10-10
10.5.6 Factory setup.................................................................................. 10-11
10.6 Display setup.................................................................................................. 10-11
10.6.1 Main display.................................................................................... 10-11
10.6.2 Trend............................................................................................... 10-11
10.6.3 Auto Return.....................................................................................10-12
10.6.4 Adjust contrast................................................................................10-12
10.6.5 MONITOR display...........................................................................10-12
11. CALIBRATION OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity).................................. 11-1
11.1 Cell constant (manual).................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Cell constant (automatic)................................................................................ 11-3
11.3 Air calibration................................................................................................... 11-3
11.4 Sample.............................................................................................................. 11-4
11.5 Temperature coefficient.................................................................................. 11-4
11.6 Temperature calibration.................................................................................. 11-5
11.7 HOLD................................................................................................................. 11-5
12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)...................................................... 12-1
12.1 Change language............................................................................................. 12-2
12.2 Quick setup....................................................................................................... 12-2
12.3 Home display, Main display and Monitor display......................................... 12-4
12.4 Zooming in on details...................................................................................... 12-5
12.5 Trend graphics................................................................................................. 12-9
12.6 Instrument status screen..............................................................................12-10
12.7 Calibration and Commissioning..................................................................12-10
13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen).................................... 13-1
IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00
Toc-5
13.1 Sensor setup.................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2 Measurement setup......................................................................................... 13-3
13.2.1 Sensor setup..................................................................................... 13-3
13.2.2 Temperature settings........................................................................ 13-3
13.2.3 Temperature compensation.............................................................. 13-3
13.2.4 Salinity compensation....................................................................... 13-3
13.2.5 Pressure comp. (Measure)............................................................... 13-3
13.2.6 Calibration settings........................................................................... 13-4
13.2.7 Sensor diag. settings........................................................................ 13-5
13.3 Output setup..................................................................................................... 13-5
13.4 Error configuration.......................................................................................... 13-7
13.5 Logbook configuration.................................................................................... 13-8
13.6 Advanced setup............................................................................................... 13-9
13.6.1 Settings............................................................................................. 13-9
13.6.2 Tag.................................................................................................... 13-9
13.6.3 Passwords......................................................................................13-10
13.6.4 Date/Time........................................................................................13-10
13.6.5 Communication...............................................................................13-10
13.6.6 Factory setup..................................................................................13-12
13.7 Display setup..................................................................................................13-12
13.7.1 Main display (Dual display, Individual display)...............................13-12
13.7.2 Trend...............................................................................................13-13
13.7.3 Auto Return.....................................................................................13-14
13.7.4 Adjust contrast................................................................................13-14
13.7.5 MONITOR display...........................................................................13-14
13.8 Calculated data setup....................................................................................13-14
14. CALIBRATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen).........................................................14-1
14.1 Air calibration................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2 Water calibration.............................................................................................. 14-2
14.3 Manual slope calibration................................................................................. 14-3
14.4 Temperature calibration.................................................................................. 14-3
14.5 HOLD................................................................................................................. 14-4
14.6 Temporary output............................................................................................ 14-4
15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP....................................................... 15-1
15.1 Change language............................................................................................. 15-2
15.2 Quick setup....................................................................................................... 15-2
15.3 Main display and Monitor display.................................................................. 15-4
15.4 Zooming in on details...................................................................................... 15-5
15.5 Trend graphics...............................................................................................15-12
15.6 Instrument status screen..............................................................................15-13
15.7 Calibration and Commissioning..................................................................15-13
16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP...................................................... 16-1

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


Toc-6
16.1 Sensor setup.................................................................................................... 16-3
16.2 Measurement setup......................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.1 Measurement.................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.2 Temperature settings........................................................................ 16-4
16.2.3 Temperature compensation.............................................................. 16-4
16.2.4 Calibration settings........................................................................... 16-6
16.2.5 Impedance settings........................................................................... 16-9
16.2.6 Concentration.................................................................................... 16-9
16.2.7 Sensor diagnostic settings................................................................ 16-9
16.3 Output setup...................................................................................................16-10
16.4 Error configuration........................................................................................ 16-11
16.5 Logbook configuration..................................................................................16-12
16.6 Advanced setup.............................................................................................16-13
16.6.1 Settings...........................................................................................16-13
16.6.2 Tag..................................................................................................16-14
16.6.3 Passwords......................................................................................16-14
16.6.4 Date/Time........................................................................................16-14
16.6.5 Communication...............................................................................16-14
16.6.6 Factory setup..................................................................................16-17
16.7 Display setup..................................................................................................16-17
16.7.1 Main display....................................................................................16-17
16.7.2 Trend...............................................................................................16-18
16.7.3 Auto Return.....................................................................................16-18
16.7.4 Adjust contrast................................................................................16-18
16.7.5 MONITOR display...........................................................................16-18
17. CALIBRATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP.................................................... 17-1
17.1 pH calibration................................................................................................... 17-2
17.1.1 Manual calibration............................................................................. 17-2
17.1.2 Automatic calibration........................................................................ 17-3
17.1.3 Sample calibration............................................................................ 17-5
17.2 Temperature calibration.................................................................................. 17-5
17.3 ORP calibration (rH calibration)..................................................................... 17-5
17.4 HOLD................................................................................................................. 17-6
18. MAINTENANCE........................................................................................ 18-1
19. TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................. 19-1
Appendix 1 For pH/ORP.......................................................................... App.1-1
Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)......................................................... App.2-1
Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)...............................................App.3-1
Appendix 4 For DO (Dissolved Oxygen)............................................... App.4-1
Customer Maintenance Parts List.......................................CMPL 12A01A02-01E
Customer Maintenance Parts List.................................... CMPL 12A01A03-01EN
Revision Record........................................................................................................i

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-1

1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL


DESCRIPTION 1

This manual describes how to use the FLXA202/FLXA21 with Yokogawas or other companies
sensors. Please read carefully this manual and the instruction manual of the relevant sensor
before using this instrument.
For the specifications of the FLXA202/FLXA21, please refer to the General Specifications (GS
12A01A02-01E) in the attached CD-ROM.

The FLXA202/FLXA21 2-Wire Analyzer can perform 4 kinds of measurements pH/ORP


(oxidation-reduction potential), contacting conductivity (SC), inductive conductivity (ISC) or
dissolved oxygen (DO) with the respective sensor module.
For the pH/ORP measurement, the FLXA202/FLXA21 can be connected to conventional analog
pH/ORP sensors, and to Yokogawas digital sensor, FU20F pH/ORP SENCOM Sensor with the
respective sensor module.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 can perform single or dual sensor measurement. For dual sensor
measurement, the combination of two same type sensor inputs pH/ORP and pH/ORP (analog
sensor only), SC and SC, and DO and DO are available with two sensor modules.

When using with the pH/ORP SENCOM sensor, please refer to the section 15, 16 and 17 of this
manual for the operation, commissioning and calibration respectively.
The first module (The second module if any
Jumper holder is installed here.)
(provided only for
pH measurement)
LCD display

PH

SC
Cable entry holes Terminal block
for power supply
ISC
1 2

Front panel Slide switch


(for HART only)
ONON

Reboot switch
Front view (Do not use it) Front view with the front panel opened
DO
Figure 1.1 FLXA202 Parts names and descriptions

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-2

LCD display Wiring cover 1 (for the first module)

Wiring cover 2
(for the second module)

(Wiring cover 3 for power


supply and grounding is
under the wiring cover 2.)

Jumper holder
(provided only for
pH measurement)
Front panel
Front view Front view with the front panel opened

Reboot switch
(Do not use it)
1 2

ONON

The first module


Slide switch (The second module if any
(for HART only) is installed here.)

Terminal block
for power supply

Nameplate

Cable entry holes


Front view with all wiring covers removed
Figure 1.2 FLXA21 Parts names and descriptions

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-3

1.1 Instrument check


Upon delivery, unpack the instrument carefully and inspect it to ensure that it was not damaged 1
during shipment. If damage is found, retain the original packing materials (including the outer
box) and then immediately notify the carrier and the relevant Yokogawa sales office.

n Checking the model and suffix code

l FLXA202
Make sure the model and suffix code on the nameplate affixed to the left side of the housing.

NOTE
Be sure to apply correct power to the unit , as detailed on the nameplate.

-D-B-D-AB-P1-P1
-A-N-LA-N-N/U/H6

Figure 1.3 Inside of the FLXA202 and example of nameplate PH

l FLXA21 SC
Loosen four front panel screws of the FLXA21, open the panel to the left, and make sure the
model and suffix code on the nameplate affixed to the back side of the front panel agrees with ISC
your order.

DO
CAUTION
When you open the front panel, make sure the screws are completely out of the screw holes, and
then open the front panel slowly in order not to damage the threaded parts on the housing. If the SENCOM
threaded parts are damaged and the screws cannot be tightened, the waterproof performance
will deteriorate.

NOTE
Be careful not to lose the four front panel screws.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-4

-D-P-S-AA-P1-NN-AN-L1N-NN
/UM/SCT/H6

S1.01
J312FA012 2012.01

Figure 1.4 Inside of the FLXA21 and example of nameplate

l Checking the accessories


Make sure the accessories in Table 1.1 are included.
Table 1.1 Accessories
Product Name Quantity Remark
Cable glands FLXA202 3 sets One rubber plug attachement.
FLXA21 Plastic 3 or 4 sets 4 sets when 2 sensors are used.
housing One grommet for grounding attachement.
Stainless 3 sets One rubber plug attachement.
steel housing
pH analyzer Jumper 2 pcs/module
Grommet set 1 set/module
SENCOM Grommet 1
pH analyzer
Option Bracket 1 set Option code /UM*, /U, /PM
Sun shade hood 1 set Option code /H6, /H7, /H8
Tag plate 1 Option code /SCT
Adapter for conduit 3 or 4 sets Option code /CB4, /CD4, /CF4
work 4sets when Plastic housing are used.
Instruction Manual (CD-ROM) 1 copy
Startup Manual 1 copy
Safety Precautions 1 copy
*: The universal mounting kit (/UM) contains the brackets for both /U and /PM options.

NOTE
Rule of The Serial Number is as follows.

The Serial Number is defined by nine (9) alphanumeric characters as follows.


X1X2Y3M4N5N6N7N8N9 e.g. 92NA07704
X1X2: Production Site
Y3M4: Year/Month code
N5N6N7N8N9: Tracking number

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-5
Table 1.2 Production year code
Year Year code Year Year code Year Year code Year Year code
2010 K 2015 R 2020 W 2025 2 1
2011 L 2016 S 2021 X 2026 3
2012 M 2017 T 2022 Y 2027 4
2013 N 2018 U 2023 Z 2028 5
2014 P 2019 V 2024 1 2029 6

Table 1.3 Production month code


Month Month code Month Month code Month Month code
January 1 May 5 September 9
February 2 June 6 October A
March 3 July 7 November B
April 4 August 8 December C

1.2 Screen operation


CAUTION
Press the touch screen only with your finger. Do not use a tool with a sharp tip (ex. pencil,
ballpoint pen), a thin stick, a tool with a hard tip etc. to avoid scratches on the touch screen.
Press the center of the icon or character to avoid wrong operation.

The main screen operations are as follows.


When you press any of the following icons on the screen, the screen changes to the respective
display or executes the respective function.

Returns to the main display (or home display).

Returns to the previous display.


PH
Moves the cursor for selecting the menu item. Pressing the icon moves the cursor
down to the next item. When the cursor is on the item at the very bottom, the cursor
jumps back to the item at the top.
SC

Confirms the input; for example, the selected menu item or setting value. ISC

NOTE DO
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display or the Home display when the MONITOR display is disabled).
SENCOM

The figures in this section show the pH measurement for example.


Each display is different in details due to settings. Each display is only an example for some
settings.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-6

n Monitor display
C

10.38 pH
A

Figure 1.5 Example of monitor display

Monitor display
The Monitor display appears upon startup when the MONITOR display is enabled.
When the measurement value (primary value) on the main or home display is pressed, the
monitor display appears.
A: Measurement value
B: Unit
C: Sensor No.

n Main display
F E G
Tag:PH

10.38
Go to Home (Figure 1.8)

A Go to Zoom (Figure 1.10)

D
TEXT_PH1 pH Go to Information (Figure 1.12)
B 25.0 C WASH
TEXT_TEMP1
C 19 mV HOLD
TEXT_ORP1 Go to Execute & Setup (Figure 1.13)
4mA PH1 20mA
J

K H L M
Figure 1.6 Example of main display

Main display
The Main display appears upon startup when one sensor is connected and the MONITOR
display is disabled.
A: Measurement value: Primary value (large characters/user selectable)
B, C: Measurement value: Second and tertiary values (small characters)
D: Unit for the primary value
E: Tag No. (user programmable)
F: Sensor No. *
G: Sensor wellness indicator (More indicate the better condition.)
H: Hold/Wash indicators (appear only during the Hold/Wash operations)
J: Analog output display and parameter * (ex.: PH1PH=Parameter, 1=sensor number)
K: Additional text (set in alphanumeric characters/user programmable)
L: Function buttons (Home, Zoom, Status, Execute & Setup)
M: Fault/Warning indicators (indicated in blinking only during Fault/Warning status)

* When the parameter of which measurement value is indicated is selected as a process


parameter, that is, mA output set on the Output setup (refer to the section 5.3, 8.2, 11.2, and
14.3), its Sensor No. is indicated as a white number in the black box, for example , and its
mA output is indicated as a bar at the bottom. At the bar, a parameter symbol is indicated.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-7
NOTE
Measurement values on the display can be set independent of the process parameter.
1

C Calculated data R(1) Redundant sys.

0.03
Differential pH Sensor
1
10.38 pH Sensor
1

Sensor Sensor
4mA Diff-pH 20mA 2 4mA PH1 20mA 2

Figure 1.7 Example of calculated date and redundant system

n Home display (when two sensors are connected)


F Tag:PH pH D

10.38
B 25.0 C E
C 19 mV A
G H
Tag:PH pH

6.35
24.9 C K
24 mV

4mA PH1 20mA


J
Figure 1.8 Example of home display

Home display
The Home display appears upon startup when two sensors are connected and the MONITOR
display is disabled.
(Home display is not available when only one sensor is connected)
A: Measurement value: Primary value (large characters/user selectable)
B, C: Measurement value: Secondary and tertiary values (small characters)
D: Unit for the primary value
E: Tag No. (user programmable) PH
F: Sensor No.
G: Sensor wellness indicator (More indicate the better condition.) SC
H: Hold/Wash indicators (appear only during the Hold/Wash operations)
J: Analog output display and parameter (ex.: PH1PH=Parameter, 1=sensor number)
K: Fault/Warning indicators (indicated in blinking only during Fault/Warning status)
ISC
C Calculated data pH R(1) Redundant system pH
DO
0.03 10.38 SENCOM
Tag:PH pH Tag:PH pH

6.35 10.38
24.9 C 25.0 C
24 mV 19 mV

4mA Diff-pH 20mA 4mA PH1 20mA

Figure 1.9 Example of home display of calculated data and redundant system

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-8

n Zoom display
mA HOLD
20

FAIL
12
WASH

4
15.00

Next Next

Figure 1.10 Example zoom display

The zoom display appears when the Zoom button on the main display is pressed.
The Zoom display shows an easy-to-read graphical display of the output status. Pressing Next
displays the contact state if communication is set to PH201G distributor. Pressing Next again
displays the status information of the instrument.

n Trend display
C D F

TagPH pH1
Measurement value (pH)

12.00 9.10pH
Maximum value on this display
Current process value
8.40

5.60
Minimum value on this display
2.50

B 12:00 12:20 12:40


E
Time Maximum
A G Average
Minimum

Figure 1.11 Example of trend display

Trend display
The Trend display appears when the Trend button on the Zoom display is pressed.
A: X axis; Time axis (user programmable from 15 minutes to 14 days)
B: Y axis; Measurement value axis (user programmable)
C: Tag No.
D: Current measurement value with unit
E: Trend (maximum, minimum and average values during the display update time)
F: Icon (current measurement value, and maximum and minimum values until the display
update)
G: Fault/Warning indicators (indicated in blinking only during Fault/Warning status)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-9

n Information button
1
Diagnosis information on converters and sensors appears.

No malfunction detected.

Warning
When a warning icon appears, maintenance is required. Pressing this icon displays an
error message, and pressing the message displays the troubleshooting guidelines.

Fault
This icon indicates a malfunction. Pressing this icon displays an error message, and
pressing the message displays the troubleshooting guidelines.

For some errors concerned with setting, a message on the remedy can jump to the relevant
setting directly.

Fault: Problem with mA and Process


mA configuration error parameter.
Remedy
Select a correct Process
parameter for mA in:
Commissioning >> Output
setup

Figure 1.12 Example of jumping from remedy to setting

If neither a fault is detected nor warning is indicated, Working properly is displayed.


If a fault is detected or warning is indicated, up to 3 messages appear.

n Execute & Setup


PH
Allows you to calibrate and configure the instrument. These operations can be protected with a
password.
Execute & Setup
SC
Execute:
Calibration
HOLD ISC
Temporary output

Setup:
Commissioning DO
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 1.13 Example of Execute & Setup display SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-10

1.3 Passwords
Passwords can protect the FLXA202/FLXA21 from other persons access except a right
operators.

Execute &Setup Commissioning Advanced setup Passwords


Execute: Sensor setup Settings Execute:
Calibration/Wash Measurement setup Tag
HOLD Output setup Passwords Commissioning:
Temporary output Error configuration Date/Time
Logbook configuration Communication Entering an empty password
Setup: Advanced setup Factory setup results in disabling the
Comissioning Display setup password check.
Change language Calculated data setup
Start Quick Setup

Figure 1.14 Example of passwords setting

Execute operation and Commissioning operation can be separately protected by each password.
When the Execute password is set, execution of Calibration(/Wash), HOLD or Temporary output
needs to enter the password to start each execution. When the Commissioning password is set,
Commissioning and Start Quick Setup needs to enter the password to start the setting-up.

Refer to the section 4.6.3, 7.5.3, 10.5.3, 13.6.3 or 16.6.3 for details of setting passwords.

1.4 Regulatory Compliance


l FLXA202/FLXA21 common Compliance
Safety: UL 61010-1
UL 61010-2-030
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.61010-1
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.61010-2-030
EMC: EN61326-1 Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial locations)
Influence of immunity environment (Criteria A): Output shift is specified within 25% of F.S.
EN61326-2-3
AS/NZS CISPR11
Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard Class A
A ( )
(A)
,
.
Installation altitude: 2000 m or less
Category based on IEC 61010: I (Note 1)
Pollution degree based on IEC 61010: 2 (Note 2)
Note 1: Installation category, called over-voltage category, specifies impulse withstand voltage.
Equipment with Category I (ex. two-wire transmitter) is used for connection to circuits in which measures are taken
to limit transient over-voltages to an appropriately low level.
Note 2: Pollution degree indicates the degree of existence of solid, liquid, gas or other inclusions which may reduce
dielectric strength. Degree 2 is the normal indoor environment.

l FLXA202
Intrinsic safety (suffix code Type : -CB):
ATEX Intrinsic safety approval
Applicable standard
Explosive Atmospheres
EN 60079-0: 2012/A11: 2013 Equipment - General requirements
EN 60079-11: 2012 Equipment protection by Intrinsic safety i
EN 60079-26: 2007 Equipment with equipment protection level (EPL) Ga
EN 60529: 1992 Degrees of protectionprovided by enclosures (IP Code)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-11
Type of protection
II 1G Ex ia IIC Ga
Group: II 1
Category: 1G
T4: for ambient temperature:20 to 55C
Atmosphere pressure: 80 kPa (0.8 bar) to 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
Degree of Protection of the Enclosure: IP66
IECEx Intrinsic safety approval
Applicable standard
IEC 60079-0:2011 Part 0: Equipment - General requirements
IEC 60079-11: 2011 Part 11: Equipment protection by intrinsic safety i
IEC 60079-26: 2006 Part 26: Equipment with equipment protection level (EPL) Ga
IEC 60529: 2001 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Type of protection
Ex ia IIC Ga
T4: for ambient temperature:20 to 55C
Atmosphere pressure: 80 kPa (0.8 bar) to 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
Degree of Protection of the Enclosure: IP66

ATEX and IECEx


Control Drawing (for 420mA Type)
Hazardous Area Non-hazardous Area

FLXA21/FLXA202 Analyzer
Housing Assembly
Supply + +
Sensor 1 Measuring module 1 Associated Apparatus
Supply - -
Sensor 2 Measuring module 2

Supply +, Supply
Ui: 30 V
Ii: 100 mA
Pi: 0.75 W
Ci: 13 nF
Li: 0 mH

Measuring Module 1, 2
Type of Measuring Module
PH
pH, SC, DO ISC SENCOM
Uo 11.76 V 11.76 V 5.36 V
Io 116.5 mA 60.6 mA 106.16 mA SC
Po 0.3424 W 0.178 W 0.1423 W
Co 100 nF 100 nF 31 F
Lo 1.7 mH 8 mH 0.45 mH ISC
Specific Conditions of Use
- When the enclosure of FLXA21/202 Analyzer is made of aluminum alloy, and when it is DO
used in an explosive atmosphere requiring equipment of Category 1 G or EPL Ga, the
Analyzer must be installed in such a way that, even in the event of rare incidents, an ignition
source due to impact friction sparks is excluded. SENCOM
- Precautions shall be taken to minimize the risk from electrostatic discharge of non-metallic
parts of the enclosure or painted parts of the metallic enclosure.
Notes:
1. The associated apparatus must be a linear source.
2. Measuring Module 2 is not necessarily installed. As for ISC module and SENCOM module,
only one module is permitted to be installed at a time.
3. Sensor 1 and Sensor 2 may be simple apparatus or intrinsically safe apparatus.
4. WARNING POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD SEE USERS
MANUAL

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-12
l FLXA21
Intrinsic safety and nonincendive (suffix code Type : -EA, -ES):
ATEX Intrinsic safety approval
Applicable standard
Explosive Atmospheres
EN 60079-0: 2012/A11: 2013 Equipment - General requirements
EN 60079-11: 2012 Equipment protection by Intrinsic safety i
EN 60079-26: 2007 Equipment with equipment protection level (EPL) Ga
EN 60529: 1992 Degrees of protectionprovided by enclosures (IP Code)
Type of protection
II 1G Ex ia IIC Ga
Group: II
Category: 1G
T4: for ambient temperature:20 to 55C
T6: for ambient temperature:20 to 40C (excluding SENCOM module)
Atmosphere pressure: 80 kPa (0.8 bar) to 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
Degree of Protection of the Enclosure: IP66
IECEx Intrinsic safety approval
Applicable standard
IEC 60079-0:2011 Part 0: Equipment - General requirements
IEC 60079-11: 2011 Part 11: Equipment protection by intrinsic safety i
IEC 60079-26: 2006 Part 26: Equipment with equipment protection level (EPL) Ga
IEC 60529: 2001 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Type of protection
Ex ia IIC Ga
T4: for ambient temperature:20 to 55C
T6: for ambient temperature:20 to 40C (excluding SENCOM module)
Atmosphere pressure: 80 kPa (0.8 bar) to 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
Degree of Protection of the Enclosure: IP66
FM Intrinsic safety and nonincendive approval
Applicable standard
FM-3600: 2011 Approval Standard for Electric Equipment for use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations General Requirement
FM-3610: 2010 Approval Standard for Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated
Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Hazardous
(Classified) Locations
FM-3611: 2004 Nonincendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2
and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2, Hazardous (Classified) Locations
FM-3810: 2005 Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control and Laboratory Use
NEMA 250:1991 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
ANSI/IEC 60529:2004 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
ANSI/ISA 60079-0 2009 Part 0: General Requirements
ANSI/ISA 60079-11 2011 Part 11: Equipment protection by intrinsic safety i
Type of protection
Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D (Intrinsically Safe)
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (Nonincendive)
Class I, Zone 0, in Hazardous (Classified) Locations (Intrinsically Safe)
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC, in Hazardous (Classified) Locations (Nonincendive)
AEx ia IIC
For all protection type,
T4: for ambient temperature: -20 to 55C
T6: for ambient temperature: -20 to 40C
Atmosphere pressure: 80 kPa (0.8 bar) to 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
Degree of Protection of the Enclosure: NEMA Type 4X and IP66
CSA Intrinsic safety and nonincendive approval
Applicable standard
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 94-M1991 Special Purpose Enclosures
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 157-92 Intrinsically Safe and Non-incendive Equipment for Use
in Hazardous Locations

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-13
C22.2 No213-M1987 Non-incendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I, Division 2
Hazardous Locations
CAN/CSA-E60079-0-07 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres 1
- Part 0: General requirements
CAN/CSA-E60079-11-02 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
- Part 11: Intrinsic safety i
IEC 60529:2001 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Type of protection (C22.2)
Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D (Intrinsically Safe)
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (Nonincendive)
For all protection type,
T4: for ambient temperature: -20 to 55C
T6: for ambient temperature: -20 to 40C
Atmosphere pressure: 80 kPa (0.8 bar) to 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100% (No condensation)
Degree of Protection of the Enclosure: Type 4X
Type of protection (E60079)
Ex ia IIC
T4: for ambient temperature: -20 to 55C
T6: for ambient temperature: -20 to 40C
Atmosphere pressure: 80 kPa (0.8 bar) to 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100% (No condensation)
Degree of Protection of the Enclosure: IP66
NEPSI Intrinsic safety approval
Applicable standard
GB 3836.1-2010 Explosive atmospheres-Part 1: Equipment - General requirements
GB 3836.4-2010 Explosive atmospheres-Part 4: Equipment protection by intrinsic safety i
GB 3836.20-2010 Explosive atmospheres-Part 20: Equipment with equipment
protection level (EPL) Ga
Type of protection
Ex ia IIC Ga
T4: for ambient temperature: -20C to 55C
T6: for ambient temperature: -20C to 40C
Atmosphere pressure: 80kPa (0.8bar) to 110 kPa (1.1bar)
Degree of Protection of the Enclosure: IP66
Electrical Parameters (Ex ia)
Each housing assembly (base module) and each sensor module are respectively certificated.
Input parameters of sensor module meet output parameters of housing assembly.
Housing assembly
PH
Input parameters Supply and output circuit (terminals + and -):
Ui, Vmax
Ii, Imax
= 30 V
= 100 mA
SC
Pi, Pmax = 0.75 W
Ci =13 nF
Li = 0 mH ISC
(Linear source)
Output parameters Sensor module input circuit (CN2 or CN3 on Back board)
Uo Vt, Voc = 13.65 V DO
Io, It, Isc = 50 mA
Po = 0.372 W
Co, Ca
Lo, La
= 80 nF
= 7.7mH
SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-14
pH/ORP Sensor module, SC Sensor module and DO Sensor module
Input parameters Ui, Vmax = 13.92 V
Ii, Imax = 50 mA
Pi, Pmax = 0.374 W
Ci = 40 nF
Li = 2.9 mH
Output parameters Sensor input circuit(pH: terminals 11 through 19,
SC: terminals 11 through 16, DO: terminals 11 through 18)
Uo Vt, Voc = 11.76 V
Io, It, Isc = 116.5 mA
Po = 0.342 W
Co, Ca = 100 nF
Lo, La = 1.7mH

ISC Sensor module


Input parameters Ui, Vmax = 13.92 V
Ii, Imax = 50 mA
Pi, Pmax = 0.374 W
Ci = 40 nF
Li = 7.7 mH
Output parameters Sensor input circuit (terminals 11 through 17)
Uo Vt, Voc = 11.76 V
Io, It, Isc = 60.6 mA
Po = 0.178 W
Co, Ca = 100 nF
Lo, La = 8 mH

SENCOM Sensor module


Input parameters Ui, Vmax = 13.92 V
Ii, Imax = 50 mA
Pi, Pmax = 0.374 W
Ci = 40 nF
Li = 7.2 mH
Output parameters Sensor input circuit (terminals 82, 83, 84, 86 and 87)
Uo Vt, Voc = 5.36 V
Io, It, Isc = 106.16 mA
Po = 0.1423 W
Co, Ca = 31 F
Lo, La = 0.45 mH

Model code as per certification unit


Housing assembly
Model code Enclosure type (Housing) Display Explosion proof type
K9698NA Plastic (Polycarbonate) (-P) Without display (-N) Intrinsic safety type
K9698PA With LCD display (-D) T4: for Ta: -20 to 55C
K9698QA Stainless steel with Without display (-N) T6: for Ta: -20 to 40C
K9698RA urethane coating (-U) With LCD display (-D)
K9698QB Stainless steel with epoxy Without display (-N)
K9698RB coating (-E) With LCD display (-D)
K9698QC Stainless steel (-S) Without display (-N)
K9698RC With LCD display (-D)

Sensor module
Model code Sensor module type Explosion proof type
K9698EA pH/ORP module Intrinsic safety type
K9698FA SC module T4: for Ta: -20 to 55C
K9698GA ISC module T6: for Ta: -20 to 40C
K9698HA DO module
K9698JA SENCOM module Intrinsic safety type
T4: for Ta: -20 to 55C
ATEX and IECEx only

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-15
ATEX and IECEx
Control Drawing (for 4-20mA type)
Hazardous Location Non Hazardous Location 1
Measuring module 1 Supply + +
Sensor 1
Housing Assembly Safety Barrier
(Note 1)
Sensor 2 Measuring module 2 Supply - -

(*)

Note: The measuring module on this drawing means


the sensor module on this General Specifications.

Electrical data are as follows;


Supply and output circuit (Terminals Supply + and -):
Maximum Voltage (Ui) = 30V
Maximum Current (Ii) = 100mA
Maximum Power (Pi) = 0.75W
Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 13nF
Internal Inductance (Li) = 0mH
Sensor input circuit (pH: terminals 11 through 19, SC: terminals 11 through 16, DO: terminals 11
through 18, ISC: terminals 11 through 17, SENCOM: terminals 82, 83, 84, 86 and 87):
Type of Measuring Module pH, SC and DO ISC SENCOM
Maximum Voltage (Uo) 11.76 V 11.76 V 5.36 V
Maximum Current (Io) 116.5 mA 60.6 mA 106.6 mA
Maximum Power (Po) 0.3424 W 0.178 W 0.1423 W
External Capacitance (Co) 100 nF 100 nF 31 F
External Inductance (Lo) 1.7 mH 8 mH 0.45 mH
Note 1: In any safety barrier used, the output current must be limited by a resistor R such that Imaxout=Uz/R.
Note 2: The safety barrier shall be certified by notify body EU as ATEX.
Note 3: When using non isolation barrier connect (*1) to IS earthing system.
Note 4: Sensor 1 and Sensor 2 shall be of passive types to be regarded as simple apparatus or the ones individually
certified with relevant parameters.
Note 5: Measuring module 2 may not mounted. As for ISC module and SENCOM module, only one can be mounted.
Note 6: Measuring module is placed in an enclosure with IP20 and over.

FM
Control Drawing (for 4-20mA type)
Following contents refer DOC. No. IKE039-A12
Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D PH
Class I, Zone 0 and 1, Group IIC
T4 for Ta = 55C, T6 for Ta = 40C
Hazardous Location Non Hazardous Location
2 wire analyzer SC
Measuring module 1 Supply + +
Sensor 1
Housing Assembly Safety Barrier

Sensor 2 Measuring module 2 Supply -


-
(Note 1)
ISC
(Refer to Note 7)

DO
Note: The measuring module on this drawing means
the sensor module on this General Specifications.

Electrical data are as follows; SENCOM


Input Maximum Input Voltage (Ui) = 30V
Maximum Current (Ii) = 100mA
Maximum Power (Pi) = 0.75W
Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 13nF
Internal Inductance (Li) = 0mH

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-16
Sensor Input Circuit
Type of Measuring Module pH, SC and DO ISC
Maximum Voltage (Uo) 11.76 V 11.76 V
Maximum Current (Io) 116.5 mA 60.6 mA
Maximum Power (Po) 0.3424 W 0.178 W
External Capacitance (Ca, Co) 100 nF 100 nF
External Inductance (La, Lo) 1.7 mH 8 mH
Note 1: In any safety barrier used, the output current must be limited by a resistor R such that Imaxout=Uz/R.
Note 2: The safety barrier shall be FM Entity-Approved associated apparatus / barrier where :
Barrier Voc, Uo 30V;
Barrier Isc, Io 100 mA;
Barrier Po 0.75W;
Barrier Ca, Co 13 nF+Ccable;
Barrier La, Lo Lcable
Note 3: When using non isolation barrier connect (*1) to IS earthing system.
Note 4: pH and SC Sensor(s) are of a passive type to be regarded as simple apparatus same as 06ATEX0218X,
06ATEX0219, IECEx KEM 06.0052X, FM3028779, 06ATEX0220X, 06ATEX0221, IECEx KEM 06.0053X or the one
individually certified with relevant parameters.
Note 5: ISC Sensor(s) are ISC40S of 00ATEX1067X or the one individually certified with relevant parameters.
Note 6: DO Sensor(s) are of a passive type to be regarded as simple apparatus or the one individually certified with
relevant parameters.
Note 7: Measuring module 2 may not mounted. As for ISC module, only one can be mounted.
Note 8: Install per the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
Note 9: WARNING - Potential electrostatic charging hazard Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard. Avoid any
actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge, e.g., rubbing with a dry cloth.
Note 10: As an alternative to installing the FLXA21 in Division 2 using Class I, Division 2 wiring methods, the FLXA21 may
be installed in Division 2 using nonincendive field wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA
70) using the same parameters identified for intrinsically safe entity installations. The Associated Nonincendive
Apparatus shall have nonincendive field wiring connections which are FM Approved for use in the Class I, Division 2
location.

CSA
Control Drawing (for 4-20mA type)
Intrinsically Safe Non-incendive
Group IIC, Zone 0 Class I, Division 2,
Class I, Division 1 Groups A, B, C, D
Hazardous Location Non Hazardous Location
2 wire analyzer
Measuring module 1 Supply + +
Sensor 1
Housing Assembly Safety Barrier
Supply - Refer to Note
Sensor 2 Measuring module 2 -
(Refer to Note 7)
(*1)
Not use safety barrier but
Note: The measuring module on this CSA certified equipment
drawing means the sensor module use in Non-incendive
on this General Specifications.

Electrical parameters (Intrinsically safe)


Housing Assembly
Supply and output circuit (terminals + and -)
Ui(Vmax)=30V, Ii(Imax)=100mA, Pi(Pmax)=0.75W, Ci=13nF, Li=0mH
Measuring module input circuit (CN2 or CN3 on Back board)
Uo(Vt,Voc)=13.65V, Io(It,Isc)=50mA, Po=0.372W, Co(Ca)=80nF, Lo(La)=7.7mH
pH module, SC module and DO module
Ui(Vmax)=13.92V, Ii(Imax)=50mA, Pi(Pmax)=0.374W, Ci=40nF, Li=2.9mH
Sensor input circuit (terminals 11 through 19)
Uo(Vt,Voc)=11.76V, Io(It,Isc)=116.5mA, Po=0.3424W, Co(Ca)=100nF, Lo(La)=1.7mH
ISC module
Ui(Vmax)=13.92V, Ii(Imax)=50mA, Pi(Pmax)=0.374W, Ci=40nF, Li=7.7mH
Sensor input circuit (terminals 11 through 17)
Uo(Vt,Voc)=11.76V, Io(It,Isc)=60.6mA, Po=0.178W, Co(Ca)=100nF, Lo(La)=8mH
Installation requirements between housing assembly and safety barrier
UoUi IoIi PoPi CoCi+Ccable LoLi+Lcable
VocVmax IscImax CaCi+Ccable LaLi+Lcable
Uo, Io, Po, Co, Lo, Voc, Isc, Ca and La are parameters of barrier.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-17
Electrical Parameters (Nonincendive)
Housing Assembly
Supply and output circuit (terminals + and -) 1
Ui(Vmax)=30V, Ci=13nF, Li=0mH
Measuring module input circuit (CN2 or CN3 on Back board)
Uo(Vt,Voc)=13.65V, Io(It,Isc)=50mA, Co(Ca)=80nF, Lo(La)=7.7mH
pH module, SC module and DO module
Ui(Vmax)=13.92V, Ci=40nF, Li=2.9mH
Sensor input circuit (terminals 11 through 19)
Uo(Vt,Voc)=11.76V, Io(It,Isc)=116.5mA, Co(Ca)=4uF, Lo(La)=4.5mH
ISC module
Ui(Vmax)=13.92V, Ci=40nF, Li=7.7mH
Sensor input circuit (terminals 11 through 17)
Uo(Vt,Voc)=11.76V, Io(It,Isc)=60.6mA, Co(Ca)=4uF, Lo(La)=19mH
Note for Intrinsically Safe Installation:
1: In any safety barrier used, the output current must be limited by a resistor R such that Io=Uo/R or Isc=Voc/R.
2: The safety barrier must be CSA certified.
3: Input voltage of the safety barrier must be less than 250Vrms/Vdc
4: When using non isolation barrier connect (*1) to IS earthing system.
5: pH and SC Sensor(s) are of a passive type to be regarded as simple apparatus same as 06ATEX0218X, 06ATEX0219,
IECEx KEM 06.0052X, FM3028779, 06ATEX0220X, 06ATEX0221, IECEx KEM 06.0053X or the one individually certified with
relevant parameters.
6: ISC Sensor(s) are ISC40S of 00ATEX1067X or the one individually certified with relevant parameters.
7: DO Sensor(s) are of a passive type to be regarded as simple apparatus or the one individually certified with relevant
parameters.
8: Measuring module 2 may not mounted. As for ISC module, only one can be mounted.
9: Installation should be in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part I and Local Electrical Code.
10: Do not alter drawing without authorization from CSA.
Note for Nonincendive Installation:
1: The parameter for sensor input circuit must be taken into account when installed.
2: Installation should be in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part I and Local Electrical Code.
3: Do not alter drawing without authorization from CSA.

NEPSI
Control Drawing (for 4-20mA type)
Hazardous Location Non Hazardous Location

Measuring module 1 Supply + +


Sensor 1
Housing Assembly Safety Barrier
(Note 1)
Sensor 2 Measuring module 2 Supply - -

(*)
PH
Note: The measuring module on this drawing means
the sensor module on this General Specifications.

Electrical data are as follows; SC


Maximum Voltage (Ui) = 30 V
Maximum Current (Ii) = 100 mA
Maximum Power (Pi) = 0.75 W ISC
Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 13 nF
Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 mH
Note 1: The output current must be limited by a resistor R such that Imaxout=Uz/R (linear source).
Note 2: Safety barrier certified by NEPSI should be used.
DO
Note 3: When using non isolation barrier, connect (*) to IS earthing system.
Note 4: Sensor module 2 is installed when required.
When measuring inductive conductivity, only one module can be installed. SENCOM

WARNING
Installation and wiring
The FLXA202/FLXA21 should only be used with equipment that meets the relevant IEC,
American or Canadian standards. Yokogawa accepts no responsibility for the misuse of this unit.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-18

WARNING
Dont install general purpose type instruments in the hazardous area.

CAUTION
The Instrument is packed carefully with shock absorbing materials, nevertheless, the instrument
may be damaged or broken if subjected to strong shock, such as if the instrument is dropped.
Handle with care.

CAUTION
This instrument is a Class A product, and it is designed for use in the industrial environment.
Please use this instrument in the industrial environment only.

CAUTION
When you open the front panel, make sure the screws are completely out of the screw holes, and
then open the front panel slowly in order not to damage the threaded parts on the housing. If the
threaded parts are damaged and the screws cannot be tightened, the waterproof performance
will deteriorate.

CAUTION
The HART communication may be influenced by strong electromagnetic field.
In this case another trial of the HART communication and/or operation with FLXA202/FLXA21
touch screen can be carried out.

WARNING
Do not use an abrasive or organic solvent in cleaning the instrument.
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Division 2.
Do not remove or replace while circuit is live unless area is know to be non hazardous.
Explosion Hazard Do not disconnect equipment unless area is known to be non
hazardous.
Do not reset circuit breaker unless power has been removed from the equipment or the area
is known to be non hazardous.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION> 1-19

WARNING
1
Electrostatic discharge
The FLXA202/FLXA21 contains devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
When servicing this equipment, please observe proper procedures to prevent such damage.
Replacement components should be shipped in conductive packaging. Repair work should
be done at grounded workstations using grounded soldering irons and wrist straps to avoid
electrostatic discharge.

PH

SC

ISC

DO

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-1

2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION


Install the cable glands into the FLXA202/FLXA21 before installing it (see section 2.3.) Upon
delivery, the cable glands are not installed.
WTB10 or BA10 Case of Distributor 2
Terminal box *6 FLXA202 2-Wire Analyzer PH201G (Style B)
CMN CMN
n n n n n n n n n *4 + B D H
A C F

(*3) Output 2 (1-5V DC)


n n n n n n n n n *5 *7
Output 1 (1-5V DC)

*1 L N
Sensor

+ a c e Power supply
*3 b d f
20 to 130V DC
or
80 to 138V AC, 47 to 63Hz

*2 HOLD WASH
WTB10 or BA10 FAIL
Terminal box *6 Case of Distributor
SDBT

+ B + H
A F

Output 2 (1-5V DC)


*7
Output 1 (1-5V DC)
Sensor

L N
Power supply
+
1 20 to 130V DC
2 or
(*3) 80 to 138V AC, 47 to 63Hz
*1: Use a 2-wire shielded cable with an outside diameter of 6 to 12 mm.
*2: Connect the analyzer to ground. (Class D ground: 100 ohm or less)
*3: This line is connected to a distributor or 24V DC power supply.
*4: Terminal numbers for each sensor module are shown below.
*5: Two modules of the same kind of measurement/sensor type can be installed. When measuring inductive
conductivity or pH/ORP with the SENCOM sensor, only one module can be installed.
*6: The terminal box may be necessary depending on the sensor cable length and the distance between the
analyzer and the sensor.
The SENCOM sensor is to be connected directly to the analyzer without a terminal box.
*7: Two outputs, output 1 and output2, of PH201G or SDBT are same signals. PH
11 12 14 18 13 17 19 15 16
PH Module PH
SC
11 12 13 14 15 16 NC
SC Module SC
ISC
11 12 13 17 14 16 15
ISC Module ISC
DO
11 12 16 15 13 14 17 18 NC
DO Module DO
SENCOM
NC 82 83 84 NC 86 87
SENCOM Module SENCOM

Figure 2.1 FLXA202 Wiring diagrams

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-2
WTB10 or BA10 Case of Distributor
Terminal box *6 FLXA21 2-Wire Analyzer PH201G (Style B)
CMN CMN
n n n n n n n n n *4 + B D H
A C F

(*3) Output 2 (1-5V DC)


n n n n n n n n n *5 *7
Output 1 (1-5V DC)

*1 L N
Sensor

+ a c e Power supply
*3 b d f
20 to 130V DC
or
80 to 138V AC, 47 to 63Hz

*2 *2 HOLD WASH
WTB10 or BA10 FAIL
(Stainless steel (Plastic housing)
Terminal box *6 Case of Distributor
housing)
SDBT

+ B + H
A F

Output 2 (1-5V DC)


*7
Output 1 (1-5V DC)
Sensor

L N
Power supply
+
1 20 to 130V DC
2 or
*1: Use a 2-wire shielded cable with an outside diameter of 6 to 12 mm. (*3) 80 to 138V AC, 47 to 63Hz
*2: Connect the analyzer to ground. (Class D ground: 100 ohm or less)
The way of connecting the grounding cable varies depending on the plastic housing and stainless steel
housing.
In the case of the plastic housing, connect the grounding cable to the terminal of the power module inside,
and in the case of the stainless steel housing, connect the grounding cable to the terminal of the housing.
Use a cable with an outside diameter of 3.4 to 7 mm for the grounding line of the plastic housing.
The minimum cross sectional area of the protective grounding cable should be 0.75 mm2.
Although, on the stainless steel housing, the ground terminal symbol is (protective ground), the ground is
really functional ground.
*3: This line is connected to a distributor or 24V DC power supply.
*4: Terminal numbers for each sensor module are shown below.
*5: Two modules of the same kind of measurement/sensor type can be installed. When measuring inductive
conductivity or pH/ORP with the SENCOM sensor, only one module can be installed.
*6: The terminal box may be necessary depending on the sensor cable length and the distance between the
analyzer and the sensor.
The SENCOM sensor is to be connected directly to the analyzer without a terminal box.
*7: Two outputs, output 1 and output2, of PH201G or SDBT are same signals.
11 12 14 18 13 17 19 15 16
PH Module PH

11 12 13 14 15 16 NC
SC Module SC

11 12 13 17 14 16 15
ISC Module ISC

11 12 16 15 13 14 17 18 NC
DO Module DO

NC 82 83 84 NC 86 87
SENCOM Module SENCOM

Figure 2.2 FLXA21 Wiring diagrams

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-3

2.1 Installation site


The FLXA202/FLXA21 is weatherproof and can be installed both inside and outside. It should,
however, be installed as close as possible to the sensor to avoid long cable runs between the
instrument and sensor. When the pH sensor is used, the cable length including the sensor cable
should not exceed 20 meters (65.6 feet); 60 meters (197 feet) when using BA10 extension box 2
and WF10 cable.
For a conductivity sensor the cable run should not exceed 60 meters (197 feet). For dissolved
oxygen the sensor cable run should not exceed 30 meters (100 feet). For SENCOM pH/ORP the
sensor cable run should not exceed 20 meters (65.6 feet).

Select an installation site where the ambient temperature and humidity are within the limits of the
instrument specifications (see chapter 2). If the instrument is installed outside and exposed to
direct sunlight, a sun shade hood should be used.
Ambient Operating Temperature: -20 to +55 C
Storage Temperature: -30 to +70 C
Humidity: 10 to 90% RH at 40C (Non-condensing)

Select an installation site that meets the following conditions.


Mechanical vibrations and shocks are negligible
No relay switch and power switch are installed close to the converter
There is space for cable connection beneath the cable glands
Not exposed to direct sunlight or severe weather conditions
Maintenance is possible
No corrosive atmosphere
Water Protection: IP66, NEMA Type 4X (USA), Type 4X(Canada)

PH

SC

ISC

DO

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-4

2.2 Removing the wiring cover


Before installing this instrument, open the front panel and remove the wiring covers, and then
install the cable glands.

l FLXA202
Remove wiring covers 1 and 2 by raising the circled area in Figure 2.3.

NOTE
Wiring covers are required intrinsic safety (Type is -C*).
In the case of other types, the cover is not attached to the FLXA202.

Wiring cover 2 Wiring cover 1


(when using the second module)
Figure 2.3 FLXA202 Wiring cover

l FLXA21
Remove all the wiring covers. They are fixed at the places marked with (circle) and (triangle)
in Figure 2.4. Be careful not to damage the pawls when removing the covers.

NOTE
Be careful not to lose the wiring cover screws.

Wiring cover 1 Wiring cover 2 Wiring cover 3


(for the rst module) (for the second module) (for the power supply and grounding)
Figure 2.4 FLXA21 Wiring cover

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-5

2.3 Installing the cable glands


The supplied cable glands are for cables with an outside diameter of 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47
inches). Unused cable entry holes must be sealed with cable glands including the supplied close
up plugs.
(For sensor 2 cable)
2
For sensor 1 cable

For power supply

FLXA202 Housing

For sensor 1 cable For sensor 1 cable


(For sensor 2 cable) (For sensor 2 cable)
(A hole is drilled, if specified.)

For power supply For power supply

For grounding cable


(Functional ground)

FLXA21 Plastic Housing FLXA21 Stainless Steel Housing


F0202.ai

Figure 2.5 Cable gland diagram


PH

CAUTION SC
Be careful not to be injured by the sharp hole edges on the housing.
ISC
Install the supplied cable gland as shown in Figure 2.6. When using an adapter for conduit work,
see Figure 2.7.
DO

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-6

Cable gland nut

Gaskets
Washer
O-ring

Gable gland

Cable gland cap

Close up plug
(rubber)

FLXA202 Housing

Cable gland nut Cable gland nut

Gaskets
O-ring
Washer

Gable gland Gable gland

Cable gland cap Cable gland cap


Sleeve
(for grounding cable line
of the plastic housing) Rubber plug
(without wiring)
FLXA21 Plastic Housing FLXA21 Stainless Steel Housing F0203.ai

Figure 2.6 Cable glands

The unused cable glands should be sealed with the supplied close up plug.

CAUTION
When installing cable glands, hold cable glands and tighten cable gland nuts to a torque of 6
Nm. If cable glands, not gland nuts, are tightened, O-rings may be come out from the proper
positions.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-7
l Adapter for conduit work
When protecting the cable with a conduit, use an adapter (option codes: /CB4, /CD4, or /CF4).
Set the adapter as shown in figure 2.7, instead of using the cable gland as shown in figure 2.6.
Nut Unit: mm(inch)
2
Approx. Packing
55(2.2") 49
(1.93")
G1/2 screw (/CB4), 1/2 NPT screw (/CD4)
Adapter M20x1.5 screw (/CF4)
F0204.ai

Figure2.7 Adapter for conduit work (option)

CAUTION
When using a cable conduit, use a flexible conduit to avoid stress on the conduit adapter.
The stress on the conduit adapter may damage the housing.

2.4 Wiring the power supply


First make sure that the power supply is in accordance with the given specifications.

Power Supply: Nominal 24 V DC loop powered system


The load resistance: impedance of electronic equipment: typically 250 Ohm.
Number of input modules: 1-sensor measurement or 2-sensor measurement.
One (1) Sensor module (1 input): 16 to 40V DC (for pH/ORP, SC and DO),
17 to 40V DC (for ISC), 21 to 40V DC (for SENCOM)
Two (2) Sensor modules (2 inputs): 22.8 to 40V DC (for pH/ORP, SC and DO)
Note: When the FLXA202/FLXA21 is used in the multi-drop mode of HART communication, the output signal is changed from 12.5 mA
DC to 4 mA DC just after the power is turned on. Enough power supply for the instruments is to be provided.
PH
2-sensor measurement
1295 1295
Load resistance ()

Load resistance ()

R=
V - 11.5
R=
V - 11.5 SC
0.022 0.022
1000 1000

Except SENCOM
ISC
600 600
516
DO
Digital Communication Digital Communication
Range (HART) 304 Range (HART)
250 250

0 1617 18 22.8 24.7 40 0 17 18 22.86 24.7 40 SENCOM


Voltage (V) 18.2 21 Voltage (V)
<for pH/ORP (analog sensor), SC and DO> <for ISC and pH/ORP SENCOM sensor>
Figure 2.8 Supply Voltage and Load Resistance

Open the front panel and remove the wiring covers to make the terminal block accessible.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-8
CAUTION
The FLXA202/FLXA21 is used with a DC power supply. Do not use an alternating current or 100
volt mains power supply.

The cable leading to the distributor (power supply) supplies the power to and transmits the output
signal from the FLXA202/FLXA21.
Use a two conductor shielded cable with a minimum cross sectional area of 1.25 mm2 and an
outside diameter of 6 to 12 mm. The cable gland supplied with the instrument is compatible with
these diameters.
Terminal screw size is M4, and torque of screw up is 1.2 Nm.
Pin terminal, ring terminal and spade terminal can be used for the power supply terminals in the
plastic housing and the stainless housing, and the grounding terminal in the plastic housing. For
the grounding terminal on the stainless steel case, ring terminal should be used.
Pin terminal: pin diameter: max. 1.9 mm
Ring and spade terminal: width: max. 7.8 mm

CAUTION
Cables that withstand temperatures of at least 60C should be used for wiring.

CAUTION
Always place the shield cover over the power supply and contact terminals for safety reasons
and to avoid interference.

2.4.1 Grounding
The method to connect the grounding terminal is different for the FLXA202 and FLXA21 stainless
steel housing and the FLXA21 plastic housing.

For the safety of the user and to protect the instrument against interference, the converter
housing must always be connected to a class D ground (a ground resistance of 100 ohm or less).

l Grounding the FLXA202 housing


Use the terminal outside the converter housing for grounding (Figure 2.9A).
Use a ring terminal.
When connecting the converter to a distributor, connect the shield of a double-core shielded
cable to the terminal on the terminal block in the converter. Do not connect the shield to the
ground terminal in the distributor.
l Grounding the FLXA21 plastic housing
Connect a single separate cable for grounding to the terminal block in the housing (Figure 2.9B).
Use a cable with an outer diameter of 3.4 to 7 mm.
Since the cable is very thin, set the sleeve inside the standard cap of the cable gland and pass
the cable through it. Sleeves are supplied with cable glands (Figure 2.6).
When connecting the converter to a distributor, connect the shield of a double-core shielded
cable to the terminal on the terminal block in the converter. Do not connect the shield to the
ground terminal in the distributor.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-9
l Grounding the FLXA21 stainless steel housing
Use the terminal outside the converter housing for grounding (Figure 2.9C).
Use a ring terminal.
When connecting the converter to a distributor, connect the shield of a double-core shielded
cable to the terminal on the terminal block in the converter. Do not connect the shield to the 2
ground terminal in the distributor.

A: FLXA202 housing
(External grounding)

(Functional ground)
B: FLXA21 Plastic housing C: FLXA21 Stainless steel housing
(Internal grounding) (External grounding)
Figure 2.9 Grounding

2.4.2 Connection of the power supply


Pass the supply/output cable through the power cable hole shown in Figure 2.5 into the converter
and connect it to the terminals marked +, and according to the marks on the power terminal PH
(Figure 2.10).

SC

ISC

DO
FLXA202 FLXA21
SENCOM
Figure 2.10 Power terminal

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-10

2.4.3 Wiring cover


l FLXA202
When grounding and power supply wiring are complete, double-check the wiring and the like,
and attach wiring cover 1 (Figure 2.11).
When attaching the wiring cover, align the protruding parts marked with squares in the figure to
the grooves.
If only the first module is to be used, wire the detector to the first module.
If the second module is to be used, wire the detector to the second module and attach wiring
cover 2 before wiring the first module.
Then, wire the detector to the first module.
Detector wiring is indicated in section 2.5.
The first module
The second module

Housing
Wiring cover 2 Wiring cover 1
(when using the second module)
Figure 2.11 FLXA202 Wiring cover

NOTE
Wiring covers are required intrinsic safety (Type is -C*).
In the case of other types, the cover is not attached to the FLXA202.

l FLXA21
After grounding and connecting the power supply, check the wiring and then close the wiring
cover 3 (Figure 2.4).
When closing the cover, engage the positions marked with in Figure 2.4 and fasten the cover
with the screw at the position marked with .

CAUTION
The screw in the area marked with should be tightened to a torque of 0.35 to 0.45 Nm.

If a second module is used, wire the sensor for the second module and attach the wiring cover
(refer to figure 2.12).
Then, wire the sensor for the first module and attach the wiring cover (refer to figure 2.11).
The sensor wiring is shown in section 2.4.

NOTE
Be careful not to lose the wiring cover screws.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-11

2.5 Sensor wiring


The FLXA202/FLXA21 can be used with a wide range of commercially available sensor types,
both from Yokogawa and other manufacturers.
Terminal screw size is M4, and torque of screw up is 1.2 Nm.
2
Pin terminal, ring terminal and spade terminal can be used.
Pin terminal: pin diameter: max. 1.9 mm
Ring and spade terminal: width: max. 7.8 mm
For details on the sensors, refer to the respective instruction manuals of the sensors.

NOTE
When input 2 is used, the upper-level module is for input 1. Be careful not to make a mistake
when wiring the modules.

l FLXA202
When wiring covers are available:
Attach wiring cover 1. If the second input is available, wire the second module in the lower
level, and attach wiring cover 2.
Finally, wire the first module.
If the second input is not available, attach wiring cover 1, and then wire the first input.
Note that if the second input is not available, wiring cover 2 is not included.
When wiring covers are not available:
If the second input is available, wire the second module in the lower level first.
Then, wire the first module.
If the second input is not available, wire only the first input.

NOTE
Wiring covers are required intrinsic safety (Type is -C*).
In the case of other types, the cover is not attached to the FLXA202. PH

When all the detector wiring is complete, close the FLXA202 front cover, and turn the power on. SC
Check that the screen displays normally.
ISC
CAUTION
Do not tighten up four front panel screws one by one.
DO
Each front panel screw should be tightened up in two times of screwing. And, firstly the screw at
the upper left should be screwed a bit, the next is at the lower right, third is at the upper right, and
fourth is at the lower left. The second round is the same sequence again to tighten up four screws. SENCOM
Do not use an electric screwdriver with high revolutions. If an electric screwdriver is used for
these front panel screws, the revolutions of the electric screwdriver should be less than 400 rpm.
Four screws should be tightened to the following torque;
0.8 to 0.9 Nm (for the plastic housing)
1.5 to 1.6 Nm (for the stainless steel housing)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-12
l FLXA21
When input 2 is used, first wire input 2 which is on the lower second module, and attach the
wiring cover.
Even when input 2 is not used, first attach the power supply/grounding wiring cover and then the
wiring cover for the second module, and finally wire input 1.

NOTE
When the wiring of sensors is finished, be sure to attach the wiring covers. Furthermore, make
sure the module is locked with the mechanisms on the left and right of the module.

NOTE
Confirm that all locking-tabs (including for BLANK slots) are Locked position when close the
front panel.
If locking-tabs are Unlock position, the front panel may be interfered with locking-tabs.

Lock Unlock
Figure 2.12 Locking the module

When all sensor wiring is completed, close the front panel of the FLXA21, and turn on the power.
Make sure that the display is normal.

CAUTION
Do not tighten up four front panel screws one by one.
Each front panel screw should be tightened up in two times of screwing. And, firstly the screw at
the upper left should be screwed a bit, the next is at the lower right, third is at the upper right, and
fourth is at the lower left. The second round is the same sequence again to tighten up four screws.
Do not use an electric screwdriver with high revolutions. If an electric screwdriver is used for
these front panel screws, the revolutions of the electric screwdriver should be less than 400 rpm.
Four screws should be tightened to the following torque;
0.8 to 0.9 Nm (for the plastic housing)
1.5 to 1.6 Nm (for the stainless steel housing)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-13

n Wiring of YOKOGAWA sensors


Board Terminals Input 2Input 1
Sensor Measurement Jumper Remark
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18/13 19/15
DO30G DO 11 12 13 14 15 16 Fixed Cable
FU20/
pH, pH & 2
PH20/ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Yes No Fixed Cable
ORP, rH
FU24
FU20/
PH20/ ORP 11 12 13 14 Yes Yes 13/14 Fixed Cable
FU24
FU20/
pH Comp.
PH20/ 11 12 15 14 16 No Yes 13/14 Fixed Cable
ORP
FU24
FU20-VP/ pH, pH &
E F B D A Yes No VP6-SC
FU24-VP ORP, rH
FU20-VP/
ORP E F B D Yes Yes 13/14 VP6-SC
FU24-VP
FU20-VP/ pH Comp.
E F A D No Yes 13/14 VP6-SC
FU24-VP ORP
ISC40 ISC 11 12 13 14 15 16 Fixed Cable
PR20/
pH 11 12 13 14 15 16 Yes No Fixed Cable
PR10
Liquid
SC21 pH Blue Red (White) No No WU20 Triax
Earth
SC24V pH E F C H A B D VP8-DC
SC25V pH E F B D A Yes No VP6-SC
pH Comp. Liquid
SC29-PTG Red Blue (White) WU20 Triax
ORP Earth
Liquid
SC29-PTP ORP Blue Red (White) Yes Yes WU20 Triax
Earth
SC42 SC 11 12 13 14 15 16 WU40 cable
SC4A SC 11 12 13 14 15 16 Fixed Cable
SM21/
Green: Green: Yellow: Red: Red: Yellow: WU20 Color
SR20/ pH Black Yes No
Red Blue Red Red Blue Blue Coded Coax
SM60
SM29/ Yellow: Red: Red: Yellow: WU20 Color
ORP Black Yes Yes
SR20 Red Red Blue Blue Coded Coax
13/14
SX42 SC Brown Brown
Yellow:
Red and
Sensor PH
Green Wiring
15/16

SC
Board Terminals
Sensor Measurement Remark
82 83 84 86 87
FU20F pH, pH & ORP, rH 82 83 84 86 87 WU11 Cable ISC

DO

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-14

n Wiring of HAMILTON sensors


Measure- Board Terminals Input 2 Input 1
Sensor Jumper Remark
ment 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18/13 19/15
WU20D
CHEMTRODE pH Blue Red (White) Yes No 13/14
Cable
CHEMTRODE-
ORP Yes Yes 13/14
ORP
CHEMTRODE-
pH E F B A Yes No 13/14 VP6-SC
VP
WU20D
CLARITRODE pH Blue Red (White) Yes No 13/14
Cable
CLARITRODE-
pH E F B A Yes No VP6-SC
VP
White/ Fixed
CONDCUELL SC Blue Green Pink Brown Yellow
Grey Cable
CONDCUELL- Black Grey Hamilton
SC Blue Yellow Black Grey
VP Shield Shield VP Cable
WU20D
EASYFERM pH Blue Red (White) Yes No 13/14
Cable
EASYFERM-
pH E F B A Yes No 13/14 VP6-SC
VP
INCHTRODE pH E F B D A Yes No VP6-SC
WU20D
MECOTRODE pH Blue Red (White) Yes No 13/14
Cable
MECOTRODE-
pH E F B A Yes No VP8-DC
VP
OXYFERM-
Green/ Hamilton
VP/ DO White Green Black Red
Yellow VP Cable
OXYGOLD
Fixed
OXYSENS DO Yellow Blue Black Clear Brown
Cable
pHEASY pH E F B D A B Yes No
WU20D
POLILYTE pH Blue Red (White) Yes No
Cable
POLILYTE- Black/ Hamilton
pH White Green Red Blue Yes No
VP Clear VP Cable
POLILYTE Black/ Hamilton
pH White Green Red Blue Yes No
PLUS-VP Clear VP Cable

Color coding of Variopin cables


Cable PIN A B C D E F G H
Black/
Hamilton VP6-SC Red Grey Blue White Green
Clear
Black/ Black Red/ Red
Hamilton VP8-DC White Green Yellow Brown
Clear Shield Clear Shield
WU20-V-S VP6-SC Clear Brown Black Yellow Red Blue
Brown Brown White White
WU20-V-D VP8-DC Red Blue Yellow
Core Shield Cored Shield

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-15

2.5.1 Wiring the pH/ORP sensor


n pH Measurement
Conventional pH sensors are connected to the module as follows:
2
FLXA202/FLXA21
11 Temperature
12 Temperature
13 Reference
14 Solution ground
15 Glass (measure)
16 Shield
17 Shield

TC REF Liquid PH
Earth

In addition to the wiring of the sensor, insure that a jumper for low-impedance sensor inputs is
installed. The jumpers can be found on the plastic sensor module cover and can be stored in the
lower level module wiring cover.
pH Glass Electrode is a high impedance sensor input
Standard reference electrodes and an ORP/REDOX electrode are low impedance sensor
inputs
Special electrodes using 2 glass sensor (example: Pfaudler, SC24V) do not need jumpers.

Terminals 15-16 are identified as input 1 (High Impedance) and terminals 13-17 are defined as
input 2 (Low Impedance). For conventional pH sensors, the jumper is placed as illustrated:
11 12 14 18 13 17 19 15 16

PH

Input 2 Input 1
PH
Glass sensor on Input 1.
Reference sensor on Input 2.
SC
Store jumpers that you do not use in the jumper holder (see Figures 1.1 and 1.2).
ISC

DO

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-16

n ORP Measurement
The ORP measurement uses the same sensor input module as the pH measurement. It is not
uncommon to measure ORP as process variable and a pH Glass electrode as reference. This is
the case with rH measurement and with pH compensated ORP measurement.

Conventional ORP sensors are connected to the module as follows:


FLXA202/FLXA21

11 Temperature
12 Temperature
13 Reference
14 Solution ground
15 Metal (measure)
16 Shield
17 Shield

TC REF Liquid ORP


Earth

For conventional ORP sensors, the jumpers are placed as illustrated:


11 12 14 18 13 17 19 15 16

PH

Input 2 Input 1

Metal sensor on Input 1.


Normal reference on Input 2.

pH Compensated ORP sensors are connected to the module as follows:


FLXA202/FLXA21
11 Temperature
12 Temperature
13 Glass
14 Solution ground
15 Metal
16 Shield
17 Shield

TC PH Liquid ORP
Earth

For pH Compensated ORP sensors, the jumper is placed as illustrated:


11 12 14 18 13 17 19 15 16

PH

Input 2 Input 1

Metal sensor on Input 1.


pH glass (as reference) on Input 2.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-17
NOTE
The special grommet is intended to be used to seal the multiple cables from the Yokogawa flow
fittings such as FF20.
The designated cables are WU20 sensor cables, which are approximately 5 mm (0.2) in
diameter, and K1500FV liquid earth cables, which are approximately 2.5 mm (0.1) in diameter. 2

For sensor systems using a single cable, like the FU20/FU24 and the PR10, PD20, PF20 and
PS20, the standard gland will accommodate the cable adequately. Single cables between
approximately 6 mm and 12 mm (0.24 and 0.47) can be sealed properly with these glands and
the standard tule.

Remove
standard tule

Sensor
Grommet set

Figure 2.13 Grommet set use

PH

SC

ISC

DO

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-18

2.5.2 Wiring the conductivity (SC) sensor


Contacting Conductivity, SC, sensors are connected to the module as follows:
FLXA202/FLXA21
11 + Temp
12 -
13 V-
14 i-

15 V+
16 i+

The above diagram shows wiring for 4-electrode conductivity sensors, such as SC42-SP34
large bore series. For 2-electrode conductivity sensors, such as SC42-SP36 small bore series,
jumpers must be installed between terminals 13-14 and between terminals 15-16, as shown in
the diagram below.
FLXA202/FLXA21
11 + Temp
12 -
13 V-
14 i-

15 V+
16 i+

2.5.3 Wiring the inductive conductivity (ISC) sensor


ISC40 sensors are connected to the module as follows:
FLXA202/FLXA21
11 + Temp
12 -
13 Receive coil
17 shield
14 Sensor shield
(internal)

15 Drive coil
16 shield

The sensors are supplied with integral cables and each individual wire is marked with the
corresponding terminal numbers.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-19

2.5.4 Wiring the dissolved oxygen (DO) sensor


The input module for DO measurement is suitable for different types of DO sensors:

i. Galvanic sensors like model DO30G


2
ii. Polarographic sensors like HAMILTONS Oxyferm and Oxygold

The connection is as follows:


FLXA202/FLXA21
11 TC +
12 TC -
16
15 + anode galvanic
13 - cathode galvanic
18 + anode polarographic
14 shield
17 - cathode polarographic

The DO30G sensor comes with integral cable and the wires are labeled with the corresponding
terminal numbers.

2.5.5 Wiring the SENCOM pH/ORP sensor


FU20F sensors are connected to the module as follows:

Input M9 Connector

Shield 82 4
Data+ 83 1
Data- 84 2
Supply Gnd 86 5 PH
Supply 87 6
SC

Connect the WU11 SENCOM cable terminal to the SENCOM module. ISC
Since the WU11 cable is thin, attach the included grommet in place of the cable gland standard
packing before wiring.
DO

SENCOM

Grommet

Remove the standard packing.

Detector

Figure 2.14

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-20

2.6 Mounting methods


See Figure 2.15. The FLXA202/FLXA21 has various mounting possibilities.
Panel mounting using optional mounting hardware (/PM or /UM)
Wall mounting using optional mounting hardware (/U or /UM)
Pipe mounting using optional mounting hardware (/U or /UM) on a horizontal or vertical
pipes (Nominal size: 50A)
The universal mounting kit (/UM) contains the pipe and wall mounting hardware (/U) and the
panel mounting hardware (/PM). Some can be left unused.
Panel mounting
+1
138 0 Unit: mm
Panel
Bracket mounting screws*

138 +1
0
Bracket

195
Fixing screws (x2)
185
* Tighten the four screws to a torque of 2 Nm.
Spacing panel cutout
Wall mounting
Bracket mounting screws*
Note: The attached hardware is the same
Wall as that for the pipe mounting.
Only the bracket is used for the
wall mounting.
Wall mounting holes (x3)

Note: The wall on which the M8 bolt (not supplied)


analyzer is mounted Prepare bolts of the same
should be strong enough length as the mounting hole.
to bear the weight of
more than 8kg. Bracket
* Tighten the four screws to a torque of 2 Nm.
Pipe mounting
Note: For a sun shade hood (option),
use the upper two bracket
Bracket mounting screws*
mounting screws to fix it.

Bracket

Bracket for piping Note: Horizontal pipe mounting is


possible by turning the bracket
90 degrees.

U-bolt Nuts (x2)


Washers (x2)

Stanchion (50A pipe)


* Tighten the four screws to a torque of 2 Nm.
Figure 2.15 Three types of mounting with the optional mounting hardware

See General Specifications (GS 12A01A02-01E) for the dimensions of the FLXA202/FLXA21
and mounting hardware.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION> 2-21

2.7 Operation
When all wiring is completed, turn on the power of the instrument. Make sure that the LCD
screen turns on. Then, the screen changes to the Quick Setup display. If the instrument is not
configured, an error indicator may be displayed, or the measurement values displayed may be
incorrect. Check the initial settings and change them to suit your purpose. 2

NOTE
After turning on the power, it takes occasionally more than 1 minute to change to the Quick Setup
display.

NOTE
A current of 12 mA is output for several seconds after power-on. This is the specification.

l Change language
When the power is turned on, the Quick setup display appears.
Upon delivery, the display language is set to English. If you want to use a language other than
English, select your desired language.
(1) (2) (3)
Quick setup Change language Warning
Start quick setup? Chinese
The instrument will restart
Czech
Yes English Are you sure? Yes
No French
German
Change language Italian
Japanese
Korean
Polish
Portuguese
Portuguese
Russian
Russian
Spanish
Spanish
PH
Figure 2.16 Changing the language

(1) Select Change language. SC


(2) Select a desired language (click the to scroll the language options.)
(3) Click YES. ISC
Changing languages automatically reboots the FLXA202/FLXA21.
DO
Check that the parameters match your specifications and modify them if necessary before using
the instrument.
SENCOM
A sheet for user settings is contained in the CD-ROM. Please take a memo of your settings on it
when you configure the FLXA202/FLXA21 and keep the sheet just in case.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-1

3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP
This chapter describes the screen operations of pH/ORP, the object to be measured.
Further details of screen operations can also be found in section 1.2.
Tag:PH

10.38 pH
3

25.0 C
19 mV Calibration
4mA PH1 20mA pH 5.1 Calibration pH
ORP 5.3 Manual 5.1.1 pH Manual
Temperature 5.2 Automatic5.1.2 Zero/Slope
Sample 5.1.3 Zero/Slope/ITP(3point)
Execute &Setup Zero/Slope1,2(3point)
Execute:
Calibration/Wash HOLD 5.4 Calibration ORP
HOLD Manual pH Automatic
Temporary output Sample Zero/Slope
Temporary output 5.5 Zero/Slope/ITP(3point)
Setup: Zero/Slope1,2(3point)
Comissioning
Change language Change language 2.7
Start Quick Setup
Quick setup Date/Time Seneor setup Measurement setup
3.2 4.6.4 4.1 4.2.1

Comissioning Output setup Temperature settings mA(output)


Sensor setup 4.1 mA: Output mA(Output) 4.2.2 4.3
Measuremet setup 4.2 Simulate Setup: Linear
Output setup 4.3 Table Table mA
Error configuration 4.4 Configure Hold Enter values
Logbook configuration 4.5
Advanced setup 4.6
Logbook configuration
Display setup 4.7 Setting logbook
Calculated data setup 4.8
Advanced setup
Settings 4.6.1
Measurement setup Tag 4.6.2
Temperature settings 4.2.2 Passwords 4.6.3
Temp. compensation 4.2.3 Date/Time 4.6.4
Calibration settings 4.2.4 Communication
Communication 4.6.5
Impedance settings
Concentration
4.2.5
4.2.6
Factory setup 4.6.6
HART
PH201G PH201G setup PH
Wash contact: Enabled
Sensor diag. settings 4.2.7
Display setup Main display
Main display 4.7.1 Additional text
Temp. comp. Dual display
Compensation: Manual Individual display Individual display
Reference temp. Trend 4.7.2 PH1 PH1 display
pH: Matrix Matrix PH2 Additional text
Auto Return 4.7.3
Enter values
TC Adjust contrast 4.7.4
ORP: TC MONITOR display 4.7.5

Cal. settings Trend


pH settings Cal. set pH x-axis: Timing
ORP settings Zero and Slope units Y-axis: Limits
rH settings Limits and timing
Buffers (select set)
Zero/Slope/ITP
Auto correct(Zero, Slope)

Buffers
Select buffer set:
Impedance setup Free programmable Free programmable
Input 1 impedance: Low Buffer table 1 Buffer table 1
Input 2 impedance: Low Buffer table 2 Enter values
Buffer table 3

Sensor diag. setting


Define heat cycle

Figure 3.1 Menu structure of pH/ORP (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)
IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00
<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-2

3.1 Change language


The screen is set to display English at factory shipment; if you wish to use the FLXA202/FLXA21
in another language, first select a language as described in section 2.7.

3.2 Quick setup


The Quick setup screen is used to set up the basic items you want to set up first, such as the
date/time and sensor settings. The detailed settings are described in chapter 4, Commissioning.
You may leave the Quick setup now and return to it later; however, it is recommended to perform
the quick setup first.
Each time the FLXA202/FLXA21 is started up, this screen is displayed. If it is not necessary to

change the setup, press No or .

NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display or the Home display when the MONITOR display is disabled).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-3

3
Quick setup Sensor setup mA(output)
Start quick setup? Sensor type pH+ORP Process parameter pH1
pH pH1 Temperature1
Yes ORP
ORP1
No pH+ORP
rH1
pH2
Chanage language 0% value 0.00Temperature2
pH
100% value 14.00pH
ORP2
rH2
Next Finish

*1 Next
Finish
Date/Time Measurement setup
Format YYYY/MM/DD Measurement pH+ORP Monitor display
YYYY/MM/DD
pH
MM/DD/YYYY
Date 2010/03/03 ORP
DD/MM/YYYY
pH+ORP
Time 17:04:07 pH+rH
rH

Next Next
Next
Next
Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000 Pt1000
Pt100
Unit C 3kBalco
C
8k55
F
PTC10k
6k8
500
PH
Next

*2 Next

*1: The Measurement setup screen appears only when pH + ORP is selected on the Sensor setup screen.
*2: If two sensors are connected, the second sensor can also be set up.
Figure 3.2 Quick setup

n Date/Time
The date display format can be selected from among the three types.
Enter the date or time of day by using the numerical keys.
For details, see section 4.6.4.

n Sensor setup
Select a suitable electrode from among the displayed electrode types and set it up.
For details, see section 4.1.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-4

n Measurement setup
Select a suitable measurement parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
Measurement parameter setup can be made only when pH + ORP is selected on the Sensor
setup screen.
For details, see section 4.2.1.

n Temperature settings
Select a suitable temperature element from among those displayed and set it up.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 4.2.2.

n mA (output)
Select a suitable process parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
For example, the mA output of pH has been set to 0 14 pH at factory shipment. If the resolution
needs to be improved, set a suitable value for the process.
For details, see section 4.3.

3.3 Home display, Main display and Monitor


display
Pressing changes the screen to the Main display shown in Figure 3.3 (or the Home display
shown in Figure 3.4).

If two sensors are connected, pressing on the Main display changes the display to the
Home display shown in Figure 3.4.

If only one sensor is connected, is grayed out and disabled on the Main display.
Tag:PH

10.38 pH
25.0 C
19 mV
4mA PH1 20mA

Figure 3.3 Example of main display

Tag:PH pH

10.38
25.0 C
19 mV

Tag:PH pH

6.35
24.9 C
24 mV

4mA PH1 20mA

Figure 3.4 Example of home display

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-5

On the Home display, pressing of the 1st sensor (top) or 2nd sensor (bottom) causes the
display of the selected sensor to appear on the Main display.
On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.

NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition 3
(see section 4.7.1). For example, on the default condition of pH measurement, the 1st display
item is pH, the 2nd display item is temperature, and the 3rd display item is empty.

When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 4.7.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.
Monitor display Tag:PH pH

10.38
25.0 C

10.38
19.00 mV
Home display

Tag:PH pH

6.35
24.9 C

6.35
24.40 mV

4mA pH1 20mA

pH (When the MONITOR display is disabled)


pH
Tag:PH

1st display item


10.38 pH Main display
Tag:PH

6.35
2nd display item 25.0 C pH
3rd display item 19.00 mV 24.9 C
24.40 mV
4mA pH1 20mA 4mA pH2 20mA

Tag:PH Tag:PH PH

25.0 C
19.00 mV
10.38 pH 25.0 C
19.00 mV 10.38 pH
4mA pH1 20mA 4mA pH1 20mA

Figure 3.5 Change display

3.4 Zooming in on details


Pressing on the Main display allows you to check detailed instrument information
(instrument information such as setup, sensor diagnosis, calibration, and module productions
number) through a transition of screens as shown in Figure 3.6.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-6
In case of trouble, when you contact your nearest Yokogawa service center, please inform us
of the module and FLXA202/FLXA21 software revision displayed on the Detail screen and
other display information as well as the module productions number indicated on the nameplate
attached to the instrument.

Reset wellness data


mA Sesor wellness: New sensor?
20
Zero
Slope Yes resets
12 Input 1 imp. sensor wellness data.
Input 2 imp.
Heat cycle
4 Progress Time
15.00 Reset welness data Yes
Next Next No

*
2010/02/15 16:04:07
HOLD Last calibrated at
-------- ------
FAIL Calibration due at
-------- ------
WASH Projected maintenance
-- (no meaning)
Projected replacement
-- (no meaning)
Next Next

pH: Zero 0.000mV PH module(sensor1):


Slope 100.0 % Module Pdn No. AAAA1111
Sensor 1.234 mV Software Revision 1.10
ORP: Zero 0.000 mV
Slope 100.0 %
Sensor -1.567 mV
Impedance 1 BAD
Impedance 2 124.6 k
Next Next

HOUSING ASSY:
Module Pdn No. BBBB2222
Software Revision 2.10
HART Device Revision 2

(Fig.3.9)

Next

*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.

Figure 3.6 Detail display

n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 4.3.

n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in
communication setup.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-7

n PH (ORP)s zero, slope, and sensor, and Impedance

l Zero
= calibrated sensor offset in mV. Theoretically, the sensor reads 0 mV in a buffer solution of pH
7. The ZERO value indicates the condition of the sensor. The trend of ZERO drift of the sensor is
used to predict the lifetime of the sensor.
ZERO can also be displayed in pH units and then it represents the pH value where the sensor 3
output is 0 mV at 25C. Setting can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup
Calibration settings Zero and Slope units.
Setting of the zero value can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Zero/Slope/ITP. For details, see section 4.2.4.

l Slope
= calibrated efficiency of the sensor unit as a percentage of the theoretical slope of the sensor
unit. The theoretical slope follows the NERNST equation and is 59.16 mV/pH (at 25C). The
SLOPE can be calibrated only after a two-point calibration in buffer solutions with a different pH
value. A low slope indicates that the sensor is not clean or is faulty.
The SLOPE can also be displayed as a mV/pH value at 25C if the user has defined this variable
as mV/pH in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration settings Zero and Slope
units.
Setting of the slope value can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Zero/Slope/ITP. For details, see section 4.2.4.
+mV
Theoretical value

pH7, 0mV

pH0
pH14
Zero
PH

-mV Calibration curve (slope) F0410.ai

Figure 3.7 Zero/slope

l Sensor
Represents the electromotive force of the sensor.

l Impedance 1
For a PH sensor, Impedance shows electrical resistance of the glass membrane electrode. The
FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the impedance to know damage of the electrode.
For an ORP sensor, Impedance shows electrical resistance of metal electrode.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the impedance to know the surface condition of smudge and
the snapping of sensor wires. In case of Input Impedance setting is High and the measured
input-1 impedance value is higher than 100 k, the display shows M RANGE. The measured
input-1 impedance value is lower than 100 k, display shows BAD.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-8
If both impedance measurements are disabled (Error setting: Off), the display shows - - - - (bar).
If either impedance measurement 1 or 2 is enabled, the display shows both the impedance
values.

l Impedance 2
Impedance shows the electrical resistance of the reference electrode liquid junction. The liquid
junction forms the electrolytic contact between the reference electrode and the measuring
electrode, so it must be kept clean and filled with conductive electrolyte. Otherwise the
measurement will suffer from instability, drift and measuring errors. The electrical impedance is
one of the most important.
In case of Input Impedance setting is High and the measured input-2 impedance value is
higher than 100 k,the display shows M RANGE. The measured input-2 impedance value is
lower than 100 k, display shows BAD.
If both impedance measurements are disabled (Error setting: Off), the display shows - - - - (bar).
If either impedance measurement 1 or 2 is enabled, the display shows both the impedance
values.

n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled.
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 4.2.7.

The Reset wellness data button can reset wellness data.


When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.

NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)

n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.

n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.

n Projected maintenance
The projected maintenance function predicts the date when the sensor unit will need recalibrating
for maintaining measurement accuracy. The function checks the input-2 impedance (reference
impedance) every 24 hours.
The function predicts the date when the input-2 impedance will cross the upper or lower limits,
and indicates the date and its status (the status is displayed in parentheses).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-9
As shown in Figure 3.8, the date is predicted based on the intersection point of the upper or lower
limits and the extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method.

Upper limit

Value
Lower limit
3

Current Projected Day


date maintenance date F0310.ai

Figure 3.8

The status shows the certainty of the projected maintenance date in terms of the correlation
coefficient R. Tables 3.1 and 3.2 show respective display patterns.
Table 3.1 Display pattern of the projected maintenance date
Projected date -- 0-1 month 1-3 months 3-6 months 6-12 months Over 1 year
- - : cannot be predictable due to insufficient data
Table 3.2 Display pattern of the status
(- - - - -) (Poor) (Reasonable) (Excellent)
Status
(R < 0.50) (0.50 R < 0.70) (0.70 R < 0.85) (0.85 R < 1.00)

n Projected replacement
The projected replacement function predicts the date when the sensor will need replacing for
maintaining the measurement accuracy, based on the pH zero and pH slope on each calibration,
and reference impedance (input-2 impedance) after each calibration. The projected replacement
date is predicted based on these parameters stored upon calibration, and displayed the same as
that of projected maintenance. For details, see the description about the projected maintenance.
Since three parameters (pH zero, pH slope, and input-2 impedance after calibration) are used for
this projection, the nearest coming day is selected as the projected replacement date from the
extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method. PH
n PH module (sensor)
With this screen, you can check the module productions number and software revision of the
installed module.

n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.

n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has two types of logbook per sensor to store history information on
events, such as changed settings and calibrations.
By selecting one of the logbooks that you wish to check, you can retrieve and check this
information. Storage of history information on each event in a logbook or which logbook to use for
storage can be set up on the Configure logbook screen. For details, see section 4.5.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-10
History information on events are automatically stored on the preset conditions.
In addition to this storing, following three messages can be manually stored in the logbook;
"Sensor washed by hand", "Module replaced", "Sensor replaced"

To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered.

When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 4.6.3.)

Read Logbook:
(Fig.3.6)
logbook1-1
logbook1-1
logbook1-2

logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 Memorandum:
Power on **
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced

Finish

logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on
Enter?
No No
Yes

Finish
** When storing message manually.

Figure 3.9 Detail display (continued)

3.5 Trend graphics


Pressing on the Zoom display changes the display to a graphical mode in which the
average measured value is shown on a time scale. The Live value is also digitally displayed in
a text box. The time scale (X-axis) and the primary value scale (Y-axis) are set in the DISPLAY
SETUP menu (Section 4.7.2).
The screen displays the trend of up to 41 averages of the measurement for each time interval.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 samples the measurements every second. The trending graphic also
shows the maximum and minimum measured values in that interval.
For example, if the time scale is set to 4 hours, then the trend is shown for 4 hours prior to the
actual measurement. Each point on the trend line represents the average over 46060/41 =
351 measurements (seconds).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-11
NOTE
Updating the trend screen setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

Tag: PH pH1
Measurement value (pH)

12.00 10.38pH
Max. and min. values on this display

8.40
Current process value 3
5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum

Time
Figure 3.10 Trend screen

The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.

Tag: PH pH1
mA
20 12.00 10.38pH

8.40
12
5.60

4
15.00 2.50

Next 12:00 12:20 12:40

Tag: PH Temperature1
12.00 25.0C
PH
8.40

5.60

2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40

Figure 3.11 Trend graphics

3.6 Instrument status screen


In the field of the Main display, the (Warning) or (Fault) sign appears according
to the instrument status. Upon pressing the displayed button, detailed information of the relevant
status appears.
See n Information button on page 1-9.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-12

3.7 Calibration and Commissioning


Allows you to calibrate and configure the instrument. These operations can be protected with a
password.
For details on the password, refer to section 4.6.3.
Execute & Setup
Execute:
Calibration
HOLD
Temporary output

Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 3.12 Execute & Setup

Pressing changes the display to the Execute & Setup screen.

Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press

to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD, Temporary output), read chapter 5, and for commissioning, read chapter
4.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-1

4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP
This chapter describes how to check and change settings from the Commissioning screen.
When you move to the Commissioning screen, the output is held.
Execute &Setup Commissioning
Execute: Sensor setup
Calibration/Wash Measurement setup
HOLD Output setup
Temporary output Error configuration
Logbook configuration
Setup: Advanced setup 4
Comissioning Display setup
Change language Calculated data setup
Start Quick Setup

Figure 4.1 Example of the commissioning screen (for two modules)

Operations in Commissioning can be password-protected. If you set up a password, always take


a note of it. For details on setting a password, see section 4.6.3.

Figure 3.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.

On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 4.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Sensor type first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options change
accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 4.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of pH/ORP in the
attached CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of pH/ORP and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
PH
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument.
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section 4.6.1).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-2
Table 4.1 Menu Structure and Default Values in Commissioning
Parameter Ref. sect.
Sensor setup Sensor type 4.1
Measurement setup Measurement 4.2.1
Temperature setting Temp. element 4.2.2
Temp. compensation Compensation 4.2.3
Reference temp.
Process Temp. Compensation
Calibration settings pH settings Zero and Slope units 4.2.4
Limits and timing
Buffers (select set)
Zero/Slope/ITP
Auto correct (Zero, Slope)
ORP settings Limit and timing
rH settings Zero/Slope
Impedance settings 4.2.5
Concentration Unit 4.2.6
Sensor diag. settings Input 1 imp.: 4.2.7
FINE
Input 2 imp.:
Process time
Heat cycle:
Define heat cycle
Output setup mA 4.3
Output Process parameter
Setup
Linear 0 % value
100% value
Table
Burn
Damping time
Simulate Simulation perc.
Configure Hold
Error configuration 4.4
Logbook configuration 4.5
Advanced setup Settings 4.6.1
Tag 4.6.2
Passwords 4.6.3
Date/Time 4.6.4
Communication 4.6.5
HART
PH201G
Factory setup 4.6.6
Display setup Main display (Dual display, Individual display) 4.7.1
Trend 4.7.2
Auto Return 4.7.3
Adjust contrast 4.7.4
MONITOR display 4.7.5
Calculated data setup Function 4.8

NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 4.1) are crucial for measurement.
If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the parameters that may
initialize other values, see Appendix 1.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-3

4.1 Sensor setup


Sensor type setup is determined by the sensor to be connected to the instrument. Select one of
the following three sensor types:
pH: Only pH is measured. The glass electrode (input 1) is connected to terminal 15
and the reference electrode (input 2) is connected to terminal 13.
ORP: Only Redox is measured. The metal electrode (input 1) is connected to terminal 15
and the reference electrode (or glass) (input 2) is connected to terminal 13.
pH + ORP: Both pH and ORP are measured simultaneously. The glass electrode is connected
to terminal 15, the reference electrode to terminal 13, and the metal electrode to
terminal 14. This setup also allows rH to be measured. 4

For best results, connect a liquid earth to terminal 14. For details of the wiring connections,
see Section 2.5.1. If there is no liquid earth, the sensor diagnostic function is disabled; set all of
Impedance 1 too high/low and Impedance 2 too high/low in Error configuration to Off so that
no related error is caused.

NOTE
The selection of Sensor type determines the menu structure throughout the instrument.
When pH + ORP is specified as the sensor type, the object under measurement will be displayed
at the top of Measurement setup.
If the sensor type is changed from pH to ORP, part of the relevant setup is reset, requiring
reconfiguration.
When ORP is specified, and when an ORP sensor doesnt have any temperature element,
set both of Temperature too high/low in Error configuration to Off so that no related error is
caused. (Refer to the section 4.4.) Without temperature input, a temperature shown on the Main
display or the Home display is the maximum or the minimum temperature of the temperature
elements range set on the Temperature settings. Setting in Display setup can make
temperature value on the display not to be displayed. (Refer to the section 4.7.)

PH
4.2 Measurement setup
This section describes how to set up various parameters relating to measurements.
Measurements are performed based on the measurement parameter setup.

For measurement setup, part of the menu structure of settable items changes depending on the
Sensor type selected in 4.1 Sensor setup.

4.2.1 Measurement
If pH or ORP is selected in Sensor type, a measurement type does not need to be selected
and it is not displayed.
If pH + ORP is selected in Sensor type, five measurement types can be selected for the
Measurement item at the top of the Measurement setup screen. Select a suitable measurement
type for the application.
Moreover, associated items are added to parameters in Error configuration, Display setup,
etc.; check the setting condition of each item.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-4

4.2.2 Temperature settings


Select the temperature element used for compensation from among Pt1000, Pt100, 3kBalco,
8k55, PTC10k, 6k8, and 500. Select the same type as the temperature element that is actually
connected.

Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix

4.2.3 Temperature compensation


ORP measurement involves no temperature input. No setting is required on the temperature
compensation. Process temperature compensation is effective if T.C. ORP mV/C in Temp.
Coef. is set.

n Temperature compensation
This compensation of pH value is performed on the Nernst equation.
Two methods can be used: Automatic and Manual. Select Automatic when a temperature
element is used, or select Manual when a manually set temperature is used.

NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should be
set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display or the Home display is this
manually set temperature.

n Reference temperature
Set a reference temperature to which the measured pH value must be compensated. Normally
25C is used, so this temperature is chosen as the default value.

n Process temperature compensation


Select a temperature compensation method. None does not perform the temperature
compensation.
If pH is selected in Sensor type, choose process temperature compensation from among
None, TC, Matrix, and NEN6411. If ORP is selected in Sensor type, choose it from among
None and TC.

l TC
This method uses the linear compensation function.
It is possible to adjust the temperature coefficient (TC) factor directly. If the temperature
coefficient factor of the sample liquid is known from laboratory experiments or has been
previously determined, it can be entered here.
This TC is a pH variation to 1 C (pH/T). Adjust the value between -0.1 to 0.1 pH/C.
In combination with the reference temperature setting, a linear compensation function is
obtained, which is suitable for all kinds of chemical solutions.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-5
l Matrix
Matrix means a temperature compensation which uses the temperature compensation
matrix. The temperature compensation matrix is a table of pH values at various temperatures
corresponding to the pH values at the standard temperature. For details, see Appendix 1.

When the temperature or the precompensated pH value is out of the range of the temperature
compensation matrix, the temperature compensation error (warning) will be issued. This is not a
device error.
In this case, however, the temperature compensation is performed by extrapolation.
4
NOTE
To display the precompensated pH value, set the Process Temp. Compensation to None.
Select Measurement setup Temp. compensation Process Temp. Compensation.

l NEN6411
This algorithm takes into account the dissociation of water in strong acid and strong alkaline
solutions. It is particularly useful for pH measurement of boiler feed water.

4.2.4 Calibration settings


The screen flow differs depending on the combination of objects to be measured.
Calibration settings for a pH converter involve slope (sensitivity), zero (aspot), and ITP
(isothermal point). Figure 4.2 shows the pH value against the mV output of the sensor. The
characteristic for pH measurement is an offset also known as aspot [mV] or zero [pH] and a
Slope [%, mV/pH]. For an ideal sensor, the theoretical slope is 59.16 mV/pH at 25C. The slope
can be entered in mV/pH or as a percentage of the theoretical slope (100% corresponds to
59.16 mV/pH). ITP represents a pH value where the output of the sensor does not change with
temperature. Note that slope and zero are defined at 25C.
500
pH
PH
mV mV

ITP (Isothermal point)


Aspot
0
0 mV 0 C
10 C
25 C
- 200
0 7 14
ITP Zero pH

Figure 4.2 Calibration parameters

n pH settings
l Zero and Slope units
Zero is an alternative to Asymmetry Potential. The method of zero (aspot) unit conforms to the
DIN standard for IEC 60746-2 instruments. Zero is defined in pH or mV.
The unit of Slope (sensitivity) is mV/pH or % (with the theoretical value as 100%).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-6
l Limits and timing
Zero High/Low
Set the high and low limits of Zero (aspot). During calibration, it is checked whether the new zero
exceeds these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures
and calibration of bad sensors, which results in higher accuracy. The default values should be
adjusted to suit the application and the users criterion.
Slope High/Low
Set the high and low limits of Slope (sensitivity). During calibration, it is checked whether the
new slope exceeds these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration
procedures and calibration of bad sensors, which results in higher accuracy. The default values
should be adjusted to suit the application and the users criterion.
Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this set value, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.
Stabilization time
During calibration, the stability of the pH value is constantly monitored. When variations of the
pH value are within a value set in Step Range over this stabilization time set here, the value
is regarded as being stable. If the pH value does not stabilize within 10 minutes, calibration is
aborted.
Calibr. interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will be notified according to the setting in Calib. time exceeded in the error
configuration.

l Buffers (select set)


Calibration is made using standard calibration buffers. We recommend the NIST (JIS equivalent)
standard buffers for highest accuracy, but the user is free to select DIN 19267, US, or a user-
defined buffer. The standard buffers can be found in Appendix 1.
Three types of user-defined buffer tables can be defined. On the Free programmable screen,
select a buffer table that you wish to set up. When a buffer table is selected on this screen, the
Buffer table 1 to Buffer table 3 screens of the selected buffer table are displayed.
Clear table?
If you select Yes and press Yes when prompted to clear the table, the contents of the buffer
table will be cleared, the display will return to the Buffer table screen automatically, and the Table
was cleared message will be displayed. If you want to perform temperature compensation using
the matrix after clearing the table, matrix values must be redefined.
Check values?
If you select Yes, a value check starts. When the check ends, the results will be displayed on
the screen. When the results are normal, the No error message appears. In case of an error,
error information is displayed.

l Zero/Slope/ITP
You can enter Zero (aspot), Slope (sensitivity), and ITP values directly in the screen displayed.
These data can be obtained from the manufacturer of the probe, by the users laboratory, etc.

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter this data. In most cases, as the FLXA202/FLXA21 automatically does
this while performing calibration, the feature is used in the case of special electrode systems or
where calibration in the process environment is not possible. See Chapter 5.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-7
l Auto correct (Zero, Slope)
This function calculates calibration coefficients from the transition of past calibration data (zero,
slope) and compensates pH value using these calibration coefficients after the latest calibration.
The default setting is Disable. To make the function effective, select Enable.

a: Actual change
d b: Zero and slope calculated from
the calibration data
c: Zero and slope calculated from
Zero, Slope

the calibration data and shifted


using the latest calibration data
d: Data from calibration 4
a

b
c
Calibration

Time
Figure 4.3 Auto correct

n ORP settings
l Limits and timing
Zero High/Low
Zero (aspot) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new zero exceeds
these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures and
calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be adjusted to
suit the application and the users criterion.

Slope High/Low
Slope (sensitivity) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new slope
exceeds these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures
and calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be
adjusted to suit the application and the users criterion. PH
Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this setpoint, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.

Stabilization time
During calibration, the stability of the ORP value is constantly monitored. When variations of the
ORP value are within a value set in Step Range over this stabilization time set here, the value
is regarded as being stable. If the ORP value does not stabilize within 10 minutes, calibration is
aborted.

Calibr. interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will be notified according to the setting in Calib. time exceeded in the error
configuration.

l Zero/Slope
You can enter zero and slope values directly.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-8

4.2.5 Impedance settings


This screen is used to set the impedance relating to an input impedance check.
Input 1 impedance represents the glass membrane impedance of a pH sensor. In case of an
ORP sensor, it represents metal electrode impedance. Input 2 impedance stands for reference
impedance.
If you select Input impedance: Low, the display moves to the Input impedance screen, enabling
you to set the high and low limits.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has an impedance check, which is capable of monitoring the impedance
of various sensor systems. In order to fine tune this diagnostic tool, it is necessary to set it up to
match the sensors used.
The system can be set to measure the impedances of glass (input 1 impedance: high) and
reference (input 2 impedance: low) electrodes. In applications that tend to leave deposits on the
electrodes or to clog the reference sensor junction, the impedance check (set error configuration)
on the reference sensor can be used to initiate an alarm, or to initiate the wash cleaning process,
if one of the limits is exceeded. Sensors with a liquid earth use this liquid earth in impedance
measurement. Sensors with a liquid earth that Yokogawa can provide include PH8EFP, PH8ERP,
PH8EHP, OR8ERG, OR8EFG, etc. In pure water measurement using PH8EHP, the impedance
of the solution to be measured is high; settings on the Error configuration screen should be set to
Off so that the Impedance 2 too high error is not generated.
A sensor without a liquid earth cannot measure impedance. All settings on the Error configuration
screen should be set to Off so that no Impedance 1 too high or Impedance 2 too high error is
generated.
Sensors not equipped with a liquid earth that Yokogawa can provide include HA405, HA406,
DPA406, DPA405, DPAS405, HF405, HA485, DPA485, etc.
This liquid earth refers to a metal pole built into a sensor or connected externally that contacts the
solution to be measured and transmits the potential of this solution to the converter.

4.2.6 Concentration
Generally pH values are not converted into concentrations. Following linear conversion is not
suitable for a lot of measurements.

The FLXA202/FLXA21 is capable of converting a measured pH value into concentration for


display. Parameters required for concentration calculation can be arbitrarily set by the user.
Those parameters are as follows:
Unit: The default value is %. The unit can be selected from among mg/L, g/L, and
ppm.
pH: The default values are 0 and 14 pH (0 to 14). They are the pH zero and span
required for conversion to concentration.
Concentration: The default value are 0 and 100%. Concentration for each pH can be set.
Concentration can be assigned to the pH value zero and span individually.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-9

4.2.7 Sensor diagnostic settings


This screen is used to set items relating to sensor diagnostics displayed on the screens invoked

by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.

The setting parameters include Input 1 imp., Input 2 imp., Progress time, and Heat cycle.
When input impedance is set High (section 4.2.5), FINE value can be changed. When input 4
impedance is set Low, its High limit and Low limit will be the limits for diagnostic.
It is also possible to set the Bad limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle
temp and Heat cycle time of the heat cycle.

4.3 Output setup


The general procedure is to first define the function of the output, Output or Simulate. Then, set
the process parameters associated with the output. On the Output, an output of measured value
is selected. On the Simulate, a simulation value can be set.
And, the parameters for HOLD function can be set on this setting.

l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.
Process parameter
The available process parameters depend on the selected Sensor type on the Sensor setup
and the selected Measurement type on the Measurement setup.
The output of the selected process parameter is shown as a bar on the bottom of the Main
display or the Home display. And its parameter symbol (for example, PH1 or Diff-pH) is shown
above the bar, too. When a selected process parameter is displayed as a measurement value,
the top left number or character is turned to be white number or character on black background
(for example, or ). (Refer to the section 1.3.)
PH

Process parameters can be selected from among:


pH1, Temperature 1, and ORP1: 1st modules measured values
pH2, Temperature 2, and ORP2: 2nd modules measured values
Calculated*1 and Redundant*2: special output based on two inputs
*1: Refer to the section 4.8, Calculated data setup.
*2: Refer to the <Redundant system> below.

Calculated data and Redundant system are available when two modules are installed on the
instrument. And, these functions are available when the pH (or the parameter including pH)
or the ORP is selected on the Sensor type setting and the Measurement type setting. The
parameter for the 1st module and the 2nd module should be the same. For wrong selection, an
error is given.
When the process parameter is set at Calculated of Redundant, dont change the Sensor
type or the Measurement type. If it is changed, the process parameter will go back to the
default.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-10
<Redundant system>
On the Redundant system, when a sensor (Sensor 1) of the 1st module fails, the output is
automatically switched to the output of the 2nd module.
After repairing the Sensor 1, manual reset of redundant system is necessary to return to the
output of 1st module from the output of the 2nd module.
Display R(1) R(2) R(1)
Repair sensor
Alive Dead Dead Alive
Sensor 1
Alive
mA mA

Sensor 2 Alive Alive Alive


mA

Sensor 1 is dead. Redundant system


(automatic) restart (manual)
After repairing sensor 1, reset the backup made
If sensor 1 fails, the Even if a fault on the sensor 1 is by the redundant system. This enables the
output is automatically recovered automatically after sensor 1 value to be incorporated in the output.
switched to the sensor-2 fault detection, the output will not On the Reset redundant system, selection of
value. be switched back automatically Yes makes the output return to the output of
and the sensor 2 value will the 1st module.
continue to be output.
Output setup Reset redundant system
mA Output Return mA to Sensor1?
This display is the
example when
Redundant is
selected as a
process parameter.
Configure Hold
Reset redundant Yes
No
F0503_2.ai

Figure 4.4 Redundant system

Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered.)
Burn
Select the designated output in case of a fault from among Off, Low, and High. See 4.4 Error
configuration to set the output.
Off: Output depends on the measured value.
Low: Output is fixed to 3.6 mA
High: Output is fixed to 22.0 mA.
Damping time
This is the time taken for a response to a step input change to reach 90% of the final value
(attenuation time). Set this time in sec.

l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-11

n Configure Hold
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 5.4.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.
During the Commissioning or the Quick Setup, the mA output is automatically held. The preset
value depends on a setting on the Last or fixed.
Last: The preset value is a value measured just before hold condition.
Fixed: The preset value is a value set in the Fixed value mA.
When the Fixed is selected, set a mA value in the Fixed value mA.
4
Selection on the Hold during Calibration/Wash decides to activate or deactivate the hold
function automatically during calibration or wash.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
Disabled: No automatic hold function

Only when the PH201G is selected on the Communication, the message of Hold during
Calibration/Wash is displayed. On other selections, the message of Hold during Calibration is
displayed.

4.4 Error configuration


In Error configuration, configure the statuses of various error causes.

This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (4.3 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting PH
is appropriate.

The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/3 to 3/3
screens.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-12
Table 4.2 Error configuration
Display item Description Default
pH too high The pH value exceeds 16.00. Warn.
pH too low The pH value is lower than 2.00. Warn.
Temperature too high Measured process temperature is higher than the Warn.
maximum limit.
Temperature too low Measured process temperature is lower than the Warn.
minimum limit.
ORP too high The ORP value is higher than 1500 mV. Off
ORP too low The ORP value is lower than 1500 mV. Off
rH too high The rH value is higher than 100. Off
rH too low The rH value is lower than 0. Off
Matrix config. error The temperature compensation matrix is not set Fault
properly (see Section 4.2.3).
Calib. time exceeded Calibration time exceeds the calibration interval Off
(see Section 4.2.4).
Wash half-time error The response to wash is abnormal. Off
Impedance 1 too high The sensor must be checked. Off
Impedance 1 too low
Impedance 2 too high
Impedance 2 too low

CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.

NOTE
The Impedance 1 too high/too low and Impedance 2 too high/too low error items are displayed
in the Error configuration screen. In general, for a pH sensor, Impedance 1 means glass
electrode, and for an ORP sensor, it means metal electrode. Impedance 2 represents the
reference electrode in all cases. The Impedance 1 too high/too low and Impedance 2 too high/
too low errors are applied to sensors with a liquid earth. Sensors with a liquid earth include
PH8EFP, PH8ERP, PH8EHP, OR8ERG, OR8EFG, etc. For sensors not equipped with a liquid
earth, these errors should all be set to Off; these sensors include HA405, HA406, DPA406,
DPA405, DPAS405, HF405, HA485, DPA485, etc. Moreover, for measuring a solution with low
conductivity such as when using a pH meter for pure water, set the Impedance 2 too high error
to Off. Otherwise, no impedance can be detected.

NOTE
When ORP is specified as a sensor type in Sensor setup, and when an ORP sensor, such as
OR8ERG and OR8EFG, doesnt have any temperature element, set both of Temperature too
high/low in Error to Off so that no related error is caused. Due to the open input of temperature
signal, a false error may happen as if temperature goes over a high limit or a low limit.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-13

4.5 Logbook configuration


In Logbook configuration, the user configures information to be saved to a logbook or initializes
the logbooks.
Logbooks are used to keep an electronic record of events such as error messages, calibrations,
and programmed data changes. By referring to this log, users can, for instance, easily determine
maintenance or replacement schedules.
In Logbook configuration, the user can select Off, 1-1, or 1-2 for each item of interest to be
logged. (For sensor 2, select Off, 2-1, or 2-2.) This can be done for items displayed on the
Settings logbook 1/3 to 3/3 screens. Assigning 1-1 or 1-2 to each item allows information to be
organized and logged in a logbook.
4

NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1 or 2-1. This logbook may be
full earlier. It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2 or 2-2.

For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1 or 1-2 can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (maximum 13 pages).

NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.

4.6 Advanced setup


Advanced setup is used to set functions relating to matters other than measurements such as the
selection of settings, tag setting, password setting for protecting calibration and commissioning
operations, date setting, and communication setting.
(Factory setup is for service engineers only; there is no item to be set by the user.) PH
4.6.1 Settings
In Settings, select an item to be set as the default value from among No action, Load factory
settings, Save user settings, and Load user settings.
When the default values are loaded, the instrument will be restarted. (In the case of Save user
settings, it will not be restarted.)
The following parameters are not included in the defaults:
Tag
The contents of all logbooks

NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.

To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the
menu message.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-14
If you select Load factory settings, the instrument will be set to the default settings at factory
shipment.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the factory settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
When Save user settings is selected, the current settings can be saved as the defaults.
When this item is selected, the user settings will start to be saved immediately. After saving the

parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.

4.6.2 Tag
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is PH or FLXA21-PH. When two sensor modules are installed,
each module can have their own tag numbers.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main and home displays.

4.6.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.

When you set a password, always take a note of it.

When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.

4.6.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.

4.6.5 Communication
In Communication, select the communication setting from among None, HART, and PH201G.
The burn down current value is 3.6 mA.

NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.

In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-15

n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and
FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)

l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple 4
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.

l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.

l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.
If blank is selected for a parameter, items below that parameter must all be set to blank. If an item
is blank, those below it cannot be set to a status other than blank.

For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.

n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, Fail contact, and Wash
contact.

l Hold contact PH
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.

l Fail contact
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 4.4 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-16
l Wash contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, items for a wash can be set on the Wash settings screen.
In the Wash settings screen, set the interval time, wash time, and recovery time and setup of
various washes.
Interval time: Set the wash interval in hours.
Wash time/measure time: Set the wash time in minutes. In a continuous wash, wash time is
replaced by measure time.
Recovery time: Set the recovery time in minutes.
Manual wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, a wash cycle can be activated manually. On the
Calibration/Wash screen, press the Start manual wash cycle to perform a
manual wash.
Imp2 wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, a wash cycle can be started if the Impedance 2
too high error occurs with respect to the reference electrode.
Continuous wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
A continuous wash cycle is started at the instant when this item is enabled.
In a continuous wash, the Measure time and Interval time are reversed
(see Figure 4.5).
When a continuous wash is disabled

Tint Tint

Tw Tr Tw Tr

Tint: Interval time


Tw: Wash time
Tr: Recovery time

When a continuous wash is enabled

Tint Tint

Tw Tw Tr Tw Tw Tr

Tint: Interval time


Tw: Measure time
Tw: Wash time
Tr: Recovery time F050605_2.ai

Figure 4.5

The instrument has a function for checking whether measurements are normally made after
wash, allowing you to check a sensor response.
The wash recovery check is performed by making use of the time to recover half the wash-cycle
pH change. The half the wash-cycle pH change recovery time replaces the relaxation time by the
recovery time.
Whether to conduct the wash recovery check can be set on the Error settings 2/3 screen. Half the
wash-cycle pH change refers to half the value (1/2pH) of the difference (pH) between the pH
value during normal measurement of an example in Figure 4.6 and the pH value detected during
wash. If the pH value during wash is greater than 1/2pH when 1/3 tR has elapsed, the electrode
is assumed to be good. If it is smaller than 1/2pH, then the electrode is assumed to be bad.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-17
However, for applications where the pH during wash shows almost the same value as the normal
pH, the difference will be approximately zero. In such a case, disable the wash recovery check.
An example of such applications is the monitoring of waste water pH. If you select water jet
cleaning in such a case, the normal pH as well as the washing time pH will be around pH 7; the
difference will be approximately zero, so the recovery time check will not work normally.
This function is available either for ORP measurement only.
tI : Wash Period

Good Electrode
4
pH
1/2pH
Bad Electrode
pH

1/3tR
tW : Wash Time tR : Recovery Time

tI : Wash Period Time


tW : Wash Time
tR : Recovery Time
F050605_3.ai

Figure 4.6

4.6.6 Factory setup


For Factory setup, there is no item to be set by the user.

NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.
PH

4.7 Display setup


This screen is used to make various settings relating to screen display.

NOTE
Settable items differ depending on settings in Sensor setup and Measurement setup.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-18

4.7.1 Main display (Dual display, Individual display)


Display setup Display setup
Main display Dual display
Trend Individual display
Auto Return Trend
Ad.just contrast or Auto Return
MONITOR display Adjust contrast
MONITOR display

Figure 4.7 Display setup screens for a single module (left) and two modules (right)

l Main display
When one module is installed on the instrument, only the Main display is available.
Three measurement values can be set to display on the Main display as a primary value (1st
line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value (3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.

l Dual display
This screen is used to set items to be displayed in the top part (1st row) and bottom part (2nd
row) of the Home display. These settings are available when two sensors are installed in the
instrument.
When the Empty is selected for the 2nd row, the Home display can not be displayed.

l Individual display
When two modules are installed on the instrument, display items on the Main display for each
module can be set on these settings.
On the PH1 display or PH2 display screen, three measurement values can be set to display
on each Main display as a primary value (1st line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value
(3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-19

4.7.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).

l X-axis: Timing
Select the X-axis timings time span on the trend graph display from a list.
4
l Y-axis: Limits
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.

NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

4.7.3 Auto Return


When no operation is performed for the time set in Auto Return, the display returns to the
Monitor display (or to the Main display when the MONITOR display is disabled) and the analyzer
returns to a normal measuring mode. (When the Trend display is selected, the Auto Return
doesnt work.)
Select the time from among Disable, 10 min, and 60 min. When the Auto Return function is not
used, select Disable.

NOTE
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.

PH
4.7.4 Adjust contrast
The LCD screen contrast can be adjusted.
Pressing the keys adjusts the contrast in 11 levels from +5 to 5 (including the default value
of 0).

4.7.5 MONITOR display


Select Enable so that the Monitor display becomes available. A default is Enable.
During Hold/Wash condition and a warning/fault condition, the Main display or the Home display
is displayed to indicate the condition.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP> 4-20

4.8 Calculated data setup


On this setup, parameters can be set for calculated data.
When two modules are installed on the instrument, the calculated data can be set for pH values
or ORP values measured by two sensors.
Select Differential or Average on the Calculated data setup screen.
Differential: A difference between measurement values measured by a sensor 1 and sensor 2
is an output as a calculated result.
(Diff) (value of the sensor 1) (value of the sensor 2)
Average: The average of measurement values measured by a sensor 1 and sensor 2 is an
output as a calculated result.
(Ave) (value of the sensor 1 + value of the sensor 2) / 2

To display the calculated result, select Calculated on the Dual display screen (Section 4.7.1).
(The setting on the Individual display has no effect.)
While displaying a calculated data, measurement value of the sensor 1 or sensor 2 can be
Sensor Sensor
1 2
checked on the each sensors display with pressing or at the lower right on the Main
display.

Pressing returns the display to the original calculated data display.


A calculated data can be set as a process parameter on the mA (Output) setup screen (Section
4.3).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<5. CALIBRATION OF pH/ORP> 5-1

5. CALIBRATION OF pH/ORP
Before pH measurement, calibrate the pH sensor with the standard solution.
Before ORP measurement, check the electrode as a part of regular maintenance.

NOTE
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
4.7.3.)

5
Only when pH + ORP is selected
on the Sensor setup screen
Execute & Setup Calibration pH Calibration
Execute: Manual pH
Calibration Automatic ORP
HOLD Sample or Temperature
Temporary output Temperature calibration

Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 5.1 Calibration

The calibration items include pH, ORP, rH, and Temperature.


The item to be calibrated is determined according to the settings made in the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup in Commissioning.

Press to select Execute: Calibration, choose the item to be calibrated, configure the
calibration settings, then perform calibration.

NOTE
Note the following when performing calibration with buffer solutions.
PH
1. Before starting a calibration, make sure the electrode system is properly cleaned and
the electrodes are fully functional. They must then be rinsed with clean water to avoid
contamination of the calibration solution(s).
2. Always use fresh buffer solution to avoid the risk of introducing errors from contaminated or
old solutions. Buffers supplied as liquids have a limited shelf life, especially alkaline buffers,
which absorb CO2 from the air.
3. Yokogawa strongly recommends NIST/DIN 19266 buffer standards for the best accuracy
and buffer capacity. Commercially adjusted buffers (e.g., pH 7.00, 9.00 or 10.00) are a
compromise as a standard, and are often supplied without a temperature dependency
curve. Their stability will never be as good as NIST (JIS equivalent) solutions.
Always ensure that the sensors are properly conditioned, clean and filled with the correct
electrolyte solution (if appropriate) before starting a calibration. Refer to the sensor instructions
for details.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<5. CALIBRATION OF pH/ORP> 5-2

5.1 pH calibration
There are the Manual, Automatic, and Sample modes of pH calibration.

5.1.1 Manual calibration


The unit is adjusted to match the value of the buffer standards or a process solution with a known
pH value (buffer solution).
The user determines the pH value, temperature influence, and stability.
Select the calibration type from among [zero/slope], [zero/slope/ITP(3point)], and [zero/slope1,2
(3point)].

Calibration is performed stepwise; follow the prompts displayed on the screen.


A stability check is conducted at each measurement point. Proceed to the next step only after the
reading has stabilized.
At calibration, we advise leaving the sensors for three to five minutes in the buffer solution before
proceeding to the next step even when the reading has stabilized. This will give reliable and
accurate calibration results.

NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)

l zero/slope
This calibration type is one-point or two-point calibration.
One-point calibration performs the zero adjustment only. Two-point calibration performs the zero
and slope adjustments.

l zero/slope/ITP(3point)
This calibration type is ITP-type three-point calibration.
If ITP does not have pH 7, three-point calibration is performed to obtain the zero (asymmetry),
slope (sensitivity), and ITP (isothermal point) for calibration.

Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The 2nd buffer solution should be pH 7 2.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperatures of the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be at least 20C higher or lower
than the temperature of the 1st buffer solution.
To calculate the pH value of the 3rd buffer solution (pH3cal), insert the pH and temperature
values of the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions and the temperature value of the 3rd buffer
solution into the following equation.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<5. CALIBRATION OF pH/ORP> 5-3

( tt
3 - t1
2 - t1
t -t
(273.15 + t2)(ITP - pH2) + (1 - 3 1 ) x (273.15 + t1)(ITP - pH1)
t2 - t1 )
pH3cal = ITP -
(273.15 + t3)
pHn: pH value of n-th buffer solution
Tn: Temperature of n-th buffer solution (C)
ITP: ITP value displayed in calibration settings (see section 4.2.4)
Assign 7.00 as the ITP value when a specific value is not available or for the first
calibration of a sensor.
Do not use the 3rd solution whose pH value is within pH3cal 1.

l zero/slope1,2(3point)
5
This calibration type is the line-segment type three-point calibration.
If the relation between electromotive force and pH is not in proportion for a wide range, divide the
relevant range into two sections and obtain the zero (asymmetry) and slope (sensitivity) in each
section to perform calibration.

Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.

5.1.2 Automatic calibration


Calibration can easily be performed by following the calibration menus.
Pre-select the buffer solution to be used from among NIST/DIN 19266, DIN 19267, US, and User
defined buffer in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration settings pH settings
Buffers (select set). See also Appendix table 1.
If you select User defined buffer, calibration is performed based on the conditions registered PH
in buffer tables 1 to 3. Use of the proper buffer table allows the system to perform reliable
calibration.
In the same way as manual pH calibration, select the calibration type from among [zero/slope],
[zero/slope/ITP(3point)], and [zero/slope1,2(3point)].

Calibration is performed stepwise; follow the prompts displayed on the screen.


A stability check is conducted at each measurement point. Proceed to the next step only after the
reading has stabilized.

NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<5. CALIBRATION OF pH/ORP> 5-4
l zero/slope
Select the solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings and
perform calibration by following the prompts on the screen.

l zero/slope/ITP(3point)
Calibration is performed in the sequence of the sequence selection menu (Table 5.1) of the
solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings. Perform calibration
by following the prompts on the screen.

Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The 2nd buffer solution in the buffer table in the Free programmable screen should be pH 7
2 (at 25C).
Either of the following conditions should be met.
- The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperature of the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions is at least 20C higher or lower than the
temperature of the 3rd buffer solution.
- The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperature of the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions is at least 20C higher or lower than the
temperature of the 1st buffer solution.

l zero/slope1,2(3point)
Calibration is performed in the sequence of the sequence selection menu (Table 5.1) of the
solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings. Perform calibration
by following the prompts on the screen.

Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
Table 5.1 Selection of Buffer Solutions in Three-point Calibration
Buffer settings Buffer sequence selection menus
NIST/DIN 19266 PH1.7PH6.9PH9.2
PH4.0PH6.9PH9.2
PH9.2PH6.9PH1.7
PH9.2PH6.9PH4.0
DIN 19267 PH4.7PH6.8PH9.2
PH9.2PH6.8PH4.7
US PH4.0PH7.0PH10.0
PH10.0PH7.0PH4.0
User defined buffer table1table2table3
able3table2table1

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<5. CALIBRATION OF pH/ORP> 5-5

5.1.3 Sample calibration


A sample calibration is a single-point calibration for only the zero (asymmetric). It adjusts the
recorded reading to a collected sample value. Press [Take Sample] to record a collected sample
value in memory. Re-enter the Sample Cal. screen and press [Start calibration] to perform a
sample calibration. This updates the recorded data.

NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)

5.2 Temperature calibration


For the most accurate measurements, it is important to have a precise temperature
measurement. Measure the temperature with a high-precision thermometer and adjust the
sensor reading accordingly. For best accuracy, this should be done as near to the normal
operating temperature as possible.

5.3 ORP calibration (rH calibration)


The calibration modes for ORP or rH are Manual and Sample. No automatic calibration
feature is available in an ORP or rH calibration.

Calibration is performed stepwise. Follow the prompts displayed on the screen.


A stability check is made at each measurement point. Proceed to the next step only after the
reading has stabilized.

NOTE
PH
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<5. CALIBRATION OF pH/ORP> 5-6

5.4 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last).
Use this menu to hold the output.

For the settings, see n Configure Hold on page 4-11.


During commissioning or quick setup, the output is automatically held.
Setting Hold during Calibration/Wash to Disabled deactivates the hold function during
calibration or washing.

Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF.
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:PH

10.38 pH
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA PH1 20mA

Figure 5.2 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled

HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.

5.5 Temporary output


If measurement cannot be made due to replacement of one of the sensors, assignment of mA
output can be temporarily changed from the currently setup sensor to the other sensor. This
feature is enabled only when two sensors are connected and the process parameters including
pH have been configured.

Press to select Execute: Temporary output and then choose the process parameter to be
assigned on the Temporary output screen.

When process parameter assignment has been modified, the indication at the upper left of the
screen changes to .
The feature is disabled the moment the screen returns to the Main display, and the setting
(process parameter in mA output setting) returns to the original condition.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-1

6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)
This chapter describes the screen operations of SC, the object to be measured.
Further details of screen operations can also be found in section 1.2.
Tag:SC

10.38 mS/cm Calibration


6

25.0 C Cell constant(manual) 8.1 c.c.(manual)


Cell constant(automatic)8.2 SC1(Temp.comp.1)
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA Air calibration 8.3 SC2(Temp.comp.2)
Sample 8.4
c.c.automatic
Temperature coefficient 8.5
Select Std
Execute & Setup Temperature calibration 8.6
Execute: Sample
Calibration HOLD 8.7 SC1(Temp.comp.1)
HOLD SC2(Temp.comp.2)
Temporary output
Temporary output 8.8 TC
Setup: SC1(Temp.comp.1)
Commissioning SC2(Temp.comp.2)
Change language
Change language 2.7
Start Quick Setup
Quick setup Date/Time Measurement setup Configure sensor
6.2 7.5.4 7.1.1 7.1.2

Comissioning Output setup Temperature settings mA(output)


Measuremet setup 7.1 mA: Output mA(Output) 7.1.3 7.2
Output setup 7.2 Simulate Setup: Linear
Error configuration 7.3 Table Table mA
Logbook configuration 7.4 Configure Hold Enter values
Advanced setup 7.5
Display setup 7.6 Logbook configuration
Calculated data setup 7.7 Setting logbook

Advanced setup
Settings 7.5.1
Measurement setup Tag 7.5.2
Configure sensor 7.1.2 Passwords 7.5.3
Temperature settings 7.1.3 Date/Time 7.5.4
Temp. compensdation 7.1.4 Communication
Communication 7.5.5
Calibration settings 7.1.5
Concentration 7.1.6
Factory setup7.5.6
HART
PH201G SC
Sensor diag. settings 7.1.7
Display setup Main display
Main display 7.6.1 Additional text
Temp. comp. Dual display
Compensation: Manual Individual display Individual display
Method Trend 7.6.2 SC1 SC1 display
Temp.comp.1: TC SC2 Additional text
Auto Return 7.6.3
Matrix Matrix 1
Adjust contrast 7.6.4
User defined 1 Trend
Temp.comp.2: TC MONITOR display 7.6.5
User defined 2 x-axis: Timing
Matrix
Y-axis: Limits
User defined 1
Concentration Enter values
Define table Concentr. table
Enter values

Sensor diag. setting


Define heat cycle

Figure 6.1 Menu structure of SC (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)

6.1 Change language


The screen is set to display English at factory shipment; if you wish to use the FLXA202/FLXA21
in another language, first select a language as described in section 2.7.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-2

6.2 Quick setup


The Quick setup screen is used to set up the basic items you want to set up first, such as the
date/time and sensor settings. The detailed settings are described in chapter 8, Commissioning.
You may leave the Quick setup now and return to it later; however, it is recommended to perform
the quick setup first.
Each time the FLXA202/FLXA21 is started up, this screen is displayed. If it is not necessary to

change the setup, press No or .

NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display or the Home display when the MONITOR display is disabled).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-3

Quick setup Measurement setup mA(output)


Start quick setup? Measure Conductivity Process parameter Conduct1-TC1
Conductivity Conduct1-TC1 Temperature1
Yes Resistitivity
Concent1-TC1
No Concentration
Concent1-TC2
Conduct.+Concenter.
Conduct1-TC2
Chanage language 0% value 0.000 nS/cm
Resist1-TC1
100% value 500.0 S/cm
Resist1-TC2
Conduct2-TC1
Next FinishTemperature2

Next Conduct2-TC2

Date/Time Configure sensor


Format YYYY/MM/DD Sensor type 2-electrode
2-electrode Finish
YYYY/MM/DD
Measuring unit /cm 4-electrode
MM/DD/YYYY
Date 2010/03/03 Cell constant 0.1000 /cm Monitor display
DD/MM/YYYY /cm
(factory)
Time 17:04:07 /m

Next
Next
Next

Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000 Pt1000
Pt100
Unit C
C Ni100
F 8k55
Pb36(JIS6k)

SC
Next

*1 Next

*1: If two sensors are connected, the second sensor can also be set up.
Figure 6.2 Quick setup

n Date/Time
The date display format can be selected from among the three types.
Enter the date or time of day by using the numerical keys.
For details, see section 7.5.4.

n Measurement setup
Select a suitable measurement parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
Measurement parameter setup can be made only when SC is selected on the Sensor setup
screen.
For details, see section 7.1.1.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-4

n Configure sensor
From among the sensor types displayed on this screen, select an appropriate electrode for the
sensor used. The measurement units can also be selected from among /cm and /m.
The cell constant (factory default) is determined by factory calibration made during
manufacturing.
The cell constant is indicated on the sensor. If a new sensor is used, the cell constant indicated
here should be changed. When this value is changed, the real cell constant will also be changed.
For details, see section 7.1.2.

n Temperature settings
Select a suitable temperature element from among those displayed and set it up.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 7.1.3.

n mA (output)
Select an appropriate process parameter from among those displayed and set it. The mA output
has been set to 0 500 S/cm or 0 to 20 cm at factory shipment. If a high resolution is required
in a consistent measurement process, set this parameter to a value suitable for the process.
For details, see section 7.2.

6.3 Home display, Main display and Monitor


display
Pressing changes the screen to the Main display shown in Figure 6.3 (or the Home display
shown in Figure 6.4).

If two sensors are connected, pressing on the Main display changes the display to the
Home display shown in Figure 6.4.

If only one sensor is connected, is grayed out and disabled on the Main display.
Tag:SC

10.38 mS/cm
25.0 C

4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA

Figure 6.3 Example of main display

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-5

Tag:SC mS/cm

10.38
25.0 C

Tag:SC mS/cm

6.35
24.9 C

6
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA

Figure 6.4 Example of home display

On the Home display, pressing of the 1st sensor (top) or 2nd sensor (bottom) causes the
display of the selected sensor to appear on the Main display.
On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.

NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition
(see section 7.6.1). In the default condition, the 1st display item is conductivity, the 2nd display
item is temperature, and the 3rd display item is empty.

When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 7.6.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.

Monitor display Tag:SC mS/cm

10.38
25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm

10.38
Home display

Tag:SC mS/cm

6.35
24.9 C

6.35
24.40 mS/cm

4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA

mS/cm (When the MONITOR display is disabled)


mS/cm SC
Tag:SC

1st display item


10.38 mS/cm Main display
Tag:SC

6.35
2nd display item 25.0 C mS/cm
3rd display item 19.00 mS/cm 24.9 C
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA 24.40 mS/cm
4mA Conduct2-TC2 20mA

Tag:SC Tag:SC

25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm
10.38 mS/cm 25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm 10.38 mS/cm
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA 4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA

Figure 6.5 Change Display

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-6

6.4 Zooming in on details


Pressing on the Main display allows you to check detailed instrument information
(instrument information such as setup, sensor diagnosis, calibration, and module productions
number) through a transition of screens as shown in Figure 6.6.
In case of trouble, when you contact your nearest Yokogawa service center, please inform us
of the module and FLXA202/FLXA21 software revision displayed on the Detail screen and
other display information as well as the module productions number indicated on the nameplate
attached to the instrument.

Reset wellness data


mA Sesor wellness: New sensor?
20
Polarization
Cell constant Yes resets
12 Heat cycle sensor wellness data.
Progress Time

4
15.00 Reset welness data Yes
Next Next No

*
2010/02/15 16:04:07
HOLD Last calibrated at
-------- ------
FAIL Calibration due at
-------- ------
Projected Calibration
-- (no meaning)

Next
Next

c.c.(factory) 0.1000/cm SC module(sensor1):


c.c.(adjusted) 0.1000/cm Module Pdn No. S12345
Temp.comp.1 NaCl Software Revision 1.10
Temp.comp.2 None
Polarization 1%
Sensor Ohm 500.0
USP 0.000%

Next Next

HOUSING ASSY:
Module Pdn No. 23456789
Software Revision 2.10
HART Device Revision 2

(Fig. 6.8)

Next

*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.

Figure 6.6 Detail display

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-7

n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 7.2.

n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in 6
communication setup.

n c.c. (factory)
This parameter displays the cell constant (factory setting).
The cell constant (factory setting) is determined by factory calibration made during sensor
manufacturing. This value can be set in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor setup.
The cell constant is indicated on the sensor or cable label.

n c.c. (adjusted)
This parameter displays the cell constant (adjusted).
The cell constant (adjusted) is a cell constant that has been calibrated and is set by calibration
action.
When the systems cell constant is adjusted on-line by calibration using a process solution or
buffer solution, a new cell constant is logged here. The difference between this value and the
default value set at factory shipment will not be large. If there is a large difference between them,
check whether the sensor is broken or contaminated.

n Temp. comp. 1
This parameter shows the temperature compensation method for 1st measurement. The setting
is made in Commissioning Measurement setup Temp. comp.

n Temp. comp. 2
This parameter shows the temperature compensation method for 2nd measurement. The setting SC
is made in Commissioning Measurement setup Temp. comp.
2nd measurement does not imply that two measurements can be made individually, but it means
that two types of compensation methods can be configured, which enables two phases to be
monitored accurately in the same process. An example is monitoring the switching between
process and washing solutions.

n Polarization
This parameter indicates the degree of polarization of the sensor. It is an index of the degree
of sensor contamination (adherents). The greater the value, the more the polarization has
progressed. If the value is high, maintenance should be performed on the sensor as soon as
possible.

n Sensor Ohm
This parameter represents the non-compensated resistance of the sensor.

n USP
USP stands for United States Pharmacopeia and indicates the margin of safety for the water for
injection (WFI) conductivity at each temperature as a percentage.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-8

n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled.
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 7.1.7.
The Reset wellness data button can reset wellness data.
When a sensor is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.

NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 6.8.)

n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.

n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.

n Projected replacement
The projected maintenance function predicts the date when the sensor unit will need cleaning or
recalibrating for maintaining measurement accuracy. This function checks the cleanliness of the
sensor by monitoring the polarization of the electrodes every 24 hours and the cell constant after
the calibration. Clean the sensor before the predicted date.
The function predicts the following two dates:
When the cell constant crosses the upper or lower limits
When the value of the polarization of the electrodes reaches the alarm point (15% or more).
The function displays the earlier date with the status (the status is displayed in parentheses).
As shown in Figure 6.7, the date is predicted based on the intersection point of the upper or lower
limits and the extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method.

Upper limit

Value
Lower limit

Current Projected Day


date maintenance date F0310.ai

Figure 6.7

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-9
The status shows the certainty of the projected maintenance date in terms of the correlation
coefficient R. Tables 6.1 and 6.2 show respective display patterns.
Table 6.1 Display pattern of the projected maintenance date
Projected date -- 0-1 month 1-3 months 3-6 months 6-12 months Over 1 year
- - : cannot be predictable due to insufficient data
Table 6.2 Display pattern of the status

Status
(- - - - -) (Poor) (Reasonable) (Excellent) 6
(R < 0.50) (0.50 R < 0.70) (0.70 R < 0.85) (0.85 R < 1.00)

n SC module (sensor)
With this screen, you can check the module productions number and software revision of the
installed module.

n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.

n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has two types of logbook per sensor to store history information on
events, such as changed settings and calibrations.
By selecting one of the logbooks that you wish to check, you can retrieve and check this
information. Storage of history information on each event in a logbook or which logbook to use for
storage can be set up on the Configure logbook screen. For details, see section 7.4.
History information on events are automatically stored on the preset conditions.
In addition to this storing, following three messages can be manually stored in the logbook;
"Sensor washed by hand", "Module replaced", "Sensor replaced"

To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered. SC
When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 7.5.3.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-10

Read Logbook:
(Fig.6.6)
logbook1-1
logbook1-1
logbook1-2

logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 Memorandum:
Power on **
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced

Finish

logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on
Enter?
No No
Yes

Finish
** When storing message manually.

Figure 6.8 Detail display (continued)

6.5 Trend graphics


Pressing on the Zoom display changes the display to a graphical mode in which the
average measured value is shown on a time scale. The Live value is also digitally displayed in
a text box. The time scale (X-axis) and the primary value scale (Y-axis) are set in the DISPLAY
SETUP menu (Section 7.7.2).
The screen displays the trend of up to 41 averages of the measurement for each time interval.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 samples the measurements every second. The trending graphic also
shows the maximum and minimum measured values in that interval.
For example, if the time scale is set to 4 hours, then the trend is shown for 4 hours prior to the
actual measurement. Each point on the trend line represents the average over 46060/41 =
351 measurements (seconds).

NOTE
Updating the trend screen setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-11

Tag: SC Conduct1-TC1

Measurement value (mS/cm)


12.00 10.38mS/cm
Max. and min. values on this display
Current process value
8.40

5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum 6
Time
Figure 6.9 Trend screen

The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.

Tag: SC Conduct1-TC1
mA
20 12.00 10.38mS/cm

8.40
12
5.60

4
15.00 2.50

Next 12:00 12:20 12:40

Tag: SC Temperature1
12.00 25.0C

8.40

5.60

2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40 SC

Figure 6.10 Trend graphics

6.6 Instrument status screen


In the field of the Main display, the (Warning) or (Fault) sign appears according
to the instrument status. Upon pressing the displayed button, detailed information of the relevant
status appears.
See n Information button on page 1-9.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 6-12

6.7 Calibration and Commissioning


Allows you to calibrate and configure the instrument. These operations can be protected with a
password.
For details on the password, refer to section 7.5.3.
Execute & Setup
Execute:
Calibration
HOLD
Temporary output

Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 6.11 Execute & Setup

Pressing changes the display to the Execute & Setup screen.

Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press

to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD, Temporary output), read chapter 8, and for commissioning, read chapter
7.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-1

7. COMMISSIONING OF SC
(Conductivity)
This chapter describes how to check and change settings from the Commissioning screen.
When you move to the Commissioning screen, the output is held.

Execute &Setup Commissioning


Execute: Sensor setup
Calibration/Wash Measurement setup
HOLD
Temporary output
Output setup
Error configuration
7
Logbook configuration
Setup: Advanced setup
Comissioning Display setup
Change language Calculated data setup
Start Quick Setup

Figure 7.1 Example of the commissioning screen (for two modules)

Operations in Commissioning can be password-protected. If you set up a password, always take


a note of it. For details on setting a password, see section 7.5.3.

Figure 6.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.

On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 7.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Measurement and Sensor type first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options
change accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 7.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of SC in the attached
CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of SC and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument. SC
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section 7.5.1).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-2
Table 7.1 Menu Structure and Default Values in Commissioning
Parameter Ref. sect.
Measurement setup Measurement 7.1.1
Configure sensor Sensor type 7.1.2
Measuring unit
Cell constant (factory)
Temperature settings Temp. element 7.1.3
Temp. compensation Compensation 7.1.4
Reference temp.
Method
Calibration settings Limits: Air adjust 7.1.5
c.c.
Timing: Step Range
Stabilization time
Calibr.interval
Concentration Additional table 7.1.6
Unit for table
Sensor diag. settings Process time: 7.1.7
Heat cycle:
Define heat cycle
Output setup mA 7.2
Output Process parameter
Setup
Linear 0 % value
100 % value
Table
Burn
Damping time
Simulate Simulation perc.
Configure Hold
Error configuration 7.3
Logbook configuration 7.4
Advanced setup Settings 7.5.1
Tag 7.5.2
Passwords 7.5.3
Date/Time 7.5.4
Communication 7.5.5
HART
PH201G
Factory setup 7.5.6
Display setup Main display (Dual display, Individual display) 7.6.1
Trend 7.6.2
Auto Return 7.6.3
Adjust contrast 7.6.4
MONITOR display 7.6.5
Calculated data setup Function 7.7

NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 7.1) are crucial for measurement.
If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the parameters that may
initialize other values, see Appendix 2.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-3

7.1 Measurement setup


This section describes how to set up various parameters relating to measurements.
Measurements are performed based on the measurement parameter setup.

7.1.1 Measurement
Select a measurement parameter from Conductivity, Resistivity, Concentration, and Conduct.
+ Concentr. The setting of the measurement parameter changes the menu structure in Error
configuration, Display setup, etc. accordingly.
7
7.1.2 Configure sensor
This section describes how to configure the sensor to be connected.

l Sensor type
Choose the sensor type from 2-electrode and 4-electrode.
Two-electrode sensors are usually used for conductivity and/or resistivity measurements.
However, polarization of the electrodes may occur at high conductivity ranges, which may cause
an error in conductivity measurement. To avoid this, use 4-electrode sensors.

l Measuring unit
Either /cm or /m can be chosen here.
The process values will be expressed in S/cm or S/m in conductivity mode or .cm or .m in
resistivity mode, respectively.

l Cell constant (factory)


The cell constant given at factory shipment is set.
When a new sensor is connected, set the new cell constant which is indicated on the sensor.
When a cell constant is changed, a calibrated cell constant (c.c. (adjusted)) will be the same
value of the new cell constant (factory) after resetting an old one.
The cell constant is indicated on the sensor nameplate, etc. by either of the following two ways:

Cell constant indication and input methods


(1) When the cell constant itself is written on the sensor nameplate, enter it directly. (for
electrodes SC211G, SC8SG, and SC4AJ)
SC
(2) When the percentage of a deviation from the nominal cell constant (.%) is indicated on
the sensor nameplate, enter the cell constant as follows. (for electrode SC210G)
In case of the indication of a nominal cell constant of 5 cm-1 and a deviation value of
(CORR.%=-1.1):
The input cell constant is 5 x (100 1.1) / 100 = 4.945; enter this 4.945.

7.1.3 Temperature settings


Select the temperature element used for compensation from among Pt1000, Pt100, Ni100, 8k55,
and Pb36 (JIS 6k). Select the same type as the temperature element that is actually connected.
If a thermistor is used for the temperature sensor, select Pb36 (JIS 6k).

Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-4

7.1.4 Temperature compensation


l Temperature compensation
Two methods can be used: Automatic and Manual. Select Automatic when a temperature
element is used or Manual when a manually set temperature is used.

NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should be
set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display or the Home display is this
manually set temperature.

l Reference temperature
Set a reference temperature to which the measured value must be compensated. Normally 25C
is used, so this temperature is chosen as the default value.

l Process temperature compensation


Select a temperature compensation method from among None, TC, NaCl, and Matrix. None
does not perform the temperature compensation.

l TC
This method uses the linear compensation function.
For how to calculate a temperature coefficient of the compensation function, see l
Temperature compensation coefficient (TC) on page App.2-1.

l NaCl
This method uses the standard temperature compensation function with NaCl solution.
For details, see l NaCl (standard temperature compensation) on page App.2-1.

l Matrix
This method uses the temperature compensation matrix, which is a table of the conductivity
values at different temperatures and concentrations for a specific solution. The measured
conductivity is compensated based on this matrix to the conductivity at the reference
temperature.
Prepared matrixes and user-defined matrixes can be used. Two different user-defined
matrixes are available.
For details, see l Matrix on page App.2-3.

When the measured temperature or the precompensated conductivity is out of the range, the
temperature compensation error (warning) will be issued. This is not a device error.
For more details, see Temperature compensation error on App. 2-8.

Any two of these three methods can be set for conductivity measurement as Temp.comp.1 and
Temp.comp.2. The result of either method can be output or displayed (see 7.2 Output setup or
7.6 Display setup).
When Measurement is set to Conduct. + Concentr. for the Measurement, only one method
can be set.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-5
NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued.

7.1.5 Calibration settings


The screen flow differs depending on the combination of objects to be measured.

l Air adjust limit 7


Generally, air calibration is not required. To avoid the effects of the cable on the measurement of
lower conductivities such as pure water, a zero calibration with a dry sensor may be done.
When using a 4-electrode sensor, additional connections are required. Temporarily interconnect
terminals 13 & 14 with each other and 15 & 16 with each other before making the adjustment.
This is necessary to eliminate the capacitive influence of the cables. The links should be removed
after this step is completed.
As the calibration is performed in air, the resistivity is infinite (open connection). Higher
conductivity values than the air adjust limit indicate that the cell is not in air or is still wet. To
prevent wrong air calibrations, a limit must be given here.

l c.c. high
High limit of the cell constant expressed as a % of the nominal value. During calibration this value
is used to check if the calibrated cell constant remains within reasonable limits.

l c.c. low
Low limit of the cell constant expressed as a % of the nominal value. During calibration this value
is used to check if the calibrated cell constant remains within reasonable limits.

l Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this set value, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.

SC
l Stabilization time
During calibration, the stability of the measurement is constantly monitored. When variations of
the value are within a value set in Step Range over this stabilization time set here, the value is
regarded as being stable. If the value does not stabilize within 10 minutes, calibration is aborted.

l Calibration interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will be notified according to the setting in Calib. time exceeded in the error
configuration.

7.1.6 Concentration
The Concentration can be set only when Conduct. + Concentr. or Concentration is selected
for the Measurement in the Measurement setup menu.
The corresponding concentration given by a measured conductivity can be shown on the Main
display or the Home display.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-6
l Concentration table
Concentration can be calculated by using the temperature compensation matrix or the additional
concentration table.
By using the temperature compensation matrix
Set the Additional table to Disabled. The concentration can be obtained from the
temperature compensation matrix (based on the relation between the conductivity at the
reference temperature and the concentration).
Select Temp. compensation Method, and then select Matrix. Next, choose a solution or
User defined 1 or 2 (see Section 7.1.4). The concentration cannot be obtained by any other
temperature compensation method (TC or NaCl).
By using the additional concentration table
The additional concentration table indicates the relation between the conductivity and the
concentration at the reference temperature. Set the Additional table to Enabled. The
concentration can be obtained from the additional concentration table.
After entering values, select Yes for Check values?. Values are interpolated into empty
cells. If any mandatory cells are left blank, an error will be issued. An error message is also
issued if there is any error in the concentration table.
After completing entering values in the additional concentration table, set Additional table
to Enabled.

l Unit for table


Select the concentration display units from among %, ppt, ppm, and ppb.
Changing the unit will not result in a re-calculation of the table. Reenter values in the additional
concentration table.

7.1.7 Sensor diagnostic settings


This screen is used to set items relating to sensor diagnostics displayed on the screens invoked

by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.

The setting parameters include Progress time and Heat cycle. It is also possible to set the Bad
limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle temp and Heat cycle time of the
heat cycle.

7.2 Output setup


The general procedure is to first define the function of the output, Output or Simulate. Then, set
the process parameters associated with the output. On the Output, an output of measured value
is selected. On the Simulate, a simulation value can be set.
And, the parameters for HOLD function can be set on this setting.

l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.

Process parameter
Available process parameters depend on the selected Measurement item in Measurement
setup. Refer to Table 7.2.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-7
The output of the selected process parameter is shown as a bar on the bottom of the Main
display or the Home display. And its parameter symbol (for example, Conduct1-TC1 or Diff-
Cond-TC1) is shown above the bar, too. When a selected process parameter is displayed as a
measurement value, the top left number or character is turned to be white number or character
on black background (for example, or ). (Refer to the section 1.2.)
Table 7.2 List of Process Parameters
Sensor Measurement Process Parameters
Conduct1 (2)-TC1
Conductiivity Temperature1 (2)
Conduct1 (2)-TC2
Resistivity1 (2)-TC1
7
Resistivity Temperature1 (2)
Resistivity1 (2)-TC2 Conduct1 - TC1 :
1 or 2
Conduct1 (2)-TC1
Conductivity of sensor 1
Concentration Temperature1 (2)
Concent1 (2)-TC2 Temperature compensation 1
Conduct1 (2)-TC1 Select the temperature compensation
Conduct. + Concentr. Temperature1 (2) method is section 7.1.4.
Concent1 (2)-TC2
Conductiivity Calculated
Resistivity
2
Concentration Redundant
Conduct. + Concentr.

Calculated data and Redundant system are available when two modules are installed on
the instrument. And, these functions are available when the Conductivity (or the parameter
including conductivity) or the Resistivity is selected on the Measurement type setting. The
parameter for the 1st module and the 2nd module should be the same. For wrong selection, an
error is given.
When the process parameter is set at Calculated of Redundant, dont change the
Measurement type. If it is changed, the process parameter will go back to the default.

<Calculated>
For details, see section 7.7.
<Redundant >
On the Redundant system, when a sensor (Sensor 1) of the 1st module fails, the output is SC
automatically switched to the output of the 2nd module.
After repairing the Sensor 1, manual reset of redundant system is necessary to return to the
output of 1st module from the output of the 2nd module.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-8

Display R(1) R(2) R(1)


Repair sensor
Alive Dead Dead Alive
Sensor 1
Alive
mA mA

Sensor 2 Alive Alive Alive


mA

Sensor 1 is dead. Redundant system


(automatic) restart (manual)
After repairing sensor 1, reset the backup made
If sensor 1 fails, the Even if a fault on the sensor 1 is by the redundant system. This enables the
output is automatically recovered automatically after sensor 1 value to be incorporated in the output.
switched to the sensor-2 fault detection, the output will not On the Reset redundant system, selection of
value. be switched back automatically Yes makes the output return to the output of
and the sensor 2 value will the 1st module.
continue to be output.
Output setup Reset redundant system
mA Output Return mA to Sensor1?
This display is the
example when
Redundant is
selected as a
process parameter.
Configure Hold
Reset redundant Yes
No
F0503_2.ai

Figure 7.2 Redundant system

Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered.)

Burn
Select the designated output in case of a fault from among Off, Low, and High. See 7.3 Error
configuration to set the output.
Off: Output depends on the measured value.
Low: Output is fixed to 3.6 mA
High: Output is fixed to 22.0 mA.

Damping time
This is the time taken for a response to a step input change to reach 90% of the final value
(attenuation time). Set this time in sec.

l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.

n Configure Hold
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 8.7.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-9
During the Commissioning or the Quick Setup, the mA output is automatically held. The preset
value depends on a setting on the Last or fixed.
Last: The preset value is a value measured just before hold condition.
Fixed: The preset value is a value set in the Fixed value mA.
When the Fixed is selected, set a mA value in the Fixed value mA.

Selection on the Hold during Calibration decides to activate or deactivate the hold function
automatically during calibration.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
7
Disabled: No automatic hold function

7.3 Error configuration


In Error configuration, configure the statuses of various error causes.

This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (7.2 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting
is appropriate.

The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/3 to 3/3
screens.
Table 7.3 Error configuration
Display item Description Default
Conductivity too high
Conductivity or resistivity is lower than the minimum limit. Warn.
(or Concentration)
Conductivity too low
Conductivity or resistivity is higher than the maximum limit. Warn. SC
(or Concentration)
Temperature too high Measured process temperature is higher than the maximum limit. Warn.
Temperature too low Measured process temperature is lower than the minimum limit. Warn.
Polarization detec Polarization of the electrodes is detected. Off
Calibr. time exceeded Calibration time exceeds the calibration interval (see Section 7.1.5). Off
USP Conductivity exceeds the USP limit. Off
Configuration error:
The temperature compensation matrix is not defined properly (see
1st comp. matrix Fault
Section 7.1.4).
2nd comp. matrix
Concentration table The concentration table is not defined properly (see Section 7.1.6). Fault

CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-10
NOTE
When setting the error limits of Conductivity too high and Conductivity too low, enter values
obtained by dividing the conductivity value to be used as a limit value by the cell constant (given
at factory shipment) of the sensor used (conductivity / cell constant). In resistivity measurements,
set a value (resistivity x cell constant).

NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued. See For all temperature compensation on App. 2-8.

l USP
The suitable error category for USP<645> monitoring can be set. When this is set, it is checked
whether the non-temperature-compensated conductivity is higher than the limit value directed on
the stage 1 of the procedure described on USP<645>. (Refer to the App.2)

l USP safety margin


The USP<645> monitoring can be modified by this setting. The percentage of the limit value of
USP<645> serves as a safety margin. (Refer to the App.2)

7.4 Logbook configuration


In Logbook configuration, the user configures information to be saved to a logbook or initializes
the logbooks.
Logbooks are used to keep an electronic record of events such as error messages, calibrations,
and programmed data changes. By referring to this log, users can, for instance, easily determine
maintenance or replacement schedules.
In Logbook configuration, the user can select Off, 1-1, or 1-2 for each item of interest to be
logged. (For sensor 2, select Off, 2-1, or 2-2.) This can be done for items displayed on the
Settings logbook 1/3 to 3/3 screens. Assigning 1-1 or 1-2 to each item allows information to be
organized and logged in a logbook.

NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1 or 2-1. This logbook may be
full earlier. It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2 or 2-2.

For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1 or 1-2 can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (maximum 13 pages).

NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-11

7.5 Advanced setup


Advanced setup is used to set functions relating to matters other than measurements such as the
selection of settings, tag setting, password setting for protecting calibration and commissioning
operations, date setting, and communication setting.
(Factory setup is for service engineers only; there is no item to be set by the user.)

7.5.1 Settings
In Settings, select an item to be set as the default value from among No action, Load factory
settings, Save user settings, and Load user settings. 7
When the default values are loaded, the instrument will be restarted. (In the case of Save user
settings, it will not be restarted.)
The following parameters are not included in the defaults:
Tag
The contents of all logbooks

NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.

To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the
menu message.

If you select Load factory settings, the instrument will be set to the default settings at factory
shipment.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the factory settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
When Save user settings is selected, the current settings can be saved as the defaults.
When this item is selected, the user settings will start to be saved immediately. After saving the

parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults. SC
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.

7.5.2 Tag
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is SC or FLXA21-SC. When two sensor modules are installed,
each module can have their own tag numbers.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main and home displays.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-12

7.5.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.

When you set a password, always take a note of it.

When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.

7.5.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.

7.5.5 Communication
In Communication, select the communication setting from among None, HART, and PH201G.
The burn down current value is 3.6 mA.

NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.

In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value.

n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and
FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)

l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.

l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.

l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.
If blank is selected for a parameter, items below that parameter must all be set to blank. If an item
is blank, those below it cannot be set to a status other than blank.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-13

For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.

n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, and Fail contact.

l Hold contact
7
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.

l Fail contact
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 7.3 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.

7.5.6 Factory setup


For Factory setup, there is no item to be set by the user.

NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.

7.6 Display setup


This screen is used to make various settings relating to screen display.

NOTE SC
Settable items differ depending on settings in Measurement setup.

7.6.1 Main display (Dual display, Individual display)


Display setup Display setup
Main display Dual display
Trend Individual display
Auto Return Trend
Ad.just contrast or Auto Return
MONITOR display Adjust contrast
MONITOR display

Figure 7.3 Display setup screens for a single module (left) and two modules (right)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-14
l Main display
When one module is installed on the instrument, only the Main display is available.
Three measurement values can be set to display on the Main display as a primary value (1st
line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value (3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.

l Dual display
This screen is used to set items to be displayed in the top part (1st row) and bottom part (2nd
row) of the Home display. These settings are available when two sensors are installed in the
instrument.
When the Empty is selected for the 2nd row, the Home display can not be displayed.

l Individual display
When two modules are installed on the instrument, display items on the Main display for each
module can be set on these settings.
On the SC1 display or SC2 display screen, three measurement values can be set to display
on each Main display as a primary value (1st line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value
(3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.

7.6.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).

l X-axis: Timing
Select the X-axis timings time span on the trend graph display from a list.

l Y-axis: Limits
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.

NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-15

7.6.3 Auto Return


When no operation is performed for the time set in Auto Return, the display returns to the
Monitor display (or to the Main display when the MONITOR display is disabled) and the analyzer
returns to a normal measuring mode. (When the Trend display is selected, the Auto Return
doesnt work.)
Select the time from among Disable, 10 min, and 60 min. When the Auto Return function is not
used, select Disable.

NOTE
7
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.

7.6.4 Adjust contrast


The LCD screen contrast can be adjusted.
Pressing the keys adjusts the contrast in 11 levels from +5 to 5 (including the default value
of 0).

7.6.5 MONITOR display


Select Enable so that the Monitor display becomes available. A default is Enable.
During Hold condition and a warning/fault condition, the Main display or the Home display is
displayed to indicate the condition.

7.7 Calculated data setup


On this setup, parameters can be set for calculated data.
When two modules are installed on the instrument, the calculated data can be set for conductivity
values or resistivity values measured by two sensors.
On the Calculated data setup screen, select one kind of calculations as shown on the Table 7.4.
For resistivity, select Differential or Average.
Table 7.4 Calculation SC
Function Arithmetic expression Indication *
Differential (value of the sensor 1) (value of the sensor 2) Diff
Average (value of the sensor 1 + value of the sensor 2) / 2 Ave
Ratio (value of the sensor 1) / (value of the sensor 2) Ratio
Passage(%) (value of the sensor 2) / (value of the sensor 1) x 100 Pass
Rejection(%) (value of the sensor 1 value of the sensor 2) / (value of the sensor 1) x 100 Reje
Deviation(%) (value of the sensor 2 value of the sensor 1) / (value of the sensor 1) x 100 Dev
pH calc.(VGB) pH = 8.6 + log {(value of the sensor 1) (value of the sensor 2) /3} VGB
* Parameter symbol at the bar display of analog output which is displayed at the bottom of the Main display or the Home display
when a calculated data is selected as a process parameter on the mA (Output) setup screen.

To display the calculated result, select Calculated on the Dual display screen. (Section 7.6.1.)
(The setting on the Individual display has no effect.)
While displaying a calculated data, measurement value of the sensor 1 or sensor 2 can be
Sensor Sensor
1 2
checked on the each sensors display with pressing or at the lower right on the Main
display.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<7. COMMISSIONING OF SC (Conductivity)> 7-16

Pressing returns the display to the original calculated data display.


A calculated data can be set as a process parameter on the mA (Output) setup screen. (Section
7.2.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<8. CALIBRATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 8-1

8. CALIBRATION OF SC (Conductivity)
The cell constant of a conductivity meter does not change during operation, as long as it remains
undamaged, and clean. Therefore, it is vital that in any calibration check, the first step should be
to clean the sensor, or at least to check its cleanliness. After cleaning, ensure that the sensor is
carefully rinsed in distilled water to remove all traces of the cleaning medium.
The cell constant is indicated on the nameplate or cable label of the SC sensor.
For input of the cell constant, see section 7.1.2.

NOTE
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
8
8.6.3.)

Execute & Setup Calibration


Execute: Cell constant(manual)
Calibration Cell constant(automatic)
HOLD Air calibration
Temporary output Sample
Temperature coefficient
Setup: Temperature calibration
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 8.1 Calibration

Calibration for conductivity can be selected from Cell constant (manual), Cell constant
(automatic), Air calibration, and Sample. In most cases, Air calibration is not required.

NOTE
The standard instrument to be used in calibration with a process solution should always be
accurate. Yokogawa recommends that the Model SC72 pocket conductivity meter be used for
this purpose. SC

Where temperature compensation 1 (SC1) and temperature compensation 2 (SC2) have been
configured, the configured temperature compensation is effective even during calibration.
Therefore, the reading is the value converted to a conductivity value at the reference temperature
set in Temperature settings.
There are temperature compensation 1 (SC1) and temperature compensation 2 (SC2), but this
does not mean that calibration is required twice. It means that either SC1 or SC2 temperature
compensation should be selected and calibration should be made once to obtain the cell
constant. The cell constant after calibration can be checked on the Detail screen.

NOTE
When a sensor is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 6.9.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<8. CALIBRATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 8-2

8.1 Cell constant (manual)


The intention of this calibration routine is to fine-tune a sensor for which only the nominal cell
constant is known, or to recalibrate a sensor that has been changed (or damaged) during
operation. Choose the 1st or 2nd temperature compensation to suit the calibration solution used.
The solution with an appropriate precision should be prepared or purchased. Allow the sensor to
reach stable readings for both temperature and conductivity before adjusting to the value of the
corresponding calibration solution.
Calibration here is performed by measuring a solution with known conductivity at the set
reference temperature. The calibration solution of an accurate concentration should be prepared
by dissolving a certain amount of solute in water. Allow the conductivity to become stable at the
set reference temperature (initial setting of 25C) of the instrument and obtain the conductivity
from literature data, etc. Appendix 2 shows the conductivity values of sodium chloride (NaCl) as a
typical example.

8.2 Cell constant (automatic)


This routine is built around the test method described in International Recommendation No.
56 of OIML (Organisation Internationale de Metrologie Legale). It allows the direct use of the
solutions prescribed in the test method, automatically selecting the appropriate temperature
compensation. The look-up table is used to find an appropriate conductivity reading for the
measured temperature. See Appendix 2 for OIML solutions.

8.3 Air calibration


It is not necessary to conduct general air calibration unless the cable length is long and a low
conductivity needs to be measured.
With the clean dry cell in open air, the reading should be zero. The air cal compensates for
excess cable capacitance, and gives a better accuracy at low readings. This should be done
when a sensor is installed or replaced. After some time in service, a dirty sensor may well show
a high zero offset because of fouling. Clean the sensor and try again. Moreover, air calibration
should be made in an environment free of electromagnetic interference.

NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued. See For all temperature compensation on App. 2-8.

8.4 Sample
With the sensor in situ, a sample can be taken for laboratory analysis. Sample calibration records
the time and reading, and holds these in memory until the analysis has been completed. The
laboratory data can then be entered regardless of the current process value, without the need for
calculations.
When sample calibration is made with temperature compensation activated, the types of
temperature compensation for laboratory analysis equipment should be matched. Use of a
different type of temperature compensation between equipment causes an error. The standard
conductivity meter to be used should always be based on the accurate and same temperature
compensation calculation method. Yokogawa recommends that the Model SC82 pocket
conductivity meter be used for this purpose.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<8. CALIBRATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 8-3

Press [Take Sample] to record a collected sample value in memory. Re-enter the Sample Cal.
screen and press [Start calibration] to perform a sample calibration. This updates the recorded
data.

8.5 Temperature coefficient


Simply input the solution conductivity at the reference temperature (TR) after allowing the sensor
to stabilize at elevated temperatures. The FLXA202/FLXA21 will calculate the temperature
coefficient for you. The ideal temperature for this calibration is the normal process value (TP).
This calibration is enabled if the Temperature Compensation is set to TC. (Section 7.1.4)
8

8.6 Temperature calibration


In order to make the most accurate measurements, it is important to have a precise temperature
measurement. This affects the display of temperature, and the output signal (when used). More
important, however, is the temperature compensation, and calibration accuracy.
The temperature of the sensor system should be measured independently with a high precision
thermometer. The value of Measured temperature should then be adjusted to agree with the
reading (zero offset calibration only).
For best accuracy, this should be done as near to the normal operating temperature as possible.

8.7 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last).
Use this menu to hold the output.

For the settings, see n Configure Hold on page 7-8.


During commissioning or quick setup, the output is automatically held.
Setting Hold during Calibration to Disabled deactivates the hold function during calibration.

Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF. SC
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:SC

10.00 mS/cm
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA

Figure 8.8 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled

HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<8. CALIBRATION OF SC (Conductivity)> 8-4

8.8 Temporary output


If measurement cannot be made due to replacement of one of the sensors, assignment of mA
output can be temporarily changed from the currently setup sensor to the other sensor. This
feature is enabled only when two sensors are connected.

Press to select Execute: Temporary output and then choose the process parameter to be
assigned on the Temporary output screen.

When process parameter assignment has been modified, the indication at the upper left of the
screen changes to .
The feature is disabled the moment the screen returns to the Main display, and the setting
(process parameter in mA output setting) returns to the original condition.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-1

9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive


Conductivity)
This chapter describes the screen operations of ISC, the object to be measured.
Further details of screen operations can also be found in section 1.2.
Tag:ISC 9

10.38 mS/cm Calibration


25.0 C Cell constant(manual) 11.1 c.c.(manual)
Cell constant(automatic)11.2 SC1(Temp.comp.1)
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA Air calibration 11.3 SC2(Temp.comp.2)
Sample 11.4
c.c.automatic
Temperature coefficient 11.5
Select Std
Execute & Setup Temperature calibration 11.6
Execute: Sample
Calibration HOLD 11.7 SC1(Temp.comp.1)
HOLD SC2(Temp.comp.2)

TC
Setup: SC1(Temp.comp.1)
Commissioning SC2(Temp.comp.2)
Change language Change language 2.7
Start Quick Setup
Quick setup Date/Time Measurement setup Configure sensor
9.2 10.5.4 10.1.1 10.1.2

Comissioning Output setup Temperature settings


Measuremet setup 10.1 mA: Output mA(Output) 10.1.3
Output setup 10.2 Simulate Setup: Linear
Error configuration 10.3 Table mA(output)
10.2
Logbook configuration 10.4 Configure Hold
Advanced setup 10.5
Table mA
Display setup 10.6
Logbook configuration Enter values
Setting logbook
Measurement setup
Configure sensor 10.1.2 Advanced setup
Temperature settings10.1.3 Settings 10.5.1
Temp. compensdation 10.1.4 Tag 10.5.2
Calibration settings 10.1.5 Passwords 10.5.3
Concentration 10.1.6 Date/Time 10.5.4
Communication
Sensor diag. settings 10.1.7 Communication 10.5.5
ISC
HART
Factory setup 10.5.6
PH201G
Temp. comp.
Compensation: Manual Display setup Main display
Method Main display 10.6.1 Additional text
Temp.comp.1: TC Trend 10.6.2
Matrix Matrix 1 Auto Return 10.6.3
User defined 1 Adjust contrast 10.6.4
Temp.comp.2: TC Trend
User defined 2 MONITOR display 10.6.5
Matrix x-axis: Timing
Y-axis: Limits
User defined 1
Concentration Enter values
Define table Concentr. table
Enter values

Sensor diag. setting


Define heat cycle

Figure 9.1 Menu structure of ISC (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-2

9.1 Change language


The screen is set to display English at factory shipment; if you wish to use the FLXA202/FLXA21
in another language, first select a language as described in section 2.7.

9.2 Quick setup


The Quick setup screen is used to set up the basic items you want to set up first, such as the
date/time and sensor settings. The detailed settings are described in chapter 11, Commissioning.
You may leave the Quick setup now and return to it later; however, it is recommended to perform
the quick setup first.
Each time the FLXA202/FLXA21 is started up, this screen is displayed. If it is not necessary to
change the setup, press No or .

NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display when the MONITOR display is disabled).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-3

Quick setup Measurement setup mA(output)


Start quick setup? Measure Conductivity Process parameter
Conductivity Conduct1-TC1 Conduct1-TC1
Yes Concentration Temperature1
No Conduct.+Concenter. Concent1-TC1
Conduct1-TC2
Chanage language 0% value Concent1-TC2
0.000 nS/cm
100% value 1.000 S/cm

Next Finish

Next
Finish

Date/Time Configure sensor


Format YYYY/MM/DD Measuring unit /cm /cm
Monitor display
YYYY/MM/DD
MM/DD/YYYY Cell constant 1.880 /cm/m
Date 2010/03/03 (factory)
DD/MM/YYYY

Time 17:04:07

Next
Next
Next

Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000 Pt1000
NTC30k
Unit C C
F

Next
Next

Figure 9.2 Quick setup


ISC
n Date/Time
The date display format can be selected from among the three types.
Enter the date or time of day by using the numerical keys.
For details, see section 10.5.4.

n Measurement setup
Select a suitable measurement parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
Measurement parameter setup can be made only when ISC is selected on the Sensor setup
screen.
For details, see section 10.1.1.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-4

n Configure sensor
The measurement units can also be selected from among /cm and /m.
The cell constant (factory default) is determined by factory calibration made during
manufacturing.
The cell constant is indicated on the sensor. If a new sensor is used, the cell constant indicated
here should be changed. When this value is changed, the real cell constant will also be changed.
For details, see section 10.1.2.

n Temperature settings
Select a suitable temperature element from among those displayed and set it up.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 10.1.3.

n mA (output)
Select an appropriate process parameter from among those displayed and set it. The mA output
has been set to 0 500 S/cm or 0 to 20 cm at factory shipment. If a high resolution is required
in a consistent measurement process, set this parameter to a value suitable for the process.
For details, see section 10.2.

9.3 Main display and Monitor display


Pressing changes the screen to the Main display shown in Figure 9.3.
Tag:ISC

10.38 mS/cm
25.0 C

4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA

Figure 9.3 Example of main display

On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.

NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition
(see section 10.6.1). In the default condition, the 1st display item is conductivity, the 2nd display
item is temperature, and the 3rd display item is empty.

When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 10.6.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-5

10.38 mS/cm
Monitor display

Tag:ISC

1st display item


10.00 mS/cm Main display
2nd display item 25.0 C
3rd display item 19.00 mS/cm
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA

Tag:ISC Tag:ISC

25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm
10.00 mS/cm 25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm 10.00 mS/cm
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA 4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA

Figure 9.4 Change display

9.4 Zooming in on details


Pressing on the Main display allows you to check detailed instrument information
(instrument information such as setup, sensor diagnosis, calibration, and module productions
number) through a transition of screens as shown in Figure 9.5.
In case of trouble, when you contact your nearest Yokogawa service center, please inform us
of the module and FLXA202/FLXA21 software revision displayed on the Detail screen and
other display information as well as the module productions number indicated on the nameplate ISC
attached to the instrument.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-6

Reset wellness data


mA Sesor wellness: New sensor?
20
Cell constant
Heat cycle Yes resets
12 Progress Time sensor wellness data.

4
15.00 Reset welness data Yes
Next Next No

*
2010/02/15 16:04:07
HOLD Last calibrated at
-------- ------
FAIL Calibration due at
-------- ------
Projected Calibration
>12months (no meaning)

Next Next

c.c.(factory) 1.880/cm ISC module(sensor1):


c.c.(adjusted) 1.880/cm Module Pdn No. S12345
Temp.comp.1 NaCl Software Revision 1.10
Temp.comp.2 None
Sensor Ohm 500.0

Next Next

HOUSING ASSY:
Module Pdn No. 23456789
Software Revision 2.10
HART Device Revision 2

(Fig.9.7)

Next

*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.

Figure 9.5 Detail display

n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 10.2.

n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in
communication setup.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-7

n c.c. (factory)
This parameter displays the cell constant (factory setting).
The cell constant (factory setting) is determined by factory calibration made during sensor
manufacturing. This value can be set in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor setup.
The cell constant is indicated on the sensor or cable label.

n c.c. (adjusted) 9
This parameter displays the cell constant (adjusted).
The cell constant (adjusted) is a cell constant that has been calibrated and is set by calibration
action.
When the systems cell constant is adjusted on-line by calibration using a process solution or
buffer solution, a new cell constant is logged here. The difference between this value and the
default value set at factory shipment will not be large. If there is a large difference between them,
check whether the sensor is broken or contaminated.

n Temp. comp. 1
This parameter shows the temperature compensation method for 1st measurement. The setting
is made in Commissioning Measurement setup Temp. comp.

n Temp. comp. 2
This parameter shows the temperature compensation method for 2nd measurement. The setting
is made in Commissioning Measurement setup Temp. comp.
2nd measurement does not imply that two measurements can be made individually, but it means
that two types of compensation methods can be configured, which enables two phases to be
monitored accurately in the same process. An example is monitoring the switching between
process and washing solutions.

n Sensor Ohm
This parameter represents the non-compensated resistance of the sensor.

n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled. ISC
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 10.1.7.
The Reset wellness data button can reset wellness data.
When a sensor is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.

NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 9.7.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-8

n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.

n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.

n Projected replacement
The projected maintenance function predicts the date when the sensor unit will need cleaning or
recalibrating for maintaining measurement accuracy. The function checks the cleanliness of the
sensor by monitoring the cell constant after calibration. Clean the sensor before the predicted
date.
The function predicts the dates when the cell constant will cross the upper or lower limits and
displays the predicted date with the status (the status is displayed in parentheses).
As shown in Figure 9.6, the date is predicted based on the intersection point of the upper or lower
limits and the extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method.

Upper limit

Value
Lower limit

Current Projected Day


date maintenance date F0310.ai

Figure 9.6

The status shows the certainty of the projected maintenance date in terms of the correlation
coefficient R. Tables 9.1 and 9.2 show respective display patterns.
Table 9.1 Display pattern of the projected maintenance date
Projected date -- 0-1 month 1-3 months 3-6 months 6-12 months Over 1 year
- - : cannot be predictable due to insufficient data
Table 9.2 Display pattern of the status
(- - - - -) (Poor) (Reasonable) (Excellent)
Status
(R < 0.50) (0.50 R < 0.70) (0.70 R < 0.85) (0.85 R < 1.00)

n ISC module (sensor)


With this screen, you can check the module productions number and software revision of the
installed module.

n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-9

n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has two types of logbook per sensor to store history information on
events, such as changed settings and calibrations.
By selecting one of the logbooks that you wish to check, you can retrieve and check this
information. Storage of history information on each event in a logbook or which logbook to use for
storage can be set up on the Configure logbook screen. For details, see section 10.4.
History information on events are automatically stored on the preset conditions. 9
In addition to this storing, following three messages can be manually stored in the logbook;
"Sensor washed by hand", "Module replaced", "Sensor replaced"

To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered.

When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 10.5.3.)

Read Logbook:
(Fig.9.5)
logbook1-1
logbook1-1
logbook1-2

logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 Memorandum:
Power on **
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced

Finish

logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on ISC
Enter?
No No
Yes

Finish
** When storing message manually.

Figure 9.7 Detail display (continued)

9.5 Trend graphics


Pressing on the Zoom display changes the display to a graphical mode in which the
average measured value is shown on a time scale. The Live value is also digitally displayed in
a text box. The time scale (X-axis) and the primary value scale (Y-axis) are set in the DISPLAY
SETUP menu (Section 10.7.2).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-10
The screen displays the trend of up to 41 averages of the measurement for each time interval.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 samples the measurements every second. The trending graphic also
shows the maximum and minimum measured values in that interval.
For example, if the time scale is set to 4 hours, then the trend is shown for 4 hours prior to the
actual measurement. Each point on the trend line represents the average over 46060/41 =
351 measurements (seconds).

NOTE
Updating the trend screen setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

Conduct1-TC1
Measurement value (mS/cm)

Tag: ISC
12.00 10.38mS/cm
Max. and min. values on this display
Current process value
8.40

5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum

Time

Figure 9.8 Trend screen

The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.

Tag: ISC Conduct1-TC1


mA
20 12.00 10.38mS/cm

8.40
12
5.60

4
15.00 2.50

Next 12:00 12:20 12:40

Tag: ISC Temperature1


12.00 25.0C

8.40

5.60

2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40

Figure 9.9 Trend graphics

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<9. OPERATION OF ISC (Induvtive Conductivity)> 9-11

9.6 Instrument status screen


In the field of the Main display, the (Warning) or (Fault) sign appears according
to the instrument status. Upon pressing the displayed button, detailed information of the relevant
status appears.
See n Information button on page 1-9.
9

9.7 Calibration and Commissioning


Allows you to calibrate and configure the instrument. These operations can be protected with a
password.
For details on the password, refer to section 10.5.3.
Execute & Setup
Execute:
Calibration
HOLD

Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 9.10 Execute & Setup

Pressing changes the display to the Execute & Setup screen.

Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press

to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD), read chapter 11, and for commissioning, read chapter 10.

ISC

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-1

10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive


Conductivity)
This chapter describes how to check and change settings from the Commissioning screen.
When you move to the Commissioning screen, the output is held.
Execute &Setup Commissioning
Execute: Measurement setup
Calibration Output setup
HOLD Error configuration
Logbook configuration
10
Advanced setup
Setup: Display setup
Comissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 10.1 Commissioning screen

Operations in Commissioning can be password-protected. If you set up a password, always take


a note of it. For details on setting a password, see section 10.5.3.

Figure 9.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.

On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 10.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Measurement first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options change
accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 10.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of ISC in the attached
CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of ISC and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument.
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section
10.5.1). ISC

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-2
Table 10.1 Menu Structure and Default Values in Commissioning
Parameter Ref. sect.
Measurement setup Measurement 10.1.1
Configure sensor Measuring unit 10.1.2
Cell constant (factory)
Temperature settings Temp. element 10.1.3
Temp. compensation Compensation 10.1.4
Reference temp.
Method
Calibration settings Limits: Air adjust 10.1.5
c.c.
Timing: Step Range
Stabilization time
Calib.interval
Concentration Additional table 10.1.6
Unit for table
Sensor diag. settings Process time: 10.1.7
Heat cycle:
Define heat cycle
Output setup mA 10.2
Output Process parameter
Setup
Linear 0 % value
100 % value
Table
Burn
Damping time
Simulate Simulation perc.
Configure Hold
Error configuration 10.3
Logbook configuration 10.4
Advanced setup Settings 10.5.1
Tag 10.5.2
Passwords 10.5.3
Date/Time 10.5.4
Communication 10.5.5
HART
PH201G
Factory setup 10.5.6
Display setup Main display 10.6.1
Trend 10.6.2
Auto Return 10.6.3
Adjust contrast 10.6.4
MONITOR display 10.6.5

NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 10.1) are crucial for
measurement. If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the
parameters that may initialize other values, see Appendix 3.

10.1 Measurement setup


This section describes how to set up various parameters relating to measurements.
Measurements are performed based on the measurement parameter setup.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-3

10.1.1 Measurement
Select a measurement parameter from Conductivity, Concentration, and Conduct. + Concentr.
The setting of the measurement parameter changes the menu structure in Error configuration,
Display setup, etc. accordingly.

10.1.2 Configure sensor


This section describes how to configure the sensor to be connected.

l Measuring unit 10
Either /cm or /m can be chosen here.
The process values will be expressed in S/cm or S/m.

l Cell constant (factory)


The cell constant given at factory shipment is set.
When a new sensor is connected, set the new cell constant which is indicated on the sensor.
When a cell constant is changed, a calibrated cell constant (c.c. (adjusted)) will be the same
value of the new cell constant (factory) after resetting an old one.

10.1.3 Temperature settings


Select the temperature element used for compensation from among Pt1000 or NTC30k. Select
the same type as the temperature element that is actually connected.

Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix

10.1.4 Temperature compensation


l Temperature compensation
Two methods can be used: Automatic and Manual. Select Automatic when a temperature
element is used or Manual when a manually set temperature is used.
ISC

NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should
be set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display is this manually set
temperature.

l Reference temperature
The temperature compensation function converts the measured conductivity value to that at the
reference temperature. The reference temperature can be changed. The default value is 25C.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-4
l Process temperature compensation
Select a temperature compensation method from among None, TC, NaCl, and Matrix. None
does not perform the temperature compensation.

l TC
This method uses the linear compensation function.
For how to calculate a temperature coefficient of the compensation function, see l
Temperature compensation coefficient (TC) on page App.3-1.

l NaCl
This method uses the standard temperature compensation function with NaCl solution.
For details, see l NaCl (standard temperature compensation) on page App.3-1.

l Matrix
This method uses the temperature compensation matrix, which is a table of the conductivity
values at different temperatures and concentrations for a specific solution. The measured
conductivity is compensated based on this matrix to the conductivity at the reference
temperature.
Prepared matrixes and user-defined matrixes can be used. Two different user-defined
matrixes are available.
For details, see l Matrix on page App.3-3.

When the measured temperature or the precompensated conductivity is out of the range, the
temperature compensation error (warning) will be issued. This is not a device error.
For more details, see Temperature compensation error on App. 3-8.

Any two of these three methods can be set for conductivity measurement as Temp.comp.1 and
Temp.comp.2. The result of either method can be output or displayed (see 10.2 Output setup
or 10.6 Display setup).
When Measurement is set to Conduct. + Concentr. for the Measurement, only one method
can be set.

NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued.

10.1.5 Calibration settings


The screen flow differs depending on the combination of objects to be measured.

l Air adjust limit


Generally, air calibration is not required. To avoid the effects of the cable on the measurement of
lower conductivities such as pure water, a zero calibration with a dry sensor may be done.

Perform a zero-calibration using a dry sensor to prevent the cable from affecting the
measurement. If a terminal box (BA20) and extension cable (WF10) are used, perform the zero-
calibration while they are connected.
As the calibration is performed in air, the resistivity is infinite (open connection). Higher
conductivity values than the air adjust limit indicate that the cell is not in air or is still wet. To
prevent wrong air calibrations, a limit must be given here.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-5
NOTE
Perform a zero check for air calibration while the temperature compensation is set to NaCl.

l c.c. high
High limit of the cell constant expressed as a % of the nominal value. During calibration this value
is used to check if the calibrated cell constant remains within reasonable limits.

l c.c. low
Low limit of the cell constant expressed as a % of the nominal value. During calibration this value 10
is used to check if the calibrated cell constant remains within reasonable limits.

l Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this set value, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.

l Stabilization time
During calibration, the stability of the measurement is constantly monitored. When variations of
the value are within a value set in Step Range over this stabilization time set here, the value is
regarded as being stable. If the value does not stabilize within 10 minutes, calibration is aborted.

l Calibration interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will be notified according to the setting in Calib. time exceeded in the error
configuration.

10.1.6 Concentration
The Concentration can be set only when Conduct. + Concentr. or Concentration is selected
for the Measurement in the Measurement setup menu.
The corresponding concentration given by a measured conductivity can be shown on the Main
display.

l Concentration table
Concentration can be calculated by using the temperature compensation matrix or the additional
concentration table.
By using the temperature compensation matrix ISC
Set the Additional table to Disabled. The concentration can be obtained from the
temperature compensation matrix (based on the relation between the conductivity at the
reference temperature and the concentration).
Select Temp. compensation Method, and then select Matrix. Next, choose a solution
or User defined 1 or 2 (see Section 10.1.4). The concentration cannot be obtained by any
other temperature compensation method (TC or NaCl).
By using the additional concentration table
The additional concentration table indicates the relation between the conductivity and the
concentration at the reference temperature. Set the Additional table to Enabled. The
concentration can be obtained from the additional concentration table.
After entering values, select Yes for Check values?. Values are interpolated into empty
cells. If any mandatory cells are left blank, an error will be issued. An error message is also
issued if there is any error in the concentration table.
After completing entering values in the additional concentration table, set Additional table
to Enabled.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-6
l Unit for table
Select the concentration display units from among %, ppt, ppm, and ppb. Changing the unit will
not result in a re-calculation of the table. Reenter values in the additional concentration table.

10.1.7 Sensor diagnostic settings


This screen is used to set items relating to sensor diagnostics displayed on the screens invoked

by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.

The setting parameters include Progress time and Heat cycle. It is also possible to set the Bad
limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle temp and Heat cycle time of the
heat cycle.

10.2 Output setup


The general procedure is to first define the function of the output, Output or Simulate. Then, set
the process parameters associated with the output. On the Output, an output of measured value
is selected. On the Simulate, a simulation value can be set.
And, the parameters for HOLD function can be set on this setting.

l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.

Process parameter
Available process parameters depend on the selected Measurement item in Measurement
setup. Refer to Table 10.2.
The output of the selected process parameter is shown as a bar on the bottom of the Main
display. And its parameter symbol (for example, Conduct1-TC1) is shown above the bar, too.
When a selected process parameter is displayed as a measurement value, the top left number
or character is turned to be white number or character on black background (for example, ).
(Refer to the section 1.2.)
Table 10.2 List of Process Parameters
Sensor Measurement Process Parameters
Conduct1-TC1
Conductiivity Temperature1
Conduct1-TC2 Conduct1 - TC1 :
Conduct1-TC1
Conductivity of sensor 1
1 Concentration Temperature1
Temperature compensation 1
Concent1-TC2
Select the temperature compensation
Conduct1-TC1 method is section 10.1.4.
Conduct. + Concentr. Temperature1
Concent1-TC2

Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-7
Burn
Select the designated output in case of a fault from among Off, Low, and High. See 10.3 Error
configuration to set the output.
Off: Output depends on the measured value.
Low: Output is fixed to 3.6 mA (when None is set in Communication setup)
Output is fixed to 3.9 mA (when HART or PH201G is selected in Communication setup)
High: Output is fixed to 22.0 mA.

Damping time
This is the time taken for a response to a step input change to reach 90% of the final value 10
(attenuation time). Set this time in sec.

l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.

n Configure Hold
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 11.7.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.
During the Commissioning or the Quick Setup, the mA output is automatically held. The preset
value depends on a setting on the Last or fixed.
Last: The preset value is a value measured just before hold condition.
Fixed: The preset value is a value set in the Fixed value mA.
When the Fixed is selected, set a mA value in the Fixed value mA.

Selection on the Hold during Calibration decides to activate or deactivate the hold function
automatically during calibration.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
Disabled: No automatic hold function

10.3 Error configuration


In Error configuration, configure the statuses of various error causes.

This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status ISC
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (10.2 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting
is appropriate.

The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/3 to 3/3
screens.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-8
Table 10.3 Error configuration
Display item Description Default
Conductivity too high
Conductivity or resistivity is lower than the minimum limit. Warn.
(or Concentration)
Conductivity too low
Conductivity or resistivity is higher than the maximum limit. Warn.
(or Concentration)
Temperature too high Measured process temperature is higher than the maximum limit. Warn.
Temperature too low Measured process temperature is lower than the minimum limit. Warn.
Calibr. time exceeded Calibration time exceeds the calibration interval (see Section 10.1.5). Off
Configuration error:
The temperature compensation matrix is not defined properly (see
1st comp. matrix Fault
Section 10.1.4).
2nd comp. matrix
Concentration table The concentration table is not defined properly (see Section 10.1.6). Fault

CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.

NOTE
Use not Conductivity but (Conductivity x cell constant) to set the error limit for Conductivity too
high and Conductivity too low.

NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued.

10.4 Logbook configuration


In Logbook configuration, the user configures information to be saved to a logbook or initializes
the logbooks.
Logbooks are used to keep an electronic record of events such as error messages, calibrations,
and programmed data changes. By referring to this log, users can, for instance, easily determine
maintenance or replacement schedules.
In Logbook configuration, the user can select Off, 1-1, or 1-2 for each item of interest to
be logged. This can be done for items displayed on the Settings logbook 1/3 to 3/3 screens.
Assigning 1-1 or 1-2 to each item allows information to be organized and logged in a logbook.

NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1. This logbook may be full earlier.
It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2.

For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1 or 1-2 can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (maximum 13 pages).

NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-9

10.5 Advanced setup


Advanced setup is used to set functions relating to matters other than measurements such as the
selection of settings, tag setting, password setting for protecting calibration and commissioning
operations, date setting, and communication setting.
(Factory setup is for service engineers only; there is no item to be set by the user.)

10.5.1 Settings
In Settings, select an item to be set as the default value from among No action, Load factory
settings, Save user settings, and Load user settings. 10
When the default values are loaded, the instrument will be restarted. (In the case of Save user
settings, it will not be restarted.)
The following parameters are not included in the defaults:
Tag
The contents of all logbooks

NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.

To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the
menu message.

If you select Load factory settings, the instrument will be set to the default settings at factory
shipment.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the factory settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
When Save user settings is selected, the current settings can be saved as the defaults.
When this item is selected, the user settings will start to be saved immediately. After saving the

parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started. ISC
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.

10.5.2 Tag
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is ISC or FLXA21-ISC.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main display.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-10

10.5.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.

When you set a password, always take a note of it.

When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.

10.5.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.

10.5.5 Communication
Select a communication parameter from None, HART, or PH201G in Communication setup.
The burn down current is 3.9 mA when HART or PH201G is selected, and 3.6 mA when None is
selected.

NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.

In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value except that the burn down current is different.

n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)

l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.

l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.

l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.
If blank is selected for a parameter, items below that parameter must all be set to blank. If an item
is blank, those below it cannot be set to a status other than blank.

For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-11

n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, and Fail contact.

l Hold contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.

l Fail contact
10
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 10.3 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.

10.5.6 Factory setup


For Factory setup, there is no item to be set by the user.

NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.

10.6 Display setup


This screen is used to make various settings relating to screen display.

NOTE
Settable items differ depending on settings in Measurement setup.

10.6.1 Main display


Three measurement values can be set to display on the Main display as a primary value (1st ISC
line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value (3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.

10.6.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<10. COMMISSIONING OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 10-12
l X-axis: Timing
Select the X-axis timings time span on the trend graph display from a list.

l Y-axis: Limits
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.

NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

10.6.3 Auto Return


When no operation is performed for the time set in Auto Return, the display returns to the
Monitor display (or to the Main display when the MONITOR display is disabled) and the analyzer
returns to a normal measuring mode. (When the Trend display is selected, the Auto Return
doesnt work.)
Select the time from among Disable, 10 min, and 60 min. When the Auto Return function is not
used, select Disable.

NOTE
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.

10.6.4 Adjust contrast


The LCD screen contrast can be adjusted.
Pressing the keys adjusts the contrast in 11 levels from +5 to 5 (including the default value
of 0).

10.6.5 MONITOR display


Select Enable so that the Monitor display becomes available. A default is Enable.
During Hold condition and a warning/fault condition, the Main display is displayed to indicate the
condition.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<11. CALIBRATION OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 11-1

11. CALIBRATION OF ISC (Inductive


Conductivity)
Inductive conductivity meters must be calibrated after being installed in a measurement location
or moved to a different location.
Inductive conductivity meters do not generally need to be calibrated repetitively if they have been
calibrated once before the start of use. If the cell is severely contaminated or has been subject to
abrasion (possibly during cleaning), calibration may be necessary.

Execute air calibration first, if needed.


When using solutions, manual, automatic, and sample calibrations are available. 11

Execute & Setup Calibration


Execute: Cell constant(manual)
Calibration Cell constant(automatic)
HOLD Air calibration
Sample
Temperature coefficient
Setup: Temperature calibration
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 11.1 Calibration

NOTE
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
10.6.3.)

Calibration is carried out by measuring a solution which has a known conductivity and adjusting
the instrument to show the correct conductivity value.
Cell constant (manual), Cell constant (automatic)
A calibration solution can be prepared in the laboratory. A salt solution is prepared with a
known precise concentration. The temperature is stabilized to the reference temperature of the ISC
instrument (usually 25C). The actual conductivity of the solution is taken from literature data. The
typical calibration solutions include NaCl and KCl; see Appendix 3. To calibrate the instrument,
the sensor is removed from a process and suspended in the solution, the conductivity value from
the literature data is then entered and the calibration routine completed.
Make sure the sensor does not touch the sides of the container (see Figure 11.2).
Sample calibration
This calibration uses a process solution. In this method, the conductivity of the process solution
under measurement is measured with a standard instrument. In this case, care must be taken to
make the measurement at the reference temperature since differences in the type of temperature
compensation of the instruments may cause an error. With this method, it is not necessary to
remove the sensor from the process. Because the sensor is immersed in the process, errors
caused by the installation characteristics are compensated for.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<11. CALIBRATION OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 11-2
NOTE
The standard instrument to be used in calibration with a process solution should always be
accurate. Yokogawa recommends that the Model SC72 pocket conductivity meter be used for
this purpose.

Where temperature compensation 1 (SC1) and temperature compensation 2 (SC2) have been
configured, the configured temperature compensation is effective even during calibration.
Therefore, the reading is the value converted to a conductivity value at the reference temperature
set in Temperature settings.
There are temperature compensation 1 (SC1) and temperature compensation 2 (SC2), but this
does not mean that calibration is required twice. It means that either SC1 or SC2 temperature
compensation should be selected and calibration should be made once to obtain the cell
constant. The cell constant after calibration can be checked on the Detail screen.

NOTE
When a sensor is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 9.8.)

l Cell constant
The center value of the cell constant of the ISC40 sensor is 1.88 cm-1. The nominal cell constants
of individual sensors are indicated on the cable markers and the actual installation can change
this factor. If there is less than 30 mm spacing between a sensor and holder, in-situ calibration is
necessary to meet the specified accuracies.
If the sensor is installed in the stainless steel standard holder ISC40FFJ-S, the cell constant
is reduced by approximately 7%; enter a value 7% smaller than the value on the marker of
the sensor cable.
If the sensor is installed in the polypropylene standard holder ISC40FFJ-P, the cell constant
is increased by approximately 1%; enter a value 1% greater than the value on the sensor
cable marker.
If the sensor is installed in piping that is long in the axial direction with the cross section
as shown in Figure 11.3, the cell constant of the sensor installed in the piping (reference
data for a design center value of 1.88 cm-1) is as shown in Figure 11.3. A value obtained by
multiplying the value on the sensor cable marker and a value read from Figure 11.3 should
be entered.

X X

X= 30 mm (Min.)
Figure 11.2 Sensor in calibration solution

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<11. CALIBRATION OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 11-3

1.30

Correction factor (x nominal C.C.)


1.25
1.20
1.15
Non-conductive piping
1.10
D
1.05
1.00
0.95
Conductive piping
0.90
0 10 20 30 40 50 11
Distance D (mm)
Figure 11.3 Relationship between the distance from the sensor to side wall and the cell constant

11.1 Cell constant (manual)


The intention of this calibration routine is to fine-tune a sensor for which only the nominal cell
constant is known, or to recalibrate a sensor that has been changed (or damaged) during
operation. Choose the 1st or 2nd temperature compensation to suit the calibration solution used.
The solution with an appropriate precision should be prepared or purchased. Allow the sensor to
reach stable readings for both temperature and conductivity before adjusting to the value of the
corresponding calibration solution.
The cell constant of the calibrated sensor should also be set up here.

11.2 Cell constant (automatic)


This routine is built around the test method described in International Recommendation No.
56 of OIML (Organisation Internationale de Metrologie Legale). It allows the direct use of the
solutions prescribed in the test method, automatically selecting the appropriate temperature
compensation. The look-up table is used to find an appropriate conductivity reading for the
measured temperature. See Appendix 3 for OIML solutions.

11.3 Air calibration ISC


Execute air calibration first, if needed.

With the clean dry cell in open air, the reading should be zero. The air cal compensates for
excess cable capacitance, and gives a better accuracy at low readings. This should be done
when a sensor is installed or replaced. After some time in service, a dirty sensor may well show
a high zero offset because of fouling. Clean the sensor and try again. Moreover, air calibration
should be made in an environment free of electromagnetic interference.

Wait for the sensor to dry because air cal must be made with no current flow in the sensor, that is,
the sensor must be dried while being exposed to air.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<11. CALIBRATION OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 11-4
NOTE
The temperature compensation should be set to NaCl when confirming zero during air
calibration.

NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued.

Not being wet, the sensor measures the conductivity of air, which is close to zero. Because
zero conductivity is out of the range for temperature compensation (this range is based on the
temperature and conductivity of solutions and is preset to 0.033 S/cm at 20C), a warning may
be issued. This is not a device error.
The conductivity of air is zero and it does not have a temperature coefficient. Execute zero
calibration regardless of the warning.

11.4 Sample
With the sensor in situ, a sample can be taken for laboratory analysis. Sample calibration records
the time and reading, and holds these in memory until the analysis has been completed. The
laboratory data can then be entered regardless of the current process value, without the need for
calculations.
When sample calibration is made with temperature compensation activated, the types of
temperature compensation for laboratory analysis equipment should be matched. Use of a
different type of temperature compensation between equipment causes an error. The standard
conductivity meter to be used should always be based on the accurate and same temperature
compensation calculation method. Yokogawa recommends that the Model SC82 pocket
conductivity meter be used for this purpose.

Press [Take Sample] to record a collected sample value in memory. Re-enter the Sample Cal.
screen and press [Start calibration] to perform a sample calibration. This updates the recorded
data.

11.5 Temperature coefficient


Simply input the solution conductivity at the reference temperature (TR) after allowing the sensor
to stabilize at elevated temperatures. The FLXA202/FLXA21 will calculate the temperature
coefficient for you. The ideal temperature for this calibration is the normal process value (TP).
This calibration is enabled if the Temperature Compensation is set to TC. (Refer to section
10.1.4)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<11. CALIBRATION OF ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> 11-5

11.6 Temperature calibration


In order to make the most accurate measurements, it is important to have a precise temperature
measurement. This affects the display of temperature, and the output signal (when used). More
important, however, is the temperature compensation, and calibration accuracy. The temperature
of the sensor system should be measured independently with a high precision thermometer.
The value of Measured temperature should then be adjusted to agree with the reading (zero
offset calibration only). For best accuracy, this should be done as near to the normal operating
temperature as possible.

11.7 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last). 11
Use this menu to hold the output.

For the settings, see n Configure Hold on page 10-7.


During commissioning or quick setup, the output is automatically held.
Setting Hold during Calibration to Disabled deactivates the hold function during calibration.

Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF.
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:ISC

10.00 mS/cm
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA

Figure 11.10 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled

HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.

ISC

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-1

12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)


This chapter describes the screen operations of DO, the object to be measured.
Further details of screen operations can also be found in section 1.2.
Tag:DO

10.38 mg/L
12

25.0 C
Calibration
4mA Oxygen1 20mA Air calibration 14.1 Air calibration
Water Calibration 14.2 0%
Manual Slope Cal.14.3 100%
Temperature Cal. 14.4
Execute & Setup
Execute: Water calibration
Calibration HOLD 14.5 0%
HOLD 100%
Temporary output
Temporary output 14.6
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language Change language 2.7 Date/Time Measurement setup
13.6.4 13.2.1
Start Quick Setup
Quick setup Seneor setup Temperature settings
12.2 13.1 13.2.2

Comissioning Output setup mA(output)


Sensor setup 13.1 mA: Output mA(Output) 13.3
Measuremet setup 13.2 Simulate Setup: Linear
Output setup 13.3 Table Table mA
Error configuration 13.4 Configure Hold Enter values
Logbook configuration 13.5
Advanced setup 13.6
Logbook configuration
Display setup 13.7 Setting logbook
Calculated data setup 13.8
Advanced setup
Settings 13.6.1
Measurement setup Tag 13.6.2
Configure sensor 13.2.1 Passwords 13.6.3
Temperature settings 13.2.2 Date/Time 13.6.4
Temp. compensation 13.2.3 Communication
Communication 13.6.5
Sakinity compensation 13.2.4 HART
Factory setup 13.6.6
PH201G PH201G setup
Pressure comp. (Measure)13.2.5
Wash contact: Enabled
Calibration settings 13.2.6
Sensor diag. settings 13.2.7 Display setup Main display
Main display 13.7.1 Additional text
Temp. comp. Dual display
Compensation: Manual Individual display Individual display
DO1
Trend 13.7.2
DO2
DO1 display
Additional text
DO
Auto Return 13.7.3
Calibration settings
Limits and timing Adjust contrast 13.7.4
zero/slope MONITOR display 13.7.5
Pressure comp.(Cal)
Trend
x-axis: Timing
Sensor diag. setting Y-axis: Limits
Define heat cycle

Figure 12.1 Menu structure of DO (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-2

12.1 Change language


The screen is set to display English at factory shipment; if you wish to use the FLXA202/FLXA21
in another language, first select a language as described in section 2.7.

12.2 Quick setup


The Quick setup screen is used to set up the basic items you want to set up first, such as the
date/time and sensor settings. The detailed settings are described in chapter 14, Commissioning.
You may leave the Quick setup now and return to it later; however, it is recommended to perform
the quick setup first.
Each time the FLXA202/FLXA21 is started up, this screen is displayed. If it is not necessary to

change the setup, press No or .

NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display or the Home display when the MONITOR display is disabled).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-3

12

Quick setup Sensor setup mA(output)


Start quick setup? Sensor type Galvanic Process parameter
Galvanic Oxygen1 Oxygen1
Yes Polarographic
Temperature1
No Oxygen2
Temperature2
Chanage language 0% value 0.00 pH
100% value 14.00pH

Next Finish

Next
Finish

Date/Time Configure sensor


Format YYYY/MM/DD Unit mg/L
mg/L Monitor display
YYYY/MM/DD ppm
sensor sensitivity
MM/DD/YYYY ppb
Date 2010/03/03 0.45A/ppm(50um)
0.45A/ppm(50um)
DD/MM/YYYY %SAT
sensor type0.90A/ppm(25um)
Time 17:04:07 Others
Others
Others
DO30G

Next
Next
Next

Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000
Pt1000
Unit C NTC22k
C
F

Next

*1 Next

*1: If two sensors are connected, the second sensor can also be set up.
Figure 12.2 Quick setup

n Date/Time DO
The date display format can be selected from among the three types.
Enter the date or time of day by using the numerical keys.
For details, see section 13.6.4.

n Sensor setup
Select a suitable electrode from among the displayed electrode types and set it up.
For details, see section 13.1.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-4

n Configure sensor
On this screen, select the units and set the sensor sensitivity. If Polarograph is selected for the
sensor type, the polarograph application voltage can also be set. For details, see section 13.2.1.
For DO30G, set the sensor type to DO30G. The Available KOH parameter on the detail display
will be enabled.

n Temperature settings
Select a suitable temperature element from among those displayed and set it up.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 13.2.2.

n mA (output)
Select an appropriate process parameter from among those displayed and set it. If it is necessary
to improve the resolution, set it to a value suitable for the relevant process.
For details, see section 13.3.

12.3 Home display, Main display and Monitor


display
Pressing changes the screen to the Main display shown in Figure 12.3 (or the Home
display shown in Figure 12.4).

If two sensors are connected, pressing on the Main display changes the display to the
Home display shown in Figure 12.4.

If only one sensor is connected, is grayed out and disabled on the Main display.
Tag:DO

10.38 mg/L
25.0 C

4mA Oxygen1 20mA

Figure 12.3 Example of main display

Tag:DO mg/L

10.38
25.0 C

Tag:DO mg/L

6.35
24.9 C

4mA Oxygen1 20mA

Figure 12.4 Example of home display

On the Home display, pressing of the 1st sensor (top) or 2nd sensor (bottom) causes the
display of the selected sensor to appear on the Main display.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-5

On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.

NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition (see section
13.7.1). In the default condition, the 1st display item is oxygen, the 2nd display item is temperature, and the 3rd
display item is empty.
12

When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 13.7.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.
Monitor display Tag:DO mg/L

10.38
25.0 C

10.38
19.00 mg/L
Home display

Tag:DO mg/L

6.35
24.9 C

6.35
24.40 mg/L

4mA Oxygen1 20mA

mg/L (When the MONITOR display is disabled)


mg/L
Tag:DO

1st display item


10.38 mg/L Main display
Tag:DO

6.35
2nd display item 25.0 C mg/L
3rd display item 19.00 mg/L 24.9 C
24.40 mg/L
4mA Oxygen1 20mA 4mA Oxygen2 20mA

Tag:DO Tag:DO

25.0 C
19.00 mg/L
10.38 mg/L 25.0 C
19.00 mg/L 10.38 mg/L
4mA Oxygen1 20mA 4mA Oxygen1 20mA

Figure 12.5 Change display

DO
12.4 Zooming in on details
Pressing on the Main display allows you to check detailed instrument information
(instrument information such as setup, sensor diagnosis, calibration, and module productions
number) through a transition of screens as shown in Figure 12.6.
In case of trouble, when you contact your nearest Yokogawa service center, please inform us
of the module and FLXA202/FLXA21 software revision displayed on the Detail screen and
other display information as well as the module productions number indicated on the nameplate
attached to the instrument.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-6

Reset wellness data


mA Sesor wellness: New sensor?
20
Slope
Heat cycle Yes resets
12 Progress Time sensor wellness data.

4
15.00 Reset welness data Yes
Next Next No

*
2010/02/15 16:04:07
HOLD Last calibrated at
-------- ------
FAIL Calibration due at
-------- ------
WASH

Next Next

Zero Current 0.00 A DO module(sensor1):


Slope 100.0 % Module Pdn No. S12345
Sensor Current 0.00 A Software Revision 1.10
Available KOH 100 %
Compensation:
NaCl Disable
Press(Process) 101.3 kPa
(Cal.) 101.3 kPa
Next Next

HOUSING ASSY:
Module Pdn No. 23456789
Software Revision 2.10
HART Device Revision 2

(Fig.12.7)

Next

*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.

Figure 12.6 Detail display

n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 13.3.

n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in
communication setup.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-7

n Zero Current
= The offset value of a calibrated sensor. This is the offset of the sensor and sensor circuit in the
zero oxygen condition.

n Slope
This parameter indicates the sensitivity of the sensor after calibration. It is indicated as a
percentage of the reference sensitivity based on the selection of the sensor or that has been
entered.
12

n Sensor Current
= The raw output of the sensor before it is calibrated and temperature compensated.

n Available KOH
When the sensor type under Configure sensor is set to DO30G, a number is displayed. When
set to Others, a bar (----) is displayed.
This parameter indicates the amount of available KOH remaining in the sensor. This amount
is calculated and displayed by totalizing the amount of KOH consumed by dissolved oxygen
measurements.
When replacing the solution in the sensor, calibration should be made to reset (clear) diagnostic
sensor data.

n Compensation
For compensation of measured value, salinity compensation and pressure compensation are
available. To use pressure compensation, enter the pressure level directly.

n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled.
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 13.2.7.
The Reset wellness data button can reset wellness data.
When a sensor or a membrane is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.

NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 12.7.) DO

n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.

n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-8

n DO module (sensor)
With this screen, you can check the module productions number and software revision of the
installed module.

n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.

n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has two types of logbook per sensor to store history information on
events, such as changed settings and calibrations.
By selecting one of the logbooks that you wish to check, you can retrieve and check this
information. Storage of history information on each event in a logbook or which logbook to use for
storage can be set up on the Configure logbook screen. For details, see section 13.5.
History information on events are automatically stored on the preset conditions.
In addition to this storing, following three messages can be manually stored in the logbook;
"Sensor washed by hand", "Module replaced", "Sensor replaced"

To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered.

When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 13.6.3.)

Read Logbook:
(Fig.12.6)
logbook1-1
logbook1-1
logbook1-2

logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 Memorandum:
Power on **
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced

Finish

logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on
Enter?
No No
Yes

Finish
** When storing message manually.

Figure 12.7 Detail display (continued)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-9

12.5 Trend graphics


Pressing on the Zoom display changes the display to a graphical mode in which the
average measured value is shown on a time scale. The Live value is also digitally displayed in
a text box. The time scale (X-axis) and the primary value scale (Y-axis) are set in the DISPLAY
SETUP menu (Section 13.7.2).
The screen displays the trend of up to 41 averages of the measurement for each time interval. 12
The FLXA202/FLXA21 samples the measurements every second. The trending graphic also
shows the maximum and minimum measured values in that interval.
For example, if the time scale is set to 4 hours, then the trend is shown for 4 hours prior to the
actual measurement. Each point on the trend line represents the average over 46060/41 =
351 measurements (seconds).

NOTE
Updating the trend screen setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

Tag: DO Oxygen1
Measurement value (mg/L)

12.00 9.10mg/L
Max. and min. values on this display
Current process value
8.40

5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum

Time

Figure 12.8 Trend screen

The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.

DO

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-10

Tag: DO Oxygen1
mA
20 12.00 10.38mg/L

8.40
12
5.60

4
15.00 2.50

Next 12:00 12:20 12:40

Tag: DO Temperature1
12.00 25.0C

8.40

5.60

2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40

Figure 12.9 Trend graphics

12.6 Instrument status screen


In the field of the Main display, the (Warning) or (Fault) sign appears according
to the instrument status. Upon pressing the displayed button, detailed information of the relevant
status appears.
See n Information button on page 1-9.

12.7 Calibration and Commissioning


Allows you to calibrate and configure the instrument. These operations can be protected with a
password.
For details on the password, refer to section 13.6.3.
Execute & Setup
Execute:
Calibration
HOLD
Temporary output

Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 12.10 Execute & Setup

Pressing changes the display to the Execute & Setup screen.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<12. OPERATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 12-11

Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press

to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD, Temporary output), read chapter 14, and for commissioning, read chapter
13.
12

DO

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-1

13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved


Oxygen)
This chapter describes how to check and change settings from the Commissioning screen.
When you move to the Commissioning screen, the output is held.
Execute &Setup Commissioning
Execute: Sensor setup
Calibration/Wash Measurement setup
HOLD
Temporary output
Output setup
Error configuration
13
Logbook configuration
Setup: Advanced setup
Comissioning Display setup
Change language Calculated data setup
Start Quick Setup

Figure 13.1 Example of the commissioning screen (for two modules)

Operations in Commissioning can be password-protected. If you set up a password, always take


a note of it. For details on setting a password, see section 13.6.3.

Figure 12.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.

On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 13.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Sensor type first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options change
accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 13.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of DO in the attached
CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of DO and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument.
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section
13.6.1).

DO

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-2
Table 13.1 Menu Structure and Default Values in Commissioning
Parameter Ref. sect.
Sensor setup Sensor type 13.1
Measurement setup Configure sensor Unit 13.2.1
Sensor sensitivity
Polarization Voltage
Temperature settings Temp. element 13.2.2
Temp. compensation 13.2.3
Salinity compensation 13.2.4
Pressure comp. (Measure) 13.2.5
Calibration settings 13.2.6
Sensor diag. settings 13.2.7
Output setup mA 13.3
Output Process parameter
Setup
Linear 0 % value
100 % value
Table
Burn
Damping time
Simulate Simulation perc.
Configure Hold
Error configuration 13.4
Logbook configuration 13.5
Advanced setup Settings 13.6.1
Tag 13.6.2
Passwords 13.6.3
Date/Time 13.6.4
Communication 13.6.5
HART
PH201G
Factory setup 13.6.6
Display setup Main display (Dual display, Individual display) 13.7.1
Trend 13.7.2
Auto Return 13.7.3
Adjust contrast 13.7.4
MONITOR display 13.7.5
Calculated data setup Function 13.8

NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 13.1) are crucial for
measurement. If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the
parameters that may initialize other values, see Appendix 4.

13.1 Sensor setup


Select the sensor type that is used from among Galvanic and Polarographic.
The sensor type suitable for the actually connected sensor should be selected.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-3

13.2 Measurement setup


In this section, set up various parameters relating to measurements.
Measurements are performed based on the measurement parameter setup.
If Polarographic is selected for Sensor type in the Sensor setup screen, the polarographic
application voltage can be set.

13.2.1 Sensor setup


Select a unit for sensors from mg/L, ppm, ppb, and %SAT. Select a value for sensor sensitivity
from 0.45 A/ppm (50 m), 0.90 A/ppm (25 m), and other. If you select other, enter an 13
appropriate value.

13.2.2 Temperature settings


Select the temperature element used for compensation from among Pt1000 and NTC22k. Select
the same type as the temperature element that is actually connected.

Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix

13.2.3 Temperature compensation


Select Manual or Automatic for the temperature compensation type.
Select Automatic if the temperature sensors measured value is used or Manual if no
temperature sensor is used.

NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should be
set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display or the Home display is this
manually set temperature.

13.2.4 Salinity compensation


This function is used to measure sample water containing salt such as sea water.
The dissolved oxygen in a solution is affected by salinity. Therefore, to conduct accurate DO
measurements, it is necessary to compensate the influence of the salinity of the sample solution.
To make salinity compensation, select Enabled for Compensation.
Calculate the saturated concentration value from the salinity and temperature of the actual
sample water based on Table 1 of Appendix 4 (Solubility of oxygen in water as a function of
temperature and salinity) and enter the value.

13.2.5 Pressure comp. (Measure)


Dissolved oxygen concentration changes depending on changes in the process pressure or air
pressure. To compensate this, enter a value of pressure (air pressure).
See Tables 2 and 3 in the Appendix.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-4

13.2.6 Calibration settings


In Calibration settings, set the high and low limits of Zero/Slope and set up parameters relating
to stabilization performed during calibration.

l Limits and timing


Zero High/Low
Set the high and low limits of Zero. During calibration, it is checked whether the new zero
exceeds these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures
and calibration of bad sensors, which results in higher accuracy. The default values should be
adjusted to suit the application and the users criterion.
Slope High/Low
Set the high and low limits of Slope. During calibration, it is checked whether the new slope
exceeds these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures
and calibration of bad sensors, which results in higher accuracy. The default values should be
adjusted to suit the application and the users criterion.
Stabilization time
During calibration, the stability of the measurement is constantly monitored. When variations of
the value are within a value set in Step Range over this stabilization time set here, the value is
regarded as being stable. If the value does not stabilize within 60 minutes, calibration is aborted.
Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this set value, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.
Calibr. interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will be notified according to the setting in Calib. time exceeded in the error
configuration.

l Zero/Slope
You can enter zero and slope values directly.
Zero current values can be set only when the setting of Zero Calibration is Enabled.

l Pressure comp. (Cal.)


You can enter the pressure level directly.

l Zero Calibration
If zero calibration is required, select Enabled for this parameter. The default value is Disabled.
When this feature is enabled, Zero current values can be set in zero settings.

NOTE
When the zero calibration is set to disabled after performing the calibration, the result of the
calibration turns invalid (default).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-5

13.2.7 Sensor diag. settings


This screen is used to set items relating to sensor diagnostics displayed on the screens invoked

by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.

The setting parameters include Progress time and Heat cycle. It is also possible to set the Bad
limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle temp and Heat cycle time of the 13
heat cycle.

13.3 Output setup


The general procedure is to first define the function of the output, Output or Simulate. Then, set
the process parameters associated with the output. On the Output, an output of measured value
is selected. On the Simulate, a simulation value can be set.
And, the parameters for HOLD function can be set on this setting.

l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.

Process parameter
For the available process parameters, see Table 13.2.
The output of the selected process parameter is shown as a bar on the bottom of the Main
display or the Home display. And its parameter symbol (for example, Oxygen1 or Diff-Oxygen1)
is shown above the bar, too. When a selected process parameter is displayed as a measurement
value, the top left number or character is turned to be white number or character on black
background (for example, or ). (Refer to the section 1.2.)
Table 13.2 List of Process Parameters
Number of sensors Process Parameters
1 Oxygen1 (2)
Temperature1 (2)
2 Oxygen1
Temperature1
Oxygen2
Temperature2
Calculated*1
Redundant*2 DO
*1: Refer to section 13.8, Calculated data setup.
*2: Refer to the <Redundant system> below.

Calculated data and Redundant system are available when two modules are installed on the
instrument.

<Redundant system>
On the Redundant system, when a sensor (Sensor 1) of the 1st module fails, the output is
automatically switched to the output of the 2nd module.
After repairing the Sensor 1, manual reset of redundant system is necessary to return to the
output of 1st module from the output of the 2nd module.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-6

Display R(1) R(2) R(1)


Repair sensor
Alive Dead Dead Alive
Sensor 1
Alive
mA mA

Sensor 2 Alive Alive Alive


mA

Sensor 1 is dead. Redundant system


(automatic) restart (manual)
After repairing sensor 1, reset the backup made
If sensor 1 fails, the Even if a fault on the sensor 1 is by the redundant system. This enables the
output is automatically recovered automatically after sensor 1 value to be incorporated in the output.
switched to the sensor-2 fault detection, the output will not On the Reset redundant system, selection of
value. be switched back automatically Yes makes the output return to the output of
and the sensor 2 value will the 1st module.
continue to be output.
Output setup Reset redundant system
mA Output Return mA to Sensor1?
This display is the
example when
Redundant is
selected as a
process parameter.
Configure Hold
Reset redundant Yes
No
F0503_2.ai

Figure 13.2 Redundant system

Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered. For the default values, see Table 13.3)
Table 13.3 Table of Default Values
% 0.000 5.000 10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00 35.00 40.00 45.00 50.00
Oxygen (mg/L) 0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00
Oxygen (ppm) 0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00
Oxygen (ppb) 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0
Oxygen (%sat) 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0
Temperature (C) 0.0 2.5 5.0 7.5 10.0 12.5 15.0 17.5 20.0 25.5 25.0
% 55.00 60.00 65.00 70.00 75.00 80.00 85.00 90.00 95.00 100.0
Oxygen (mg/L) 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00
Oxygen (ppm) 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00
Oxygen (ppb) 55.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 80.0 85.0 90.0 95.0 100.0
Oxygen (%sat) 55.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 80.0 85.0 90.0 95.0 100.0
Temperature (C) 27.5 30.0 32.5 35.0 37.5 40.0 42.5 45.0 47.5 50.0

Burn
Select the designated output in case of a fault from among Off, Low, and High. See 13.4 Error
configuration to set the output.
Off: Output depends on the measured value. (No fixed output is produced.)
Low: Output is fixed to 3.6 mA
High: Output is fixed to 22.0 mA.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-7
Damping time
This is the time taken for a response to a step input change to reach 90% of the final value
(attenuation time). Set this time in sec.

l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.

n Configure Hold 13
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 14.5.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.
During the Commissioning or the Quick Setup, the mA output is automatically held. The preset
value depends on a setting on the Last or fixed.
Last: The preset value is a value measured just before hold condition.
Fixed: The preset value is a value set in the Fixed value mA.
When the Fixed is selected, set a mA value in the Fixed value mA.

Selection on the Hold during Calibration/Wash decides to activate or deactivate the hold
function automatically during calibration or wash.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
Disabled: No automatic hold function

Only when the PH201G is selected on the Communication, the message of Hold during
Calibration/Wash is displayed. On other selections, the message of Hold during Calibration is
displayed.

13.4 Error configuration


In Error configuration, configure the statuses of various error causes.

This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (13.3 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
DO
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting
is appropriate.

The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/2 and
2/2 screens.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-8
Table 13.4 Error configuration
Display item Description Default
DO too high Input is over 50 A (galvanic) or 1200 nA Warn.
(polarographic).
DO too low Input is below 0.05 A (galvanic) or 1.2 nA Warn.
(polarographic).
Temperature too high Measured process temperature is higher than the Warn.
maximum limit.
Temperature too low Measured process temperature is lower than the Warn.
minimum limit.
Sensor membrane Sensor membrane is damaged. Off
Calib. time exceeded Calibration time exceeds the calibration interval Off
(see Section 13.2.6).

CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.

13.5 Logbook configuration


In Logbook configuration, the user configures information to be saved to a logbook or initializes
the logbooks.
Logbooks are used to keep an electronic record of events such as error messages, calibrations,
and programmed data changes. By referring to this log, users can, for instance, easily determine
maintenance or replacement schedules.

In Logbook configuration, the user can select Off, 1-1, or 1-2 for each item of interest to be
logged. (For sensor 2, select Off, 2-1, or 2-2.) This can be done for items displayed on the
Settings logbook 1/3 to 3/3 screens. Assigning 1-1 or 1-2 to each item allows information to be
organized and logged in a logbook.

NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1 or 2-1. This logbook may be
full earlier. It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2 or 2-2.

For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1 or 1-2 can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (maximum 13 pages).

NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-9

13.6 Advanced setup


Advanced setup is used to set functions relating to matters other than measurements such as the
selection of settings, tag setting, password setting for protecting calibration and commissioning
operations, date setting, and communication setting.
(Factory setup is for service engineers only; there is no item to be set by the user.)

13.6.1 Settings
In Settings, select an item to be set as the default value from among No action, Load factory
settings, Save user settings, and Load user settings. 13
When the default values are loaded, the instrument will be restarted. (In the case of Save user
settings, it will not be restarted.)
The following parameters are not included in the defaults:
Tag
The contents of all logbooks

NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.

To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the
menu message.

If you select Load factory settings, the instrument will be set to the default settings at factory
shipment.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the factory settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
When Save user settings is selected, the current settings can be saved as the defaults.
When this item is selected, the user settings will start to be saved immediately. After saving the

parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.

13.6.2 Tag DO
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is DO or FLXA21-DO. When two sensor modules are installed,
each module can have their own tag numbers.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main and home displays.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-10

13.6.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.

When you set a password, always take a note of it.

When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.

13.6.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.

13.6.5 Communication
In Communication, select the communication setting from among None, HART, and PH201G.
The burn down current value is 3.6 mA.

NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.

In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value.

n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and
FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)

l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.

l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.

l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-11
If blank is selected for a parameter, items below that parameter must all be set to blank. If an item
is blank, those below it cannot be set to a status other than blank.

For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.

n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, Fail contact, and Wash
contact. 13

l Hold contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.

l Fail contact
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 13.4 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.

l Wash contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, items for a wash can be set on the Wash settings screen.
In the Wash settings screen, set the interval time, wash time, and recovery time and setup of
various washes.
Interval time: Set the wash interval in hours.
Wash time/measure time: Set the wash time in minutes. In a continuous wash, wash time is
replaced by measure time.
Recovery time: Set the recovery time in minutes.
Manual wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, a wash cycle can be activated manually. On the
Calibration/Wash screen, press the Start manual wash cycle to perform a
manual wash.
Imp2 wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, a wash cycle can be started if the Impedance 2
too high error occurs with respect to the reference electrode. DO
Continuous wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
A continuous wash cycle is started at the instant when this item is enabled.
In a continuous wash, the Measure time and Interval time are reversed
(see Figure 13.3).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-12
When a continuous wash is disabled

Tint Tint

Tw Tr Tw Tr

Tint: Interval time


Tw: Wash time
Tr: Recovery time

When a continuous wash is enabled

Tint Tint

Tw Tw Tr Tw Tw Tr

Tint: Interval time


Tw: Measure time
Tw: Wash time
Tr: Recovery time F050605_2.ai

Figure 13.3

13.6.6 Factory setup


For Factory setup, there is no item to be set by the user.

NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.

13.7 Display setup


This screen is used to make various settings relating to screen display.

13.7.1 Main display (Dual display, Individual display)


Display setup Display setup
Main display Dual display
Trend Individual display
Auto Return Trend
Ad.just contrast or Auto Return
MONITOR display Adjust contrast
MONITOR display

Figure 13.4 Display setup screens for a single module (left) and two modules (right)

l Main display
When one module is installed on the instrument, only the Main display is available.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-13
Three measurement values can be set to display on the Main display as a primary value (1st
line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value (3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.

l Dual display 13
This screen is used to set items to be displayed in the top part (1st row) and bottom part (2nd
row) of the Home display. These settings are available when two sensors are installed in the
instrument.
When the Empty is selected for the 2nd row, the Home display can not be displayed.

l Individual display
When two modules are installed on the instrument, display items on the Main display for each
module can be set on these settings.
On the DO1 display or DO2 display screen, three measurement values can be set to display
on each Main display as a primary value (1st line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value
(3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.

13.7.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).

l X-axis: Timing
Select the X-axis timings time span on the trend graph display from a list.

l Y-axis: Limits DO
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.

NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<13. COMMISSIONING OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 13-14

13.7.3 Auto Return


When no operation is performed for the time set in Auto Return, the display returns to the
Monitor display (or to the Main display when the MONITOR display is disabled) and the analyzer
returns to a normal measuring mode. (When the Trend display is selected, the Auto Return
doesnt work.)
Select the time from among Disable, 10 min, and 60 min. When the Auto Return function is not
used, select Disable.

NOTE
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.

13.7.4 Adjust contrast


The LCD screen contrast can be adjusted.
Pressing the keys adjusts the contrast in 11 levels from +5 to 5 (including the default value
of 0).

13.7.5 MONITOR display


Select Enable so that the Monitor display becomes available. A default is Enable.
During Hold/Wash condition and a warning/fault condition, the Main display or the Home display
is displayed to indicate the condition.

13.8 Calculated data setup


On this setup, parameters can be set for calculated data.
When two modules are installed on the instrument, the calculated data can be set for values
measured by two sensors.
Select Differential or Average on the Calculated data setup screen.
Differential: A difference between measurement values measured by a sensor 1 and sensor 2
is an output as a calculated result.
(Diff) (value of the sensor 1) (value of the sensor 2)
Average: The average of measurement values measured by a sensor 1 and sensor 2 is an
output as a calculated result.
(Ave) (value of the sensor 1 + value of the sensor 2) / 2

To display the calculated result, select Calculated on the Dual display screen. (Section 13.7.1.)
(The setting on the Individual display has no effect.)
While displaying a calculated data, measurement value of the sensor 1 or sensor 2 can be
Sensor Sensor
1 2
checked on the each sensors display with pressing or at the lower right on the Main
display.

Pressing returns the display to the original calculated data display.


A calculated data can be set as a process parameter on the mA (Output) setup screen. (Section
13.3.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<14. CALIBRATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 14-1

14. CALIBRATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)


Calibrate dissolved oxygen sensors after installing or replacing them, cleaning the membrane, or
replacing the electrolyte solution.
Air, water, and manual calibrations are available.
Air calibration is the most common and easiest method. Water calibration is more accurate.
Manual calibration uses manually analyzed sample water and adjusts the sensor to the value.

NOTE
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
13.7.3.)
14

Execute & Setup Calibration


Execute: Air calibration
Calibration Water Calibration
HOLD Manual Slope Cal.
Temporary output * Manual Offset Cal. * This appears only when Zero
Temperature Cal. Calibration is set Enabled .
Setup: ** This appears only when
Commissioning ** Start manual wash cycle PH201G is selected on the
Change language Communication screen and
Start Quick Setup Wash contact is enabled.

Figure 14.1 Calibration

The calibration items include Air calibration, Water Calibration, Manual Slope Cal, and
Temperature Cal.
When Zero Calibration is set Enabled (see section 13.2.6), Manual Offset Cal. is available.

Press to select Execute: Calibration, choose the calibration object, and configure the
calibration to perform it. Calibration is made stepwise; follow the prompts displayed on the screen
to carry it out.
A stability check is conducted at each measurement point. Proceed to the next step only after the
reading has stabilized.

NOTE
While CHECKING STABILITY is indicated, the instrument automatically checks the stability
of the measurement (input value). If the stability is not confirmed within 60 min, an error is issued DO
and the procedure is aborted. Change the parameters in the stabilization time and step range as
necessary (see Section 13.2.6), and then recalibrate the sensor.

NOTE
When a sensor or a membrane is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 12.9.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<14. CALIBRATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 14-2

14.1 Air calibration


Span calibration in the ambient atmosphere is the most common and easiest method.
Although setting the Zero Calibration to Enabled allows 2-point calibration of Zero (0%) and
Span (100%), only span calibration is generally performed. For zero calibration, see the next
section.

Set the sensor in the maintenance mode. Wash off any stain on the membrane and use a soft
tissue to wipe off any remaining water from the membrane.
Leave the sensor in an environment without temperature fluctuation or air flow for about 10
minutes, such as in an empty container. After confirming that the reading is stable, calibrate the
sensor.

14.2 Water calibration


Water calibration is a method of calibrating dissolved oxygen analyzers in a laboratory. Accurate
results can be obtained if the span calibration is performed carefully in air-saturated water.
Although setting the Zero Calibration to Enabled allows 2-point calibration of Zero (0%) and
Span (100%), the reading must have been stable before performing zero calibration. Therefore,
zero calibration takes a relatively long time.
Conduct water calibration in fresh water. For zero calibration in salt water, perform it by manual
calibration.
Set the sensor in the maintenance mode. Wash off any stain on the membrane and use a soft
tissue to wipe off any remaining water from the membrane.

l Air-saturated water
Pour water (without salt content) into a beaker or other container, and place it on a magnetic
stirrer or other agitator. Put a stirring bar in it and agitate the water, and send air from a pump
(bubbling). It takes 15 to 30 minutes until the water is fully saturated. Then put the sensor in this
water which is still agitated and bubbling, and calibrate it. Keep the sensor at least 3 cm above
the bottom of the beaker to prevent the membrane from directly contacting the air bubbles.

l Water for zero calibration


Zero calibration takes a long time and normally there is no need to perform it. A clean sensor
does not have a zero current and thus does not require zero calibration.
For the zero calibration water, dissolve 20 to 30 grams of sodium sulfite in 1 liter of desalinated
water.

NOTE
Dissolve sodium sulfite in the water and wait until the reading becomes stable before calibrating
the sensor. Even a healthy sensor needs 40 to 50 minutes. Leave the sensor in the solution.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<14. CALIBRATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 14-3

14.3 Manual slope calibration


Calibrate the sensitivity of the sensor with a solution of known oxygen concentration.
First, analyze the oxygen concentration of a sample solution and then calibrate the sensor
sensitivity to adjust to this value. From the actual measurement of salinity and temperature,
obtain the dissolved oxygen concentration by referring to Table 1 in Appendix 4 and enter it.
When salinity must be considered, perform the calibration manually.

Note the following:


Quickly analyze the sample water to prevent the dissolved oxygen concentration or
temperature from changing.
Before analyzing the sample water, analyze the reference with a calibrated laboratory 14
instrument.
To eliminate any discrepancies, the laboratory instrument must have been calibrated with
the same calibration data as specified in ISO 5814.
Confirm that the reading of the instrument is stable and the sensor is clean. If the reading
remains unstable, set the sensor in the maintenance mode and wash off any stain on the sensor
membrane. Return the sensor to the sample water and leave it until the reading becomes stable.

l Salinity compensation
To compensate salinity, select Enabled in Measurement setup Salinity compensation
Compensation (see Section 13.2.4).
Perform calibration by referring to Table 1 in Appendix 4.

Example:
When the atmospheric pressure is 101.325 kPa, the solution temperature is 22.5C, and the
salinity is 30 g/kg (3 wt% seawater equivalent):
(1) Calculate the saturated concentration of desalinated water.
According to Table 1 in Appendix 4, the saturated concentration is 8.74 mg/l at 22C and
8.58 mg/l at 23C.
The value at 22.5C is calculated as follows:
8.74 + (8.58 8.74) (22.5 22) = 8.66 mg/l
(2) Compensate the value for salinity.
The compensation value for 30 g/kg salinity at 22.5C is calculated as follows:
0.0453 + (0.0443 0.0453) (22.5 22) = 0.0448 mg/l
0.0448 30 = 1.34 mg/l
(3) Calculate the saturated concentration of the solution (for calibration).
The saturated concentration for 30 g/kg salinity at 22.5C is calculated as follows:
8.66 1.34 = 7.32 mg/l
DO

14.4 Temperature calibration


For the most accurate measurements, it is important to have a precise temperature
measurement. Measure the temperature with a high-precision thermometer and adjust the
sensor reading accordingly. For best accuracy, this should be done as near to the normal
operating temperature as possible.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<14. CALIBRATION OF DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> 14-4

14.5 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last).
Use this menu to hold the output.

For the settings, see n Configure Hold on page 13-7.


During commissioning or quick setup, the output is automatically held.
Setting Hold during Calibration/Wash to Disabled deactivates the hold function during
calibration or washing.

Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF.
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:DO

10.38 mg/L
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA Oxygen1 20mA

Figure 14.6 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled

HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.

14.6 Temporary output


If measurement cannot be made due to replacement of one of the sensors, assignment of mA
output can be temporarily changed from the currently setup sensor to the other sensor. This
feature is enabled only when two sensors are connected.

Press to select Execute: Temporary output and then choose the process parameter to be
assigned on the Temporary output screen.

When process parameter assignment has been modified, the indication at the upper left of the
screen changes to .
The feature is disabled the moment the screen returns to the Main display, and the setting
(process parameter in mA output setting) returns to the original condition.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-1

15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP


This chapter describes the screen operations of SENCOM pH/ORP, the object to be measured.
Further details of screen operations can also be found in section 1.2.
Tag:SENCOM

10.38 pH
15

25.0 C
19 mV Calibration
4mA PH1 20mA pH 17.1 Calibration pH
ORP 17.3 Manual 17.1.1 pH Manual
Temperature 17.2 Automatic17.1.2 Zero/Slope
Sample 17.1.3 Zero/Slope/ITP(3point)
Execute & Setup Zero/Slope1,2(3point)
Execute:
Calibration HOLD 17.4 Calibration ORP
HOLD Manual pH Automatic
Sample Zero/Slope
Zero/Slope/ITP(3point)
Setup: Zero/Slope1,2(3point)
Commissioning
Change language Change language 2.7
Start Quick Setup
Quick setup Date/Time Seneor setup Measurement setup
15.2 16.6.4 16.1 16.2.1

Comissioning Output setup Temperature settings mA(output)


Sensor setup 16.1 mA: Output mA(Output) 16.2.2 16.3
Measuremet setup 16.2 Simulate Setup: Linear
Output setup 16.3 Table Table mA
Error configuration 16.4 Configure Hold Enter values
Logbook configuration 16.5
Advanced setup 16.6 Logbook configuration
Display setup 16.7 Setting logbook

Advanced setup
Measurement setup Settings 16.6.1
Temperature settings 16.2.2 Tag 16.6.2
Temp. compensation 16.2.3 Passwords 16.6.3
Calibration settings 16.2.4 Date/Time 16.6.4
Impedance settings 16.2.5 Communication
Communication 16.6.5
HART
Concentration 16.2.6 Factory setup16.6.6
PH201G PH201G setup
Sensor diag. settings 16.2.7
Wash contact: Enabled

Display setup Main display


Temp. comp. Main display 16.7.1 Additional text
Compensation: Manual Trend 16.7.2
Reference temp. Auto Return 16.7.3
pH: Matrix Matrix Adjust contrast 16.7.4
TC Enter values
MONITOR display 16.7.5
ORP: TC
Trend
Cal. settings x-axis: Timing
pH settings Cal. set pH Y-axis: Limits
ORP settings Zero and Slope units
rH settings Limits and timing
Buffers (select set)
Zero/Slope/ITP
SENCOM
Auto correct(Zero, Slope)

Buffers
Select buffer set:
Impedance setup Free programmable Free programmable
Input 1 impedance: Low Buffer table 1 Buffer table 1
Input 2 impedance: Low Buffer table 2 Enter values
Buffer table 3

Sensor diag. setting


Define heat cycle
Define SENCOM status

Figure 15.1 Menu structure of SENCOM pH/ORP (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-2

15.1 Change language


The screen is set to display English at factory shipment; if you wish to use the FLXA202/FLXA21
in another language, first select a language as described in section 2.7.

15.2 Quick setup


The Quick setup screen is used to set up the basic items you want to set up first, such as the
date/time and sensor settings. The detailed settings are described in chapter 16, Commissioning.
You may leave the Quick setup now and return to it later; however, it is recommended to perform
the quick setup first.
Each time the FLXA202/FLXA21 is started up, this screen is displayed. If it is not necessary to

change the setup, press No or .

NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display when the MONITOR display is disabled).

NOTE
The display may show ---- (bar) when starting measurement, which means the sensor is not
ready to measure. But the temperature is displayed normally. Wait until measurement values are
displayed.

While a bar (----) is displayed, as for the mA output, in the case of Off or Low, [Burn] of the
Output setup (see section 16.3) is fixed 3.6mA, and, in the case of High, 22.0mA becomes
fixed.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-3

15

Quick setup Sensor setup mA(output)


Start quick setup? Sensor type pH+ORP Process parameter pH1
pH pH1 Temperature1
Yes ORP
ORP1
No pH+ORP
rH1

Chanage language 0% value 0.00 pH


100% value 14.00pH

Next Finish

*1 Next
Finish
Date/Time Measurement setup
Format YYYY/MM/DD Measurement pH+ORP Monitor display
YYYY/MM/DD
pH
MM/DD/YYYY
Date 2010/03/03 ORP
DD/MM/YYYY
pH+ORP
Time 17:04:07 pH+rH
rH

Next Next
Next
Next
Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000

Unit C
C
F

Next
Next

*1: The Measurement setup screen appears only when pH + ORP is selected on the Sensor setup screen.
Figure 15.2 Quick setup

n Date/Time
The date display format can be selected from among the three types.
Enter the date or time of day by using the numerical keys. SENCOM
For details, see section 16.6.4.

n Sensor setup
Select a suitable electrode from among the displayed electrode types and set it up.
For details, see section 16.1.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-4

n Measurement setup
Select a suitable measurement parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
Measurement parameter setup can be made only when pH + ORP is selected on the Sensor
setup screen.
For details, see section 16.2.1.

n Temperature settings
In the case of temperature sensors, the temperature parameter is automatically set when
connection is made.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 16.2.2.

n mA (output)
Select a suitable process parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
For example, the mA output of pH has been set to 0 14 pH at factory shipment. If the resolution
needs to be improved, set a suitable value for the process.
For details, see section 16.3.

15.3 Main display and Monitor display


Pressing changes the screen to the Main display shown in Figure 15.3.
Tag:SENCOM

10.38 pH
25.0 C
19 mV
4mA PH1 20mA

Figure 15.3 Example of main display

On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.

NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition
(see section 16.7.1). For example, on the default condition of pH measurement, the 1st display
item is pH, the 2nd display item is temperature, and the 3rd display item is empty.

When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 16.7.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-5

10.38 mS/cm
Monitor display

15

Tag:SENCOM

1st display item


10.00 pH Main display
2nd display item 25.0 C
3rd display item 19.00 mV
4mA pH1 20mA

Tag:SENCOM Tag:SENCOM

25.0 C
19.00 mV
10.00 pH 25.0 C
19.00 mV 10.00 pH
4mA pH1 20mA 4mA pH1 20mA

Figure 15.4 Change display

15.4 Zooming in on details


Pressing on the Main display allows you to check detailed instrument information
(instrument information such as setup, sensor diagnosis, calibration, and module productions
number) through a transition of screens as shown in Figure 15.5.
In case of trouble, when you contact your nearest Yokogawa service center, please inform us
of the module and FLXA202/FLXA21 software revision displayed on the Detail screen and
other display information as well as the module productions number indicated on the nameplate
attached to the instrument.

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-6

Reset wellness data


mA Sesor wellness: New sensor?
20
Zero
Slope Yes resets
12 Input 1 imp. sensor wellness data.
Input 2 imp.
Heat cycle
4 Progress Time
15.00 Reset welness data Yes
Next Next No

HOLD SENCOM sensor status1: SENCOM sensor status2:


Max temp.exposed 35.0C High temp.1 total. 107 h.
FAIL High pH total time 50 h. Last date of High temp.1
Low pH total time 27 h. 2013/03/01 13:14:15
WASH Sterilization 7 High temp.2 total. 63 h.
Last date of Sterilization Last date of High temp.2
2013/02/28 10:11:12 2013/03/01 12:13:14

Next Next Next

2013/02/21 16:04:07
pH: Zero 0.000mV SENCOM module: Last calibrated at
Slope 100.0 % Module Pdn No. AAAA1111 -------- ------
Sensor 1.234 mV Software Revision 1.10 Calibration due at
ORP: Zero 0.000 mV -------- ------
Slope 100.0 % Projected maintenance
Sensor -1.567 mV -- (no meaning)
Impedance 1 BAD Projected replacement
Impedance 2 124.6 k -- (no meaning)
Next Next Next

SENCOM sensor: HOUSING ASSY:


Moddel dode FU20F Module Pdn No. BBBB2222
Software Revision 1.10 Software Revision 2.10
Assy Revison 1.10 HART Device Revision 2
Serial Number CCCC3333
Fact date 2013/02/20 (Fig.15.9)

Next Next

*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.
Figure 15.5 Detail display

n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 16.3.

n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in
communication setup.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-7

n PH (ORP)s zero, slope, and sensor, and Impedance


l Zero
= calibrated sensor offset in mV. Theoretically, the sensor reads 0 mV in a buffer solution of pH
7. The ZERO value indicates the condition of the sensor. The trend of ZERO drift of the sensor is
used to predict the lifetime of the sensor.
ZERO can also be displayed in pH units and then it represents the pH value where the sensor
output is 0 mV at 25C. Setting can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup 15
Calibration settings Zero and Slope units.
Setting of the zero value can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Zero/Slope/ITP. For details, see section 16.2.4.

l Slope
= calibrated efficiency of the sensor unit as a percentage of the theoretical slope of the sensor
unit. The theoretical slope follows the NERNST equation and is 59.16 mV/pH (at 25C). The
SLOPE can be calibrated only after a two-point calibration in buffer solutions with a different pH
value. A low slope indicates that the sensor is not clean or is faulty.
The SLOPE can also be displayed as a mV/pH value at 25C if the user has defined this variable
as mV/pH in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration settings Zero and Slope
units.
Setting of the slope value can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Zero/Slope/ITP. For details, see section 16.2.4.
+mV
Theoretical value

pH7, 0mV

pH0
pH14
Zero

-mV Calibration curve (slope) F0410.ai

Figure 15.6 Zero/slope

l Sensor
Represents the electromotive force of the sensor.

l Impedance 1
For a PH sensor, Impedance shows electrical resistance of the glass membrane electrode. The SENCOM
FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the impedance to know damage of the electrode.
For an ORP sensor, Impedance shows electrical resistance of metal electrode.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the impedance to know the surface condition of smudge and
the snapping of sensor wires. In case of Input Impedance setting is High and the measured
input-1 impedance value is higher than 100 k, the display shows M RANGE. The measured
input-1 impedance value is lower than 100 k, display shows BAD.
If both impedance measurements are disabled (Error setting: Off), the display shows - - - - (bar).
If either impedance measurement 1 or 2 is enabled, the display shows both the impedance
values.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-8
l Impedance 2
Impedance shows the electrical resistance of the reference electrode liquid junction. The liquid
junction forms the electrolytic contact between the reference electrode and the measuring
electrode, so it must be kept clean and filled with conductive electrolyte. Otherwise the
measurement will suffer from instability, drift and measuring errors. The electrical impedance is
one of the most important.
In case of Input Impedance setting is High and the measured input-2 impedance value is
higher than 100 k,the display shows M RANGE. The measured input-2 impedance value is
lower than 100 k, display shows BAD.
If both impedance measurements are disabled (Error setting: Off), the display shows - - - - (bar).
If either impedance measurement 1 or 2 is enabled, the display shows both the impedance
values.

n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled.
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 16.2.7.

The Reset wellness data button can reset wellness data.


When a sensor or electrode is exchanged or replaced, the warning SENCOM changed is
displayed depending on the settings (see Section 16.4). Reset the wellness data of the sensor.

NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 15.9.)

n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.

n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.

n Projected maintenance
The projected maintenance function predicts the date when the sensor unit will need recalibrating
for maintaining measurement accuracy. The function checks the input-2 impedance (reference
impedance) every 24 hours.
The function predicts the date when the input-2 impedance will cross the upper or lower limits,
and indicates the date and its status (the status is displayed in parentheses).
As shown in Figure 15.7, the date is predicted based on the intersection point of the upper or
lower limits and the extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-9

Upper limit

Value
Lower limit

15
Current Projected Day
date maintenance date F0310.ai

Figure 15.7

The status shows the certainty of the projected maintenance date in terms of the correlation
coefficient R. Tables 15.1 and 15.2 show respective display patterns.
Table 15.1 Display pattern of the projected maintenance date
Projected date -- 0-1 month 1-3 months 3-6 months 6-12 months Over 1 year
- - : cannot be predictable due to insufficient data
Table 15.2 Display pattern of the status
(- - - - -) (Poor) (Reasonable) (Excellent)
Status
(R < 0.50) (0.50 R < 0.70) (0.70 R < 0.85) (0.85 R < 1.00)

n Projected replacement
The projected replacement function predicts the date when the sensor will need replacing for
maintaining the measurement accuracy, based on the pH zero and pH slope on each calibration,
and reference impedance (input-2 impedance) after each calibration. The projected replacement
date is predicted based on these parameters stored upon calibration, and displayed the same as
that of projected maintenance. For details, see the description about the projected maintenance.
Since three parameters (pH zero, pH slope, and input-2 impedance after calibration) are used for
this projection, the nearest coming day is selected as the projected replacement date from the
extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method.

n SENCOM sensor status


The status of the SENCOM sensor is displayed.

Max temp. exposed


Displays the maximum temperature, which is automatically updated every time a higher
temperature is measured.

High pH total time/Low pH total time


Displays the total time during which the pH value remains above the upper pH limit or below the
lower pH limit.
Up to 10 years (87600 hours) can be counted, after which the time is no longer updated. For the SENCOM
setting of the parameters, see Section 16.2.7.

Sterilization
Displays the number of times the temperature remains above the preset value for at least the
prescribed time period (min.). For the setting of these parameters, see Section 16.2.7.
Figure 15.8 shows an example of sterilization.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-10

Temperature (C)

User-defined a b c
sterilization
temperature

User-defined sterilization time

Time
(min)
F1510.ai

Figure 15.8 Sterilization

a: This event is not counted because the duration does not reach the prescribed sterilization
time.
b: This event is counted because the duration exceeds the prescribed sterilization time.
c: This event is counted because the duration exceeds the prescribed sterilization time.
However long the event lasts, it is counted as one.
The date and time of the last count is displayed as the last date of sterilization.
The number of counts is up to 9999. Even after that, the last date of sterilization is updated if the
event meets the conditions.

High temp. 1 total/ High temp. 2 total


Displays the total time during which the temperature remains over the high temperature 1 or 2
(see Section 16.2.7).
The last date and time (the end of high-temperature condition) is displayed as the last date.
Up to 10 years (87600 hours) can be counted. Even after that, the last date is updated if the
event meets the conditions.

n SENCOM module
This screen enables operators to check the module production number and software revision of
the installed model.

n SENCOM sensor
This screen enables operators to check the information of the connected sensor, including the
model code, software revision, assembly revision, serial number, and manufacturing date.

n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-11

n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has three types of logbook per sensor to store history information
regarding the setting changes and calibration.
By selecting a desired logbook, you can retrieve and check the information. The Configure
logbook screen is used to set whether to store history information of each event and which
logbook to use for storage. The SENCOM logbook cannot be designated. For details, see
Section 16.5. 15
The logbook automatically records events such as calibration and errors.
Fixed messages can be manually stored in logbook1-1 and logbook1-2.

To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered.

When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 16.6.3.)

(Fig.15.5)

logbook1-1 1/1
Read Logbook:
logbook1-1
logbook1-1 logbook SENCOM
logbook1-2
logbook SENCOM

Finish

logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 ** Memorandum:
Power on
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced

Finish

logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on
Enter? SENCOM
No No
Yes

Finish
** When storing message manually.
Figure 15.9 Detail display (continued)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-12

15.5 Trend graphics


Pressing on the Zoom display changes the display to a graphical mode in which the
average measured value is shown on a time scale. The Live value is also digitally displayed in
a text box. The time scale (X-axis) and the primary value scale (Y-axis) are set in the DISPLAY
SETUP menu (Section 16.7.2).
The screen displays the trend of up to 41 averages of the measurement for each time interval.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 samples the measurements every second. The trending graphic also
shows the maximum and minimum measured values in that interval.
For example, if the time scale is set to 4 hours, then the trend is shown for 4 hours prior to the
actual measurement. Each point on the trend line represents the average over 46060/41 =
351 measurements (seconds).

NOTE
Updating the trend screen setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

Tag: SENCOM pH1


Measurement value (pH)

12.00 10.38pH
Max. and min. values on this display
Current process value
8.40

5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum

Time
Figure 15.10 Trend screen

The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-13

Tag: SENCOM pH1


mA
20 12.00 10.38pH

8.40
12
5.60
15
4
15.00 2.50

Next 12:00 12:20 12:40

Tag: SENCOM Temperature1


12.00 25.0C

8.40

5.60

2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40

Figure 15.11 Trend graphics

15.6 Instrument status screen


In the field of the Main display, the (Warning) or (Fault) sign appears according
to the instrument status. Upon pressing the displayed button, detailed information of the relevant
status appears.
See n Information button on page 1-9.

15.7 Calibration and Commissioning


Allows you to calibrate and configure the instrument. These operations can be protected with a
password.
For details on the password, refer to section 16.6.3.
Execute & Setup
Execute:
Calibration
HOLD

SENCOM
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 15.12 Execute & Setup

Pressing changes the display to the Execute & Setup screen.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<15. OPERATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 15-14

Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press

to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD), read chapter 17, and for commissioning, read chapter 16.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-1

16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP


This chapter describes how to check and change settings from the Commissioning screen.
When you move to the Commissioning screen, the output is held.
Execute &Setup Commissioning
Execute: Sensor setup
Calibration/Wash Measurement setup
HOLD Output setup
Error configuration
Logbook configuration
Setup: Advanced setup 16
Comissioning Display setup
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 16.1 Commissioning screen

Operations in Commissioning can be password-protected. If you set up a password, always take


a note of it. For details on setting a password, see section 16.6.3.

Figure 15.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.

On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 16.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Sensor type first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options change
accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 16.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of SENCOM in the
attached CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of SENCOM and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument.
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section
16.6.1).

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-2
Table 16.1 Menu Structure and Default Values in Commissioning
Parameter Ref. sect.
Sensor setup Sensor type 16.1
Measurement setup Measurement 16.2.1
Temperature setting Temp. element 16.2.2
Temp. compensation Compensation 16.2.3
Reference temp.
Process Temp. Compensation
Calibration settings pH settings Zero and Slope units 16.2.4
Limits and timing
Buffers (select set)
Zero/Slope/ITP
Auto correct (Zero, Slope)
ORP settings Limit and timing
rH settings Zero/Slope
Impedance settings 16.2.5
Concentration Unit 16.2.6
Sensor diag. settings Input 1 imp.: 16.2.7
FINE
Input 2 imp.:
Process time
Heat cycle:
Define heat cycle
Define SENCOM status
Output setup mA 16.3
Output Process parameter
Setup
Linear 0 % value
100% value
Table
Burn
Damping time
Simulate Simulation perc.
Configure Hold
Error configuration 16.4
Logbook configuration 16.5
Advanced setup Settings 16.6.1
Tag 16.6.2
Passwords 16.6.3
Date/Time 16.6.4
Communication 16.6.5
HART
PH201G
Factory setup 16.6.6
Display setup Main display 16.7.1
Trend 16.7.2
Auto Return 16.7.3
Adjust contrast 16.7.4
MONITOR display 16.7.5

NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 16.1) are crucial for
measurement. If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the
parameters that may initialize other values, see Appendix 1.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-3

16.1 Sensor setup


Sensor type setup is determined by the sensor to be connected to the instrument. Select one of
the following three sensor types:
pH: Only pH is measured.
ORP: Only ORP is measured. Use this setting for the ORP measurement on the basis
of a glass electrode. For the measurement on the basis of a reference electrode,
select pH+ORP and then select ORP in [Measurement].
pH + ORP: Both pH and ORP are measured simultaneously. This setup also allows rH to be
measured. ORP measurement is based on a reference electrode
16
Table 16.2 Selecting sensor types
Sensor type Measurement (Sec. 16.2.1) Description
pH
ORP For the ORP measurement on the basis of
pH + ORP pH + ORP a reference electrode
pH + rH
rH
pH (not displayed) Same of pH of pH + ORP
For the ORP measurement on the basis of
ORP (not displayed)
a glass electrode

NOTE
The default of [Sensor type] is pH+ORP. Change this setting for your sensors. Not all sensor
types are available for some SENCOM sensors. For example, pH cannot be selected when an
ORP sensor is connected.

NOTE
The selection of Sensor type determines the menu structure throughout the instrument.
When pH + ORP is specified as the sensor type, the object under measurement will be displayed
at the top of Measurement setup.
If the sensor type is changed from pH to ORP, part of the relevant setup is reset, requiring
reconfiguration.
When ORP is specified, and when an ORP sensor doesnt have any temperature element,
set both of Temperature too high/low in Error configuration to Off so that no related error is
caused. (Refer to the section 16.4.) Without temperature input, a temperature shown on the Main
display is the maximum or the minimum temperature of the temperature elements range set on
the Temperature settings. Setting in Display setup can make temperature value on the display
not to be displayed. (Refer to the section 16.7.)

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-4

16.2 Measurement setup


This section describes how to set up various parameters relating to measurements.
Measurements are performed based on the measurement parameter setup.

For measurement setup, part of the menu structure of settable items changes depending on the
Sensor type selected in 16.1 Sensor setup.

16.2.1 Measurement
If pH or ORP is selected in Sensor type, a measurement type does not need to be selected and
it is not displayed.
If pH + ORP is selected in Sensor type, five measurement types can be selected for the
Measurement item at the top of the Measurement setup screen. Select a suitable measurement
type for the application.
Moreover, associated items are added to parameters in Error configuration, Display setup,
etc.; check the setting condition of each item.

16.2.2 Temperature settings


When SENCOM sensors are connected, temperature elements for compensation are
automatically set.

Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix

16.2.3 Temperature compensation


ORP measurement involves no temperature input. No setting is required on the temperature
compensation. Process temperature compensation is effective if T.C. ORP mV/C in Temp.
Coef. is set.

n Temperature compensation
This compensation of pH value is performed on the Nernst equation.
Two methods can be used: Automatic and Manual. Select Automatic when a temperature
element is used, or select Manual when a manually set temperature is used.

NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should
be set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display is this manually set
temperature.

n Reference temperature
Set a reference temperature to which the measured pH value must be compensated. Normally
25C is used, so this temperature is chosen as the default value.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-5

n Process temperature compensation


Select a temperature compensation method. None does not perform the temperature
compensation.
If pH is selected in Sensor type, choose process temperature compensation from among
None, TC, Matrix, and NEN6411. If ORP is selected in Sensor type, choose it from among
None and TC.

l TC
This method uses the linear compensation function. 16
It is possible to adjust the temperature coefficient (TC) factor directly. If the temperature
coefficient factor of the sample liquid is known from laboratory experiments or has been
previously determined, it can be entered here.
This TC is a pH variation to 1 C (pH/T). Adjust the value between -0.1 to 0.1 pH/C.
In combination with the reference temperature setting, a linear compensation function is
obtained, which is suitable for all kinds of chemical solutions.

l Matrix
Matrix means a temperature compensation which uses the temperature compensation
matrix. The temperature compensation matrix is a table of pH values at various temperatures
corresponding to the pH values at the standard temperature. For details, see Appendix 1.

When the temperature or the precompensated pH value is out of the range of the temperature
compensation matrix, the temperature compensation error (warning) will be issued. This is not a
device error.
In this case, however, the temperature compensation is performed by extrapolation.

NOTE
To display the precompensated pH value, set the Process Temp. Compensation to None.
Select Measurement setup Temp. compensation Process Temp. Compensation.

l NEN6411
This algorithm takes into account the dissociation of water in strong acid and strong alkaline
solutions. It is particularly useful for pH measurement of boiler feed water.

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-6

16.2.4 Calibration settings


The screen flow differs depending on the combination of objects to be measured.
Calibration settings for a pH converter involve slope (sensitivity), zero (aspot), and ITP
(isothermal point). Figure 16.2 shows the pH value against the mV output of the sensor. The
characteristic for pH measurement is an offset also known as aspot [mV] or zero [pH] and a
Slope [%, mV/pH]. For an ideal sensor, the theoretical slope is 59.16 mV/pH at 25C. The slope
can be entered in mV/pH or as a percentage of the theoretical slope (100% corresponds to
59.16 mV/pH). ITP represents a pH value where the output of the sensor does not change with
temperature. Note that slope and zero are defined at 25C.
500
pH
mV mV

ITP (Isothermal point)


Aspot
0
0 mV 0 C
10 C
25 C
- 200
0 7 14
ITP Zero pH

Figure 16.2 Calibration parameters

n pH settings

l Zero and Slope units


Zero is an alternative to Asymmetry Potential. The method of zero (aspot) unit conforms to the
DIN standard for IEC 60746-2 instruments. Zero is defined in pH or mV.
The unit of Slope (sensitivity) is mV/pH or % (with the theoretical value as 100%).

l Limits and timing


Zero High/Low
Zero (aspot) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new zero exceeds
these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures and
calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be adjusted to
suit the application and the users criterion.
Slope High/Low
Slope (sensitivity) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new slope
exceeds these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures
and calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be
adjusted to suit the application and the users criterion.
Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this setpoint, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-7
Stabilization time
This is the time over which the stability of a pH value is monitored during calibration. When
variations of the pH value are within a value set in Step Range over this stabilization time set
here, the value is regarded as being stable. If the pH value does not stabilize within 10 minutes,
calibration is aborted.
Calibr. interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will give a warning or fault according to the setting on the Error configuration
screen.
16
l Buffers (select set)
Calibration is made using standard calibration buffers. We recommend the NIST (JIS equivalent)
standard buffers for highest accuracy, but the user is free to select DIN 19267, US, or a user-
defined buffer. The standard buffers can be found in Appendix 1.
Three types of user-defined buffer tables can be defined. On the Free programmable screen,
select a buffer table that you wish to set up. When a buffer table is selected on this screen, the
Buffer table 1 to Buffer table 3 screens of the selected buffer table are displayed.
Clear table?
If you select Yes and press Yes when prompted to clear the table, the contents of the buffer
table will be cleared, the display will return to the Buffer table screen automatically, and the Table
was cleared message will be displayed. If you want to perform temperature compensation using
the matrix after clearing the table, matrix values must be redefined.
Check values?
If you select Yes, a value check starts. When the check ends, the results will be displayed on
the screen. When the results are normal, the No error message appears. In case of an error,
error information is displayed.

l Zero/Slope/ITP
You can enter Zero (aspot), Slope (sensitivity), and ITP values directly in the screen displayed.
These data can be obtained from the manufacturer of the probe, by the users laboratory, etc.

NOTE
It is not necessary to enter this data. In most cases, as the FLXA202/FLXA21 automatically does
this while performing calibration, the feature is used in the case of special electrode systems or
where calibration in the process environment is not possible. See Chapter 17.

l Auto correct (Zero, Slope)


This function calculates calibration coefficients from the transition of past calibration data (zero,
slope) and compensates pH value using these calibration coefficients after the latest calibration. SENCOM
The default setting is Disable. To make the function effective, select Enable.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-8

a: Actual change
d b: Zero and slope calculated from
the calibration data
c: Zero and slope calculated from
Zero, Slope the calibration data and shifted
using the latest calibration data
d: Data from calibration
a

b
c
Calibration

Time
Figure 16.3 Auto correct

n ORP settings
l Limits and timing
Zero High/Low
Zero (aspot) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new zero exceeds
these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures and
calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be adjusted to
suit the application and the users criterion.

Slope High/Low
Slope (sensitivity) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new slope
exceeds these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures
and calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be
adjusted to suit the application and the users criterion.

Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this setpoint, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.

Stabilization time
This is the time over which the stability of an ORP value is monitored during calibration. When
variations of the ORP value are within the value set in Step Range over this stabilization time
set here, the value is regarded as being stable. If the value has not stabilized within 10 minutes,
calibration is aborted.

Calibr. interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will give a warning or fault according to the setting on the Error configuration
screen.

l Zero/Slope
You can enter zero and slope values directly.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-9

16.2.5 Impedance settings


This screen is used to set the impedance relating to an input impedance check.
High or Low is automatically set according to the connected SENCOM sensor. You cannot
select the setting. In the case of Low, high and low limits can be set.
For FU20F sensors, Impedance 1 is High and Impedance 2 is Low.

Input 1 impedance represents the glass membrane impedance of a pH sensor. In case of an


ORP sensor, it represents metal electrode impedance. Input 2 impedance stands for reference
impedance. 16

The FLXA202/FLXA21 has an impedance check, which is capable of monitoring the impedance
of various sensor systems.
The system can be set to measure the impedances of glass (input 1 impedance: high) and
reference (input 2 impedance: low) electrodes. In applications that tend to leave deposits on the
electrodes or to clog the reference sensor junction, the impedance check (set error configuration)
on the reference sensor can be used to initiate an alarm, or to initiate the wash cleaning process,
if one of the limits is exceeded.

16.2.6 Concentration
Generally pH values are not converted into concentrations. Following linear conversion is not
suitable for a lot of measurements.

The FLXA202/FLXA21 is capable of converting a measured pH value into concentration for


display. Parameters required for concentration calculation can be arbitrarily set by the user.
Those parameters are as follows:
Unit: The default value is %. The unit can be selected from among mg/L, g/L, and
ppm.
pH: The default values are 0 and 14 pH (0 to 14). They are the pH zero and span
required for conversion to concentration.
Concentration: The default value are 0 and 100%. Concentration for each pH can be set.
Concentration can be assigned to the pH value zero and span individually.

16.2.7 Sensor diagnostic settings


This screen is used to set items relating to sensor diagnostics displayed on the screens invoked

by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.
SENCOM
The setting parameters include Input 1 imp., Input 2 imp., Progress time, and Heat cycle.
When input impedance is set High (section 16.2.5), FINE value can be changed. When input
impedance is set Low, its High limit and Low limit will be the limits for diagnostic.
For FU20F sensors, Impedance 1 is High and Impedance 2 is Low.

It is also possible to set the Bad limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle
temp and Heat cycle time of the heat cycle.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-10
l Define SENCOM status
Set the parameters for analyzing the SENCOM sensor. They are displayed on the detail screen.
The parameters are Sterilized temp., Sterilized time, High temp.1, High temp.2, Low pH value,
and High pH value.

16.3 Output setup


The general procedure is to first define the function of the output, Output or Simulate. Then, set
the process parameters associated with the output. On the Output, an output of measured value
is selected. On the Simulate, a simulation value can be set.
And, the parameters for HOLD function can be set on this setting.

l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.
Process parameter
The available process parameters depend on the selected Sensor type on the Sensor setup
and the selected Measurement type on the Measurement setup.
The output of the selected process parameter is shown as a bar on the bottom of the Main
display. And its parameter symbol (for example, PH1) is shown above the bar, too. When
a selected process parameter is displayed as a measurement value, the top left number or
character is turned to be white number or character on black background (for example, ). (Refer
to the section 1.2.)

Process parameters can be selected from among:


pH1, Temperature 1, and ORP1: SENCOM modules measured values

Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered.)
Burn
Select the designated output in case of a fault from among Off, Low, and High. See 16.4 Error
configuration to set the output.
Off: Output depends on the measured value.
Low: Output is fixed to 3.6 mA
High: Output is fixed to 22.0 mA.
Damping time
This is the time taken for a response to a step input change to reach 90% of the final value
(attenuation time). Set this time in sec.

l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-11

n Configure Hold
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 17.4.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.
During the Commissioning or the Quick Setup, the mA output is automatically held. The preset
value depends on a setting on the Last or fixed.
Last: The preset value is a value measured just before hold condition.
Fixed: The preset value is a value set in the Fixed value mA.
When the Fixed is selected, set a mA value in the Fixed value mA.
16
Selection on the Hold during Calibration/Wash decides to activate or deactivate the hold
function automatically during calibration or wash.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
Disabled: No automatic hold function

Only when the PH201G is selected on the Communication, the message of Hold during
Calibration/Wash is displayed. On other selections, the message of Hold during Calibration is
displayed.

16.4 Error configuration


In Error configuration, configure the statuses of various error causes.

This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (16.3 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting
is appropriate.

The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/3 to 3/3
screens.

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-12
Table 16.3 Error configuration
Display item Description Default
pH too high The pH value exceeds 16.00. Warn.
pH too low The pH value is lower than 2.00. Warn.
Temperature too high Measured process temperature is higher than the Warn.
maximum limit.
Temperature too low Measured process temperature is lower than the Warn.
minimum limit.
ORP too high The ORP value is higher than 1500 mV. Off
ORP too low The ORP value is lower than 1500 mV. Off
rH too high The rH value is higher than 100. Off
rH too low The rH value is lower than 0. Off
Matrix config. error The temperature compensation matrix is not set Fault
properly (see Section 16.2.3).
Calib. time exceeded Calibration time exceeds the calibration interval Off
(see Section 16.2.4).
Wash half-time error The response to wash is abnormal. Off
Impedance 1 too high The sensor must be checked. Off
Impedance 1 too low
Impedance 2 too high
Impedance 2 too low
SENCOM changed The SENCOM sensor has been changed. Warn.
This error setting can be set to either Off or Warn..

CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.

NOTE
The Impedance 1 too high/too low and Impedance 2 too high/too low error items are displayed
in the Error configuration screen. In general, for a pH sensor, Impedance 1 means glass
electrode, and for an ORP sensor, it means metal electrode. Impedance 2 represents the
reference electrode in all cases.

NOTE
Before using sensors which do not have any temperature measuring elements, set both of
Temperature too high and Temperature too low to Off on the Error setting screen. Due to the
open input of temperature signal, a false error may happen as if temperature goes over a high
limit or a low limit.

16.5 Logbook configuration


In Logbook configuration, the user configures information to be saved to a logbook or initializes
the logbooks.
Logbooks are used to keep an electronic record of events such as error messages, calibrations,
and programmed data changes. By referring to this log, users can, for instance, easily determine
maintenance or replacement schedules.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-13
In Logbook configuration, the user can select Off, 1-1, or 1-2 for each item of interest to be
logged.
The SENCOM logbook cannot be specified.
This can be done for items displayed on the Settings logbook 1/3 to 3/3 screens. Assigning 1-1 or
1-2 to each item allows information to be organized and logged in a logbook.

NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1. This logbook may be full earlier.
It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2.
16

For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1, 1-2 or SENCOM can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (up to 3 pages for the SENCOM logbook, up to 13 pages for others).

NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.

16.6 Advanced setup


Advanced setup is used to set functions relating to matters other than measurements such as the
selection of settings, tag setting, password setting for protecting calibration and commissioning
operations, date setting, and communication setting.
(Factory setup is for service engineers only; there is no item to be set by the user.)

16.6.1 Settings
In Settings, select an item to be set as the default value from among No action, Load factory
settings, Save user settings, and Load user settings.
When the default values are loaded, the instrument will be restarted. (In the case of Save user
settings, it will not be restarted.)
The following parameters are not included in the defaults:
Tag
The contents of all logbooks

NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.

To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the SENCOM
menu message.

If you select Load factory settings, the instrument will be set to the default settings at factory
shipment.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the factory settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-14
When Save user settings is selected, the current settings can be saved as the defaults.
When this item is selected, the user settings will start to be saved immediately. After saving the

parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.

16.6.2 Tag
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is SENCOM.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main display.

16.6.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.

When you set a password, always take a note of it.

When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.

16.6.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.

16.6.5 Communication
In Communication, select the communication setting from among None, HART, and PH201G.
The burn down current value is 3.6 mA.

NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.

In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-15

n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and
FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)

l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple 16
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.

l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.

l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.
If blank is selected for a parameter, items below that parameter must all be set to blank. If an item
is blank, those below it cannot be set to a status other than blank.

For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.

n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, Fail contact, and Wash
contact.

l Hold contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.

l Fail contact
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 16.4 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.
SENCOM
l Wash contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, items for a wash can be set on the Wash settings screen.
In the Wash settings screen, set the interval time, wash time, and recovery time and setup of
various washes.
Interval time: Set the wash interval in hours.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-16
Wash time/measure time: Set the wash time in minutes. In a continuous wash, wash time is
replaced by measure time.
Recovery time: Set the recovery time in minutes.
Manual wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, a wash cycle can be activated manually. On the
Calibration/Wash screen, press the Start manual wash cycle to perform a
manual wash.
Imp2 wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, a wash cycle can be started if the Impedance 2
too high error occurs with respect to the reference electrode.
Continuous wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
A continuous wash cycle is started at the instant when this item is enabled.
In a continuous wash, the Measure time and Interval time are reversed
(see Figure 16.4).
When a continuous wash is disabled

Tint Tint

Tw Tr Tw Tr

Tint: Interval time


Tw: Wash time
Tr: Recovery time

When a continuous wash is enabled

Tint Tint

Tw Tw Tr Tw Tw Tr

Tint: Interval time


Tw: Measure time
Tw: Wash time
Tr: Recovery time F050605_2.ai

Figure 16.4

The instrument has a function for checking whether measurements are normally made after
wash, allowing you to check a sensor response.
The wash recovery check is performed by making use of the time to recover half the wash-cycle
pH change. The half the wash-cycle pH change recovery time replaces the relaxation time by the
recovery time.
Whether to conduct the wash recovery check can be set on the Error settings 2/3 screen. Half
the wash-cycle pH change refers to half the value (1/2pH) of the difference (pH) between the
pH value during normal measurement of an example in Figure 16.5 and the pH value detected
during wash. If the pH value during wash is greater than 1/2pH when 1/3 tR has elapsed, the
electrode is assumed to be good. If it is smaller than 1/2pH, then the electrode is assumed to be
bad.
However, for applications where the pH during wash shows almost the same value as the normal
pH, the difference will be approximately zero. In such a case, disable the wash recovery check.
An example of such applications is the monitoring of waste water pH. If you select water jet
cleaning in such a case, the normal pH as well as the washing time pH will be around pH 7; the
difference will be approximately zero, so the recovery time check will not work normally.
This function is available either for ORP measurement only.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-17
tI : Wash Period

Good Electrode

pH
1/2pH
Bad Electrode
pH

1/3tR
tW : Wash Time tR : Recovery Time
16

tI : Wash Period Time


tW : Wash Time
tR : Recovery Time
F050605_3.ai

Figure 16.5

16.6.6 Factory setup


For Factory setup, there is no item to be set by the user.

NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.

16.7 Display setup


This screen is used to make various settings relating to screen display.

NOTE
Settable items differ depending on settings in Sensor setup and Measurement setup.

16.7.1 Main display


Three measurement values can be set to display on the Main display as a primary value (1st
line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value (3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value. SENCOM
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<16. COMMISSIONING OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 16-18

16.7.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).

l X-axis: Timing
Select the X-axis timings time span on the trend graph display from a list.

l Y-axis: Limits
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.

NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.

16.7.3 Auto Return


When no operation is performed for the time set in Auto Return, the display returns to the
Monitor display (or to the Main display when the MONITOR display is disabled) and the analyzer
returns to a normal measuring mode. (When the Trend display is selected, the Auto Return
doesnt work.)
Select the time from among Disable, 10 min, and 60 min. When the Auto Return function is not
used, select Disable.

NOTE
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.

16.7.4 Adjust contrast


The LCD screen contrast can be adjusted.
Pressing the keys adjusts the contrast in 11 levels from +5 to 5 (including the default value
of 0).

16.7.5 MONITOR display


Select Enable so that the Monitor display becomes available. A default is Enable.
During Hold/Wash condition and a warning/fault condition, the Main display is displayed to
indicate the condition.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<17. CALIBRATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 17-1

17. CALIBRATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP


The FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the status of sensors including the connection.
While an error is issued, calibration cannot be performed.

NOTE
Do not disconnect the sensor during calibration.

Before pH measurement, calibrate the pH sensor with the standard solution.


Before ORP measurement, check the electrode as a part of regular maintenance.

NOTE 17
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
16.7.3.)

Only when pH + ORP is selected


on the Sensor setup screen
Execute & Setup Calibration pH Calibration
Execute: Manual pH
Calibration Automatic ORP
HOLD Sample or Temperature
Temperature calibration

Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup

Figure 17.1 Calibration

The calibration items include pH, ORP, rH, and Temperature.


The item to be calibrated is determined according to the settings made in the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup in Commissioning.

Press to select Execute: Calibration, choose the item to be calibrated, configure the
calibration settings, then perform calibration.

NOTE
Note the following when performing calibration with buffer solutions.
1. Before starting a calibration, make sure the electrode system is properly cleaned and
the electrodes are fully functional. They must then be rinsed with clean water to avoid
contamination of the calibration solution(s).
2. Always use fresh buffer solution to avoid the risk of introducing errors from contaminated or
old solutions. Buffers supplied as liquids have a limited shelf life, especially alkaline buffers, SENCOM
which absorb CO2 from the air.
3. Yokogawa strongly recommends NIST/DIN 19266 buffer standards for the best accuracy
and buffer capacity. Commercially adjusted buffers (e.g., pH 7.00, 9.00 or 10.00) are a
compromise as a standard, and are often supplied without a temperature dependency
curve. Their stability will never be as good as NIST (JIS equivalent) solutions.
Always ensure that the sensors are properly conditioned, clean and filled with the correct
electrolyte solution (if appropriate) before starting a calibration. Refer to the sensor instructions
for details.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<17. CALIBRATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 17-2

17.1 pH calibration
There are the Manual, Automatic, and Sample modes of pH calibration.

17.1.1 Manual calibration


The unit is adjusted to match the value of the buffer standards or a process solution with a known
pH value (buffer solution).
The user determines the pH value, temperature influence, and stability.
Select the calibration type from among [zero/slope], [zero/slope/ITP(3point)], and [zero/slope1,2
(3point)].

Calibration is performed stepwise; follow the prompts displayed on the screen.


A stability check is conducted at each measurement point. Proceed to the next step only after the
reading has stabilized.
At calibration, we advise leaving the sensors for three to five minutes in the buffer solution before
proceeding to the next step even when the reading has stabilized. This will give reliable and
accurate calibration results.

NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 15.11.)

l zero/slope
This calibration type is one-point or two-point calibration.
One-point calibration performs the zero adjustment only. Two-point calibration performs the zero
and slope adjustments.

l zero/slope/ITP(3point)
This calibration type is ITP-type three-point calibration.
If ITP does not have pH 7, three-point calibration is performed to obtain the zero (asymmetry),
slope (sensitivity), and ITP (isothermal point) for calibration.

Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The 2nd buffer solution should be pH 7 2.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperatures of the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be at least 20C higher or lower
than the temperature of the 1st buffer solution.
To calculate the pH value of the 3rd buffer solution (pH3cal), insert the pH and temperature
values of the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions and the temperature value of the 3rd buffer
solution into the following equation.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<17. CALIBRATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 17-3

( tt
3 - t1
2 - t1
t -t
(273.15 + t2)(ITP - pH2) + (1 - 3 1 ) x (273.15 + t1)(ITP - pH1)
t2 - t1 )
pH3cal = ITP -
(273.15 + t3)
pHn: pH value of n-th buffer solution
Tn: Temperature of n-th buffer solution (C)
ITP: ITP value displayed in calibration settings (see section 16.2.4)
Assign 7.00 as the ITP value when a specific value is not available or for the first
calibration of a sensor.
Do not use the 3rd solution whose pH value is within pH3cal 1.

l zero/slope1,2(3point)
17
This calibration type is the line-segment type three-point calibration.
If the relation between electromotive force and pH is not in proportion for a wide range, divide the
relevant range into two sections and obtain the zero (asymmetry) and slope (sensitivity) in each
section to perform calibration.

Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.

17.1.2 Automatic calibration


Calibration can easily be performed by following the calibration menus.
Pre-select the buffer solution to be used from among NIST/DIN 19266, DIN 19267, US, and User
defined buffer in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration settings pH settings
Buffers (select set). See also Appendix table 1.
If you select User defined buffer, calibration is performed based on the conditions registered
in buffer tables 1 to 3. Use of the proper buffer table allows the system to perform reliable
calibration.
In the same way as manual pH calibration, select the calibration type from among [zero/slope],
[zero/slope/ITP(3point)], and [zero/slope1,2(3point)].

Calibration is performed stepwise; follow the prompts displayed on the screen.


A stability check is conducted at each measurement point. Proceed to the next step only after the
reading has stabilized.
SENCOM
NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 15.11.)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<17. CALIBRATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 17-4
l zero/slope
Select the solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings and
perform calibration by following the prompts on the screen.

l zero/slope/ITP(3point)
Calibration is performed in the sequence of the sequence selection menu (Table 17.1) of the
solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings. Perform calibration
by following the prompts on the screen.

Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The 2nd buffer solution in the buffer table in the Free programmable screen should be pH 7
2 (at 25C).
Either of the following conditions should be met.
- The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperature of the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions is at least 20C higher or lower than the
temperature of the 3rd buffer solution.
- The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperature of the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions is at least 20C higher or lower than the
temperature of the 1st buffer solution.

l zero/slope1,2(3point)
Calibration is performed in the sequence of the sequence selection menu (Table 17.1) of the
solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings. Perform calibration
by following the prompts on the screen.

Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
Table 17.1 Selection of Buffer Solutions in Three-point Calibration
Buffer settings Buffer sequence selection menus
NIST/DIN 19266 PH1.7PH6.9PH9.2
PH4.0PH6.9PH9.2
PH9.2PH6.9PH1.7
PH9.2PH6.9PH4.0
DIN 19267 PH4.7PH6.8PH9.2
PH9.2PH6.8PH4.7
US PH4.0PH7.0PH10.0
PH10.0PH7.0PH4.0
User defined buffer table1table2table3
able3table2table1

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<17. CALIBRATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 17-5

17.1.3 Sample calibration


A sample calibration is a single-point calibration for only the zero (asymmetric). It adjusts the
recorded reading to a collected sample value. Press [Take Sample] to record a collected sample
value in memory. Re-enter the Sample Cal. screen and press [Start calibration] to perform a
sample calibration. This updates the recorded data.

NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 15.11.)

17

17.2 Temperature calibration


For the most accurate measurements, it is important to have a precise temperature
measurement. Measure the temperature with a high-precision thermometer and adjust the
sensor reading accordingly. For best accuracy, this should be done as near to the normal
operating temperature as possible.

17.3 ORP calibration (rH calibration)


The calibration modes for ORP or rH are Manual and Sample. No automatic calibration
feature is available in an ORP or rH calibration.

Calibration is performed stepwise. Follow the prompts displayed on the screen.


A stability check is made at each measurement point. Proceed to the next step only after the
reading has stabilized.

NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 15.11.)

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<17. CALIBRATION OF SENCOM pH/ORP> 17-6

17.4 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last).
Use this menu to hold the output.

For the settings, see n Configure Hold on page 16-11.


During commissioning or quick setup, the output is automatically held.
Setting Hold during Calibration/Wash to Disabled deactivates the hold function during
calibration or washing.

Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF.
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:SENCOM

10.38 pH
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA PH1 20mA

Figure 17.2 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled

HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<18. MAINTENANCE> 18-1

18. MAINTENANCE
n Periodic maintenance
The FLXA202/FLXA21 requires very little periodic maintenance, except to make sure the front
window is kept clean in order to permit a clear view of the display and allow proper operation of
the touchscreen. If the window becomes soiled, clean it using a soft damp cloth or soft tissue.
To deal with more stubborn stains, a neutral detergent may be used.
When you must open the front cover and/or glands, make sure that the seals are clean and
correctly fitted when the unit is re-assembled in order to maintain the housings weatherproof
integrity against water and water vapor.

The pH measurement uses high impedance sensors and may otherwise be prone to problems
caused by exposure of the circuitry to condensation.
18
CAUTION
Never use harsh chemicals or solvents. In the event that the window does become heavily
stained or scratched, refer to the parts list for replacement part numbers.

l Battery
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a logbook feature that uses a clock to provide the timings. The
instrument contains a lithium cell (battery) to continue the clock function while the power is turned
off. Although the cell has an expected working life of 10 years, this is not guaranteed. When this
cell needs replacing, contact your nearest Yokogawa service center.

n Periodic maintenance of the sensor


Please follow the manual of each sensor about the maintenance of the sensor.

l Predictive maintenance
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a unique prediction function (wellness check). PH
By making settings concerning the sensor wellness check, you can grap the condition of the
sensor in the gauge display in the Detail screen and carry out predictive maintenance.
SC
See section 4.2.7, 7.1.7, 10.1.7, 13.2.7, or 16.2.7, Sensor diag. settings.

ISC

DO

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<19. TROUBLESHOOTING> 19-1

19. TROUBLESHOOTING
When a or indicator is displayed on the Main display, detailed error information can
be given by pressing this indicator-button.

See n Information button on page 1-9.


For setting of error items, refer to the Error configuration of the section 4.4, 7.3, 10.3, 13.4, or
16.4. For each error item, Warning or Fault will be indicated. Except these error items set on the
Error configuration, some errors will be indicated.

n Installation of sensor module


When a sensor module is not fixed properly, an error message on the figure 19.1 may be
displayed. Check the sensor module installation and lock mechanism.
On a 2-sensor measurement, if the different type sensors (for example, pH and SC) are installed,
an error message on the figure 19.2 will be displayed.
No sensor module
19

4mA 20mA

Figure 19.1 Error message when no sensor module is installed

Different sensor modules

PH
4mA 20mA

Figure 19.2 Error message for wrong combination of 2 sensor modules


SC

ISC

DO

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<19. TROUBLESHOOTING> 19-2

n FLXA21 Replacement of Modules


Only authorized person of Yokogawa is allowed to replace modules.
Be sure to keep the replacement procedure below.

CAUTION
Turn off the power supply to the analyzer before replacement of modules.

Lock Unlock
Figure 19.3 Locking the module

Do not hold the upper fine part when pulling out the module.
First, unlock the module by releasing the lock mechanism on the left and right of the module.
Use a slotted (flat head) screwdriver to pull-out the module. Before pull-out the module, loose a
terminal screw to hook a screwdriver.

Figure 19.4 Pull-out the module

After replacement of modules, wire the sensor.

NOTE
When the wiring of sensors is finished, be sure to attach the wiring covers. Furthermore, make
sure the module is locked with the mechanisms on the left and right of the module.

NOTE
Confirm that all locking-tabs (including for BLANK slots) are Locked position when close the
front panel.
If locking-tabs are Unlock position, the front panel may be interfered with locking-tabs.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<19. TROUBLESHOOTING> 19-3
l Checking nameplates of safety marking
In case of Intrinsic safety type or type n or nonincendive model, confirm the name plate on the
housing assembly and the sensor module. See n Mark position of intrinsic safety on page iv.

CAUTION
Intrinsic safety type or type n or nonincendive housing assembly /sensor module are certified
independently.
So they must be combined appropriately.

CAUTION
Dont use General Purpose housing assembly / sensor module as Intrinsic safety type module.

19

PH

SC

ISC

DO

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 1 For pH/ORP> App.1-1

Appendix 1 For pH/ORP


n Buffer tables
The following tables show the details of the buffer solutions selectable in Calibration settings of
pH (Section 4.2.4) (unit: pH).
Table 1 NIST (IEC 60746-2)/DIN 19266
0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 25C 30C 35C 38C 40C 45C 50C 55C 60C 70C 80C 90C 95C
1.68 pH 1.668 1.670 1.672 1.675 1.679 1.683 1.688 1.691 1.694 1.700 1.707 1.715 1.723 1.743 1.766 1.792 1.806
4.01 pH 4.003 3.999 3.998 3.999 4.002 4.008 4.015 4.024 4.030 4.035 4.047 4.060 4.075 4.091 4.126 4.164 4.205 4.227
6.87 pH 6.984 6.951 6.923 6.900 6.881 6.865 6.853 6.844 6.840 6.838 6.834 6.833 6.834 6.836 6.845 6.859 6.877 6.886
9.18 pH 9.464 9.395 9.332 9.276 9.225 9.180 9.139 9.102 9.081 9.068 9.038 9.011 8.985 8.962 8.921 8.885 8.850 8.833

Table 2 DIN 19267 (German buffers) so called: technical buffer solutions


0C 10C 20C 25C 30C 40C 50C 60C 70C 80C 90C
4.65 pH DIN 4.670 4.660 4.650 4.650 4.650 4.660 4.680 4.700 4.720 4.750 4.790
6.79 pH DIN 6.890 6.840 6.800 6.790 6.780 6.760 6.760 6.760 6.760 6.780 6.800
9.23 pH DIN 9.480 9.370 9.270 9.230 9.180 9.090 9.000 8.920 8.880 8.850 8.820

Table 3 US technical buffers


0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 25C 30C 35C 40C 45C 50C 55C 60C
4.0 pH US 4.000 3.998 3.997 3.998 4.001 4.005 4.001 4.018 4.027 4.038 4.050 4.064 4.080
7.0 pH US 7.120 7.090 7.060 7.040 7.020 7.000 6.990 6.980 6.988 6.978 6.970 6.890 6.980
10.0 pH US 10.317 10.245 10.179 10.118 10.062 10.012 9.966 9.926 9.889 9.856 9.828 9.828 9.828

Table 4 FREE PROGRAMMABLE (Default settings based on rounded NIST values).


0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 25C 30C 35C 40C 45C 50C 55C 60C 65C 70C 75C 80C
buffer 4 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.01 4.02 4.02 4.04 4.05 4.06 4.08 4.09 4.11 4.13 4.15 4.16
buffer 7 6.98 6.95 6.92 6.90 6.88 6.87 6.85 6.84 6.84 6.83 6.83 6.83 6.84 6.84 6.85 6.85 6.86
App.
buffer 9 9.46 9.40 9.33 9.28 9.23 9.18 9.14 9.10 9.07 9.04 9.01 8.99 8.96 8.94 8.92 8.90 8.89

The freely programmable table is populated with a basic set of data to provide a start for the
user configuration. This table is intended for the user to be able to choose his buffer solutions to
suit his own preference. The data concerning the pH temperature characteristic will need to be
obtained from the supplier of the buffers. PH

NOTE
Yokogawa recommend the use of NIST (primary buffer standards) rather than buffers which have
been adjusted by the addition of acid or alkaline materials to the buffer composition. In this way
the customer gets a recognized standard, as well as the best buffer capacity (the ability to resist
pH change with contamination).

SENCOM

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 1 For pH/ORP> App.1-2

n Matrix temperature compensation


Table 5 shows the defaults for the matrix temperature compensation selectable in Temperature
compensation (Section 4.2.3).
Table 5 Defaults for the matrix temperature compensation (Reference temperature (Tref.): 25.0C)
Temp. range Solution 1 Solution 2 Solution 3 Solution 4 Solution 5
(Min.) (Max.)
Tref. (25.0C) 6.40 pH 7.00 pH 7.30 pH 7.60 pH 9.00 pH
Tmin. (T1) 5.0C 6.42 pH 7.38 pH 7.94 pH 8.31 pH 9.74 pH
T2 25.0C 6.40 pH 7.00 pH 7.30 pH 7.60 pH 9.00 pH
T3 45.0C 6.34 pH 6.70 pH 6.86 pH 7.06 pH 8.40 pH
T4 65.0C 6.23 pH 6.45 pH 6.54 pH 6.67 pH 7.91 pH
Tmax. (T5) 85.0C 6.11 pH 6.25 pH 6.31 pH 6.40 pH 7.51 pH

l User setting
Delete the matrix and then enter new values as shown in Table 6. Gray areas are mandatory.
Other areas can be omitted.
Table 6 Example of user setting (Reference temperature (Tref.): 25.0C)
Temp. range Solution 1 Solution 2 Solution 3 Solution 4 Solution 5
(Min.) (Max.)
Tref. (25.0C) 6.40 pH 7.00 pH 7.30 pH 7.60 pH 9.00 pH
Tmin. (T1) 5.0C 6.42 pH 7.38 pH 7.94 pH 8.31 pH 9.74 pH
T2 25.0C 6.40 pH 7.00 pH 7.30 pH 7.60 pH 9.00 pH
T3 45.0C 6.34 pH 6.70 pH 6.86 pH 7.06 pH 8.40 pH
T4 65.0C 6.23 pH 6.45 pH 6.54 pH 6.67 pH 7.91 pH
Tmax. (T5) 85.0C 6.11 pH 6.25 pH 6.31 pH 6.40 pH 7.51 pH
Note: The gray areas must be entered.

The reference temperature is set in the Temperature Compensation menu (default: 25.0C).

Input temperatures for compensation in the Temp. ranges menu.


Input values from Solution 1 (low pH) to Solution 5 (high pH).

After entering all values, select Check values? to verify that there is no error. This function
checks if the matrix is consistently incremental or decremental. If any error is found, its location is
specified.
When there is no error, the matrix is compensated linearly and the blanks of the table (if any) are
filled. If some areas are left empty without running Check values?, a 1st/2nd comp. matrix error
will be issued.

n Changing the settings


If any setting is accidentally changed, values to the right of the relevant arrow in Table 7 are all
initialized.
Table 7 Parameters that initialize other values
Sensor type -> Measurement -> Output: Process Linear: 0% value, 100% value
parameter ->
Table
Communication: HART: PV
Display setup: Individual display (Main display)
Trend Graph Screen -> Y-axis (low, high)
Communication: HART
Impedance settings

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 1 For pH/ORP> App.1-3

n Checking ORP sensor electrodes


The normal functionality of the ORP sensor electrode is determined by measuring the ORP value
of the solution with a known ORP value, and by checking if the value is within the tolerable range.
To check the ORP sensor before regular operation, follow the procedure below.
The electrode is checked in measurement mode.

l Solution for checking


Use solutions with a known ORP value, such as quinhydrone, ferrous, and other solutions.

l Checking procedure
(1) Pour 50 to 100 ml of the solution into a clean 200-ml beaker.
(2) Remove the ORP sensor from the holder. Flush the measurement solution remaining on the
sensor with water and wipe off the water. If the detecting part and liquid outlet of the sensor
are stained, clean them with water.
(3) Immerse the tip of the ORP sensor into the solution. Read the ORP value after the reading
becomes stable (usually 5 to 10 minutes).
Measure the solution temperature and check if the ORP value at the temperature is in the
tolerable range.

l Yokogawas checking solution and tolerable range


Yokogawa offers the following reagents for checking. Use them as described below.
Quinhydrone (part number: K9024EC)
Ferrous (part number: K9024ED)
Quinhydrone solution
Put one bag of the reagent into a wide-mouthed jar (at least 250 ml) and pour deionized App.
water into the jar to make a total solution volume of 250 ml. Cold deionized water may not
dissolve the reagent completely and the reagent may partly float on the surface, but this
does not cause any problem for measurement.
Ferrous solution
Put one bag of the reagent into a wide-mouthed jar (at least 250 mL) and pour 2 mol/l PH
solution of sulfuric acid to make a total solution volume of 250 ml.
When using concentrated sulfuric acid, first pour approximately 150 ml of pure water into a
wide-mouthed jar that contains the reagent. Add 14 ml of concentrated sulfuric acid while
stirring the solution. Add more pure water to further dissolve the reagent and make a total
solution volume of 250 ml.

CAUTION
Be careful to touch the concentrated sulfuric acid.

Figure 1 shows the ORP values of the checking solutions prepared with Yokogawas reagents. SENCOM
If the measured ORP value is in the tolerable range, the electrode of the ORP sensor is working
normally.
If the ORP value is out of the range, calibrate the sensor. If the ORP value is slightly out of range,
verify whether the checking solution has been properly prepared.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 1 For pH/ORP> App.1-4
600
Ferrous solution
500 Tolerable range
Oxidation-reduction potential (mV)
400

Quinhydrone solution
300

Tolerable range
200

100

0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature (C)
Figure 1 Oxidation-reduction Potential Given by Checking Solution

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-1

Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)


n Temperature compensation
The conductivity of a solution is very dependent on temperature. Typically for every 1C
change in temperature the solution conductivity will change by approximately 2%. The effect of
temperature varies from one solution to another and is determined by several factors like solution
composition, concentration and temperature range. A coefficient () is introduced to express the
amount of temperature influence in % change in conductivity/C. In almost all applications this
temperature influence must be compensated before the conductivity reading can be interpreted
as an accurate measure of concentration or purity.

l NaCl (standard temperature compensation)


The FLXA202/FLXA21 has the default temperature compensation function based on a sodium
chloride (NaCl) solution. This function can be used for various applications and is compatible with
the NaCl compensation function of typical laboratory or portable instruments.
Table 1 NaCl compensation according to IEC 60746-3 with Tref. = 25C
Temperature Temperature compensa- Temperature Temperature compensa-
Ratio* Ratio*
(C) tion coefficient (%/C) (C) tion coefficient (%/C)
0 0.54 1.8 100 2.68 2.2
10 0.72 1.9 110 2.90 2.2
20 0.90 2.0 120 3.12 2.2
25 1.00 130 3.34 2.2
30 1.10 2.0 140 3.56 2.2
40 1.31 2.0 150 3.79 2.2
50 1.53 2.1 160 4.03 2.2
60 1.76 2.2 170 4.23 2.2
70 1.99 2.2 180 4.42 2.2
80 2.22 2.2 190 4.61 2.2 App.
90 2.45 2.2 200 4.78 2.2
*: The ratio of the conductivity at respective temperatures to the conductivity at the reference temperature.

l Temperature compensation coefficient (TC)


Set the temperature compensation coefficient based on the degree of influence of temperature
on the conductivity (%/C).
If the temperature compensation coefficient of the sample solution is known from laboratory SC
experiments or has been previously determined, enter the value.
The setting range is between 0.00 and 10.0%. By combining with the reference temperature
setting, a linear compensation function can be obtained. This is applicable to all kinds of chemical
solution.

<Configure calculated temperature coefficient (TC).>


Follow routing
Commissioning >> Measurement setup >> Temp.compensation >> T.C.
Enter the temperature coefficient calculated from the following formula:

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-2
A. Calculation of temperature coefficient factor (With known conductivity at reference
temperature).

Kt - Kref
100
= X
T - Tref K ref

= Temperature compensation factor in %/C
T = Measured temperature in C
Kt = Conductivity at T
Tref = Reference temperature
Kref = Conductivity at Tref
B. Calculation of temperature coefficient factor (with two known conductivity values at
different temperatures)
Measure the conductivity of the liquid at two temperatures, one below the reference and
above the reference temperature with the temperature coefficient set to 0,00%/C and use
the following equation to calculate a temperature coefficient ().
KT
K ref =
1+ ( T - Tref)
K1 K2
K ref= =
1+ ( T1 - Tref) 1+ ( T2 - Tref)

K1 (1 + ( T2 - Tref)) = K2 (1 + ( T1 - Tref))

K1 ( T2 - Tref) - K2 ( T1 - Tref) = K2 - K1

K2 - K1
=
K1( T2 - Tref) - K 2 ( T1 - Tref)

Where T1, T2: liquid temperature (C)
K1: conductivity at T1 (C)
K2: conductivity at T2 (C)
((

( )

Figure 1 Conductivity

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-3
<Calculation example>
Calculate the temperature coefficient of a liquid from the following data.
Conductivity 124.5 S/cm at a liquid temperature of 18.0 C and a conductivity 147.6 S/cm
at a liquid temperature of 31.0 C.
Substituting the data in the above formula gives the following result.
147.6 - 124.5
= x 100= 1.298 %/C
124.5x(31.0 - 25) - 147.6x(18.0 - 25)

Set the temperature coefficient in the FLXA202/FLXA21 converter.

When the temperature coefficient already set is accurate, the conductivity to be displayed
must be constant regardless of liquid temperature. The following check will make sure that the
temperature coefficient already set is accurate.
If, when the liquid temperature is lowered, a larger conductivity value is indicated, the
temperature coefficient already set is too small.
The opposite also applies. If a smaller conductivity value is indicated, the temperature coefficient
already set is too large. In either case, change the temperature coefficient so that the conductivity
no longer changes.

l Matrix
Matrix means temperature compensation with the temperature compensation matrix.
The temperature compensation matrix is a table of conductivity values at different temperatures
and concentrations.
Ready-made matrixes and user-defined matrixes are available.

<Ready-made matrixes>
App.
Ready-made temperature compensation matrixes are available for common inorganic acids and
bases. Those for ammonia and morpholine are also available.
Table 2 Ready-made temperature compensation matrixes
Compound to Temp. compensation
Matrix Concentration Details
be measured range
Ammonia 0..50ppb Ammonia 0 to 50 ppb 0 to 90C Table A
Ammonia 15..30% Ammonia 15 to 30% 10 to 50C Table B
Morpholine 0..500ppb Morpholine 0 to 500 ppb 0 to 90C Table C
Sulfunic acid 0..27% H2SO4 0 to 27% 0 to 100C Table D
SC
Sulfunic acid 39..85% H2SO4 39 to 85% -18 to 116C Table E
Sulfunic acid 93..100% H2SO4 93 to 100% 10 to 90C Table F
NaOH 0..15% NaOH 0 to 15% 0 to 100C Table G
NaOH 25..50% NaOH 25 to 50% 0 to 80C Table H
HCl 0..200ppb HCl 0 to 200 ppb 0 to 100C Table I
HCl 0..18% HCI 0 to 18% -10 to 65C Table J
HCl 24..44% HCI 24 to 44% -20 to 65C Table K
HNO3 0..25% HNO3 0 to 25% 0 to 80C Table L
HNO3 35..80% HNO3 35 to 80% -16 to 60C Table M

The ready-made temperature compensation matrixes are listed in Table A to M where


temperatures are in the column and concentrations are in the rows.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-4
Table A Ammonia 0..50ppb (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0 ppb 1 ppb 2 ppb 3 ppb 5 ppb 7 ppb 10 ppb 20 ppb 30 ppb 50 ppb
Tmin. 0 C 0.0116 0.0173 0.0229 0.032 0.0502 0.0688 0.0966 0.178 0.259 0.423
2. 10 C 0.0230 0.0284 0.037 0.0442 0.0651 0.0879 0.122 0.225 0.328 0.535
3. 20 C 0.0419 0.0466 0.0512 0.0622 0.0842 0.111 0.150 0.274 0.398 0.648
4. 30 C 0.0710 0.0749 0.0788 0.0895 0.111 0.139 0.181 0.325 0.469 0.758
5. 40 C 0.114 0.117 0.120 0.130 0.149 0.178 0.221 0.382 0.543 0.866
6. 50 C 0.173 0.176 0.178 0.186 0.203 0.231 0.273 0.448 0.623 0.974
7. 60 C 0.251 0.254 0.256 0.263 0.278 0.304 0.344 0.531 0.718 1.090
8. 70 C 0.350 0.353 0.356 0.363 0.377 0.402 0.439 0.637 0.835 1.23
9. 80 C 0.471 0.475 0.479 0.486 0.501 0.526 0.563 0.770 0.977 1.39
Tmax. 90 C 0.611 0.617 0.623 0.631 0.647 0.671 0.707 0.923 1.14 1.57
Tref. 25.0 C 0.0565 0.0608 0.0650 0.0759 0.0976 0.125 0.166 0.300 0.434 0.703

Table B Ammonia 15..30ppb (Conductivity unit: mS/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 15 % 16 % 18 % 19 % 20 % 22 % 24 % 26 % 28 % 30 %
Tmin. 10 C 0.480 0.430 0.355 0.320 0.295 0.250 0.215 0.185 0.155 0.130
2. 15 C 0.580 0.530 0.440 0.400 0.370 0.315 0.265 0.235 0.205 0.170
3. 18 C 0.649 0.600 0.506 0.466 0.433 0.372 0.316 0.277 0.238 0.190
4. 20 C 0.695 0.645 0.550 0.510 0.475 0.410 0.350 0.305 0.260 0.215
5. 25 C 0.820 0.770 0.650 0.610 0.560 0.490 0.420 0.360 0.310 0.254
6. 30 C 0.930 0.870 0.755 0.700 0.650 0.560 0.485 0.420 0.355 0.292
7. 35 C 1.04 0.970 0.843 0.780 0.733 0.638 0.553 0.477 0.403 0.331
8. 40 C 1.14 1.07 0.930 0.860 0.815 0.715 0.620 0.533 0.450 0.370
9. 45 C 1.25 1.16 1.02 0.945 0.890 0.783 0.675 0.581 0.490 0.402
Tmax. 50 C 1.35 1.26 1.10 1.03 0.965 0.850 0.730 0.628 0.530 0.433
Tref. 25.0 C 0.820 0.770 0.650 0.610 0.560 0.490 0.420 0.360 0.310 0.254

Table C Morpholine 0..500ppb (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0 ppb 10 ppb 20 ppb 30 ppb 50 ppb 70 ppb 100 ppb 200 ppb 300 ppb 500 ppb
Tmin. 0 C 0.0116 0.0252 0.0272 0.0370 0.0565 0.0724 0.0963 0.144 0.192 0.288
2. 10 C 0.0230 0.0316 0.0402 0.0537 0.0807 0.104 0.139 0.212 0.285 0.431
3. 20 C 0.0419 0.0502 0.0585 0.0749 0.108 0.139 0.185 0.287 0.389 0.592
4. 30 C 0.0710 0.0781 0.0851 0.103 0.140 0.178 0.235 0.367 0.499 0.763
5. 40 C 0.113 0.119 0.124 0.143 0.181 0.224 0.289 0.452 0.614 0.938
6. 50 C 0.173 0.177 0.181 0.199 0.234 0.281 0.351 0.554 0.736 1.12
7. 60 C 0.251 0.254 0.257 0.273 0.306 0.354 0.427 0.648 0.869 1.13
8. 70 C 0.350 0.354 0.357 0.372 0.403 0.452 0.526 0.773 1.02 1.52
9. 80 C 0.471 0.476 0.481 0.497 0.528 0.578 0.654 0.932 1.22 1.77
Tmax. 90 C 0.611 0.619 0.626 0.642 0.674 0.724 0.798 1.10 1.41 2.03
Tref. 25.0 C 0.0565 0.0642 0.0718 0.0890 0.124 0.159 0.210 0.327 0.444 0.678

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-5
Table D Sulfunic acid 0..27% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0% 5% 8% 12 % 14 % 17 % 20 % 22 % 24 % 27 %
Tmin. -1.11 C 0 0.1496 0.2330 0.3275 0.3695 0.4225 0.4640 0.4850 0.5005 0.5140
2. 10 C 0 0.1813 0.3845 0.4030 0.4355 0.5210 0.5725 0.5980 0.6160 0.6340
3. 21.1 C 0 0.2102 0.3330 0.4740 0.5335 0.6145 0.6805 0.7140 0.7385 0.7625
4. 32.2 C 0 0.2351 0.3740 0.5360 0.6070 0.7030 0.7810 0.8225 0.8540 0.8860
5. 43.3 C 0 0.2574 0.4130 0.5945 0.6735 0.7835 0.8755 0.9250 0.9635 1.005
6. 54.4 C 0 0.2674 0.4450 0.6455 0.7315 0.8533 0.9600 1.019 1.066 1.118
7. 60 C 0 0.2853 0.4600 0.6670 0.7570 0.8860 0.9980 1.060 1.111 1.170
8. 71.1 C 0 0.3007 0.4860 0.7070 0.8060 0.9470 1.071 1.140 1.197 1.264
9. 87.8 C 0 0.3217 0.5210 0.7605 0.8665 1.025 1.163 1.242 1.310 1.394
Tmax. 98.9 C 0 0.3335 0.5420 0.7885 0.9025 1.065 1.216 1.302 1.376 1.469
Tref. 25.0 C 0 0.219 0.347 0.496 0.559 0.645 0.716 0.752 0.779 0.806

Table E Sulfunic acid 39..85% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 39 % 44 % 50 % 55 % 60 % 65 % 70 % 75 % 80 % 85 %
Tmin. -17.81 C 0.2775 0.2500 0.2125 0.1770 0.1385 0.1020 0.0710 0.0435 0.0140 0
2. 4.44 C 0.5225 0.4695 0.4000 0.3265 0.2750 0.2105 0.1500 0.0990 0.0655 0.0610
3. 21.1 C 0.7220 0.6590 0.5700 0.4670 0.3950 0.3085 0.2315 0.1650 0.1200 0.1100
4. 32.2 C 0.8600 0.7895 0.6870 0.5715 0.4870 0.3850 0.2950 0.2190 0.1655 0.1530
5. 43.3 C 0.9225 0.9190 0.8080 0.6770 0.5830 0.4670 0.3640 0.2785 0.2190 0.2040
6. 54.4 C 1.125 1.051 0.9305 0.7825 0.6770 0.5505 0.4400 0.3475 0.2825 0.2620
7. 65.6 C 1.249 1.176 1.053 0.8950 0.7810 0.6430 0.5220 0.4210 0.3495 0.3255
8. 82.2 C 1.434 1.367 1.237 1.064 0.9390 0.7900 0.6570 0.5430 0.4620 0.4315
9. 98.9 C 1.595 1.540 1.415 1.235 1.100 0.9370 0.7960 0.6750 0.5880 0.5450
Tmax. 115.6 C 1.735 1.692 1.566 1.425 1.260 1.091 0.9345 0.8110 0.7190 0.6630
Tref. 25.0 C 0.77 0.705 0.611 0.504 0.427 0.335 0.253 0.184 0.136 0.125

Table F Sulfunic acid 93..100% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


App.
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 93 % 94 % 95 % 95.5 % 96 % 97 % 97.5 % 98 % 99 % 100 %
Tmin. 10 C 0.0860 0.0835 0.0800 0.0768 0.0735 0.0640 0.0563 0.0485 0.0225 0
2. 20 C 0.1153 0.1143 01110 0.1086 0.1051 0.0961 0.0895 0.0812 0.0580 0.0085
3. 25 C 0.1320 0.1310 0.1260 0.1230 0.1190 0.1090 0.1020 0.0920 0.0640 0.0105
4. 30 C 0.1490 0.1467 0.1414 0.1375 0.1332 0.1220 0.1138 0.1035 0.0703 0.0125
5. 40 C 0.1897 0.1860 0.1787 0.1739 0.1680 0.1520 0.1410 0.1295 0.0869 0.0171 SC
6. 50 C 0.2323 0.2275 0.2190 0.2124 0.2041 0.1833 0.1710 0.1574 0.1067 0.0219
7. 60 C 0.2787 0.2715 0.2604 0.2530 0.2440 0.2200 0.2053 0.1884 0.1275 0.0279
8. 70 C 0.3284 0.3196 0.3065 0.2970 0.2853 0.2594 0.2420 0.2255 0.1495 0.0240
9. 80 C 0.3826 0.3714 0.3550 0.3450 0.3332 0.3015 0.2813 0.2570 0.1732 0.0404
Tmax. 90 C 0.4390 0.4250 0.4050 0.3923 0.3775 0.3405 0.3175 0.2910 0.1975 0.0460
Tref. 25.0 C 0.1320 0.1310 0.1260 0.1230 0.1190 0.1090 0.1020 0.0920 0.0640 0.0105

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-6
Table G NaOH 0..15% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0% 1% 3% 4% 5% 6% 8% 10 % 12 % 15 %
Tmin. 0 C 0 0.035 0.087 0.113 0.133 0.150 0.176 0.195 0.206 0.215
2. 10 C 0 0.042 0.109 0.140 0.167 0.190 0.226 0.255 0.274 0.293
3. 18 C 0 0.047 0.125 0.163 0.195 0.221 0.267 0.303 0.327 0.345
4. 25 C 0 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381 0.410
5. 30 C 0 0.056 0.153 0.200 0.242 0.278 0.338 0.389 0.424 0.467
6. 40 C 0 0.063 0.179 0.233 0.281 0.323 0.396 0.458 0.502 0.551
7. 50 C 0 0.070 0.201 0.265 0.320 0.368 0.454 0.527 0.580 0.645
8. 60 C 0 0.080 0.223 0.293 0.355 0.410 0.507 0.592 0.658 0.742
9. 80 C 0 0.100 0.270 0.350 0.425 0.493 0.612 0.721 0.814 0.936
Tmax. 100 C 0 0.119 0.315 0.407 0.495 0.574 0.717 0.850 0.967 1.13
Tref. 25.0 C 0 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381 0.410

Table H NaOH 25..50% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 25 % 28 % 30 % 32 % 35 % 38 % 40 % 42 % 45 % 50 %
Tmin. 0 C 0.140 0.100 0.075 0.060 0.040 0.024 0.017 0.012 0.010 0.007
2. 10 C 0.212 0.174 0.148 0.124 0.094 0.074 0.063 0.053 0.038 0.025
3. 18 C 0.270 0.232 0.207 0.184 0.153 0.131 0.120 0.105 0.090 0.078
4. 25 C 0.352 0.313 0.289 0.266 0.233 0.207 0.194 0.180 0.162 0.146
5. 30 C 0.411 0.372 0.347 0.323 0.291 0.264 0.248 0.233 0.214 0.195
6. 40 C 0.528 0.489 0.463 0.440 0.405 0.373 0.354 0.337 0.317 0.293
7. 50 C 0.645 0.605 0.580 0.556 0.520 0.482 0.460 0.441 0.420 0.390
8. 60 C 0.796 0.766 0.746 0.724 0.694 0.660 0.639 0.623 0.604 0.570
9. 75 C 1.023 1.007 0.995 0.980 0.955 0.925 0.908 0.893 0.873 0.839
Tmax. 80 C 1.098 1.086 1.078 1.066 1.042 1.015 0.997 0.982 0.963 0.929
Tref. 25.0 C 0.352 0.313 0.289 0.266 0.233 0.207 0.194 0.180 0.162 0.146

Table I HCl 0..200ppb (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0 ppb 1 ppb 2 ppb 4 ppb 10 ppb 20 ppb 50 ppb 100 ppb 150 ppb 200 ppb
Tmin. 0 C 0.0116 0.0135 0.0161 0.0228 0.0472 0.912 0.2256 0.4504 0.6755 0.9005
2. 10 C 0.0230 0.0253 0.0281 0.0352 0.0630 0.1163 0.2834 0.5645 0.8462 1.128
3. 20 C 0.0420 0.0446 0.0476 0.0550 0.0843 0.1443 0.3407 0.6755 1.0115 1.3479
4. 30 C 0.0713 0.0743 0.0776 0.0852 0.1149 0.1785 0.3993 0.7837 1.1714 1.5599
5. 40 C 0.1144 0.1177 0.1212 0.1291 0.1588 0.2234 0.4617 0.8904 1.3261 1.7636
6. 50 C 0.1746 0.1781 0.1819 0.1901 0.2198 0.2838 0.5316 0.9969 1.4758 1.9584
7. 60 C 0.2549 0.2586 0.2626 0.2711 0.3009 0.3637 0.6139 1.1058 1.6213 2.1439
8. 70 C 0.3577 0.3617 0.3658 0.3745 0.4044 0.4657 0.7127 1.2198 1.7638 2.3198
9. 80 C 0.4842 0.4883 0.4926 0.5015 0.5313 0.5910 0.8312 1.3419 1.9045 2.4858
Tmax. 100 C 0.8052 0.8094 0.8137 0.8225 0.8515 0.9075 1.1273 1.6153 2.1819 2.7844
Tref. 25.0 C 0.0551 0.0579 0.0611 0.0686 0.0982 0.1604 0.3697 0.7299 1.0921 1.4549

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-7
Table J HCl 0..18% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0 % 3.65 % 5.48 % 7.3 % 9.12 % 11 % 12.8 % 14.6 % 16.4 % 18.2 %
Tmin. -10 C 0 0.174 0.226 0.277 0.329 0.362 0.390 0.4085 0.427 0.439
2. 0 C 0 0.212 0.294 0.364 0.421 0.464 0.489 0.5135 0.538 0.552
3. 10 C 0 0.262 0.362 0.445 0.512 0.566 0.603 0.6285 0.654 0.668
4. 15 C 0 0.284 0.3948 0.481 0.554 0.61 0.653 0.6805 0.708 0.722
5. 20 C 0 0.312 0.431 0.526 0.600 0.658 0.706 0.737 0.768 0.783
6. 25 C 0 0.332 0.459 0.563 0.647 0.713 0.764 0.794 0.824 0.837
7. 30 C 0 0.359 0.497 0.607 0.692 0.760 0.815 0.850 0.885 0.901
8. 45 C 0 0.425 0.587 0.721 0.830 0.914 0.978 1.019 1.06 1.08
9. 55 C 0 0.468 0.648 0.796 0.917 1.01 1.08 1.125 1.17 1.17
Tmax. 65 C 0 0.509 0.705 0.867 1 1.1 1.18 1.23 1.28 1.305
Tref. 25.0 C 0 0.332 0.459 0.563 0.647 0.713 0.764 0.794 0.824 0.837

Table K HCl 24..44% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 23.7 % 25.6 % 29.2 % 31 % 32.8 % 34.7 % 36.5 % 38.3 % 40.1 % 43.8 %
Tmin. -20 C 0.354 0.351 0.342 0.335 0.328 0.319 0.312 0.303 0.295 0.277
2. 0 C 0.560 0.555 0.538 0.524 0.511 0.497 0.482 0.467 0.452 0.424
3. 10 C 0.670 0.661 0.635 0.620 0.604 0.587 0.570 0.553 0.537 0.504
4. 15 C 0.722 0.712 0.685 0.669 0.652 0.635 0.616 0.597 0.579 0.540
5. 20 C 0.783 0.771 0.739 0.720 0.700 0.679 0.658 0.637 0.617 0.576
6. 25 C 0.830 0.818 0.786 0.768 0.748 0.728 0.707 0.686 0.662 0.622
7. 30 C 0.898 0.885 0.849 0.827 0.805 0.782 0.759 0.736 0.714 0.667
8. 45 C 1.07 1.06 1.01 0.989 0.964 0.938 0.911 0.883 0.855 0.797
9. 55 C 1.19 1.17 1.12 1.09 1.06 1.03 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.91
Tmax. 65 C 1.30 1.28 1.23 1.20 1.17 1.14 1.11 1.08 1.05 1.02
Tref. 25.0 C 0.830 0.818 0.786 0.768 0.748 0.728 0.707 0.686 0.662 0.622

Table L HNO3 0..25% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


App.
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0 % 3.12 % 6.2 % 9.3 % 12.4 % 15.32 % 17.72 % 20.11 % 22.46 % 24.8 %
Tmin. 0 C 0 0.114 0.2259 0.312 0.398 0.4472 0.4854 0.5236 0.5498 0.576
2. 18 C 0 0.1606 0.3178 0.4345 0.5512 0.6062 0.6559 0.7055 0.7368 0.768
3. 20 C 0 0.165 0.3215 0.4395 0.5575 0.6236 0.6742 0.7248 0.7568 0.7888
4. 25 C 0 0.178 0.349 0.476 0.603 0.6655 0.7186 0.7715 0.8119 0.852
5. 30 C 0 0.19 0.3665 0.5002 0.6339 0.7065 0.7619 0.8172 0.8555 0.8938 SC
6. 40 C 0 0.211 0.4095 0.5588 0.7081 0.786 0.8451 0.9042 0.9511 0.998
7. 50 C 0 0.26 0.4507 0.6154 0.7801 0.862 0.9239 0.9857 1.044 1.102
8. 60 C 0 0.31 0.4899 0.6699 0.8498 0.9345 0.9982 1.062 1.133 1.205
9. 70 C 0 0.333 0.5273 0.7223 0.9173 1.004 1.068 1.132 1.219 1.306
Tmax. 80 C 0 0.356 0.566 0.777 0.9826 1.069 1.133 1.198 1.302 1.407
Tref. 25.0 C 0 0.178 0.349 0.476 0.603 0.6655 0.7186 0.7715 0.8119 0.852

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-8
Table M HNO3 35..80% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 35 % 37.2 % 43.3 % 49.6 % 55.8 % 62 % 75 % 76.6 % 82 % 87.7 %
Tmin. -16 C 0.412 0.400 0.368 0.334 0.288 0.254 0.163 0.147 0.0893 0.0439
2. 0 C 0.576 0.5554 0.507 0.456 0.404 0.352 0.227 0.208 0.128 0.0596
3. 10 C 0.678 0.666 0.614 0.555 0.493 0.438 0.268 0.246 0.153 0.0694
4. 18 C 0.770 0.754 0.700 0.634 0.565 0.506 0.300 0.2769 0.172 0.0772
5. 20 C 0.786 0.776 0.721 0.654 0.583 0.512 0.310 0.290 0.175 0.079
6. 25 C 0.842 0.831 0.784 0.714 0.636 0.559 0.340 0.315 0.185 0.081
7. 30 C 0.895 0.886 0.827 0.754 0.672 0.590 0.370 0.335 0.190 0.083
8. 40 C 1.001 0.995 0.938 0.858 0.774 0.690 0.430 0.375 0.200 0.087
9. 50 C 1.105 1.095 1.038 0.958 0.874 0.790 0.485 0.415 0.210 0.091
Tmax. 60 C 1.205 1.195 1.138 1.058 0.974 0.890 0.530 0.455 0.220 0.095
Tref. 25.0 C 0.842 0.831 0.784 0.714 0.636 0.559 0.340 0.315 0.185 0.081

<User-defined matrixes>
The user-defined temperature compensation matrix is a matrix defined by users. Enter values as
shown in Table 3. The gray areas must be entered.
Table 3 Example of user-defined matrix (Reference temperature (Tref.): 25.0 C, Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu-
(Conc.) Min. Max. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9
Temp.ranges 0% 15 % 1% 3% 4% 5% 6% 8% 10 % 12 %
Tref. (25.0 C) 0.013 0.410 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381
Tmin. 0 C 0.009 0.215 0.035 0.087 0.113 0.133 0.150 0.176 0.195 0.206
Tmax. 100 C 0.025 1.13 0.119 0.315 0.407 0.495 0.574 0.717 0.850 0.967
2. 10 C 0.010 0.293 0.042 0.109 0.140 0.167 0.190 0.226 0.255 0.274
3. 18 C 0.012 0.357 0.047 0.125 0.163 0.195 0.221 0.267 0.303 0.327
4. 25 C 0.013 0.410 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381
5. 30 C 0.014 0.468 0.056 0.153 0.200 0.242 0.278 0.338 0.389 0.424
6. 40 C 0.015 0.551 0.067 0.179 0.233 0.281 0.323 0.396 0.458 0.502
7. 50 C 0.017 0.645 0.070 0.201 0.265 0.320 0.368 0.454 0.527 0.580
8. 60 C 0.018 0.742 0.080 0.223 0.293 0.355 0.410 0.507 0.592 0.658
9. 80 C 0.021 0.936 0.100 0.270 0.350 0.425 0.493 0.612 0.721 0.814
Note: This table is as shown on the screen. The gray areas must be entered.

Set the reference temperature in the Temp. comp. screen (default: 25.0C).

Input concentration values in the Solution screen.


The values must be entered in ascending order from Solution (Min.) to Solution (Max.). Solution
(Min.) and Solution (Max.) must be entered.
Input temperatures for compensation in the Temp. ranges screen.
Input the conductivity values* at respective temperatures in the Solution (Min.) screen and those
in the Solution (Max.) screen. Input other values, if any, in the Solution n screen.
*: Enter the precompensated conductivity.

All cells of two user-defined matrixes are blank as a default. If any cells are not blank, clear them.

After entering all values, select Check values? to verify that there is no error.
This function checks if the matrix is consistently incremental or decremental. If any error is found,
its location is specified.
If there is no error, the matrix is compensated linearly and the blanks of the table (if any) are filled.
If some areas are left empty without running Check values?, a 1st/2nd comp. matrix error will be
issued.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-9

n Temperature compensation error


The temperature compensation error (alarm) is issued in any of the following cases.

l TC
The error is issued when:
(measured temperature reference temperature) < 90/compensation coefficient
The default of the temperature compensation coefficient is 2.10%/C.
For example, when the reference temperature is 25C, the temperature compensation coefficient
is 2.10%/C and the measured temperature is lower than 17.9C, the error will be issued.
Temperature compensation is performed even while an alarm is being issued.

l Matrix
The error is issued when the temperature or the precompensated conductivity is out of the range
of the temperature compensation matrix.
In this case, however, the temperature compensation is performed by extrapolation even while
an alarm is being issued.

l All
When the conductivity is around zero, the temperature compensation error may be issued. In this
case, the temperature compensation is not performed, and the precompensated conductivity is
displayed.
Whether the conductivity is around zero or not is determined by the temperature and conductivity
of solutions. For example, when the temperature is 20C and the conductivity is lower than 0.033
S/cm, the conductivity is determined to be around zero.
When measuring the conductivity around zero in air calibration or when the conductivity to be
measured is around zero, an alarm may be issued. App.

NOTE
To display the precompensated conductivity, set the Method to None.
Select Measurement setup Temp. compensation.

SC
n TDS readings
The concept of Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) is widely used as an indication of the total solute
concentration in water and is a widely accepted water quality standard. The determination is
simply made by evaporation and weighing the residue. As the heat treatment converts the
chemical properties of the solution, some solutes that contribute to the total conductivity will not
be found in the residue. Also some combinations of solutes will become volatile at the drying
temperature. The same applies for those solutes that do not contribute to the conductivity but do
end up in the residue. When one (or a few) solute is dominant in the solution, these problems
may be neglected and TDS will have a direct correlation with the conductivity.
Next is a graph that shows the correlation between the specific conductance and concentrations
(by weight) for six salts. The factor by which the conductivity should be multiplied to come to
a TDS reading ranges from 0.4 to 0.7 up to a conductivity of 500 S/cm. At a conductance of
approximately 3000 S/cm the range would be from 0.5 and 1.0.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 measures conductivity. This value can be used to display TDS values on
the main display. One should use the additional concentration table. The unit for the TDS reading
can be set to ppm or ppb.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-10
7000

NaCI KCI

6000 CaCI2
Conductivity (S/cm, 25C)
MgCI2 Na2SO4

5000

4000
MgSO4

3000

2000

1000

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000


Concentration (mg/L)
Figure 2 Relations of concentration and conductivity

n Calibration solutions for conductivity


The calibration (cell constant) of a sensor does not change unless the sensor is damaged.
It can also appear to change because of coating of the electrodes, or partial blockage.
It does not make sense to regularly recalibrate the FLXA202/FLXA21.

A calibration check, however, is another matter. When the objective is clearly defined as a
diagnostic exercise a regular check can bring an extra level of security and confidence to the
measurement.
Sensor damage, and/or coatings can be difficult to see and the calibration check can confirm
their presence, by a deviation from the known solution conductivity. The remedial action should
be to clean the sensor, and carefully check for blockage or damage (not simply to recalibrate).
Higher conductivity solutions should be used where possible. The lower the conductivity of the
test solution, the easier it is to contaminate. Carbon dioxide from the air can be quickly absorbed
to cause an error. All containers must be suitably clean, and all materials suitably pure. Outside of
a well-equipped laboratory these conditions are hard to meet.

Also note that the check must be performed with due regard to the cell constant of the sensor,
as it limits the effective working range. The documentation provided with the sensor should be
consulted to determine its maximum working value. By using a checking solution close to the
upper range limit of the sensor, the detection of contamination is better. A slightly contaminated
sensor may read perfectly at lower conductivity, but show significant errors at higher values. This
is caused by the early onset of polarization, the factor that limits the upper range of the sensor
in any case. Polarization is seen in contaminated sensors, and it is for this reason that there is a
sophisticated polarization check built into the FLXA202/FLXA21.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-11
FLXA202/FLXA21 is programmed with the following table of conductivity of Potassium Chloride
(KCl) solutions at 25C. This is used in the Automatic Cell Constant setting calibration feature.
(See chapter 9 on calibration) The table is derived from the Standards laid down in International
Recommendation No. 56 of the Organisation Internationale de Mtrologie Legale.
Table 4 KCl values at 25 C
Standard solution mol/l mg KCl/kg of solution Conductivity
1.000 M KCl 1.0 71135.2 111.31 mS/cm
0.100 M KCl 0.1 7419.13 12.852 mS/cm
0.010 M KCl 0.01 745.263 1.4083 mS/cm
0.005 M KCl 0.005 373.29 0.7182 mS/cm
0.002 M KCl 0.002 149.32 0.2916 mS/cm
0.001 M KCl 0.001 74.66 0.1469 mS/cm

If it is more convenient, the user may make solutions from Sodium Chloride (NaCl or common
table salt) with the help of the following relationship table. This table is derived from the IEC norm
60746-3.
Table 5 NaCl values at 25 C
Weight % mg/kg Conductivity
0.001 10 21.4 S/cm
0.003 30 64.0 S/cm
0.005 50 106 S/cm
0.01 100 210 S/cm
0.03 300 617 S/cm
0.05 500 1.03 mS/cm
0.1 1000 1.99 mS/cm
0.3 3000 5.69 mS/cm
0.5 5000 9.48 mS/cm
1 10000 17.6 mS/cm
3 30000 48.6 mS/cm
5 50000 81.0 mS/cm
10 100000 140 mS/cm App.
For resistivity measurement the standard resistivity units of the calibration solution can be
calculated as follows:
R = 1000/G (kcm if G = S/cm)
Example: 0.001% weight R = 1000/21.4 = 46.7 kcm

n Monitoring of Purified Water and WFI according to USP<645>


SC
First published in the USP23 (The United States Pharmacopeia, ed. 23), the USP <645>
describes a procedure of measuring the conductivity of Purified Water and WFI (Water for
Injection) instead of the previous complicated monitoring procedure. This procedure consists
of three stages for measuring the conductivity of Purified Water and WFI. On the stage 1,
firstly the temperature of the water and the non-temperature-compensated conductivity of the
water are measured, and this conductivity is compared with the limit conductivity value of the
corresponding temperature directed by USP<645>. (Refer to Figure 3.) If the conductivity is
higher than the limit value, the procedure will proceed to the stage 2.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has the limit values of USP<645> built in the firmware. When the error
configuration is set for this monitoring, the FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the non-temperature-
compensated conductivity with the limit value. If the conductivity is higher than the limit value, an
error will be generated. A safety margin to the limit value can be set on the FLXA202/FLXA21 to
generate an error below limit value. (Refer to the section 7.3.)
When the safety margin is set at 20%, for example, an error will be generated when the non-
temperature-compensated conductivity goes higher than the 80% of the limit value at all
temperatures. For example, if the temperature is 64 C. and the safety margin is set at 20%,
then an error will be generated at 0.8 x 2.2 S/cm. = 1.76 S/cm. (2.2 S/cm is the USP<645>
limit value at 64C). In resistivity mode, an error will be generated at an non-temperature-
compensated resistivity of 0.568 M (=1/1.76 S/cm).

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 2 For SC (Conductivity)> App.2-12
The USP<645> limit value is a non-temperature-compensated conductivity. When a measuring
conductivity needs to be shown on the main or home display as a non-temperature-compensated
conductivity, set the temperature compensation on None. (Refer to the section 7.1.4.)
Conductivity (S/cm) 3.5
3.0 USP limit
2.5 USP safety margin
2.0 (user programmable)
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
25 50 75 100
Temperature (C)
Figure 3 Conductivity limit value and temperature directed by USP<645>

n Changing the settings


If any setting is accidentally changed, values to the right of the relevant arrow in Table 6 are all
initialized.
Table 6 Parameters that initialize other values
Measurement -> Output: Process Linear: 0% value, 100% value
parameter ->
Table
Communication: HART: PV
Display setup: Individual display (Main display)
Trend Graph Screen -> Y-axis (low, high)
Communication: HART
Configure sensor: Display setup: Individual display (Main display): unit
Measuring unit ->

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-1

Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)


n Temperature compensation
The conductivity of a solution is very dependent on temperature. Typically for every 1C
change in temperature the solution conductivity will change by approximately 2%. The effect of
temperature varies from one solution to another and is determined by several factors like solution
composition, concentration and temperature range. A coefficient () is introduced to express the
amount of temperature influence in % change in conductivity/C. In almost all applications this
temperature influence must be compensated before the conductivity reading can be interpreted
as an accurate measure of concentration or purity.

l NaCl (standard temperature compensation)


The FLXA202/FLXA21 has the default temperature compensation function based on a sodium
chloride (NaCl) solution. This function can be used for various applications and is compatible with
the NaCl compensation function of typical laboratory or portable instruments.
Table 1 NaCl compensation according to IEC 60746-3 with Tref. = 25C
Temperature Temperature compensa- Temperature Temperature compensa-
Ratio* Ratio*
(C) tion coefficient (%/C) (C) tion coefficient (%/C)
0 0.54 1.8 100 2.68 2.2
10 0.72 1.9 110 2.90 2.2
20 0.90 2.0 120 3.12 2.2
25 1.00 130 3.34 2.2
30 1.10 2.0 140 3.56 2.2
40 1.31 2.0 150 3.79 2.2
50 1.53 2.1 160 4.03 2.2
60 1.76 2.2 170 4.23 2.2
70 1.99 2.2 180 4.42 2.2
80 2.22 2.2 190 4.61 2.2 App.
90 2.45 2.2 200 4.78 2.2
*: The ratio of the conductivity at respective temperatures to the conductivity at the reference temperature.

l Temperature compensation coefficient (TC)


Set the temperature compensation coefficient based on the degree of influence of temperature
on the conductivity (%/C).
If the temperature compensation coefficient of the sample solution is known from laboratory
experiments or has been previously determined, enter the value.
The setting range is between 0.00 and 10.0%. By combining with the reference temperature
setting, a linear compensation function can be obtained. This is applicable to all kinds of chemical ISC
solution.

<Configure calculated temperature coefficient (TC).>


Follow routing
Commissioning >> Measurement setup >> Temp.compensation >> T.C.
Enter the temperature coefficient calculated from the following formula:

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-2
A. Calculation of temperature coefficient factor (With known conductivity at reference
temperature).

Kt - Kref
100
= X
T - Tref K ref

= Temperature compensation factor in %/C
T = Measured temperature in C
Kt = Conductivity at T
Tref = Reference temperature
Kref = Conductivity at Tref
B. Calculation of temperature coefficient factor (with two known conductivity values at
different temperatures)
Measure the conductivity of the liquid at two temperatures, one below the reference and
above the reference temperature with the temperature coefficient set to 0,00%/C and use
the following equation to calculate a temperature coefficient ().
KT
K ref =
1+ ( T - Tref)
K1 K2
K ref= =
1+ ( T1 - Tref) 1+ ( T2 - Tref)

K1 (1 + ( T2 - Tref)) = K2 (1 + ( T1 - Tref))

K1 ( T2 - Tref) - K2 ( T1 - Tref) = K2 - K1

K2 - K1
=
K1( T2 - Tref) - K 2 ( T1 - Tref)

Where T1, T2: liquid temperature (C)
K1: conductivity at T1 (C)
K2: conductivity at T2 (C)
((

( )

Figure 1 Conductivity

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-3
<Calculation example>
Calculate the temperature coefficient of a liquid from the following data.
Conductivity 124.5 S/cm at a liquid temperature of 18.0 C and a conductivity 147.6 S/cm
at a liquid temperature of 31.0 C.
Substituting the data in the above formula gives the following result.
147.6 - 124.5
= x 100= 1.298 %/C
124.5x(31.0 - 25) - 147.6x(18.0 - 25)

Set the temperature coefficient in the FLXA202/FLXA21 converter.

When the temperature coefficient already set is accurate, the conductivity to be displayed
must be constant regardless of liquid temperature. The following check will make sure that the
temperature coefficient already set is accurate.
If, when the liquid temperature is lowered, a larger conductivity value is indicated, the
temperature coefficient already set is too small.
The opposite also applies. If a smaller conductivity value is indicated, the temperature coefficient
already set is too large. In either case, change the temperature coefficient so that the conductivity
no longer changes.

l Matrix
Matrix means temperature compensation with the temperature compensation matrix.
The temperature compensation matrix is a table of conductivity values at different temperatures
and concentrations.
Ready-made matrixes and user-defined matrixes are available.

<Ready-made matrixes>
App.
Ready-made temperature compensation matrixes are available for common inorganic acids and
bases. Those for ammonia and morpholine are also available.
Table 2 Ready-made temperature compensation matrixes
Compound to Temp. compensation
Matrix Concentration Details
be measured range
Sulfunic acid 1..5% H2SO4 1 to 5% 0 to 100C Table A
Sulfunic acid 1..27% H2SO4 1 to 27% -1 to 99C Table B
Sulfunic acid 39..85% H2SO4 39 to 85% -18 to 116C Table C
Sulfunic acid 93..100% H2SO4 93 to 100% 10 to 90C Table D
HCl 0..5% HCl 0 to 5% 0 to 60C Table E
HCl 0..18% HCI 0 to 18% -10 to 65C Table F
HCl 24..44% HCI 24 to 44% -20 to 65C Table G
ISC
HNO3 1..5% HNO3 1 to 5% 0 to 80C Table H
HNO3 0..25% HNO3 0 to 25% 0 to 80C Table I
HNO3 35..85% HNO3 35 to 85% -16 to 60C Table J
NaOH 1..5% NaOH 1 to 5% 0 to 100C Table K
NaOH 0..15% NaOH 0 to 15% 0 to 100C Table L
NaOH 25..50% NaOH 25 to 50% 0 to 80C Table M

The ready-made temperature compensation matrixes are listed in Table A to M where


temperatures are in the column and concentrations are in the rows.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-4
Table A Sulfunic acid 1..5% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 1% 1.5 % 2% 2.5 % 3 % 3.33 % 3.67 % 4 % 4.5 % 5%
Tmin. 0 C 0.0338 0.0487 0.0635 0.0793 0.0950 0.105 0.115 0.124 0.139 0.154
2. 10 C 0.0391 0.0571 0.0750 0.0931 0.111 0.123 0.134 0.146 0.163 0.180
3. 20 C 0.0444 0.0655 0.0865 0.107 0.127 0.141 0.154 0.167 0.186 0.205
4. 30 C 0.0491 0.0727 0.0963 0.119 0.141 0.156 0.172 0.186 0.207 0.228
5. 40 C 0.0533 0.0789 0.104 0.129 0.154 0.170 0.187 0.203 0.226 0.249
6. 50 C 0.0575 0.0580 0.113 0.139 0.166 0.184 0.202 0.220 0.245 0.270
7. 62.5 C 0.0606 0.0899 0.119 0.148 0.177 0.196 0.216 0.235 0.262 0.289
8. 75 C 0.0637 0.0949 0.126 0.157 0.189 0.209 0.229 0.249 0.278 0.307
9. 87.5 C 0.0659 0.0988 0.132 0.165 0.197 0.218 0.240 0.261 0.291 0.322
Tmax. 100 C 0.0680 0.103 0.138 0.172 0.206 0.228 0.251 0.273 0.305 0.336
Tref. 25.0 C 0.0470 0.0697 0.0923 0.114 0.135 0.149 0.164 0.178 0.198 0.218

Table B Sulfunic acid 0..27% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0% 5% 8% 12 % 14 % 17 % 20 % 22 % 24 % 27 %
Tmin. -1.11 C 0 0.1496 0.2330 0.3275 0.3695 0.4225 0.4640 0.4850 0.5005 0.5140
2. 10 C 0 0.1813 0.3845 0.4030 0.4355 0.5210 0.5725 0.5980 0.6160 0.6340
3. 21.1 C 0 0.2102 0.3330 0.4740 0.5335 0.6145 0.6805 0.7140 0.7385 0.7625
4. 32.2 C 0 0.2351 0.3740 0.5360 0.6070 0.7030 0.7810 0.8225 0.8540 0.8860
5. 43.3 C 0 0.2574 0.4130 0.5945 0.6735 0.7835 0.8755 0.9250 0.9635 1.005
6. 54.4 C 0 0.2674 0.4450 0.6455 0.7315 0.8533 0.9600 1.019 1.066 1.118
7. 60 C 0 0.2853 0.4600 0.6670 0.7570 0.8860 0.9980 1.060 1.111 1.170
8. 71.1 C 0 0.3007 0.4860 0.7070 0.8060 0.9470 1.071 1.140 1.197 1.264
9. 87.8 C 0 0.3217 0.5210 0.7605 0.8665 1.025 1.163 1.242 1.310 1.394
Tmax. 98.9 C 0 0.3335 0.5420 0.7885 0.9025 1.065 1.216 1.302 1.376 1.469
Tref. 25.0 C 0 0.219 0.347 0.496 0.559 0.645 0.716 0.752 0.779 0.806

Table C Sulfunic acid 39..85% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 39 % 44 % 50 % 55 % 60 % 65 % 70 % 75 % 80 % 85 %
Tmin. -17.81 C 0.2775 0.2500 0.2125 0.1770 0.1385 0.1020 0.0710 0.0435 0.0140 0
2. 4.44 C 0.5225 0.4695 0.4000 0.3265 0.2750 0.2105 0.1500 0.0990 0.0655 0.0610
3. 21.1 C 0.7220 0.6590 0.5700 0.4670 0.3950 0.3085 0.2315 0.1650 0.1200 0.1100
4. 32.2 C 0.8600 0.7895 0.6870 0.5715 0.4870 0.3850 0.2950 0.2190 0.1655 0.1530
5. 43.3 C 0.9225 0.9190 0.8080 0.6770 0.5830 0.4670 0.3640 0.2785 0.2190 0.2040
6. 54.4 C 1.125 1.051 0.9305 0.7825 0.6770 0.5505 0.4400 0.3475 0.2825 0.2620
7. 65.6 C 1.249 1.176 1.053 0.8950 0.7810 0.6430 0.5220 0.4210 0.3495 0.3255
8. 82.2 C 1.434 1.367 1.237 1.064 0.9390 0.7900 0.6570 0.5430 0.4620 0.4315
9. 98.9 C 1.595 1.540 1.415 1.235 1.100 0.9370 0.7960 0.6750 0.5880 0.5450
Tmax. 115.6 C 1.735 1.692 1.566 1.425 1.260 1.091 0.9345 0.8110 0.7190 0.6630
Tref. 25.0 C 0.77 0.705 0.611 0.504 0.427 0.335 0.253 0.184 0.136 0.125

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-5
Table D Sulfunic acid 93..100% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 93 % 94 % 95 % 95.5 % 96 % 97 % 97.5 % 98 % 99 % 100 %
Tmin. 10 C 0.0860 0.0835 0.0800 0.0768 0.0735 0.0640 0.0563 0.0485 0.0225 0
2. 20 C 0.1153 0.1143 01110 0.1086 0.1051 0.0961 0.0895 0.0812 0.0580 0.0085
3. 25 C 0.1320 0.1310 0.1260 0.1230 0.1190 0.1090 0.1020 0.0920 0.0640 0.0105
4. 30 C 0.1490 0.1467 0.1414 0.1375 0.1332 0.1220 0.1138 0.1035 0.0703 0.0125
5. 40 C 0.1897 0.1860 0.1787 0.1739 0.1680 0.1520 0.1410 0.1295 0.0869 0.0171
6. 50 C 0.2323 0.2275 0.2190 0.2124 0.2041 0.1833 0.1710 0.1574 0.1067 0.0219
7. 60 C 0.2787 0.2715 0.2604 0.2530 0.2440 0.2200 0.2053 0.1884 0.1275 0.0279
8. 70 C 0.3284 0.3196 0.3065 0.2970 0.2853 0.2594 0.2420 0.2255 0.1495 0.0240
9. 80 C 0.3826 0.3714 0.3550 0.3450 0.3332 0.3015 0.2813 0.2570 0.1732 0.0404
Tmax. 90 C 0.4390 0.4250 0.4050 0.3923 0.3775 0.3405 0.3175 0.2910 0.1975 0.0460
Tref. 25.0 C 0.1320 0.1310 0.1260 0.1230 0.1190 0.1090 0.1020 0.0920 0.0640 0.0105

Table E HCl 1..5% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 1% 1.5 % 2% 2.5 % 3 % 3.33 % 3.67 % 4 % 4.5 % 5%
Tmin. 0 C 0.0650 0.0950 0.125 0.152 0.179 0.196 0.213 0.229 0.251 0.273
2. 5 C 0.0737 0.107 0.141 0.172 0.202 0.221 0.240 0.258 0.283 0.308
3. 10 C 0.0823 0.120 0.157 0.191 0.225 0.246 0.267 0.288 0.316 0.344
4. 15 C 0.0910 0.132 0.178 0.211 0.248 0.271 0.294 0.317 0.348 0.379
5. 20 C 0.0987 0.143 0.188 0.229 0.270 0.295 0.320 0.345 0.378 0.412
6. 30 C 0.114 0.166 0.217 0.265 0.313 0.342 0.372 0.401 0.439 0.477
7. 37.5 C 0.125 0.182 0.239 0.290 0.342 0.373 0.406 0.438 0.479 0.521
8. 45 C 0.135 0.198 0.260 0.315 0.370 0.404 0.440 0.474 0.520 0.565
9. 52.5 C 0.147 0.214 0.281 0.340 0.400 0.437 0.475 0.512 0.564 0.616
Tmax. 60 C 0.159 0.230 0.301 0.366 0.430 0.469 0.510 0.549 0.608 0.666
Tref. 25.0 C 0.106 0.154 0.202 0.247 0.291 0.318 0.346 0.373 0.409 0.444

Table F HCl 0..18% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


App.
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0 % 3.65 % 5.48 % 7.3 % 9.12 % 11 % 12.8 % 14.6 % 16.4 % 18.2 %
Tmin. -10 C 0 0.174 0.226 0.277 0.329 0.362 0.390 0.4085 0.427 0.439
2. 0 C 0 0.212 0.294 0.364 0.421 0.464 0.489 0.5135 0.538 0.552
3. 10 C 0 0.262 0.362 0.445 0.512 0.566 0.603 0.6285 0.654 0.668
4. 15 C 0 0.284 0.3948 0.481 0.554 0.61 0.653 0.6805 0.708 0.722
5. 20 C 0 0.312 0.431 0.526 0.600 0.658 0.706 0.737 0.768 0.783
6. 25 C 0 0.332 0.459 0.563 0.647 0.713 0.764 0.794 0.824 0.837
7. 30 C 0 0.359 0.497 0.607 0.692 0.760 0.815 0.850 0.885 0.901
8. 45 C 0 0.425 0.587 0.721 0.830 0.914 0.978 1.019 1.06 1.08 ISC
9. 55 C 0 0.468 0.648 0.796 0.917 1.01 1.08 1.125 1.17 1.17
Tmax. 65 C 0 0.509 0.705 0.867 1 1.1 1.18 1.23 1.28 1.305
Tref. 25.0 C 0 0.332 0.459 0.563 0.647 0.713 0.764 0.794 0.824 0.837

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-6
Table G HCl 24..44% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 23.7 % 25.6 % 29.2 % 31 % 32.8 % 34.7 % 36.5 % 38.3 % 40.1 % 43.8 %
Tmin. -20 C 0.354 0.351 0.342 0.335 0.328 0.319 0.312 0.303 0.295 0.277
2. 0 C 0.560 0.555 0.538 0.524 0.511 0.497 0.482 0.467 0.452 0.424
3. 10 C 0.670 0.661 0.635 0.620 0.604 0.587 0.570 0.553 0.537 0.504
4. 15 C 0.722 0.712 0.685 0.669 0.652 0.635 0.616 0.597 0.579 0.540
5. 20 C 0.783 0.771 0.739 0.720 0.700 0.679 0.658 0.637 0.617 0.576
6. 25 C 0.830 0.818 0.786 0.768 0.748 0.728 0.707 0.686 0.662 0.622
7. 30 C 0.898 0.885 0.849 0.827 0.805 0.782 0.759 0.736 0.714 0.667
8. 45 C 1.07 1.06 1.01 0.989 0.964 0.938 0.911 0.883 0.855 0.797
9. 55 C 1.19 1.17 1.12 1.09 1.06 1.03 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.91
Tmax. 65 C 1.30 1.28 1.23 1.20 1.17 1.14 1.11 1.08 1.05 1.02
Tref. 25.0 C 0.830 0.818 0.786 0.768 0.748 0.728 0.707 0.686 0.662 0.622

Table H HNO3 1..5% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 1% 1.5 % 2% 2.5 % 3 % 3.33 % 3.67 % 4 % 4.5 % 5%
Tmin. 0 C 0.0395 0.0578 0.0761 0.0948 0.113 0.125 0.136 0.147 0.163 0.180
2. 10 C 0.0485 0.0704 0.0923 0.115 0.137 0.151 0.165 0.179 0.199 0.219
3. 15 C 0.0529 0.0767 0.100 0.125 0.149 0.164 0.180 0.194 0.216 0.238
4. 20 C 0.0574 0.0830 0.109 0.135 0.161 0.177 0.194 0.210 0.234 0.258
5. 30 C 0.0694 0.0989 0.128 0.158 0.188 0.206 0.225 0.243 0.268 0.294
6. 40 C 0.0814 0.115 0.148 0.182 0.215 0.235 0.255 0.275 0.303 0.330
7. 50 C 0.0907 0.128 0.165 0.201 0.238 0.259 0.281 0.303 0.333 0.364
8. 60 C 0.0999 0.140 0.181 0.220 0.260 0.283 0.308 0.331 0.364 0.397
9. 70 C 0.114 0.156 0.199 0.239 0.280 0.304 0.328 0.353 0.388 0.423
Tmax. 80 C 0.128 0.172 0.217 0.258 0.299 0.324 0.349 0.374 0.411 0.448
Tref. 25.0 C 0.0634 0.0909 0.118 0.147 0.175 0.192 0.209 0.226 0.251 0.276

Table I HNO3 0..25% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0 % 3.12 % 6.2 % 9.3 % 12.4 % 15.32 % 17.72 % 20.11 % 22.46 % 24.8 %
Tmin. 0 C 0 0.114 0.2259 0.312 0.398 0.4472 0.4854 0.5236 0.5498 0.576
2. 18 C 0 0.1606 0.3178 0.4345 0.5512 0.6062 0.6559 0.7055 0.7368 0.768
3. 20 C 0 0.165 0.3215 0.4395 0.5575 0.6236 0.6742 0.7248 0.7568 0.7888
4. 25 C 0 0.178 0.349 0.476 0.603 0.6655 0.7186 0.7717 0.8119 0.852
5. 30 C 0 0.19 0.3665 0.5002 0.6339 0.7065 0.7619 0.8172 0.8555 0.8938
6. 40 C 0 0.211 0.4095 0.5588 0.7081 0.786 0.8451 0.9042 0.9511 0.998
7. 50 C 0 0.26 0.4507 0.6154 0.7801 0.862 0.9239 0.9857 1.044 1.102
8. 60 C 0 0.31 0.4899 0.6699 0.8498 0.9345 0.9982 1.062 1.133 1.205
9. 70 C 0 0.333 0.5273 0.7223 0.9173 1.004 1.068 1.132 1.219 1.306
Tmax. 80 C 0 0.356 0.566 0.777 0.9826 1.069 1.133 1.198 1.302 1.407
Tref. 25.0 C 0 0.178 0.349 0.476 0.603 0.6655 0.7186 0.7715 0.8119 0.852

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-7
Table J HNO3 35..80% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 35 % 37.2 % 43.3 % 49.6 % 55.8 % 62 % 75 % 76.6 % 82 % 87.7 %
Tmin. -16 C 0.412 0.400 0.368 0.334 0.288 0.254 0.163 0.147 0.0893 0.0439
2. 0 C 0.576 0.5554 0.507 0.456 0.404 0.352 0.227 0.208 0.128 0.0596
3. 10 C 0.678 0.666 0.614 0.555 0.493 0.438 0.268 0.246 0.153 0.0694
4. 18 C 0.770 0.754 0.700 0.634 0.565 0.506 0.300 0.2769 0.172 0.0772
5. 20 C 0.786 0.776 0.721 0.654 0.583 0.512 0.310 0.290 0.175 0.079
6. 25 C 0.842 0.831 0.784 0.714 0.636 0.559 0.340 0.315 0.185 0.081
7. 30 C 0.895 0.886 0.827 0.754 0.672 0.590 0.370 0.335 0.190 0.083
8. 40 C 1.001 0.995 0.938 0.858 0.774 0.690 0.430 0.375 0.200 0.087
9. 50 C 1.105 1.095 1.038 0.958 0.874 0.790 0.485 0.415 0.210 0.091
Tmax. 60 C 1.205 1.195 1.138 1.058 0.974 0.890 0.530 0.455 0.220 0.095
Tref. 25.0 C 0.842 0.831 0.784 0.714 0.636 0.559 0.340 0.315 0.185 0.081

Table K NaOH 1..5% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 1% 1.5 % 2% 2.5 % 3 % 3.33 % 3.67 % 4 % 4.5 % 5%
Tmin. 0 C 0.0310 0.0460 0.0610 0.0735 0.0860 0.0923 0.0987 0.105 0.116 0.127
2. 10 C 0.0398 0.0584 0.0770 0.0933 0.110 0.119 0.128 0.137 0.151 0.165
3. 20 C 0.0486 0.0708 0.0930 0.113 0.133 0.145 0.157 0.169 0.186 0.204
4. 30 C 0.0576 0.0833 0.109 0.133 0.157 0.172 0.187 0.202 0.222 0.242
5. 40 C 0.0668 0.0959 0.125 0.154 0.182 0.200 0.217 0.235 0.258 0.281
6. 50 C 0.0760 0.109 0.141 0.174 0.207 0.227 0.248 0.268 0.294 0.319
7. 62.5 C 0.0868 0.124 0.162 0.199 0.236 0.258 0.281 0.304 0.334 0.364
8. 75 C 0.0975 0.140 0.182 0.223 0.264 0.289 0.314 0.339 0.374 0.408
9. 87.5 C 0.108 0.155 0.203 0.247 0.291 0.319 0.347 0.375 0.413 0.452
Tmax. 100 C 0.119 0.171 0.223 0.271 0.318 0.348 0.380 0.410 0.453 0.495
Tref. 25.0 C 0.0530 0.0770 0.101 0.123 0.145 0.158 0.172 0.185 0.204 0.223

Table L NaOH 0..15% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)


App.
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 0% 1% 3% 4% 5% 6% 8% 10 % 12 % 15 %
Tmin. 0 C 0 0.035 0.087 0.113 0.133 0.150 0.176 0.195 0.206 0.215
2. 10 C 0 0.042 0.109 0.140 0.167 0.190 0.226 0.255 0.274 0.293
3. 18 C 0 0.047 0.125 0.163 0.195 0.221 0.267 0.303 0.327 0.345
4. 25 C 0 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381 0.410
5. 30 C 0 0.056 0.153 0.200 0.242 0.278 0.338 0.389 0.424 0.467
6. 40 C 0 0.063 0.179 0.233 0.281 0.323 0.396 0.458 0.502 0.551
7. 50 C 0 0.070 0.201 0.265 0.320 0.368 0.454 0.527 0.580 0.645
8. 60 C 0 0.080 0.223 0.293 0.355 0.410 0.507 0.592 0.658 0.742 ISC
9. 80 C 0 0.100 0.270 0.350 0.425 0.493 0.612 0.721 0.814 0.936
Tmax. 100 C 0 0.119 0.315 0.407 0.495 0.574 0.717 0.850 0.967 1.13
Tref. 25.0 C 0 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381 0.410

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-8
Table M NaOH 25..50% (Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solut.
(Conc.) Min. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9 Max.
Temp.ranges 25 % 28 % 30 % 32 % 35 % 38 % 40 % 42 % 45 % 50 %
Tmin. 0 C 0.140 0.100 0.075 0.060 0.040 0.024 0.017 0.012 0.010 0.007
2. 10 C 0.212 0.174 0.148 0.124 0.094 0.074 0.063 0.053 0.038 0.025
3. 18 C 0.270 0.232 0.207 0.184 0.153 0.131 0.120 0.105 0.090 0.078
4. 25 C 0.352 0.313 0.289 0.266 0.233 0.207 0.194 0.180 0.162 0.146
5. 30 C 0.411 0.372 0.347 0.323 0.291 0.264 0.248 0.233 0.214 0.195
6. 40 C 0.528 0.489 0.463 0.440 0.405 0.373 0.354 0.337 0.317 0.293
7. 50 C 0.645 0.605 0.580 0.556 0.520 0.482 0.460 0.441 0.420 0.390
8. 60 C 0.796 0.766 0.746 0.724 0.694 0.660 0.639 0.623 0.604 0.570
9. 75 C 1.023 1.007 0.995 0.980 0.955 0.925 0.908 0.893 0.873 0.839
Tmax. 80 C 1.098 1.086 1.078 1.066 1.042 1.015 0.997 0.982 0.963 0.929
Tref. 25.0 C 0.352 0.313 0.289 0.266 0.233 0.207 0.194 0.180 0.162 0.146

<User-defined matrixes>
The user-defined temperature compensation matrix is a matrix defined by users. Enter values as
shown in Table 3. The gray areas must be entered.
Table 3 Example of user-defined matrix (Reference temperature (Tref.): 25.0 C, Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu-
(Conc.) Min. Max. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9
Temp.ranges 0% 15 % 1% 3% 4% 5% 6% 8% 10 % 12 %
Tref. (25.0 C) 0.013 0.410 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381
Tmin. 0 C 0.009 0.215 0.035 0.087 0.113 0.133 0.150 0.176 0.195 0.206
Tmax. 100 C 0.025 1.13 0.119 0.315 0.407 0.495 0.574 0.717 0.850 0.967
2. 10 C 0.010 0.293 0.042 0.109 0.140 0.167 0.190 0.226 0.255 0.274
3. 18 C 0.012 0.357 0.047 0.125 0.163 0.195 0.221 0.267 0.303 0.327
4. 25 C 0.013 0.410 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381
5. 30 C 0.014 0.468 0.056 0.153 0.200 0.242 0.278 0.338 0.389 0.424
6. 40 C 0.015 0.551 0.067 0.179 0.233 0.281 0.323 0.396 0.458 0.502
7. 50 C 0.017 0.645 0.070 0.201 0.265 0.320 0.368 0.454 0.527 0.580
8. 60 C 0.018 0.742 0.080 0.223 0.293 0.355 0.410 0.507 0.592 0.658
9. 80 C 0.021 0.936 0.100 0.270 0.350 0.425 0.493 0.612 0.721 0.814
Note: This table is as shown on the screen. The gray areas must be entered.

Set the reference temperature in the Temp. comp. screen (default: 25.0C).

Input concentration values in the Solution screen.


The values must be entered in ascending order from Solution (Min.) to Solution (Max.). Solution
(Min.) and Solution (Max.) must be entered.
Input temperatures for compensation in the Temp. ranges screen.
Input the conductivity values* at respective temperatures in the Solution (Min.) screen and those
in the Solution (Max.) screen. Input other values, if any, in the Solution n screen.
*: Enter the precompensated conductivity.

All cells of two user-defined matrixes are blank as a default. If any cells are not blank, clear them.

After entering all values, select Check values? to verify that there is no error.
This function checks if the matrix is consistently incremental or decremental. If any error is found,
its location is specified.
If there is no error, the matrix is compensated linearly and the blanks of the table (if any) are filled.
If some areas are left empty without running Check values?, a 1st/2nd comp. matrix error will be
issued.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-9

n Temperature compensation error


The temperature compensation error (alarm) is issued in any of the following cases.

l TC
The error is issued when:
(measured temperature reference temperature) < 90/compensation coefficient
The default of the temperature compensation coefficient is 2.10%/C.
For example, when the reference temperature is 25C, the temperature compensation coefficient
is 2.10%/C and the measured temperature is lower than 17.9C, the error will be issued.
Temperature compensation is performed even while an alarm is being issued.

l Matrix
The error is issued when the temperature or the precompensated conductivity is out of the range
of the temperature compensation matrix.
In this case, however, the temperature compensation is performed by extrapolation even while
an alarm is being issued.

l All
When the conductivity is around zero, the temperature compensation error may be issued. In this
case, the temperature compensation is not performed, and the precompensated conductivity is
displayed.
Whether the conductivity is around zero or not is determined by the temperature and conductivity
of solutions. For example, when the temperature is 20C and the conductivity is lower than 0.033
S/cm, the conductivity is determined to be around zero.
When measuring the conductivity around zero in air calibration or when the conductivity to be
measured is around zero, an alarm may be issued. App.

NOTE
To display the precompensated conductivity, set the Method to None.
Select Measurement setup Temp. compensation.

n Calibration solutions for conductivity


The calibration (cell constant) of a sensor does not change unless the sensor is damaged. ISC
It can also appear to change because of coating of the electrodes, or partial blockage.
It does not make sense to regularly recalibrate the FLXA202/FLXA21.

A calibration check, however, is another matter. When the objective is clearly defined as a
diagnostic exercise a regular check can bring an extra level of security and confidence to the
measurement.
Sensor damage, and/or coatings can be difficult to see and the calibration check can confirm
their presence, by a deviation from the known solution conductivity. The remedial action should
be to clean the sensor, and carefully check for blockage or damage (not simply to recalibrate).
Higher conductivity solutions should be used where possible. The lower the conductivity of the
test solution, the easier it is to contaminate. Carbon dioxide from the air can be quickly absorbed
to cause an error. All containers must be suitably clean, and all materials suitably pure. Outside of
a well-equipped laboratory these conditions are hard to meet.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-10
FLXA202/FLXA21 is programmed with the following table of conductivity of Potassium
Chloride (KCl) solutions at 25C. This is used in the Automatic Cell Constant setting calibration
feature. (See section 11.2) The table is derived from the Standards laid down in International
Recommendation No. 56 of the Organisation Internationale de Mtrologie Legale.
Table 4 KCl values at 25 C
mol/l mg KCl/kg of solution Conductivity
0.001 74.66 0.1469 mS/cm
0.002 149.32 0.2916 mS/cm
0.005 373.29 0.7182 mS/cm
0.01 745.263 1.4083 mS/cm
0.1 7419.13 12.852 mS/cm
1.0 71135.2 111.31 mS/cm

If it is more convenient, the user may make solutions from Sodium Chloride (NaCl or common
table salt) with the help of the following relationship table. This table is derived from the IEC norm
60746-3.
Table 5 NaCl values at 25 C
Weight % mg/kg Conductivity
0.001 10 21.4 S/cm
0.003 30 64.0 S/cm
0.005 50 106 S/cm
0.01 100 210 S/cm
0.03 300 617 S/cm
0.05 500 1.03 mS/cm
0.1 1000 1.99 mS/cm
0.3 3000 5.69 mS/cm
0.5 5000 9.48 mS/cm
1 10000 17.6 mS/cm
3 30000 48.6 mS/cm
5 50000 81.0 mS/cm
10 100000 140 mS/cm

n Measurement principle
Contrary to contact electrode conductivity, the EXA ISC Series analyses the conductivity with
out any contact between electrodes and process fluid. The measurement is based on inductive
coupling of 2 ring trans form ers (Toroids) by the liquid.
V3 V1
Receive coil drive coil

N3 N1

I=V2G

The converter supplies a reference volt age at a high frequency to the drive coil. The core of this
coil is of a high permeability mag net ic material, and a strong magnetic field is generated in the
toroid.
The liquid passes through the hole in the toroid and can be considered as a one turn secondary
winding.
The magnetic field will induce a voltage in this secondary winding. The induced cur rent in the
liquid winding is proportional to this volt age and the conductance of the liquid one turn winding
is according to Ohms law.

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 3 For ISC (Inductive Conductivity)> App.3-11
The conductance (1/R) is proportional to the specific conductivity and a constant factor that
is determined by the geometry of the sensor (length divided by surface area of the hole in the
toroid) and the installation of the sensor.
There are 2 toroids mounted in the dough nut shaped sensor. The liquid also flows through the
second toroid and therefore the liquid turn can be considered as a primary wind ing of the second
ring transformer.
The current in the liquid will create a magnetic field in the second toroid. The induced voltage
being the result of this magnetic field can be measured as an output.
The output voltage of this receive coil is therefore proportional to the specific con ductivity of the
process liquid.

n Changing the settings


If any setting is accidentally changed, values to the right of the relevant arrow in Table 6 are all
initialized.
Table 6 Parameters that initialize other values
Measurement -> Output: Process Linear: 0% value, 100% value
parameter ->
Table
Communication: HART: PV
Display setup: Main display
Trend Graph Screen -> Y-axis (low, high)
Communication: HART
Configure sensor: Display setup: Main display: unit
Measuring unit ->

App.

ISC

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 4 For DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> App.4-1

Appendix 4 For DO (Dissolved Oxygen)


n Dissolved oxygen
Dissolved oxygen means the oxygen dissolved in water.
Its concentration is expressed as the amount of oxygen per unit volume of water (mg/L or ppm).
The solubility of oxygen in water varies depending on water temperature, salinity, atmospheric
pressure, etc.

The sensors used in FLXA202/FLXA21 use the membrane electrode method to measure the
dissolved oxygen.
Two methods are available: galvanic cell method and polarographic method.

n Compensation
There are three compensation methods for FLXA202/FLXA21: temperature compensation,
salinity compensation, and process pressure compensation.
Salinity and temperature compensations meet ISO 5814 (see Table 1).
There is no need to change the setting for normal usage.
Use the salinity compensation when measuring a solution containing salt (see Section 13.2.4).
For operation at high altitude, adjust the pressure value for the process pressure compensation
(see Section 13.2.5).
Table 1 Solubility of oxygen in water as a function of temperature and salinity
Solubility of oxygen in water in Correction to be subtracted for each degree of salinity
Temperature
equilibrium with air at 101.325 kPa expressed in g/kg of total salts (NaCl) in water
(C)
(mg/l) (mg/l)
0 14.62 0.0875
1 14.22 0.0843 App.
2 13.83 0.0818
3 13.46 0.0789
4 13.11 0.0760
5 12.77 0.0739
6 12.45 0.0714
7 12.14 0.0693
8 11.84 0.0671
9 11.56 0.0650
10 11.29 0.0632
11 11.03 0.0614
12 10.78 0.0593
13 10.54 0.0582
14 10.31 0.0561
15 10.08 0.0545
16 9.87 0.0532
17 9.66 0.0514 DO
18 9.47 0.0500
19 9.28 0.0489
20 9.09 0.0475
21 8.91 0.0464
22 8.74 0.0453
23 8.58 0.0443
24 8.42 0.0432
25 8.26 0.0421
26 8.11 0.0407
27 7.97 0.0400
28 7.83 0.0389
29 7.69 0.0382
30 7.56 0.0371
ISO 5814:1990(E)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


<Appendix 4 For DO (Dissolved Oxygen)> App.4-2
Table 2 Solubility of oxygen in water as a function of temperature and pressure
Pressure [kPa (atm) *1]
Temperature
111.5 (1.1) 101.3 (1.0) 91.2 (0.9) 81.1 (0.8) 70.9 (0.7) 60.8 (0.6) 50.7 (0.5)
(C)
Solubility (mg/l)
0.0 16.09 13.14 11.69 10.21 8.74 8.74 7.27
5.0 14.06 11.48 10.20 8.91 7.62 7.62 6.34
10.0 12.43 10.15 9.00 7.86 6.71 6.71 5.58
15.0 11.10 9.05 8.03 7.01 5.98 5.98 4.96
20.0 10.02 8.14 7.23 6.30 5.37 5.37 4.44
25.0 9.12 7.40 6.56 5.70 4.84 4.84 4.00
30.0 8.35 6.76 5.99 5.19 4.60 4.60 3.62
35.0 7.69 6.22 5.47 4.75 4.01 4.01 3.28
40.0 7.10 5.72 5.03 4.34 3.65 3.65 2.96
ISO 5814:1990(E)
*1: Units at standard barometric pressure (normal atmospheric pressure at sea level): 101.325 kPa = 101.325 kN/m2 = 1 atm = 760
mmHg
Table 3 Variation of atmospheric pressure with respect to altitude
Altitude (m) Mean atmospheric pressure (kPa)
0 101.3
100 100.1
200 98.8
300 97.6
400 96.4
500 95.2
600 94.0
700 92.8
800 91.7
900 90.5
1000 89.4
1100 88.3
1200 87.2
1300 86.1
1400 85.0
1500 84.0
1600 82.9
1700 81.9
1800 80.9
1900 79.9
2000 78.9
2100 77.9
ISO 5814:1990(E)

n Changing the settings


If any setting is accidentally changed, values to the right of the relevant arrow in Table 4 are all
initialized.
Table 4 Parameters that initialize other values
Sensor type -> Sensor sensitivity
Calibration settings: Limits and timing: Zero, Slope (low, high)
Output: Process parameter -> Linear: 0% value, 100% value
Table
Communication: HART: PV
Trend Graph Screen -> Y-axis (low, high)
Communication: HART
Configure sensor: Unit -> Trend: Y-axis: Limits: Oxygen (low, high)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


Customer FLXA21
Maintenance 2-Wire Analyzer
Parts List

1 5

2 4 3

8
7 6 10
9

11 12 13 14 15

Item Part No. Qty Description


1 - - Sensor module assembly, QIC sheet is included.
K9698ES 1 pH/ORP Sensor module assembly (Intrinsic safety, 12(Jumper) and 13(Grommet set) are included.)
K9698FS 1 SC Sensor module assembly (Intrinsic safety)
K9698GS 1 ISC Sensor module assembly (Intrinsic safety)
K9698HS 1 DO Sensor module assembly (Intrinsic safety)

K9698ER 1 pH/ORP Sensor module assembly (General purpose, 12(Jumper) and 13(Grommet set) are included.)
K9698FR 1 SC Sensor module assembly (General purpose)
K9698GR 1 ISC Sensor module assembly (General purpose)
K9698HR 1 DO Sensor module assembly (General purpose)
K9698JS 1 SENCOM Sensor module assembly (General purpose and Intrinsic safety, 14(Grommet) is included.)

2 - 1 Shield plate
3 - 1 Shield assembly
4 - 1 Shield plate
5 Y9304LU 4 Screw
6 - - Cable gland assembly

K9698WF 1 For plastic housing (1 sensor) (cable gland x3, sleeve x1)
K9698WA 1 For plastic housing (2 sensors) (cable gland x4, sleeve x1)
K9698ZL 1 For stainless steel housing (cable gland x3, close up plug (rubber plug) x1)
7 K9334CN 1 Rubber plug (for auxiliary component)
8 - - Conduit adapter set

K9698WC 1 G1/2 x 4pcs (option code: /CB4)


K9698WD 1 1/2NPT x 4pcs (option code: /CD4)
K9698WE 1 M20x1.5 x 4pcs (option code: /CF4)
9 K9698ZD 1 Panel mounting set (option code: /PM)
10 K9171SS 1 Pipe and wall mounting set (option code: /U)

11 - - Hood assembly
K9698WK 1 Stainless steel (option code: /H6)
K9698WL 1 Stainless steel + urethane coating (option code: /H7)
K9698WH 1 Stainless steel + epoxy coating (option code: /H8)
12 A1525JT 2 Jumper (only for pH)

13 K9676BY 1 Grommet set (only for pH)


14 K9676CL 1 Grommet (only for SENCOM)
15 K9698NF 1 Protection cover (only for TIIS)

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2010 Yokogawa Electric Corporation. CMPL 12A01A02-01E
Subject to change without notice. 10th Edition: Oct. 2015 (YK)
Customer FLXA202
Maintenance 2-Wire Analyzer
Parts List

4 14 3

1 2

7
6 5 9
8

10 11 12 13

Item Part No. Qty Description


1 K9699MD 1 Shield plate
2 K9699ME Shield plate
3 - - Cover assembly
K9699QK 1 urethane coating
K9699QL 1 epoxy coating

K9699QM 1 high anti-corrosion coating


4 K9699PP 1 Hinge pin assembly (Hinge pin + spring)
5 - - Cable gland assembly
K9699ZN 1 For Type n (metal cable gland x3, close up plug (rubber plug) x1)
K9699ZM 1 Except Type n (plastic cable gland x3, close up plug (rubber plug) x1)

6 K9334CN 1 Rubber plug (for auxiliary component)


7 - - Conduit adapter set
K9699WF 1 G1/2 x 3pcs (option code: /CB4)
K9699WG 1 1/2NPT x 3pcs (option code: /CD4)
K9699WH 1 M20x1.5 x 3pcs (option code: /CF4)

8 K9698ZD 1 Panel mouting set (option code: /PM)


9 K9171SS 1 Pipe and wall mounting set (option code: /U)
10 - - Hood assembly
K9698WK 1 Stainless steel (option code: /H6)
K9698WL 1 Stainless steel + urethane coating (option code: /H7)

K9698WH 1 Stainless steel + epoxy coating (option code: /H8)


11 A1525JT 2 Jumper (only for pH)
12 K9676BY 1 Grommet set (only for pH)
13 K9676CL 1 Grommet (only for SENCOM)
14 K9699PL 5 Screw assembly (M5 screw + spring)

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2015 Yokogawa Electric Corporation. CMPL 12A01A03-01EN
Subject to change without notice. 1st Edition: Oct. 2015 (YK)
i

Revision Record
Manual Title : Model FLXA202 / FLXA21 2-Wire Analyzer
Manual No. : IM 12A01A02-01E

Oct. 2015/8th Edition


Addition of FLXA202
FLXA202 Product Career S1
FLXA21 Product Career S3

Apr. 2015/7th Edition


HOUSING ASSY Software Revision 2.11
Software revision (P. 3-3, 6-3, 12-3, 12-4, 12-7, 16-2 to 16-4)
Users Manual for FOUNDATION Fieldbus or PROFIBUS PA Communication (P.i)
Regulatory Compliance (P.1-9)
Note for wall mounting (P.2-14)
Change of type of ground of the stainless steel housing (P.2-1, 2-3, 2-5, 2-6)
Correction (P.App.2-8, App3-8)

Oct. 2014/6th Edition


Addition of NEPSI and ATEX/IECEx (SENCOM module).

Oct. 2013/5th Edition


HOUSING ASSY Software Revision 2.10
Addition of MONITOR display, and other corrections

Sep. 2013/4th Edition


Product Career S2, HOUSING ASSY Software Revision 2.02
Addition of SENCOM pH/ORP sensor
Deletion of section of General Specification
Change of safety symbols and words
Addition of FM and CSA intrinsically safe approval
Change of number of cable entries on stainless steel housing; Change of parts of cable glands
and change of sealing
Change of display message for malfunction and warning
Change of menu trees
Addition of check method for ORP sensor electrode
Addition of detail data of temperature compensation matrixes
Separation of appendix of HART Communication (This appendix is issued as Technical
Information, TI 12A01A02-60E.)
And, other minor changes and corrections

Feb. 2012/3rd Edition


Change of numbers of chapters (composition of manual)
Addition of descriptions and drawings for intrinsically safe type
Change of descriptions of messages on displays
Change of figures of housing due to change of position of external grounding for stainless steel
housing
Change of figures of wiring covers
Change of description of message language due to addition of message languages
Addition of CAUTIONs for replacement of modules for intrinsically safe type
And, other corrections

Aug. 2010/2nd Edition


p. i Addition of Composition of this Users Manual
Section 1.3 Addition of WARNING, explanation, and examples of displays of calculated data and redundant
system
Section 1.4 Addition of Passwords
Section 2 Addition of specification of wire terminal, and style code of PH201G
Section 3 Revision and addition of drawings and explanation of stainless steel housing due to change of
design (grounding terminal and plate)

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


ii
Addition of sleeve for grounding cable line of plastic housing
Correction of torque value
Addition of DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION
Addition of explanation of wire terminal
Addition of drawing of hood
Section 6, 11, 14, and 17
Addition of CAUTION, and example of display of calibration
Section 8 Addition of Installation of sensor module
Section 10.7 Correction and addition of calculated data
Appendix 2 Addition of Monitoring of Purified Water and WFI according to USP<645>
Appendix 4 Correction of error
Addition of CAUTION, Operational Precaution, and Note for Functions
** Above are main revisions.

May 2010/1st Edition


Newly published

Yokogawa Electric Corporation


2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN
Homepage: http://www.yokogawa.com/

IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00


Users
Manual
Model FU20
pH/ORP Sensor

IM 12B07K02-01E

IM 12B07K02-01E
3rd Edition
<INTRODUCTION> i

INTRODUCTION
This users manual provides information for the installation and use of the FU20 pH/ORP sensor.
The FU20 is the choice for the majority of typical waste water and process applications.

Upon delivery, unpack the sensor carefully and inspect it to ensure it was not damaged during
shipment. If damage is found, retain the original packing materials (including outer box) and then
immediately notify the carrier and the relevant Yokogawa sales office. Make sure the Model Code
on the sensor is the same as on the packing list. For details of the Model Code, refer to Sec. 1.2.

Other related items are described in the following manuals.


Model Title IM No.
FLXA202, FLXA21 2-Wire Liquid Analyzer IM 12A01A02-01E
PH450G 4-wire pH/ORP Converter IM 12B07C05-01E

Media No. IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov. 2015 (YK) IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00
All Rights Reserved Copyright 2000, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
<INTRODUCTION> ii

For the safe use of this equipment


n Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
In order to protect the system controlled by the product and the product itself and ensure
safe operation, observe the safety precautions described in this users manual. We assume
no liability for safety if users fail to observe these instructions when operating the product.
If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this users manual, the protection
provided by this instrument may be impaired.
Be sure to use the spare parts approved by Yokogawa Electric Corporation (hereafter
simply referred to as YOKOGAWA) when replacing parts or consumables.
Modification of the product is strictly prohibited.

n Notes on Handling Users Manuals


Please hand over the users manuals to your end users so that they can keep the users
manuals on hand for convenient reference.
Please read the information thoroughly before using the product.
The purpose of these users manuals is not to warrant that the product is well suited to any
particular purpose but rather to describe the functional details of the product.
No part of the users manuals may be transferred or reproduced without prior written
consent from YOKOGAWA.
YOKOGAWA reserves the right to make improvements in the users manuals and product at
any time, without notice or obligation.
If you have any questions, or you find mistakes or omissions in the users manuals, please
contact our sales representative or your local distributor.

n Warning and Disclaimer


The product is provided on an as is basis. YOKOGAWA shall have neither liability nor
responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any direct or indirect loss or damage arising
from using the product or any defect of the product that YOKOGAWA can not predict in advance.

n Signal Words
The following words are used in this manual.

CAUTION
This symbol gives information essential for understanding the operations and functions.

NOTE
This symbol indicates information that complements the present topic.

IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00


<INTRODUCTION> iii

After-sales Warranty
n Do not modify the product.

n During the warranty period, for repair under warranty consult the local sales representative
or service office. Yokogawa will replace or repair any damaged parts. Before consulting for
repair under warranty, provide us with the model name and serial number and a description
of the problem. Any diagrams or data explaining the problem would also be appreciated.
If we replace the product with a new one, we wont provide you with a repair report.
Yokogawa warrants the product for the period stated in the pre-purchase quotation
Yokogawa shall conduct defined warranty service based on its standard. When the
customer site is located outside of the service area, a fee for dispatching the maintenance
engineer will be charged to the customer.
Returned goods that have been in contact with process fluids must be decontaminated
and disinfected prior to shipment. Goods should carry a certificate to this effect, for the
health and safety of our employees. Material Safety Data sheets must be included for all
components of the process to which the sensor have been exposed.

n In the following cases, customer will be charged repair fee regardless of warranty period.
Failure of components which are out of scope of warranty stated in instruction manual.
Failure caused by usage of software, hardware or auxiliary equipment, which Yokogawa
Electric did not supply.
Failure due to improper or insufficient maintenance by user.
Failure due to modification, misuse or outside-of-specifications operation which Yokogawa
does not authorize.
Failure due to power supply (voltage, frequency) being outside specifications or abnormal.
Failure caused by any usage out of scope of recommended usage.
Any damage from fire, earthquake, storms and floods, lightning, disturbances, riots, warfare,
radiation and other natural changes.

n Yokogawa does not warrant conformance with the specific application at the user site.
Yokogawa will not bear direct/indirect responsibility for damage due to a specific application.

n Yokogawa Electric will not bear responsibility when the user configures the product into
systems or resells the product.

n Maintenance service and supplying repair parts will be covered for five years after the
production ends. For repair for this product, please contact the nearest sales office
described in this instruction manual.

IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00


Blank Page
<CONTENTS> v

Model FU20
pH/ORP Sensor
IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................i
For the safe use of this equipment..............................................................ii
After-sales Warranty....................................................................................iii
1. Specification.............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Standard Specifications.................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Model and Suffix codes..................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 External Dimensions......................................................................................... 1-2
2. Installation and Wiring.............................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Installation.......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Wiring.................................................................................................................. 2-1
3. Maintenance............................................................................................... 3-1
Revision Information................................................................................................i

IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00


Blank Page
< 1. Specification > 1-1

1. Specification
The Model FU20 offers a simple and cost effective solution for a wide variety of waste water and
process applications. This all-in-one sensor provides simultaneous measurement of pH, ORP
and temperature. The rugged Ryton body is designed for easy installation into on-line via the 3/4
inch tapered threaded connections provided on both ends of the sensor.

1.1 Standard Specifications


Measuring range: pH; 2 to 12 ORP; -1500 to 1500 mV
Solution temperature : -5 to 105C (sensor only, sample is not freezed)
Solution pressure : 0 to 1 MPa (sensor only)
Solution conductivity : 50 S/cm or higher
Solution flow velocity : 2 m/s max.
Internal electrolyte: Saturated KCl (Non refillable)
Temperature sensor : Pt1000 (Note)
Body materials: Ryton (PPS 40GF)
Weight: Approx. 0.5 kg (Body)
Storage temperature: -10 to 50 C
Applicable Liquid Analyze/converter: FLXA202/FLXA21 2-Wire Liquid Analyze,
PH450G pH/ORP converter.
Applicable holder: Special order for PH8HG, HH350G with optional adapter, cannot be
used with HH350G/-JT.
Note: The temperature sensor included in the FU20 is intended to provide indication and cell compensation. The construction has not
been tested to the pressure vessel standards required for plant temperature control.

NOTE
Cautions for using the FU20 sensor
Note that the FU20 sensor has limited life which depending on installation process.
Be careful not to allow liquid junction and glass of the pH sensor to dry out.
When storing the sensor, be sure to attach the protective cap (supplied with it on shipment) to its tip.
The sensing glass membrane of the pH sensor gradually deteriorates during storage.
A virgin pH sensor may become unusable because of its deterioration. Avoid storing the sensor
for a long time (Use within a year is recommended).

1.2 Model and Suffix codes


Model Suffix Code Option Code Description
FU20 ................................... ................... Wide body Sensor
Type -05 ................... Fixed cable 5 meter
-10 ................... Fixed cable 10 meter
Temperature element -T1 ................... Pt1000
Model -NPT ................... Dome shape model
Note: Special order is needed for using with PH8HG drop-in guide pipe.

IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00


< 1. Specification > 1-2

1.3 External Dimensions


Unit: mm
Standard type (FU20--T1-NPT)

11 12 13 14 15 16

Cable length (5 m or 10 m)

6.5

PG7
19.6

3/4 inch
tapered thread
(Note)
150

Sensor body
(PPS resin)
22.5 19.6

3/4 inch
tapered thread
(Note) (Note) Can be fixed to 3/4NPT female screw.
25.9

Figure 1.1 FU20 pH/ORP Sensor

IM 12B07K02-01E
< 2. Installation and Wiring > 2-1

2. Installation and Wiring

2.1 Installation
For optimum measurement results, the FU20 should be installed in a location that offers an
acceptable representation of the process composition and DOES NOT exceed the specifications
of the sensor.
This sensor should be installed rain-proof or drip-proof area where rainwater cannot get inside
through the cable inlet/outlet, because insulation of sensor will be decreased due to exposure to
rain or due to condensation at a high humid place.
Take care that screw-in force is not too large.
Special orderis needed for using with PH8HG drop-in guide pipe.

n In-line Installation
The FU20 sensor is designed for in-line installation, via a bypass loop as an immersion assembly.
For best results the FU20 should be mounted with the process coming towards the sensor and
positioned at least 15 above the horizontal plane to eliminate air bubbles in the glass bulb.
The FU20 can be mounted using the threads on the sensor body (Figure 2.1).
Apply Teflon tape to the appropriate threaded end, then install in the process.
How to apply Teflon tape: Apply seven turns or more Teflon tape from the thread end in piles
(thickness of tape: approximately 0.1 mm, width of tape: approximately 13 mm).
Apply more turns of Teflon tape for leakage.
Screw-in torque of sensor is approximately 4 Nm.

PG7

PG7

FU20

FU20
Teflon tape

Figure 2.1 In-line Installation

2.2 Wiring
Mark band of sensor is shown by numeral and pin terminals are used, connect each core wire to
the corresponding terminals of transmitter or converter. For details of wiring, refer to relevant IMs
of transmitter or converter.

IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00


< 2. Installation and Wiring > 2-2
For pH and ORP measurement
FLXA202/FLXA21/PH450G
Wire Marking
(11) TEMPERATURE
11
(12) TEMPERATURE
12
(13) REFERENCE
13
(14) SOLUTION GROUND
14
(15) GLASS (Measure)
15
(16) GE SHIELD
16
(17)

PG7

Figure 2.2 Sensor Wiring for pH and ORP measurement

For pH measurement
FLXA202/FLXA21/PH450G
Wire Marking
(11) TEMPERATURE
11
(12) TEMPERATURE
12
(13) REFERENCE
13
(14) SOLUTION GROUND
14
(15) GLASS (Measure)
15
(16) GE SHIELD
16
(17)

PG7

Figure 2.3 Sensor Wiring for pH measurement

For ORP measurement


Wire Marking FLXA202/FLXA21/PH450G

(*1) (11)
11
(*1) (12)
12
(13) REFERENCE (*2)
13
(14) SOLUTION GROUND
14
(*1) (15) ORP (Measure)
15
(*1) (16) SHIELD
16
(17)

PG7

*1: Wires of 11, 12, 15 and 16 are not used, wrap these wires with an insulating
tape or related protection.
*2: For ORP measurement not all numbers are correct, look at the wiring diagram
and short terminals (13) and (14) of converter.

Figure 2.4 Sensor Wiring for ORP measurement

IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00


< 3. Maintenance > 3-1

3. Maintenance
The sensor has limited life. If buffer solution calibration becomes impossible due to deterioration
of the sensor, replace it with a new one. After the sensor is replaced, always carry out a buffer
solution calibration.

NOTE
A glass electrode whose glass membrane has dried out does not provide stable readings until
it gets used to the solution. Place in advance the glass electrode in the 3 mol/L KCl solution for
several hours. When storing the sensor, use a sensor cap (supplied with it on shipment) to its tip.

n Cleaning Electrode and Liquid Junction


Staining of an electrode or liquid junction can cause measurement errors. Therefore, if he
measured solutions tend to stain the electrode, the electrode and liquid junction must be cleaned
periodically - depending on the degree of staining.
To clean the sensor, proceed as follows:
(1) Take out the sensor.
(2) Clean the electrode or liquid junction as follows. Different cleaning solutions may be
required depending on the staining.
Stains due to suspended Solids, Sticky Materials, Microbes or the like
Using soft tissue paper, wipe the stains off the electrode or liquid junction. In addition, clean
off remaining stains by rinsing with water.
Stains due to Oily Materials
Wash off stains by submerging in a neutral detergent solution in a beaker, etc, (for from
several tens of minutes to several hours depending on the degree of staining).
Chemical Stains such as due to Metallic Adsorption
Place the electrode or liquid junction in a diluted hydrochloric acid solution (1 to 2%) for
several minutes (acid washing). Afterwards rinse the sensor with water.
Protein Deposits
It should be removed with a protein enzymatic solution. For instance a solution containing
8.5 mL concentrated hydrochloric acid and 10 gram pepsin in 1 liter water will do.
(3) Check deterioration of the sensor.
(4) Calibrate the sensor with buffer solution.
(5) Mount the sensor again.

CAUTION
Avoid using non-polar solvent like tri-chloro ethylene, toluene or hexane. Cleaning with iso-
propanol or methanol is acceptable.
The non-polar solvents will break up the gel-layer on the glass bulb and requires that the
electrode to be soaked in water for at least 12 hours before functioning normally again.
The Teflon (PTFE) diaphragm of the sensor can sometimes be regenerated by putting it in hot
(approx. 70C) 3 molar Potassium Chlorine (KCl) solution and letting it cool to room temperature.

For details of calibration procedure, refer to relevant users manual of transmitter/converter.

IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00


Blank Page
i

Revision Information
Title : Model FU20 pH/ORP Sensor
Manual No. : IM 12B07K02-01E

Oct. 2015/3rd Edition


Added FLXA202, Deleted PH400G/OR400G
Pi, P1-1, P2-2
Supplement of 2nd Edition;
Page 1-2, Some revision of FU20 external dimensions.
Page 2-1, Some revision of Sec. 2.1.1 (how to apply Teflon tape to the thread end of sensor body).
Mar. 2013/2nd Edition Allover revised by InDesign format
P ii to iv, For the safe use of this equipment and After-sales Warranty added;
P 1-1, Some revision of standard specifications, option code of "/NAG" deleted for "Model- and suffix
codes FU20";
P 1-2, Some revision of external dimensions;
P 2-1, Some revision of "Installation", and "In-line Installation" added (screw-in torque changed);
P 2-2, Some revision of "Wiring" with combined transmitter/converter,
(conduct wiring according only to the marking numbers attached onto the core wires as
referring to the corresponding figure, and disregard the color codes of the core wires.) ;
P 3-1, Some revision of "Maintenance" procedure and caution of cleaing sensor added;
Last page, Addition of "Revision Information".

Nov. 2000/1st Edition


Newly published.

n If you want to have more information about Yokogawa products, you can visit
Yokogawas home page at the following web site.
Home page: http://www.yokogawa.com/an

IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00


Blank Page
Instruction Model WU11
Manual Interconnection/Extension Cable for SENCOM Sensor

1 General Service Department of the relevant Yokogawa Sales office


for repair or replacement (at Yokogawas discretion).
1.1 Introduction
The WU11 interconnection and extension cable is The following information must be included in the letter
specified for reliable transfer of digital signals between accompanying the returned goods:
the SENCOM sensors and Yokogawa FLXA analyzer. It Model Code and Serial Number.
is especially designed to be installed in a heavy industrial Original Purchase Order and Date.
environment. The double shielded cable will protect the Length of time in service and description of the process.
connected devices for interference from high voltages Description of the fault and circumstances of the failure.
and currents which are present on other cables. The Process/environmental conditions that may be related
cable is specified to be used in IP67 applications, allowing to the failure of the cable.
it to be submerged as a whole. The cable has a wide Statement as to whether warranty or non-warranty
temperature operation range which is sufficient for most service is requested.
of the applications. The materials used for the cable are Complete shipping and billing instructions for return of
flame retardant to resist the spread of fire. material, plus the name and phone number of a contact
person that can be reached for further information.
On one side of the interconnection WU11 cable you Clean Statement
will find a 5 pin-female connector for connection to the
Yokogawa SENCOM Sensor is. The other side has 5 Returned goods that have been in contact with process
wired pins for connection to the terminal strip of the fluids must be decontaminated and disinfected prior to
Yokogawa FLXA analyzer. The cable can be ordered in shipment. Goods should carry a certificate to this effect,
four different lengths. To extend the distance between the for the health and safety of our employees. Material Safety
sensor and the connection box or the Flexa terminal, the Data sheets must be included for all components of the
WU11 is also available as an extension cable. This cable process to which the cable is been exposed.
has on opposite ends a male and a female connector
fitted to extend the communication distance between 2 General Specifications
sensor and transmitter.
2.1 Description
1.2 Unpacking & Checking Two twisted pair cables with overall shield, depending
Upon delivery, unpack the cable carefully and inspect on the model: -oneside sensor connector with wire
it to ensure that it is not damaged during shipment. If pin finishing for terminal connection. -oneside sensor
damage is found, retain the original packing materials connector with straight connector (extension). The cable
and immediately notify the carrier and the relevant local is recognized by UL (fileno. E124763) and CSA (fileno.
Yokogawa Sales office. Make sure the Model Code LL105324).
and Serial Number on the cable are the same as on the
packing list. 2.2 Cable materials
Twisted pair cables:
1.3 Warranty & Service Tinned copper conductors 0.25mm2 (24 AWG).
Yokogawa products are guaranteed free from defects Outside shield:
in workmanship and materials under normal use and Foil shield with drain wire, 125% coverage.
service for a period of (typically) 12 months from the Braid, tinned copper 0.008 mm2 (38 AWG),
date of shipment from the manufacturer. Individual sales 95% coverage.
organizations can deviate from the typical warranty Insulator:
period, and the conditions of sale relating to the original Polyethylene for the twisted pair cables.
purchase order should be consulted. Damage caused Color twisted pair #1: green / yellow.
by wear and tear, inadequate maintenance, corrosion, or Color twisted pair #2: brown / white.
by the effects of chemical processes are excluded from
this warranty coverage. In the event of a warranty claim, Polyvinylchloride for the outside jacket,
the defective goods should be sent (freight paid) to the solid extrusion, color black.

IM 12B06W02-03E-E
4th Edition
2.3 Connector materials 3 Wiring 2 1
Housing :P  olybutylene terephthalate
UL94V-0, color: black.
O-ring : Nitrilbutadieenrubber,
color: black.
Nut : Brass.
Contact finishing : Gold plated. 3 5
2.4 Electrical specifications
Twisted pair cables :C apacity < 50 pF/m
Resistance < 100 /km 4
Characteristic Impedance 120 Figure 2. Front view female connector
Connector : Maximum rated current 5 A
Maximum voltage 125 V 3.1 Definition connector pin to cable

2.5 Operational specifications Pin # Twisted Wire Wire


Temperature : -40 ~ +85 C (-40 ~ +185 F) pair # color number
Water Proof : IP67 (conform IEC60529) 1 1 yellow 83
2 1 green 84
2.6 Dimensional drawing 3 2 brown 87
4 drain black 82
D d
MODEL CODE
CN
5 2 white 86
Serial#

D d WP
3.2 Connection cable to FLXA analyzer
MODEL CODE

Signal Wire Wire FLXA


Serial#

L
Description color number terminal
Figure 1. Cable dimensions. Supply + brown 87 87
Length (L) :2  , 3, 5, 10, 20 and 30m Supply Gnd white 86 86
(6.6, 9.8, 16.4, 32.8, 65.6, 98.4 ft) Data + green 84 84
Dia. connector (D) : 10.6 0.2 mm Data - yellow 83 83
(0.417 0.008 inch) Shield black 82 82
Dia. cable (d) : 5.8 0.1 mm
(0.228 0.004 inch) 4 Model and Suffix Codes
Wire pins : 8 x 1.3 mm
(0.31 x 0.05 inch) Model Suffix Description
WU11 SENCOM cable
2.7 Cable installation Conn. type -M9 M9 female connector for sensor conn.
Procuring a smooth bend radius allows the cable to Cable length -02 2 meter only available with CN finishing
absorb the impact of bending and thereby increasing its -03 3 meter only with WP
life cycle. Minimum bend radius is approx. 5 cm (2). -05 5 meter only with WP
-10 10 meter only with WP
When using cable ties, do not pinch or deform the cable. -20 20 meter only with WP
-30 30 meter only available with CN finishing
When connected cable is subjected to any motion Finishing -WP Wire pin for terminal connection
between two points, stress on the cable can be prevented -CN Straight plug for M9 female connector
by an adequate cable length or using a cable loop. Jacket material -V PVC

YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC ASIA Pte. LTD. Yokogawa has an extensive sales and
World Headquarters 5 Bedok South Road
9-32, Nakacho 2-chome, Musashino-shi Singapore 469270 distribution network.
Tokyo 180-8750 Singapore
Japan www.yokogawa.com/sg Please refer to the European website
www.yokogawa.com (www.yokogawa.com/eu) to contact your
YOKOGAWA CORPORATION OF AMERICA YOKOGAWA CHINA CO. LTD. nearest representative.
2 Dart Road 3F Tower D Cartelo Crocodile Building
Newnan GA 30265 No.568 West Tianshan Road Changing District
USA Shanghai, China
www.yokogawa.com/us www.yokogawa.com/cn

YPA EUROPE BV YOKOGAWA MIDDLE EAST B.S.C.(c)


Euroweg 2 P.O. Box 10070, Manama
3825 HD AMERSFOORT Building 577, Road 2516, Busaiteen 225
The Netherlands Muharraq, Bahrain
www.yokogawa.com/eu www.yokogawa.com/bh

IM 12X0X0-E-E
IM 12B06W02-03E-E
Subject to change without notice Printed in The Netherlands, 00-000 (A) I
Copyright
Subject to change without notice Printed in The Netherlands, 04-1506
Copyright
1.4InstructionManualforTurbidityAnalyzer
ApplicableModel Area
TB750GNTUSTN1NNNN3NN/U PRASEDIMENTASIAREA
SS7 RESERVOIRIPAAREA
<<Contents>> <<Index>>

General Model TB750G


Specifications Right Angle Scattered Light
Turbidimeter
GS 12E01A06-01E

General
There are increasing demands for good quality water
for both industrial-use and drinking water applications
because of rapid industrial development and consumer
demands for better quality of life. A large amount
of the waste water from both applications has been
drained or discharged into rivers, causing pollution to
worsen year after year. This has caused serious social
problems. Therefore, turbidimeters, conventionally
used for the operation and control of water purification
plants, are nowadays being required to measure
the amount of matter suspended in various sorts of
industrial waste water and to measure the turbidity of
chemical processes.
Since their sales began in 1959, Yokogawas
turbidimeters have been continuously developed and
improved using various measurement principles suited System Configuration
for various applications. With its many achievements, Example: Typical system
Yokogawa has earned its customers confidence.
Developed based on years of experience and Analog
output TB750G
applications in process fields, the TB750G Turbidity Converter
Measuring System using right angle light scattering Serial Sample water outlet
method provides highly reliable measurement and commu-
nication RS-422
improved maintainability which improve upon what or RS-232C
Contact
previous models could offer. A wide range of options output
are available to meet users various needs. Range contact
output Light
TB750G Light Drain
Contact source Detector receiver
input
Features Power
Highly reliable measurement with excellent linearity supply Sample water inlet
and repeatability
Linearity: 2% of reading or 0.01 NTU, whichever
is greater
Repeatability: 1% of reading or 0.002 NTU, Sample water
whichever is greater Drain F01.ai
Display resolution: 0.001 NTU
Easy-to-clean cell Example: System with ultrasonic oscillator and
Compact, lightweight converter and detector zero turbidity filter
User configurable measuring range
Measuring range: 0-0.2 NTU to 0-100 NTU Analog
Measuring range switching (2 or 3 ranges) output TB750G TUS400G should be purchased separately.
Enhanced self-diagnostic function as standard Serial Converter TUS400G
Light source failure, input element failure, calibration commu- Ultrasonic
nication RS-422 Oscillator Sample water outlet
failure, various circuit failures, etc. Contact or RS-232C
Detector structure to remove sudden reading output
change caused by bubbles Range contact
output
A wide range of measurement conditions Contact TB750G Light
Light
Low flow rate: 0.05 to 20 l/min input source Detector receiver
Drain
High pressure: 500 kPa maximum Power
Temperature: 0 to 50C supply Head Sample water inlet
Detector can be connected for in-line analysis tank
2 analog outputs, 3 relay contact outputs, and 1 Sample
serial communication water
Many options available Drain for washing
Tap
Ultrasonic transducer and oscillator for ultrasonic water
cleaning Zero turbidity filter Drain
Various head tanks to accommodate application
Zero sample
requirements
Zero turbidity filter should be purchased separately. F02.ai

Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E


2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 Japan Copyright Jun. 2005
Tel.: 81-422-52-5617 Fax.: 81-422-52-6792 4th Edition Mar. 2014
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 2
Standard Specifications Number of contacts: 3
Action: On/Off
1. TB750G Right Angle Scattered Light Function:
Turbidimeter S1, S2: High/low alarm or in-maintenance selectable
Measurement: Turbidity of finished water and water FAIL: Failure
used in general processes Rating: 250 VAC, 2A, 125 VA max. (resistance
Measurement method: Right angle light scattering load) or 30 VDC, 3A, 60 W max. (resistance
method load), Form C (NC/NO/COM, 3 terminals)
Measuring range: 0.000 to 100.0 NTU Contact status:
Display: 4 digit LCD (6 digits in message area),
Contact S1, S2 Contact FAIL
negative value indication enabled/disabled
Status LED NO NC LED NO NC
Unit: NTU
Resolution: 0.001 NTU In action ON Closed Open ON Open Closed
Turbidity standard: Formazin Not in action OFF Open Closed OFF Closed Open
Analog output: Power OFF OFF Open Closed OFF Open Closed
Number of outputs: 2 Contact input:
Output signal: Type: Voltage-free contact input
Analog output 1; 4 to 20 mA DC, isolated Number of contacts: 2
Analog output 2; 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA Function: Remote range switching
DC selectable, isolated (Both analog On resistance: Input resistance 200 or less
outputs are not isolated.) Off resistance: input resistance 100k or greater
Load resistance: 550 max. Contact status:
Output range: Configurable within the measuring Remote 2-range switching
range
When Range Switching is Selected
Minimum range; 0 to 0.2 NTU Contact
Maximum range; 0 to 100 NTU Range A Range B
Minimum span; 20% or more of upper limit of IN1-COM Open Closed
the range or 0.2 NTU, whichever is
greater. Remote 3-range switching
Note: When auto range switching is selected, lower limit When Range Switching is Selected
of the range is 0 NTU. Contact
Range A Range B Range C
Range switching:
Enabled/disabled in either analog output IN1-COM Open Closed Open
1 or 2. Not available in both outputs. IN2-COM Open Open Closed
Manual (local) range/auto range/remote Range contact output:
2-range/remote 3-range switching Type: Relay contact output
selectable. Number of contacts: 3
Output signal in maintenance: Action: On/Off
Output hold enabled/disabled Rating: 250 V AC, 2 A, 125 VA max.
Hold output: Last measured value or fixed value (resistance load) or 30 V DC, 3 A, 60
(between 2.0 and 22.0 mA for 4 to 20 W max. (resistance load)
mA DC output; between 0.0 and 22.0 Contact status:
mA for 0 to 20 mA DC output) selectable
When Fixed When Range Switching is Selected
Output signal in FAIL: Output hold enabled/disabled Contact Range is
Hold output: Last measured value or fixed value Selected Range A Range B Range C
(between 2.0 and 22.0 mA for 4 to 20 RANGE A-COM Open Closed Open Open
mA DC output; between 0.0 and 22.0 RANGE B-COM Open Open Closed Open
mA for 0 to 20 mA DC output) selectable
RANGE C-COM Open Open Open Closed
Negative value indication: Enabled/disabled
Serial communication: Calibration:
Number of outputs: 1 Zero calibration: Zero water (filtered water with zero turbidity)
Communication signal: RS-422 or RS-232C, isolated Span calibration: Sensitivity calibration using check
Command: Requests of turbidity measurement, error block or turbidity standard solutions
information, and output range switching 2-point calibration: Turbidity standard solutions
Communication data: Turbidity, status Grab sample calibration: Zero point and sensitivity
(measurement/maintenance/calibration, correction using grab sample
FAIL, high/low alarm, output range), Self-diagnostics: Light source failure, input element
error information failure, calibration failure, AD circuit
Communication method: Start-stop synchronization, failure, memory failure, etc.
non-procedural Installation location: Indoor (Weather protection is
Communication setting: 9600 bps, parity (even), required for outdoor installation)
stop bit 1 bit, data length 8 bit Ambient temperature: -5 to 50C (Sample and
Distance: RS-422; 1000 m max. tap water may need protection against
RS-232C; 10 m max. freezing)
Cable: RS-422; Twisted pair cable with Ambient humidity: 5 to 95%RH (non-condensing)
shield (AWG 20 to 16) Storage temperature: -30 to 70C
RS-232C; Cable with shield Sample water conditions:
Contact output: Flow rate: 0.05 to 20 l/min
Type: Relay contact output Temperature: 0 to 50C

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Nov. 25, 2014-03
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 3
Pressure: 500 kPa max. Zero turbidity filter
Mounting: Pipe, wall, rack or panel mounting When measuring range is 2.0 NTU or greater: 1 m
Piping connection (detector): When measuring range is below 2.0 NTU:
Sample water inlet: Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT (optional) 1 m + 0.2 m
Sample water outlet: Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT (optional) 2. TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator
Drain port: Rc1 or 1NPT (optional) Combination device: Turbidity converter (TB750G)
Cable inlet port (detector and converter): Special cable (3-conductor shielded cable)
DIN Pg 13.5 cable gland Cleaning method: Continuous ultrasonic emission
Cable OD.: 6 to 12 mm (Frequency sweep method)
Dimensions: Oscillation frequency: Approx. 170 to 200 kHz (sweeping
Detector: 378W x 174H x 265D mm frequency: Approx. 160 to 250 kHz)
Converter: 144W x 144H x 142D mm Output voltage: Approx. 40 to 80 V
Material (main): Power supply: 100/110/115/200/220/240 V AC 10%,
Detector: Aluminum alloy casting, modified PPE resin 50/60 Hz
Wetted parts: Modified PPE resin, glass, fluoric Power consumption: Approx. 30 VA
rubber, silicon rubber, SUS 316 Insulation resistance:
Converter: Aluminum alloy casting, Polycarbonate resin Power supply-G: 100 M or more / 500 V DC
Construction: JIS C 0920, IP65 Water-tight Output terminals-G: 100 M or more / 500 V DC
Finish: Withstand voltage:
Detector, converter: Power supply-G: 1000/1500 V AC for 1 min.
Baked polyurethane resin coating (standard) Output terminals-C: 1000/1500 V AC for 1 min.
Baked epoxy resin coating (optional) Ambient temperature: -10 to 50C (hood may be
Color: fitted as option)
Detector: Spring Black (Munsell 3.3PB2.5/0.5 Storage temperature: -25 to 70C
or equivalent), Mint green (Munsell Construction: JIS C 0920 Water-tight (NEMA 4
5.6BG3.3/2.9 or equivalent) equivalent waterproof construction)
Converter: Silver Gray (Munsell 3.2PB7.4/1.2 or Material: Case: Aluminum alloy casting
equivalent) Window: Polycarbonate
Weight: Finish: Baked polyurethane resin coating
Detector: Approx. 5.8 kg (standard)
Converter: Approx. 1.5 kg Baked epoxy resin coating (optional)
Power supply: 100 to 240 VAC -15%/+10%, 50/60 Hz Color:
Grounding: Class D grounding Case: Frosty white (Munsell 2.5Y8.4/1.2 or
Grounding resistance of 100 or less equivalent)
Power consumption: Cover: Deep sea-moss green (Munsell
Converter + Detector: 50 VA max. 0.6G3.1/2.9 or equivalent)
Regulatory Compliance Mounting: Pipe mounting, wall or rack mounting or
EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New panel mounting
Zealand Mounting material: Stainless steel
EN 55011 Class A, Group 1 Cable inlet port: 22.7 hole x 2
Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard Class A DIN Pg16 watertight plastic gland
Cable/terminal: For 7 to 12 mm, M4 screw
Conduit adapter: Power supply side (optional)
Characteristics Material: Polycarbonate resin
Standard performance Connection: G1/2 or 1/2NPT
(under normal operating conditions) Weight:
Repeatability: 1% of reading or 0.002 NTU, Body: Approx. 2.0 kg
whichever is greater Mounting: Approx. 0.7 kg
Linearity: 2% of reading or 0.01 NTU, Dimension:162W x 180H x 115D mm
whichever is greater Note: 1. Output of ultrasonic oscillator changes with
Response time: Within 2 minutes (90% response, power supply voltage. The output is lower when
sample water flow rate 3 l/min) the voltage is lower.
Optional Specifications 2. Output of ultrasonic oscillator changes with
Head tank: connected cable. The output is lower when the
Simple head tank length of the cable is longer.
Application: Turbidity is 10 NTU or less. To Noise filter assembly: (for TUS400G-NN-RC, -KC)
remove relatively large air bubbles. Ambient temperature: -10 to 50C
Sample water conditions: Flow rate: 1 to 10 l/min (no dew condensation allowed)
Turbidity: 2 to 10 NTU Strage temperature: -25 to 70C
Pressurized head tank for low turbidity Construction: JIS C 0920 Watertight (IP53)
Application: Turbidity is 2 NTU or less. To remove air Regulatory Compliance
bubbles and to prevent them from occurring. (for TUS400G-NN-RC)
Sample water conditions: EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and
Flow rate; 0.05 to 10 l/min New Zealand
Turbidity; 2 NTU or less EN 55011 Class A, Group 1
Pressure; 20 to 500 kPa (for TUS400G-NN-KC)
Transducer for ultrasonic cleaning (TUS400G Ultrasonic Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard Class A
Oscillator should be purchased separately.)

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 4
Model and Codes
1. TB750G Right Angle Scattered Light Turbidimeter
Model Suffix Code Option Code Description
TB750G ............................................... ............. Right angle scattered light turbidimeter
Turbidity standard and -NTU ............. Formazin, 0-0.2 NTU to 0-100 NTU
measuring range
Application -ST ............. Standard
Output -N1 ............. 4 to 20 mA DC, RS-422
-N2 ............. 4 to 20 mA DC, RS-232C
Sampling system -NN ............. Without sampling system
Sampling system material and mounting NN ............. Without sampling system
Cable length between converter and -1 ............. 1m
detector -2 ............. 2m
-3 ............. 3m
___ Always -NN
-NN .............
Option Detector process connection /NPT ANSI standard connection *1
Mounting hardware /U Pipe mounting hardware (SUS)
/R Rack or wall mounting hardware (SUS)
/PM Panel mounting hardware (SUS)
/TBC Mounting hardware for Model 8562 or Model TB500G replacement (SUS) *2
Conduit adapter /AFTG G1/2 *3
/ANSI 1/2NPT *3
Head tank /D1 Pressurized head tank for low turbidity (recommended for 2.0 NTU or less)
/D2 Simple head tank
Tag plate /SCT Stainless steel tag plate
Special painting /X1 Epoxy painting *4
Ultrasonic transducer /US Transducer for ultrasonic cleaning *5
*1: When option /NPT is specified, the piping connections of sample water inlet, sample water outlet, and drain port are 1/2NPT, 1/2NPT, and
1NPT respectively. Unless option /NPT is specified, they are Rc1/2, Rc1/2, and Rc1 respectively.
*2: This bracket is also available to the detector of Turbidimeter 1720E and 1720D manufactured by HACH. It is separate type, each for detector
and converter.
*3: Conduit adapter is for power supply, output and input wiring provided by customer.
*4: Converter and detector case are painted with epoxy resin.
*5: Specify option /US (ultrasonic transducer) for ultrasonic cleaning. Also TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator should be purchased separately.
Note: When ultrasonic cleaning is continuously used after the Model 8562 Turbidity Transmitter has been replaced with the TB750G Turbidimeter,
this /US option must be specified.

2. TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator 3. Zero Turbidity Filter Assembly


Model Suffix Code Option Code Description
Part Name Part No.
TUS400G ............... Ultrasonic oscillator for turbidimeter
...............................
___ -NN ............... Always NN Filter Assembly, 1 m K9411UA
Application -NN ............... General Filter Assembly, 0.2 m K9726EF
-RC ............... Australia, for Oceania areas
-KC ............... For Korea 4. Consumables
Supply voltage *2 -1 ............... 100 V AC, 50/60 Hz
-2 ............... 110 V AC, 50/60 Hz Part Name Part No.
-3 ............... 115 V AC, 50/60 Hz Filter Element, 1 m K9008ZD
-4 ............... 200 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Filter Element, 0.2 m K9726EH
-5 ............... 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz
-6 ............... 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Lamp Assembly K9657PW
Ultrasonic vibrator ............... None
-00 Fuse (3.15 A) A1113EF
connecting cable ............... 1 m (for Model TB700G or TB750G)
-L1 Desiccant (4 pcs) *1 K9657RJ
............... 5 m (for Model TB700G or TB750G)
-L2
............... 10 m (for Model TB700G or TB750G)
-L3 *1: Use within a year after purchasing.
............... 15 m (for Model TB700G or TB750G)
-L4 5. Head Tank
............... 5 m (for Model 8562)
-05
............... 10 m (for Model 8562)
-10 Part Name Part No. Description
............... 15 m (for Model 8562)
-15 Pressurized K9725WA Same as option
Language for directions ............... Japanese (Directions indicated on product: Some
-J head tank code /D1
are written both in Japanese and in English.)
Simple head K9658YA Same as option
-E ............... English (Directions indicated on product: Some tank code /D2
are written both in Japanese and in English.)
Option Mounting /PS Pipe mounting (SUS)
hardware /W Wall mounting (SUS)
Hood /PA Panel mounting (SUS)
Tag plate /H Sunshade hood
Special painting /SCT Stainless steel tag plate
Adapter for /X1 Epoxy painting
conduit work /AFTG G1/2
Special screws /ANSI 1/2NPT
/SPS Teflon coated SUS steel screws
(resistant to salt corrosion) *1
*1:The SUS screws with Teflon coating are used at the four corners of the cover.
*2:The power supply to TB700G or TB750G should be determined in accordance with
the supply voltage specified here.

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 5
Dimensions
1. TB750G Right Angle Scattered Light Turbidimeter
Converter
141.5 Unit: mm
144 132 4-M6 screws

(141.5)
150 min.
(144)
144

80

150 min.
50
min.

80 Maintenance space
6- Cable inlets
(30)

Detector connecting
cable inlet DIN Pg13.5 Grounding terminal
Cable gland (M4 screw)
Dedicated cable (1/2/3 m)
to Detector F03.ai

Detector
Unit: mm
Front view Side view

500 min.
500 min.
265

(265.3)
250 min. (297) 250 min. 200 min.
(378) (265)

378 Maintenance space


20 38
Sample water outlet
Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
60
180

174
41

63

Converter connecting cable inlet *


Power cable inlet *
Ultrasonic oscillator (for power) 20 Dedicated cable 113 56
connecting cable inlet * (1/2/3 m) Sample water inlet
("/US" only) from Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT Drain
Converter Rc1 or 1NPT
Ultrasonic transducer
* Cable gland DIN Pg13.5 connecting cable inlet ("/US" only) * F04.ai

Conduit adapter (option code: /AFTG, /ANSI)

Nut Packing Unit: mm


Case
Approx. 55

Cable gland
49

Adapter
G1/2 (/AFTG) or 1/2NPT (/ANSI) F12.ai

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 6
Pipe mounting (option code: /U)
Converter
195 Unit: mm
144 132

Mounting 2-inch pipe (60.5 OD)


144
224

100 (Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F05.ai

Detector
Mounting 2-inch pipe (60.5 OD) Unit: mm
20 84
Sample water outlet
12

Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT

48
180

202
25
47

20 113 102
Sample water inlet Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. Drain Rc1 or 1NPT F06.ai

Rack or wall mounting (option code: /R)


Converter

154.5 Unit: mm
144 132
144
224

70

70 4-10
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F07.ai

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 7
Detector (The dedicated mounting bracket is not attached. Install the detector with four M5 screws.)
20 38 Unit: mm
2-6 (fixing holes) Sample water outlet
Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT

60
160 (for fixing hole)
7

174
180
R3

R3

41

63
6 6
Sample water inlet Drain
20 Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
113 56 Rc1 or 1NPT
100 (for fixing hole)
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F08.ai

Panel mounting (option code: /PM)


Converter
27 15 max.(panel thickness) 4-M6 screws Unit: mm
138 +2
0

138 +2
0

195 min.
100

178 185 min.


(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. <Panel cutout> F19.ai

Detector (The dedicated mounting bracket is not attached. Install the detector with four M5 screws.)
20 38 Unit: mm
2-6 (fixing holes) Sample water outlet
Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
60
160 (for fixing hole)
7

174
180
R3

R3

41

63

6 6
Sample water inlet Drain
20 Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
113 56 Rc1 or 1NPT
100 (for fixing hole)
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F08.ai

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 8
Mounting for Model 8562 or Model TB500G replacement (option code: /TBC)
Converter

154.5 Unit: mm
144 132

144
224

70
70 4-10
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F07.ai

Detector

4-9 273 (for fixing hole) 4-M5 Unit: mm


(for fixing hole) (fixing screws of detector) 38
100 (for detector fixing screw) 265
20 25
R3

6 6 Sample water outlet


77
112 (for fixing hole)

R3

Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
(for detector fixing screw)
(20)

139
174
160

41
31

63
20 Sample water inlet
Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT Drain
70 (for fixing hole) 113 56
Rc1 or 1NPT
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F09.ai

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 9
Pressurized head tank for low turbidity (option code: /D1)

Unit: mm

Pressure gauge Needle valve


(Range: 0 to 500 kPa) (Material: SUS316) 35 145

Approx. 127

Drain
6/4 PE tube coupling
Approx. 332

Sample water outlet (to detector)


Drain plug 6/4 PE tube coupling
50
15

Sample water inlet 10/8 PE tube coupling


110 15
4-6.2 holes
140
F10.ai

Simple head tank (option code: /D2)

123 5 Unit: mm
102 5 67 5
66 5
205 5

Vent to the atmosphere


Tube size 19 ID
Hose coupling

Drain
Tube size 19 ID 4-6
Hose coupling
390 (for fixing hole)

38 (for fixing hole)


795 5

38 (for fixing hole)

Sample water inlet


Rc3/8
2715

210.55
1505

26
Sample water outlet 95.5 5 64.5
(to detector)
Rp1/2 Drain
TS socket type
Nominal 20A (26.2 ID) F11.ai

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 10
2. TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator

202 155 Unit: mm


162 115

50
Hood

130
(optional)

180

30
66.5
96

Ultrasonic transducer cable inlet port,


Ground terminal 42
with cable gland (DIN Pg16 or equivalent)
(M4 screw) 56 06FUHZV IRUPRXQWLQJKDUGZDUH

Power supply cable inlet port,


with cable gland (DIN Pg16 or equivalent)
'HGLFDWHGFDEOH QRWDSSOLFDEOHLQFDVHRI WR786*
6
9

Red
U1 White
U1
U2 Black
U2
U3 U3
Cable length: L
Approx. 80 (L=1/5/10/15 m) Approx. 60
or 180 F13.ai

External dimensions of additional noise filter assembly when TUS400G-NN-RC or TUS400G-NN-KC


Unit: mm
275 10 92

4-M5 screws, (depth:10mm)


(for mounting)
17
203

75

External power cable inlet


(cable OD of 6 to 12)
zDedicated power cable for noise filter assembly
Dedicated power cable outlet Black L1
White L2
Green G
Approx. 80

Cable length : Approx. 0.7 m


L1 Black
36

L2 White
70 G Green
Approx. 80
152
Weight of noise filter assembly: Approx. 2 kg Weight of power cable: Approx. 0.2 kg

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 11
Pipe mounting (option code: /PS)

155 100 Unit: mm


115 48 70 0.2 2-5.5 holes
(for hood)
56 0.2

27 8
Hood

110
(optional) 2-inch (60.5 OD)
pipe (vertical mounting)
30

203
2-inch (60.5 OD)
288

pipe (horizontal mounting)


151
2-6.6 holes
(for oscillator)

48
F14.ai

Pipe mounting for noize filter assembly 4-M5 screws Unit: mm


(TUS400G-NN-RC..../PS,
TUS400G-NN-KC..../PS)
70
5- 6.5 holes
8

6.5 x 13 hole
Pipe mounting bracket 1
75

2- 5.5 holes
200

Pipe mounting bracket 2 U-bolt


35

2-9 holes
35

M8 nut 2

4-10 holes
15

70
100 (10) (92) (54) 2-inch pipe (vertical
Weight: Approx. 0.7 kg mounting OD 60.5)

Panel mounting (option code: /PA)


+1.1 Unit: mm
1 to 10 (panel thickness) 156 0
Panel mounting hardware 121
+1.1
173 0
138

138
30
60

121
38 80 3.9 185
206
<Panel cutout dimensions> F15.ai

Wall mounting (option code: /W)

100 Unit: mm
2-5.5 holes
700.2
(for hood)
56 0.2
8
27

13
30
60

185

2-6.6 holes
27
15

38 80 3.9 (for oscillator)


3-10 holes 70 0.2 F16.ai

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 12

Wall mounting for noize filter assembly 4-M5 screw Unit: mm


(TUS400G-NN-RC..../W,
TUS400G-NN-KC..../W)

70 5- 6.5 holes

8
6.5 x13 hole

75 Wall mounting bracket


2- 5.5 holes
200
35
35

4-M6 screw
(customers
scope)
4- 10 holes
15

70
100 (10) (92) 13
Weight: Approx. 0.7 kg

Adapter for conduit work (option code: /AFTG, /ANSI)

Nut Packing Unit: mm


Case
Approx. 55

Cable gland
49

Adapter
G1/2 (/AFTG) or 1/2NPT (/ANSI) F12.ai

3. Zero Turbidity Filter Assembly


OUT Unit: mm
4-M4
fixing screws
112.5
44

IN

80
115
121

Vent plug Piping inlet & outlet Rc1/2


22 22
314

Filter

Part No. Filtering size


.8$ P
.() P
10

F17.ai

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 13
Wiring
TB750G Turbidity detector TB750G Turbidity converter
(Terminal: M4) (Terminal: M3)
Power L CONVERTER Dedicated cable (1/2/3 m)
supply *5 N POWER SENSOR
G G G NO
Grounding *1 S1 Contact
NC
RUOHVV L output S1
Serial commu- RX+ COM
N TUS RX-
G U1 U2 nication *3 *4 NO
Grounding *1 (RS-422) TX+ RS-422 S2 Contact
NC
RUOHVV TX- output S2
COM
Power supply SG
cable Ultrasonic transducer G NO
connecting cable FAIL Contact
Noise filter NC
(maximum length: 15 m) output FAIL
assembly *6 (customer wiring) IN1 COM
Contact input IN2 INPUT
TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator *5 A
COM Range
RANGE B
L2 U1 C contact output
L1 U2 Analog output 1 + mA1
(4-20 mA DC) *3 COM
U3 -
S Analog output 2 + mA2 OUTPUT Grounding *1
(4-20 mA DC or - RUOHVV
0-20 mA DC) *3 G
Grounding *2
RUOHVV
(Note) Dotted wiring is external wiring. Use cable with 6 to 12 mm OD for wiring.
 3RZHUWHUPLQDO*RQGHWHFWRUGHWHFWRUFDVHDQGFRQYHUWHUFDVHPXVWEHJURXQGHG JURXQGUHVLVWDQFHRUOHVV 
 ([WHUQDOJURXQGLQJWHUPLQDORIXOWUDVRQLFRVFLOODWRUPXVWEHJURXQGHG JURXQGUHVLVWDQFHRUOHVV 
*3 Use 2-conductor shielded cable for analog output wiring and serial communication wiring.
*4 The wiring configuration is described below in case that RS-232C serial communication is selected.

Serial com- TXD


munication RXD RS-232C
SG
(RS-232C)
G

*5 When option code "/US" is specified, TUS400G should be purchased separately.


When TUS400G is used in system, the power supply to TB750G should be the same as the supply voltage specified in
the MS Code of TUS400G.
*6 For TUS400G-NN-RC, TUS400G-NN-KC. F18.ai

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 14
Enquiry Specifications Sheet for Model TB750G Right Angle Scattered Light Turbidimeter
For enquires on the Yokogawa sampling system, please tick () the appropriate box and write down the relevant
information in the blanks.
1. General Information
Company name;
Contact Person; Department;
Plant name;
Measurement location;
Purpose of use; Indication, Recording, Alarm, Control
Power supply; V AC, Hz

2. Measurement Conditions
(1) Sample water temperature; to , Normally [C]
(2) Sample water pressure; to , Normally [kPa]
(3) Sample water flow rate; to [l/min]
(4) Slurry or contaminations; No, Yes
(5) Components of sample water;
(6) Others;

3. Installation Site
(1) Ambient temperature; approx. [C]
(2) Location; Indoors
(3) Others;

4. Requirements
(1) Measuring range; to NTU
(2) System configuration selection; Pressurized head tank for low turbidity measurement
(recommended if turbidity is 2.0 NTU or less.),
Simple head tank, TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator
Zero turbidity filter(1 m), Zero turbidity filter (0.2 m)
(3) Cable length between converter and detector: 1 m, 2 m, 3 m
(4) Others;

All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
Subject to change without notice.
Catalog Number DOC026.53.00769

Surface Scatter 7 sc Turbidimeter


USER MANUAL

Edition 2 November 2006


HTTC Regional Workshops and
Custom Training
Hach offers world-class hands-on training for laboratory
analysis and online analyzers at regional locations
convenient to you so you can learn how to Be Right
and Stay Right.

Hachs regional training workshops cover topics


relevant to applications in drinking water, wastewater,
and industry. Many classes are even state certified for
6 to 7 contact hours per day.

Visit www.hach.com/training for class descriptions


and locations or call 1-800-227-4224 x6420.

Customized Training Programs at your location


are available with at least 4 weeks advance notice.
Training dates for customized training programs must
be arranged directly through the Hach Technical
Training Center. Custom classes may cover the
analysis topic of your choice including the use of
specific lab or online instrumentation, laboratory
techniques and troubleshooting, or application-specific
testing.

Contact HTTC at 1-800-227-4224 x2344 for pricing of


customized training programs.
Catalog Number DOC026.53.00769

Surface Scatter 7 sc Turbidimeter


USER MANUAL

Edition 2 November 2006

Hach Company, 2006. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. te/kt
Visit us at www.hach.com
Table of Contents

Section 1 Specifications .........................................................................................................5


Section 2 General information ...............................................................................................9
2.1 Safety information ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.1 Use of hazard information .................................................................................................. 9
2.1.2 Precautionary labels .......................................................................................................... 9
2.2 General product information ..................................................................................................... 10
2.2.1 Instrument description ...................................................................................................... 10
2.2.2 Surface Scatter 7 sc High Sample Temperature ............................................................. 13
Section 3 Installation ............................................................................................................ 15
3.1 Basic installation overview ........................................................................................................ 15
3.2 Unpacking the instrument ......................................................................................................... 15
3.3 Mechanical installation .............................................................................................................. 16
3.3.1 Environmental requirements ............................................................................................ 16
3.3.2 Selecting the installation location ..................................................................................... 16
3.3.3 Mounting the SS7 sc or SS7 sc-HST ............................................................................... 17
3.3.4 Installing the optional heat exchanger ............................................................................. 19
3.3.5 Installing the 3-way ball valves ........................................................................................ 20
3.4 Installing a sample line .............................................................................................................. 20
3.5 Connecting hydraulics ............................................................................................................... 21
3.6 Connecting the air purge ........................................................................................................... 24
3.7 Electrical installation ................................................................................................................. 24
3.7.1 Wiring safety information ................................................................................................. 24
3.7.2 Connecting/wiring the SS7 sc or SS7 sc-HST to the sc controller ................................... 24
Section 4 System startup ..................................................................................................... 27
4.1 General operation ..................................................................................................................... 27
4.2 Starting sample flow .................................................................................................................. 27
Section 5 Operation .............................................................................................................. 29
5.1 Sensor setup ............................................................................................................................. 29
5.1.1 Configuring the bubble reject ........................................................................................... 29
5.1.2 Configuring the signal average ........................................................................................ 29
5.2 Sensor data logging .................................................................................................................. 30
5.3 Sensor diagnostics menu .......................................................................................................... 30
5.4 Sensor setup menu ................................................................................................................... 30
5.5 Sensor calibration and verification ............................................................................................ 31
5.5.1 Standardization and calibration ........................................................................................ 31
5.5.2 Calibration ........................................................................................................................ 31
5.5.3 Setting the verification baseline ....................................................................................... 34
5.5.4 Instrument verification ...................................................................................................... 35
5.6 Calibration and verification history ............................................................................................ 36
5.7 Operating the SS7 sc-HST ....................................................................................................... 38
Section 6 Maintenance ..........................................................................................................39
6.1 Scheduled maintenance ........................................................................................................... 39
6.2 Removing a sensor from the system ........................................................................................ 39
6.3 Installing a sensor on the system .............................................................................................. 39
6.3.1 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................... 40
6.4 Unscheduled maintenance ....................................................................................................... 40
6.4.1 Lamp replacement ........................................................................................................... 40
6.4.2 Light source assembly maintenance ................................................................................ 43
6.4.3 Detector assembly replacement ...................................................................................... 44

3
Table of Contents

Section 7 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................47


7.1 Error Codes ...............................................................................................................................47
7.2 Warnings ...................................................................................................................................47
7.3 Event codes ...............................................................................................................................49
7.4 Data log .....................................................................................................................................50
Section 8 Replacement parts and accessories ..................................................................51
8.1 Replacement parts ....................................................................................................................51
8.2 Accessories ...............................................................................................................................51
Section 9 How to order .........................................................................................................53
Section 10 Repair service .....................................................................................................54
Section 11 Limited warranty .................................................................................................55
Section 12 Certification ........................................................................................................57

4
Section 1 Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice

Range 0.019999.9 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU)


5% of reading or 0.1 NTU (whichever is greater) from 0.01 to 2000 NTU;
Accuracy
10% of reading from 2000 to 9999 NTU
Resolution (displayed) 0.01 NTU up to 999.99 NTU; 0.1 NTU from 1000.0 to 9999.9 NTU

Repeatability Better than 1.0% of reading or 0.04 NTU, whichever is greater for each range.

Response time Initial response in 45 seconds

Sample flow required 1.0 to 2.0 L/min (0.3 to 0.5 gal/min) (15 to 30 gal/hr)

Sensor storage
20 to 80 C (4 to 140 F); 95% relative humidity, non-condensing.
temperature
sc100: 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) for one SS7 sc on an sc100; 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) for one
SS7 sc and another smart sensor that consumes less than 5 watts on a single sc100
Operating temperature (provided by sc100). See Figure 1 on page 6.
sc1000: 20 to 55 C (4 to 131 F); 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
0 to 50 C (32122 F);
Sample temperature range HST model0 to 70 C, intermittent 70 to 80 C. (An approved heat exchanger is available to
reduce sample temperature.)
Operating humidity 5 to 95% non-condensing
sc100: 12 VDC 5%, 20 watts maximum
Power requirements sc1000: 100240 V 10 VAC, 50/60 Hz from 75 VA standard to a maximum of 2000 VA (only
when sc analyzers are connected), Category II or 24 VDC (1830 VDC), maximum 75 W
Sample inlet fitting -in. NPT female

Overflow drain fitting 1-in. NPT female

Body drain fitting -in. NPT female

AIr purge fitting -in. quick-connect compression fitting; 050SCFH airflow of clean instrument air

Signal average (filter) time No averaging, 6, 30, 60 and 90 seconds, user selectable. Default is 30 seconds.

Sensor dimensions 64.2 x 67.5 x 19.0 cm (25.3 x 26.6 x 7.5 in.)

Sensor cable length 2 m (6.6 ft); Optional 7.62 m (25 ft) extension cable. Maximum cable length is 9.62 m (31.6 ft).
Cable: 105 C, 300 V, PVC jacket
Sensor cable rating
Wires: 22 AWG, PVC jacket
Mounting options Wall
SS7 sc15.8 kg (34.8 lb);
Shipping weight
SS7 sc-HST18 kg (39.6 lb)
Calibration method Formazin user-prepared primary or wet calibration of the instrument
Standardization plates with approximate values of 100 or 1000 NTU. Unique value is assigned
Verification (dry) method when dry verification is done immediately after calibration and is used with pass/fail criteria for
subsequent verifications.
Mandatory before calibration
Recommended cleaning
Optional before verification
intervals
Mandatory upon verification failure
English (default), German, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, Polish, Korean,
Languages
Chinese, Japanese
Installation environment Indoor

Primary compliance
USEPA 180.1; Hach Method 8195; ASTM D 6698; Standard Methods 2130B
method

5
Specifications

Figure 1 Maximum ambient temperature vs. probe load

Table 1 sc100 controller capacity


Controller operating temperature (C) Power available (watts) Controller capacity
40 25 1 SS7 sc plus 5 watts for other devices
50 16 1 SS7 sc plus 4 watts for other devices
60 7 Out of power range for SS7 sc

6
Specifications

Temp
58

56

54
sc 1000 Ambient T (C)

52

50

48

46

44

42

40

38
20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58

Probe Load (watts)

Figure 2 Maximum ambient temperature vs. probe load

Table 2 sc1000 controller capacity


Controller operating temperature (C) Power available (watts) Controller capacity
40 55 2 SS7 sc plus 15 watts for other devices
50 35 2 SS7 sc plus 11 watts for other devices
55 25 1 SS7 sc plus 13 watts for other devices

Table 3 sc1000 component power consumption


Component Power consumption (watts)
Display module 10
Current output card 2.5 maximum load
Current input card 1.5
Relais card 1
Fieldbus module (Profibus) 2.5
Fieldbus module (Modbus) 0.5

7
Visit us at www.hach.com
Section 2 General information

2.1 Safety information


Please read this entire manual before unpacking, setting up or
operating this equipment. Pay attention to all danger and caution
statements. Failure to do so could result in serious injury to the
operator or damage to the equipment.
To ensure that the protection provided by this equipment is not
impaired, do not use or install this equipment in any manner other
than that specified in this manual.

2.1.1 Use of hazard information

DANGER
Indicates a potentially or imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that may result in
minor or moderate injury.
Important Note: Information that requires special emphasis.
Note: Information that supplements points in the main text.

2.1.2 Precautionary labels


Read all labels and tags attached to the instrument. Personal injury
or damage to the instrument could occur if not observed. A symbol,
if noted on the instrument, will be included with a danger or caution
statement in the manual.

This symbol, if noted on the instrument, references the instruction manual for operation and/or safety information.

Electrical equipment marked with this symbol may not be disposed of in European public disposal systems after 12
August of 2005. In conformity with European local and national regulations (EU Directive 2002/96/EC), European
electrical equipment users must now return old or end-of life equipment to the Producer for disposal at no charge to
the user.
Note: For return for recycling, please contact the equipment producer or supplier for instructions on how to return
end-of-life equipment, producer-supplied electrical accessories and all auxiliary items for proper disposal.

This symbol, when noted on a product enclosure or barrier, indicates that a risk of electrical shock and/or
electrocution exists.

This symbol, if noted on the product, indicates the need for protective eye wear.

This symbol, when noted on the product, identifies the location of the connection for Protective Earth (ground).

This symbol, when noted on the product, identifies the location of a fuse or current limiting device.
This symbol, when noted on the product, identifies a risk of chemical harm and indicates that only individuals
qualified and trained to work with chemicals should handle chemicals or perform maintenance on chemical delivery
systems associated with the equipment.
This symbol, when noted on the product, indicated the presence of devices sensitive to Electro-static Discharge
(ESD) and indicated that care must be taken to prevent damage with the equipment.

9
General information

2.2 General product information


2.2.1 Instrument description
The Surface Scatter 7 sc (SS7 sc) Turbidimeter is a sensitive,
continuous-monitoring instrument designed for measuring turbidity
in fluids. The instrument design is based on the nephelometric
principle, where light scattered by particles suspended in the fluid is
measured to determine the relative amount of particulate matter in
the fluid. It meets all U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(USEPA) design criteria, features an automatic-ranging digital
display and is capable of measuring turbidities from 09999 NTU.
Calibration is based on formazin, the primary turbidity reference
standard adopted by the APHA Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewater and the USEPA. The
instrument consists of a control unit and a sample unit (Figure 3).

DANGER
The SS7 sc and SS7 sc-HST Turbidimeters are not designed
for use with samples that are flammable or explosive in nature.
If any sample solution other than water is used in this product,
test the sample/product compatibility to assure user safety
and proper product performance.
DANGER
The SS7 sc/sc controller platform product configuration is not
intended for installation in hazardous locations. See the
sc controller platform installation control drawing 58600-78 for
approved hazardous location sensors.

Figure 3 SS7 sc Turbidimeter


1 Sample unit 2 Control unit

10
General information

2.2.1.1 Controller
The SS7 sc and SS7 sc-HST operate in conjunction with an
sc controller platform. The controller enclosure houses the keypad,
display, microprocessor board and power supply components.
Operating controls and indicators are on the controller. The
controller is used to program the instrument for turbidity level alarm
set points and to perform diagnostic self-tests and
programming operations.
Sample turbidity is displayed continually by the digital display
during normal operation. Because of the automatic decimal point
positioning, no range selection is needed. Indicators of turbidity
level alarm conditions, certain critical system malfunctions or other
possible malfunctions are also on the controller.
Programmable alarm circuits provide three relay closures, both
normally open and normally closed, for selectable turbidity alarm
level set points. Set points can be programmed by the operator
anywhere within the overall range. The alarm circuits can be
programmed for Alarm, Feeder Control, Event Control, PWM
Control, Frequency Control and Warning. Refer to the sc controller
platform manual for setup and use of these different settings. An
alarm relay can be programmed in the sc controller platform to
control the optional Auto Flush Kit.
The controller is designed to meet NEMA 4X water-tight
requirements. It is constructed of corrosion-proof materials. It is
suitable for indoor installation. Mounting hardware is included with
the sc controller platform to provide the capability to wall mount,
pipe mount and panel mount the controller without affecting the
environmental integrity of the case. Electrical access holes are
sized for -in. conduit.

2.2.1.2 Sample unit


Sample flows through the sample unit (Figure 4) where sample
turbidity is measured. The sample unit enclosure contains all the
electronics for measuring the turbidity. A NEMA 12, corrosion-proof
case protects the optical components and hydraulics from industrial
environments and supplies the measurement signal to the control
unit. The case is designed for wall mounting with external
mounting blocks.
Hydraulic connections to the sample unit are at the bottom of the
enclosure. An air purge fitting is installed in the enclosure bottom.
Air purge is suggested to control condensation inside
the enclosure.

11
General information

Figure 4 SS7 sc components


1 Detector assembly (Cat. No. 71221-00) 5 Bulkhead fitting, 1-in. NPT (Cat. No. 40355-00)
2 Light source assembly (Cat. No. 45004-00) 6 Bulkhead fittings, -in. NPT (Cat. No. 40311-00)
3 To sc controller platform 7 Turbidimeter body (Cat. No. 45002-00)
4 Cord grip (Cat. No. 61287-01)

12
General information

Figure 5 Optical diagram


1 Detector assembly 5 Light beam 9 Instrument drain
2 Scattered light 6 Over-flowing sample 10 Refracted light
3 Lens 7 Overflow drain 11 Turbidimeter body
4 Lamp 8 Sample in 12 Reflected light

2.2.2 Surface Scatter 7 sc High Sample Temperature


The Surface Scatter 7 sc High Sample Temperature Turbidimeter
(SS7 sc-HST) has been designed for high sample temperature. The
basic design and principle of operation are the same as the
standard SS7 sc model. Differences between the standard and
HST models will be noted in this manual where appropriate.

13
General information

Figure 6 SS7 sc-HST components


1 Flow multiplier 8 Cord grip (Cat. No. 61287-01)
2 -in. hose 9 Bulkhead fitting, 1-in. NPT (Cat. No. 40355-00)
3 Threaded disk (Cat. No. 40299-00) with -in. screw 10 Drain trap
(Cat. No. 7858-11)
4 Detector assembly (Cat. No. 71221-00) 11 1-in. NPT gravity drain
5 Vent cover (Cat. No. 40294-00) 12 Bulkhead fittings, -in. NPT (Cat. No. 40311-00)
6 Light source assembly (Cat. No. 45004-00) 13 Turbidimeter body (Cat. No. 45002-00)
7 To sc controller platform

14
Section 3 Installation
DANGER
Only qualified personnel should conduct the tasks described
in this section of the manual. The SS7 sc/sc controller product
configuration is not intended for installation in
hazardous locations.
The tasks described in this section requires individuals to be
technically knowledgeable of the associated dangers. Burns,
shock, eye damage, fire and chemical exposure may occur if this
work is not done by qualified personnel. Always review appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) before working with
chemicals.

3.1 Basic installation overview


1. Unpack the SS7 sc or SS7 sc-HST Turbidimeter (section 3.2).
2. Review the environmental requirements and select the
mounting location (section 3.3.2 on page 16).
3. Mount the sample unit (section 3.3.3 on page 17).
4. Install the optional heat exchanger, if required (section 3.3.4 on
page 19).
5. Install the 3-way ball valve, if required (section 3.3.5 on
page 20).
6. Connect the sample in, body drain and overflow drain
(section 3.5 on page 21).
7. Connect the air purge valve (section 3.6 on page 24).
8. Connect the sample unit to the controller to supply power to the
system (section 3.7.2 on page 24).

3.2 Unpacking the instrument


1. Remove the instrument from the shipping carton.
2. Verify that no visible damage has occurred during shipment. Be
sure the following items are included in the carton:
Sample unit
Instruction manual
Installation kit items (Figure 7)
Contact the manufacturer immediately to report missing or
damaged items.

15
Installation

Figure 7 Installation kit items1


1 Formazin stock solution, 4000 NTU, 500 mL 6 Washer, ID x 1.00 OD (4x)
2 Brush, cylinder, size 2 7 Adapter, barb fitting, NPT to ID hose barb (2x)
3 Calibration cup, SS7 sc 8 Adapter, barb fitting, 1 NPT to 1 ID hose
4 Light source alignment plate 9 Nipple, NPT
5 Wall mounting kit 10 Drain valve
1 See Section 8 Replacement parts and accessories on page 51.

3.3 Mechanical installation


3.3.1 Environmental requirements
The SS7 sc and SS7 sc-HST enclosures are designed for
general-duty, indoor installation. Ambient temperatures within
specifications are allowed, but best performance will result if
temperature does not change rapidly. Do not mount in direct
sunlight. Shield from dripping water.
The controller enclosure is designed to protect the electronics from
typical conditions in water treatment and industrial facilities.

3.3.2 Selecting the installation location


Turbidimeters should always be located as close to the sampling
point as possible. The shorter the distance traveled by the sample
to the turbidimeter, the faster the turbidimeter can respond and
indicate changes in sample turbidity.

Dimensions and other installation information are shown in Figure 8


on page 18, Figure 9 on page 19 and Figure 10 on page 20. The
control and sample unit are designed for wall mounting. The

16
Installation

turbidimeter sensor must be mounted within six feet of the


controller unless an extension cable is used. Maximum cable length
is 9.6 m (31.5 ft).

3.3.3 Mounting the SS7 sc or SS7 sc-HST


1. To ensure proper performance, the sample unit must be level
(Figure 9 on page 19). Use a small level across the top opening
of the turbidimeter body to verify that the instrument does not
slope left-to-right or front-to-back.
2. Use one rubber washer (supplied) at each wall mounting block
between the block and the wall. Mounting blocks are secured to
the four corners of the sample unit to facilitate wall mounting
without affecting the integrity of the enclosure protection.
3. Attach the sample unit to the wall with four customer-supplied
mounting bolts.

17
Installation

Figure 8 SS7 sc and SS7 sc-HST installation drawing


1 Door hinges (4x) 7 Ball valve
2 Flow multiplier (SS7 sc-HST only) 8 -in. NPT nipple
3 Ventilator (2x) 9 1-in. NPTF bulkhead fitting
4 Cable assembly 10 -in. NPTF bulkhead fitting
5 Enclosure door latch (4x) 11 Air purge fitting
6 Drain trap (SS7 sc-HST only)

18
Installation

Figure 9 Instrument leveling


1 Level

3.3.4 Installing the optional heat exchanger


An optional heat exchanger (Cat. No. 48551-00) is available for the
SS7 sc-HST (Figure 10 on page 20). The heat exchanger reduces
sample temperatures that exceed the temperature requirements of
the instrument. It can reduce sample temperatures of up to 100 C
but is not suitable for steam or super-heated water. A source of
cooling water is required. The heat exchanger is made of 316
stainless steel and has MNPT pipe connections. The large
plumbing connections help eliminate clogging.
Allow adequate space below and to the right (latch) side of the
sample unit to make hydraulic connections.
See Figure 10 on page 20 for installation dimensions.
See Figure 12 on page 22 for heat exchanger connections.

19
Installation

Figure 10 Heat exchanger dimensions

3.3.5 Installing the 3-way ball valves


CAUTION
Installation should be performed by qualified technical
personnel to ensure adherence to all applicable electrical and
plumbing codes.
Refer to the Auto Flush Kit Instruction Sheet (Cat. No. 46692-88)
for complete installation instructions.

3.4 Installing a sample line


Sample lines should be a diameter that is appropriate for the
sample type. Choose a line size that minimizes lag time, but also
minimizes plugging with solids.
Route the sample line as directly as possible.
Using long or large diameter sample lines will result in a
significant lag time between actual process conditions and
instrument measurements.
When larger diameter sample lines or long distances are
unavoidable, increase flow to the instrument and bypass
excess flow to the drain or back to process.
Install sample line taps into larger process pipes to minimize
the chances of ingesting sediment from the pipe-line bottom or
air bubbles from the top. A tap projecting into the center of the
pipe is ideal. Figure 11 shows both good and poor methods of
installing a sample tap.

20
Installation

Figure 11 Sampling techniques


1 Poor 5 Sediment (typical)
2 Sampling line to sample unit 6 Good
3 Sample flow 7 Best
4 Air (typical)

3.5 Connecting hydraulics


Note: When connecting the hydraulics to the bottom of the unit, hold the
-in. bulkhead adapters on the inside of the enclosure with the door open.

The sample in, body drain and overflow drain are connected to the
instrument as shown in Figure 5 on page 13. The sample inlet port
is fitted with a NPT female fitting with ID hose barb adapter
fitting. A ball valve is supplied with the instrument to drain the
turbidimeter body. Hose barb adapter fittings for sample in and both
drain fittings are also supplied.
A Bubble Trap/Head Regulator (Cat. No. 46680-00) is
recommended if the sample cannot be delivered bubble-free to the
analyzer. The device may also be used as to dampen fluctuations in
flow due to pulses from a pump and/or sample pressure.
Using the Bubble Trap/Head Regulator will increase response time
to changes in sample concentration. The increase in response time
may vary from 12 minutes at 2 L/min. For fastest response time,
use the highest flow practical for sample conditions. Higher flows
decrease the effectiveness of bubble removal. The need for fast
response time and bubble removal must be balanced for
optimum performance.
Install the Bubble Trap/Head Regulator so the overflow is at least
five inches above the top of the sample unit enclosure (Figure 12
on page 22). However, installation height can vary based on local
sample conditions and flow requirements. See the installation
instructions supplied with the Bubble Trap/Head Regulator for
more information.

21
Installation

Figure 12 SS7 sc-HST plumbing diagram


1 Optional items 14 Sample unit
2 Bubble trap 15 sc100
3 3-way ball valve (Auto Flush Kit) 16 Customer supplied power on/off switch box (NEMA 4X)
required for agency compliance
4 Cooling water to drain 17 Power in for sc controller platform
5 Cooling water out 18 -in. NPT adapter (supplied)
6 Flow control valve 19 Drain Trap (Customer-supplied)
7 Sample in 20 1-in. NPT adapter (supplied)
8 Sample bypass during flush cycle 21 To drain
9 Cooling water in 22 -in. air purge fitting (50 SCFH instrument air max)
10 Heat exchanger 23 Ball valve (supplied)
11 Electrical box connection 24 -in. NPT nipple (supplied)
12 127 mm (5 in.) minimum 25 Customer supplied hose to drain
13 Customer supplied air for flow multiplier

A Sample during normal operation D Cooling water during auto flush


B Sample bypass during auto flush E Electrical
C Cooling water in normal operation F Drain

22
Installation

Figure 13 SS7 sc plumbing diagram


1 Sample in 9 Power in for the sc controller platform
2 Flow control valve (recommended) 10 -in. NPT nipple (supplied)
3 -in.NPT x -in. ID Hose Adapter 11 Ball valve (supplied)
(supplied with bubble trap)
4 Bubble trap (optional) 12 -in. air purge fitting (50 SCFH instrument air max)
5 127 mm (5 in.) minimum 13 1-in. NPT nipple (supplied)
6 Sample unit 14 -in. NPT nipple (supplied)
7 sc100 (shown; SS7 sc is also compatible with sc1000) 15 To drain
8 Customer supplied power on/off switch box (NEMA 4X) 16 -in. ID hose (customer supplied)
required for agency compliance

23
Installation

3.6 Connecting the air purge


Air purge helps control condensation and corrosive vapors within
the sample unit and is recommended. Use dry instrument air only.
See Figure 12 and Figure 13 for installation details.

3.7 Electrical installation


3.7.1 Wiring safety information
When making any wiring connections to the instrument, the
following warnings and notes must be adhered to, as well as, any
warnings and notes found throughout the individual installation
sections. For more safety information refer to section 2.1 on
page 9.

DANGER
Always disconnect power to the sc controller when making
electrical connections.

3.7.1.1 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) considerations


Important Note: To minimize hazards and ESD risks, maintenance
procedures not requiring power to the analyzer should be
performed with power removed.

Delicate internal electronic components can be damaged by static


electricity, resulting in degraded instrument performance or
eventual failure.
The manufacturer recommends taking the following steps to
prevent ESD damage to your instrument:
Before touching any instrument electronic components (such
as printed circuit cards and the components on them)
discharge static electricity by touching an earth-grounded metal
surface such as the chassis of an instrument or a metal conduit
or pipe.
To avoid static electricity buildup and to keep it discharged,
wear a wrist strap connected by a wire to earth ground.
To reduce static build-up, avoid excessive movement.
Transport static-sensitive components in anti-static containers
or packaging.
Handle all static-sensitive components in a static-safe area.
If possible, use anti-static floor pads and work bench pads.

3.7.2 Connecting/wiring the SS7 sc or SS7 sc-HST to the sc controller

3.7.2.1 Attaching the SS7 sc with a quick-connect fitting


The SS7 sc/SS7 sc-HST cable is supplied with a keyed
quick-connect fitting for easy attachment to the controller
(Figure 14). Retain the connector cap to seal the connector opening
in case the cable must be removed. The original six-foot cable may
be extended by a maximum of 9.6 m (31.2 ft), see Replacement
parts and accessories on page 51.

24
Installation

Figure 14 Attaching the SS7 sc/SS7 sc-HST using the quick-connect fitting

3.7.2.2 Hard-wiring the SS7 sc to the sc100 controller


Important Note: Refer to the sc100 or sc1000 controller manual for
specific wiring requirements.

1. Disconnect power to the controller if powered.


2. Open the controller cover.
3. Disconnect and remove the existing wires between the
quick-connect and terminal strip J5 (Figure 15).
4. Remove the quick-connect fitting and wires and install the
threaded plug on the opening to maintain the
environmental rating.
5. Cut the connector from the SS7 sc cable.
6. Strip the insulation on the cable back 1-inch. Strip -in. of each
individual wire end.
7. Pass the cable through conduit and a conduit hub or a strain
relief fitting (Cat. No. 16664-00) and an available access hole in
the controller enclosure. Tighten the fitting.
8. Use of strain relief fitting other than Cat. No. 16664-00 may
result in a hazard. Use only the recommended strain
relief fitting to assure the continued NEMA 4X enclosure rating.
9. Reinstall the plug on the sensor access opening to maintain the
environmental rating.
10. Wire as shown in Table 4 and Figure 15.
11. Close and secure the cover.

25
Installation

Table 4 Wiring the SS7 sc at terminal block J5


Terminal number Terminal designation Wire color
1 Data (+) Blue
2 Data () White
3 Service request No connection
4 +12 V dc Brown
5 Circuit common Black
6 Shield Shield (gray wire in existing quick disconnect fitting)

Figure 15 Hard-wiring the SS7 sc


1 From SS7 sc 2 Disconnect power

26
Section 4 System startup

4.1 General operation


1. Plug the SS7 sc/SS7 sc-HST into the unpowered controller by
aligning the orientation tab on the cable connector with the
channel in the controller connector.
2. Push in and turn the threaded collar to secure the connection.
Tug gently to check the connection.
3. After all plumbing and electrical connections have been
completed and checked, supply power to the system.
4. Ensure the sample unit door is securely latched when power is
applied, since dark readings are measured at this time. If power
is applied while the door is open, cycle the power with the door
closed. The dark readings are measured again one hour after
the power-up.
5. The first time a controller is powered up, a language selection
menu will appear. Select the correct language from the
displayed options.
6. Following language selection and upon power-up, the controller
will search for connected sensors. The display will show the
main measurement screen.

4.2 Starting sample flow


1. Start sample flow through the instrument by opening the
sample supply valve.
2. Allow the turbidimeter to run long enough for the tubing and
body to become completely wetted and the reading on the
display to stabilize. One to two hours or longer may be required
initially for complete stabilization.
3. Allow measurements to become stable through adequate
conditioning before completing instrument settings or
performing calibrations.

27
Visit us at www.hach.com
Section 5 Operation

5.1 Sensor setup


When a sensor is initially installed, the sensor name will be
displayed. To change the sensor name refer to the
following instructions:
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select CONFIGURE and confirm.
4. Select EDIT NAME and edit the name. Confirm or cancel to
return to the Sensor Setup menu

5.1.1 Configuring the bubble reject


Bubble Reject eliminates high measurements that are likely due to
air trapped in the sample.
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. Highlight the appropriate sensor if more than one sensor is
attached and confirm.
3. Select CONFIGURE and confirm.
4. Select BUBBLE REJECT and confirm.
5. Select YES or NO and confirm.
When NO is selected, all measurements within the Signal
Average window will be averaged to determine the
measured value.
Choosing YES eliminates a percentage of the high values
and averages the remaining values to determine the
measured value.

5.1.2 Configuring the signal average


The Signal Average function creates a running average of the
previous 6, 30, 60 or 90 seconds or no averaging, depending on the
selected signal average.
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. Highlight the appropriate sensor if more than one sensor is
attached and confirm.
3. Select CONFIGURE and confirm.
4. Select SIGNAL AVG and confirm.
5. Select the signal average time interval and confirm.

29
Operation

5.2 Sensor data logging


The controller provides two data logs (one for each sensor) and two
event logs (one for each sensor). The data logs store the
measurement data at selected intervals. The event log stores a
variety of events that occur on the devices such as configuration
changes, alarms and warning conditions. The data logs are stored
in a packed binary format and the event logs are stored in a CSV
format. The logs can be downloaded through the digital network
port, service port or the IrDA port. DataCom (Cat. No. 59256-00 or
download from www.hach.com) is needed for downloading logs to a
computer. If the datalogging frequency is set to 15 minute intervals,
the instrument can continue to store data for approximately
six months.
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. Highlight the appropriate sensor if more than one sensor is
attached and confirm.
3. Select CONFIGURE and confirm.
4. Select the datalog interval (5 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute,
2 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes
or 4 hours). Confirm.

5.3 Sensor diagnostics menu


SELECT SENSOR
ERROR LIST See section 7.1 on page 47.
WARNING LIST See section 7.2 on page 47.

5.4 Sensor setup menu


SELECT SENSOR (if more than one sensor is attached)

CALIBRATE
PERFORM CAL Calibration using 4000 NTU stock solution
VERIFICATION Perform a verification, set the pass/fail criteria and view the verification history.
0 ELECTRONICS Zero electronics
View the last 12 entered calibrations. Confirm to move to the next history entry. See section 5.6
CAL HISTORY
on page 36 for more information.
CONFIGURE
BUBBLE REJECT Choose Yes or No to enable/disable bubble reject. Default: Yes
Choose no averaging or specify the amount of time for signal averaging. Available options are:
SIGNAL AVG
no averaging, 6 sec., 30 sec., 60 sec. or 90 sec. Default is 30 seconds.
Select the appropriate measurement units to display. Choose from mg/L, NTU, FTU and NO
MEAS UNITS
UNITS. Default: NTU
Enter up to a 12-digit name in any combination of symbols and alpha or numeric characters.
EDIT NAME Confirm when the entry is complete. The name will be displayed on the status line above the
measurement value on the main display. Default is SS7.
SET RESOLUTION Set the number of significant digits to display. Default is one significant digit.
Choose the amount of time between saving data points to the data log. Default: 15 min.;
DATALOG INTRVL Options: 5 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes,
30 minutes, 60 minutes or 4 hours.

30
Operation

5.4 Sensor setup menu (continued)


DIAG/TEST
INST STATUS Displays the software and hardware versions.
SERIAL NUMBER Displays the serial number of the sensor.
INT TEMP Displays the internal temperature of the sensor electronics in C.
DEFAULT SETUP Restores the sensor factory default settings. Calibration is not affected.
POWER CHECK Displays the electrical statistics for the sensor.
Allows SS7 sc to be run in normal or service mode. Analog outputs can be in ACTIVE, HOLD or
SERVICE MODE
TRANSFER mode. Data logging is disabled. Protected by MAINTENANCE password.
SERVICE DIAG Accessible with service password only.

5.5 Sensor calibration and verification


5.5.1 Standardization and calibration

DANGER
To become familiar with handling precautions, dangers and
emergency procedures, always review the Material Safety Data
Sheets prior to handling containers, reservoirs and delivery
systems that contain chemical reagents and standards.
Protective eye wear is always recommended when contact
with chemicals is possible.
Note: Due to the ease with which the calibration cylinder method
calibration can be performed, better accuracy can be maintained by
performing a calibration at monthly intervals instead of the standardization
check. Periodic calibration with a formazin primary standard is
recommended for best absolute accuracy.

5.5.2 Calibration
The manufacturer recommends calibrating the Surface Scatter 7 sc
instrument at least every three months or any time the light source
is replaced or adjusted. If calibration is performed with a formazin
standard, refer to section 5.5.2.1 on page 32.
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select CALIBRATE and confirm.
4. Select PERFORM CAL and confirm. Select the available
Output Mode (Active, Hold or Transfer) and confirm.
5. Enter the STD VALUE and confirm. Confirm to continue.
6. Follow the display prompt and place standard into the
calibration cup. Close the sensor door and confirm to continue.
7. The TURB value displayed is the standard value determined
using the gain from the previous calibration. Confirm to accept
and continue with the calibration.

31
Operation

8. If no selection is made for a set period of time, the screen will


prompt to remix the standard to avoid a change in the value of
the standard.
a. Open the SS7 sc and remix the standard.
b. Close the door and confirm to continue.
9. Confirm to calibrate. When the calibration is completed
successfully, confirm to accept the calibration.
10. Enter the initials of the user performing the calibration
and confirm.
Note: After confirmation of return to measurement mode, the instrument
will equilibrate for 2 minutes before the output mode changes. Instrument
measurements will show on the display, but the value will flash and a OUT
MODE WARN warning will display until the 2-minute equilibration period
is complete.

5.5.2.1 Calibration cylinder method


A calibration cylinder and a 500-mL bottle of 4000 NTU formazin
primary standard solution are included for convenient calibration of
the SS7 sc. After the formazin standard is added to the cylinder, the
instrument is set to the value of the standard.
1. Prepare the formazin standard solution at the desired NTU
value. The 4000-NTU standard supplied with the instrument
can be used at full strength and only requires mixing (by
inverting the bottle repeatedly). If a dilution of the 4000-NTU
standard is desired, the manufacturer recommends it be no
lower than 300 NTU. Dilutions must be made just prior to use.
Dilute formazin solutions are unstable and should be discarded
when calibration is complete. Use filtered sample or
demineralized water for dilution.
2. Turn off sample flow to the instrument and drain the
turbidimeter body. Insert the calibration cylinder into the top of
the body (Figure 16 on page 33).
a. Select the PERFORM CAL menu entry and confirm.
b. Select the Active, Hold or Transfer output mode
and confirm.
c. Edit the standard value and confirm.
3. Follow the display prompts and pour the formazin standard
solution into the cylinder, allowing it to overflow. Only allow the
solution to stand long enough to allow bubbles on or near the
surface to dissipate.
4. Close the sample unit door tightly. Confirm to continue.
5. The TURB value displayed is the standard value determined
using the gain from the previous calibration. Confirm to accept
and continue with the calibration.
6. If no selection is made for a set period of time, the screen will
prompt to remix the standard to avoid a change in the value of
the standard.
a. Open the SS7 sc and remix the standard.
b. Close the door and confirm to continue.

32
Operation

7. Confirm to calibrate. When the calibration is completed


successfully, the display will show GOOD CAL! and the new
calibration gain value. Confirm to accept the calibration.
8. Follow the prompt and enter the initials of the user performing
the calibration. Confirm.
9. The controller will prompt for NEW BASELINE. Confirm to
establish a new baseline or press BACK to exit.
10. Remove the calibration cylinder from the body. The instrument
is now calibrated.
11. Close the drain valve and restore the sample flow. If no
verification is done, the display will prompt to return to
measurement mode. Confirm to continue measurements.

Figure 16 Installing the calibration cylinder


1 Detector assembly 3 Light source assembly
2 Calibration cylinder 4 Turbidimeter body

5.5.2.2 Comparison method


The comparison method transfers the calibration of a laboratory
instrument to the on-line instrument and the practice is approved by
the EPA and Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater. Calibration by comparison should not be used if
sample turbidity is less than 2 NTU.
Before performing this method, make sure the laboratory
turbidimeter used is calibrated properly with primary turbidity
standards according to manufacturer directions. Sample cells for
the laboratory instrument must be free from dirt, fingerprints and
scratches. For greater convenience, the laboratory instrument
should be moved to a location close to the on-line unit(s) to be

33
Operation

calibrated. Take a grab sample from the on-line instrument drain or


sample inlet line and immediately measure its turbidity in the
laboratory instrument. If the on-line instrument reading is off by
more than 5%, use the calibration procedure detailed in
section 5.5.2 on page 31 to input the new standard value. If this
calibration method is used, it is not necessary to use the
calibration cylinder.

5.5.2.3 Calibration failure


If gain criteria for the calibration are not met, the screen will display
BAD CAL! Confirm to repeat the calibration.

5.5.3 Setting the verification baseline


When the SS7 sc has been successfully calibrated, a baseline can
be determined using standardization plates. The standardization
plates are composed of opaque backing, a plate glass covering and
a center filling of Gelex, a stable secondary turbidity standard. The
standardization plates are not calibrated when shipped from the
factory. The value of the plate is determined after calibration and
stored internally in the SS7 sc. The calibration can be verified later
by reading the plate value and comparing it to the value
following calibration.
Important Note: Always verify calibration with the same
standardization plate that was used to establish the baseline. The
manufacturer recommends assigning a serial number (up to 4
characters) to each plate. The serial number can be marked on the
back of the plate.

1. Perform a calibration (section 5.5.2).


2. Confirm to perform a baseline using a standardization plate.
3. The serial number for the last standardization plate used will
appear on the display. Confirm to accept or enter the serial
number of the plate to be used and confirm.
4. Follow the controller prompts:
a. Remove the calibration cylinder and wipe off the top of the
sample cylinder.
b. Place the standardization plate on top of the sample
cylinder so that the light beam strikes the center of the
plate. Note the orientation of the plate and always place it
in the same position when using it to check standardization.
c. Close the door to eliminate stray light. Confirm to continue.
5. When the measured value becomes stable, confirm to establish
an expected value for the plate.
Note: Future measured values will be compared to the stored
expected value. If the established PASS criteria are not met, a new
calibration should be performed.

34
Operation

6. Open the SS7 sc to remove the plate. Restart the sample flow
and close the door. Confirm to return the instrument to
measurement mode.
Note: After confirmation of return to measurement mode, the instrument
will equilibrate for 2 minutes before the output mode changes. Instrument
measurements will show on the display, but the value will flash and a OUT
MODE WARN warning will display until the 2-minute equilibration period
is complete.

5.5.4 Instrument verification


Instrument verification is intended as a simple check to ensure
SS7 sc functionality between calibrations. Verifications should be
performed on a monthly basis using a manufacturer-provided
standardization plate.
A verification directly after calibration is used to establish the
baseline. Any verification afterwards, until the next calibration, that
uses the same verification standard will reference the recorded
value from the baseline verification as the expected value. In
order for the verification to pass, the measured value should be
within the limits set by the Pass/Fail Criteria of the baseline value.
Before starting the verification, read section 5.5.3.
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select CALIBRATE and confirm.
4. Select VERIFICATION and confirm.
5. Select PERFORM VER and confirm.
6. The serial number on the standardization plate to be used for
verification should match the serial number listed on the VALID
SN screen. Confirm to accept the displayed serial number.
Important Note: If the serial numbers do not match, a verification
baseline (section 5.5.3) must be established before verification can
be performed.

7. Select the available Output Mode (Active, Hold or Transfer)


from the list box and confirm.
8. Position the plate on top of the sample cylinder:
a. Shut down the sample flow and wipe off the top of the
sample cylinder.
b. Place the standardization plate on top of the sample
cylinder so that the light beam strikes the center of the
plate. Note the orientation of the plate and always place it
in the same position when using it to check standardization.
c. Close the door to eliminate stray light. Confirm to continue.

35
Operation

9. When the displayed turbidity value is stable, confirm to select


the measured reading. After confirming the reading:
GOOD VER! will be displayed if the verification is good,
with an option to continue or to abort. Confirm to continue.
Enter the operator initials and confirm.
BAD VER! will be displayed if the verification is bad, with an
option to repeat or exit. To repeat the verification, confirm to
return to the VALID SN screen (step 6).
10. Open the SS7 sc to remove the plate. Restart the sample flow
and close the door. Confirm to return the instrument to
measurement mode.
Note: After confirmation of return to measurement mode, the instrument
will equilibrate for 2 minutes before the output mode changes. Instrument
measurements will show on the display, but the value will flash and a OUT
MODE WARN warning will display until the 2-minute equilibration period
is complete.

5.5.4.1 Care of standardization plates


Clean standardization plates to remove fingerprints, dust and dirt.
Clean plates using water and dry with a clean,
lint-free cloth.
Do not use abrasive cleaners or cleaning solvents.
Store the plates in a clean, dry place to prevent scratching or
damage. Replace the plates if they become scratched or broken.

5.6 Calibration and verification history


The calibration and verification history logs contain information on
the last 12 calibrations and the last 12 verifications. The calibration
history log shows the gain value, the time and date of the
calibration and the initials of the operator performing verification.
Note: Restoring default settings from the DIAG/TEST menu will return the
turbidimeter to its non calibration state (gain = 1.0) but it will not remove the
previous calibration history from memory.

The calibration history log is accessed from the Calibrate menu.


The verification history log is accessed from the Verification menu
(a submenu of the Calibrate menu).
Each verification history entry shows the serial number of the
verification device, the value of the verification standard, the time
and date of the verification and the initials of the operator
performing the verification.
To view calibration history:
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select CALIBRATE and confirm.
4. Select CAL HISTORY and confirm. The most recent calibration
will be displayed on the screen.

36
Operation

5. Confirm to view the previous calibrations. After scrolling


through all 12 histories, the display will return to the calibration
menu level.
To view verification history:
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select CALIBRATE and confirm.
4. Select VERIFICATION and confirm.
5. Select VER HISTORY and confirm. The most recent
verification will be displayed on the screen.
6. Confirm to view previous verifications. After scrolling through all
12 histories, the display will return to the calibration menu level.
To view baseline history:
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select CALIBRATE and confirm.
4. Select VERIFICATION and confirm.
5. Select BASELINE HIST and confirm. The most recent baseline,
including the Gelex plate serial number and expected value,
will be displayed on the screen.
6. Confirm to view previous verifications. After scrolling through all
12 histories, the display will return to the calibration menu level.
When the instrument is received from the factory, there will be one
entry for the calibration and verification history information. As
calibrations and verifications are performed, the history information
will grow until there are 12 entries.
When the log is full, the newest entry is stored and the oldest entry
in the log is deleted.

37
Operation

5.7 Operating the SS7 sc-HST


If condensation forms in the enclosure, increase the air
pressure (and flow) by increasing the air pressure setting of the
pressure regulator for the flow multiplier.
Make sure the bubble trap is working. Bubbles on the surface
of the liquid will cause incorrect readings.
If deposits accumulate inside the unit, wash the inside with
warm water spray.
The vent cover at the top of the turbidimeter body (Figure 6 on
page 14, item 5) can be removed for cleaning if necessary.
Loosen the light source before removing the cover. Check the
alignment of the light after reinstalling the cover using the new
alignment plate included in the kit (section 6.4.1 on page 40).
Make sure the cover sits flat on top of the slant tube
when installed.
Calibrate the instrument using the calibration cup and formazin
as described in section 5.5.2 on page 31.
Note: Do not operate the instrument without the cover. Do not operate the
instrument if the flow multiplier is not working.

38
Section 6 Maintenance
DANGER
Only qualified personnel should conduct the tasks described
in this section of the manual.
The nature of tasks described in this section of the manual requires
individuals to be technically knowledgeable of the associated
dangers. Burns, shock, eye damage, fire and chemical exposure
may occur if this work is not done by qualified personnel. Always
review appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) before
working with chemicals.

6.1 Scheduled maintenance


Scheduled periodic maintenance requirements of the SS7 sc
Turbidimeter are minimal. Standardization checks and calibration
are the primary requirements. Several other activities should be
performed on a regular basis, but the schedule for these may
depend on the installation and sample.

6.2 Removing a sensor from the system


Prior to physically removing a sensor from the system, record all
user defined settings such as relays, signal averaging, etc. Turn off
power to the sc controller platform and SS7 sc, then disconnect the
sensor at the controller.

6.3 Installing a sensor on the system


To return the system to normal operation following a software
upgrade or sensor repair, perform the following procedure:
1. Detach all sensors from the sc controller platform.
2. From the Main Menu, press the DOWN key to highlight
TEST/MAINT and confirm.
3. Use the DOWN key to scroll to SCAN SENSORS and confirm.
4. Remove attached sensors by selecting the corresponding serial
number or select All.
5. Power down the sc controller platform, then attach the
sensor(s) to be used.
Note: Clean sensors before installing on the system.

6. Supply power to the sc controller. The system will


initialize automatically.

39
Maintenance

6.3.1 Cleaning
Sediment may collect in the turbidimeter body and on the overflow
weir. Algae may also form. The turbidimeter body should be drained
and flushedon a schedule determined by visual inspectionto
remove accumulated sediment. Algae can be removed with a large
bottle brush and a sterilizing solution such as dilute chlorine bleach.
Samples containing large amounts of settleable solids may cause
frequent accumulation of solids in the turbidimeter body. To
minimize cleaning frequency, the analyzer can be operated with the
drain ball valve partially or completely open and the sample flow
increased accordingly to provide continuous flushing of solids from
the turbidimeter body. If the drain is left partially open, the ball valve
supplied should be replaced with a valve designed for flow control.
Operating the ball valve in a partially open position may damage
the valve or cause plugging of the drain line.
When used in conjunction with the Auto-flush Kit (section 8.2 on
page 51), the flush cycle feature may be used to operate a solenoid
valve to divert sample and provide a periodic clear water flush.
The inside enclosure of the SS7 sc can be washed down with warm
water spray if deposits accumulate inside the unit. The vent cover
at the top of the SS7 sc-HST turbidimeter body can also be
removed for cleaning as necessary.
Note: Loosen the light source to remove or install the vent cover on the
SS7 sc-HST. Use the alignment plate included in the unit to check the
alignment of the light after installing the cover. Make sure the cover sits flat
on top of the slant tube when installed.

6.4 Unscheduled maintenance


Important Note: Disconnect power to the instrument before
removing any cover. To reduce the possibility of ESD damage to
the equipment, avoid contact with electrical components. All
replacement components must meet or exceed original equipment
specifications to maintain applicable safety standards and
certifications and ensure proper instrument performance.

6.4.1 Lamp replacement


The lamp is located in the light source assembly block in the
sample unit. It comes with attached leads terminated in a two-pin
connector. The lamp is replaced as follows:
1. Set the power switch in the control unit to off. Disconnect power
to the sc controller.
2. Open the sample unit door. Disconnect the lamp cable at
the connector.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the lamp source assembly
to the back plate. Remove the lamp source assembly
(Figure 17).
4. Remove the four screws securing the end plate to the light
source assembly housing. Remove the end plate with gasket,
the notched spacer and the lamp.

40
Maintenance

5. Wipe the replacement lamp clean to remove any dust and


fingerprints. Fingerprints left on the glass bulb can permanently
damage the lamp. Install the lamp in the light source block.
6. Slide the notched spacer over the lamp cable with the notch
away from the lamp base. Route the lamp cable through the
notches. Install the lamp and spacer into the end of the housing
with the spacer notch aligned with the notch in the housing.
7. Install the end plate using the two screws removed in step 3.
8. Install the assembled light source assembly in the sample unit
using the two screws removed in step 2. Connect the lamp
cable connector.
9. Using the alignment template supplied with the turbidimeter,
verify that the light source assembly is positioned properly
as follows:
a. Be sure the lamp door is closed tightly. Apply power to the
controller. Wait for the display to show the current turbidity
reading before continuing.
b. Install the calibration cylinder in the top of the turbidimeter
body (Figure 16 on page 33).
c. Place the alignment template on top of the calibration
cylinder with the guide pin down and against the flat notch
on the inside of the cylinder (Figure 18). The back edge of
the template should be against the sample unit back plate.
d. Check the position of the lamp image on the alignment
template surface. It should fall on the target area so the
center of the beam is centered between the lines
(Figure 18).
e. If the light source assembly needs adjustment, loosen the
two mounting screws enough to adjust the position of the
lamp image. Tighten when aligned properly.
10. Calibrate the instrument as described in section 5.5 on
page 31.

41
Maintenance

Figure 17 Lamp replacement


1 Lamp cable 6 Spacer
2 End plate 7 Housing
3 Notched spacer 8 Light source assembly
4 Back plate 9 Lamp
5 Base

42
Maintenance

Figure 18 Alignment details


1 Flat notch 6 Light source assembly
2 Alignment template 7 Mounting screws
3 Calibration cylinder 8 Target area
4 Turbidimeter body 9 Adjust light source to align light beam in target area
5 Install calibration cylinder and alignment template

6.4.2 Light source assembly maintenance


No maintenance of the light source assembly is normally necessary
beyond changing the lamp. The lamp, several lenses, apertures
and other components are located in the light source housing. If
these components are removed for any reason, they must be
installed exactly as they were removed. Placing any of the
components in the wrong position or orientation can cause
measurement errors and lack of alignment. Figure 19 illustrates the
correct installation and orientation of the components. If difficulty is
experienced in reassembly, contact Technical Support for
assistance. Refer to Section 9 on page 53.

43
Maintenance

Figure 19 Light source assembly


1 Shield assembly (Cat. No. 45299-00) 10 Spacer, light source (Cat. No. 45039-00)
2 Wavy washer (2x) (Cat. No. 45042-00) 11 Gasket (Cat. No. 45033-00)
3 Medium aperture (Cat. No. 45044-00) 12 End plate (Cat. No. 45032-00)
4 Large aperture (Cat. No. 45045-00) 13 Body (Cat. No. 45027-00)
5 Retaining ring (Cat. No. 45041-00) 14 Large spacer (Cat. No. 45037-00)
6 Lens holder (Cat. No. 45040-00) 15 Small lens (Cat. No. 31465-00)
7 Small aperture (Cat. No. 45043-00) 16 Small spacer (4x) (Cat. No. 45038-00)
8 Large lens (2x) (Cat. No. 44114-00) 17 Screws (8x) (Cat. No. 5584-11)
9 Medium spacer (Cat. No. 45036-00)

6.4.3 Detector assembly replacement


The detector assembly, listed as a replacement item in section 8.1
on page 51, is a sealed unit that is replaced entirely (Figure 20).
1. Write down the controller setup for all analog outputs and/or
relays used with the SS7 sc.
2. Turn off the controller and disconnect it from power.
3. Disconnect the detector cable from the controller. Unscrew the
nut (Figure 20, item 8) and remove it from the disconnected
detector cable.
4. Open the SS7 sc enclosure door. Using a blunt object (-inch
diameter or less, e. g. the blunt end of a pen) push on the
bushing from the inside of the enclosure until it is free of the
strain relief and clamping fingers. Remove the grommet from
the detector cable.
5. Pull the detector cable through the strain relief. Open the cable
clamps (Figure 20, item 3) and remove the cable.

44
Maintenance

6. Remove the two screws securing the detector assembly to the


wall of the SS7 sc enclosure. Remove the complete
detector assembly (Figure 20, item 1).
7. Use the two screws removed in step 6 to secure the new
detector to the wall of the SS7 sc enclosure. Secure the cable
with the cable clamps.
8. Thread the detector cable through the strain relief. Replace the
split grommet (note the orientation in Figure 20) onto the
detector cable. At the clamping fingers, rotate the grommet
counter-clockwise while pushing the grommet back into place
in the strain relief.
9. Thread the nut onto the detector cable and secure onto the
strain relief.
10. Close the SS7 sc enclosure door. Attach the detector cable to
the controller.
11. Apply power to the controller and turn it on. The controller will
prompt the user that the SS7 cannot be found. The old detector
serial number will be displayed.
12. Use the arrow keys to select the old detector serial number and
remove it. The controller will then install the new
detector assembly.
13. Establish the setup for all analog outputs and/or relays to be
used with the SS7 sc. Use the settings recorded in step 1.
14. Calibrate the instrument (section 5.5 on page 31).

45
Maintenance

Figure 20 Detector assembly replacement


1 Detector assembly (Cat. No. 71221-00) 6 Clamping fingers
2 Light source assembly power connector 7 Bushing
3 Cable clamp 8 Nut
4 Blunt object 9 Detector assembly cable
5 Strain relief

46
Section 7 Troubleshooting

7.1 Error Codes


Errors are indicated by a flashing measurement value and a
flashing warning icon. Errors are defined in Table 5.
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR DIAG and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select ERROR LIST and confirm. All active errors will display.

Table 5 Error codes


DIsplayed error Definition
The ADC has failed. Try cycling power. If cycling power does not work, replace the detector
ADC FAIL
assembly (Cat. No. 71221-00).
LAMP FAIL The light source has failed. See section 6.4.1 on page 40 for lamp replacement instructions.
FLASH FAIL Datalog and event log will not work.

7.2 Warnings
Warnings are indicated by a flashing measurement value and a
flashing warning icon. Warnings are defined in Table 6.
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR DIAG and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select WARNING LIST and confirm. All active warnings
will display.
Table 6 Warning Codes
Warning
Displayed Warning Definition/Resolution
Number
Dark reading detects too much light. Close the SS7 sc enclosure and perform
1 DARK WARNING
ZERO ELECTRONICS (under the CALIBRATION menu).
Sensor head internal temperature is higher than specified. Contact the
2 TEMP WARNING
Technical Support Department. (> 70 C)
Sensor data log is full. No additional data will be logged until sensor log is
3 DATA LOG FULL
downloaded into controller memory.
Sensor data log is full. No additional data will be logged until sensor log is
4 EVENT LOG FULL
downloaded into controller memory.
5 5 VOLT WARN Monitored voltage is outside the range of 4.55.5 V.
Monitored instrument input voltage from controller platform is outside the
range of 9.0814.3 V. Check cables. Make sure only one SS7 sc is connected
6 VIN WARN
to controller and if any other probe is connected it can only draw 4 watts
maximum.
7 LAMP VOLT WARN Monitored voltage is outside the range of 3.964.48 V.

8 LAMP CURR WARN Monitored current is outside the range of 1.672.75 Amps.
Activated when the sensor is not in normal measurement mode (such as when
9 OUTPUT MODE WARN
in calibration or verification mode).
10 AC UPDATE FAIL The application code update failed.

47
Troubleshooting

Table 6 Warning Codes (continued)


Warning
Displayed Warning Definition/Resolution
Number

11 EXT FLASH FAIL External copy of the application code has failed. Self recovery should occur.

12 INT FLASH FAIL Internal copy of the application code has failed. Self-recovery should occur.

13 ENGLISH ONLY English only device driver file. Update the device driver with the latest version.

14 VREF WARN ADC voltage reference is out of specification.

15 SERVICE WARN SS7 sc is currently in service mode

Table 7 presents sensor warnings displayed in the Event Log,


possible causes and corrective actions.
Table 7 General Troubleshooting
Sensor Error
Possible Cause Corrective Action
or Warning
Lamp burned out Replace the lamp. See section 6.4.1 on page 40.
Lamp unplugged Restore connection
LAMP FAIL +12 V connection loose at controller Restore connection
Dislodged lamp Reinstall lamp
Bad circuit board in turbidimeter head Contact the Technical Support Department.
See section 6.3.1 on page 40.
Detector coated/dirty
Contact the Technical Support Department.
Low Readings Lens coated/dirty Clean the lens using isopropyl alcohol and a cotton swab.
Obstructed light path Remove obstruction
See LAMP FAIL causes above See LAMP FAIL corrective actions above
Loose connection at sc controller Tighten connection of cable at sc controller
Make sure that if an extension cable is used, only one is
SS7 sc to controller cable too long present and is no longer than 7 meters (approximately
VIN FAIL 30 feet).
Fluctuation in voltage Turn instrument power off and back on.
Bad detector assembly Replace detector assembly (Cat. No. 71221-00).
Fluctuation in voltage Turn instrument power off and back on.
ADC FAIL
Bad detector assembly Replace detector assembly (Cat. No. 71221-00).
Light LeakSS7 sc enclosure door is
Make sure the door is closed, then perform ZERO
open during Power Up or Zero
DARK WARNING ELECTRONICS in the CALIBRATION MENU.
Electronics
Bad detector Assembly Replace detector assembly (Cat. No. 71221-00).

48
Troubleshooting

Table 8 presents additional malfunctions which may not be


recorded in the Event Log.
Table 8 Additional malfunctions not recorded in the event log
Symptom Possible cause Corrective action
The calibration standard was either
Verify the accuracy of calibration standards and calibrate
Continuous underrange improperly prepared or was unstable at
the instrument. See Low Readings in Table 7.
the time the calibration was accepted.
The calibration standard was either
Verify the accuracy of calibration standards and
Continuous overrange improperly prepared or was unstable at
recalibrate the instrument.
the time the calibration was accepted.
Verify the accuracy of calibration standards and
recalibrate the instrument.
Inadequate bubble removal from
Erratic readings Increase the signal averaging time to a longer interval.
sample
Make sure the Bubble Reject feature is turned on.
Slow the flow of sample into the instrument.
Clean the instrument.
Dirty instrument Check the value and expiration date on the
High readings Calibration standard was low calibration standard
Flow rate is too high causing bubbles Verify the flow is within specifications
Recalibrate the instrument.

7.3 Event codes


Events are automatically invoked to document major actions during
normal instrument operation. Event codes are not displayed on
controller and must be downloaded from the event log using Data
Com software. Troubleshooting actions are provided in Table 7 on
page 48.
Table 9 Event log list
Event Event # Data1 Data2 Data3
0 = OFF
Bubble reject change 0
1= ON
0 = 1, 1 = 6, 2 = 30,
Signal avg 1
3 = 60, 4 = 90
0 = 5 sec, 1 = 30 sec,
2 = 1 min, 3 = 2 min,
Data log interval change 2 4 = 5 min, 6 = 15 min,
7 = 30 min, 8 = 1 hr,
9 = 4 hr
Power on 3
Calibration 4 Std Gain Operator
Verification 5 Expected Value Meas Value Operator
Dark event 6 A/D counts
Temperature 7 Present Min Max
Volt warn 8 Vin 5V Vref
Lamp warn event 9 Lamp V Lamp I
A2D fail event 10
Lamp fail 11 Lamp V Lamp I
0 = Normal, 1 = Active
Output mode change 12
2 = Hold, 3 = Transfer

49
Troubleshooting

Table 9 Event log list (continued)


Event Event # Data1 Data2 Data3
Baseline 13 Serial Number Expected Operator
AC update start 14
AC update done 15
AC update fail 16
AC internal fail 17
AC external fail 18
Flash erase 19
DD update 20
Service mode 21 0 = Off, 1 = On

Example of event log download using DataCom


15:00 01/09/06 BUBBLE REJECT 0 1

1/9/2006 15:00 BUBBLE REJECT 0 0

1/9/2006 15:00 SIGNAL AVG 1 2

1/9/2006 15:00 SIGNAL AVG 1 1

1/9/2006 15:00 DATALOG INTRVL 2 9

1/9/2006 15:01 OUT MODE EVENT 12 1

1/9/2006 15:01 CALIBRATION 4 2100 1.51 G7

1/9/2006 15:01 BASELINE EVENT 13 7 2090.4 G7

1/9/2006 15:02 OUT MODE EVENT 12 2

1/9/2006 15:02 VERIFICATION 5 7 2090.4 2091.1 GS7

7.4 Data log


Measured data is automatically logged based on the setting of the
data log interval. If, however, there is a calibration or verification
being performed, the data log will be interrupted since the values of
the measurements do not represent the normal process. The data
log interval in the following example is set at 15 minutes.

Example of data log download using DataCom


Serial Number: FFFFFFFFFFFF

Device ID: 26

Manufacture ID: 0

Time Channel 1

1/18/2006 12:15 2009.04

1/18/2006 12:30 2009.71

1/18/2006 12:45 2010.316

1/18/2006 13:00 2009.096

50
Section 8 Replacement parts and accessories

8.1 Replacement parts


Description Cat. No.
Surface Scatter 7 sc Installation Kit:
Adapter, barb fitting, NPT to ID hose barb (2x) 40439-00
Adapter, barb fitting, 1 NPT to 1 ID hose 40372-00
Brush, cylinder, size 2 687-00
Calibration cup, SS7 sc 45021-00
Drain Valve 45073-00
Formazin Stock Solution, 4000 NTU, 500 mL 2461-49
Light Source Template 45076-00
Nipple, NPT 31551-00
Washer, ID x 1.00 OD (4x) 44173-00
Wall Mounting kit 44247-00
Light Source Shield Assemblies (2x) 45299-00
Detector Assembly 71221-00
Lamp Assembly, Surface Scatter 7 sc 45034-00
Manual DOC026.53.00769
Quick Reference Document DOC016.53.00769
Tubing Replacement Kit 46691-00

8.2 Accessories
Description Cat. No.
Auto Flush Kit (120V) 46692-12
Auto Flush Kit (220V) 46692-22
Bubble Trap/Head Regulator 46680-00
Cable Extension for Sensor, 7.6 m (25 ft) 57960-00
DataCom (CD-rom) 59256-00
Formazin Stock Solution, 4000 NTU, 500 mL 2461-49
Heat Exchanger Unit (Sample cooler) 48551-00
Latch, replacement, SS6 44993-00
Manual, SS7 sc, English DOC026.53.00769
Manual, SS7 sc, Chinese DOC026.80.00769
Manual, SS7 sc, Japanese DOC026.81.00769
Manual, SS7 sc, Korean DOC026.84.00769
Power Cord, 125 VAC, 10A, 1.83 m (6 ft) 46306-00
Power Cord, 250 VAC, 10A, 1.83 m (6 ft) 46308-00
StablCal, 400 NTU, 500 mL 71216-49
Standardization Plate Kit, uncalibrated 23513-00
Sun Shield, Controller LZ961.54
Upgrade Kit, Converting Standard SS7 sc to a SS7 sc-HST (High Sample Temperature) 45000-43

51
Visit us at www.hach.com
Section 9 How to order

U.S.A. customers
By telephone:
6:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. MST
Monday through Friday
(800) 227-HACH (800-227-4224)
By fax:
(970) 669-2932
By mail:
Hach Company
P.O. Box 389
Loveland, Colorado 80539-0389 U.S.A.
Ordering information by e-mail: orders@hach.com

Information required

Hach account number (if available) Billing address

Your name and phone number Shipping address

Purchase order number Catalog number

Brief description or model number Quantity

International customers
Hach maintains a worldwide network of dealers and distributors. To
locate the representative nearest you, send an e-mail to:
intl@hach.com or contact:
Hach Company World Headquarters; Loveland, Colorado, U.S.A.
Telephone: (970) 669-3050; Fax: (970) 669-2932

Technical and customer service (U.S.A. only)


Hach Technical and Customer Service Department personnel are
eager to answer questions about our products and their use.
Specialists in analytical methods, they are happy to put their talents
to work for you.
Call 1-800-227-4224 or e-mail techhelp@hach.com

53
Section 10 Repair service
Authorization must be obtained from Hach Company before sending any items for
repair. Please contact the Hach Service Center serving your location.
In the United States:
Hach Company
Ames Service
100 Dayton Avenue
Ames, Iowa 50010
(800) 227-4224 (U.S.A. only)
FAX: (515) 232-3835
In Canada:
Hach Sales & Service Canada Ltd.
1313 Border Street, Unit 34
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3H 0X4
(800) 665-7635 (Canada only)
Telephone: (204) 632-5598
FAX: (204) 694-5134
E-mail: canada@hach.com
In Latin America, the Caribbean, the Far East,
Indian Subcontinent, Africa, Europe or the Middle East:
Hach Company World Headquarters,
P.O. Box 389
Loveland, Colorado, 80539-0389 U.S.A.
Telephone: (970) 669-3050
FAX: (970) 669-2932
E-mail: intl@hach.com

54
Section 11 Limited warranty

Hach Company warrants its products to the original purchaser against any defects that are due to faulty
material or workmanship for a period of two years from date of shipment unless otherwise noted in the
product manual.

In the event that a defect is discovered during the warranty period, Hach Company agrees that, at its
option, it will repair or replace the defective product or refund the purchase price excluding original
shipping and handling charges. Any product repaired or replaced under this warranty will be warranted
only for the remainder of the original product warranty period.

This warranty does not apply to consumable products such as chemical reagents; or consumable
components of a product, such as, but not limited to, lamps and tubing.

Contact Hach Company or your distributor to initiate warranty support. Products may not be returned
without authorization from Hach Company.

Limitations
This warranty does not cover:
Damage caused by acts of God, natural disaster, labor unrest, acts of war (declared or undeclared),
terrorism, civil strife or acts of any governmental jurisdiction

Damage caused by misuse, neglect, accident or improper application or installation


Damage caused by any repair or attempted repair not authorized by Hach Company

Any product not used in accordance with the instructions furnished by Hach Company

Freight charges to return merchandise to Hach Company


Freight charges on expedited or express shipment of warranted parts or product

Travel fees associated with on-site warranty repair

This warranty contains the sole express warranty made by Hach Company in connection with its
products. All implied warranties, including without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and fitness
for a particular purpose, are expressly disclaimed.

Some states within the United States do not allow the disclaimer of implied warranties and if this is true in
your state the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

This warranty constitutes the final, complete, and exclusive statement of warranty terms and no person
is authorized to make any other warranties or representations on behalf of Hach Company.

Limitation of remedies
The remedies of repair, replacement or refund of purchase price as stated above are the exclusive
remedies for the breach of this warranty. On the basis of strict liability or under any other legal theory, in
no event shall Hach Company be liable for any incidental or consequential damages of any kind for
breach of warranty or negligence.

55
Visit us at www.hach.com
Section 12 Certification
Hach Company certifies this instrument was tested thoroughly,
inspected and found to meet its published specifications when it
was shipped from the factory.
The Model sc100 with SS7 sc or SS7 sc-HST Sensor has been
tested and is certified as indicated to the following
instrumentation standards:

Product Safety
UL 61010A-1 Listed by ETL (cETLus safety mark)
CSA C22.2 No. 61010.1 Certified by ETL (cETLus safety mark)
Certified by Hach Co. to EN 61010-1 Amds. 1 & 2 (IEC1010-1) per
73/23/EEC, supporting test records by Intertek Testing Services.

Immunity
This equipment was tested for Industrial level EMC per:
EN 61326 (EMC Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory Use) per 2004/108/EC
EMC: Supporting test records and compliance certification by
Hach Company.

Standards include:

IEC 1000-4-2:1995 (EN 61000-4-2:1995) Electro-Static


Discharge Immunity (Criteria B)
IEC 1000-4-3:1995 (EN 61000-4-3:1996) Radiated RF
Electro-Magnetic Field Immunity (Criteria A)
IEC 1000-4-4:1995 (EN 61000-4-4:1995) Electrical Fast
Transients/Burst (Criteria B)
IEC 1000-4-5:1995 (EN 61000-4-5:1995) Surge (Criteria B)
IEC 1000-4-6:1996 (EN 61000-4-6:1996) Conducted
Disturbances Induced by RF Fields (Criteria A)
IEC 1000-4-11:1994 (EN 61000-4-11:1994) Voltage Dip/Short
Interruptions (Criteria B)

Additional immunity Standard/s include:

ENV 50204:1996 Radiated Electro-Magnetic Field from Digital


Telephones (Criteria A)

Emissions
This equipment was tested for Radio Frequency Emissions
as follows:
Per 2004/108/EC EMC: EN 61326:1998 (Electrical Equipment for
measurement, control and laboratory useEMC requirements)
Class A emission limits. Supporting test records by Hewlett
Packard, Fort Collins, Colorado Hardware Test Center (A2LA #
0905-01) and certified compliance by Hach Company.

Standards include:

EN 61000-3-2 Harmonic Disturbances Caused by Electrical


Equipment

57
Certification

EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuation (Flicker) Disturbances


Caused by Electrical Equipment

Additional Emissions Standard/s include:

EN 55011 (CISPR 11) Class A emission limits

Canadian Interference-causing Equipment Regulation, IECS-003, Class A


Supporting test records and compliance certification by
Hach Company.
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the
Canadian Interference- Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe A respecte toutes les
exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada.

FCC PART 15, Class A Limits


Supporting test records and compliance certification by
Hach Company.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense. The following techniques of reducing the interference
problems are applied easily.
1. Disconnect the Controller from its power source to verify that it
is or is not the source of the interference.
2. If the Controller is connected into the same outlet as the device
with which it is interfering, try another outlet.
3. Move the Controller and SS7 sc sensor away from the device
receiving the interference.
4. Reposition the device receiving the interference.
5. Try combinations of the above.

58
Appendix A Modbus register

Tag Name Register # Data Type Length R/W Description


TURB 40001 Float 2 R Measured turbidity value
TURB INT 40003 Unsigned Integer 1 R Integer turbidity value
TURB INT X 100 40004 Unsigned Integer 1 R Integer turbidity * 100
SENSOR NAME 40005 String 6 R/W Sensor name or location
BUBBLE REJECT 400111 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Bubble reject status (0=OFF; 1=ON)
Signal average (0=1; 1=6sec;
SIGNAL AVG 400121 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W
2=30sec;3=60sec;4=90sec)
Datalog interval
DATALOG INTRVL 400131 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W (0=5sec;1=30sec;2=1min;3=2min;4=5min;6=10
min;7=15min;8=30min;9=60min, 10=4hr)
Maximum number of decimal places (0=xxxxx,
RESOLUTION 40014 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W
1=xxxx.x, 2=xxx.xx)
Pass / Fail criteria for verification. (1 to 10
P/F CRITERIA 400151 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W
percent)
TURB UNIT 40016 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Turb units (0=mg/L:7=NTU;42=FTU)
Used to determine if the instrument is in the
SERVICE MODE 400181 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W
service mode (0 = disabled; 1= enabled)
SERIAL NUMBER 40021 String 6 R Instrument serial number
CODE VERSION 40027 Float 2 R Software version
DD Firmware 40029 Unsigned Integer 1 R Device driver firmware version
DD CONTENT 40030 Unsigned Integer 1 R Device driver content version
HW VERSION 40031 Unsigned Integer 1 R Hardware version of pc board
TEMP 40032 Float 2 R Temperature measurement in Celsius
DARK 40034 Unsigned Integer 2 R Dark turbidity A/D counts.
Turbidity value with dark offset and
RAW TURB 40036 Float 2 R
gain applied.
TURB COUNTS 40038 Unsigned Integer 2 R Turbidity A/D counts
TEMP MAX 40040 Float 2 R Maximum temperature
TEMP MIN 40042 Float 2 R Minimum temperature
LAMP V 40044 Float 2 R Lamp voltage
LAMP CURR 40046 Float 2 R Lamp current (amps)
Plus 5V 40048 Float 2 R Plus five volt measurement
INPUT V 40050 Float 2 R Input voltage (~12V)
VREF 40052 Float 2 R Voltage reference measurement (2.5V)
Calibration gain factor - used to convert A/D
CAL GAIN 40067 Float 2 R
counts to turbidity
INITIALS 40083 String 2 R Initials used for the latest calibration
LAST CAL DATE 40085 Time2 2 R Time of the latest calibration
The standard value used for the latest
CAL VALUE 40087 Float 2 R
calibration
1 In order to write to these tags, write 46478 to register 49938

59
Visit us at www.hach.com
Appendix B Theory of operation

B.1 SS7 sc principle of operation


The Surface Scatter 7 sc Turbidimeter is a sensitive and precise
instrument designed to measure the light scattered by particles
suspended in the sample fluid. The sample flows up through the
turbidimeter body at a rate between 1 and 2 liters per minute ( to
gallon per minute). As the fluid spills over the top of the
turbidimeter body, a stable, flat surface of fluid forms and becomes
the measuring surface.
Because there is no contact between the fluid being analyzed and
any of the optical surfaces, the instrument can monitor even highly
turbid samples without frequent cleaning. Electrically and
mechanically, the Surface Scatter 7 sc Turbidimeter has been
constructed to ensure reliable operation in adverse environments.
The lamp, powered by a regulated voltage source, provides a high
intensity beam of light that is adjusted to strike the fluid surface at
an angle. Most of the light striking the surface of the fluid is either
reflected into the upper left hand corner of the cabinet and
absorbed, or refracted down into the turbidimeter tube (Figure 4 on
page 12). A small amount of the light is scattered by the particles
suspended in the fluid. Light scattered at 90 degrees from the
incident beam is detected by the detector assembly. The electronic
signal generated by the detector assembly is directly related to the
concentration of particles suspended in the fluid.
Directing the light beam at the fluid surface at an angle and placing
the detector assembly directly over the point where the light enters
the fluid is a very important design feature. Because the light is
scattered at or near the surface, only a minimum amount of
scattered light is absorbed by the fluid before it reaches the
detector assembly. Therefore, the amount of light scattered will
increase with increasing turbidity, regardless of how high the
turbidity becomes. This allows the instrument to measure very high,
as well as very low, levels of turbidity.

B.2 SS7 sc-HST principle of operation


The SS7 sc-HST instrument is designed for high temperature
samples, or in applications where a significant difference between
the sample temperature and the ambient temperature causes
condensation and fogging in the unit. The SS7 sc-HST functions in
the same manner as the SS7 sc, but accommodates samples of
higher temperature and a moist air removal system has
been added.
The moist air removal system contains an air flow multiplier that
creates a vacuum to draw moisture away from the sample tube and
remove the moisture from the enclosure. The moisture removal
system requires the customer to provide a source of air pressure,
such as compressed air, shop air, or an on-site air compressor. The
air line is connected to the top of the flow multiplier
(Figure 5, item 1).

61
Visit us at www.hach.com
1.5InstructionManualforChlorineAnalyzer&
ResidualChlorineAnalyzer
ApplicableModel Area
AMICodesII RESERVOIRIPA
AMI Codes-II
Version 6.00 and higher

Operators Manual

A-96.250.571 / 220616
Customer Support
SWAN and its representatives maintain a fully trained staff of technical specialists
around the world. For any technical question, contact your nearest
SWAN representative, or the manufacturer:
SWAN ANALYTISCHE INSTRUMENTE AG
Studbachstrasse 13
8340 Hinwil
Switzerland
Internet: www.swan.ch
E-mail: support@swan.ch

Document Status

Title: Monitor AMI Codes-II Operators Manual

ID: A-96.250.571

Revision Issue

00 April 2010

01 June 2010

02 Aug. 2013 Update to Rev. 5.30, main board V2.4

03 June 2016 Update to Rev. 6.00, main board V2.5

2016, SWAN ANALYTISCHE INSTRUMENTE AG, Switzerland, all rights reserved

subject to change without notice


AMI Codes-II

Table of Contents

1. Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1. Warning Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2. General Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3. Restrictions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2. Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1. Instrument Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2. Instrument Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.1. Installation Check List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.2. Mounting of Instrument Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.3. Connecting Sample and Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.1 FEP Tube at Sample Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.2 FEP Tube at Sample Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4. Installation of Flow Cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.5. Install the Option pH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5.1 pH as Option ex works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5.2 pH Option as Retrofit Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.6. Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6.1 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.6.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.7. Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.8. Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.8.1 Alarm Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.8.2 Relay 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.9. Signal Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.9.1 Signal Output 1 and 2 (current outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.10 Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.10.1 Signal Output 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.10.2 Profibus, Modbus Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.10.3 USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4. Instrument Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.1. Prepare Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.2. Peristaltic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.3. Establish Sample Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.4. Fill or Flush Reagent System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.5. Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.6. Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

A-96.250.571 / 220616 1
AMI Codes-II

5. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.1. Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.2. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.3. Software Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.4. Changing Parameters and values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.1. Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.2. Stop of Operation for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.3. Refill or replace Reagents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.3.1 Reagents for Free Chlorine, Chlorine Dioxide, Bromine and Iodine 46
6.3.2 Reagents for Measuring Monochloramine and Ozone . . . . . . . . . 48
6.4. Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.5. Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.6. Cleaning the protective Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.7. Cleaning the Photometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.8. Cleaning the Flow Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.8.1 Disassemble the Flow Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.8.2 Assemble the Flow Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.9. Maintenance of pH sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.10. Tube Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.10.1 Replace the Pump Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.10.2 Replace the Reagent Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.11. Replacing Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.12. Longer Stop of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.1. General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.2. Calibration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.2.1 Process calibration DIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.2.2 Process pH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.2.3 Standard pH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.3. Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8. Program Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.1. Messages (Main Menu 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.2. Diagnostics (Main Menu 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.3. Maintenance (Main Menu 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.4. Operation (Main Menu 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8.5. Installation (Main Menu 5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
9. Program List and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1 Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

2 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II

2 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
10. Material Safety Data sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10.1. Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
11. Default Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
12. Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
13. Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

A-96.250.571 / 220616 3
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions

AMI Codes-II - Operators Manual


This document describes the main steps for instrument setup, oper-
ation and maintenance.

1. Safety Instructions
General The instructions included in this section explain the potential risks
associated with instrument operation and provide important safety
practices designed to minimize these risks.
If you carefully follow the information contained in this section, you
can protect yourself from hazards and create a safer work environ-
ment.
More safety instructions are given throughout this manual, at the
respective locations where observation is most important.
Strictly follow all safety instructions in this publication.
Target Operator: Qualified person who uses the equipment
audience for its intended purpose.
Instrument operation requires thorough knowledge of applications,
instrument functions and software program as well as all applicable
safety rules and regulations.
OM Location The AMI Operators Manual shall be kept in proximity of the instru-
ment.
Qualification, To be qualified for instrument installation and operation, you must:
Training read and understand the instructions in this manual as well as
the Material Safety Data Sheets.
know the relevant safety rules and regulations.

4 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions

1.1. Warning Notices


The symbols used for safety-related notices have the following sig-
nificance:

DANGER

Your life or physical wellbeing are in serious danger if such


warnings are ignored.
Follow the prevention instructions carefully.

WARNING

Severe injuries or damage to the equipment can occur if such


warnings are ignored.
Follow the prevention instructions carefully.

CAUTION

Damage to the equipment, minor injury, malfunctions or incor-


rect process can be the consequence if such warnings are ig-
nored.
Follow the prevention instructions carefully.

Mandatory The importance of the mandatory signs in this manual.


Signs
Safety goggles

Safety gloves

A-96.250.571 / 220616 5
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions

Warning Signs The importance of the warning signs in this manual.

Electrical shock hazard

Corrosive

Harmful to health

Flammable

Warning general

Attention general

6 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions

1.2. General Safety Regulations


Legal The user is responsible for proper system operation.
Requirements All precautions must be followed to ensure safe operation
of the instrument.
Spare Parts Use only official SWAN spare parts and disposables. If other parts
and are used during the normal warranty period, the manufacturers
Disposables warranty is voided.
Modifications Modifications and instrument upgrades shall only be carried out by
an authorized Service Technician. SWAN will not accept responsi-
bility for any claim resulting from unauthorized modification or alter-
ation.
WARNING

Risk of Electrical Shock


If proper operation is no longer possible, the instrument must be
disconnected from all power lines, and measures must be taken
to prevent inadvertent operation.
To prevent from electrical shock, always make sure that the
ground wire is connected.
Service shall be performed by authorized personnel only.
Whenever electronic service is required, disconnect instru-
ment power and power of devices connected to.
relay 1,
relay 2,
alarm relay

WARNING

For safe instrument installation and operation you must read


and understand the instructions in this manual.

WARNING

Only SWAN trained and authorized personnel shall perform the


tasks described in this document.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 7
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions

1.3. Restrictions for use


The sample must not contain any particles, which may block the
flow cell. Sufficient sample flow is coercive for the correct function
of the instrument.
If the sample contains only little disinfectant concentrations, or
there is the danger of biological growth, we recommend to use the
optional Cleaning module from Swan.

WARNING

Health hazard
Some reagents are etching and can cause severe burns or eye
damage.
For safe handling of the reagents you must read and under-
stand the instructions in this manual, as well as the Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

Download The current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for the below list-
MSDS ed Reagents are available for downloading at www.swan.ch.
OXYCON ON-LINE DPD
OXYCON ON-LINE Buffer
OXYCON ON-LINE KI
Buffer solution pH 4
Buffer solution pH 7
Buffer solution pH 9

8 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Product Description

2. Product Description
Application The AMI Codes-II analyzer is a complete monitoring system for the
Range automatic, continuous measurement and dosing control of chlorine
and other disinfectants based on the DPD colorimetric method
AWWA 4500 Cl-G and on EN ISO 7393-2.
It can be used for measuring disinfectants in:
Potable water
Swimming pools
Cooling water
Effluent
Seawater
It is also applicable for water containing additives like corrosion in-
hibitors, cyanuric acids and antiscalants.
For the determination of free chlorine, chlorine dioxide, bromine
and iodine the reagents:
Oxycon on-line DPD
Oxycon on-line Buffer
are needed.

The measurement of monochloramine or ozone requires an addi-


tional reagent:
Oxycon on-line KI; which is added to Oxycon on-line Buffer
Disinfectant
Measurement
Disinfectant Measuring range Accuracy

Ozone 0.0001.000 ppm 0.005 ppm

HOCl / free chlorine / 0.001.00 ppm 0.01 ppm


Monochloramine 1.003.00 ppm 0.06 ppm
3.005.00 ppm 0.20 ppm

Chlorine dioxide / 0.002.00 ppm 0.02 ppm


Iodine / Bromine 2.006.00 ppm 0.12 ppm

A-96.250.571 / 220616 9
AMI Codes-II
Product Description

Signal Two signal outputs programmable for measured values (freely


Outputs scaleable, linear or bilinear) or as continuous control output (control
parameters programmable).
Current loop: 0/420 mA
Maximal burden: 510
Third signal output available as an option.
Relay Two potential-free contacts programmable as limit switches for
measuring values, controllers or timer for system cleaning with au-
tomatic hold function. Both contacts can be used as normally open
or normally closed.
Maximum load: 1 A/250 VAC
Alarm Relay One potential free contact.
Alternatively:
Open during normal operation, closed on error and loss of
power.
Closed during normal operation, open on error and loss of
power.
Summary alarm indication for programmable alarm values and in-
strument faults.
Input For potential-free contact to freeze the measuring value or to inter-
rupt control in automated installations (hold function or remote-off)
Special Possibility to interrupt the measurement by activating the input. See
Feature Program List and Explanation, 5.3.4, p. 94.
Safety No data loss after power failure. All data is saved in non-volatile
Features memory. Over voltage protection of in- and outputs.Galvanic sepa-
ration of measuring inputs and signal outputs.The analyzer is facto-
ry tested and ready for installation and operation.
Communica- USB Interface for logger download
tion Interface RS485 with Fieldbus protocol Modbus or Profibus DP
(optional)
pH Optional pH measurement is possible (pH correction or calibration).
Relay Box The AMI Relay Box is designed for the direct power supply and ac-
tivation of dosing devices which are controlled with an AMI trans-
mitter, e. g. to connect two solenoid valves or one motor valve for
disinfectant additions.
Cleaning An optional Cleaning module is available.
Module

10 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Product Description

Fluidics The sample flows through the sample inlet [F] and the filter vessel
[G] into the constant head [A]. Adjust the flow regulating valve [D]
so that always a small part of the sample flows through the overflow
tube [B] into the drain [H].A part of the sample flows through the
photometer inlet [C] into the mixing chamber [E], where the re-
agents [J] and [K] are added by the peristaltic pump [O] and mixed
with the sample. The mixed sample flows through the photometer
[N] and disinfectant is measured. If KI and Buffer are mixed in the
reagent canister [K] monochloramine is measured.
After the measurement the sample flows through the outlet of the
photometer where it will be aerated through air inlet [P] to generate
bubbles. Then the sample flows through the bubble detector [M]
into the photometer drain [I].

A
Level

B
P
C

O
D
E

F
N G

M
L
K H
J I

A Constant head I Photometer drain


B Overflow tube J Reagent Oxycon on-line DPD
C Photometer inlet K Reagent Oxycon on-line Buffer
D Flow regulating valve L Reagent level detector
E Mixing chamber M Air bubble detector
F Sample inlet N Photometer
G Inlet Filter O Peristaltic pump
H Constant head drain P Photometer air inlet

A-96.250.571 / 220616 11
AMI Codes-II
Product Description

Time The measuring interval can be set between 1 and 12 minutes. The
interval of a time sequence of a measurement with a measuring interval of
measurement 5 min is shown in the diagram below.
The blue bar represents the sample which flows continuously
through the photometer. A short time before the measurement
starts, a zero point measurement is performed. Then the peristaltic
pump starts and a small portion of the reagents [J] and [K] is
pumped into the mixing chamber. Shortly after, if the mixture is in
the photometer, the sample is measured.

J
K

m
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J OXYCON ON-LINE DPD


K OXYCON ON-LINE Buffer Solution
Zero point measurement
Sample measurement

12 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Product Description

2.1. Instrument Specification

Power Supply Voltage: 100240 VAC ( 10%)


50/60 Hz ( 5%)
or 24 VDC ( 10%)
Power consumption: max. 30 VA
Electronics Aluminium with a protection degree of IP 66 / NEMA 4X
housing Ambient temperature: -10 to +50 C
Limit range of operation: -25 to +65 C
Storage and transport: -30 to +85 C
Humidity: 1090% rel., non condensing
Display: backlit LCD, 75 x 45 mm
Sample Flow rate: min. 10 l/h
requirements Temperature: 550 C (41122 F)
Inlet pressure: 0.152 bar (228 PSI)
Outlet pressure: pressure free
NOTICE: No oil, no grease, no sand.

On-site The analyzer site must permit connections to:


requirements Sample inlet: Tube 6 x 8 mm
Sample outlet: 1/2 hose nozzle for flexible tube
diam. 20x15 mm
Max. Altitude: 2000 m above sea level
Measuring Ozone Accuracy
Range 0.0001.000 ppm 0.005 ppm
HOCL, free chlorine, monochloramine
0.001.00 ppm 0.01 ppm
1.003.00 ppm 0.06 ppm
3.005.00 ppm 0.2 ppm
Chlorine dioxide, iodine, bromine
0.002.00 ppm 0.02 ppm
2.006.00 ppm 0.12 ppm

A-96.250.571 / 220616 13
AMI Codes-II
Product Description

Dimensions Panel: 400x850 mm


Mounting hole distance 374x824
Screws: 5 mm or 6 mm diameter
Weight: 12.0 kg / 26.5 lbs without reagents and
sample water
17.0 kg / 37.5 lbs with reagents and sam-
ple water

400 mm / 15
13 mm /
374 mm / 14

13 mm /
6 x dia. 6.5 mm /

AMI Codes II

824 mm / 32 7/16
412 mm / 16

850 mm / 33

30 mm / 1 3 /16

14 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Product Description

2.2. Instrument Overview

A
G
B H

J
K
C
L
M
N

E
O
F P

A Panel I Constant head


B Transmitter J Flow regulating valve
C Peristaltic pump K Sample inlet
D Reagent level detector L Inlet filter
E Reagent Oxycon on-line DPD M Photometer
F Reagent Oxycon on-line Buffer N Air bubble detector
G pH sensor O Constant head drain
H Temperature sensor P Photometer drain

A-96.250.571 / 220616 15
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3. Installation

3.1. Installation Check List

Check Instruments specification must conform to the National Electrical


Code, all state and local codes, and all plant codes and standards
for electrical equipment.
On site require- 100240 VAC ( 10%), 50/60 Hz ( 5%) or 24 VDC (10%),
ments isolated power outlet with ground connection and 30 VA.
Sample line with min. 10 l/h and 0.152 bar.
Waste line with pressure free drain.
Installation Mount the instrument in vertical position.
Display should be at eye-level.
Mount the filter, filter vessel, and constant head cover. Connect the
sample and waste line. See Connecting Sample and Waste, p. 18
Electrical Wiring Do not switch on the Instrument until all electrical connections
have been completed.
Connect all external devices like limit switches, current loops and
pumps.
Connect power cord.
See Electrical Connections, p. 24
If ordered: See Install the Option pH, p. 20
Option pH
Reagents Prepare reagents. See Refill or replace Reagents, p. 44.
Insert the suction lances combined with level detector.
Power-up Perform exactly in this order:
Lock pump tubes.
Turn on the sample flow and wait until the flow cell is completely
filled.
Switch on power.
Start <Fill system>. See 4.4., 36.
Instrument Program all parameters for external devices (interface, recorders,
Setup etc.). Program all parameters for instrument operation (limits,
alarms, measuring interval).
Run-in period Let the instrument run continuously for 1 h.
pH sensor If ordered: Calibrate pH sensor. See Process pH, p. 51.
calibration

16 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation

Process Make 3 manual measurements. Use a high quality photometer,


calibration e.g. Chematest from Swan. Calculate average value and compare
this value to the value, indicated by the AMI. If necessary, correct
the value. The zero point is done automatically before each mea-
surement.

3.2. Mounting of Instrument Panel


The first part of this chapter describes the preparing and placing of
the system for use.
The instrument must only be installed by trained personnel.
Mount the instrument in vertical position.
For ease of operation mount it so that the display is at eye
level.
For the installation a kit containing the following installation
material is available:
6 Screws 6x60 mm
6 Dowels
6 Washers 6.4/12 mm
Mounting re- The instrument is only intended for indoor installation.
quirements For dimensions see Dimensions, p. 14.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 17
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.3. Connecting Sample and Waste

3.3.1 FEP Tube at Sample Inlet


Use plastic tube (FEP, PA, or PE 6 x 8 mm) to connect the sample
line.

Mounting of A Screw connection


A
SERTO fitting B Compression ferrule
B C Knurled nut
D Flexible tube
C

3.3.2 FEP Tube at Sample Outlet

WARNING

Risk of water pollution


The drain of the photometer outlet contains DPD.
At no means recirculate it into the water system.

A Tube from photometer


B Drain Photometer
A C C Tube from constant head
D Drain constant head
B D E Hose nozzles
F 1/2 tubes
E
F

Connect the 1/2 tubes [F] to the hose nozzles [E] and place it into
a pressure free drain with sufficient capacity.

18 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.4. Installation of Flow Cell

CAUTION

Fragile Part
Handle the constant head tube with care.

To avoid damage during the transport, the constant head tube [C] of
the AMI Codes-II is not installed.
A A Constant head cover
B Overflow tube
C Constant head tube
D Gasket
E Flow cell block
Level

C
D

To install the constant head tube proceed as follows:

1 Unpack the constant head tube [C].


2 Push the constant head tube into the flow cell block [E].
3 Put the constant head cover [A] onto the constant head tube.
4 Check if the overflow tube [B] is aligned with the upper Level
mark.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 19
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.5. Install the Option pH

3.5.1 pH as Option ex works


If the pH option was ordered with the AMI Codes-II, the pH sensor
cable as well as the temperature sensor are already connected to
the AMI transmitter.
A A Connector cap
B Connector
B C pH Sensor
D Temperature sensor
E Constant head cover
F Protective cap
C G Constant head

D
E
F

1 Carefully pull off the protective cap [F] from the pH sensor [C]
by turning it clockwise.
2 Store the protective cap in safe place.
3 Rinse the pH sensor tip with clean water.
4 Insert the pH sensor into one of the holes in the constant head
cover [E].
5 Insert temperature sensor [D] into the small hole.
6 Remove the connector cap from the connector of the pH sen-
sor. Store it in safe place.
7 Screw the connector [B] onto the pH sensor.

20 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.5.2 pH Option as Retrofit Kit

A B C

F E D

A 2 Clamps with screws D Front end PCB


B pH sensor E Temperature sensor
C Sensor cable F Short overflow tube

A-96.250.571 / 220616 21
AMI Codes-II
Installation

WARNING

Risk of electrical shock.


Do not perform any work on electrical components if the trans-
mitter is switched on. Failure to follow safety instructions could
result in serious injury or death.
Always turn off AC power before manipulating electric parts.

1 Screw the clamps for calibration solution onto the panel. Use
the already drilled holes [A].

AMI Codes-II

2 Stop sample flow. Wait until flow cell is empty.


3 Switch off the AMI transmitter (disconnect power).
A A Constant head cover
B Constant head tube
C Short overflow tube
B D Flow cell block
Level

4 Remove the constant head cover [A] and the constant head
tube [B] from the flow cell block [D].
5 Insert the short overflow tube [C] into the outlet hole leading to
the photometer.
6 Install the constant head tube and the constant head cover.

22 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation

A Temperature sensor plug


B pH sensor plug
C Front end PCB

A B C

7 Open the cover of the AMI transmitter housing.


8 Install the front end PCB.
9 Feed the cable of the pH sensor through one of the cable
glands (see Cable thicknesses, p. 24) into the AMI transmitter
housing.
10 Connect it to the BNC socket.
11 Feed the cable of the Temperature sensor through one of the
cable glands into the AMI transmitter housing.
12 Connect the temperature sensor cable to the plug as follows:
Terminal 19: line, Terminal 20: shield.
13 Close the cover of the AMI transmitter housing.
14 Carefully pull off the protective cap [F] from the pH sensor [C].
15 Insert the pH sensor into one of the holes in the constant head
cover [E].
16 Insert temperature sensor [D] into the small hole.
17 Remove the connector cap from the connector of the pH sen-
sor. Store cap in safe place.
18 Screw the connector [B] onto the pH sensor.
19 Turn on sample flow and wait until flow cell has been filled com-
pletely.
20 Switch power ON. The instrument automatically detects the
front end PCB during start-up.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 23
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.6. Electrical Connections

WARNING

Risk of electrical shock.


Do not perform any work on electrical components if the trans-
mitter is switched on. Failure to follow safety instructions could
result in serious injury or death.
Always turn off AC power before manipulating electric parts.
Grounding requirements: Only operate the instrument from
an power outlet which has a ground connection.
Make sure the power specification of the instrument corre-
sponds to the power on site.
Cable In order to comply with IP66, use the following cable thicknesses
thicknesses

A B C

A PG 11 cable gland: cable outer 510 mm


B PG 7 cable gland: cable outer 36.5 mm
C PG 9 cable gland: cable outer 48 mm

NOTICE: Protect unused cable glands


Wire For Power and Relays: Use max. 1.5 mm2 / AWG 14
stranded wire with end sleeves.
For Signal Outputs and Input: Use 0.25 mm2 / AWG 23
stranded wire with end sleeves.

24 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation

WARNING

External Voltage.
External supplied devices connected to relay 1 or 2 or to the
alarm relay can cause electrical shocks
Make sure that the devices connected to the following con-
tacts are disconnected from the power before resuming in-
stallation.
relay 1
relay 2
alarm relay

WARNING

To prevent from electrical shock, do not connect the instrument


to the power unless the ground wire (PE) is connected.
Do not connect unless specifically instructed to do so.

WARNING

The mains of the AMI Transmitter must be secured by a main


switch and appropriate fuse or circuit breaker.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 25
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.6.1 Connection Diagram

CAUTION

Use only the terminals shown in this diagram, and only for the
mentioned purpose. Use of any other terminals will cause short
circuits with possible corresponding consequences to material
and personnel.

26 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.6.2 Power Supply

WARNING

Risk of electrical shock


Do not perform any work on electrical components if the trans-
mitter is switched on. Failure to follow safety instructions could
result in serious injury or death.
Always turn off AC power before manipulating electric parts.
Installation and maintenance of electrical parts must be per-
formed by professionals.

A
B
C

A Power supply connector


B Neutral conductor, Terminal 2
C Phase conductor, Terminal 1
D Protective earth PE

NOTICE: The protective earth wire (Ground) has to be


connected to the grounding terminal.
Installation The installation must meet the following requirements.
requirements Mains fuse 1.6 AT
Mains cable to comply with standards IEC 60227 or IEC
60245; flammable rating FV1
Mains equipped with an external switch or circuit-breaker
near the instrument
easily accessible to the operator
marked as interrupter for AMI Codes-II

A-96.250.571 / 220616 27
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.7. Input
NOTICE: Use only potential-free (dry) contacts.
The total resistance (sum of cable resistance and resistance of
the relay contact) must be less than 50 .
Terminals 30 and 31
If the signal output is set to hold, the measurement is interrupted if
input is active.
For programming see Menu Installation 5.3.4, p. 94.

3.8. Relay Contacts


3.8.1 Alarm Relay
NOTICE: Max. load 1 A/250 VAC
Alarm output for system errors.
Error codes see Troubleshooting, p. 46.

NOTICE: With certain alarms and certain settings of the AMI


transmitter the alarm relay does not switch. The error, however,
is shown on the display.

Terminals Description Relay connection


NC1) 10/11 Active (opened) during normal 1) 11
Normally operation.
0V
Closed Inactive (closed) on error and 10
loss of power.
12

NO 12/11 Active (closed) during normal 11


Normally operation. 0V
Open Inactive (opened) on error and 10
loss of power.
12

1) usual use

28 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.8.2 Relay 1 and 2


NOTICE: Max. load 1 A/250 VAC
Relay 1 and 2 can be configured as normally open or as normally
closed. Standard for both relays is normally open. To configure a
Relay as normally closed, set the jumper in the upper position.
ay as normally closed, set the jumper in the upper position.
NOTICE: Some error codes and the instrument status may
influence the status of the relays described below.

Relay Jumper
config. Terminals pos. Description Relay configuration
Normally 6/7: Relay 1 Inactive (opened) during
Open 8/9: Relay 2 normal operation and 6
loss of power.
Active (closed) when a 0V
programmed function is 7
executed.
Normally 6/7: Relay 1 Inactive (closed) during
Closed 8/9: Relay 2 normal operation and 6
loss of power.
Active (opened) when a 0V
programmed function is 7
executed.

A
B

A Jumper set as normally open (standard setting)


B Jumper set as normally closed
For programming see Menu Installation 5.3.2 and 5.3.3, p. 89.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 29
AMI Codes-II
Installation

CAUTION

Risk of damage of the relays in the AMI Transmitter due to


heavy inductive load.
Heavy inductive or directly controlled loads (solenoid valves,
dosing pumps) may destroy the relay contacts.
To switch inductive loads > 0.1 A use an AMI relay box avail-
able as an option or suitable external power relays.

Inductive load Small inductive loads (max 0.1A) as for example the coil of a power
relay can be switched directly. To avoid noise voltage in the
AMI Transmitter it is mandatory to connect a snubber circuit in par-
allel to the load.
A snubber circuit is not necessary if an AMI relaybox is used.
A A AC or DC power supply
B C B AMI Transmitter
C External power relay
D E D Snubber
E Power relay coil

Resistive load Resistive loads (max. 1A) and control signals for PLC, impulse
pumps and so on can be connected without further measures
A B A AMI Transmitter
B PLC or controlled pulse pump
C C Logic

Actuators Actuators, like motor valves, are using both relays: One relay con-
tact is used for opening, the other for closing the valve, i.e. with the
2 relay contacts available, only one motor valve can be controlled.
Motors with loads bigger than 0.1A must be controlled via external
power relays or an AMI relay box.
A A AC or DC power supply
B C B AMI Transmitter
C Actuator

30 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.9. Signal Outputs

3.9.1 Signal Output 1 and 2 (current outputs)


NOTICE: Max. burden 510
If signals are sent to two different receivers, use signal isolator
(loop isolator).
Signal output 1: Terminals 14 (+) and 13 (-)
Signal output 2: Terminals 15 (+) and 13 (-)
For programming see Program Overview, p. 51, Menu Installation

3.10 Interface Options


A AMI Transmitter
A B Slot for interfaces
C Frontend PCB
D Screw terminals
B

The slot for interfaces can be used to expand the functionality of


the AMI instrument with either:
an additional signal output
a Profbus or Modbus connection
an USB Interface

A-96.250.571 / 220616 31
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.10.1 Signal Output 3


Terminal 38 (+) and 37 (-).
Requires the additional board for the third signal output 0/420 mA
PCB. The third signal output can be operated as current source or
current sink (switchable via switch [A]). For detailed information see
the corresponding installation instruction.
NOTICE: Max. burden 510 .

Third signal output 0/420 mA PCB


A Operating mode selector switch

32 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation

3.10.2 Profibus, Modbus Interface


Terminal 37 PB, Terminal 38 PA
To connect several instruments by means of a network or to config-
ure a PROFIBUS DP or a MODBUS connection, consult the PRO-
FIBUS/MODBUS manual. Use appropriate network cable.
NOTICE: The switch must be ON, if only one instrument is
installed, or on the last instrument in the bus.
OFF

ON

Profibus, Modbus Interface PCB (RS 485)


A On - OFF switch

3.10.3 USB Interface


The USB Interface is used to store Logger data and for Firmware
up load. For detailed information see the corresponding installation
instruction.

USB Interface

A-96.250.571 / 220616 33
AMI Codes-II
Instrument Setup

4. Instrument Setup
After installation according to checklist proceed as following:

4.1. Prepare Reagents


1 Prepare reagents. See Refill or replace Reagents, p. 44.
2 Insert the suction lances combined with level detector into the
canisters.

4.2. Peristaltic Pump


The instrument is delivered with opened occlusion frames.

1 Activate the peristaltic pump tubes by closing the occlusion


frame [B].

A Turn to lock
B Occlusion frame
A
C Rotor
D Pump tube
B

C
D

34 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Instrument Setup

4.3. Establish Sample Flow

WARNING

Water pollution
The drain of the photometer outlet contains DPD.
At no means recirculate it into the water system.

A A Cover
B Constant head tube
B C Overflow tube
D Flow cell block
Level E Flow regulating valve
F Filter
G Filter vessel
C

D
E

1 Open the flow regulating valve (E) and wait until the flow cell is
completely filled.
2 Switch on power.
3 Adjust the sample flow so that always a small part of the sample
drains off through the overflow tube.
4 Start <Fill system>, see Fill or Flush Reagent System, p. 36.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 35
AMI Codes-II
Instrument Setup

4.4. Fill or Flush Reagent System


Fill or flush the reagent tubing:
upon the initial instrument setup,
after refilling the reagent canisters,
before a system shut-down to flush the system with deminer-
alized water until no more reagent is left in the system.

Service 3.2.2
Navigate to menu< Maintenance /
Verification Service/Fill system>.
Fill System Press [Enter].
Cleaning

Fill System 3.2.2.5


The peristaltic pump is activated for
1.5 minutes.
Progress

<Enter> to stop

Fill System 3.2.2.5


Press [Exit] 4 x to go back to the oper-
ating mode.
Progress

Done

1 Check tubing and flow cell for leaks and repair if necessary.
2 Let the instrument run continuously for 1 hour.

4.5. Programming
Programming Program all parameters for external devices (interface, recorders,
etc.)
Program all parameters for instrument operation (disinfectant, lim-
its, alarms).
Program the DPD value of the Verikit in menu <Installation/
Sensors/Ref. Verification>.
If pH option is installed, program the two buffers you want to use for
calibration in menu <Installation/Sensors/Standards>.
See Program List and Explanations, p. 76.

36 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Instrument Setup

4.6. Calibration
1 Calibrate pH sensor (if option pH is installed).
See Standard pH, p. 52.
2 Perform process calibration.
See Process Calibration of DIS, p. 50
If ordered: The instrument should be operating for 1h before performing a pH
Calibration of calibration.
pH sensor Program the two buffers you want to use for calibration (Installation/
Sensors/Standards). Calibrate the pH sensor with two buffers, e.g.
pH 7.00 and pH 9.00. See chapter Calibration, p. 50 for details.
Process DIS Let the instrument run for 1 h.
Use CHEMATEST 25 (or equivalent photometer) to determine the
sample disinfectant concentration. Take the sample directly from
the flow cell. Determine the sample disinfectant value by 3 manual
DPD measurements. Calculate the average value. Compare this
value to the value, indicated by the AMI.
Keep in mind the accuracy of your manual measurement. Only cor-
rect the instrument if the difference is significant.
Perform process DIS if necessary. See chapter Calibration, p. 50
for details.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 37
AMI Codes-II
Operation

5. Operation

5.1. Keys

A B C D

Exit Enter

A to exit a menu or command (rejecting any changes)


to move back to the previous menu level
B to move DOWN in a menu list and to decrease digits
C to move UP in a menu list and to increase digits
D to open a selected sub-menu
to accept an entry

Program
RUN 14:10:45 Main Menu 1
Access, Exit Enter
R1 Messages
R2 0.15 ppm Diagnostics
Maintenance
Exit Operation
9 l/h 25.4C Installation

38 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Operation

5.2. Display
A B C D E

RUN 15:20:18

R1
F
R2
0.15 ppm
K 23 B/s 23 C G
I H

A RUN normal operation


HOLD input closed or cal delay: Instrument on hold (shows
status of signal outputs).
OFF input closed: control/limit is interrupted (shows status
of signal outputs).
B ERROR Error Fatal Error
C Reagent low, indicates remaining reagents in% (17% = 340 ml)
D Keys locked, transmitter control via Profibus
E Time
F Process values
G Sample Temperature
H Cleaning solution low, indicates remaining cleaning solution in%
I Sample flow in B/s
K Relay status

Relay status, symbols


upper/lower limit not yet reached
upper/lower limit reached
control upw./downw. no action
control upw./downw. active, dark bar indicates control intensity

motor valve closed


motor valve: open, dark bar indicates approx. position
timer
timer: timing active (hand rotating)

A-96.250.571 / 220616 39
AMI Codes-II
Operation

5.3. Software Structure

Main Menu 1
Messages
Diagnostics
Maintenance
Operation
Installation

Menu Messages 1
Messages 1.1
Pending Errors Reveals pending errors as well as an event history
Message List (time and state of events that have occurred at an
earlier point of time).
It contains user relevant data.

Menu Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 2.1
Identification Provides user relevant instrument and sample data.
Sensors
Sample
I/O State
Interface

Menu Maintenance 3
Maintenance 3.1
Calibration For instrument calibration, relay and signal output
Process Cal. simulation, and to set the instrument time.
Simulation It is used by the service personnel.
Set Time 23.09.06 16:30:00

Menu Operation 4
Operation 4.1
Sensors User relevant parameters that might need to be
Relay Contacts modified during daily routine. Normally password
Logger protected and used by the process-operator.
Subset of menu 5 - Installation, but process-related.

Menu Installation 5
Installation 5.1
Sensors For initial instrument set up by SWAN authorized
Signal Outputs person, to set all instrument parameters. Can be
Relay Contacts protected by means of password.
Miscellaneous
Interface

40 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Operation

5.4. Changing Parameters and values


Changing The following example shows how to change the logger interval:
parameters 1 Select the parameter you want to
Logger
Sensors 5.1.2
4.4.1
change.
Sensor type
Log interval FOME
30 min
Disinf.logger Free chlorine 2 Press [Enter]
Clear no
Temperature NT5K
Standards
3 Press [ ] or [ ] key to
Logger 4.1.3
highlight the required parameter.
Log interval Interval. 30min
5 min
Clear logger no 4 Press [Enter] to confirm the selec-
10 min tion or [Exit] to keep the previous
30 min parameter).
1 Hour

The selected parameter is


Logger 4.1.3
highlighted but not saved yet.
Log interval 10 min
Clear logger no 5 Press [Exit].

Yes is highlighted.
Logger 4.1.3
Log interval
Save ?
6 Press [Enter] to save the new pa-
Clear logger no rameter.
Yes
No The system reboots, the new
parameter is set.

Changing 1 Select the value you want to


values Alarm DIS 5.3.1.1.1
change.
Alarm High 5.00 ppm
Alarm Low 0.00 ppm 2 Press [Enter].
Hysteresis 1.00 ppm 3 Set required value with [ ] or
Delay 5 Sec
[ ] key.
4 Press [Enter] to confirm the new
Alarm DIS 5.3.1.1.1
value.
Alarm High 0.20 ppm
Alarm Low 0.00 ppm 5 Press [Exit].
Hysteresis 1.00 ppm Yes is highlighted.
Delay 5 Sec
6 Press [Enter] to save the new val-
ue.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 41
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6. Maintenance

6.1. Maintenance Schedule

WARNING

Stop operation before maintenance.


Stop sample flow.
Shut off power of the instrument.

Daily (dirty water) Check sample supply for dirt.


up to every Clean all filters and strainers, if necessary.
2 weeks (clean Clean AMI Codes protection filter, if necessary.
water) Check sample flow (see also Troubleshooting, p. 64)

Every 24 weeks Clean reagent canisters and prepare new reagents.


Let instrument run for 1 h. Make 3 manual measure-
ments. Compare average value to displayed value. If nec-
essary, perform process calibration.

Monthly Recommendation: Check photometer with verification kit


Verification, p. 49

Yearly Exchange reagent pump tubes, see Tube Replacement,


p. 59.

By occurrence: E020, FOME dirty: Cleaning the Photometer, p. 54


E022, Reagent empty: Refill or replace Reagents, p. 44
E065, Reagents low: Refill or replace Reagents, p. 44

If pH option is installed:

Weekly Perform a process calibration, see Process pH, p. 51.

Every 2 months: Perform a standard calibration, see Standard pH, p. 52.

42 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.2. Stop of Operation for Maintenance


1 Put the suction lances combined with level detector into a buck-
et with clean water.
2 Start <Fill system>.
The reagent tubes are flushed with water.
3 Remove the suction lances from the water.
4 Start <Fill system> again.
The water will be pumped out of the reagent tubes.
5 Stop sample flow.
6 Wait until level in flow cell is empty.
7 Shut off power of the instrument.

If pH option is installed:
8 Remove the pH sensor [A] from the flow cell.
9 Fill the protective cap [B] with water.
10 Put the protective cap onto the sensor tip.

A pH sensor
B Protective cap

A-96.250.571 / 220616 43
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.3. Refill or replace Reagents


The liquid level in the canisters is monitored.
The following messages are displayed:
Canister almost Maintenance E065 - Reagents low and the
empty remaining reagent volume in %
(starting at 17 % = 340 ml).
Canister empty Error E022 - Reagent empty

NOTICE: Before refilling the reagents, rinse the canister with


demineralized water.
Reagent The 2 liter reagent canister will last for 15 days of operation (with
consumption default measurement interval of 2 minutes). The provided reagent
set (for 8 canisters) therefore lasts for 4 months of operation.
As the reagent consumption is not linear find further examples be-
low:

Duration per Duration per


Measuring interval canister reagent set
1 minute ~ 7 days 2 months
2 minutes ~ 15 days 4 months
4 minutes ~ 22 days 5 months
6 minutes ~ 33 days 8 months

WARNING

Health hazard
Some reagents can cause severe burns or eye damage.
For safe handling of the reagents you must read and under-
stand the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), see Material
Safety Data sheets, p. 104

44 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

Oxycon On-line DPD

WARNING

Severe eye irritation and severe skin irritation.


Concentrated Oxycon On-line DPD contains more than 10%
mineral acids.
Do not swallow.
Avoid any contact with eyes and skin.
Wear protective goggles,
Wear protective gloves.
IF IN EYES: Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes.
Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue
rinsing.
Immediately call a POISON CENTER or doctor/ physician.

Oxycon On-line Buffer


Contains citric acid potassium salt, do not swallow.

Oxycon On-line KI

CAUTION

Severe eye irritation and skin irritation.


This product is corrosive and causes severe burns.
Harmful if swallowed.
Avoid any contact with eyes and skin
IF IN EYES: Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes.
Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue
rinsing.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 45
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

Canister set up
A A Screw cover
B Level detector
B
C Suction lance
D 2 L mark
E Canister Oxycon
on-line DPD
F Canister Oxycon
C on-line Buffer
D G Holder

E 2L 2L
F
OXYCON ON-LINE OXYCON ON-LINE
DPD-Reagenz Pufferlsung
DPD Ractif Tampon
DPD Reagent Buffer Solution

6.3.1 Reagents for Free Chlorine, Chlorine Dioxide, Bromine


and Iodine
To prepare 2 L reagents the following chemicals are necessary:
1 x 50 ml of Oxycon On-line DPD
1 x 240 gr of Oxycon On-line Buffer
2 liters demineralized water

NOTICE: To mix the reagents use the screw cover without the
integrated suction lance and level detector.
Prepare 1 Rinse the canister [E] labelled OXYCON ON LINE DPD-Re-
Oxycon agent with demineralized water.
On-line DPD 2 Fill the canister up to the 2 liter mark [D] with demineralized wa-
ter.
3 Slowly pour the content of one bottle of concentrate Oxycon
On-line DPD (50 ml) into the canister.
Avoid splashing!

46 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

4 Close the canister with the screw cover and tighten it well.
5 Mix the demineralized water and the reagents well.
6 Put the canister [E] into the holder [G].
7 Remove the screw cover and insert the suction lance [C] com-
bined with level detector [B] and tighten the screw cover [A].

Prepare 1 Rinse the canister [F] labelled OXYCON ON LINE Buffer solu-
Oxycon tion with demineralized water.
On-line Buffer 2 Fill the canister up to the 2 liter mark [D] with demineralized wa-
ter.
3 Slowly pour the content of one bag of buffer Oxycon On-line
(240 gr) into the canister.
Avoid splashing!
4 Close the canister with the screw cover and tighten it well.
5 Mix the demineralized water and the reagents well.
6 Put canister [F] into holder [G].
7 Remove the screw cover and insert the suction lance [C] com-
bined with level detector [B] and tighten the screw cover [A].
8 Fill reagent system. See Fill or Flush Reagent System, p. 38

A-96.250.571 / 220616 47
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.3.2 Reagents for Measuring Monochloramine and Ozone


2 L reagents last for 15 days with 2 min. interval:

1 x 50 ml of Oxycon On-line DPD


1 x 240 gr of Oxycon On-line Buffer
1 x 60 gr of Reagent Oxycon On-line KI
4 liters demineralized water

NOTICE: To mix the reagents use the screw cover without the
integrated suction lance and level detector.
Prepare 1 Rinse the canister [E] labelled OXYCON ON LINE DPD-Re-
Oxycon agent with demineralized water.
On-line DPD 2 Fill the canister up to the 2 liter mark with demineralized water.
3 Slowly pour the content of a bottle of concentrate Oxycon On-
line DPD into the canister.
Avoid splashing!
4 Close the canister with the screw cover and tighten it well.
5 Mix the demineralized water and the reagents well..
6 Put the canister [E] into the holder [G].
7 Remove the screw cover and insert the suction lance [C] com-
bined with level detector [B] and tighten the screw cover [A].

Prepare 1 Rinse the canister [F] labelled OXYCON ON LINE Buffer solu-
Oxycon tion with demineralized water.
On-line Buffer 2 Fill the canister up to the 2 liter mark with demineralized water.
& KI
3 Slowly pour the content of one bag of Oxycon On-line Buffer
into the canister.
Avoid splashing!
4 Add the content of one bag Oxycon On-line KI to the same can-
ister.
5 Close the canister with the screw cover and tighten it well.
6 Mix the demineralized water and the reagents well.
7 Put the canister [F] into the holder [G].
8 Remove the screw cover and insert the suction lance [C] com-
bined with level detector [B] and tighten the screw cover [A].
9 Fill reagent system. See Fill or Flush Reagent System, p. 38.

48 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.4. Verification
The Verification kit for AMI Photometer is available as
an accessory. An optical window with a precisely deter-
mined absorbance value is placed into the light beam
of the photometer. The actual measured absorbance
will be compared to the reference value labeled on
each kit.

Set reference Prior to performing the verification the DPD reference value, e.g.
value: 0.255, needs to be set in menu 5.1.4
<Installation>\<Sensors>\<Ref. Verification>.
Verification Basically follow the dialog in menu 3.2.1
procedure: <Maintenance>\<Service>\<Verification>.

NOTICE: Start any time, if a measuring cycle is in progress wait


for next prompt.

1 Stop sample flow by closing regulating valve. Wait for next


prompt: Constant head will be drained and an automatic zero
will be defined.
2 Open cuvette of the photometer and insert the verification filter.
[Enter] to continue.
3 Align the triangle shape either to the front or backside and ad-
just for minimal absorbance (see AMI Display).
4 Press [Enter] to save the verification measurement. The verifi-
cation is successful if the difference is within the limits. [Enter] to
continue.
5 Remove filter, close cuvette and open regulating valve. [Enter]
to finish and [Exit] to the main display.
Verification Can be reviewed in menu 2.2.1.5
history: <Diagnostics>\<Sensors>\<Photometer>\<Ver. History>

A-96.250.571 / 220616 49
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.5. Calibration
Process NOTICE: Perform process calibration for free chlorine / total
Calibration of residual chlorine only if:
DIS the sample concentration is close to the desired process
value (stable value)
you are sure that the reagents are mixed completely and
correctly
if the difference to the manual measurement is significant.
Keep in mind the accuracy of your manual measurement.
Use CHEMATEST 25 (or equivalent photometer) to determine the
sample disinfectant concentration. Determine the sample disinfec-
tant value by 3 manual DPD measurements. Calculate the average
value. Compare this value to the value, indicated by the AMI.
Enter process value (mg/l = ppm) under menu 3.1.1, p. 79 for Pro-
cess DIS

Calibration 3.1.1 Process DIS. 3.1.1.4


Process DIS. Current Value x.xx ppm
Process pH Enter Slope x.xxx
Standard pH
Process Value x.xx ppm
Save <Enter>

Process DIS. 3.1.1.4


Current Value x.xx ppm
Slope x.xxx

Process Value x.xx ppm


Save <Enter>

Process DIS. 3.1.1.5


Current Value x.xx ppm
Slope x.xxx

Calibration Successful
Press 3 x [Exit]

Possible error message see Calibration Errors, p. 65.


Zero A zero is automatically done before each measurement.

50 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

Process pH Use a Chematest 25 photometer (or equivalent) to determine the


sample pH value.

NOTICE: Make sure your reference instrument is calibrated


correctly!

Maintenance 3.1 Calibration 3.1.2


Calibration Process DIS.
Service Enter
Process pH
Simulation Standard pH
Set Time 01.01.05 16:30:00
Cleaning

Process pH 3.1.2.4

Current Value 7.78 pH


Offset x mV

Process Value 7.78 pH


Save <Enter>

Enter the correct value Process pH 3.1.2.4


with the [ ] or [ ] Current Value 7.78 pH
key. Offset x mV

Process Value 7.70 pH


Save <Enter>

Process pH 3.1.2.5 Process pH 3.1.2.5


Current Value 7.70 pH Current Value 7.70 pH
Offset y mV Enter Offset y mV
Slope x.xx mV
Process Value 7.70 pH
Calibration successful Save <Enter>

Possible error message see Calibration Errors, p. 65.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 51
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

Standard pH 1 Navigate to menu <Maintenance>/


Maintenance 3.1
<Calibration>.
Calibration Enter
Simulation 2 Press [Enter].
Set Time 01.06.04 16:30:00 3 Remove the pH sensor from the
Enter
Fill System flow cell.
Cleaning
4 Follow the instructions on the dis-
Calibration 3.1.3 play.
Process DIS.
Process pH
Standard pH

Display 1 Rinse and dry the pH sensor and put it into standard 1
instructions 2 Standard 1, current value (Progress is shown).
3 Rinse and dry the pH sensor and put it in standard 2
4 Standard 2, current value (Progress is shown)
5 Rinse and dry the pH sensor and put it into the flow cell

Possible error message see Calibration Errors, p. 65.

52 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.6. Cleaning the protective Filter


Switch off the instrument according to instructions in Stop of Opera-
tion for Maintenance, p. 43

A A Flow cell block


B Flow regulating valve
B
C Filter shaft
D Filter
E Filter vessel
C

Normally the filter in your sample supply line will retain most debris.
If the filter shows deposits, proceed as follows:

1 Close the main tap of the sample inlet.


2 Close flow regulating valve [B].
3 Unscrew and remove the filter vessel [E] from the
flow cell block [A].
4 Hold the filter [D] on the shaft [C] and unscrew and remove it.
5 Backwash the filter under pressure of tap water.
6 Clean the outside of the filter.
7 Install the filter and the filter vessel again.
8 Establish the sample flow.
9 Adjust sample flow with the regulating valve.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 53
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.7. Cleaning the Photometer


Clean the photometer after indication by alarm (E020, FOME dirty).
Switch off the instrument according to instructions in Stop of Opera-
tion for Maintenance, p. 43.
Material Small brush.
Procedure A Flow regulating valve
B Photometer cover
A C Photometer
B
D Brush

1 Close the flow regulating valve [A].


2 Wait until the sample flow through the photometer has stopped
3 Unscrew the cover [B] from the photometer [C].

4 Clean the Photometer with a small brush [D].


5 Screw the cover to the photometer.
6 Open the flow regulating valve.

Clean the photometer after indication by alarm (E020, FOME dirty).

54 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.8. Cleaning the Flow Cell

CAUTION

Acrylic glass parts are fragile and scratch-sensitive.


Possible damage of acrylic glass parts due to scrubbing materi-
als.
Never use organic solvents or scrubbing materials to clean
acrylic glass parts.
Use soft detergent and rinse well. Eliminate lime deposits with
a common household deliming agent in standard concentra-
tion.
Do not drop the constant head tube

6.8.1 Disassemble the Flow Cell


The flow cell can be disassembled easily. Before disassemble the
flow cell, switch off the instrument according to instructions in Stop
of Operation for Maintenance, p. 43

A-96.250.571 / 220616 55
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

A Constant head cover


A B Overflow tube
C Constant head tube
D Flow cell block
E Flow regulating valve
B

Level

D
E

Cleaning 1 Switch off the instrument according to instructions in Stop of


Operation for Maintenance, p. 43
2 If installed remove the pH sensor and the temperature sensor.
3 Remove the constant head cover [A].
4 Remove the constant head tube [C] from the flow cell block.
5 Pull the overflow tube [B] out of the flow cell block [D].
6 Clean all acrylic parts with a soft brush (bottle cleaner) and
soapy water.
7 Remove lime deposits with a common household deliming
agent with standard concentrations.

56 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.8.2 Assemble the Flow Cell

A A Constant head cover


B Overflow tube
C Constant head tube
D Gasket
E Flow cell block
Level

C
D

1 Replace the gasket [D] before reassembling the flow cell.

NOTICE: A film of teflon paste (e.g. Fomblin from Solvay


Solexis) on the gaskets improves tightness and life time.
2 Push the overflow tube [B] through the flow cell block as far as it
reaches the drain.
3 Install the constant head tube [C] onto the flow cell block.
4 Put the cover onto the constant head tube.
5 Align the overflow tube with the upper level mark.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 57
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.9. Maintenance of pH sensor

A Connector
B pH sensor shaft
C Flow cell cover
A D Flow cell

Clean 1 Remove the pH sensor [B] from the flow cell.


pH sensor 2 Unscrew and remove the connector [A] from the pH sensor.
Prevent the connectors from getting wet
3 If necessary wipe the pH sensor shaft and the green tip cau-
tiously with a soft, clean, and damp paper tissue.
4 Remove grease with a tissue moistened with alcohol.
CAUTION: Alcohol is inflammable.
5 If the sensor is very dirty put it into 1% diluted hydrochloric acid
for 1 min.
CAUTION! hydrochloric acid is corrosive!
6 Rinse the pH sensor with clean water.

58 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.10. Tube Replacement

6.10.1 Replace the Pump Tubes


The pump tube [D] of the peristaltic pump is exposed to a minimal
wear.
It is therefore recommended to exchange the pump tube annually.

CAUTION

Pollution of reagents possible.


If the occlusion frames are opened during operation, already
mixed reagents will flow back into the reagent canisters and pol-
lute the reagents.
Never open the occlusion frames if the instrument is in opera-
tion.
Proceed according to Stop of Operation for Maintenance, p.
43 before opening the occlusion frames.

Overview A Pump housing


B Occlusion frame
A
closed
B C Rotor
D Pump tube
C
E Pump inlet
D F Pump outlet

A-96.250.571 / 220616 59
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

Dismount The pump tube can easily be dismounted and mounted.


pump tubes Proceed as follows:
A Pump housing
B Occlusion frame open
A
C Rotor
B D Pump tube
C E Pump inlet
D F Pump outlet
E
F

1 Switch off the instrument according to instructions in Stop of


Operation for Maintenance, p. 43
2 Open the occlusion frames (B) by turning it counter-clockwise.
3 Remove the occlusion frame (B) from the rotor (C) by pulling
the complete occlusion frame out of the holder.
4 Dismount all reagent tubes from the occlusion frame.
5 Exchange the occlusion frame.
6 Install all reagent tubes.
7 Lock the occlusion frames.
8 Start fill system.

60 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.10.2 Replace the Reagent Tubes


Tube
numbering Level

Q
1 2

3 1
4 2

J K

Nr. from to
1 Pump outlet: rear frame Flow cell block: connection 1
see Flow cell block side view Q
2 Pump outlet: front frame Flow cell block: connection 2
see Flow cell block side view Q
3 Reagent canister (J) Pump inlet: rear frame
Oxycon on-line DPD
4 Reagent canister (K) Pump inlet: front frame
Oxycon on-line Buffer / KI

A-96.250.571 / 220616 61
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.11. Replacing Fuses

WARNING

External Voltage.
External supplied devices connected to relay 1 or 2 or to the
alarm relay can cause electrical shocks.
Make sure that the devices connected to the following con-
tacts are disconnected from the power before resuming in-
stallation.
relay 1
relay 2
alarm relay
When a fuse has blown, find out the cause and fix it before
replacing it with a new one.
Use tweezers or needle-nosed pliers to remove the defective fuse.
Use original fuses provided by SWAN only.

A B C D E F G

A 1.6 AT/250V Instrument power supply


B 1.0 AT/250V Relay 1
C 1.0 AT/250V Relay 2
D 1.0 AT/250V Alarm relay
E 1.0 AF/125V Signal output 2
F 1.0 AF/125V Signal output 1
G 1.0 AF/125V Signal output 3

62 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance

6.12. Longer Stop of Operation


1 Put the suction lances combined with level detector into bucket
with clean water.
2 Start <Fill system>.
The reagent tubes are flushed with water.
3 Remove the suction lance from the water.
4 Start <Fill system> again.
The water will be pumped out of the reagent tubes.
5 Stop sample flow.
6 Wait until level in flow cell has fallen to the shorter tube inside
the cell.
7 Shut off power of the instrument.
8 Empty the flow cell completely.
9 Open the occlusion frames of the peristaltic pump, see Replace
the Pump Tubes, p. 59.

If option pH is installed
10 Unscrew and remove the connector from the pH sensor.
11 Put the connector cap onto the sensor connector.
12 Fill 3.5 molar KCl (if not available: water) into the rubber cap.
13 Remove the pH sensor from the flow cell and place the rubber
cap on the tip of the sensor

CAUTION

Damage of pH sensor
Wrong storage will damage the pH sensor.
Never store the pH sensor dry.
Store the pH sensor with tip pointing downwards in a frost-
protected room.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 63
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting

7. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides some hints to make trouble shooting easier.
For any detailed information how to handle or clean parts please
see Maintenance, p. 42. For any detailed information how to pro-
gram the instrument please see Program List and Explanations, p.
76.

7.1. General Instructions


NOTICE: The sample for the manual measurement (with DPD)
must be taken directly from the flow cell.
If you need further help please contact your dealer. Note serial
number of instrument and all diagnostic values before doing so.
Diagnostic Zero photometry: 1000016000 Hz (mostly near 16 000 Hz)
values Slope photometry: 0.81.2
pH offset: New pH sensor: near 0, old pH sensor 50 mV
pH slope: typically: 5562 mV/pH unit.
Frequently
Problem Possible Reasons
asked
questions Unstable values Sample taken too close to feeding line
Sample flow too irregular or too low
Codes display Wrong manual measurement or old
higher or lower than chemicals have been used. Repeat the
manual measure- verification.
ment Reagents of AMI Codes mixed wrongly or
not completely
Sample flow alarm, Check sample flow at photometer outlet.
but there is sample It must be at least 100 ml/min. For that
place the photometer outlet tube into a
measuring cup for 1 minute.
Check sample line for pressure fluctua-
tion.
Check for regular air bubble pattern.
Check flow alarm values in menu 5.3.1.3,
p. 88)

64 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting

7.2. Calibration Errors

7.2.1 Process calibration DIS


Possible error Slope error:
message
Possible cause Corrective Action
Wrong manual measure- Repeat the manual measurement.
ment. Use fresh reagents.
Wrong reagent mixture Make a correct mixture.
Reagents not complete- Mix long and intensively.
ly solved in water.

7.2.2 Process pH
Possible error Offset error:
message
Possible cause Corrective Action
Manual measurement Repeat the manual measurement.
wrong.
Slope of last calibration Set default calibration values, see
wrong. 5.4.2, p. 95.
Repeat the calibration
pH sensor dirty, old or Clean or replace pH sensor, see
defect. Maintenance of pH sensor, p. 58.
Cable connector corroded. Replace cable and sensor.

7.2.3 Standard pH
Possible Offset error or Slope error:
error message
Possible cause Corrective Action
Old, dirty or wrong buffer Check buffers expiration date if
solutions. necessary order new buffer.
Verify programmed buffer Change programmed buffer values
values with the values of or use correct buffer solution.
the buffer solution used.
pH sensor dirty, old or Clean or replace pH sensor, see
defect. Maintenance of pH sensor, p. 58.
Cable connector corroded. Replace cable and sensor.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 65
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting

7.3. Error List


Error
Non-fatal Error. Indicates an alarm if a programmed value is ex-
ceeded.
Such Errors are marked E0xx (bold and black).
Fatal Error (blinking symbol)
Control of dosing devices is interrupted.
The indicated measured values are possibly incorrect.
Fatal Errors are divided in the following two categories:
Errors which disappear if correct measuring conditions are re-
covered (i.e. Sample Flow low).
Such Errors are marked E0xx (bold and orange)
Errors which indicate a hardware failure of the instrument.
Such Errors are marked E0xx (bold and red)

HOLD 14:10:45 Error or fatal Error


R1 Error not yet acknowledged.
R2 0.15 ppm Check Pending Errors 1.1.5 * and
take corrective action.
23 B/s 25.4 C Press [ENTER].

Main Menu 1
Reagent level low
Messages Indicates the remaining reagent in per-
Diagnostics cent.
Maintenance To see the pending Errors:
Operation Navigate to menu Messages.
Installation
Press [ENTER].
Messages 1.1 Navigate to menu Pending Errors.
Pending Errors Press [ENTER].
Maintenance List
Message List

Pending Errors 1.1.5 Press [ENTER] to acknowledge the


Error Code E002 Pending Errors. The Error is reset and
saved in the Message List.
Alarm low
* Menu numbers see
<Enter> to Acknowledge
Program Overview, p. 48

66 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting

Error Description Corrective action


E001 DIS. Alarm high check process
check programmed value in menu
5.3.1.1.1, p. 87
E002 DIS. Alarm Low check process
check programmed value in menu
5.3.1.1.25, p. 87
E003 pH Alarm high check process
correct/calibrate pH sensor, see
Calibration, p. 50
check programmed value in menu, see
5.3.1.2.1, p. 87
E004 pH Alarm low check process
correct/calibrate pH sensor, see
Calibration, p. 50
check programmed value in menu, see
5.3.1.2.21, p. 88
E005 DIS. too high check process

E007 Sample Temp. high check sample temperature


check programmed value in menu
5.3.1.4.1, p. 89
E008 Sample Temp. low check sample temperature
check programmed value in menu
5.3.1.4.2, p. 89
E009 Sample Flow high check sample input pressure
readjust sample flow
check programmed value in menu
5.3.1.3.x, p. 88
E010 Sample Flow low check sample input pressure
readjust sample flow
clean instrument, see Cleaning the
protective Filter, p. 53
check programmed value in menu
5.3.1.3.x, p. 88

A-96.250.571 / 220616 67
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting

Error Description Corrective action


E011 Temp. shorted check wiring of temperature sensor, see
Connection Diagram, p. 26
check temperature sensor
E012 Temp. disconnected check wiring of temperature sensor, see
Connection Diagram, p. 26
check temperature sensor
E013 Case Temp. high check case/environment temperature
check programmed value in menu
5.3.1.5, p. 89
E014 Case Temp. low check case/environment temperature
check programmed value in menu
5.3.1.6, p. 89
E017 Control Timeout check control device or programming in
Installation, Relay contact, Relay 1/2
5.3.2 and 5.3.3, p. 89
E018 Reagent Pump shut off power
check wiring, see Connection Diagram,
p. 26
E019 Photometer not con- shut off power
nected check wiring of photometer, see
Connection Diagram, p. 26
E020 Photometer dirty check process,
clean photometer, see Cleaning the
Photometer, p. 54
E021 DIS. invalid This error appears after start-up and will
disappear after the first valid
measurement is finished.
E022 Reagent empty refill reagents, see Refill or replace
Reagents, p. 44
E023 Cleaning solution refill cleaning solution

E024 Input active See If Fault Yes is programmed in Menu


5.3.4, p. 94
E026 IC LM75 call service

E028 Signal output open check wiring on signal outputs 1 and 2

68 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting

Error Description Corrective action


E030 EEprom Frontend call service

E031 Calibration Recout call service

E032 Wrong Frontend call service

E033 Power-on none, normal status

E034 Power-down none, normal status

E065 DPD / Buffer Operating display, upper status line. The


number next to the triangle, indicates
the remaining reagents in%. Refill
reagents on time. See Refill or replace
Reagents, p. 44
E067 Cleaning Solution Operating display, upper status line. The
number next to the triangle, indicates the
remaining cleaning solution in%. Refill
cleaning solution on time.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 69
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview

8. Program Overview
For explanations about each parameter of the menus see Program
List and Explanations, p. 76.

Menu 1 Messages informs about pending errors and mainte-


nance tasks and shows the error history. Password protection
possible. No settings can be modified.
Menu 2 Diagnostics is always accessible for everybody. No
password protection. No settings can be modified.
Menu 3 Maintenance is for service: Calibration, simulation of
outputs and set time/date. Please protect with password.
Menu 4 Operation is for the user, allowing to set limits, alarm
values, etc. The presetting is done in the menu Installation
(only for the System engineer). Please protect with password.
Menu 5 Installation: Defining assignment of all inputs and
outputs, measuring parameters, interface, passwords, etc.
Menu for the system engineer. Password strongly recom-
mended.

8.1. Messages (Main Menu 1)


Pending Errors Pending Errors 1.1.5* * Menu numbers
1.1*
Maintenance List Maintenance List 1.2.5*
1.2*
Message List Number 1.3.1*
1.3* Date, Time

70 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview

8.2. Diagnostics (Main Menu 2)


Identification Designation AMI Codes-II * Menu numbers
2.1* Version V6.00 - 11/15
Peripherals PeriClip 1 / 1.03 2.1.3.1*
2.1.3* PeriClip 2 only with cleaning module
Factory Test Instrument 2.1.4.1*
2.1.4* Motherboard
Front End
Operating Time Years / Days / Hours / Minutes / Seconds 2.1.5.1*
2.1.5*
Sensors Photometer Current Value
2.2* 2.2.1* (Raw value)
Absorbance
Cal. History Number 2.2.1.4.1*
2.2.1.4* Date, Time
Slope
Ver. History Number 2.2.1.5.1*
2.2.1.5* Date, Time
Absorbance
Reference value
pH Electrode Current Value
2.2.2* (Raw value)
Cal. History Number 2.2.2.5.1*
2.2.2.5* Date, Time
Offset
Slope
Miscellaneous Case Temp. 2.2.3.1*
2.2.3*
Sample Sample ID 2.3.1*
2.3* Sample Flow / (Raw value)
Temperature / (Nt5k)
I/O State Alarm Relay 2.4.1*
2.4* Relay 1/2 2.4.2*
Input
Signal Output 1/2
Interface Protocol 2.5.1* (only with RS485
2.5* Baud rate interface)

A-96.250.571 / 220616 71
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview

8.3. Maintenance (Main Menu 3)


Calibration Process DIS Current Value * Menu numbers
3.1* 3.1.1* Slope
Process Value 3.1.1.4*
Process pH Current Value
3.1.2* Offset
Process Value 3.1.2.4*
Standard pH (Progress) 3.1.3.5*
3.1.3*
Service Verification (Progress) 3.2.1.1*
3.2* 3.2.1*
Fill System (Progress) 3.2.2.5*
3.2.2*
Simulation Alarm Relay 3.3.1*
3.3* Relay 1 3.3.2*
Relay 2 3.3.3*
Signal Output 1 3.3.4*
Signal Output 2 3.3.5*
Set Time (Date), (Time)
3.4*
Cleaning Parameter Mode 3.5.1.1*
3.5* 3.5.1* Start time / Calendar 3.5.1.xx*
Delay 3.5.1.3*
Signal Outputs 3.5.1.4*
Output/Control 3.5.1.5*
Fill Channel 11 (Progress) 3.5.2.5*
3.5.2*
Fill Channel 12 (Progress) 3.5.3.5*
3.5.3*

72 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview

8.4. Operation (Main Menu 4)


Sensors Filter Time Const. 4.1.1*
4.1* Hold after Cal. 4.1.2*
Meas. Interval 4.1.3*
Default pH 4.1.4*
Relay Contacts Alarm Relay Alarm DIS Alarm High 4.2.1.1.1*
4.2* 4.2.1* 4.2.1.1* Alarm Low 4.2.1.1.26*
Hysteresis 4.2.1.1.36*
Delay 4.2.1.1.46*
Alarm pH Alarm High 4.2.1.2.1*
4.2.1.2* Alarm Low 4.2.1.2.x*
Hysteresis 4.2.1.2.x*
Delay 4.2.1.2.x*
Relay 1& 2 Setpoint 4.2.x.x*
4.2.2* & 4.2.3* Hysteresis 4.2.x.x*
Delay 4.2.x.x*
Input Active 4.2.4.1*
4.2.4* Signal Outputs 4.2.4.2*
Output / Control 4.2.4.3*
Fault 4.2.4.4*
Delay 4.2.4.5*
Logger Log Interval 4.3.1*
4.3* Clear Logger 4.3.2* * Menu numbers

A-96.250.571 / 220616 73
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview

8.5. Installation (Main Menu 5)


Sensors Disinf. 5.1.1* * Menu numbers
5.1* Dimension 5.1.2*
Interpolation 5.1.3*
Ref. Verification 5.1.4*
Standards Standard 1 5.1.50.1*
5.1.50* Standard 2 5.1.50.2*
Cleaning 5.1.6
Signal Outputs Signal Output 1&2 Parameter 5.2.1.1 & 5.2.2.1*
5.2* 5.2.1* & 5.2.2* Current Loop 5.2.1.2 & 5.2.2.2*
Function 5.2.1.3 & 5.2.2.3*
Scaling Range Low 5.2.x.40.x*
5.2.x.40 Range High 5.2.x.40.x*
Relay Contacts Alarm Relay Alarm DIS Alarm High 5.3.1.1.1*
5.3* 5.3.1* 5.3.1.1* Alarm Low 5.3.1.1.x*
Hysteresis 5.3.1.1.x*
Delay 5.3.1.1.x*
Alarm pH Alarm High 5.3.1.2.1*
5.3.1.2* Alarm Low 5.3.1.2.x*
Hysteresis 5.3.1.2.x*
Delay 5.3.1.2.x*
Sample Flow Flow Alarm 5.3.1.3.1*
5.3.1.3* Alarm High 5.3.1.3.x*
Alarm Low 5.3.1.3.x*
Sample Temp. Alarm High 5.3.1.4.1*
5.3.1.4* Alarm Low 5.3.1.4.x*
Case Temp. high 5.3.1.5*
Case Temp. low 5.3.1.6*
Relay 1&2 Function 5.3.2.1 & 5.3.3.1*
5.3.2* & 5.3.3* Parameter 5.3.2.x & 5.3.3.x*
Setpoint 5.3.2.x & 5.3.3.x*
Hysteresis 5.3.2.x & 5.3.3.x*
Delay 5.3.2.x & 5.3.3.x*

74 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview

Input Active 5.3.4.1*


5.3.4* Signal Outputs 5.3.4.2*
Output/Control 5.3.4.3*
Fault 5.3.4.4*
Delay 5.3.4.5*
Miscellaneous Language 5.4.1*
5.4* Set defaults 5.4.2*
Load Firmware 5.4.3*
Password Messages 5.4.4.1*
5.4.4* Maintenance 5.4.4.2*
Operation 5.4.4.3*
Installation 5.4.4.4*
Sample ID 5.4.5*
Line Break Detection 5.4.6*
Interface Protocol 5.5.1* (only with RS485
5.5* Device Address 5.5.21* interface)
Baud Rate 5.5.31*
Parity 5.5.41* * Menu numbers

A-96.250.571 / 220616 75
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

9. Program List and Explanations

1 Messages
1.1 Pending Errors
1.1.5 Provides the list of active errors with their status (active,
acknowledged). If an active error is acknowledged, the alarm relay
is active again. Cleared errors are moved to the Message list.
1.2 Maintenance List
1.2.5 Demands necessary maintenance, e.g. preparing new reagents.
1.3 Message List
1.3.1 Shows the error history: Error code, date and time of issue and
status (active, acknowledged, cleared). 65 errors are memorized.
Then the oldest error is cleared to save the newest error (circular
buffer).
2 Diagnostics
In diagnostics mode, the values can only be viewed, not modified.
2.1 Identification
Designation: View the Designation of instrument.
Version: Firmware of instrument (e.g. V6.00-11/15)
2.1.3 Peripherals: PeriClip 1: Firmware of peristaltic pump (e.g. 1.03)
2.1.4 Factory Test: Test date of the Instrument, Motherboard and
Frontend. QC factory test.
2.1.5 Operating Time: Years/Days/Hours/Minutes/Seconds
2.2 Sensors
2.2.1 Photometer:
Current value: Shows the actual photometer signal [ppm].
Raw value: Shows the actual photometer signal [Hz].
Absorbance: Process value, depends on sample.
2.2.1.4 Cal. History: Shows the diagnostic values of the last calibrations.
Number: Calibration counter.
Date, Time: Date and time of the calibration.
Slope: Slope is a correction factor calculated on the basis of a
process calibration.
Range: 0,81.2

76 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

2.2.1.5 Ver. History: Shows the verification values of the last verifications:
Number: Verification counter.
Date, Time: Date and time of the verification.
Absorbance: Measured absorbance of the reference kit.
Reference value: True value of the reference kit according to label.
2.2.2 pH Electrode: Only available if option pH is installed.
Current Value: Shows the actually measured pH value.
Raw value: Shows the actual electrode voltage in mV.
2.2.2.5 Cal. History: Shows the calibration values of the last pH sensor
calibrations. Offset in mV and slope in mV/pH.
Number: Calibration counter.
Date, Time: Date and time of the calibration.
Offset: Vertical shift above or below the zero point.
Slope: Characteristic of the pH sensor expressed in mV/pH.The
calculated slope is used for the entire measuring range of the
electrode.
Typical offset of pH electrode: < +/- 30 mV.
Max. tolerated offset: < +/- 60 mV
Typical slope of pH electrode: 5565 mV/pH unit.
Max. limits: 4065 mV/pH

2.2.3 Miscellaneous:
2.2.3.1 Case Temp: Shows the current temperature in [C] inside the
transmitter.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 77
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

2.3 Sample
2.3.1 Sample ID: Shows the identification assigned to a sample. This
identification is defined by the user to identify the location of the
sample.
Sample Flow: Shows the actual sample flow in B/s (bubbles per
second)]. The Sample flow must be above 5 B/s.
Temperature: Actual temperature in C and in Ohm (NT5K)
2.4 I/O State
Shows current status of all in- and outputs.
2.4.1/2.4.2
Alarm Relay: Active or inactive
Relay 1 and 2: Active or inactive
Input: Open or closed
Signal Output 1 and 2: Actual current in mA
Signal Output 3: Actual current in mA (if option is installed)

2.5 Interface
Only available if optional interface is installed.
Review programmed communication settings.

78 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

3 Maintenance
3.1 Calibration
In this menu, you can correct measuring values (all disinfectants
and pH) or calibrate offset and slope of pH electrode.
3.1.1 Process DIS: Possibility to correct the disinfectant value. See
Process Calibration of DIS, p. 50, for more details.
3.1.2 Process pH: Only available, if option pH has been installed.
Correction of pH electrode. See Process Calibration of DIS, p. 50,
for details.
3.1.3 Standard pH: Only available, if option pH has been installed.
Calibration of pH electrode with the two standard solutions
programmed in Installation 5.1.3. See Standard pH, p. 52, for
details.
3.2 Service
3.2.1 Verification: Performs a verification using the reference kit. Follow
dialog. See Verification, p. 49
3.2.2 Fill System: Activates the reagent pump.
3.3 Simulation
To simulate a value or a relay state, select the
alarm relay,
relay 1or 2
signal output 1 or 2
with the [ ] or [ ] key.
Press the [Enter] key.
Change the value or state of the selected item with the [ ] or
[ ] key.
Press the [Enter] key.
The value is simulated by the relay/signal output.
Alarm Relay: Active or inactive
Relay 1 and 2: Active or inactive
Signal Output 1 and 2: Actual current in mA
Signal Output 3: Actual current in mA (if option is installed)

At the absence of any key activities, the instrument will switch back
to normal mode after 20 min. If you quit the menu, all simulated val-
ues will be reset.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 79
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

3.4 Set Time


Adjust date and time.
3.5 Cleaning
Automatic cleaning process using the Cleaning module-II
controlled by transmitter of AMI Codes-II.
Measurement is interrupted.
Flow error interrupts cleaning.
Cleaning does not start: E022 Reagent empty, E023 Cleaning
solution, no flow.
3.5.1 Parameter:
3.5.1.1 Mode: Select daily, weekly or off.
3.5.1.xx Start time / Calendar: Time off day respectively weekday(s) for the
automatic start of the cleaning process.
3.5.1.3 Delay: During cleaning plus the delay time, the status of the signal-
and control outputs is as get below.
Range: 606000 sec
3.5.1.4 Signal Outputs: Select the operation mode of the signal outputs
during cleaning:
Cont.: Signal outputs continue to issue the measured value.
Hold: Signal outputs hold the last valid measured value.
Measurement is interrupted. Errors, except fatal errors,
are not issued.
Off: Signal outputs are switched off (set to 0 or 4 mA).
Errors, except fatal errors, are not issued.

3.5.1.5 Output/Control: Relay or signal output:


Cont.: Controller continues normally.
Hold: Controller continues based on the last valid value.
Off: Controller is switched off.

3.5.2 Fill Channel 11: Activates the cleaning pump and switches the
valve to the cleaning solution 1 (right canister)
3.5.3 Fill Channel 12: Activates the cleaning pump and switches the
valve to the cleaning solution 2 (left canister)

80 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

4 Operation
4.1 Sensors
4.1.1 Filter Time Constant: Used to damp noisy signals. The higher the
filter time constant, the slower the system reacts to changes of the
measured value.
Range: 5300 sec
4.1.2 Hold after Cal: Delay permitting the instrument to stabilize again
after calibration. During calibration- plus hold-time, the signal
outputs are frozen (held on last valid value), alarm values, limits are
not active.
Range: 06000 sec
4.1.3 Meas. Interval: Measurement interval for disinfectants.
Range: 1 to 12 Min.
4.1.4 Default pH: If the pH value of the sample is known it can be entered
in this menu.This menu only appears if the pH option is not
installed.
Range: 014 pH
4.2 Relay Contacts
See 5.3 Relay Contacts, p. 87
4.3 Logger
The instrument is equipped with an internal logger. The data can be
copied to a PC with an USB stick if option USB interface is in-
stalled.
The logger can save approx. 1500 data records. The records
consist of: Date, time, alarms, measured value, measured value
uncompensated, temperature, flow.
Range: 1 second to 1 hour
4.3.1 Log Interval: Select a convenient log interval. Consult the table
below to estimate the max logging time. The logging buffer is
designed as circular buffer. If the buffer is full, the oldest data
record is erased to make room for the newest one.
If the logger interval is set to event driven, a data record of every
valid measurement is saved. The interval corresponds with the
measuring interval.
Interval 1s 5s 1 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 1h Event
Driven
Time 25 min 2h 25 h 5d 10 d 31 d 62 d
4.3.2 Clear Logger: If confirmed with yes, the complete logger data is
deleted. A new data series is started.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 81
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5 Installation
5.1 Sensors
5.1.1 Disinf: Select the disinfectant in use. Available disinfectants are:
Free chlorine
Hypochl. acid
Ozone
Chlorine dioxide
Bromine
Iodine
Monochloramine

5.1.2 Dimension: The measuring value can be displayed as ppm or mg/l


5.1.3 Interpolation:
Yes: Display and output of free chlorine value changes linearly
between two measuring points. Select this mode if you encounter
problems with the controller of free chlorine.
no: Step response of display and output between two measuring
points.
5.1.4 Ref. Verification: Set absorbance value of verification kit according
to label.
Range: 0.2000.600
5.1.5 Standards: Program the two standard solutions for the calibration
of the pH electrode. If pH electrode is not connected the
programmed standards are not active.
Range: 1.00 pH13.00 pH
5.1.6 Cleaning: Program if one or two solutions are used on Cleaning
module. See 3.5 Cleaning, p. 80
Range: 1 Solution, 2 Solutions

82 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.2 Signal Outputs


5.2.1 and 5.2.2 Signal Output 1 and 2: Assign process value, the current loop
range and a function to each signal output.

NOTICE: The navigation in the menu <Signal Output 1> and


<Signal Output 2> is equal. For reason of simplicity only the
menu numbers of Signal Output 1 are used in the following.
5.2.1.1 Parameter: Assign one of the process values to the signal output.
Available values:
DIS
pH
Temperature
Sample flow
5.2.1.2 Current Loop: Select the current range of the signal output.
Make sure the connected device works with the same current
range.
Available ranges: 020 mA or 420 mA
5.2.1.3 Function: Define if the signal output is used to transmit a process
value or to drive a control unit. Available functions are:
Linear, bilinear or logarithmic for process values.
See As process values, p. 83
Control upwards or control downwards for controllers.
See As control output, p. 85
As process The process value can be represented in 3 ways: linear, bilinear or
values logarithmic. See graphs below.
[mA]

20
(0 - 20 [mA])

(4 - 20 [mA])

B A
10 12

0/4 X
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5

A linear X Measured value


B bilinear

A-96.250.571 / 220616 83
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

[mA]

20
(0 - 20 [mA])

(4 - 20 [mA])

10 12

0/4 X
2 4 6
1 10 100 1000 10000
0 1 2 3 4

X Measured value (logarithmic)


5.2.1.40 Scaling: Enter beginning and end point (Range low & high) of the
linear or logarithmic scale. In addition, the midpoint for the bilinear
scale.

Parameter DIS:
5.2.1.40.10 Range low: 010 ppm or 010 mg/l
5.2.1.40.20 Range high: 010 ppm or 010 mg/l

Parameter pH
5.2.1.40.11 Range low: 0 14 pH
5.2.1.40.21 Range high: 0 14 pH

Parameter Temperature
5.2.1.40.12 Range low: -30 to +120 C
5.2.1.40.22 Range high: -30 to +120 C

Parameter Sample flow


5.2.1.40.13 Range low: 0 600 B/s
5.2.1.40.23 Range high: 0 600 B/s

84 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

As control Signal outputs can be used for driving control units. We distinguish
output different kinds of controls:
P-controller: The controller action is proportional to the devia-
tion from the setpoint. The controller is characterized by the
P-Band. In the steady-state, the setpoint will never be
reached. The deviation is called steady-state error.
Parameters: setpoint, P-Band
PI-controller: The combination of a P-controller with an
I-controller will minimize the steady-state error. If the reset
time is set to zero, the I-controller is switched off.
Parameters: setpoint, P-Band, reset time.
PD-controller: The combination of a P-controller with a
D-controller will minimize the response time to a fast change
of the process value. If the derivative time is set to zero, the
D-controller is switched off.
Parameters: setpoint, P-Band, derivative time.
PID-controller: The combination of a P-, an I - and a D-con-
troller allows a proper control of the process.
Parameters: setpoint, P-Band, reset time, derivative time.
Ziegler-Nichols method for the optimization of a PID controller:
Parameters: Setpoint, P-Band, Reset time, Derivative time
Y

B A

X
a

A Response to maximum control output Xp = 1.2/a


B Tangent on the inflection point Tn = 2L
X Time Tv = L/2

The point of intersection of the tangent with the respective axis will
result in the parameters a and L.
Consult the manual of the control unit for connecting and
programming details. Choose control upwards or downwards.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 85
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

Control upwards/downwards
Setpoint: User-defined process value (Measured value or flow)
P-Band: Range below (upwards control) or above (downwards
control) the set-point, within the dosing intensity is reduced from
100% to 0% to reach the set-point without overshooting.
5.2.1.43 Control Parameters: if Parameters = DIS
5.2.1.43.10 Setpoint: 05 ppm or 05 mg/l
5.2.1.43.20 P-Band: 05 ppm 05 mg/l
5.2.1.43 Control Parameters: if Parameters = pH
5.2.1.43.11 Setpoint: 0 14 pH
5.2.1.43.21 P-Band: 0 14 pH
5.2.1.43 Control Parameters: if Parameters = Temperature
5.2.1.43.12 Setpoint: -30 to +120 C
5.2.1.43.22 P-Band: 0 to +100 C
5.2.1.43 Control Parameters: if Parameters = Sample Flow
5.2.1.43.13 Setpoint: 0600 B/s
5.2.1.43.23 P-Band: 0 200 B/s

Reset time: The reset time is the time till the step response of a
single I-controller will reach the same value as it will be suddenly
reached by a P-controller.
Range: 09000 sec
Derivative time: The derivative time is the time till the ramp
response of a single P-controller will reach the same value as it will
be suddenly reached by a D-controller.
Range: 09000 sec
Control timeout: If a controller action (dosing intensity) is constantly
over 90% during a defined period of time and the process value
does not come closer to the setpoint, the dosing process will be
stopped for safety reasons.
Range: 0720 min

86 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.3 Relay Contacts


5.3.1 Alarm Relay: The alarm relay is used as cumulative error indicator.
Under normal operating conditions the contact is active.
The contact is inactive at:
Power loss
Detection of system faults like defective sensors or electronic
parts
High case temperature
Lack of reagents
Process values out of programmed ranges.
Program alarm levels, hysteresis values and delay times for the
following parameters:
DIS
pH
Temperature
Sample flow
The alarm values of Sample Flow and Temperature can be
programmed in menu as well (5.3.1.3, p. 88 or 5.3.1.4, p. 89)
5.3.1.1 Alarm DIS.
5.3.1.1.1 Alarm High: If the measured value rises above the alarm high
value, the alarm relay is activated and E001 is displayed in the
message list. Range: 0.0010.00 ppm
5.3.1.1.25 Alarm Low: If the measured value falls below the alarm low value,
the alarm relay is activated and E002 is displayed in the message
list.
Range: 0.0010.00 ppm
5.3.1.1.35 Hysteresis: Within the hyst. range, the relay does not switch. This
prevents damage of relays contacts when the measured value
fluctuates around the alarm value.
Range. 0.0010.00 ppm
5.3.1.1.45 Delay: Duration, the activation of the alarm relay is retarded after
the measuring value has risen above/fallen below the programmed
alarm.
Range: 0.0028800 sec
5.3.1.2 Alarm pH: Only available if pH option is installed. Define the
measuring value, which should issue an alarm high respectively
low.
5.3.1.2.1 Alarm High: If the measured value rises above the alarm high
value, the alarm relay is activated and E003 is displayed in the

A-96.250.571 / 220616 87
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

message list.
Range: 014.00 pH
5.3.1.2.21 Alarm Low: If the measured value falls below the alarm low value,
the alarm relay is activated and E004 is displayed in the message
list
Range: 014.00 pH
5.3.1.2.31 Hysteresis: Within the hyst. range, the relay does not switch. This
prevents damage of relays contacts when the measured value
fluctuates around the alarm value
Range: 014.00 pH
5.3.1.2.41 Delay: Duration, the activation of the alarm relay is retarded after
the measuring value has risen above/fallen below the programmed
alarm.
Range: 028800 sec
5.3.1.3 Sample Flow: Define at which sample flow a flow alarm should be
issued.
5.3.1.3.1 Flow Alarm: Program if the alarm relay should be activated if there
is a flow alarm. Choose between yes or no. The flow alarm will
always be indicated in the display, pending error list, saved in the
message list and the logger.
Available values: Yes or no

NOTICE: Sufficient flow is essential for a correct measurement.


We recommend to program yes.
5.3.1.3.x Alarm High: If the measuring values rises above the programmed
value E009 will be issued.
Range: 100600 B/s
5.3.1.3.x Alarm Low: If the measuring values falls below the programmed
value E010 will be issued.
Range: 580 B/s

88 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.3.1.4 Sample Temperature: Only available if pH option is installed.


Define the measuring value, which should issue an alarm high
respectively low.
5.3.1.4.1 Alarm High: If the sample temperature rises above the
programmed value E007 is issued.
Range: 3070 C
5.3.1.4.2 Alarm Low: If the sample temperature falls below the programmed
value E008 is issued.
Range: 020 C
5.3.1.5 Case Temp. high: Set the alarm high value for temperature of
electronics housing. If the value rises above the programmed value
E013 is issued.
Range: 3075 C
5.3.1.6 Case Temp. low: Set the alarm low value for temperature of
electronics housing. If the value falls below the programmed value
E014 is issued.
Range: -10 to + 20 C
5.3.2 and 5.3.3 Relay 1 and 2: The contacts can be set as normally open or
normally closed with a jumper. See Relay 1 and 2, p. 29.
The function of the relay contacts 1 and 2 is defined by the user.

NOTICE: The navigation in the menu <Relay 1> and <Relay 2>
is equal. For reason of simplicity only the menu numbers of
Relay 1 are used in the following.
1 First select the functions as:
- Limit upper/lower,
- Control upwards/downwards,
- Timer
- Fieldbus
- End of Batch (relay 2 only)
2 Then enter the necessary data depending on the selected func-
tion.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 89
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.3.2.1 Function = Limit upper/lower:


When the relays are used as upper or lower limit switches, program
the following:
5.3.2.20 Parameter: select a process value
5.3.2.300 Setpoint: If the measured value rises above respectively falls below
the set-point, the relay is activated.

Parameter Range
DIS 05 ppm
pH 014.00 pH
Temperature -30 to +120 C
Sample flow 0600 B/s

5.3.2.400 Hysteresis: within the hysteresis range, the relay does not switch.
This prevents damage of relay contacts when the measured value
fluctuates around the alarm value.

Parameter Range
DIS 05 ppm
pH 014.00 pH
Temperature 0 to +100 C
Sample flow 0200 B/s
5.3.2.50 Delay: Duration, the activation of the alarm relay is retarded after
the measuring value has risen above/fallen below the programmed
alarm.
Range. 0600 sec

90 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.3.2.1 Function = Control upwards/downwards:


The relays may be used to drive control units such as solenoid
valves, membrane dosing pumps or motor valves. When driving a
motor valve both relays are needed, relay 1 to open and relay 2 to
close the valve.
5.3.2.22 Parameter: Choose on of the following process values.
DIS
pH
Temperature
Sample Flow
5.3.2.32 Settings: Choose the respective actuator:
Time proportional
Frequency
Motor valve
5.3.2.32.1 Actuator = Time proportional
Examples of metering devices that are driven time proportional are
solenoid valves, peristaltic pumps.
Dosing is controlled by the operating time.
5.3.2.32.20 Cycle time: duration of one control cycle (on/off change).
Range: 0600 sec.
5.3.2.32.30 Response time: Minimal time the metering device needs to react.
Range: 0240 sec.
5.3.2.32.4 Control Parameters
Range for each Parameter same as 5.2.1.43, p. 86

5.3.2.32.1 Actuator = Frequency

Examples of metering devices that are pulse frequency driven are


the classic membrane pumps with a potential free triggering input.
Dosing is controlled by the repetition speed of dosing shots.
5.3.2.32.21 Pulse frequency: Max. pulses per minute the device is able to re-
spond to. Range: 20300/min.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 91
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.3.2.32.31 Control Parameters


Range for each Parameter same as 5.2.1.43, p. 86

5.3.2.32.1 Actuator = Motor valve


Dosing is controlled by the position of a motor driven mixing valve.
5.3.2.32.22 Run time: Time needed to open a completely closed valve
Range: 5300 sec.
5.3.2.32.32 Neutral zone: Minimal response time in % of the runtime. If the re-
quested dosing output is smaller than the response time, no
change will take place.
Range: 120 %
5.3.2.32.4 Control Parameters
Range for each Parameter same as 5.2.1.43, p. 86
5.3.2.1 Function = Timer:
The relay will be active repetitively depending on the programmed
time scheme.

5.3.2.24 Mode: Operating mode (interval, daily, weekly)


5.3.2.24 Interval
5.3.2.340 Interval: The interval can be programmed within a range
of 11440 min.
5.3.2.44 Run Time: Enter the time the relay stays active.
Range: 532400 sec.
5.3.2.54 Delay: during run time plus the delay time the signal and control
outputs are held in the operating mode programmed below.
Range: 06000 sec.
5.3.2.6 Signal Outputs: Select operating mode of the signal output:
Cont.: Signal outputs continue to issue the measured value.
Hold: Signal outputs hold the last valid measured value.
Measurement is interrupted. Errors, except fatal errors,
are not issued.
Off: Signal outputs are switched off (set to 0 or 4 mA).
Errors, except fatal errors, are not issued.

92 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.3.2.7 Output/Control: Select operating mode of the controller output:


Cont.: Controller continues normally.
Hold: Controller continues based on the last valid value.
Off: Controller is switched off.

5.3.2.24 daily
The relay contact can be activated daily, at any time of a day.
5.3.2.341 Start time: to set the start time proceed as follows:
1 Press [Enter], to set the hours.
2 Set the hour with the [ ] or [ ] keys.
3 Press [Enter], to set the minutes.
4 Set the minutes with the [ ] or [ ] keys.
5 Press [Enter], to set the seconds.
6 Set the seconds with the [ ] or [ ] keys.
Range: 00:00:0023:59:59
5.3.2.44 Run Time: see Interval
5.3.2.54 Delay: see Interval
5.3.2.6 Signal Outputs: see Interval
5.3.2.7 Output/Control: see Interval
5.3.2.24 weekly
The relay contact can be activated at one or several days, of a
week. The daily starting time is valid for all days.
5.3.2.342 Calendar:
5.3.2.342.1 Start time: The programmed start time is valid for each of the pro-
grammed days. To set the start time see 5.3.2.341, p. 93.
Range: 00:00:0023:59:59
5.3.2.342.2 Monday: Possible settings, on or off
to
5.3.2.342.8 Sunday: Possible settings, on or off
5.3.2.44 Run Time: see Interval
5.3.2.54 Delay: see Interval
5.3.2.6 Signal Outputs: see Interval
5.3.2.7 Output/Control: see Interval

A-96.250.571 / 220616 93
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.3.2.1 Function = Fieldbus:


The relay will be switched via the Profibus input. No further param-
eters are needed.
5.3.3.1 Function = End of Batch
This function is only available on relay 2. It is used to communicate
with canal switching instruments from third-party suppliers. The
relay closes for 1 sec. after each valid measurement. If End of
Batch is selected, no further selection is possible.

5.3.4 Input: The functions of the relays and signal outputs can be de-
fined depending on the position of the input contact, i.e. no function,
closed or open.
5.3.4.1 Active: Define when the input should be active:
No: Input is never active.
When closed Input is active if the input relay is closed
When open: Input is active if the input relay is open
5.3.4.2 Signal Outputs: Select the operation mode of the signal outputs
when the relay is active:
Cont.: Signal outputs continue to issue the measured
value.
Hold: Signal outputs issue the last valid measured value.
Measurement is interrupted. Errors, except fatal
errors, are not issued.
Off: Set to 0 or 4 mA respectively. Errors, except fatal
errors, are not issued.
5.3.4.3 Output/Control: (relay or signal output):
Cont.: Controller continues normally.
Hold: Controller continues on the last valid value.
Off: Controller is switched off.

94 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.3.4.4 Fault:
No: No message is issued in pending error list and the
alarm relay does not close when input is active.
Message E024 is stored in the message list.
Yes: Message E024 is issued and stored in the message
list. The Alarm relay closes when input is active.
5.3.4.5 Delay: Time which the instrument waits, after the input is deactivat-
ed, before returning to normal operation.
Range: 06000 sec

5.4 Miscellaneous
5.4.1 Language: Set the desired language.
Available settings: German /English/French/Spanish
5.4.2 Set defaults: Reset the instrument to factory default values in three
different ways:
Calibration: Sets calibration values back to default. All other
values are kept in memory.
In parts: Communication parameters are kept in memory. All
other values are set back to default values.
Completely: Sets back all values including communication
parameters.
5.4.3 Load Firmware: Firmware updates should be done by instructed
service personnel only.
5.4.4 Password: Select a password different from 0000 to prevent unau-
thorized access to the menus Messages, Maintenance, Opera-
tion and Installation.
Each menu may be protected by a different password.
If you forgot the passwords, contact the closest SWAN representa-
tive.
5.4.5 Sample ID: Identify the process value with any meaning full text,
such as KKS number.
5.4.6 Line Break Detection: If activated, error message E028 is shown in
case of line break on signal outputs 1 and 2.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 95
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations

5.5 Interface
Select one of the following communication protocols. Depending on
your selection, different parameters must be defined.

5.5.1 Protocol: Profibus


5.5.20 Device address: Range: 0126
5.5.30 ID-Nr.: Range: Analyzer; Manufacturer; Multivariable
5.5.40 Local operation: Range: Enabled, Disabled
5.5.1 Protocol: Modbus RTU
5.5.21 Device address: Range: 0126
5.5.31 Baud Rate: Range: 1200115 200 Baud
5.5.41 Parity: Range: none, even, odd
5.5.1 Protocol: USB-Stick:
Only visible if an USB interface is installed. No further settings are
possible.

96 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Material Safety Data sheets

10. Material Safety Data sheets

10.1. Reagents
Catalogue No.: A-85.410.120
Product name: OXYCON ON-LINE DPD

Catalogue No.: A-85.410.120


Product name: OXYCON ON-LINE Buffer

Catalogue No: A-85.419.200


Product name: OXYCON ON-LINE KI

Catalogue No.: A-85.112.300


Product name: Calibration Solution pH 4

Catalogue No.: A-85.113.300


Product name: Calibration Solution pH 7

Catalogue No: A-85.114.300


Product name: Calibration Solution pH 9

Download The current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for the above list-
MSDS ed Reagents are available for downloading at www.swan.ch.

A-96.250.571 / 220616 97
AMI Codes-II
Default Values

11. Default Values


NOTICE: The parameter Cleaning is only visible if an optional
Cleaning Module is connected to the AMI Codes II.
The parameters pH and Temperature are only visible if the
option pH is installed.
Operation:
Sensors: Filter Time Const.:..................................................................30 Sec
Hold after Cal.:.....................................................................120 Sec
Meas. Interval: ......................................................................... 5 Min
Default pH (If pH option is not installed) .............................. 7.00 pH
Alarm Relay ...................................................................... same as in Installation
Relay 1and 2 ...................................................................... same as in Installation
Input ...................................................................... same as in Installation
Logger: Logger Interval:........................................................... Event Driven
Clear Logger: ................................................................................no
Installation:
Sensor: Disinf:...........................................................................Free chlorine
Dimension..................................................................................ppm
Interpolation: ............................................................................... yes
Ref. Verification:.......................................................................0.255
Standard: Standard 1:.......................................................... 7.00 pH
Standard: Standard 2:.......................................................... 9.00 pH
Cleaning.......................................................................... 2 Solutions
Signal Output Parameter: .................................................................................DIS.
1&2 Current loop: ......................................................................420 mA
Function: .................................................................................. linear
Scaling: Range low: ...........................................................0.00 ppm
Scaling: Range high:..........................................................5.00 ppm
Scaling: pH: Range low: ..................................................... 0.00 pH
Scaling: pH: Range high: ................................................... 14.00 pH
Scaling: Temperature: Range low: ......................................... 0.0 C
Scaling: Temperature: Range high:.......................................50.0 C
Scaling: Sample Flow: Range low: ...........................................0 B/s
Scaling: Sample Flow: Range high:......................................200 B/s
Alarm Relay Alarm DIS.:
Alarm high:.........................................................................5.00 ppm
Alarm low: ..........................................................................0.00 ppm
Hysteresis: .........................................................................0.10 ppm
Delay:.......................................................................................5 Sec

98 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Default Values

pH: Alarm high: .................................................................. 14.00 pH


pH: Alarm low: ..................................................................... 0.00 pH
pH: Hysteresis: .................................................................... 0.10 pH
pH: Delay:................................................................................ 5 Sec
Sample Flow: Flow Alarm: .......................................................... yes
Sample Flow: Alarm High: .................................................... 500 B/s
Sample Flow: Alarm Low: ......................................................... 5 B/s
Sample Temp.: Alarm High: ..................................................... 55 C
Sample Temp.: Alarm Low: ........................................................ 5 C
Case temp. high: ..................................................................... 65 C
Case temp. low:......................................................................... 0 C
Relay 1and 2 Function:......................................................................... Limit upper
Parameter:................................................................................. DIS.
Setpoint: ............................................................................ 5.00 ppm
Hysteresis:......................................................................... 0.10 ppm
Delay: .................................................................................... 30 Sec
If Function = Control upw. or dnw:
Parameter:.................................................................................. DIS
Settings: Actuator: .......................................................... Frequency
Settings: Pulse Frequency: .............................................120/min.
Settings: Control Parameters: Setpoint:......................... 5.00 ppm
Settings: Control Parameters: P-band: .......................... 0.10 ppm
Parameter:................................................................................... pH
Settings: Actuator: .......................................................... Frequency
Settings: Pulse Frequency: .............................................120/min.
Settings: Control Parameters: Setpoint:........................... 7.00 pH
Settings: Control Parameters: P-band: ............................ 0.10 pH
Parameter:...................................................................Temperature
Settings: Actuator: .......................................................... Frequency
Settings: Pulse Frequency: .............................................120/min.
Settings: Control Parameters: Setpoint:............................... 30 C
Settings: Control Parameters: P-band: .................................. 1 C
Parameter:.................................................................. Sample Flow
Settings: Actuator: .......................................................... Frequency
Settings: Pulse Frequency: .............................................120/min.
Settings: Control Parameters: Setpoint:........................... 200 B/s
Settings: Control Parameters: P-band: .............................. 20 B/s
Common settings
Settings: Control Parameters: Reset time:........................... 0 Sec
Settings: Control Parameters: Derivative Time: ................... 0 Sec
Settings: Control Parameters: Control Timeout:................... 0 Min

A-96.250.571 / 220616 99
AMI Codes-II
Default Values

Settings: Actuator:................................................. Time proportional


Cycle time: ............................................................................. 60 s
Response time: ..................................................................... 10 s
Settings: Actuator.......................................................... Motor valve
Run time: ............................................................................... 60 s
Neutral zone: ...........................................................................5%
If Function = Timer:
Mode:.................................................................................... Interval
Interval:................................................................................. 1 min
Mode: ....................................................................................... daily
Start time: ........................................................................00.00.00
Mode:.....................................................................................weekly
Calendar; Start time: .......................................................00.00.00
Calendar; Monday to Sunday:.................................................. Off
Run time: ...............................................................................10 Sec
Delay:.......................................................................................5 Sec
Signal output:............................................................................. cont
Output/Control: .......................................................................... cont
Input: Active ............................................................................when closed
Signal Outputs ........................................................................... hold
Output/Control .............................................................................. off
Fault..............................................................................................no
Delay......................................................................................10 Sec
Miscellaneous Language:............................................................................. English
Set default:....................................................................................no
Load firmware: ..............................................................................no
Password: ........................................................... for all modes 0000
Sample ID: ....................................................................... - - - - - - - -
Line break detection .....................................................................no
Interface Protocol:....................................................... depending on interface

100 A-96.250.571 / 220616


AMI Codes-II
Index

12. Index
A Interface Profibus DP . . . . 33
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Interface RS485 . . . . . . . 33
Alarm Interface USB . . . . . . . . 33
DIS . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Interpolation . . . . . . . 82, 98
pH . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Interrupt measurement . . . 10
Sample flow . . . . . . . 88
Sample temperature . . 89 L
Alarm Relay . . . . 10, 28, 87 Logger .......... 81, 98
Application range . . . . . . . 9
M
C Measurement interval 44, 81, 98
Cable thicknesses . ..... 24 Measuring Range . . . . . . 13
Cal. History . . . . . ..... 77 Measuring range. . . . . . . . 9
Calendar . . . . . . ..... 93 Message List . . . . . . . . . 76
Calibration Mounting requirements . . . 17
DIS . . . . . . . ... 50, 79
pH . . . . . . . 37, 51, 79
O
Changing values . . . . . . . 41 On site requirements .... 16
Cleaning module . . 10, 80, 82
On-site requirements .... 13
Current outputs . . . . . . . 31
P
D
Pending Errors . . . . . . . . 76
Disinfectant . . . . . . . . . 9, 82 pH Electrode . . 16, 37, 58, 77
pH gain . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
E pH Measurement . . . . 10, 77
Electrical wiring ....... 16 pH offset . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Power Supply . . . . . . . . 13
F Process calibration . . . . . 17
Fill System . . . . . . . . 36, 79 Process DIS . . . . 37, 50, 79
Flow Alarm . . . . . . . . 64, 88 Process pH . . . . . . . . 51, 79
Fluidics . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
R
I Reagent consumption. . . . 44
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 28 Relay . . . . . . . . 10, 89, 99
Instrument Setup . . . . . . 16 Relay Box. . . . . . . . . . . 10
Interface Modbus . . . . . . 33

A-96.250.571 / 220616 101


AMI Codes-II
Index

S Tube numbering ....... 61


Sample Flow . . . . 35, 78, 88
Sample requirements . . . . 13 V
Sample Temperature . . . . 89 Ver. History . . . . . . . . . . 77
Signal Outputs . . . 10, 31, 83 Verification . . . . . 49, 79, 82
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Slope photometry . . . . . . 64
W
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Wire .............. 24
Standard pH . . . . . . 52, 79
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Z
T
Zero photometry ....... 64
Terminals ... 26, 2829, 33

102 A-96.250.571 / 220616


AMI Codes-II
Notes

13. Notes

A-96.250.571 / 220616 103


AMI Codes-II

SWAN
is represented worldwide by subsidiary companies
and distributors.

cooperates with independent representatives


all over the world.

SWAN Products
Analytical Instruments for:

High Purity Water

Feedwater, Steam and Condensate

Potable Water

Pool and Sanitary Water

Cooling Water

Waste Water and Effluents

Made in Switzerland

104 A-96.250.571 / 220616


1.6InstructionManualforWaterLevelSensor
ApplicableModel Area
SN61Y.XXANHAMAX INTAKE
SN61Y.XXANHAMAX PRASEDIMENTASI
SN61Y.XXANHAMAX IPA&PEMBUBUHKIMIA
SN61Y.XXANHAMAX RESERVOIRIPA
Operating Instructions
Ultrasonic sensor for continuous level
measurement

VEGASON 61
4 20 mA/HART - two-wire

Document ID: 28775


Contents

Contents
1 About this document
1.1 Function............................................................................................................................ 4
1.2 Target group...................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Symbols used................................................................................................................... 4
2 For your safety
2.1 Authorised personnel........................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Appropriate use................................................................................................................. 5
2.3 Warning about incorrect use.............................................................................................. 5
2.4 General safety instructions................................................................................................ 5
2.5 Safety label on the instrument........................................................................................... 6
2.6 CE conformity.................................................................................................................... 6
2.7 Fulfillment of NAMUR recommendations.......................................................................... 6
2.8 Environmental instructions................................................................................................ 6
3 Product description
3.1 Configuration..................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Principle of operation........................................................................................................ 8
3.3 Packaging, transport and storage...................................................................................... 8
3.4 Accessories and replacement parts.................................................................................. 9
4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions........................................................................................................ 11
4.2 Mounting instructions...................................................................................................... 12
5 Connecting to power supply
5.1 Preparing the connection................................................................................................ 20
5.2 Connection procedure..................................................................................................... 21
5.3 Wiring plan, single chamber housing.............................................................................. 22
5.4 Wiring plan, double chamber housing............................................................................. 23
5.5 Wiring plan - version IP66/IP68 (1bar).......................................................................... 25
5.6 Switch-on phase............................................................................................................. 26
6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM
6.1 Insert display and adjustment module............................................................................. 27
6.2 Adjustment system.......................................................................................................... 28
6.3 Setup steps..................................................................................................................... 29
6.4 Menu schematic.............................................................................................................. 40
6.9 Saving the parameter adjustment data............................................................................ 42
7 Set up with PACTware and other adjustment programs
7.1 Connect the PC via VEGACONNECT............................................................................. 43
7.2 Parameter adjustment with PACTware............................................................................. 44
7.3 Parameter adjustment with AMS and PDM.................................................................. 45
7.4 Saving the parameter adjustment data............................................................................ 46
8 Maintenance and fault rectification
28775-EN-150603

8.1 Maintenance................................................................................................................... 47
8.2 Rectify faults.................................................................................................................... 47
8.3 Exchanging the electronics module................................................................................. 48
8.4 Software update.............................................................................................................. 48
8.5 How to proceed if a repair is necessary........................................................................... 49

2 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


Contents

9 Dismount
9.1 Dismounting steps.......................................................................................................... 50
9.2 Disposal.......................................................................................................................... 50
10 Supplement
10.1 Technical data................................................................................................................. 51
10.2 Dimensions..................................................................................................................... 56
28775-EN-150603

Safety instructions for Ex areas


Take note of the Ex specific safety instructions for Ex applications.
These instructions are attached as documents to each instrument
with Ex approval and are part of the operating instructions manual.
Editing status: 2015-05-21

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 3


1 About this document

1 About this document


1.1 Function
This operating instructions manual provides all the information you
need for mounting, connection and setup as well as important instruc-
tions for maintenance and fault rectification. Please read this informa-
tion before putting the instrument into operation and keep this manual
accessible in the immediate vicinity of the device.

1.2 Target group


This operating instructions manual is directed to trained specialist
personnel. The contents of this manual should be made available to
these personnel and put into practice by them.

1.3 Symbols used


Information, tip, note
This symbol indicates helpful additional information.
Caution: If this warning is ignored, faults or malfunctions can result.
Warning: If this warning is ignored, injury to persons and/or serious
damage to the instrument can result.
Danger: If this warning is ignored, serious injury to persons and/or
destruction of the instrument can result.
Ex applications
This symbol indicates special instructions for Ex applications.
SIL applications
This symbol indicates instructions for functional safety which must be
taken into account particularly for safety-relevant applications.
List
The dot set in front indicates a list with no implied sequence.
Action
This arrow indicates a single action.
1 Sequence of actions
Numbers set in front indicate successive steps in a procedure.
Battery disposal
This symbol indicates special information about the disposal of bat-
teries and accumulators.
28775-EN-150603

4 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


2 For your safety

2 For your safety


2.1 Authorised personnel
All operations described in this operating instructions manual must
be carried out only by trained specialist personnel authorised by the
plant operator.
During work on and with the device the required personal protective
equipment must always be worn.

2.2 Appropriate use


VEGASON 61 is a sensor for continuous level measurement.
You can find detailed information about the area of application in
chapter "Product description".
Operational reliability is ensured only if the instrument is properly
used according to the specifications in the operating instructions
manual as well as possible supplementary instructions.
For safety and warranty reasons, any invasive work on the device
beyond that described in the operating instructions manual may be
carried out only by personnel authorised by the manufacturer. Arbi-
trary conversions or modifications are explicitly forbidden.

2.3 Warning about incorrect use


Inappropriate or incorrect use of the instrument can give rise to
application-specific hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to system
components through incorrect mounting or adjustment.

2.4 General safety instructions


This is a state-of-the-art instrument complying with all prevailing
regulations and guidelines. The instrument must only be operated in a
technically flawless and reliable condition. The operator is responsible
for the trouble-free operation of the instrument.
During the entire duration of use, the user is obliged to determine the
compliance of the necessary occupational safety measures with the
current valid rules and regulations and also take note of new regula-
tions.
The safety instructions in this operating instructions manual, the na-
tional installation standards as well as the valid safety regulations and
accident prevention rules must be observed by the user.
For safety and warranty reasons, any invasive work on the device
beyond that described in the operating instructions manual may be
carried out only by personnel authorised by the manufacturer. Arbi-
trary conversions or modifications are explicitly forbidden.
The safety approval markings and safety tips on the device must also
28775-EN-150603

be observed.

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 5


2 For your safety

2.5 Safety label on the instrument


The safety approval markings and safety tips on the device must be
observed.

2.6 CE conformity
The device fulfills the legal requirements of the applicable EC guide-
lines. By affixing the CE marking, we confirm successful testing of the
product.
You can find the CE Certificate of Conformity in the download section
of our homepage.

2.7 Fulfillment of NAMUR recommendations


NAMUR is the automation technology user association in the process
industry in Germany. The published NAMUR recommendations are
accepted as the standard in field instrumentation.
The device fulfills the requirements of the following NAMUR recom-
mendations:
NE21 Electromagnetic compatibility of equipment
NE43 Signal level for malfunction information from measuring
transducers
NE53 Compatibility of field devices and display/adjustment
components
For further information see www.namur.de.

2.8 Environmental instructions


Protection of the environment is one of our most important duties.
That is why we have introduced an environment management system
with the goal of continuously improving company environmental pro-
tection. The environment management system is certified according
to DINENISO14001.
Please help us fulfill this obligation by observing the environmental
instructions in this manual:
Chapter "Packaging, transport and storage"
Chapter "Disposal"
28775-EN-150603

6 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


3 Product description

3 Product description
3.1 Configuration
Scope of delivery The scope of delivery encompasses:
Ultrasonic sensor
Documentation
Quick setup guide VEGASON 61
Instructions for optional instrument features
Ex-specific "Safety instructions" (with Ex versions)
if necessary, further certificates

DVD "Software", included therein


PACTware/DTM Collection
Driver software

Information:
In this operating instructions manual, the optional instrument features
are described. The respective scope of delivery results from the order
specification.
Constituent parts
1

Fig. 1: VEGASON 61 - version with plastic housing


1 Housing cover with integrated PLICSCOM (optional)
2 Housing with electronics, optionally available with plug connector
3 Process fitting with transducer

The VEGASON 61 consists of the components:


Transducer with integrated temperature sensor
Housing with electronics, optionally available with plug connector
Housing cover, optionally available with display and adjustment
28775-EN-150603

module PLICSCOM
The components are available in different versions.

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 7


3 Product description

Type label The type label contains the most important data for identification and
use of the instrument:
Instrument type
Article and serial number device
Article numbers, documentation
Technical data: For example approvals, process temperature,
process fitting/material, signal output, power supply, protection
SIL identification (with SIL rating ex works)
With the serial number, you can access the delivery data of the instru-
ment via www.vega.com, "VEGA Tools" and "serial number search".
You can find the serial number on the inside of the instrument as well
as on the type label on the outside.

Scope of this operating This operating instructions manual applies to the following instrument
instructions manual versions:
Hardware version <2.0.0
Software version 3.8

3.2 Principle of operation


Application area VEGASON 61 is an ultrasonic sensor for continuous level measure-
ment. It is suitable for liquids and solids in virtually all industries,
particularly in the water and waste water industry.

Functional principle The transducer of the ultrasonic sensor transmits short ultrasonic
pulses to the measured product. These pulses are reflected by
product surface and received back by the transducer as echoes.
The running time of the ultrasonic pulses from emission to reception
is proportional to the distance and hence the level. The determined
level is converted into an appropriate output signal and outputted as
measured value.

Voltage supply 420mA/HART two-wire electronics for voltage supply and meas-
ured value transmission on the same cable.
The supply voltage range can differ depending on the instrument
version.
The data for power supply are specified in chapter "Technical data".
The backlight of the display and adjustment module is powered by
the sensor. The prerequisite for this is a supply voltage at a certain
level. The exact voltage specifications are stated in chapter "Technical
data".
The optional heating requires its own operating voltage. You can find
details in the supplementary instructions manual "Heating for display
and adjustment module".
This function is generally not available for approved instruments.
28775-EN-150603

3.3 Packaging, transport and storage


Packaging Your instrument was protected by packaging during transport. Its
capacity to handle normal loads during transport is assured by a test
based on ISO4180.

8 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


3 Product description

The packaging of standard instruments consists of environment-


friendly, recyclable cardboard. For special versions, PE foam or PE
foil is also used. Dispose of the packaging material via specialised
recycling companies.

Transport Transport must be carried out in due consideration of the notes on the
transport packaging. Nonobservance of these instructions can cause
damage to the device.

Transport inspection The delivery must be checked for completeness and possible transit
damage immediately at receipt. Ascertained transit damage or con-
cealed defects must be appropriately dealt with.

Storage Up to the time of installation, the packages must be left closed and
stored according to the orientation and storage markings on the
outside.
Unless otherwise indicated, the packages must be stored only under
the following conditions:
Not in the open
Dry and dust free
Not exposed to corrosive media
Protected against solar radiation
Avoiding mechanical shock and vibration
Storage and transport Storage and transport temperature see chapter "Supplement -
temperature Technical data - Ambient conditions"
Relative humidity 2085%

3.4 Accessories and replacement parts


PLICSCOM The display and adjustment module PLICSCOM is used for measured
value indication, adjustment and diagnosis. It can be inserted into the
sensor and removed at any time.
You can find further information in the operating instructions "Display
and adjustment module PLICSCOM" (Document-ID 27835).

VEGACONNECT The interface adapter VEGACONNECT enables the connection of


communication-capable instruments to the USB interface of a PC. For
parameter adjustment of these instruments, an adjustment software
such as PACTware with VEGA-DTM is required.
You can find further information in the operating instructions "Interface
adapter VEGACONNECT" (Document-ID 32628).

VEGADIS 81 The VEGADIS 81 is an external display and adjustment unit for VEGA
plics sensors.
For sensors with double chamber housing the interface adapter
"DISADAPT" is also required for VEGADIS 81.
28775-EN-150603

You can find further information in the operating instructions "VE-


GADIS 81" (Document-ID 43814).

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 9


3 Product description

VEGADIS 82 VEGADIS 82 is suitable for measured value indication and adjustment


of sensors with HART protocol. It is looped into the 420mA/HART
signal cable.
You can find further information in the operating instructions "VE-
GADIS 82" (Document-ID 45300).

PLICSMOBILE PLICSMOBILE is an external GSM/GPRS radio unit for transmission


of measured values and for remote parameter adjustment of plics
sensors. Adjustment is carried out via PACTware/DTM and the inte-
grated USB connection.
You can find further information in the supplementary instructions
"PLICSMOBILE T61" (Document-ID 37700).

Protective cap The protective cover protects the sensor housing against soiling and
intense heat from solar radiation.
You will find additional information in the supplementary instructions
manual "Protective cover" (Document-ID 34296).

Flanges Flanges are available in different versions according to the following


standards: DIN2501, EN1092-1, ANSIB16.5, JISB2210-1984,
GOST12821-80.
You can find additional information in the supplementary instructions
manual "Flanges according to DIN-EN-ASME-JIS" (Document-ID
31088).

Electronics module Electronics module "VEGASON series 60" is a replacement part for
ultrasonic sensors of VEGASON series 60. A different version is avail-
able for each type of signal output.
You can find further information in the operating instructions "Elec-
tronics module VEGASON series 60" (Document-ID 30206).

28775-EN-150603

10 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


4 Mounting

4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions
Suitability for the process Make sure that all parts of the instrument coming in direct contact
conditions with the process, especially the sensor element, process seal and
process fitting, are suitable for the existing process conditions, such
as process pressure, process temperature as well as the chemical
properties of the medium.
You can find the specifications in chapter "Technical data" and on the
nameplate.

Installation position Select an installation position you can easily reach for mounting and
connecting as well as later retrofitting of a display and adjustment
module. The housing can be rotated by 330 without the use of any
tools. You can also install the display and adjustment module in four
different positions (each displaced by 90).

Moisture Use the recommended cables (see chapter "Connecting to power


supply") and tighten the cable gland.
You can give your instrument additional protection against moisture
penetration by leading the connection cable downward in front of the
cable entry. Rain and condensation water can thus drain off. This ap-
plies mainly to outdoor mounting as well as installation in areas where
high humidity is expected (e.g. through cleaning processes) or on
cooled or heated vessels.

Fig. 2: Measures against moisture ingress

Cable entries - NPT In the case of instrument housings with self-sealing NPT threads, it is
thread not possible to have the cable entries screwed in at the factory. The
free openings for the cable glands are therefore covered with red dust
protective caps as transport protection.
Prior to setup you have to replace these protective caps with ap-
proved cable glands or close the openings with suitable blind plugs.
28775-EN-150603

Reference plane for The reference plane for the measuring range is the lower edge of the
measuring range transducer.
Make sure that a minimum distance from the reference plane - the
so-called dead zone, in which measurement is not possible - is

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 11


4 Mounting

maintained. The exact value of the dead zone is stated in chapter


"Technical data".

2
1

Fig. 3: Minimum distance to the max. level


1 Dead zone
2 Reference plane

Information:
If the medium reaches the transducer, buildup can form on it and
cause faulty measurements later on.

1 2 3
100%

0%

Fig. 4: Measuring range (operating range) and max. measuring distance


1 full
2 empty (max. measuring distance)
3 Measuring range

Pressure/Vacuum Gauge pressure in the vessel does not influence VEGASON 61. Low
pressure or vacuum does, however, damp the ultrasonic pulses. This
influences the measuring result, particularly if the level is very low.
With pressures under -0.2bar (-20kPa) you should use a different
measuring principle, e.g. radar or guided microwave.
28775-EN-150603

4.2 Mounting instructions


Screwing in Screw VEGASON 61 into the mounting socket with an appropriate
spanner applied to the hexagon of the process fitting. Max. torque see
chapter "Technical data".

12 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


4 Mounting

Warning:
The housing must not be used to screw the instrument in! Applying
tightening force can damage internal parts of the housing.

Installation position When mounting the sensor, keep a distance of at least 200mm
(7.874in) to the vessel wall. If the sensor is installed in the center of
dished or round vessel tops, multiple echoes can arise. These can,
however, be suppressed by an appropriate adjustment (see chapter
"Setup").

> 200 mm

Fig. 5: Mounting on round vessel tops


1 Reference plane
2 Vessel center or symmetry axis

If this distance cannot be maintained, a false signal storage should


be carried out during setup. This applies particularly if buildup on the
vessel wall is expected. In such cases, we recommend repeating the
false signal storage at a later date with existing buildup.
In vessels with conical bottom it can be advantageous to mount the
sensor in the center of the vessel, as measurement is then possible
down to the lowest point of the vessel bottom.
28775-EN-150603

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 13


4 Mounting

Fig. 6: Vessel with conical bottom

Socket Socket pieces should be dimensioned so that the lower end of the
transducer protrudes at least 10mm (0.394in) out of the socket.

ca. 10 mm

Fig. 7: Recommended socket mounting

If the reflective properties of the medium are good, you can mount
VEGASON 61 on sockets which are higher than the length of the
transducer. You will find recommended values for socket heights in the
following illustration. The socket end should be smooth and burr-free,
if possible also rounded. Carry out a false echo storage.
28775-EN-150603

14 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


4 Mounting

d h
80 mm/3" 150 mm/6"
100 mm/4" 300 mm/12"
h
150 mm/6" 400 mm/16"

Fig. 8: Deviating socket dimensions

Sensor orientation In liquids, direct the sensor as perpendicular as possible to the prod-
uct surface to achieve optimum measurement results.

Fig. 9: Alignment in liquids

To reduce the min. distance to the medium, you can also mount VE-
GASON 61 with a beam deflector. By doing this, it is possible to fill the
vessel nearly to maximum. Such an arrangement is suitable primarily
for open vessels such as e.g. overflow basins.
~4
45

00
x4
0
0

~200

Fig. 10: Beam deflector

Vessel installations The ultrasonic sensor should be installed at a location where no


installations cross the ultrasonic beam.
Vessel installations such as for example, ladders, limit switches, heat-
ing spirals, struts etc. can cause false echoes that interfere with the
useful echo. Make sure when planning your measuring site that the
28775-EN-150603

ultrasonic signals have a "clear view" to the measured product.


In case of existing vessel installations, a false echo storage should be
carried out during setup.

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 15


4 Mounting

If large vessel installations such as struts or supports cause false


echoes, these can be attenuated through supplementary measures.
Small, inclined sheet metal or plastic baffles above the installations
scatter the ultrasonic signals and avoid direct false echoes.

Fig. 11: Cover flat, large-area profiles with deflectors

Agitators If there are agitators in the vessel, a false signal storage should be
carried out with the agitators in motion. This ensures that the interfer-
ing reflections from the agitators are saved with the blades in different
positions.

Fig. 12: Agitators

Inflowing medium Do not mount the instruments in or above the filling stream. Make sure
that you detect the product surface, not the inflowing product.
28775-EN-150603

16 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


4 Mounting

Fig. 13: Inflowing liquid

Foam Through the action of filling, stirring and other processes in the vessel,
dense foams which considerably damp the emitted signals may form
on the product surface.
If foams are causing measurement errors, the sensor should be used
in a standpipe or, alternatively, the more suitable guided radar sen-
sors (TDR) should be used.
Guided wave radar is unaffected by foam generation and is particu-
larly suitable for such applications.

Air turbulences If there are strong air currents in the vessel, e.g. due to strong winds
in outdoor installations or air turbulence, e.g. by cyclone extraction
you should mount VEGASON 61 in a standpipe or use a different
measuring principle, e.g. radar or guided radar (TDR).

Standpipe measurement By using a standpipe (surge or bypass tube), the influence of vessel
installations, foam generation and turbulence is excluded.
Standpipes must extend all the way down to the requested min. level,
as measurement is only possible within the tube.
28775-EN-150603

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 17


4 Mounting

max.

min.

Fig. 14: Standpipe in the tank


1 Vent hole: 510mm (0.1970.394in)

VEGASON 61 can be used from tube diameters of 40mm (1.575in).


Avoid large gaps and thick welding joints when connecting the tubes.
Generally carry out a false echo storage.
Measurement in a standpipe is not recommended for extremely
adhesive products.

Flow measurement with The short examples give you introductory information on the flow
rectangular flume measurement. Detailed planning information is available from flume
manufacturers and in special literature.

3 ... 4 hmax 1
dmin

90
90
50 mm
2 mm x hmax hmax

2 2 33 4

Fig. 15: Flow measurement with rectangular flume: dmin. = min. distance of the
sensor (see chapter "Technical data"); hmax. = max. filling of the rectangular
flume
1 Overflow orifice (side view)
2 Headwater
3 Tail water
28775-EN-150603

4 Overfall orifice (view from bottom water)

In general, the following points must be observed:


Install the sensor on the headwater side

18 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


4 Mounting

Installation in the centre of the flume and vertical to the liquid


surface
Distance to the overfall orifice
Distance of orifice opening above ground
Min. distance of the orifice opening to bottom water
Min. distance of the sensor to max. storage level

Flow measurement with


Khafagi Venturi flume

3 ... 4 x hmax
d

90

hmax

1 B 2

Fig. 16: Flow measurement with Khafagi-Venturi flume: d = Min. distance to sen-
sor; hmax. = max. filling of the flume; B = tightest constriction in the flume
1 Position sensor
2 Venturi flume

In general, the following points must be observed:


Installation of the sensor at the inlet side
Installation in the centre of the flume and vertical to the liquid
surface
Distance to the Venturi flume
Min. distance of the sensor to max. storage level
28775-EN-150603

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 19


5 Connecting to power supply

5 Connecting to power supply


5.1 Preparing the connection
Safety instructions Always keep in mind the following safety instructions:
Warning:
Connect only in the complete absence of line voltage.

The electrical connection must only be carried out by trained


personnel authorised by the plant operator.
If overvoltage surges are expected, overvoltage arresters should
be installed.

Voltage supply Power supply and current signal are carried on the same two-wire
cable. The operating voltage can differ depending on the instrument
version.
The data for power supply are specified in chapter "Technical data".
Provide a reliable separation between the supply circuit and the
mains circuits according to DINEN61140 VDE0140-1.
Keep in mind the following additional factors that influence the operat-
ing voltage:
Lower output voltage of the power supply unit under nominal load
(e.g. with a sensor current of 20.5mA or 22mA in case of fault)
Influence of additional instruments in the circuit (see load values in
chapter "Technical data")

Connection cable The instrument is connected with standard two-wire cable without
screen. If electromagnetic interference is expected which is above the
test values of EN61326-1 for industrial areas, screened cable should
be used.
Use cable with round cross section for instruments with housing and
cable gland. To ensure the seal effect of the cable gland (IP protection
rating), find out which cable outer diameter the cable gland is suitable
for.
Use a cable gland fitting the cable diameter.
We generally recommend the use of screened cable for HART multi-
drop mode.

Cable gland NPT On the instrument with cable entry NPT and plastic housing there is
a metallic " threaded insert moulded into the plastic housing.
Caution:
No grease should be used when screwing the NPT cable gland or
steel tube into the threaded insert. Standard grease can contain
additives that corrode the connection between threaded insert and
28775-EN-150603

housing. This would influence the stability of the connection and the
tightness of the housing.

Cable screening and If screened cable is required, we recommend connecting the cable
grounding screen on both ends to ground potential. In the sensor, the screen

20 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


5 Connecting to power supply

must be connected directly to the internal ground terminal. The


ground terminal on the outside of the housing must be connected to
the ground potential (low impedance).
In Ex systems, the grounding is carried out according to the installa-
tion regulations.

5.2 Connection procedure


Proceed as follows:
1. Unscrew the housing lid
2. If a display and adjustment module is installed, remove it by turn-
ing it to the left.
3. Loosen compression nut of the cable entry gland
4. Remove approx. 10cm (4in) of the cable mantle, strip approx.
1cm (0.4in) of insulation from the ends of the individual wires
5. Insert the cable into the sensor through the cable entry
6. Lift the opening levers of the terminals with a screwdriver (see
following illustration)
7. Insert the wire ends into the open terminals according to the wir-
ing plan

Fig. 17: Connection steps 6 and 7

8. Press down the opening levers of the terminals, you will hear the
terminal spring closing
9. Check the hold of the wires in the terminals by lightly pulling on
them
28775-EN-150603

10. Connect the screen to the internal ground terminal, connect the
outer ground terminal to potential equalisation
11. Tighten the compression nut of the cable entry gland. The seal
ring must completely encircle the cable
12. Screw the housing lid back on

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 21


5 Connecting to power supply

The electrical connection is finished.

5.3 Wiring plan, single chamber housing


The following illustrations apply to the non-Ex as well as to the Ex-ia
version.
Housing overview

5 5 5

1 2 3

5
4

Fig. 18: Material versions, single chamber housing


1 Plastic
2 Aluminium
3 Stainless steel, precision casting
4 Stainless steel, electro-polished
5 Filter element for air pressure compensation of all material versions. Blind
plug with version IP66/IP68, 1bar for Aluminium and stainless steel

28775-EN-150603

22 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


5 Connecting to power supply

Electronics and terminal


compartment

Display
IC 1

1 2 5 6 7 8
4 2

Fig. 19: Electronics and terminal compartment, single chamber housing


1 Plug connector for VEGACONNECT (IC interface)
2 Spring-loaded terminals for connection of the external indication VEGADIS
61
3 Ground terminal for connection of the cable screen
4 Spring-loaded terminals for voltage supply

Wiring plan

Display
I2C

1 2 5 6 7 8

Fig. 20: Wiring plan, single chamber housing


1 Voltage supply, signal output

5.4 Wiring plan, double chamber housing


The following illustrations apply to the non-Ex as well as to the Ex-ia
version.
28775-EN-150603

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 23


5 Connecting to power supply

Housing overview
1 2 3

4 5

Fig. 21: Double chamber housing


1 Housing cover, connection compartment
2 Blind plug or plug M12x1 for VEGADIS 61 (optional)
3 Housing cover, electronics compartment
4 Filter element for air pressure compensation
5 Cable gland

Electronics compartment

Display
1
IC

1 2 5 6 7 8

3 2

Fig. 22: Electronics compartment, double chamber housing


1 Plug connector for VEGACONNECT (IC interface)
2 Internal connection cable to the connection compartment
3 Terminals for VEGADIS 81
28775-EN-150603

24 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


5 Connecting to power supply

Terminal compartment

Display
2

1 2 I2C

Fig. 23: Terminal compartment, double chamber housing


1 Spring-loaded terminals for voltage supply
2 Plug connector for VEGACONNECT (IC interface)
3 Ground terminal for connection of the cable screen

Wiring plan

I2C

1 2

Fig. 24: Wiring plan, double chamber housing


1 Voltage supply, signal output

5.5 Wiring plan - version IP66/IP68 (1bar)


Wire assignment, con-
nection cable

2
Fig. 25: Wire assignment, connection cable
28775-EN-150603

1 brown (+) and blue (-) to power supply or to the processing system
2 Shielding

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 25


5 Connecting to power supply

5.6 Switch-on phase


Switch-on phase After connecting VEGASON 61 to power supply or after a voltage
recurrence, the instrument carries out a self-check for approx. 30
seconds:
Internal check of the electronics
Indication of the instrument type, the firmware as well as the sen-
sor TAGs (sensor designation)
Output signal jumps briefly (approx. 10 seconds) to the set fault
current
Then the corresponding current is outputted to the cable (the value
corresponds to the actual level as well as the settings already carried
out, e.g. factory setting).

28775-EN-150603

26 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

6 Set up with the display and adjustment


module PLICSCOM
6.1 Insert display and adjustment module
Mount/Dismount display The display and adjustment module can be inserted into the sensor
and adjustment module and removed again at any time. It is not necessary to interrupt the
power supply.
Proceed as follows:
1. Unscrew the housing lid
2. Place the display and adjustment module in the desired position
on the electronics (you can choose any one of four different posi-
tions - each displaced by 90)
3. Press the display and adjustment module onto the electronics
and turn it to the right until it snaps in.
4. Screw housing lid with inspection window tightly back on
Disassembly is carried out in reverse order.
The display and adjustment module is powered by the sensor, an ad-
ditional connection is not necessary.

Fig. 26: Insert display and adjustment module

Note:
If you intend to retrofit the instrument with a display and adjustment
module for continuous measured value indication, a higher lid with an
28775-EN-150603

inspection glass is required.

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 27


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

6.2 Adjustment system

Fig. 27: Display and adjustment elements


1 LC display
2 Indication of the menu item number
3 Adjustment keys

Key functions [OK] key:


Move to the menu overview
Confirm selected menu
Edit parameter
Save value

[->] key to select:


Menu change
Select list entry
Select editing position

[+] key:
Change value of the parameter

[ESC] key:
Interrupt input
Jump to next higher menu

Adjustment system You adjust the instrument via the four keys of the display and adjust-
ment module. The individual menu items are shown on the LC display.
You can find the functions of the individual keys in the previous
illustration.

Time functions By pushing the [+] and [->] keys once, the edited value or the cursor
changes by one position. By pushing the keys longer than 1s the
change will be continuously.
28775-EN-150603

By pushing the [OK] and [ESC] keys simultaneously for more than
5s, a return to the basic menu is caused. The menu language is then
switched over to "English".

28 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Approx. 60 minutes after the last pressing of a key, an automatic reset


to measured value indication is triggered. Any values not confirmed
with [OK] will not be saved.

6.3 Setup steps


Address setting HART In HART-Multidrop mode (several sensors on one input) the address
multidrop must be set before continuing with the parameter adjustment. You
will find a detailed description in the operating instructions manual
"Display and adjustment module" or in the online help of PACTware
or DTM.
HART mode

Standard
Address 0

Parameter adjustment The sensor measures the distance from the sensor to the product
surface. For indication of the real level, an allocation of the measured
distance to the percentage height must be carried out.
The actual level is then calculated on the basis of these entered
values. At the same time, the operating range of the sensor is limited
from maximum range to the requested range.

(19.68") 3
0,5 m

100% 2
(196.9")
5m

0% 1

Fig. 28: Parameter adjustment example min./max. adjustment


1 Min. level = max. measuring distance
2 Max. level = min. measuring distance

The real product level during this adjustment is not important, be-
cause the min./max. adjustment is always carried out without chang-
28775-EN-150603

ing the product level. These settings can be made ahead of time
without the instrument having to be installed.

Basic adjustment - Min. Proceed as follows:


adjustment

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 29


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

1. Move from the measured value display to the main menu by


pushing [OK].
Basic adjustment
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info

2. Select the menu item "Basic adjustment" with [->] and confirm
with [OK]. Now the menu item "Min. adjustment" is displayed.
Min. adjustment
0.00%
=
5.000m(d)
4.000m(d)

3. Prepare the % value for editing with [OK] and set the cursor to the
requested position with [->]. Set the requested percentage value
with [+] and save with [OK]. The cursor jumps now to the distance
value.
4. Enter the suitable distance value in m for the empty vessel (e.g.
distance from the sensor to the vessel bottom) corresponding to
the percentage value.
5. Save the settings with [OK] and move to "Max. adjustment" with
[->].

Basic adjustment - Max. Proceed as follows:


adjustment
Max. adjustment
100.00%
=
1.000m(d)
2.000m(d)

1. Prepare the % value for editing with [OK] and set the cursor to the
requested position with [->]. Set the requested percentage value
with [+] and save with [OK]. The cursor jumps now to the distance
value.
2. Enter the appropriate distance value in m (corresponding to the
percentage value) for the full vessel. Keep in mind that the max.
level must lie below the dead band.
3. Save the settings with [OK] and move to "Medium selection" with
[->].

Basic adjustment - Me- Each product has different reflective properties. In addition, there
dium are various interfering factors which have to be taken into account:
agitated product surfaces and foam generation (with liquids); dust
generation, material cones and echoes from the vessel wall (with
solids). To adapt the sensor to these different conditions, you should
first select "Liquid" or "Solid".
28775-EN-150603

Medium

Liquid

30 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

With solids, you can also choose between "Powder/Dust", "Granular/


Pellets" or "Ballast/Pebbels".
Through this additional selection, the sensor is adapted perfectly to
the product and measurement reliability, particularly in products with
poor reflective properties, is considerably increased.
Enter the requested parameters via the appropriate keys, save your
settings and jump to the next menu item with the [->] key.

Basic adjustment - Vessel Apart from the medium, the vessel shape can also influence the
form measurement. To adapt the sensor to these measuring conditions,
this menu item offers different options depending on whether liquid
or bulk solid is selected. With "Liquids" these are "Storage tank",
"Stilling tube","Open vessel" or "Stirred vessel", with "Solid", "Silo" or
"Bunker".
Vessel form

Storage tank

Enter the requested parameters via the appropriate keys, save your
settings and jump to the next menu item with the [->] key.

Basic adjustment - Damp- To suppress fluctuations in the measured value display, e.g. caused
ing by an agitated product surface, a damping can be set. This time can
be between 0 and 999 seconds. Keep in mind that the reaction time of
the entire measurement will then be longer and the sensor will react
to measured value changes with a delay. In general, a period of a few
seconds is sufficient to smooth the measured value display.
Damping

0s

Enter the requested parameters via the appropriate keys, save your
settings and jump to the next menu item with the [->] key.

Basic adjustment - Lin- A linearisation is necessary for all vessels in which the vessel volume
earization curve does not increase linearly with the level - e.g. in a horizontal cylindri-
cal or spherical tank - and the indication or output of the volume is
required. Corresponding linearisation curves are preprogrammed for
these vessels. They represent the correlation between the level per-
centage and vessel volume. By activating the appropriate curve, the
volume percentage of the vessel is displayed correctly. If the volume
should not be displayed in percent but e.g. in l or kg, a scaling can be
also set in the menu item "Display".
Linearisation curve
28775-EN-150603

Linear

Enter the requested parameters via the appropriate keys, save your
settings and jump to the next menu item with the [->] key.

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 31


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Basic adjustment - Sen- In this menu item you can enter an unambiguous designation for the
sor TAG sensor, e.g. the measurement loop name or the tank or product des-
ignation. In digital systems and in the documentation of larger plants,
a singular designation should be entered for exact identification of
individual measuring points.
Sensor-TAG

Sensor

With this menu item, the Basic adjustment is finished and you can
now jump to the main menu with the [ESC] key.

Display - Displayed value In the menu item "Display" you can define how the measured value
should be presented on the display.
The following indication values are available:
Height
Distance
Current
Scaled
Percent
Lin. percent
The selection "scaled" opens the menu items "Display unit" and
"Scaling". In "Display unit" there are the following options:
Height
Ground
Flow
Volume
Without unit
Depending on selection, the different units are in turn available.
In the menu item "Scaling", the requested numerical value with deci-
mal point is entered for 0% and 100% of the measured value.
There is the following relationship between the indication value in the
menu "Display" and the adjustment unit in the menu "Device settings":
Indication value "Distance": Presentation of the measured value in
the selected adjustment unit, e.g. m(d).
Displayed value

Scaled

Display unit

Volume
28775-EN-150603

32 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Scaling

0% = 0.0l
100% = 100.0l

Display - Backlight An already integrated background lighting can be adjusted via the
adjustment menu. The function depends on the level of the supply
voltage, see operating instructions of the respective sensor.
Backlight

In the default setting, the lightning is switched off.

Diagnosis - Peak value The respective min. and max. measured values are saved in the sen-
sor. The values are displayed in the menu item "Peak values".
Min. and max. distance in m(d)
Min. and max. temperature
Peak value indicator

Diagnosis - Measurement When non-contact level sensors are used, the measurement can be
reliability influenced by the respective process conditions. In this menu item,
the measurement reliability of the level echo is displayed as dB value.
The measurement reliability equals signal strength minus noise. The
higher the value, the more reliable the measurement. With a function-
ing measurement, the values are >10dB.

Diagnostics - Device The instrument status is displayed in this menu item. If no failure is
status detected by the sensor, "OK" will be displayed. If a failure is detected,
there will be a sensor-specific flashing fault signal, for example
"E013". The failure is also displayed in clear text, for example "No
measured value available".
Information:
The fault message as well as the clear text indication are also carried
out in the measured value display.

Meas. reliability

Sensor status
28775-EN-150603

Diagnosis - Curve selec- With ultrasonic sensors, the "Echo curve" represents the signal
tion strength of the echoes over the measuring range. The unit of signal
strength is "dB". The signal strength enables the jusgement of the
quality of the measurement.

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 33


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

The "False echo curve" displays the saved false echoes (see menu
"Service") of the empty vessel as signal strength in "dB" over the
measuring range.
Up to 3000 measured values are recorded (depending on the sensor)
when starting a "Trend curve". Then the values can be displayed on
a time axis. The oldest measured values are always deleted.
In the menu item "Choose curve", the respective curve is selected.
Curve selection

Echo curve

Information:
The trend recording is not activated when being shipped. It must be
started by the user via the menu item "Start trend curve".

Diagnosis - Curve pres- A comparison of the echo curve and the false echo curve allows a
entation more detailled evaluation of measurement reliability. The selected
curve is updated continuously. With the [OK] key, a submenu with
zoom functions is opened.
The following functions are available with "Echo and false echo
curve":
"X-Zoom": Zoom function for the meas. distance
"Y-Zoom": 1, 2, 5 and 10x signal magnification in "dB"
"Unzoom": Reset the presentation to the nominal measuring range
without magnification
In the menu item "Trend curve" the following are available:
"X-Zoom": Resolution
1 minute
1 hour
1 day
"Stop/Start": Interrupt a recording or start a new recording
"Unzoom": Reset the resolution to minutes
As default setting, the recording pattern has 1 minute. With the adjust-
ment software PACTware, this pattern can be also set to 1 hour or 1
day.
Echo curve

Service - False signal High sockets or vessel installations, such as e.g. struts or agitators as
suppression well as buildup and weld joints on the vessel walls, cause interfering
28775-EN-150603

reflections which can impair the measurement. A false echo storage


detects and marks these false echoes, so that they are no longer
taken into account for the level measurement. A false echo memory
should be created with low level so that all potential interfering reflec-
tions can be detected.

34 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

False signal suppression

Change now?

Proceed as follows:
1. Move from the measured value display to the main menu by
pushing [OK].
2. Select the menu item "Service" with [->] and confirm with [OK].
Now the menu item "False signal suppression" is displayed.
3. Confirm "False signal suppression - Change now" with [OK] and
select in the below menu "Create new". Enter the actual distance
from the sensor to the product surface. All false signals in this
area are detected by the sensor and saved after confirming with
[OK].
Note:
Check the distance to the product surface, because if an incorrect
(too large) value is entered, the existing level will be saved as a false
signal. The level would then no longer be detectable in this area.

Service - Extended set- The menu item "Extended setting" offers the possibility to optimise
ting VEGASON 61 for applications in which the level changes very quickly.
To do this, select the function "Quick level change >1m/min.".
Extended setting

quick level change >1m/min.

Note:
Since with the function "Quick level change >1m/min." the genera-
tion of an average value of the signal processing is considerably
reduced, false reflections by agitators or vessel installations can
cause measured value fluctuations. A false echo memory is thus
recommended.

Service - Current output In the menu item "Current output" you determine the behaviour of the
current output during operation and in case of failure. The following
options are available:

Current output
Characteristics 420mA
204mA
Failure mode1) Hold value
20.5mA
22mA
28775-EN-150603

<3.6mA
Min. current2) 3.8mA
4mA

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 35


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Max. current3) 20mA


20.5mA
The values in bold font represent the data of the factory setting.
In HART multidrop mode, the current is constantly 4mA. This value
does not change even in case of failure.
Current output

Characteristic: 4-20mA
Failure mode: 22mA
Min. current 3.8mA

Service - Simulation In this menu item you simulate a user-defined level or pressure value
via the current output. This allows you to test the signal path, e.g.
through connected indicating instruments or the input card of the
control system.
The following simulation variables are available:
Percent
Current
Pressure (with pressure transmitters)
Distance (with radar and guided microwave)
With Profibus PA sensors, the selection of the simulated value is
made via the "Channel" in the menu "Basic adjustments".
How to start the simulation:
1. Push [OK]
2. Select the requested simulation variable with [->] and confirm
with [OK].
3. Set the requested numerical value with [+] and [->].
4. Push [OK]
The simulation is now running, with 420mA/HART a current is
outputted and with Profibus PA or Foundation Fieldbus a digital value.
How to interrupt the simulation:
Push [ESC]
Information:
The simulation is automatically terminated 10 minutes after the last
pressing of a key.
Simulation

Start simulation?

Service - Reset If the function "Reset" is carried out, the sensor resets the values of
28775-EN-150603

the following menu items to the reset values (see chart):4)

1)
Value of the current output in case of failure, e.g. if no valid measured value is
delivered.
2)
This value is not underrun during operation.
3)
This value is not exceeded during operation.

36 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Function Reset value


Sensor address 126
Max. adjustment 0m(d)
Min. adjustment Meas. range end in m(d)5)
Medium Liquid
Vessel form not known
Damping 0s
Linearization Linear
Sensor-TAG Sensor
Displayed value Distance
Current output - characteristics 420mA
Current output - max. current 20mA
Current output - min. current 4mA
Current output - failure <3.6mA
Unit of measurement m(d)
The values of the following menu items are not reset to the reset
values (see chart) with "Reset":
Function Reset value
Backlight No reset
Language No reset
HART mode No reset

Default setting
Like basic adjustment, but in addition, special parameters are reset to
default values.6)

Peak value indicator


The min. and max. distance and temperature values are reset to the
actual value.

Service - Adjustment unit In this menu item you select the internal arithmetic unit of the sensor.
Unit of measurement

m(d)

Service - Language The sensor is already set to the ordered national language. In this
menu item you can change the language. The following languages are
available, e.g. in software version 3.50:
Deutsch
28775-EN-150603

English
4)
Sensor-specific basic adjustment.
5)
Depending on the sensor type, see chapter "Technical data".
6)
Special parameters are parameters which are set customer-specifically on
the service level with the adjustment software PACTware.

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 37


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Franais
Espanl
Pycckuu
Italiano
Netherlands
Japanese
Chinese
Language

German

Service - SIL The functional safety is already activated Ex factory for instruments
with SIL qualification. For instruments Ex factory without SIL qualifica-
tion, the functional safety must be activated by the user for applica-
tions according to SIL via the indicating and adjustment module. The
SIL factory setting cannot be deactivated by the user.
The activation of SIL has the following impact:
In the menu item "Failure mode" under "Current output", the
parameters "Hold value" and "20.5mA" are blocked
In the menu item "HART mode", the function "Multidrop" is blocked

Note:
For such applications, it is absolutely necessary to take note of
"Safety Manual".

Service - HART mode HART offers standard and multidrop mode.


The mode standard with the fixed address 0 means output of the
measured value as 420mA signal.
In Multidrop mode, up to 15 sensors can be operated on one two-wire
cable. An address between 1 and 15 must be assigned to each sen-
sor.7)
In this menu item you determine the HART mode and enter the ad-
dress for multidrop.
HART mode

Standard
Address 0

The default setting is standard with address 0.

Service - Copy sensor This function enables reading out parameter adjustment data as well
data as writing parameter adjustment data into the sensor via the display
and adjustment module. A description of the function is available in
the operating instructions manual "Display and adjustment module".
28775-EN-150603

The following data are read out or written with this function:

7)
The 420mA signal of the HART sensor is switched off. The sensor
consumes a constant current of 4mA. The measuring signal is transmitted
exclusively as digital HART signal.

38 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Measured value presentation


Adjustment
Medium
Vessel form
Damping
Linearisation curve
Sensor-TAG
Displayed value
Display unit
Scaling
Current output
Unit of measurement
Language
The following safety-relevant data are not read out or written:
HART mode
PIN
Copy sensor data

Copy sensor data?

Service - PIN In this menu item, the PIN is activated/deactivated permanently.


Entering a 4-digit PIN protects the sensor data against unauthorized
access and unintentional modifications. If the PIN is activated perma-
nently, it can be deactivated temporarily (i.e. for approx. 60 min.) in
any menu item. The instrument is delivered with the PIN set to 0000.
PIN

Disable permanently?

Only the following functions are permitted with activated PIN:


Select menu items and show data
Read data from the sensor into the display and adjustment mod-
ule.

Info In this menu item the most important sensor information can be
displayed:
Instrument type
Serial number: 8-digit number, e.g. 12345678
Instrument type

Serial number
28775-EN-150603

12345678

Date of manufacture: Date of the factory calibration, e.g. 24. March


2015
Software version: Edition of the sensor software, e.g. 3.80

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 39


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Date of manufacture
24. March 2015
Software version
3.80

Date of last change using PC: Date of the last change of sensor
parameters via PC, e.g. 24. March 2015
Last change using PC

24. March 2015

Sensor details, e.g. approval, process fitting, seal, measuring cell,


measuring range, electronics, housing, cable entry, plug, cable
length etc.
Sensor characteristics

Display now?

6.4 Menu schematic


Information:
Depending on the version and application, the highlighted menu
windows may not always be available.

Basic adjustment

Basic adjustment 1
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info

Min. adjustment 1.1 Max. adjustment 1.2 Medium 1.3 Vessel form 1.4
0.00% 100.00% Liquid
= = Storage tank
4.000m(d) 1.000m(d)
3.000m(d) 2.000m(d)

Damping 1.5 Linearisation curve 1.6 Sensor-TAG 1.7

0s Linear Sensor
28775-EN-150603

40 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Display

Basic adjustment 2
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info

Displayed value 2.1 Display unit 2.2 Scaling 2.3 Backlight 2.4

Scaled Volume 0% = 0.0m Switched off


m 100% = 100.0m

Diagnostics

Basic adjustment 3
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info

Peak value indicator 3.1 Meas. reliability 3.2 Curve selection 3.3 Echo curve 3.4
Distance min.: 0.234m(d) 36dB
Distance max.: 5.385m(d) Sensor status Echo curve Presentation of the echo
T-min.: 16.5C OK curve
T-min.: 37.5C

Service

Basic adjustment 4
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info

False signal suppression 4.1 Extended setting 4.2 Current output 4.3 Simulation 4.4
Characteristic: 4-20mA
Change now? None Fail.mode: <3.6mA Start simulation?

Min. current: 3.8mA

Reset 4.5 Unit of measurement 4.6 Language 4.7 SIL 4.8

Select reset? m(d) Deutsch Not activated


select?

HART mode 4.9 Copy sensor data 4.10 PIN 4.11

Standard Copy sensor data? Enable?


Address 0
28775-EN-150603

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 41


6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM

Info

Basic adjustment 5
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info

Instrument type 5.1 Date of manufacture 5.2 Last change using PC 5.3 Sensor characteristics 5.4
24. March 2015
Software version Display now?
Serial number 3.80 10. April 2015
12345678

6.9 Saving the parameter adjustment data


We recommended noting the adjusted data, e.g. in this operating
instructions manual, and archiving them afterwards. They are thus
available for multiple use or service purposes.
If VEGASON 61 is equipped with a display and adjustment module,
the most important data can be read out of the sensor into the display
and adjustment module. The procedure is described in the operating
instructions manual "Display and adjustment module" in the menu
item "Copy sensor data". The data remain there permanently even if
the sensor power supply fails.
If it is necessary to exchange the sensor, the display and adjustment
module is inserted into the replacement instrument and the data are
written into the sensor under the menu item "Copy sensor data".

28775-EN-150603

42 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


7 Set up with PACTware and other adjustment programs

7 Set up with PACTware and other


adjustment programs
7.1 Connect the PC via VEGACONNECT
VEGACONNECT directly
on the sensor 2

Fig. 29: Connection of the PC via VEGACONNECT directly to the sensor


1 USB cable to the PC
2 VEGACONNECT
3 Sensor

VEGACONNECT exter-
nally 1 2

3
TWIST
LO
EN

CK
OP

USB
4

Fig. 30: Connection via VEGACONNECT externally


1 IC bus (com.) interface on the sensor
2 IC connection cable of VEGACONNECT
3 VEGACONNECT
28775-EN-150603

4 USB cable to the PC

Necessary components:
VEGASON 61
PC with PACTware and suitable VEGA DTM

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 43


7 Set up with PACTware and other adjustment programs

VEGACONNECT
Power supply unit or processing system

VEGACONNECT via HART


2 4

CK
LO
TWIST

USB
3 5

N
OPE
Fig. 31: Connecting the PC via HART to the signal cable
1 VEGASON 61
2 HART resistance 250 (optional depending on processing)
3 Connection cable with 2mm pins and terminals
4 Processing system/PLC/Voltage supply

Necessary components:
VEGASON 61
PC with PACTware and suitable VEGA DTM
VEGACONNECT
HART resistance approx. 250
Power supply unit or processing system

Note:
With power supply units with integrated HART resistance (internal
resistance approx. 250), an additional external resistance is not
necessary. This applies, e.g. to the VEGA instruments VEGATRENN
149A, VEGADIS 371, VEGAMET 381. Common Ex separators are
also usually equipped with a sufficient current limitation resistance.
In such cases, VEGACONNECT 4 can be connected parallel to the
420mA cable.

7.2 Parameter adjustment with PACTware


Prerequisites For parameter adjustment of the instrument via a Windows PC, the
configuration software PACTware and a suitable instrument driver
(DTM) according to FDT standard are required. The latest PACTware
version as well as all available DTMs are compiled in a DTM Collec-
tion. The DTMs can also be integrated into other frame applications
according to FDT standard.
Note:
28775-EN-150603

To ensure that all instrument functions are supported, you should


always use the latest DTM Collection. Furthermore, not all described
functions are included in older firmware versions. You can download
the latest instrument software from our homepage. A description of
the update procedure is also available in the Internet.

44 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


7 Set up with PACTware and other adjustment programs

Further setup steps are described in the operating instructions manu-


al "DTM Collection/PACTware" attached to each DTM Collection and
which can also be downloaded from the Internet. Detailed descrip-
tions are available in the online help of PACTware and the DTMs.

Fig. 32: Example of a DTM view

Standard/Full version All device DTMs are available as a free-of-charge standard version
and as a full version that must be purchased. In the standard version,
all functions for complete setup are already included. An assistant for
simple project configuration simplifies the adjustment considerably.
Saving/printing the project as well as import/export functions are also
part of the standard version.
In the full version there is also an extended print function for complete
project documentation as well as a save function for measured value
and echo curves. In addition, there is a tank calculation program as
well as a multiviewer for display and analysis of the saved measured
value and echo curves.
The standard version is available as a download under
www.vega.com/downloads and "Software". The full version is avail-
able on CD from the agency serving you.

7.3 Parameter adjustment with AMS and PDM


For VEGA sensors, instrument descriptions for the adjustment
programs AMS and PDM are available as DD or EDD. The instru-
ment descriptions are already implemented in the current versions of
AMS and PDM.
28775-EN-150603

For older versions of AMS and PDM, a free-of-charge download is


available via Internet. Move via www.vega.com and "Downloads" to
"Software".

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 45


7 Set up with PACTware and other adjustment programs

7.4 Saving the parameter adjustment data


It is recommended to document or save the parameter adjustment
data. That way they are available for multiple use or service purposes.
The VEGA DTM Collection and PACTware in the licensed, profession-
al version provide suitable tools for systematic project documentation
and storage.

28775-EN-150603

46 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


8 Maintenance and fault rectification

8 Maintenance and fault rectification


8.1 Maintenance
If the instrument is used properly, no special maintenance is required
in normal operation.

8.2 Rectify faults


Reaction when malfunc- The operator of the system is responsible for taking suitable meas-
tion occurs ures to rectify faults.

Causes of malfunction VEGASON 61 offers maximum reliability. Nevertheless, faults can oc-
cur during operation. These may be caused by the following, e.g.:
Sensor
Process
Voltage supply
Signal processing

Fault rectification The first measures to be taken are to check the output signals as well
as to evaluate the error messages via the display and adjustment
module. The procedure is described below. Further comprehensive
diagnostics can be carried out on a PC with the software PACTware
and the suitable DTM. In many cases, the causes can be determined
and the faults rectified this way.

24 hour service hotline Should these measures not be successful, please call in urgent cases
the VEGA service hotline under the phone no. +491805858550.
The hotline is manned 7 days a week round-the-clock. Since we offer
this service worldwide, the support is only available in the English
language. The service is free, only standard call charges are incurred.

Check the 420mA Connect a multimeter in the suitable measuring range according to
signal the wiring plan. The following table describes possible errors in the
current signal and helps to eliminate them:
Error Cause Rectification
420mA signal Level fluctuations Set damping via the display and ad-
not stable justment module
420mA signal Electrical connec- Check connection according to
missing tion faulty chapter "Connection steps" and if
necessary, correct according to chap-
ter "Wiring plan"
Voltage supply Check cables for breaks; repair if nec-
missing essary
Operating voltage Check, adapt if necessary
too low or load re-
28775-EN-150603

sistance too high


Current sig- Electronics mod- Exchange the instrument or send it in
nal greater than ule in the sensor for repair
22mA or less defective
than 3.6mA

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 47


8 Maintenance and fault rectification

In Ex applications, the regulations for the wiring of intrinsically safe


circuits must be observed.
Error messages via the
display and adjustment
Error Cause Rectification
module
E013 no measured val- Sensor in boot phase
ue available Sensor does not find an echo, e.g.
due to faulty installation or wrong pa-
rameter adjustment
E017 Adjustment span Carry out a fresh adjustment and in-
too small crease the distance between min. and
max. adjustment
E036 no operable sen- Carry out a software update or send
sor software instrument for repair
E041 Hardware error, Exchange the instrument or send it in
electronics de- for repair
fective

Reaction after fault recti- Depending on the reason for the fault and the measures taken, the
fication steps described in chapter "Set up" may have to be carried out again.

8.3 Exchanging the electronics module


If the electronics module is defective, it can be replaced by the user.
In Ex applications, only instruments and electronics modules with ap-
propriate Ex approval may be used.
If there is no electronics module available on site, one can be ordered
from the VEGA agency serving you.

Sensor serial number The new electronics module must be loaded with the settings of the
sensor. These are the options:
At the factory by VEGA
Or on site by the user
In both cases, the sensor serial number is necessary. The serial num-
bers are stated on the type label of the instrument, inside the housing
or on the delivery note.
Information:
When loading on site, first of all the order data must be downloaded
from the Internet (see operating instructions manual "Electronics
module").

Assignment The electronics modules are adapted to the respective sensor and
distinguish also in the signal output or power supply.

8.4 Software update


28775-EN-150603

The following components are required to update the instrument


software:
Instrument
Voltage supply

48 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


8 Maintenance and fault rectification

Interface adapter VEGACONNECT


PC with PACTware
Current instrument software as file
You can find the current instrument software as well as detailed
information on the procedure under "www.vega.com/downloads" and
"Software".
Caution:
Instruments with approvals can be bound to certain software versions.
Therefore make sure that the approval is still effective after a software
update is carried out.
You can find detailed information at www.vega.com/downloads and
"Approvals".

8.5 How to proceed if a repair is necessary


You can find a repair form as well as detailed information on how to
proceed at www.vega.com/downloads and "Forms and certificates".
By doing this you help us carry out the repair quickly and without hav-
ing to call back for needed information.
If a repair is necessary, please proceed as follows:
Print and fill out one form per instrument
Clean the instrument and pack it damage-proof
Attach the completed form and, if need be, also a safety data
sheet outside on the packaging
Please contact the agency serving you to get the address for
the return shipment. You can find the agency on our home page
www.vega.com.
28775-EN-150603

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 49


9 Dismount

9 Dismount
9.1 Dismounting steps
Warning:
Before dismounting, be aware of dangerous process conditions such
as e.g. pressure in the vessel or pipeline, high temperatures, cor-
rosive or toxic products etc.
Take note of chapters "Mounting" and "Connecting to power supply"
and carry out the listed steps in reverse order.

9.2 Disposal
The instrument consists of materials which can be recycled by spe-
cialised recycling companies. We use recyclable materials and have
designed the parts to be easily separable.

WEEE directive 2002/96/EG


This instrument is not subject to the WEEE directive 2002/96/EG and
the respective national laws. Pass the instrument directly on to a spe-
cialised recycling company and do not use the municipal collecting
points. These may be used only for privately used products according
to the WEEE directive.
Correct disposal avoids negative effects on humans and the environ-
ment and ensures recycling of useful raw materials.
Materials: see chapter "Technical data"
If you have no way to dispose of the old instrument properly, please
contact us concerning return and disposal.

28775-EN-150603

50 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


10 Supplement

10 Supplement
10.1 Technical data
General data
Materials, wetted parts
Transducer PVDF
Seal transducer/process fitting EPDM, FKM
Process fitting G1DIN3852-A-B PVDF
Process fitting 1 NPTASMEB1.20.1 PVDF
Materials, non-wetted parts
Housing Plastic PBT (polyester), Alu die-casting, powder-coated,
316L
Seal between housing and housing NBR (stainless steel housing), silicone (Alu/plastic hous-
cover ing)
Inspection window in housing cover Polycarbonate
Ground terminal 316Ti/316L
Weight 1.84kg (48.8lbs), depending on the process
fitting and housing
Max. torque mounting boss 25Nm

Output variable
Output signal 420mA/HART
HART output values
HART value (Primary Value) Distance to the level
HART value (Secondary Value) Temperature
HART value (3rd Value) Distance to the level - scaled
Signal resolution 1.6A
Failure signal current output (adjustable) mA-value unchanged 20.5mA, 22mA, <3.6mA
Current limitation 22mA
Load see load diagram under Power supply
Damping (63% of the input variable) 0999s, adjustable
Met NAMUR recommendation NE43

Input variable
Measured variable distance between lower edge of the transducer and
product surface
Measuring range
Liquids up to 5m (16.4ft)
Bulk solids up to 2m (6.562ft)
28775-EN-150603

Dead zone 0.25m (0.82ft)

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 51


10 Supplement

Reference conditions to measuring accuracy (according to DIN EN60770-1)


Reference conditions according to DIN EN61298-1
Temperature +18+30C (+64+86F)
Relative humidity 4575%
Air pressure 8601060mbar/86106kPa (12.515.4psig)
Other reference conditions
Reflector ideal reflector, e.g. metal plate 2x2m (6.56x6.56ft)
False reflections Biggest false signal, 20dB smaller than the useful signal

Measuring characteristics
Ultrasonic frequency 70kHz
Interval >2s (dependent on the parameter adjustment)
Abstrahlwinkel at -3dB 11
Step response or adjustment time8) >3s (dependent on the parameter adjustment)

Measuring accuracy
Resolution, general >1mm (0.039in)
Deviation9) see diagram

10 mm (0.394 in)

4 mm (0.157 in)

1 m (3.28 ft) 2 m (6.562 ft) 3 m (9.843 ft) 4 m (13.123 ft) 5 m (16.404 ft)
-4 mm (-0.157 in)

-10 mm (-0.394 in)

Fig. 33: Deviation VEGASON 61

Influence of the ambient temperature to the sensor electronics10)

Average temperature coefficient of the 0.06%/10K


zero signal (temperature error)

Ambient conditions
Ambient, storage and transport tempera- -40+80C (-40+176F)
ture

Process conditions
Process pressure -20200kPa/-0.22bar (-2.929psig)
28775-EN-150603

8)
Time to output the correct level (with max. 10% deviation) after a sudden level change.
9)
Incl. non-linearity, hysteresis and non-repeatability.
10)
Relating to the nominal measuring range.

52 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


10 Supplement

Process temperature (transducer temperature)


Seal EPDM -40+80C (-40+176F)
Seal FKM -20+80C (-4+176F)
Vibration resistance mechanical vibrations with 4g and 5100Hz11)

Electromechanical data - version IP66/IP67 and IP66/IP68; 0.2bar


Cable entry/plug12)
Single chamber housing 1x cable gland M20x1.5 (cable: 59mm), 1x
blind plug M20x1.5
or:
1x closing cap M20x1.5; 1x blind plug M20x1.5
or:
1x closing cap NPT, 1x blind plug NPT
or:
1x plug (depending on the version), 1x blind stopper
M20x1.5
Double chamber housing 1x cable entry M20x1.5 (cable: 59mm), 1x
blind plug M20x1.5; 1x blind plug M16x1.5 or
optionally available with 1x plug M12x1 for external
display and adjustment unit
or:
1x closing cap NPT, 1x blind plug NPT, 1x blind
plug M16x1.5 or optionally 1x plug M12x1 for exter-
nal display and adjustment unit
or:
1x plug (depending on the version), 1x blind plug
M20x1.5; 1x blind plug M16x1.5 or optionally avail-
able with 1x plug M12x1 for external display and
adjustment unit
Spring-loaded terminals for wire cross- <2.5mm (AWG14)
section

Electromechanical data - version IP66/IP68 (1bar)


Cable entry
Single chamber housing 1x IP68 cable gland M20x1.5; 1x blind plug M20x1.5
Double chamber housing 1x IP68 cable gland M20x1.5; 1x blind stopper
M20x1.5; 1x blind stopper M16x1.5
Connection cable
Wire cross-section 0.5mm (AWG20)
Wire resistance <0.036/m (0.011/ft)
Tensile strength <1200N (270lbf)
Standard length 5m (16.4ft)
28775-EN-150603

Max. length 1000m (3280ft)

11)
Tested according to the guidelines of German Lloyd, GL directive 2.
12)
Depending on the version M12x1, according to DIN43650, Harting, 7/8"FF.

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 53


10 Supplement

Min. bending radius 25mm (0.984in) with 25C (77F)


Diameter approx. 8mm (0.315in)
Colour - standard PE Black
Colour - standard PUR Blue
Colour - Ex-version Blue

Display and adjustment module


Voltage supply and data transmission through the sensor
Indication LC display in dot matrix
Adjustment elements 4 keys
Protection rating
unassembled IP20
mounted into the sensor without cover IP40
Material
Housing ABS
Inspection window Polyester foil

Voltage supply
Operating voltage
Non-Ex instrument 1436VDC
Ex ia instrument 1430VDC
Operating voltage with illuminated display and adjustment module
Non-Ex instrument 2036VDC
Ex ia instrument 2030VDC
Permissible residual ripple
<100Hz Uss <1V
100Hz10kHz Uss <10mV
Load resistor
Calculation (UB - Umin)/0.022A
Example - Non-Ex instrument with (24V - 14V)/0.022A=455
UB=24VDC

Electrical protective measures


Protection rating

Housing material Version IP-protection class NEMA protection


Plastic Single chamber IP66/IP67 NEMA4X
Double chamber IP66/IP67 NEMA4X
Aluminium Single chamber IP66/IP68 (0.2bar) NEMA6P
28775-EN-150603

IP68 (1bar) NEMA6P


Double chamber IP66/IP67 NEMA4X
IP66/IP68 (0.2bar) NEMA6P
IP68 (1bar) NEMA6P

54 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


10 Supplement

Housing material Version IP-protection class NEMA protection


Stainless steel, electro- Single chamber IP66/IP68 (0.2bar) NEMA6P
polished
Stainless steel, precision Single chamber IP66/IP68 (0.2bar) NEMA6P
casting IP68 (1bar) NEMA6P
Double chamber IP66/IP67 NEMA4X
IP66/IP68 (0.2bar) NEMA6P
IP68 (1bar) NEMA6P

Overvoltage category III (IEC61010-1)


Protection class II (IEC61010-1)

Functional safety (SIL)


Functional safety is already activated on instruments with SIL qualification ex factory. On instru-
ments without SIL qualification ex factory, the functional safety must be activated by the user via
the display and adjustment module or via PACTware for applications according to SIL.

Functional safety according to IEC61508-4


Single channel architecture (1oo1D) up to SIL2
double channel diversitary redundant up to SIL3
architecture (1oo2D)
You can find detailed information in the supplied Safety Manual of the instrument series or under
"www.vega.com", "Downloads", "Approvals".

Approvals
Instruments with approvals can have different technical specifications depending on the version.
For that reason the associated approval documents of these instruments have to be carefully
noted. They are part of the delivery or can be downloaded under www.vega.com via "VEGA Tools"
and "Instrument search" as well as via "Downloads" and "Approvals".
28775-EN-150603

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 55


10 Supplement

10.2 Dimensions
Housing in protection IP66/IP68 (0.2bar)
~ 87 mm (3.43")
~ 69 mm
~ 116 mm (4.57") 84 mm
(2.72") 77 mm
84 mm (3.31") (3.31")
(3.03")
M16x1,5

116 mm (4.57")
112 mm (4 13/32")

120 mm (4.72")
M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/ M20x1,5
NPT NPT
M20x1,5/
1 2 NPT 3

~ 59 mm ~ 69 mm ~ 87 mm (3.43")
(2.32") (2.72") 84 mm
80 mm 77 mm
(3.15") (3.03") (3.31")

M16x1,5
117 mm (4.61")

120 mm (4.72")
112 mm (4.41")

M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/
NPT NPT
M20x1,5/
4 5 NPT 6

Fig. 34: Housing versions with protection rating IP66/IP68 (0.2bar) - with integrated display and adjustment
module the housing is 9mm/0.35in higher
1 Plastic housing (IP66/IP67)
2 Aluminium housing
3 Aluminium double chamber housing
4 Stainless steel housing, electropolished
5 Stainless steel housing - precision casting
6 Stainless steel double chamber housing - precision casting 28775-EN-150603

56 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


10 Supplement

Housing in protection IP66/IP68 (1bar)


~ 103 mm ~ 105 mm (4.13")
~ 150 mm (5.91") (4.06") 84 mm
77 mm
84 mm (3.31") (3.03") (3.31")

M16x1,5

116 mm (4.57")

117 mm (4.61")

120 mm (4.72")
M20x1,5 M20x1,5 M20x1,5

M20x1,5/
1 2 NPT 3

Fig. 35: Housing version with protection rating IP66/IP68 (1bar) - with integrated display and adjustment module
the housing is 9mm/0.35in higher
1 Aluminium housing
2 Stainless steel housing - precision casting
2 Stainless steel double chamber housing - precision casting

VEGASON 61
22mm (55/64")

60mm
155mm (6 7/64")

(2 23/64")
G1A /
1"NPT
(2 19/32")
66mm

1 2
39mm
(1 17/32")
74mm
(2 58/64")

Fig. 36: VEGASON 61


1 Dead zone: 0.25m (0.82ft)
2 Measuring range: with liquids up to 5m (16.4ft), with solids up to 2m (6.562ft)
28775-EN-150603

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 57


10 Supplement

10.3 Industrial property rights


VEGA product lines are global protected by industrial property rights. Further information see
www.vega.com.
Only in U.S.A.: Further information see patent label at the sensor housing.
VEGA Produktfamilien sind weltweit geschtzt durch gewerbliche Schutzrechte.
Nhere Informationen unter www.vega.com.
Les lignes de produits VEGA sont globalement protges par des droits de proprit intellec-
tuelle. Pour plus d'informations, on pourra se rfrer au site www.vega.com.
VEGA lineas de productos estn protegidas por los derechos en el campo de la propiedad indus-
trial. Para mayor informacin revise la pagina web www.vega.com.

. www.vega.com.
VEGA
<www.vega.com

10.4 Trademark
All the brands as well as trade and company names used are property of their lawful proprietor/
originator.

28775-EN-150603

58 VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire


Notes
28775-EN-150603

VEGASON 61 4 20 mA/HART - two-wire 59


Printing date:

28775-EN-150603

All statements concerning scope of delivery, application, practical use and operat-
ing conditions of the sensors and processing systems correspond to the information
available at the time of printing.
Subject to change without prior notice

VEGA Grieshaber KG, Schiltach/Germany 2015

VEGA Grieshaber KG Phone +49 7836 50-0


Am Hohenstein 113 Fax +49 7836 50-201
77761 Schiltach E-mail: info.de@vega.com
Germany www.vega.com
Specification sheet

VEGASON 61
420mA/HART - two-wire
Ultrasonic sensor for continuous level measurement
Technical data

Measuring range
In liquids up to 5m (16.4ft)
In bulk solids up to 2m (6.562ft)
Deviation 4mm or <0.2%
Process fitting Thread G1, 1NPT
Process pressure -0.2+2bar/-20+200kPa
(-2.9+29psig)
Process temperature -40+80C (-40+176F)
Ambient, storage and -40+80C (-40+176F)
transport temperature
Operating voltage 1436VDC
SIL qualification Optionally up to SIL2

Materials
Application area
The wetted parts of the instrument are made of PVDF. The process seal
The VEGASON 61 is an ultrasonic sensor for continuous level meas- is made of EPDM.
urement of liquids or bulk solids. Typical applications are the measure- You will find a complete overview of the available materials and seals in
ment of liquids in storage vessels or open basins. The sensor is also the "Configurator" at www.vega.com and "VEGA Tools".
suitable for the detection of bulk solids in small vessels or open contain-
ers. The non-contact measuring principle is independent of product
properties and enables a setup without medium. Housing versions

The housings are available as single chamber or double chamber ver-


Your benefit sion in plastic, stainless steel or aluminium.
They are available with protection ratings up to IP68 (1bar).
Maintenance-free operation thanks to non-contact measuring princi-
ple
Reliable measurement, independent of product properties Electronics versions

Price-favourable solution for simple applications The instruments are available in different electronics versions. Apart
from the two-wire electronics with 420mA/HART, a four-wire ver-
sion and two purely digital versions with Profibus PA and Foundation
Function Fieldbus are available.
Short ultrasonic pulses in the range of 18kHz to 70kHz are emitted by
the transducer in the direction of the product, reflected by the product Approvals
surface and received back by the transducer. The pulses travel at the
speed of sound - the elapsed time from emission to reception of the The instruments are suitable for use in hazardous areas and are ap-
signals is proportional to the level in the vessel. proved e.g. according to ATEX and IEC. The instruments also have
various ship approvals such as e.g. GL, LRS or ABS.
You can find detailed information at www.vega.com/downloads and
"Approvals".

VEGA Grieshaber KG, Am Hohenstein 113, 77761 Schiltach/Germany, www.vega.com VEGASON 61 - 34584-EN-151204
Specification sheet

Operation Dimensions

The adjustment of the instrument is carried out via the optional display
and adjustment module PLICSCOM or via a PC with the adjustment
software PACTware and corresponding DTM. Further adjustment op-
tions are available via HART communicator as well as manufacturer-
specific programs such as AMS or PDM.

22 mm
(0.87")
SW 60 mm
(2.36")

155 mm (6.1")
G1 A

66 mm
(2.6")
39 mm
(1.54")
74 mm
(2.91")

Dimensions VEGASON 61

Information

You can find further information about the VEGA product line on www.
vega.com.
In the download section at www.vega.com/downloads you'll find operat-
ing instructions, product information, brochures, approval documents,
instrument drawings and much, much more.
There, you will also find GSD and EDD files for Profibus PA systems as
well as DD and CFF files for Foundation Fieldbus systems.

Instrument selection

With the "Finder" at www.vega.com/finder and "VEGA Tools" you can


select the most suitable measuring principle for your application.
You can find detailed information on the instrument versions in the
"Configurator" at www.vega.com/configurator and "VEGA Tools".

Contact
Electrical connection
You can find the VEGA agency serving your area on our homepage
www.vega.com.

Display
IC 1

1 2 5 6 7 8
4 2

Electronics and terminal compartment, single chamber housing


1 Plug connector for VEGACONNECT (IC interface)
2 Spring-loaded terminals for connection of the external indication VEGADIS 61
3 Ground terminal for connection of the cable screen
4 Spring-loaded terminals for voltage supply and signal output

You can find details on electrical connection in the instrument operating


instructions on our homepage at www.vega.com/downloads.

VEGASON 61 - 34584-EN-151204 VEGA Grieshaber KG, Am Hohenstein 113, 77761 Schiltach/Germany, www.vega.com
1.7InstructionManualforStreamingCurrentMonitor
ApplicableModel Area
HFScientific IPA&PEMBUBUHKIMIA
OWNERS MANUAL
MicroTSCM
Streaming Current
Monitor
HF scientific
3170 Metro Parkway
Ft. Myers, FL 33916
Phone: 239-337-2116
Fax: 239-332-7643
EMail:HFinfo@Watts.com
Website: www.hfscientific.com

21648 (07/09)
REV 2.4
Table of Contents
Section Page

Specifications ................................................................................................... 1

1.0 Overview........................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Unpacking and Inspection of the Instrument and Accessories .................... 2

2.0 Safety ................................................................................................................ 2


2.1 Symbols Used In the MicroTSCM........................................................ 2

3.0 Theory of Operation........................................................................................ 3


3.1 Treatment of Water for Clarification..................................................... 4
3.2 Charge Analysis .................................................................................... 5
4.0 Installation and Commissioning ................................................................... 6
4.1 Sample Point ........................................................................................ 6
4.2 Flow Rate .............................................................................................. 6
4.3 Sensor Mounting & Plumbing .............................................................. 7
4.4 Analyzer Mounting................................................................................ 8
4.5 Electrical Connections .......................................................................... 9
4.5.1 Power ........................................................................................ 9
4.5.2 Outputs Voltage & Current .................................................. 9
4.5.3 Alarm Contacts........................................................................ 10

5.0 Operation ...................................................................................................... 11


5.1 The Sensor/Sampler ........................................................................... 11
5.2 The Analyzer ....................................................................................... 11
5.3 The Graphing Screen........................................................................... 12
5.4 Menus ................................................................................................. 13

6.0 Calibration .................................................................................................... 14


6.1 Calibration Procedures ....................................................................... 14
6.2 EEPROM Programming Correction ................................................... 14

7.0 Automatic Control......................................................................................... 15


7.1 Optimization of Treatment Process..................................................... 15
7.2 PI Control Overview ........................................................................... 15
7.3 PI Control Procedure ........................................................................... 16
7.3.1 Process Band Calculation........................................................ 16
7.3.2 Entering the Control Parameters ............................................ 17
7.3.3 Manual Control ....................................................................... 17

21648 (07/09)
REV 2.4
Table of Contents (continued)

Section Page

8.0 Additional Features and Options ................................................................ 18


8.1 Sensor Gain Switch ............................................................................. 18
8.2 Remote Panel Meter ............................................................................ 18
8.3 Optional Flow Switch.......................................................................... 18

9.0 Routine Maintenance .................................................................................... 19


9.1 Preferred Method Chemical Cleaning.............................................. 19
9.2 Manual Cleaning ................................................................................. 19
9.3 Analyzer Fuse ..................................................................................... 20

10.0 Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 21
10.1 Diagnostic Chart ................................................................................. 21
10.2 Technical & Customer Assistance ...................................................... 21

11.0 Accessories and Replacement Parts List .................................................... 22

12.0 Definitions ..................................................................................................... 23

13.0 Warranty........................................................................................................ 24

MICROTSCM (07/09)
REV 2.4
Specifications
Measurement Range 10.0 SCU or ICu
Accuracy 1 % of Full Scale
Repeatability 1%
Linearity 1%
Resolution 0.01 SCU or ICu
Response Time 1 second
Analyzer Display Backlit Graphical LCD with trending
Alarms Two Programmable, One Sensor, 120-240VAC 2A Form C Relay
Analog Output Powered 4-20 mA, 1000 drive
Communications Port Optional RS-232 or RS-485
Flow Rate 6.0 9.5.0 L/min. (1.5 -2.5 gpm)
Flow Alarm Optional Float Switch
Operating Temperature 0C 50C (32F 122F)
Storage Temperature -20C 60C (-4F 140F)
Wetted Materials HDPE, PTFE, Stainless Steel, Neoprene, ABS
Standard Cable Length 7.62m (25 feet)
Max. Sensor to Analyzer 76.25 m (250 feet) Consult factory for lengths over 50 feet
Power Source 120 or 240 VAC, 50/ 60 Hz, 40VA
SCM Sensor Case Designed to meet IP 66 /NEMA 4X
Analyzer Regulatory CE Approved, ETL listed to UL 3111-1 &
Compliance And ETL Certified to CSA 22.2 No. 1010-1-92
Certifications
Shipping Weight Instrument: 9.5 kg (21 lbs.)
Calibration kit: 5.5 kg (12 lbs.)
Shipping Dimensions Instrument: 61 cm X 46 cm X 35cm (24 X 18 X 14)
Calibration kit: 41cm X 41 cm X 38 cm (16 X 16 X 15)
Warranty 1 Year from date of shipment

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 1


REV 2.4
1.0 Overview
The SCMStreaming Current Monitor allows for optimizing and control of dosing
coagulants used for clarification of water. Although the analyzer is capable of displaying
the units in either SCUs or ICu, this manual will always refer to SCU.

1.1 Unpacking and Inspection of the Instrument and Accessories


The table below indicates the items in the shipment.
Item Quantity
MicroTSCM Analyzer 1

SCM Sensor 1

Sample Chamber 1

Calibration Kit 1

Instruction Manual 1

Remove the instrument from the packing carton. Carefully inspect all items to ensure that
no visible damage has occurred during shipment. If the items received do not match the
order, please immediately contact the local distributor or the HF scientific Customer
Service Department.
2.0 Safety
This manual contains basic instructions that must be followed during the commissioning,
operation, care and maintenance of the instrument. The safety protection provided by this
equipment may be impaired if it is commissioned and/or used in a manner not described in
this manual. Consequently, all responsible personnel must read this manual prior to
working with this instrument.
In certain instances Notes, or helpful hints, have been highlighted to give further
clarification to the instructions. Refer to the Table of Contents to easily find specific
topics and to learn about unfamiliar terms.

2.1 Symbols Used In the MicroTSCM


Standard IEC symbols are used on the high voltage cover.

ISO 3864, No. B.3.6 Caution, risk of electric shock.


This symbol indicates that hazardous voltages may be present under this
cover

ISO 3864, No.B3.1 Caution refers to accompanying documents.


This symbol is a reminder to read the sections in the manual referring to the
electrical connections, and potential hazards.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 2


REV 2.4
3.0 Theory of Operation
In a liquid form, water molecules move around each other at a fast rate. One affect of this
fast movement is the ability to suspend matter. This phenomenon is called Brownian
Motion. It occurs when microscopic particles are maintained dispersed in suspension due
to their random bombardment by the fast movement of water molecules. Typical particles
found in raw water entering WTP have finely divided clay particles and organic matter
collectively called silt.

A second phenomenon which stabilizes the suspension is the surface charge of the
suspended matter. When a salt such as sodium chloride is place in water, complete
dissolution occurs. This system reaches a stable energy level when the individual sodium
and chloride ions (Na+ and Cl-) are separated in the water phase by being surrounded by
water molecules.

In the case of large pseudo salts, e.g. Aluminosilicates (clay), only partial dissolution takes
place due to incomplete breakdown of the crystal to individual ions. The structure of these
clays is similar to silica or sand except that random silicon atoms in the crystal are
replaced by aluminum atoms in the cage structure, causing the clay to swell and crack
between adjacent aluminum atoms in the crystal. Thus a clay particle is formed with a size
of less than 1 micron with a negative charge. This particle is small enough to be
maintained in suspension by Brownian Motion. The particles in the suspension repel each
other due to their surface charge, preventing them from coming together and
agglomerating, or flocking to form a larger particle, which would settle out. The result is
an energetically stable system and is the reason why the particles remain dispersed.

The counter ions (say sodium for the sake of argument) are separated from the large cage
structure because they are dissolved in the water. Clay particles have a negative charge
associated with it, while the counter ions, typically cat-ions (or positively charged ions)
are dispersed in the water phase.

In the case of most naturally occurring substances, the larger ion, when in suspension, has
a negative net charge (anionic). The smaller, counter ion is positive (cationic). The
residual charge of the larger particles is negative, which causes them to repel each other,
preventing them from forming agglomerates. The size of the particles never becomes large
enough to settle out, so they remain dispersed in suspension.

This phenomenon creates an energetically stable system. In order to cause the suspended
particles to agglomerate and settle out, the energy of the system must be upset. There are
numerous mechanical means to accomplish this, but the addition of chemical flocking
agents to the suspension, drastically reduces the time and is far more efficient.

Chemical additives perform two functions, charge neutralization & bridging. Both of these
techniques allow the small particles to floc and grow sufficiently that Brownian motion
can no longer support them. Due to the high density of the particle, flocs will form and
settle as fine sludge.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 3


REV 2.4
Additive Chemicals
+
+
-
- + +
+
+ +
- -
- + + + -
- - +
- - +
-
- + + -
+ - -
+ - - -
+
-
+ - + - +
+ + +
+
- +
+ -
+ - +
+ +
+
+ -
- - +
-
+ +
+ + +
-
+
+
- +
-
- - - -
Contaminant Particles
+ + -
-
+
+
+ -
-
+
+

1. Charge Neutralization 2. Bridging

Figure 1: Effects of Chemicals

3.1 Treatment of Water for Clarification


Most water treatment chemicals consist of a cationic (positively charged) chemical e.g.
aluminum salts, ferric salts, polyamines or cationic polyacrylamides, some of which have
the cationic part tagged on to a long polymer chain. As stated earlier, raw water entering
the WTP is an energetically stable system of suspended particles with a net negative
charge. Cationic chemicals are added to bring the charge to neutral.

Before the development of Streaming Current technology, the best way to determine the
optimum dosage has been the jar test method. The jar test involves taking a representative
sample of the water being treated and placing it in several jars. Different amounts of
clarifying chemicals are added to each jar; stirred and comparing the clarity of the water in
the different jars. Jar tests are time consuming and it is difficult to reproduce the
conditions of the WTP in a jar. The tests can take several hours rendering them useless
when plant personnel are really responding to rapid changes in water quality. A typical
curve of Turbidity vs. Chemical dosage is shown in Figure 3.
Some considerations when treating the water are the rate of floc formation, the size of the
floc formed, how fast the floc settles, and the clarity of the final settled and filtered water.

Other techniques exist, such as a dosing curve, which indicates a recommended dosage for
a given water turbidity. This is generally built up over years of dosing experience with the
water, but has the disadvantage that turbidity caused by extremely small particles requires
a higher dosage than that caused by larger particles, and therefore can only be adapted for
use with known type turbidity on any given water.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 4


REV 2.4
TURBIDITY

CHEMICAL DOSAGE ppm


Figure 3: Turbidity vs Dosage
3.2 Charge Analysis
Charge analysis is the measurement of the electro kinetic charge of a solution due to the
presence of charged particles. The electro kinetic charge can be measured by a number of
different methods.

1. Applied electric field


Measurement: The relative mobility of the solid or liquid phase.

This is the first method developed for calculating the Zeta Potential. The motion of
charged particles under the influence of an electric field was observed and the potential
required to achieve a certain amount of particle mobility was measured.

A cell consisting of two flat plates separated by approximately 0.1 mm and having an
electrode at each end of the cell is filled with water containing suspended matter. When an
electrical potential is applied to the electrodes, the particles can be observed to drift
toward one of the electrodes. The Zeta Potential is calculated from the measured speed of
particle drift.

2. Induced Electrical Potential


Measurement: The potential developed as the result of forced movement of particles in the
solution.
This is the method used by the MicroTSCM. Continuous sample water is directed into an
annulus, inside which a displacement piston oscillates vertically at a fixed frequency. This
action causes the liquid to move between the two stainless steel electrodes. The suspended
particles are absorbed onto the walls under the action of Van der Waals and electrostatic
forces. As the sample is moved rapidly back and forth, mobile counter ions surrounding
the colloids are sheared near the surface of the walls and moved past the electrodes. The
resultant A.C. signal or Streaming Current, proportional to charge density, is electronically
processed and displayed.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 5


REV 2.4
4.0 Installation and Commissioning
4.1 Sample Point
Careful consideration must be given to where in the system the sample will be taken.
Streaming current monitoring requires sampling of the raw water after the introduction of
coagulant. It is critical that that the sample point is far enough from the dosage point to
ensure good mixing. The sample point should be at least 10 pipe diameters away from the
dosing point to ensure ample mixing.

Equally important is the lag time from when a change in dosage occurs to when it shows
up at the sensor. If the sample point is too far from the dosing point, it will take too long
for changes to reach the sensor and control of the loop will not be possible. A lag time not
greater than 10 minutes is recommended.

Figure 3: Typical Installation

4.2 Flow Rate


The absolute minimum flow required is 6 liters per minute (1.5 gpm). The sample is
designed to handle flow rates of up to 10 liters per minute (2.5 gpm). Run the flow as
close to the maximum as possible without overflowing the sample chamber.

Note: The sample flow must be free of large shells or other debris that might clog
the orifices or cause damage to the sensor. Supplying an adequate flow free of
debris is the responsibility of the installer.

Drains MUST be routed to a suitable drain. DO NOT reintroduce this water


back into the process stream.

Suggestion: If meeting the minimum flow rate may be a problem, the optional flow alarm
may be required. HF Catalog #19886. See section 8.3.
To prevent large debris from entering the sample chamber, a 40 mesh screen
strainer is recommended.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 6


REV 2.4
4.3 Sensor Mounting & Plumbing
Locate the sensor as close to the sampling point as possible to reduce lag time. A site that
is protected from the elements (sun, rain etc.) is preferred, but the sensor is rated for use
under most outdoor conditions. The sample chamber is designed to be mounted with
diameter bolts. The sensor does not get firmly mounted, but just sits on top of the sample
pot. A light shield protects the clear sample pot cover & helps to prevent algae growth.
Refer to the diagram below for mounting dimensions.

SENSOR ELECTRONICS

THE SENSOR DOES NOT


GET MOUNTED TO THE
WALL. IT INSERTS INTO
THE SAMPLE CHAMBER
AND RESTS ON THE 4
RUBBER BUMBERS.

STREAMING CURRENT MONITOR

LIGHT SHIELD

THE LIGHT SHIELD IS USED


TO PREVENT ALGAE
GROWTH INSIDE THE SAMPLE CHAMBER COVER REAR VIEW OF ENCLOSURE
SAMPLE CHAMBER. 7.09 in 7.75 in.
180 mm 197mm

9.41 in.
10.00 in
239mm
254 mm

1/4 in. (6.35mm) MOUNTING


HOLE (4 PLACES)
NOTES:
OVER-FLOW DRAIN 3/4"
-THE INSTRUMENT REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 6 AND A MAXIMUM OF HOSE BARB
10 LITERS PER MINUTE CONSTANT FLOW.

-THE DRAIN MUST FLOW FREELY TO AN OPEN DRAIN. ANY


BACKPRESSURE MAY CAUSE THE SAMPLE CHAMBER TO MAIN DRAIN
3/4" HOSE BARB
OVERFLOW.

-THE HOSE BARBS MAY BE REMOVED FOR DIRECT PVC PIPE


CONNECTIONS. INLET WATER 3/4"
HOSE BARB

Figure 4: Sensor/Sample Chamber Mounting

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 7


REV 2.4
4.4 Analyzer Mounting
The analyzer is not weather tight and this must be taken into consideration during site
selection. The analyzer provides the control outputs via 4-20 mA and alarms. It is
recommended that the analyzers be mounted in a location for easy viewing and keypad
access. The analyzer can be flipped on its mount to gain access to the electrical
connections.

Please refer to the drawing below for mounting dimensions and hole location.

Figure 5: Analyzer Mounting

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 8


REV 2.4
4.5 Electrical Connections
All of the electrical connections to the instrument are made at the termination area which
is located in the back of the analyzer under the access cover. Refer to Figure 6 carefully as
the wire colors do not follow the actual PCB screen printing. For easy access, loosen the
two clamping knobs and rotate the instrument upside down. Remove the access cover.

Figure 6: Analyzer Electrical Connections


4.5.1 Power
Note: Only qualified electricians should be allowed to perform the installation of the
instrument as it involves a line voltage that could endanger life.
The power requirements for the analyzer are 40VA at 120 or 240 VAC. The voltage is set
at the factory based on the shipping destination; however the setting should be checked
prior to power connection.
To change the voltage, the fuse cartridge must be removed and rotated. The voltage is
indicated by the two arrows that point toward each other. A flat bladed screwdriver
inserted into the slot provided may be used to remove the fuse cartridge. See the Figure 11
in section 9.3.
4.5.2 Outputs -Voltage & Current
The analyzer can be set to output either voltage or 4-20 mA. This selection is made in the
DISPLAY PARAMETERS menu of the analyzer.
Use twisted pair shielded cable 22AWG-14 AWG for the voltage or current outputs. Tie
the shield at the recorder end only. Do not connect the shield at the analyzer.
The voltage connections are made at J6 as shown below:

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 9


REV 2.4
Terminal J6 Connection Purpose Impedance
Terminal 1 0-10V 50K ohm or greater
Terminal 2 0-1V 5K ohm or greater
Terminal 3 0-100 mV 500 ohms or greater
Terminal 4 Common N/A

The 4-20 mA connection is made at J5. Terminal 1 is positive, Terminal 2 is negative. The
recorder load may be up to 1000 ohms.
Galvanic isolation may be achieved by removing the jumper at J13. This procedure will
require the removal of the entire rear cover assembly.

4.5.3 Alarm Contacts


Connections can be made to the two user settable alarms and the sensor alarm at the
terminal block labeled ALARMS.
Note: these alarms are fail safe and will revert to an alarm condition in the event of no
power being applied to the analyzer.
The maximum alarm contact ratings are 250VAC @ 5.0A. Ensure that loads do not
exceed these ratings.
As indicated on the PCB, the following are terminal blocks:
J1 Alarm 1
J2 Alarm 2
J3 Alarm 3
In all cases the following connections apply:
Terminal 1: Normally Closed (N.C)
Terminal 2: Normally Open (N.O.)
Terminal 3: Common (C)
Do not use wire larger than #14 AWG as the terminal blocks will not accept it.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 10


REV 2.4
5.0 Operation
The SCM system consists of three major components, The Sensor, the Sample Chamber
and the Analyzer.

5.1 The Sensor/Sample Chamber


The sensor module sits on top of the sample chamber, with the probe end below the water
level. The sample chamber has three valves to adjust the flow:
The inlet should be adjusted such that there is always a sample present. A lack of
a sample will cause premature wear in the cell and piston.
The main drain needs to be adjusted open as much as possible to allow the larger
particulates to drain while the sample water is measured.
The overflow valve is usually connected to the main drain and is left fully open.
Its purpose is to keep the sample chamber from overflowing.
To prevent back flow and allow proper draining it is important that both drains are left
open to the atmosphere and kept at short as possible.

If heavy particulates can be present in the water it is important to install a 40 mesh strainer
before the inlet. The flow should also be kept low to allow large sand and larger debris to
fall to the bottom of the sample chamber and drain, without causing harm to the sensor.

The sample chamber has a cover to reduce algae growth. This cover may be easily
removed for service.

5.2 The Analyzer


Detail is not provided on individual menus as most are self explanatory. Notes are used,
where needed to bring attention to important information.

There are a few analyzer keys which have special purposes as described below.

This key resets the alarms after an alarm condition has been met. A screen
display of the alarm will continue until the alarm condition is relieved.
Alarms will also reset themselves without intervention if instrument
reading returns to a non- the alarm condition.

The Enter/Menu key is used to either invoke the Main Menu while in the
graphing screen or to return to the previous menu.

These two buttons are used to modify values or to scroll through possible
selections.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 11


REV 2.4
5.3 The Graphing Screen
Shown below in Figurer 7 is the main graphing screen. The numbers are used to identify
various features.
1. The larger number area shows the current reading and units used.
2. The graph time base. Options are 8 or 24 hours and can be set in the Display
Parameters Menu.
3 & 4. The upper and lower display limits. These are settable in the Display Parameters
Menu. Please note that these settings also affect the 4-20 mA /Voltage range.
5 & 6. Alarms 1&2. These can be set in the Alarms Setup Menu. These will flash on the
graphing screen if in an alarm condition.
7 & 8. Current time & date. This can be set in the Monitor Setup Menu.
9. Streaming current graph.

Figure 7: Analyzer Screen

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 12


REV 2.4
5.4 Menus
The following flow chart can be referred to for the menu structure.

Figure 8: Menu Flow Chart

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 13


REV 2.4
6.0 Calibration
The MicroTSCM has been calibrated at the factory, however to ensure accuracy it is
recommended that the instrument be calibrated prior to being placed online. Long term
drift may occur in this instrument and HF scientific recommends calibration every three
months.
To facilitate the initial calibration, a calibration kit, Part # 19922 is supplied with this
instrument. When prepared according to the included instructions a +5.30 SCU Cationic
calibration solution is produced. Allow this solution to stand for one hour prior to use.
In preparation for calibration ensure that previously operated sensors are rinsed with, and
then operated in, clean water, for several minutes.
6.1 Calibration Procedures
Place the sensor in the Cationic Standard and allow it to stand for about 15 minutes.
Ensure that the gain switch is set to OFF. See section 8.1

On the Analyzer ensure that the Offset Level is set to 0.00 and the signal averaging is
turned OFF. To calibrate, on the Analyzer, go to Sensor Setup Extended Setup Full
Scale Cal. Cal Time. The S key will initiate the calibration, which will take 60
seconds.

At the completion of the calibration, ensure that the reading is +5.10 to +5.50 SCU. If the
reading appears unstable initiate another calibration. If the +5.30 SCU calibration value is
not achievable, refer to section 6.2.
Rinse the sensor with clean water prior to returning to service.

As a check, an Anionic solution can be made using a 100mg/l dishwater detergent


solution. An acceptable reading would be -4.0 to -6.0 SCU.
Note: Do not attempt to calibrate on an Anionic solution.

6.2 EEPROM Programming Correction


If the calibration in the Cationic solution does not achieve a reading of +5.10 to +5.50
SCU, the EEPROM has probably lost the storage value and will need to be reprogrammed.
This will need to be performed at the sensor while operating in the calibration solution.
Remove the sensor cover by loosening the four corner captive fasteners. Inside locate a
small DIP switch with four white sliders labeled SW4. Above this switch are two push
buttons labeled SW2 and SW3. On the DIP switch flip the slider labeled 3 up. The
analyzer should display +5.30. If it does not adjust the value with the push buttons; SW2
will increase the value (UP) SW3 will decrease the value (DOWN). Adjust until the
Analyzer reads exactly +5.30 SCU. Flip the slider on the DIP switch down to store the
adjustment.
Attempt another calibration from the Analyzer as in section 6.1. If the correct calibration
values are still not achievable, call HF scientific Technical Service Department for
assistance.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 14


REV 2.4
7.0 Automatic Control
This section describes the use of the SCM to control the process. It is recommended that a
review of section 4.1 (sample point) is made to ensure correct installation.

7.1 Optimization of Treatment Process


Prior to turning control over to the SCM, it is crucial to optimize coagulant dosing. The
optimum point is obtained when the minimum coagulant can be fed that produces the
desired results for any particular treatment process. This should be done slowly and in
steps.

Step 1: Track the water quality parameters over the course of several days to establish a
base line of data from which to measure acceptable water quality.
Suggestion: The Installation Evaluation format the back of this manual is a tool that can
be used to track water quality parameters.
Step 2: After the base line of acceptable water quality has been reached, reduce the
coagulant dosage by 5% and closely monitor the water quality.
Step 3: Continue reducing the dosage in 5% increments until there is a detectable
reduction in water quality. Increase the dosage from this point by 5% and
continue monitoring for another hour.
Step 4: Record the SCU value on the instrument as this will be the optimized set point
(SP) for operating the plant.

Note: There may be a different set point for extreme variations in raw water quality or
demand on the system e.g. winter versus summer.

7.2 PI Control Overview


The MicroTSCM can be incorporated into an existing control scheme using the 4-20mA
or serial outputs. Plant control can also be achieved using the optional Proportional
Integral feature included in the MicroTSCM analyzer (HF Catalog # 19550 only).

When the instrument is used to automatically control coagulant dosing, it monitors the
process value (PV) for a change in charge value and then adjusts the dosage up or down to
achieve the predetermined set point (SP). Using a control algorithm or process calculation,
the analyzer determines the pump speed that is required to keep the PV and SP values the
same, which is the function of any closed loop control system.

When placed under automatic control, the instrument performs the same tasks that an
operator would be required to make. An operator adjusts the dosage level, allows time to
account for mixing and then checks the process for the desired change. Additional changes
to the dosage level are made as required. Under automatic control, the instrument
constantly monitors the process value and makes adjustments as needed to maintain the
process reading at the set point.

In order to put the plant under automatic control, it is required to provide some basic
information to the analyzer that describes how the system responds to changes. The
variables that need to be determined are the Proportional Band and the Integral Time. The
Proportional Band tells the instrument what change in Streaming Current to expect for a
MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 15
REV 2.4
given change in coagulant dosing. The Integral Time tells the instrument how long it will
take to fully realize the effects of a change in coagulant dosing.

7.3 PI Control Procedure


The assumption is that the wiring between the MicroTSCM analyzer and the dosing pump
has been installed. The following procedure is recommended to determine the correct
Proportional - Integral (PI) values for any particular system. The MicroTSCM analyzer is
used to slow down the control loop to prevent overdosing of coagulant. A calculation
based on test data determines the Proportional Band or P. Band and is the final value that
will be entered into the analyzer. A hypothetical example of the procedure will be used to
demonstrate the calculation of these values. These values will need to be determined for
any particular system and can be plugged into the following equations to determine the
appropriate analyzer settings.
Steps:
1. Ensure the plant is operating at a steady SCU reading with a fairly constant flow
rate. Record this SCU value.
2. Adjust the dosing pump to give a 10% increasing dosing output.
3. Start timing when the change was made (a stopwatch is helpful).
4. Monitor the MicroTSCM and stop timing when the SCU value has changed and
leveled off.
5. Record this time period in seconds. This is the Integral Time setting.
6. Record the new SCU value when the change has fully leveled off.

Figure 9: Effect of Dosing Change

7.3.1 Proportional Band Calculation


For our hypothetical example, the cause of change was the 10% increase in pump output
i.e. 10% more coagulant was dosed into the water. Due to the requirement to mix the
coagulant with the carrier water and move it through the volume of the sample pot, we
observed a time lag. The total time from when the change was made to when the full
effect was noticed was 100 seconds. This will be entered later as the Integral Time (INT.
TIME). The SCU reading changed was from -2.5 SCU to -2.0 SCU; a change of 0.5 SCU.
MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 16
REV 2.4
Convert the effected change in SCU to a percentage. Since the instrument always operates
in a range of +10 SCU to -10 SCU, the range is 20 SCU.
% effect = Effect X 100
Range 1
Then calculate the proportion band or PB.

PB = % Effect X 100
% Cause 1
In our example calculating the Proportional Band or P. Band with a 10% change (cause):
% effect = 0.5 SCU X 100 = 2.5%
20.0 SCU 1

PB = 2.5% X 100 = 25%


10% 1
To prevent overshoot, it is desirable to slow the control loop down a little more. To do this
the PB is multiplied by 1.5.
In our example:
PB = 25% X 1.5 38%
Once the control parameters are set into the analyzer and the dosing pump has been set,
the SP may need to be adjusted to account for seasonal change, but other than routine
maintenance and monitoring, no other adjustments should be required.

7.3.2 Entering the Control Parameters


The next step is to enter the control parameters into the MicroTSCM analyzer. To do this,
follow the steps:
1. Press /Menu to enter the Main Menu screen.
2. Press F1 (Sensor Setup) to enter the Sensor Setup screen.
3. Press F4 (Extended Setup) to enter the Extended Setup screen.
4. Press F2 (PID Analyzer) to enter the PID Analyzer screen.
5. At F1 (Mode) toggle the highlighted setting to AUTO using the STbuttons.
6. Press F3 (Set Point) adjust the Set Point (from section 7.1) using the STbuttons.
7. Press F4 (P. BAND) adjust value using the STbuttons (in our example 38.00).
8. Press F4 again (INT. TIME) adjust value using the STbuttons (in our example 100).
9. Press /Menu four times to return to the graphic monitoring screen.

7.3.3 Manual Control


To operate the system in manual mode, follow the steps 1-4 above, on step 5 use the
STbuttons to adjust the setting to MANUAL. Select F2 and a new setting called
MANUAL OVERRIDE will show. Adjust the value using the STbuttons. A +10 will
increase the pump speed by 10% and -10 will decrease pump speed by 10%. Please note
that the speed change may not be representative of dosing rate.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 17


REV 2.4
8.0 Additional Features and Options
8.1 Sensor Gain Switch
The gain toggle switch is mounted on the side of the sensor housing. The purpose of the
gain switch is to increase the magnitude of the sensors response. The gain switch can be
used in applications where little response is noted to changes in coagulant dosing. When
deciding to use the gain switch try the LOW setting first. If the response is not adequate,
use the HIGH setting. Always be sure this switch is turned to OFF (center position) when
calibrating.

As increasing the gain may over-range the reading, this feature should not be used unless
the reading is near zero.

8.2 Remote Panel Meter (Catalog # 19609)


The optional remote panel meter allows for remote indication of the SCU reading using
the 4-20 mA loop of the MicroTSCM. No external power is required, as the meter is
powered from the 4-20 mA source of the MicroTSCM analyzer.

8.3 Optional Flow Switch (Catalog # 19886L)


The flow switch is actually a float level switch. This is a factory installed option that will
alert an operator to a lack of flow. Once actuated a low flow condition will be indicated on
the screen as well as sending the 4-20 mA signal to ground and closing the alarm contacts.
There is a user setting in the analyzer to determine how long a lack of flow is required to
initiate an alarm.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 18


REV 2.4
9.0 Routine Maintenance
The most important maintenance procedure is to keep the sensor clean. The need for
cleaning is indicated when normal readings cannot be maintained. As a preventative
measure, cleaning intervals of 30 days or less is recommended. There are two
recommended cleaning methods.

9.1 Preferred Method Chemical Cleaning


Pour the SCM-1 cleaning solution (Catalog # 19402) into a suitable container, large
enough to immerse the lower 1/2 of the probe body. Run the sensor in this solution for
approximately 10 minutes. Then run the instrument for about 10 minutes in clean water.

For organic debris, replace the cleaning solution with a 5% chlorine solution.

Please refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet for proper handling of the SCM-1 cleaning
solution.

9.2 Manual Cleaning


In extreme conditions, the cell will have to be removed and cleaned with an abrasive
cleaning pad such as Scotch-Brite and a small brush.
Always rinse the probe out with clean water prior to starting.
1. To expose the cell and probe area, remove the bottom cap by turning it CCW (as
viewed from the bottom). Be careful to retain o-rings and seals.
2. Carefully pull the Cell out of the probe end, about 25-50 mm (1-2 inches)
3. Clean the inside of the cell with a stiff toothbrush and an abrasive pad such as
(Scotch-Brite). The aim is to remove all debris and polish all stainless steel
surfaces.
4. Rinse the cell with water.
5. Loosen the shaft-retaining nut with a 10mm wrench and from the bottom of the
sensor unscrew the probe.
6. Completely remove the nut then pull the probe out.
7. Polish the probe with the abrasive pad.
8. Reinstall the probe, adjusting the probe such that it misses the bottom of the cell by
1-2 mm, then snug the 10mm retaining nut. DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN.
9. Completely dry off any water that is in and around the cell cap, the bottom of the
cell and the O-rings and seals.
10. Reassemble the lower seals and install the cap very firmly by hand.
11. Rotate the motor slowly by hand to ensure the probe does not hit the cell bottom. If
there appears to be any contact adjust the probe up slightly.
12. If the probe does not rotate freely inside the cell, check for obstructions. This
condition will cause premature motor wear.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 19


REV 2.4
Figure 10: Sensor Exploded View

9.3 Analyzer Fuse


The analyzer fuse located in a cartridge on the cord
receptacle in the back of the instrument. To gain access,
remove the four access cover screws and remove the
power cord. Insert a screwdriver into the slot and pry to
remove the cartridge. Be certain to match the desired
voltage with the indication arrow when reinserting the
cartridge.

Figure 11: Fuse


MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 20
REV 2.4
10.0 Troubleshooting
10.1 Diagnostic Chart
Symptom Solutions
Analyzer Display Not Lit. 1. Make sure the unit is plugged in and turned on.
2. Make certain that the power source is providing the
correct voltage.
3. Make sure the analyzer is set for the correct voltage.
4. Check analyzer fuse.

Sensor probe not moving 1. Check the interconnect cable connection at the sensor.
2. Check the wiring of the interconnect cable on the back
of the analyzer and inside the sensor.
3. Check to ensure the probe is not jammed.

Display Response is Slow 1. Select a lower Signal Averaging period.


2. Separation between dosing and sample points too great.

Readings Different than expected 1. Sensor requires cleaning.


2. Sensor requires calibration.
3. Check Probe and Cell for wear. Replace parts as
required.

Unable to Achieve 5.3 SCU after 1. Manually reprogram calibration as described in section
Calibration 6.2 EEPROM Programming Correction.

Sensor Alarm Indication on 1. Check that sensor is operating correctly.


Analyzer 2. Check wiring connections at both the analyzer and the
sensor.

Reading Fluctuate, Unstable 1. Incomplete mixing of coagulant with sample water.


2. Sensor and or sample chamber require cleaning.
3. Check coagulate dosing operation.

Reading Doesnt Change with a 1. Sensor may require cleaning.


Change in Dosing 2. Check sample flow to sample chamber.
3. Ensure complete coagulant mix with water.

10.2 Technical and Customer Assistance


If for any reason assistance is needed regarding this instrument please do not hesitate to
contact either the HF scientific Service Department or the HF scientific Customer Service
Department.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 21


REV 2.4
11.0 Accessories and Replacement Parts List
The items shown below are recommended accessories and replacement parts.

Accessory Catalog Number

Cleaning and Descaling Solution 19402


Optical Isolated RS-485 Interface Kit 20519
RS-232 Interface Kit 19861
Flow Alarm 19886
Calibration Kit 19922
Interconnect Cable 7.6 meter (25 Ft.) 22480
Operating & Maintenance Manual 21648

To order any accessory or replacement part, please contact the HF scientific Customer
Service Department. If for any reason technical assistance is needed regarding this
instrument, please do not hesitate to contact the HF scientific Service Department.
HF scientific
3170 Metro Parkway
Fort Myers, Florida 33916-7597
Phone: (239) 337-2116
Fax: (239) 332-7643
Email: HFinfo@Watts.com
www.hfscientific.com

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 22


REV 2.4
12.0 Definitions

Anionic: Negative charged ions.

Automatic Control: Placing the control of the dosing pumps under the control of the
Streaming current monitor. The Optional PI controller is
recommended.

Brownian Motion: A phenomenon which occurs when microscopic particles are


suspended in a solution due to their random bombardment by the
fast movement of water molecules.

Cationic: Positive charged ions.

ICu: Ion Charge unit. 1 ICu is approximately equal to 1 mA of charge.


1 ICu = 1 SCU.

Ion Charge
Analyzer: Another name for a Streaming Current Monitor.

PI Control: Proportional Integral Control .A process control algorithm that


allows for a faster, tighter control.

PID Control: Proportional Integral Differential Control. A higher level control


algorithm than PI control, but not required in Streaming Current
applications.

Silt: A collective of finely divided clay particles and organic matter


suspended in water.

Zeta Potential: The charge potential required to induce particle mobility when
placed under the influence of an electric current.

SCU: Steaming current unit. 1 SCU = 1ICu.

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 23


REV 2.4
13.0 Warranty
HF scientific, as vendor, warrants to the original purchaser of this instrument that it will be
free of defects in material and workmanship, in normal use and service, for a period of one
year from date of delivery to the original purchaser. HF scientifics, obligation under this
warranty is limited to replacing, at its factory, the instrument or any part thereof. Parts,
which by their nature are normally required to be replaced periodically, consistent with
normal maintenance, specifically reagent, desiccant, sensors, electrodes, tubing and fuses
are excluded. Also excluded are accessories and supply type items.
Original purchaser is responsible for return of the instruments, or parts thereof, to HF
scientifics factory. This includes all freight charges incurred in shipping to and from HF
scientifics factory.
HF scientific is not responsible for damage to the instrument, or parts thereof, resulting
from misuse, environmental corrosion, negligence or accident, or defects resulting from
repairs, alterations or installation made by any person or company not authorized by HF
scientific.
HF scientific assumes no liability for consequential damage of any kind, and the original
purchaser, by placement of any order for the instrument, or parts thereof, shall be deemed
liable for any and all damages incurred by the use or misuse of the instruments, or parts
thereof, by the purchaser, its employees, or others, following receipt thereof.
Carefully inspect this product for shipping damage, if damaged, immediately notify the
shipping company and arrange an on-site inspection. HF scientific cannot be responsible
for damage in shipment and cannot assist with claims without an on-site inspection of the
damage.
This warranty is given expressly and in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied.
Purchaser agrees that there is no warranty on merchantability and that there are no other
warranties, expressed or implied. No agent is authorized to assume for HF scientific, any
liability except as set forth above.
HF scientific, inc.
3170 Metro Parkway
Fort Myers, Florida 33916-7597
Phone: (239) 337-2116
Fax: (239) 332-7643
Email: HFinfo@Watts.com
Website:www.hfscientific.com

MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 24


REV 2.4
HF scientific

Installation Evaluation
Use this worksheet to help establish a baseline for optimal dosing. Readings every 6 hours
are recommended.

Date pH pH After Turbidity Turbidity Color Color After Target Flow


and Before Clarification Before After Before Clarification Dosing Rate
Time Dosing Clarification Clarification Dosing Level (gpd)

Additional Notes:

You might also like